North Commons-140 Olander Dr-specifications-2019
NORTH COMMONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA
DSA PROJECT No. 17031.01
PROJECT MANUAL
Progress Set
August 2019
The Community Builders
185 Dartmouth Street
Boston, MA 02116
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
No. Section Title
TABLE OF CONTENTS 000002 - 1
COVER
000001 PROJECT MANUAL COVER
000002 TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
DIV. 0 PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
001160 INVITATION TO BID
002000 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
003200 GEOTECHNICAL DATA
004130 BID FORM
DIV. 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
011000 SUMMARY
012100 ALLOWANCES
012300 ALTERNATES
012500 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
012900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES
013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
013200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013310 ELECTRONIC DATA REQUEST AND REL. FORM
014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
014200 REFERENCES
015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
015240 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
016350 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
016360 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM
017000 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017810 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
017820 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
018200 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
DIV. 2 EXISTING CONDITIONS (not used)
DIV. 3 CONCRETE
033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
035410 GYPSUM UNDERLAYMENT
DIV. 4 MASONRY
047200 CAST STONE
048120 MANUFACTURED STONE VENEER
DIV. 5 METALS
055000 METAL FABRICATIONS
055210 PIPE AND TUBE RAILING
DIV. 6 WOOD AND PLASTICS
060670 PLASTIC AND METAL SURFACING PANELS
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
No. Section Title
TABLE OF CONTENTS 000002 - 2
061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY
061600 SHEATHING
061900 PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES
062020 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
064170 COUNTERTOPS AND WALLSPLASHES
066150 SOLID-SURFACE-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS
066300 PLASTIC FABRICATIONS
DIV. 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
072100 BUILDING INSULATION
072750 WEATHER BARRIERS
074600 FIBER CEMENT CLADDING AND EXTERIOR TRIM
075430 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING
076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
077200 ROOF ACCESSORIES
078410 FIRESTOPPING
079200 JOINT SEALANTS
DIV. 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS
080671 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
082110 WOOD DOORS AND FRAMES
084110 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
085350 POLYMER WINDOWS
087100 DOOR HARDWARE
087113 AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS
DIV. 9 FINISHES
091110 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING
092500 GYPSUM BOARD
093100 CERAMIC TILE
096510 RESILIENT FLOOR TILE
096520 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING
096530 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES
096700 FLUID APPLIED FLOORING
099110 EXTERIOR PAINTING
099120 INTERIOR PAINTING
DIV. 10 SPECIALTIES
102600 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION
104310 SIGNS
105220 FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS
105230 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
105500 POSTAL SPECIALTIES
106700 STORAGE SHELVING
108000 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
DIV. 11 EQUIPMENT
114510 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
No. Section Title
TABLE OF CONTENTS 000002 - 3
DIV. 12 FURNISHINGS
122400 WINDOW SHADES
123560 RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK
124840 FLOOR MATS
DIV. 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (not used)
DIV. 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS (not used)
DIV. 21 FIRE PROTECTION
210000 FIRE PROTECTION
DIV. 22 PLUMBING
220000 PLUMBING
DIV.23 MECHANICAL
230000 MECHANICAL
DIV. 26 ELECTRICAL
260000 ELECTRICAL
DIV. 28 ACCESS CONTROL
281500 ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE
DIV. 31 EARTHWORK
312000 DEMOLITION CLEARING AND GRUBBING
315001 EXCAVATION EARTHWORK FILLING AND GRADING
DIV. 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
321216 ASPHALT PAVING
321300 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE PAVING
322000 SITE IMPROVEMENTS
329200 SEEDING
329300 PLANTINGS
DIV. 33 UTILITIES
332000 WATER SERVICE
333000 SANITARY SEWER
334100 STORM DRAINAGE
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
No. Section Title
TABLE OF CONTENTS 000002 - 4
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
DOCUMENT 003200 - GEOTECHNICAL DATA
1.1 GEOTECHNICAL DATA
A. This Document with its referenced attachments is part of the Procurement and Contracting
Requirements for Project. They provide Owner's information for Bidders' convenience and are
intended to supplement rather than serve in lieu of Bidders' own investigations. They are made
available for Bidders' convenience and information, but are not a warranty of existing conditions.
This Document and its attachments are not part of the Contract Documents.
B. A geotechnical investigation report for the Project, prepared by O’Reily, Talbot & Okun
Engineering Associates, dated 07/06/18, will be provided to all Bidders.
C. Related Requirements:
1. Document 002000 "Instructions to Bidders" for the Bidder's responsibilities for
examination of Project site and existing conditions.
END OF DOCUMENT 003200
GEOTECHNICAL DATA 003200 – 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
GEOTECHNICAL DATA 003200 – 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
DOCUMENT 004130 - BID FORM
1.1 BID INFORMATION
A. Bidder: ____________________________________________________.
B. Project Name: North Commons
C. Project Location: Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA, 01060
D. Owner: The Community Builders
E. Architect: Davis Square Architects, Inc.
F. Architect’s Proj. No.: 17031.02
1.2 CERTIFICATIONS AND BASE BID
A. Base Bid: The undersigned Bidder, having carefully examined the Procurement and
Contracting Requirements, Conditions of the Contract, Drawings, Specifications, and all
subsequent Addenda, as prepared by Davis Square Architects and Architect's consultants,
having visited the site, and being familiar with all conditions and requirements of the Work,
hereby agrees to furnish all material, labor, equipment and services, including all scheduled
allowances, necessary to complete the construction of the above-named project, according to
the requirements of the Procurement and Contracting Documents, for the stipulated sum of:
1. Dollars
($ ).
2. The above amount may be modified by amounts indicated by the Bidder for "Alternates."
1.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES, ALTERNATES
A. See attached Document 004140 “Schedule of Values” for a more detailed breakdown of the
submitted bid.
1.4 TIME OF COMPLETION
A. The undersigned Bidder proposes and agrees hereby to commence the Work of the Contract
Documents on a date specified in a written Notice to Proceed to be issued by Architect, and
shall fully complete the Work within calendar days.
B. Bidders shall submit a draft construction schedule outlining major phases of work.
BID FORM 004130 – 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1.5 ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ADDENDA
A. The undersigned Bidder acknowledges receipt of and use of the following Addenda in the
preparation of this Bid:
1. Addendum No. 1, dated ____________________.
2. Addendum No. 2, dated ____________________.
3. Addendum No. 3, dated ____________________.
4. Addendum No. 4, dated ____________________.
1.6 CONTRACTOR'S LICENSE
A. The undersigned further states that it is a duly licensed contractor, for the type of work
proposed, in Northampton, Massachusetts, and that all fees, permits, etc., pursuant to
submitting this proposal have been paid in full.
1.7 BID PACKAGE
A. The following documents shall be submitted as the bid package:
1. This Document 004130 “Bid Form,” signed and with all blanks filled in.
2. Document 004140 “Schedule of Values,” with all blanks filled in, including Alternates and
Unit Prices.
3. A summary sheet of additional cost savings Alternates proposed by the bidder, with
estimated values.
4. Draft construction schedule.
5. A brief narrative outlining your approach to this project.
6. Resumes for all proposed Project personnel, including Project Manager and
Superintendent.
1.8 SUBMISSION OF BID
Respectfully submitted this day of , 20 .
Submitted by:
(name of bidding firm or corporation)
Authorized signature:
(handwritten signature)
Signed by:
(type or print name)
Title:
Street address:
BID FORM 004130 – 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
City, State, Zip:
Phone:
Email:
END OF DOCUMENT 004130
BID FORM 004130 – 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
BID FORM 004130 – 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 012100 - ALLOWANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances.
1. Certain items are specified in the Contract Documents by allowances. Allowances have
been established in lieu of additional requirements and to defer selection of actual
materials and equipment to a later date when direction will be provided to Contractor. If
necessary, additional requirements will be issued by Change Order.
B. Types of allowances include the following:
1. Lump-sum allowances.
2. Unit-cost allowances.
3. Quantity allowances.
1.3 SELECTION AND PURCHASE
A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise the Architect of the date when
final selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be
completed to avoid delaying the Work.
B. At Architect's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections.
Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work.
C. Purchase products and systems selected by Architect from the designated supplier.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the form
specified for Change Orders.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for
use in fulfillment of each allowance.
B. Submit time sheets and other documentation to show labor time and cost for installation of
allowance items that include installation as part of the allowance.
ALLOWANCES 012100 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
C. Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for other portions of
the Work.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate allowance items with other portions of the Work. Furnish templates as required to
coordinate installation.
1.7 LUMP-SUM, UNIT-COST, AND QUANTITY ALLOWANCES
A. Allowance shall include cost to Contractor of specific products and materials ordered by Owner
or selected by Architect under allowance and shall include taxes, freight, and delivery to Project
site.
B. Unless otherwise indicated, Contractor's costs for receiving and handling at Project site, labor,
installation, overhead and profit, and similar costs related to products and materials selected by
Architect under allowance shall be included as part of the Contract Sum and not part of the
allowance.
C. Unused Materials: Return unused materials purchased under an allowance to manufacturer or
supplier for credit to Owner, after installation has been completed and accepted.
1. If requested by Architect, retain and prepare unused material for storage by Owner.
Deliver unused material to Owner's storage space as directed.
1.8 ADJUSTMENT OF ALLOWANCES
A. Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, prepare a Change Order proposal based
on the difference between purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied by final measurement
of work-in-place where applicable. If applicable, include reasonable allowances for cutting
losses, tolerances, mixing wastes, normal product imperfections, and similar margins.
1. Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as part of the
allowance.
2. If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of
overhead costs and other margins claimed.
3. Submit substantiation of a change in scope of work, if any, claimed in Change Orders
related to unit-cost allowances.
4. Owner reserves the right to establish the quantity of work-in-place by independent
quantity survey, measure, or count.
B. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance
described in the Contract Documents, whether for the purchase order amount or Contractor's
handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit.
1. Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost
amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work has changed from
what could have been foreseen from information in the Contract Documents.
2. No change to Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher- or lower-
priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated.
ALLOWANCES 012100 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return
damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and
installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with
related work.
3.3 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES
A. Allowance No. 1: Include the sum of $15,000.00 for exterior and interior signage that is beyond
the scope for signage in spec section 104310 Signs.
B. Allowance No. 2: Include the sum of $50,000 for security system and key fob scope.
3.4 SCHEDULE OF UNIT PRICES
A. Unit Price No. 1: Additional duplex receptacle
B. Unit Price No 2: Additional GFI receptacle.
C. Unit Price No 3: Remove and dispose of unsuitable soils below established grades per cubic
yard.
D. Unit Price No 4: Compacted gravel to replace unsuitable soils or rock per cubic yard.
E. Unit Price No 5: Compacted gravel as structural fill to replace unsuitable soils or rock per cubic
yard.
F. Unit Price No 6: Furnish and place screened loam per cubic yard.
G. Unit Price No 7: Furnish and place concrete per cubic yard.
H. Unit Price No 8: Mass rock removal per cubic yard.
I. Unit Price No 9: Trench rock per cubic yard.
J. Unit Price No 10: Standard sprinkler head.
K. Unit Price No 11: Sidewall sprinkler head.
L. Unit Price No 12: Winter concrete hot water added.
ALLOWANCES 012100 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
M. Unit Price No 13: Winter concrete rental of ground thaw equipment, including fuel, labor, poly.
N. Unit Price No 14: Winter heat inside building for finishes.
END OF SECTION 012100
ALLOWANCES 012100 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 01230 - ALTERNATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined
in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if
Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be
completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described
in the Contract Documents.
1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the
Agreement.
2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract
Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the
Contract Sum.
1.4 PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate
work of the alternate into Project.
1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar
items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part
of alternate.
B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing,
of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred
for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated revisions to alternates.
C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.
D. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification
Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the
work described under each alternate.
ALTERNATES 012300 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES
A. Alternate No. 1: In lieu of the stainless steel backsplashes at the unit kitchens provide 2 inch x
4 inch white ceramic subway tile. The tile shall extend below the top edge of the free-standing
range and up to the bottom of the range hood at typical units. At accessible units, the tile shall
extend from the top of the countertop backsplash to the bottom of the range hood.
B. Alternate No. 2: In lieu of the factory standard drawer guides in section 123560.2.3 provide
heavy duty ball-bearing full-extension guides with a 220 lbs. rated load capacity at all kitchen
drawers.
C. Alternate No. 3: In lieu of the solid surface shower/tub surrounds in section 060670 provide tile
shower/tub surrounds per spec section 093100 and the A600 drawings.
D. Alternate No. 4: Provide a single, field-applied finish coat of exterior paint to the Fiber Cement
Siding.
END OF SECTION 012300
ALTERNATES 012300 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 012500 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing
Contract modifications.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 016350 "Substitution Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling
requests for substitutions made after the Contract award.
1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not
involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710,
"Architect's Supplemental Instructions."
1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS (PRs) AND PROPOSED CHANGE ORDERS (PCOs) / CHANGE
ORDER REQUESTS (CORs)
A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a description of proposed changes in
the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary,
the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. Architect will
use AIA Document G709, “Work Changes Proposal Request” or a similar form.
1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop
work in progress or to execute the proposed change.
2. Within 15 business days after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a PCO/COR
containing adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute
the change.
a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with
total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey
data to substantiate quantities.
b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of
trade discounts.
c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of
the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and
finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an
extension of the Contract Time.
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012500 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
e. Form: Use form acceptable to Architect.
B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the
Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a PCO/COR to Architect.
1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the
Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the
proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.
2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total
amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to
substantiate quantities.
3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade
discounts.
4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the
change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times,
and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the
Contract Time.
6. Comply with requirements in Section 01635 "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed
change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.
7. Form: Use form acceptable to Architect.
1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGE ORDERS
A. Allowance Adjustment: See Section 012100 "Allowances" for administrative procedures for
preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect actual costs of
allowances.
B. Unit-Price Adjustment: See Section 012700 "Unit Prices" for administrative procedures for
preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect measured
scope of unit-price work.
1.6 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
A. On Owner's approval of a PCO/COR, Contractor will issue a Change Order for signatures of
Architect, Owner, and Contractor on AIA Document G701.
1. Change Order may include multiple approved PCOs/CORs.
2. Change Order shall include approved PCOs/CORs as backup.
1.7 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE
A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on
AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a
change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.
1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It
also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the
Contract Time.
B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the
Construction Change Directive.
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012500 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary
to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 012500
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012500 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012500 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process
Applications for Payment.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 012100 "Allowances" for procedural requirements governing the handling and
processing of allowances.
2. Section 012500 "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for
handling changes to the Contract.
3. Section 012700 "Unit Prices" for administrative requirements governing the use of unit
prices.
4. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements
governing the preparation and submittal of Contractor's construction schedule.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract
Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's
Applications for Payment.
1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's
construction schedule.
1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms
and schedules, including the following:
a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets.
b. Submittal schedule.
c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction
schedule.
2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect and Owner at earliest possible date, but no
later than 30 after the Notice of Award and at least 14 days prior to the date for
commencement of the Work.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for
the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.
1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values:
a. Project name and location.
b. Name of Architect.
c. Architect's project number.
d. Contractor's name and address.
e. Date of submittal.
2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703.
3. Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the
following for each item listed:
a. Related Specification Section or Division.
b. Description of the Work.
c. Name of subcontractor.
d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator.
e. Name of supplier.
f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value.
g. Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-
hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent.
1) Labor.
2) Materials.
3) Equipment.
4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued
evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with Project
Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in
excess of five percent of the Contract Sum.
a. Include separate line items under Contractor and principal subcontracts forProject
closeout requirements in an amount totaling five percent of the Contract Sum and
subcontract amount.
5. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.
6. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where
Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated
and stored, but not yet installed.
a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If required,
include evidence of insurance.
7. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each
subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.
8. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each allowance.
Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by
measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine
quantities.
9. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete.
Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual
work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of
values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.
1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent
with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.
1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion,
and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.
B. Application for Payment Period: The period covered by each Application for Payment is one
month, ending on the last day of the month.
C. Payment Application Times: Submit a proposed schedule indicating dates for draft Applications
for Payment, Applications for Payment, and estimated value of each Application for Payment.
In general, schedule shall show draft Applications for Payments submitted at the second-to-last
progress meeting of each month and Applications for Payment submitted at the last progress
meeting of each month. This timing may vary somewhat depending on the relationship of
progress meetings to calendar days. Submit schedule to Architect and Owner for review.
D. Procedures: Contractor shall prepare a draft Application for Payment (a “Pencil Requisition”) at
a progress meeting. Architect, Owner, and Contractor will review the draft Application for
Payment at the meeting. Contractor will make the required revisions and resubmit the revised
Application for Payment at the following progress meeting for signature by Architect.
1. Provide one copy each for Owner, Contractor, and Architect. Provide additional copies
as required by Owner. Owner’s copy shall include waivers of lien and similar
attachments as required by Owner.
E. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 as form for
Applications for Payment.
F. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person
authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete
applications without action.
1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction
schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.
2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment, whether
or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at time of
Application for Payment.
3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before
last day of construction period covered by application.
4. Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner-requested project
acceleration.
G. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or
equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between
items stored on-site and items stored off-site.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, photographs of
stored materials showing labeling specific to this Project, and consent of surety to
payment, for stored materials.
2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices.
Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include
overhead and profit on stored materials.
3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following:
a. Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of previous
Applications for Payment.
b. Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous Application
for Payment and on or before date of current Application for Payment.
c. Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment and
remaining stored as of date of current Application for Payment.
H. Evidence of Subcontractor Payment: With each Application for Payment, submit memorandum
on Contractor’s letterhead indicating that all subcontractors and suppliers have been paid for
construction period covered by the previous application or provide other evidence as required
by Owner.
I. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or
coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:
1. List of subcontractors.
2. Schedule of values.
3. Contractor's construction schedule.
4. Submittal schedule.
5. List of Contractor's staff assignments.
6. Copies of building permits.
7. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance
of the Work.
8. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.
9. Performance and payment bonds.
10. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance.
J. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of
Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for
portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.
1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a
statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.
K. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final
Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted
and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:
1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.
2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof
that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.
3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.
4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims."
5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens."
6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment."
7. Evidence that claims have been settled.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of
date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed
responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.
9. Final liquidated damages settlement statement.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 012900
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 5
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 6
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. General coordination procedures.
2. Requests for Information (RFIs).
3. Project Web site.
4. Project meetings.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting
Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Section 017000 "Execution Requirements" for procedures for coordinating general
installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and
control points.
3. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract.
4. Section 018100 "General Commissioning Requirements" for coordinating the Work with
Owner's Commissioning Authority.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. RFI: Request from Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract
Documents.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each
portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a
special design. Include the following information in tabular form:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying
products.
2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract.
3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the
Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate
construction operations, included in different Sections, which depend on each other for proper
installation, connection, and operation.
1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where
installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before
or after its own installation.
2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and
accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures
required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees
at meetings.
1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their
Work is required.
C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative
procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of
the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Preparation of the schedule of values.
3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.
4. Delivery and processing of submittals.
5. Progress meetings.
6. Preinstallation conferences.
7. Project closeout activities.
8. Startup and adjustment of systems.
D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with
consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of
temporary utilities to minimize waste.
1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually
incorporated into, the Work. See other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that
are designated as Owner's property.
1.6 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)
A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the
Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.
1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor
with no response.
2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's
work or work of subcontractors.
B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or
interpretation and the following:
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1. Project name.
2. Project number.
3. Date.
4. Name of Contractor.
5. Name of Architect.
6. RFI number, numbered sequentially.
7. RFI subject.
8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.
9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.
11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the
Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.
12. Contractor's signature.
13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data,
Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe
items needing interpretation.
a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected
materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.
C. RFI Forms: AIA Document G716 or software-generated form with substantially the same
content as indicated above, acceptable to Architect.
1. RFIs and associated attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format,
submitted using the Architect’s Project Web Site.
D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond.
Allow five working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after
1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.
1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action, and time spent
by the Architect responding to such RFIs will be billed to the Contractor:
a. Requests for approval of submittals.
b. Requests for approval of substitutions.
c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods.
d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract
Documents.
e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.
f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.
g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.
2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case
Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.
3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the
Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to
Section 012500 "Contract Modification Procedures."
a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or
the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within five days of receipt of the RFI
response.
E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number.
Submit log weekly. Include the following:
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1. Project name.
2. Name and address of Contractor.
3. Name and address of Architect.
4. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn.
5. RFI description.
6. Date the RFI was submitted.
7. Date Architect's response was received.
F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response
to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within three days if Contractor
disagrees with response.
1.7 PROJECT WEB SITE
A. Use Architect's Project Web site for purposes of hosting and managing project communication
and documentation until Final Completion. Project Web site shall include the following
information:
1. RFIs submitted to the Architect.
2. RFI Responses by the Architect.
3. Submittals sent to the Architect.
4. Submittals returned to the Contractor.
5. Other correspondence as required.
1.8 PROJECT MEETINGS
A. Preconstruction Conference: Architect will schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference
before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15
days after execution of the Agreement.
1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants;
Contractor and its superintendent. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with
Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:
a. Tentative construction schedule.
b. Phasing.
c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items.
d. Designation of key personnel and their duties.
e. Lines of communications.
f. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
g. Procedures for RFIs.
h. Procedures for testing and inspecting.
i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
j. Distribution of the Contract Documents.
k. Submittal procedures.
l. Preparation of record documents.
m. Use of the premises.
n. Work restrictions.
o. Working hours.
p. Owner's occupancy requirements.
q. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.
r. Procedures for moisture and mold control.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
s. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns.
t. Construction waste management and recycling.
u. Parking availability.
v. Office, work, and storage areas.
w. Equipment deliveries and priorities.
x. Security.
y. Progress cleaning.
z. Fire protection plan for the construction period.
3. Minutes: Architect will record and distribute meeting minutes.
B. Progress Meetings: Architect will conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals at Project site
unless otherwise indicated.
1. Required Attendees: Owner (or a representative thereof), Architect, Contractor’s Project
Manager, Contractor’s Superintendent, and Clerk. All participants at the meeting shall be
familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review
other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as
appropriate to status of Project.
a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.
Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind
schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how
construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties
involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that
current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.
1) Review schedule for next period. Contractor shall submit a two-week look-
ahead schedule at each Progress meeting.
b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:
1) Status of submittals.
2) Status of correction of deficient items.
3) Field observations.
4) Status of RFIs.
5) Status of proposal requests.
6) Pending changes.
7) Status of Change Orders.
8) Pending claims and disputes.
3. Minutes: Architect will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present
and to parties requiring information.
C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each
construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.
1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or
affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and
installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect
of scheduled meeting dates.
2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the
particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 5
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
a. Contract Documents.
b. Options.
c. Related RFIs.
d. Related Change Orders.
e. Purchases.
f. Deliveries.
g. Submittals.
h. Schedule for timing to review mockups.
i. Possible conflicts.
j. Compatibility requirements.
k. Time schedules.
l. Weather limitations.
m. Manufacturer's written instructions.
n. Warranty requirements.
o. Compatibility of materials.
p. Acceptability of substrates.
q. Temporary facilities and controls.
r. Space and access limitations.
s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
t. Testing and inspecting requirements.
u. Installation procedures.
v. Coordination with other work.
w. Required performance results.
x. Protection of adjacent work.
y. Protection of construction and personnel.
3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including
required corrective measures and actions.
4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties
requiring information.
5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded.
Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the
Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 013100
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 6
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of
construction during performance of the Work, including the following:
1. Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Construction schedule updating reports.
3. Site condition reports.
4. Special reports.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 021900 “Payment Procedures” for submitting Application for Payment and Draw-
down schedules.
2. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports.
3. Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and
inspections.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring,
and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume
time and resources.
1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned
early start and finish times.
2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network.
3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.
B. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network
schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.
C. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.
D. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.
1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a
jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet
schedule milestones and Contract completion date.
2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the
early start of the successor activity.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely
affecting the planned Project completion date.
E. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of
an activity as scheduled.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:
1. PDF electronic file.
2. Paper copies.
B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule
for entire construction period.
C. Updated Construction Schedule: Submit with Applications for Payment.
D. Two-Week Look-Ahead Schedule: Submit at each progress meeting.
E. Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions.
F. Special Reports: Submit at time of unusual event.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts,
submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and
reports.
1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities
involved.
2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule
them in proper sequence.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice of Award to date of final
completion.
1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows
an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.
B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main
element of the Work. Comply with the following:
1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless
specifically allowed by Architect.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for long lead items and
major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule.
Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals,
purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.
3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in
Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times
in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule.
4. Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 10 days for startup and testing.
5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for
Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures
necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.
6. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 working days for completion
of punch list items and final completion.
C. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but
not limited to, the Notice of Award, Notice to Proceed, commencement of the Work, Substantial
Completion, and final completion.
D. Two-Week Look-Ahead Schedule: At each progress meeting, submit a summary schedule
indicating activities scheduled to occur in the following two weeks.
E. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days
behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means
by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to
working hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and
date by which recovery will be accomplished.
2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, Contractor's construction schedule at
least 30 days prior to the date established for commencement of the Work.
B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of
each week with a continuous vertical line.
1. Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship
of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the
following activities:
a. Preparation and processing of submittals.
b. Mobilization and demobilization.
c. Purchase of materials.
d. Delivery.
e. Fabrication.
f. Utility interruptions.
g. Installation.
h. Punch list and final completion.
i. Activities occurring following final completion.
2. Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim
completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with
Contract milestone dates.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
C. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its
submission, prepare a time-impact analysis to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change
on the overall project schedule.
D. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports
showing the following:
1. Identification of activities that have changed.
2. Changes in activity durations in workdays.
3. Changes in the critical path.
4. Changes in total float or slack time.
5. Changes in the Contract Time.
2.3 REPORTS
A. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and
the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for
Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with
recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.
2.4 SPECIAL REPORTS
A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day of an occurrence. Distribute
copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence.
B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at
Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report.
List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of
results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these
events are known or predictable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect
actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule concurrently with draft Application
for Payment.
B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors,
testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know
schedule responsibility.
1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.
2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in
the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their
assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction
activities.
END OF SECTION 013200
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural
requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 012900 "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and the
schedule of values.
2. Section 0132000 "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and
reports, including Contractor's construction schedule.
3. Section 01331 “Electronic Data Request and Release Form” for requesting electronic
files from Architect.
4. Section 017810 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record
Specifications, and record Product Data.
5. Section 017820 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and
maintenance manuals.
6. Section 018200 "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of
demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require
Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual
Specification Sections as "action submittals."
B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not
require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with
requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification
Sections as "informational submittals."
C. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and from
another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet protocols.
An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which internal
and external users are able to access files.
D. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems
used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent
fixed-layout document format.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates
required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing,
fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making
corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and
reviewing submittals required by those corrections.
1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and
Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Submittal: Submit at least 15 business days prior to the date established for
commencement of the work.
3. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:
a. Scheduled date for first submittal.
b. Specification Section number and title.
c. Submittal category: Action or informational.
d. Description of the Work covered.
e. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.
1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings will be
provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.
1. Architect will furnish Contractor digital data drawing files of the Contract Drawings for use
in preparing Shop Drawings.
a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital
data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings.
b. The Contract Drawings are available in AutoCAD format.
c. Contractor shall execute an Electronic Data Request and Release Form, as
included in this Project Manual.
d. Architect will furnish only those files specifically requested by the contractor, as
noted on the Electronic Data Request and Release Form.
e. Contractor shall pay the architect a formatting fee in the amount of fifty dollars
($50.00) for each drawing requested.
f. Architect will not furnish any digital data drawing files until after receipt of the
Electronic Data Request and Release Form and formatting fee.
B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
construction activities.
1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals,
and related activities that require sequential activity.
2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless
partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule.
3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification
Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.
4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so
processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for
coordination.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination
with other submittals until related submittals are received.
C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows.
Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the
Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of
the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.
1. Initial Review: Allow 15 business days for initial review of each submittal. Allow 5
additional business days if submittal requires review by the Architect’s consultants. Allow
additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will
advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.
2. Resubmittal Review: Allow same amount of time as indicated for initial review for review
of each resubmittal.
D. Submittal Format: Contractor may submit electronic submittals in PDF format (preferred
method) or paper copies.
1. If electronic submittals are used, name file with submittal number or other unique
identifier, including revision identifier.
2. If paper copies are used, comply with additional requirements listed in this section.
E. Transmittal: Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return without
review submittals received from sources other than Contractor. Transmittals shall include, at a
minimum, the following information:
1. Project name.
2. Date.
3. Name and address of Architect.
4. Name and address of Contractor.
5. Submittal number(s) and description(s).
F. Submittal Information: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal item for
identification.
1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.
2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record
Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.
3. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Name of Architect.
d. Name of Contractor.
e. Name of subcontractor.
f. Name of supplier.
g. Name of manufacturer.
h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.
1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a
hyphen, a sequential number, a hyphen, and the revision number (e.g.,
06100-001-0 for an initial submittal and 06100-001-1 for the first
resubmission).
i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
l. Other necessary identification.
G. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.
H. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on
Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than
those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the
Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification
information as related submittal.
I. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.
1. Note date and content of previous submittal.
2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of
revision.
3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action
stamp.
J. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,
fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of
construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
K. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final
action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by
individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification
Sections. Submit using one of the following methods:
1. Electronic Method (preferred): Post electronic submittals as PDF electronic files directly
to Architect's FTP site specifically established for Project.
a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an
electronic Project record document file.
2. Paper Method: Submit 3 paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated.
Submit 3 additional copies (for a total of 6 copies) if the submittal requires review by one
the Architect’s consultants. Architect will return two copies.
3. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of
entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be
signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that
entity.
B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and
type of product or equipment.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data
are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
3. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
b. Manufacturer's product specifications.
c. Standard color charts.
d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards.
e. Testing by recognized testing agency.
f. Application of testing agency labels and seals.
g. Notation of coordination requirements.
h. Availability and delivery time information.
4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:
a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.
b. Printed performance curves.
c. Operational range diagrams.
d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop
Drawings.
5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.
C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base
Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.
1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the
following information, as applicable:
a. Identification of products.
b. Schedules.
c. Compliance with specified standards.
d. Notation of coordination requirements.
e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated.
g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.
2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop
Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches, but no larger than 24 by 36 inches.
D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these
characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between
submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.
1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories
together in one submittal package.
2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:
a. Generic description of Sample.
b. Product name and name of manufacturer.
c. Sample source.
d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.
e. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 5
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic
submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and
identification information for record.
4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-
control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be
used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.
a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual
Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time
of use.
b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's
property, are the property of Contractor.
5. Samples: Submit manufacturer's color charts, full-size units, or samples of size indicated
consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and
patterns available.
a. Number of Samples: Submit 2 full sets of available choices where color, pattern,
texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's
product line. Architect will return 1 full set with options selected.
1) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in
material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least 3 sets of
paired units that show approximate limits of variations.
E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary
indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the
following information in tabular form:
1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract
Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated.
2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable.
3. Number and name of room or space.
4. Location within room or space.
F. Coordination Drawing Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013100
"Project Management and Coordination."
G. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013200
"Construction Progress Documentation."
H. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in
Section 012900 "Payment Procedures."
I. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with
requirements specified in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements."
J. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified
in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."
K. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017820 "Operation and
Maintenance Data."
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 6
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
L. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of
firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact
information of architects and owners, and other information specified.
M. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel
comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure
Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and
personnel certified.
N. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is
authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.
O. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying
that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of
manufacturing experience where required.
P. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
Q. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
R. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with
requirements in the Contract Documents.
S. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by
manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on
evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or
on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
T. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project.
Include the following information:
1. Name of evaluation organization.
2. Date of evaluation.
3. Time period when report is in effect.
4. Product and manufacturers' names.
5. Description of product.
6. Test procedures and results.
7. Limitations of use.
U. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation
of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.
V. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed
before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate
preparation needed for adhesion.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 7
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
W. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests
performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for
compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with
other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections
and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.
B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 017700
"Closeout Procedures."
C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name
and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date
of Contractor's approval, and statement certif ying that submittal has been reviewed, checked,
and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
D. Submittals that do not have the contractor’s approval stamp and/or do not appear to have been
reviewed by the contractor will be rejected.
3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION
A. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or
revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and
will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action. Architect will select one option from each
column on the submittal stamp, as follows:
SUBMITTAL REVIEW
ARCHITECT’S REVIEW RESPONSE REQUIRED OF CONTRACTOR
NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN xXx RESUBMISSION NOT REQUIRED xXx
NOTE MARKINGS xXx RESUBMIT WITH CONTRACTOR’S xXx
CONFIRMATION STAMP
REJECTED – NOTE COMMENTS xXx REVISE AND RESUBMIT xXx
ARCHITECT’S REVIEW IS FOR GENERAL CONFORMANCE WITH THE DESIGN CONCEPT AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS.
MARKINGS OR COMMENTS SHALL NOT BE CONSTRUED AS RELIEVING THE CONTRACTOR FROM COMPLIANCE WITH
THE PROJECT PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS, NOR DEPARTURES THEREFROM. THE CONTRACTOR REMAINS
RESPONSIBLE FOR DETAILS AND ACCURACY, FOR CONFORMING AND CORRELATING ALL QUANTITIES AND
DIMENSIONS, FOR SELECTING FABRICATION PROCESSES, FOR TECHNIQUES OF ASSEMBLY AND FOR PERFORMING
THE WORK IN A SAFE MANNER
DAVIS SQUARE ARCHITECTS, INC.
BY DATE
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 8
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
B. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return
it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate
party.
C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial
submittals has received prior approval from Architect.
D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned
for resubmittal without review.
E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without
action.
END OF SECTION 013300
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 9
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 10
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
ELECTRONIC DATA REQUEST AND RELEASE FORM
SECTION A (Project Information): Name:
Address:
SECTION B (Recipient of Data): Name:
Title:
Company/Dept.:
Address:
City, State, Zip:
SECTION C (Drawing(s) Requested):
SECTION D (Intended Use of Data):
The following terms and conditions are understood and agreed to by the recipient:
1. Davis Square Architects charges a $50.00 per drawing formatting fee for the retrieval, formatting, and
transmittal of Electronic Data Files.
2. Data shall be limited to graphic information shown in architectural base plans and elevations only.
Notes, dimensions, symbols, and other written data is not included. Area polygons and other ‘associ-
ative’ attributes are not included. Consultant information is not included.
3. Data is provided by Davis Square Architects with no implied degree of accuracy and/or validity. The
user of said data is under obligation to verify and support any claims of accuracy or validity.
4. Davis Square Architects shall be deemed the author of the drawings and data, and shall retain all
common law, statutory law and other rights, including copyrights.
5. The recipient shall have the right to use the enclosed information only for the purpose for which it is
intended as stated in Section D.
6. The recipient agrees to waive all claims against Davis Square Architects resulting in any way from
any unauthorized changes or reuse of the drawings and data for any project by anyone other than
Davis Square Architects. In addition, the recipient agrees, to the fullest extent permitted by law, to in-
demnify and hold harmless from any damage, liability or cost, including reasonable attorney’s fees
and costs of defense, arising from any changes made by anyone other than Davis Square Architects
or from any reuse of the drawings and data without prior written consent of Davis Square Architects.
7. The recipient does not have the right to copy and/or distribute any copies, electronic or otherwise, of
this data for any purpose not consistent with its intended use as stated in Section D.
8. Under no circumstances shall transfer of the drawings and other instruments of service on electronic
media for use by the recipient be deemed a sale by Davis Square Architects, and Davis Square Ar-
chitects makes no warranties, either expressed or implied, of merchantability and fitness for any par-
ticular purpose.
9. Sale of this information by the recipient or use of this information in conjunction with other commercial
work not stated in Section D is expressly forbidden.
Signature
Date
ELECTRONIC DATA REQUEST AND RELEASE FORM 013310 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
ELECTRONIC DATA REQUEST AND RELEASE FORM 013310 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 013520B - SUSTAINABILITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Include GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, and all applicable Division 1 Speci-
fication Sections as part of this Section.
B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements that affect work of this Section whether or
not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.
C. Coordinate work with trades affecting, or affected by, work of this Section. Cooperate with such trades
to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes general requirements and procedures for the Project to obtain Energy Star Homes
version 3 Certification. The Project shall therefore adhere to criteria where specified.
B. See all Divisions of the specification for requirements specific to the Work of each of those Sections.
1.3 GREENING GOALS
A. Energy Efficiency
B. Healthy indoor air quality
C. Water conservation
D. Durability/maintainability
E. Recycled/environmentally sensitive materials, where cost effective
1.4 GREENING STANDARDS
A. New Construction - Energy Star Homes version 3 Certification including the National Program Requirements,
and the following inspection checklists: Thermal Enclosure System, HVAC System Quality Installation for
Contractors, HVAC System Quality Installation for Raters, and the Water Management System.
B. Construction performance requirements
1. Compliance with all Energy Star Homes Inspection Checklists
2. Third party commissioning may be completed by a Commissioning Agent selected by the Owner. The
Commissioning Agent may test the HVAC system for compliance with the designed sequences of
operation.
SUSTAINABILITY REQUIREMENTS 013520B - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
3. Overall building air leakage to the outdoors must be less than .6 air changes per hour (ACH) at a
pressure differential of 50 Pascal’s.
a. An interim blower door test will be issued to benchmark progress toward this goal.
b. A final blower door test will verify that the goal has been met.
c. Each unit must be compartmentalized, to prevent excessive leakage between units. Meet both
of the following:
1) Weather-strip each unit, seal vertical plumbing cracks, and seal off vertical shafts
(including utility chases) and other areas as specified on the project drawings.
2) Leakage between units must be less than 0.30 cfm50 per square foot of enclosure (i.e.
all surfaces enclosing the apartment, including exterior and party walls, floors,
ceiling). The project goal is to reach 0.225 cfm50 per square foot of enclosure. This
leakage must include leakage to adjoining units (i.e. units should not be pressurized to
eliminate inter-unit leakage during the blower door test).
a) An interim blower door test will be issued to benchmark progress toward this
goal.
d. Blower door tests will be performed by a qualified third party verifier through the
Massachusetts Energy Star Homes program.
4. All heating, cooling and ventilation ducts must meet air leakage requirements. Air leakage from the
ducts within the building envelope shall be equal to or less than 6 cfm at a pressure differential of 25
Pascal’s per 100sq.ft. of conditioned floor area. Air leakage from the ducts to the outdoors shall be
equal to or less than 4 cfm at a pressure differential of 25 Pascal’s per 100sq.ft. of conditioned floor
area.
a. Duct blaster tests will be performed by a third party at the end of construction to verify this
requirement has been met.
1.5 DEFINITIONS
A. Regionally Sourced/Manufactured Materials: Materials and products that have been extracted, harvested
or recovered, as well as manufactured within a radius of 500 miles from the Project site.
B. Recycled Content: The recycled content value of a material or product is calculated by multiplying the
recycled content fraction of the assembly (based on weight) by the cost of the assembly. The recycled
content fraction is the sum of all post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of the pre-consumer content.
NOTE: Post-consumer recycled content is waste material which can no longer be used for its intended
purpose. Pre-consumer recycled content is waste material diverted from the waste stream during the
manufacturing process.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Plans: Provide preliminary submittals 30 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed
indicating how the following requirements will be met.
1. Durability Checklist complying with LEED for Homes ID Prerequisite 2.1 and 2.2.
SUSTAINABILITY REQUIREMENTS 013520B - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
2. Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan (if a SWPPP is not required, use the NPDES standard as a
guideline) complying with LEED for Homes SS Prerequisite 1.1.
3. Construction Waste Management Plan complying with LEED for Homes MR Prerequisite 3.1. This
project has a requirement of reaching a 62.5% minimum diversion rate for demolition and
construction waste, with a project goal of diverting of 75% of the total waste generated. Monthly
reports must be submitted to track progress towards this goal. The following criteria must be met in
collecting and tracking demolition and construction waste:
a. Land-clearing and demolition waste should not be counted in the construction waste diversion
rate calculation.
b. Incinerator and combustion of wood cannot be counted as diversion, unless wood is being
used at an industrial facility as Wood Derived Fuel (WDF), in which case it can be counted at
half its value toward diversion.
c. Waste that is used as alternative daily cover (ADC) should be counted at half its value
towards diversion.
d. Projects must provide a project-specific rate for waste diversion. Facility-wide rates will not be
acceptable.
B. Documentation Submittals:
1. Submittals should include all information required to verify that materials being installed meet green
goals (i.e. VOC content, recycled content, etc.)
2. Product Data for materials, appliances, and equipment indicating Energy Star compliance.
3. Product Data for plumbing fixtures indicating water consumption.
4. Product Data for new HVAC equipment indicating absence of CFC refrigerants.
5. Product Data for new HVAC equipment indicating absence of HCFC refrigerants, and for clean-agent
fire-extinguishing systems indicating absence of HCFC and Halon.
6. Product Data and certification letter indicating percentages by weight of post-consumer and pre-
consumer recycled content and costs for each product having recycled content.
7. Product Data indicating the location of the product’s extraction, harvesting and production and
number of miles from project site.
8. Product Data for adhesives and sealants used on the interior of the building indicating VOC content.
9. Product Data for interior paints and coatings indicating chemical composition and VOC content.
10. Product Data for carpet and carpet pad products indicating VOC content.
11. Product Data for composite wood and agrifiber products indicating that products contain no added
urea-formaldehyde resin or meet CARB Standard 93120 for low urea-formaldehyde levels.
12. Product Data and Shop Drawings for sensors and control system used to provide individual airflow
and temperature controls.
13. Product Data and Shop Drawings for sensors and control system used to monitor and control room
temperature.
14. Product data for roofing materials indicating SRI value(s).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ENVIRONMENTALLY PREFERABLE PRODUCTS
A. If tropical wood is used, it must be FSC-certified.
B. Concrete should include 30% slag.
C. Products should contain recycled content where feasible (see Definitions)
SUSTAINABILITY REQUIREMENTS 013520B - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
D. Products should be extracted, harvested and produced regionally where feasible (see Definitions)
2.2 LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS
A. Composite wood and agrifiber products must contain no added urea-formaldehyde resin or meet CARB
Standard 93120 for low urea-formaldehyde levels.
B. For interior applications, use adhesives and sealants that comply with the South Coast Air Quality
Management District (SCAQMD) Rule #1168 and follow limits for VOC content:
1. Wood Glues: 30 g/L.
2. Metal to Metal Adhesives: 30 g/L.
3. Adhesives for Porous Materials (Except Wood): 50 g/L.
4. Subfloor Adhesives: 50 g/L.
5. Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 g/L.
6. Carpet and Carpet Pad Adhesives: 50 g/L.
7. VCT, Asphalt Tile, and Cove Base Adhesives: 50 g/L.
8. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L.
9. Rubber Floor Adhesives: 60 g/L.
10. Ceramic Tile Adhesives: 65 g/L.
11. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L.
12. Fiberglass Adhesives: 80 g/L.
13. Structural Glazing Adhesives: 100 g/L.
14. Wood Flooring Adhesive: 100 g/L.
15. Contact Adhesive: 250 g/L.
16. Plastic Cement Welding Compounds: 350 g/L.
17. ABS Welding Compounds: 400 g/L.
18. CPVC Welding Compounds: 490 g/L.
19. PVC Welding Compounds: 510 g/L.
20. Adhesive Primer for Plastic: 650 g/L.
21. Sealants: 250 g/L.
22. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
23. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
For a full list of VOC limits, please see the SCAQMD Rule #1168 Standard:
http://www.aqmd.gov/rules/reg/reg11/r1168.pdf
C. For interior applications, use paints and coatings that comply with Green Seal Standard GS-11 and follow
limits for VOC content:
1. Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC not more than 50 g/L.
2. Non-Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC not more than 150 g/L.
D. For interior applications, use coatings, finishes and sealers that comply with South Coast Air Quality
Management District (SCAQMD) Rule #1113 and follow limits for VOC content:
1. Anti-Corrosive Coatings: VOC not more than 250 g/L.
2. Varnishes and Sanding Sealers: VOC not more than 350 g/L.
3. Stains: VOC not more than 250 g/L.
4. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by weight total
aromatic compounds.
5. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following:
SUSTAINABILITY REQUIREMENTS 013520B - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
a. Acrolein.
b. Acrylonitrile.
c. Antimony.
d. Benzene.
e. Butyl benzyl phthalate.
f. Cadmium.
g. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate.
h. Di-n-butyl phthalate.
i. Di-n-octyl phthalate.
j. 1,2-dichlorobenzene.
k. Diethyl phthalate.
l. Dimethyl phthalate.
m. Ethylbenzene.
n. Formaldehyde.
o. Hexavalent chromium.
p. Isophorone.
q. Lead.
r. Mercury.
s. Methyl ethyl ketone.
t. Methyl isobutyl ketone.
u. Methylene chloride.
v. Naphthalene.
w. Toluene (methylbenzene).
x. 1,1,1-trichloroethane.
y. Vinyl chloride.
For a full list of VOC limits, please see the SCAQMD Rule #1113 Standard:
http://www.aqmd.gov/rules/reg/reg11/r1113.pdf
D. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY
A. Contractor will designate an on site party responsible for instructing workers and overseeing the sustainability
requirements of the project.
B. The Contractor shall distribute copies of the sustainability goals to the job site foreman, each subcontractor
and vendor.
C. Sustainability goals and LEED for Homes Certification progress will be discussed at pre-bid, pre-construction
and regular job site meetings.
D. If the General Contractor recognizes cost effective opportunities for achieving any of the Greening Goals
above that are not currently called out in the plans and specifications, they should bring these ideas to the
Architecture team. The following products have been identified as products that should include recycled
content:
1. Cellulose insulation
2. Gypsum Wallboard
3. Steel
SUSTAINABILITY REQUIREMENTS 013520B - 5
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
E. Permanent HVAC equipment is not to be utilized during construction. Ducts are to be sealed at registers with
plastic dust protection. Reference plans and requirements for air sealing. Protect stored on-site installed
absorptive materials from moisture damage.
END OF SECTION 01352
SUSTAINABILITY REQUIREMENTS 013520B - 6
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 013545B
RADON MITIGATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION
PART l - GENERAL
1.01 CONDITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS
A. General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and applicable parts of Division 1 form a part
of this specification and the Contractor shall consult them in detail for instructions.
B. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein
affecting the work of this trade.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The scope of work under this section includes the installation of two (2) Radon Mitigation
Systems . The Radon Mitigation Systems must be vented through the walls in the basement
with the exhaust pipes running on the outside of the building. Exact locations of each system
will be determined.
B. The Contractor must retain the services of a licensed radon mitigation contractor. The
Contractor shall be listed in EPA's RPP program, specifically one listed as a "Mitigation
Service Provider," or certified by a state which requires adherence to the RMS. The RMS
shall have a radon reduction of at least 80%.
1.04 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
A. EPA Training Manual, "Reducing Radon in Structures".
B. "Application of Radon Reduction Methods," EPA/625/5-88/024 and most recent Methods.
C. "ASHRAE Standard 62-1989," Appendix B, Positive Combustion Air Supply.
D. "National Gas Code," Appendix H (p.2223.1-98), Recommended Procedure for Safety
Inspection of an Existing Appliance Installation.
E. OSHA "Safety and Health Regulations for Construction, Ionizing Radiation," 29 CFR 1926.53.
F. OSHA "Occupational Safety and Health Regulations, Ionizing Radiation," 29 CFR 1910.96.
G. NIOSH "Guide to Industrial Respiratory Protection," DHHS (NIOSH) Publication No. 87-116.
H. NCRP "Measurement of Radon and Radon Decay Daughters in Air," NCRP Report No. 97.
1.05 WORKERS HEALTH AND SAFETY
Contractors shall comply with all OSHA, state and local standards or regulations relating to worker
safety and occupational radon exposure. In addition to the OSHA and NIOSH standards, the
following requirements that is specifically or uniquely applicable for the safety and protection of
radon mitigation workers shall be met:
RADON MITIGATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION 013545B-1
Prepared by Universal Engineering, Inc
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
A. The contractor shall advise workers of the hazards of exposure to radon and the need to
apply protective measures when working in areas of elevated radon concentrations.
B. The contractor shall have a worker protection plan on file that is available to all employees
and is approved by any state or local regulating agencies that require such a plan. Exception:
A worker protection plan is not required for a contractor who is a sole proprietor unless
required by state or local regulations.
C. The contractor shall ensure that appropriate safety equipment such as hard hats, face
shields, ear plugs, steel-toe boots and protective gloves are available on the job site during
cutting, drilling, grinding, polishing, demolishing or other activity associated with radon
mitigation projects.
D. All electrical equipment used during radon mitigation projects shall be properly grounded.
Circuits used as a power source should be protected by Ground-fault Circuit Interrupters
(GFCI).
E. When work is required at elevations above the ground or floor, the contractor shall ensure
that ladders or scaffolding are safely installed and operated.
F. W hen mitigation work requires the use of sealants, adhesives, paints, or other substances
that may be hazardous to health, contractors shall provide employees with the applicable
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) and explain the required safety procedures.
1.06 SUBMITTALS:
A. The EPA recommends that contractors provide the following written information to clients
prior to initiation of work:
1. The contractor's EPA RPP Mitigation Service Provider identification number.
2. A statement that describes the planned scope of the work and that includes an estimate
of the time needed to complete the work.
3. A statement describing any known hazards associated with chemicals used in or as part
of the installation.
4. A statement indicating compliance with and implementation of all EPA standards and
those of other agencies having jurisdiction (e.g., code requirements).
5. A statement describing any system maintenance that the building owner would be
required to perform.
6. An estimate of the installation cost and annual operating costs of the system.
7. The conditions of any warranty or guarantee.
B. EPA recommends that listed mitigation contractors keep records of all radon mitigation work
performed and maintain those records for 3 years or for the period of any warranty or
guarantee, whichever is longer. These records should include:
1. The Building Investigation Summary and floor plan sketch.
2. Pre- and post-mitigation radon test data.
3. Pre- and post-mitigation diagnostic test data.
4. Copies of contracts and warranties.
5. A narrative or pictorial description of mitigation system(s) installed.
C. Other records or bookkeeping required by local, state, or Federal statutes and regulations
shall be maintained for the period(s) prescribed by those requirements.
D. EPA recommends that health and safety records, including worker radon exposure logs, be
maintained for a minimum of 20 years.
RADON MITIGATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION 013545B-2
Prepared by Universal Engineering, Inc
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
E. Upon completion of the mitigation project, contractors shall provide clients with an information
package that includes:
1. Any building permits required by local codes.
2. Copies of the Building Investigation Summary and floor plan sketch.
3. Pre-and post-mitigation radon test data.
4. Copies of contracts and warranties.
5. A description of the mitigation system installed and its basic operating principles.
6. A description of any deviations from the RMS or State requirements.
7. A description of the proper operating procedures of any mechanical or electrical
systems installed, including manufacturer's operation and maintenance instructions and
warranties.
8. A list of appropriate actions for clients to take if the system failure warning device
indicates system degradation or failure.
9. The name, telephone number, and EPA RPP Mitigation Service Provider Identification
Number of the contractor, and the phone number of the state radon office.
PART II – PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. All mitigation system electrical components shall be U.L. listed or of equivalent specifications.
B. As a minimum, all plastic vent pipes in mitigation systems shall be made of Schedule 20
PVC, ABS or equivalent piping material. Schedule 40 piping or its equivalent should be used
in garages and in other internal and external locations subject to weathering or physical
damage.
C. Vent pipe fittings in a mitigation system shall be of the same material as the vent pipes.
D. Cleaning solvents and adhesives used to join plastic pipes and fittings shall be as
recommended by manufacturers for use with the type of pipe material used in the mitigation
system.
E. When sealing cracks in slabs and other small openings around penetrations of the slab and
foundation walls, caulks and sealants designed for such application shall be used. Urethane
sealants are recommended because of their durability.
F. When sealing holes for plumbing rough-in or other large openings in slabs and foundation
walls that are below the ground surface, non-shrink mortar, grouts, expanding foam, or
similar materials designed for such application shall be used.
G. Sump pit covers shall be made of durable plastic or other rigid material and designed to
permit air-tight sealing. To permit easy removal for sump pump servicing, the cover shall be
sealed using silicone or other non-permanent type caulking materials or an air-tight gasket.
H. Penetrations of sump covers to accommodate electrical wiring, water ejection pipes, or radon
vent pipes shall be designed to permit air-tight sealing around penetrations, using caulk or
grommets. Sump covers that permit observation of conditions in the sump pit are
recommended.
2.02 MONITORS AND LABELING
A. All active soil depressurization and block wall depressurization radon mitigation systems shall
include a mechanism to monitor system performance and warn of system failure. The
RADON MITIGATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION 013545B-3
Prepared by Universal Engineering, Inc
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
mechanism shall be simple to read or interpret and be located where it is easily seen or heard
by building occupants and protected from damage or destruction.
B. Electrical radon mitigation system monitors (whether visual or audible) shall be installed on
non-switched circuits and be designed to reset automatically when power is restored after
service or power supply failure. Battery operated monitoring devices shall not be used unless
they are equipped with a low power warning feature.
C. Mechanical radon mitigation system monitors, such as manometer type pressure gauges,
shall be clearly marked to indicate the range or zone of pressure readings that existed when
the system was initially activated.
D. A system description label shall be placed on the mitigation system, the electric service
entrance panel, or other prominent location. This label shall be legible from a distance of at
least three feet and include the following information: "Radon Reduction System," the
installer's name, phone number, and RCP Identification Number, the date of installation, and
an advisory that the building should be tested for radon at least every two years or as
required or recom mended by state or local agencies. In addition, all exposed and visible
interior radon mitigation system vent pipe sections shall be identified with at least one label on
each floor level. The label shall read, "Radon Reduction System."
E. References to the Radon Contractor Proficiency (RCP) Program or EPA's National Radon
Proficiency Program (RPP) Mitigation Service Providers, are no longer applicable.
F. The circuit breakers controlling the circuits on which the radon vent fan and system failure
warning devices operate shall be labeled "Radon System."
2.03 SYSTEMS DESIGN
A. All radon mitigation systems shall be designed and installed as permanent, integral additions
to the building.
B. All radon mitigation systems shall be designed to avoid the creation of other health, safety, or
environmental hazards to building occupants, such as back drafting of natural draft
combustion appliances.
C. All radon mitigation systems shall be designed to maximize radon reduction and in
consideration of the need to minimize excess energy usage, to avoid compromising moisture
and temperature controls and other comfort features, and to minimize noise.
D. All radon mitigation systems and their components shall be designed to comply with the laws,
ordinances, codes, and regulations of relevant jurisdictional authorities, including applicable
mechanical, electrical, building, plumbing, energy, and fire prevention codes.
PART IIl - INSTALLATION
3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. All components of radon mitigation systems installed in compliance with provisions of the
RMS shall also be in compliance with the applicable mechanical, electrical, building,
plumbing, energy and fire prevention codes, standards, and regulations of the local
jurisdiction.
RADON MITIGATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION 013545B-4
Prepared by Universal Engineering, Inc
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
B. The contractor shall obtain all required licenses and permits, and display them in the work
areas as required by local ordinances.
C. Where portions of structural framing material must be removed to accommodate radon vent
pipes, material removed shall be no greater than that permitted for plumbing installations by
applicable building or plumbing codes.
D. Where installation of a radon mitigation system requires pipes or ducts to penetrate a firewall
or other fire resistance rated wall or floor, penetrations shall be protected in accordance with
applicable building, mechanical, fire, and electrical codes.
E. When installing radon mitigation systems that use sump pits as the suction point for active
soil depressurization, if sump pumps are needed, it is recommended that submersible sump
pumps be used.
3.02 RADON VENT PIPE INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. All joints and connections in radon mitigation systems using plastic vent pipes shall be
permanently sealed with adhesives as specified by the manufacturer of the pipe material
used. Joints or connections in other vent pipe materials shall be made air tight.
B. External piping runs in areas subject to subfreezing conditions should be protected to avoid
the risk of vent pipe freeze-up.
C. Radon vent pipes shall be fastened to the structure of the building with hangers, strapping, or
other supports that will adequately secure the vent material. Existing plumbing pipes, ducts,
or mechanical equipment shall not be used to support or secure a radon vent pipe.
D. Supports for radon vent pipes shall be installed at least every 6 feet on horizontal runs.
Vertical runs shall be secured either above or below the points of penetration through floors
and ceilings or at least every 8 feet on runs that do not penetrate floors, ceilings, or roofs.
E. To prevent blockage of air flow into the bottom of radon vent pipes, these pipes shall be
supported or secured in a permanent manner that prevents their downward movement to the
bottom of suction pits or sump pits, or into the soil beneath an aggregate layer under a slab.
F. Radon vent pipes shall be installed in a configuration that ensures that any rain water or
condensation within the pipes drains downward into the ground beneath the slab or soil-gas
retarder membrane.
G. Radon vent pipes shall not block access to any areas requiring maintenance or inspection.
Radon vents shall not be installed in front of or interfere with any light, opening, door, window
or equipment access area required by code. If radon vent pipes are installed in sump pits, the
system shall be designed with removable or flexible couplings to facilitate removal of the
sump pit cover for sump pump maintenance.
H. To prevent re-entrainment of radon, the point of discharge from vents of fan-powered soil
depressurization and block wall depressurization systems shall meet all of the following
requirements: (1) be ten feet or more above ground level, (2) be ten feet or more from any
window, door, or other opening into conditioned spaces of the structure that is less than two
feet below the exhaust point, and (3) be ten feet or more from any opening into an adjacent
building. The total required distance (ten feet) from the point of discharge to openings in the
structure may be measured either directly between the two points or be the sum of
measurements m ade around intervening obstacles. Whenever possible, the exhaust point
RADON MITIGATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION 013545B-5
Prepared by Universal Engineering, Inc
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
should be positioned above the highest eave of the building and as close to the roof ridge line
as possible.
I. When a radon mitigation system is designed to draw soil gas from a perimeter drain tile loop
(internal or external) that discharges water through a drain line to daylight or a soak away, a
one-way flow valve, water trap, or other control device should be installed in or on the
discharge line to prevent outside air from entering the system while allowing water to flow out
of the system.
3.03 RADON VENT FAN INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Vent fans used in radon mitigation systems shall be designed or otherwise sealed to reduce
the potential for leakage of soil gas from the fan housing.
B. Radon vent fans shall be sized to provide the pressure difference and air flow characteristics
necessary to achieve the radon reduction goals established for the specific mitigation project.
C. Radon vent fans shall be installed in a configuration that avoids condensation buildup in the
fan housing. Whenever possible, fans should be installed in vertical runs of the vent pipe.
D. Radon vent fans mounted on the exterior of buildings shall be rated for outdoor use or
installed in a water tight protective housing.
E. Radon vent fans shall be mounted and secured in a manner that minimizes transfer of
vibration to the structural framing of the building.
F. To facilitate maintenance and future replacement, radon vent fans shall be installed in the
vent pipe using removable couplings or flexible connections that can be tightly secured to
both the fan and the vent pipe.
3.04 SUCTION PIT REQUIREMENT
A. To provide optimum pressure field extension of the sub slab communication zone, adequate
material shall be excavated from the area immediately below the slab penetration point of
system vent pipes.
3.05 SEALING REQUIREMENTS
A. Sump pits that permit entry of soil-gas or that would allow conditioned air to be drawn into a
sub-slab depressurization system shall be covered and sealed. The covers on sumps that
previously provided protection or relief from surface water collection shall be fitted with water
or mechanically trapped drain. Water traps should be fitted with an automatic supply of
priming water
B. Openings around radon vent pipe penetrations of the slab, the foundation walls, or the
crawlspace soil-gas retarder membrane shall be cleaned, prepared, and sealed in a
permanent, air-tight manner using compatible caulks or other sealant materials. Openings
around other utility penetrations of the slab, walls, or soil-gas retarder shall also be sealed.
C. Where a Block Wall Depressurization (BWD) system is used to mitigate radon, openings in
the tops of such walls and all accessible openings or cracks in the interior surfaces of the
walls shall be closed and sealed with polyurethane or equivalent caulks, expandable foams,
or other fillers and sealants. Openings or cracks that are determined to be inaccessible or
beyond the ability of the contractor to seal, shall be disclosed and included in the
documentation.
RADON MITIGATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION 013545B-6
Prepared by Universal Engineering, Inc
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
D. Openings, perimeter channel drains, or cracks that exist where the slab meets the foundation
wall (floor-wall joint), shall be sealed with urethane caulk or equivalent material. When the
opening or channel is greater than 1/2 inch in width, a foam backer rod or other comparable
filler material shall be inserted in the channel before application of the sealant. This sealing
technique shall be done in a manner that retains the channel feature as a water control
system. Other openings or cracks in slabs or at expansion or control joints should also be
sealed. Openings or cracks that are determined to be inaccessible or beyond the ability of the
contractor to seal, shall be disclosed and included in the documentation.
E. When installing baseboard-type suction systems, all seams and joints in the baseboard
material shall be joined and sealed using materials recommended by the manufacturer of the
baseboard system. Baseboards shall be secured to walls and floors with adhesives designed
and recommended for such installations. If a baseboard system is installed on a block wall
foundation, the tops of the block wall shall be closed and sealed.
3.06 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Wiring for all active radon mitigation systems shall conform to provisions of the National
Electric Code and any additional local regulations.
B. Wiring may not be located in or chased through the mitigation installation ducting or any other
heating or cooling ductwork.
C. Any plugged cord used to supply power to a radon vent fan shall be no more than 6 feet in
length.
D. No plugged cord may penetrate a wall or be concealed within a wall.
E. Radon mitigation fans installed on the exterior of buildings shall be hard-wired into an
electrical circuit. Plugged fans shall not be used outdoors.
F. If the rated electricity requirements of a radon mitigation system fan exceed 50 percent of the
circuit capacity into which it will be connected, or if the total connected load on the circuit
(including the radon vent fan) exceeds 80 percent of the circuit's rated capacity, a separate,
dedicated circuit shall be installed to power the fan.
G. An electrical disconnect switch or circuit breaker shall be installed in radon mitigation system
fan circuits to permit deactivation of the fan for maintenance or repair by the building owner or
servicing contractor (Disconnect switches are not required with plugged fans).
3.07 POST MITIGATION TESTING
A. After installation of an active radon control system (e.g., SSD), the contractor shall re-
examine and verify the integrity of the fan mounting seals and all joints in the interior vent
piping.
B. After installation of any active radon mitigation system, the contractor shall measure suctions
or flows in system piping or ducting to assure that the system is operating as designed. (Note:
When SSD systems are installed and activated, a test of pressure field extension is a good
practice, particularly when there is uncertainty regarding the permeability of materials under
all parts of the slab.)
C. Immediately after installation and activation of any active (fan-powered) sub-slab
depressurization or block wall depressurization system in buildings containing natural draft
RADON MITIGATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION 013545B-7
Prepared by Universal Engineering, Inc
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
combustion appliances, the building shall be tested for back drafting of those appliances. Any
back drafting condition that results from installation of the radon mitigation system shall be
corrected before the system is placed in operation.
D. Upon completion of radon mitigation work, a test of mitigation system effectiveness will be
conducted using an EPA RPP Analytical Service Provider listed test device and in
accordance with EPA testing protocols or state requirements. This test will be conducted no
sooner than 24 hours nor later than 30 days following completion and activation of the
mitigation system(s). This test will be conducted by the owner at no additional cost to the
Contractor.
RADON MITIGATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION 013545B-8
Prepared by Universal Engineering, Inc
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality
control.
B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the
Contract Document requirements.
1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities
are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those
Sections may also cover production of standard products.
2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-
assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document
requirements.
3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required
by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this
Section.
4. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during
execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed
construction will comply with requirements.
B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after
execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and
completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract
enforcement activities performed by Architect.
C. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed
to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where
indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to
show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified
installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved
mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1. Room Mockups / Model Units: Mockups of typical residential unit interior spaces
complete with wall, floor, and ceiling finishes, doors, windows, millwork, casework,
specialties, furnishings and equipment, and lighting.
D. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing
agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to
establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.
E. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g.,
plant, mill, factory, or shop.
F. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation
of the Work and for completed Work.
G. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing
laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.
H. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an
employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation,
including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.
1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that
certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that
requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).
I. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully
completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project;
being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.
1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the
standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels,
comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different,
but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be
the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the
minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits.
To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as
appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision
before proceeding.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a
recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.
B. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:
1. Specification Section number and title.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.
3. Description of test and inspection.
4. Identification of applicable standards.
5. Identification of test and inspection methods.
6. Number of tests and inspections required.
7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.
8. Requirements for obtaining samples.
9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.
1.6 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS
A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other
Sections. Include the following:
1. Date of issue.
2. Project title and number.
3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
7. Identification of product and Specification Section.
8. Complete test or inspection data.
9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and
inspecting.
11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with
the Contract Document requirements.
12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
13. Recommendations on retesting and re-inspecting.
B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information
documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other
Sections. Include the following:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report.
2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.
3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.
4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with
requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.
5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance
complies with requirements.
6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting
manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in
other Sections. Include the following:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative
making report.
2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements.
3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance
complies with requirements.
4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee
payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for
compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels
required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar
to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as
well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated
for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient
production capacity to produce required units.
D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling
work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to
practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering
services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for
installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in m aterial, design, and extent
to those indicated for this Project.
F. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the
experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according
to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where
required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.
1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.
2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory
Accreditation Program.
G. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of
manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation
of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for
this Project.
H. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of
manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of
manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for
this Project.
I. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each
form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using
materials indicated for the completed Work:
1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Architect.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
3. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers
that will be employed during the construction at Project.
4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
5. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction.
a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.
6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated.
J. Room Mockups / Model Unit: Architect may require that one residential unit be completed
ahead of the regular schedule to allow Architect and Owner to review quality of work, to
establish standards for other spaces, and/or to allow potential residents to observe a completed
unit. Contractor shall provide this service at no additional cost and with no extension of
Contract Time. Construct room mockups incorporating required materials and assemblies,
finished according to requirements. Provide required lighting and additional lighting where
required to enable Architect to evaluate quality of the Work. Provide room mockups as directed
by Architect.
1.8 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections are Contractor's responsibility. Perform
additional quality-control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements,
whether specified or not.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required
by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor
by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.
2. Contractor shall engage and coordinate a qualified testing agency to perform these
quality-control services.
a. Costs for initial testing of windows and of concrete will be charged to the Owner.
Costs for testing soil compaction will be charged to the Owner. Costs for all other
testing will be charged to the Contractor.
b. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated
by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to
Contractor.
3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires
testing or inspecting will be performed.
4. Submit a certified written report of each quality-control service.
5. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract
Documents are Contractor's responsibility.
6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction,
when they so direct.
B. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service
representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 01330 "Submittal
Procedures."
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 5
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
C. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical
representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's
services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and
conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed
portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.
D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's
responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for
construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.
E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of
duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.
1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the
Work during performance of its services.
2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests
are conducted.
3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and
inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.
4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-
control service through Contractor.
5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or
approve or accept any portion of the Work.
6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.
F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and
similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify
agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the
following:
1. Access to the Work.
2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and
inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.
4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.
5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies.
6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing
agency.
7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project
site.
G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance
and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing
construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.
1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
H. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar
quality-control services required by the Contract Documents. Coordinate and submit
concurrently with Contractor's construction schedule. Update as the Work progresses.
1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and each party
involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 6
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1.9 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A. Special Tests and Inspections: Engage a qualified testing agency to conduct special tests and
inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner, and as
follows:
1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures
and reviews the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.
2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in
the Work during performance of its services.
3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control
service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.
4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which
includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.
5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected
work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ACCEPTABLE TESTING AGENCIES
A. Testing shall be performed by an agency licensed in the Commonwealth of Massachusetts to
perform testing for the material(s) being tested. For any given material, the same testing
agency shall be used throughout the duration of the Work. Testing shall be performed by one of
the following:
1. Architectural Testing, Inc. (ATI) located in Chelmsford, MA.
2. Geotechnical Consultants, Inc. (GCI) located in Marlborough, MA.
3. Simpson Gumpertz & Heger, Inc. (SGH) located in Waltham, MA.
4. The Thompson & Lichtner Company, Inc. (T&L) located in Cambridge, MA.
5. Universal Testing Service (UTS) of Massachusetts, Inc. located in Stoneham, MA.
6. Another testing agency acceptable to Architect.
3.2 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG
A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:
1. Date test or inspection was conducted.
2. Description of the Work tested or inspected.
3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect.
4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.
B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test
and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 7
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
3.3 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair
damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched
areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible
as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching
in Section 017000 "Execution Requirements."
B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of
responsibility for quality-control services.
END OF SECTION 014000
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 8
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications,
and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the
Conditions of the Contract.
C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested,"
"authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."
D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on
Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown,"
"noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."
E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having
jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control
performance of the Work.
F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,
installation, and similar operations.
G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking,
assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing,
protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.
H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site
is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which
Project is to be built.
1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent
requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if
bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards
are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.
B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents
unless otherwise indicated.
REFERENCES 014200 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with
industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not
bound with the Contract Documents.
1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain
copies directly from publication source.
1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
A. General: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract
Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list and/or the
abbreviations listed on the Drawings. Names are subject to change and are believed to be
accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. Where abbreviations and
acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, but not listed here or on the
Drawings, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale's
"Encyclopedia of Associations: National Organizations of the U.S." or in Columbia Books'
"National Trade & Professional Associations of the United States."
1. AAB Massachusetts Architectural Access Board
2. AABC Associated Air Balance Council
3. AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association
4. AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
5. AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists
6. ABA Architectural Barriers Act
7. ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association
8. ACI American Concrete Institute
9. ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association
10. ADA Americans with Disabilities Act
11. AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The)
12. AF&PA American Forest & Paper Association
13. AGA American Gas Association
14. AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers
15. AHRI Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (The)
16. AI Asphalt Institute
17. AIA American Institute of Architects (The)
18. AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
19. AISI American Iron and Steel Institute
20. AITC American Institute of Timber Construction
21. AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.
22. ANSI American National Standards Institute
23. AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc.
24. APA The Engineered Wood Association
25. APA Architectural Precast Association
26. API American Petroleum Institute
27. ARI Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute
28. ARI American Refrigeration Institute
29. ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association
30. ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers
31. ASCE/SEI American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute
32. ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers
33. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
34. ASSE American Society of Safety Engineers (The)
35. ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering
36. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials International
37. ATIS Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions
REFERENCES 014200 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
38. AWEA Am erican Wind Energy Association
39. AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute
40. AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada
41. AWPA American Wood Protection Association
42. AWS American Welding Society
43. AWWA American Water Works Association
44. BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association
45. BIA Brick Industry Association (The)
46. BICSI BICSI, Inc.
47. BIFMA Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association
48. BISSC Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee
49. BOCA Building Officials and Code Administrators International Inc.
50. BWF Badminton World Federation
51. CBH Massachusetts Community Based Housing
52. CDA Copper Development Association
53. CEA Canadian Electricity Association
54. CEA Consumer Electronics Association
55. CFFA Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc.
56. CFR Code of Federal Regulations
57. CFSEI Cold-Formed Steel Engineers Institute
58. CGA Compressed Gas Association
59. CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association
60. CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association
61. CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
62. CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute
63. CMR Code of Massachusetts Regulations
64. COE Army Corps of Engineers
65. CPA Composite Panel Association
66. CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission
67. CRI Carpet and Rug Institute
68. CRRC Cool Roof Rating Council
69. CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
70. CSA Canadian Standards Association
71. CSA CSA International
72. CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The)
73. CSSB Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau
74. CTI Cooling Technology Institute
75. CWC Composite Wood Council
76. DASMA Door and Access Systems Manufacturers Association
77. DBE Disadvantaged Business Enterprise
78. DHCD MA Department of Housing and Community Development
79. DHI Door and Hardware Institute
80. DND Department of Neighborhood Development, City of Boston
81. DOC Department of Commerce
82. DOD Department of Defense
83. DOE Department of Energy
84. DSCC Defense Supply Center Columbus
85. ECA Electronic Components Association
86. ECAMA Electronic Components Assemblies & Materials Association
87. EIA Electronic Industries Alliance
88. EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association
89. EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.
90. EPA Environmental Protection Agency
91. ESD Electrostatic Discharge Association
92. ESTA Entertainment Services and Technology Association
93. EVO Efficiency Valuation Organization
REFERENCES 014200 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
94. FAA Federal Aviation Administration
95. FED-STD Federal Standard
96. FG Federal Government Publications
97. FHA Federal Housing Administration
98. FIBA The International Basketball Federation
99. FIVB The International Volleyball Federation
100. FM FM Approvals / FM Global
101. FRSA Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors Association
102. FS Federal Specification
103. FSA Fluid Sealing Association
104. FSC Forest Stewardship Council U.S.
105. GA Gypsum Association
106. GANA Glass Association of North America
107. GS Green Seal
108. GSA General Services Administration
109. HI Hydraulic Institute
110. HI/GAMA Hydronics Institute/Gas Appliance Manufacturers Association
111. HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association
112. HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association
113. HPW H. P. White Laboratory, Inc.
114. HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development
115. IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials
116. IAPSC International Association of Professional Security Consultants
117. IAS International Approval Services
118. IBC International Building Code
119. ICBO International Conference of Building Officials
120. ICC International Code Council
121. ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, LLC
122. ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.
123. ICPA International Cast Polymer Alliance
124. ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc.
125. IEBC International Existing Building Code
126. IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
127. IECC International Energy Conservation Code
128. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The)
129. IES Illuminating Engineering Society
130. IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America
131. IEST Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology
132. IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance
133. IGSHPA International Ground Source Heat Pump Association
134. ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc.
135. Intertek Intertek Group
136. ISA International Society of Automation (The)
137. ISAS Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society (The)
138. ISFA International Surface Fabricators Association
139. ISO International Organization for Standardization
140. ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association
141. ITU International Telecommunication Union
142. KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association
143. LBL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory
144. LMA Laminating Materials Association
145. LPI Lightning Protection Institute
146. MAAB Massachusetts Architectural Access Board
147. MBE Minority Business Enterprise
148. MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association
149. MCA Metal Construction Association
REFERENCES 014200 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
150. MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc.
151. MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc.
152. MHIA Material Handling Industry of America
153. MIA Marble Institute of America
154. MILSPEC Military Specification and Standards
155. MMPA Moulding & Millwork Producers Association
156. MPI Master Painters Institute
157. MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry
158. NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
159. NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers International
160. NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association
161. NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association
162. NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc.
163. NCAA National Collegiate Athletic Association (The)
164. NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association
165. NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau
166. NECA National Electrical Contractors Association
167. NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association
168. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
169. NETA International Electrical Testing Association
170. NFHS National Federation of State High School Associations
171. NFPA National Fire Protection Association
172. NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council
173. NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association
174. NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority
175. NOFMA National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association
176. NOMMA National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association
177. NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association
178. NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association
179. NSF National Sanitation Foundation International
180. NSPE National Society of Professional Engineers
181. NSSGA National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association
182. NTMA National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The)
183. NWFA National Wood Flooring Association
184. OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration
185. PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute
186. PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute
187. PLASA PLASA
188. RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections
189. RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute
190. RIS Redwood Inspection Service
191. SAE Society of Automotive Engineers
192. SBCCI Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc.
193. SCAQMD South Coast Air Quality Management District
194. SCTE Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers
195. SD Department of State
196. SDI Steel Deck Institute
197. SDI Steel Door Institute
198. SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association
199. SEI/ASCE Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers
200. SIA Security Industry Association
201. SJI Steel Joist Institute
202. SMA Screen Manufacturers Association
203. SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association
204. SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers
205. SOMWBA MA State Office of Minority and Women Business Assistance
REFERENCES 014200 - 5
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
206. SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance
207. SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau
208. SPRI Single Ply Roofing Industry
209. SRCC Solar Rating and Certification Corporation
210. SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America
211. SSPC The Society for Protective Coatings
212. STI Steel Tank Institute
213. SWI Steel Window Institute
214. SWPA Submersible Wastewater Pump Association
215. TCA Tilt-Up Concrete Association
216. TCNA Tile Council of North America, Inc.
217. TEMA Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, Inc.
218. TIA Telecommunications Industry Association
219. TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance
220. TMS The Masonry Society
221. TPI Truss Plate Institute
222. TPI Turfgrass Producers International
223. TRB Transportation Research Board
224. TRI Tile Roofing Institute
225. UBC Uniform Building Code
226. UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
227. UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association
228. USAB United States Access Board
229. USATBCB U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance
230. USAV USA Volleyball
231. USDA Department of Agriculture
232. USDJ Department of Justice
233. USGBC U.S. Green Building Council
234. USITT United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc.
235. USP U.S. Pharmacopeia
236. USPS United States Postal Service
237. WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association
238. WBE Women Business Enterprise
239. WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau
240. WCMA Window Covering Manufacturers Association
241. WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association
242. WI Woodwork Institute
243. WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association
244. WSRCA Western States Roofing Contractors Association
245. WWPA Western Wood Products Association
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 014200
REFERENCES 014200 - 6
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and
protection facilities.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 011000 "Summary" for limitations on work restrictions and utility interruptions.
1.3 USE CHARGES
A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included
in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services
and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and
authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Sewer Service: Pay sewer-service use charges for sewer usage by all entities for construction
operations.
C. Water Service: Pay water-service use charges for water used by all entities for construction
operations.
D. Electric Power Service: Pay electric-power-service use charges for electricity used by all
entities for construction operations.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for
construction personnel.
B. Erosion- and Sedimentation-Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPA
Construction General Permit, Drawings, Conservation Commission requirements, or authorities
having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary
electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each
temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume
responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its
use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned
responsibilities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch- thick, galvanized-steel, chain-link
fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- OD
line posts and 2-7/8-inch- OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- OD top and bottom rails.
Provide concrete or galvanized-steel bases for supporting posts.
B. Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 10-mil minimum thickness, with flame-
spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84 and passing NFPA 701 Test Method 2.
C. Dust-Control Adhesive-Surface Walk-off Mats: Provide mats minimum 36 by 60 inches.
D. Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool;
with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively.
E. TCB Construction Fencing: See additional materials.
2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature
controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading.
B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner, Architect, clerk,
and construction personnel office activities and to accommodate Project meetings specified in
other Division 01 Sections. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows:
1. Furniture required for superintendent.
2. Separate office, desk, chair, printer and tel/data line for use by clerk.
3. Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 10 individuals. Provide
electrical power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles, with no fewer than one
receptacle on each wall. Furnish room with conference table and chairs.
4. Drinking water and private toilet.
5. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68
to 72 deg F.
6. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc at desk height.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
2.3 EQUIPMENT
A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by
locations and classes of fire exposures.
B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented,
self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.
1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating
units is prohibited.
2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a qualified testing
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location
and application.
3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for
temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return-air grille
in system and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system as required in
Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures".
C. Air Filtration Units: Primary and secondary HEPA-filter-equipped portable units with four-stage
filtration. Provide single switch for emergency shutoff. Configure to run continuously.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference
with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the
Work. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance.
B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities
are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.
3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.
1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be
interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.
B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.
C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for
construction.
D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of
construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type,
number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. Provide separate,
lockable facilities for females.
E. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities
for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a
harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.
F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction
activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction
from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on
completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to
produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.
1. Provide dehumidification systems when required to reduce substrate moisture levels to
level required to allow installation or application of finishes.
G. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size,
capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations.
1. Install electric power service underground unless otherwise indicated.
H. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for
construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.
1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements
without operating entire system.
I. Telephone Service: Provide superintendent with cellular telephone.
J. Electronic Communication Service: Provide broadband modem, router and ISP for use by
superintendent and by clerk.
K. Computer: Provide a computer adequate for use by superintendent to access Project electronic
documents and maintain electronic communications. Equip computer with not less than the
following:
1. Productivity Software:
a. Microsoft Office software including Word, Excel, and Outlook.
b. Adobe Reader.
2. Printer: "All-in-one" unit equipped with printing, photocopying, and scanning functions, or
separate units for each of these three functions.
3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with the following:
1. Provide construction for temporary offices that is noncombustible according to
ASTM E 136. Comply with NFPA 241.
2. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection.
Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial
Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to
Owner.
B. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas
adequate for construction operations.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1. Provide dust-control treatment that is nonpolluting and nontracking. Reapply treatment
as required to minimize dust.
C. Temporary Use of Permanent Roads and Paved Areas: Locate temporary roads and paved
areas in same location as permanent roads and paved areas. Construct and maintain
temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Extend temporary
roads and paved areas, within construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction
operations.
1. Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads and
paved areas.
2. Prepare subgrade and install subbase and base for temporary roads and paved areas
according to Section 023000 "Earthwork."
3. Recondition base after temporary use, including removing contaminated material,
regrading, proofrolling, compacting, and testing.
4. Delay installation of final course of permanent hot-mix asphalt pavement until
immediately before Substantial Completion. Repair hot-mix asphalt base-course
pavement before installation of final course according to Section 027410 "Asphalt
Paving."
D. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities.
2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.
E. Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel.
F. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.
1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining
properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.
2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.
G. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted.
1. Identification Signs: Provide 4 feet by 8 feet Project identification sign. Architect will
provide graphics.
2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and
individuals seeking entrance to Project.
a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors.
3. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times.
H. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Section 015240 "Construction
Waste Management."
I. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.
1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered “tools and
equipment” and not temporary facilities.
J. Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders
are not adequate.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 5
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
K. Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Use of new stairs for construction traffic will be permitted,
provided stairs are protected and finishes restored to new condition at time of Substantial
Completion.
3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and
other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be
removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities.
B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct
construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible
air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.
1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Section 011000 "Summary."
C. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and
discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to undisturbed areas and to adjacent
properties and walkways, according to requirements of 2003 EPA Construction General Permit,
Drawings, Conservation Commission, or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more
stringent.
1. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction
activity do not enter or cross tree- or plant- protection zones.
2. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during
construction until permanent vegetation has been established.
3. Clean, repair, and restore adjoining properties and roads affected by erosion and
sedimentation from Project site during the course of Project.
4. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed
during removal.
D. Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide
barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of
stormwater from heavy rains.
E. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line
of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root
systems from damage, flooding, and erosion.
F. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and
harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control
procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial
Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials.
G. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure
fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by
entrance gates.
1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined
sufficient to accommodate construction operations.
2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized
personnel. Furnish one set of keys to Owner.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 6
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
H. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas
of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft,
and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day.
I. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.
J. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in
progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and
similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.
1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is incomplete, insulate
temporary enclosures.
K. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types
needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with
NFPA 241; manage fire-prevention program.
1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas.
2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar
sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel
at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be
followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.
4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning
sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed.
Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.
3.5 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL
A. Contractor's Moisture-Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible
signs of mold that may appear during construction.
B. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are
subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect as follows:
1. Protect porous materials from water damage.
2. Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water.
3. Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete.
4. Remove standing water from decks.
5. Keep deck openings covered or dammed.
C. Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full
enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of
moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows:
1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with high
organic content, into partially enclosed building.
2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage.
3. Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organic matter.
4. Discard or replace water-damaged material.
5. Do not install material that is wet.
6. Discard, replace, or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 7
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
7. Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before
enclosing the material in drywall or other interior finishes.
D. Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the building
enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows:
1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions.
2. Use permanent HVAC system to control humidity.
3. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, relative humidity, and
exposure to water limits.
a. Hygroscopic materials that may support mold growth, including wood and gypsum-
based products, that become wet during the course of construction and remain wet
for 48 hours are considered defective.
b. Measure moisture content of materials that have been exposed to moisture during
construction operations or after installation. Record readings beginning at time of
exposure and continuing daily for 48 hours. Identify materials containing moisture
levels higher than allowed. Report findings in writing to Architect.
c. Remove materials that cannot be completely restored to their manufactured
moisture level within 48 hours.
3.6 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL
A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and
abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.
B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.
1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control,
ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated
results and to avoid possibility of damage.
C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and
protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.
D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has
ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than
Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may
have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work,
clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor.
Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.
2. Remove temporary roads and paved areas not intended for or acceptable for integration
into permanent construction. Where area is intended for landscape development,
remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil.
Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical
compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns.
Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as
required by authorities having jurisdiction.
3. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during
construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 017700
"Closeout Procedures."
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 8
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
END OF SECTION 015000
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 9
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 015240 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:
1. Salvaging nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.
2. Recycling nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.
3. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 017320 "Selective Demolition" for disposition of waste resulting from partial
demolition of buildings, structures, and site improvements, and for disposition of
hazardous waste.
2. Section 022300 "Site Clearing" for disposition of waste resulting from site clearing and
removal of above- and below-grade improvements.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting
from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes
packaging.
B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or
selective demolition operations.
C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale,
recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in
preparation for reuse.
E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in
another facility.
F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent
incorporation into the Work.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 015240 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Achieve end-of-Project rates for salvage/recycling of 75 percent by weight of total
non-hazardous solid waste generated by the Work. Practice efficient waste management in the
use of materials in the course of the Work. Use all reasonable means to divert construction and
demolition waste from landfills and incinerators. Facilitate recycling and salvage of
materials, including the following:
1. Demolition Waste:
a. Asphalt paving.
b. Concrete.
c. Concrete reinforcing steel.
d. Brick.
e. Concrete masonry units.
f. Wood studs.
g. Wood joists.
h. Plywood and oriented strand board.
i. Wood paneling.
j. Wood trim.
k. Structural and miscellaneous steel.
l. Rough hardware.
m. Roofing.
n. Insulation.
o. Doors and frames.
p. Door hardware.
q. Windows.
r. Glazing.
s. Metal studs.
t. Gypsum board.
u. Acoustical tile and panels.
v. Carpet.
w. Carpet pad.
x. Demountable partitions.
y. Equipment.
z. Cabinets.
aa. Plumbing fixtures.
bb. Piping.
cc. Supports and hangers.
dd. Valves.
ee. Sprinklers.
ff. Mechanical equipment.
gg. Refrigerants.
hh. Electrical conduit.
ii. Copper wiring.
jj. Lighting fixtures.
kk. Lamps.
ll. Ballasts.
mm. Electrical devices.
nn. Switchgear and panelboards.
oo. Transformers.
2. Construction Waste:
a. Masonry and CMU.
b. Lumber.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 015240 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
c. Wood sheet materials.
d. Wood trim.
e. Metals.
f. Roofing.
g. Insulation.
h. Carpet and pad.
i. Gypsum board.
j. Piping.
k. Electrical conduit.
l. Packaging: Regardless of salvage/recycle goal indicated in "General" Paragraph
above, salvage or recycle 100 percent of the following uncontaminated packaging
materials:
1) Paper.
2) Cardboard.
3) Boxes.
4) Plastic sheet and film.
5) Polystyrene packaging.
6) Wood crates.
7) Plastic pails.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN: SUBMIT PLAN AT LEAST 10 BUSINESS DAYS PRIOR TO
THE DATE ESTABLISHED FOR COMMENCEMENT OF THE WORK, AND NOT LATER THAN
THE PRE-CONSTRUCTION KICK-OFF MEETING.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. WASTE REDUCTION PROGRESS REPORTS: CONCURRENT WITH EACH APPLICATION
FOR PAYMENT, SUBMIT REPORT. Use form acceptable to Architect. Include the following
information:
1. Material category.
2. Generation point of waste.
3. Total quantity of waste in tons.
4. Quantity of waste salvaged, both estimated and actual in tons.
5. Quantity of waste recycled, both estimated and actual in tons.
6. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) in tons.
7. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) as a percentage of total
waste.
B. Records of Donations: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste donated to
individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.
C. Records of Sales: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste sold to individuals and
organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.
D. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable
waste by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight
tickets, receipts, and invoices.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 015240 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
E. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills
and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts,
and invoices.
F. Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician.
G. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for
recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that
recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician
and date refrigerant was recovered.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by EPA-approved certification
program.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.8 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN
A. General: Develop a waste management plan according to ASTM E 1609 and requirements in
this Section. Plan shall consist of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and
cost/revenue analysis. Distinguish between demolition and construction waste. Indicate
quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure throughout waste management
plan.
B. LEED for Homes V4 MR Credit: The goal of the project is to have a minimum of 2 LEED points
by achieving and construction waste reduction rate of at least 40% using the LEED calculation
methodology.
C. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of demolition, site-clearing, and
construction waste generated by the Work. Include estimated quantities and assumptions for
estimates.
D. Construction Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be
salvaged, recycled, or disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Include points of waste generation,
total quantity of each type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and
transportation procedures.
1. Initial Estimate of all waste to be generated by the project, by weight or by volume,
including demolition, construction, site office waste, and worker food/beverage waste.
2. Identification of all materials targeted for diversion from landfills.
3. Identification of subcontractors/haulers who handle materials and where those materials
will be processed.
4. Measures to be taken on-site to manage, sort, and minimize contamination of materials
to be recycled.
5. Training and communication plan for on-site workers to ensure compliance with CWM
plan.
6. Samples of tracking reports.
E. Construction Waste Management Tracking.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 015240 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1. CWM tracking must follow the requirements of the US Green Building Council’s LEED for
Homes V4 guidance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION
A. General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage,
signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan
during the entire duration of the Contract.
1. Comply with operation, termination, and removal requirements in Section 01500
"Temporary Facilities and Controls."
B. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management
procedures, as appropriate for the Work.
1. Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within 3 days of submittal
return.
2. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review
plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal.
C. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure
minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and
used facilities.
1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that
are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold.
2. Comply with Section 01500 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust and
dirt, environmental protection, and noise control.
3.2 SALVAGING DEMOLITION WASTE
A. Salvaged Items for Reuse in the Work: Salvage items for reuse and handle as follows:
1. Clean salvaged items.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers with label indicating
elements, date of removal, quantity, and location where removed.
3. Store items in a secure area until installation.
4. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
5. Install salvaged items to comply with installation requirements for new materials and
equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to
make items functional for use indicated.
B. Salvaged Items for Sale and Donation: Not permitted on Project site.
C. Salvaged Items for Owner's Use: Salvage items for Owner's use and handle as follows:
1. Clean salvaged items.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 015240 - 5
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers with label indicating
elements, date of removal, quantity, and location where removed.
3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner.
5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
3.3 RECYCLING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL
A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.
B. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for
recycling waste materials shall accrue to Contractor.
C. Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according to recycling
or reuse facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum
contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling process.
D. Procedures: Use “co-mingled” method. “Source-separated” method may be used only if space
is available on site and method is approved by Owner.
1. Provide containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until removed from Project site.
Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials if
found. Cover to prevent windblown dust. Do not locate containers or bins within drip line
of remaining trees.
2. Remove recyclable waste from Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or
processor.
3.4 DISPOSAL OF WASTE
A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove
waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of
accumulate on-site.
2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials.
C. Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
END OF SECTION 015240
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 015240 - 6
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in
Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on
products; special warranties; and comparable products.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 012100 "Allowances" for products selected under an allowance.
2. Section 012300 "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate.
3. Section 016350 "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions.
4. Section 014200 "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or
taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material,"
"equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.
1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or
model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product
literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.
2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or
facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new
products.
3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal
process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service
performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or
exceed those of specified product.
B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's
product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or
model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function,
dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics
for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the
specification.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product.
Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification
Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable
Products" Article.
2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request.
Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product
request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional
information or documentation, whichever is later.
a. Form of Approval: As specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures."
b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a
comparable product request within time allocated.
B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 01330
"Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more
products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if
previously selected products were also options.
1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,
deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Delivery and Handling:
1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent
overcrowding of construction spaces.
2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that
are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other
losses.
3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original
sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for
handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.
4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and
to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.
C. Storage:
1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.
2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight
enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of
installation and concealment.
5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,
ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.
6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.
1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES
A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other
warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on
product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract
Documents.
1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a
particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.
2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide
specific rights for Owner.
B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and
identification, ready for execution.
1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and
properly executed.
2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a
written document using indicated form properly executed.
3. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for
submitting special warranties.
C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES
A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents,
are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.
1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items
needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.
2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are
specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used
successfully in similar situations on other projects.
3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with
requirements of the Contract Documents.
4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make
selection.
5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications
establish salient characteristics of products.
6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or
"or approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable
Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
B. Product Selection Procedures:
1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the
named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions
for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.
2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source,
provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements.
Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be
considered.
3. Products:
a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both
manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with
requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience
will not be considered unless otherwise indicated.
b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available
manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed
product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in
"Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.
4. Manufacturers:
a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names,
provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with
requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience
will not be considered unless otherwise indicated.
b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers,
provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed
manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in
"Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's
product.
5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product
indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or
indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers.
Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other
characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in
"Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the
other named manufacturers.
C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample",
provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's
decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.
1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other
specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 01635 "Substitution
Procedures" for proposal of product.
D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by
Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with
requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's
product line that includes both standard and premium items.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable
product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied,
Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these
requirements:
1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract
Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the
indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.
2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the
Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size,
durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.
3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.
4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and
names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.
5. Samples, if requested.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 016000
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 5
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 6
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 016350 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 002600 “Bidding Substitution Procedures” for substation requests during the
bidding process.
2. Section 012100 "Allowances" for products selected under an allowance.
3. Section 012300 "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate.
4. Section 016000 "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable
product submittals for products by listed manufacturers.
5. Section 016360 “Substitution Request Form” for form to be submitted to Architect.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from
those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.
1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to
changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or
unavailability of required warranty terms.
2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not
required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to
Contractor or Owner.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Substitution Requests: Submit each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or
installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing
numbers and titles.
1. Substitution Request Form: Use form provided in Project Manual.
2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,
as applicable:
a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be
provided, if applicable.
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 016350 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other
parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate
contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.
c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of
the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section.
Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size,
durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific
features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work
specified.
d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and
installation procedures.
e. Samples, where applicable or requested.
f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested.
g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and
addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners.
h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test
results for compliance with requirements indicated.
i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project.
j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed
substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall
Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided
within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's
letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in
delivery.
k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.
l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in
the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible
with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated.
m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently
become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce
indicated results.
3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection
of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of
additional information or documentation, whichever is later.
a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or
Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.
b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed
substitution within time allocated.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution
with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility
tests recommended by manufacturers.
1.6 PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved
substitutions.
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 016350 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for
change, but not later than 30 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related
submittals.
1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the
following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect
will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these
requirements:
a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
indicated results.
b. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified
product provided.
c. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
d. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.
e. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having
jurisdiction.
f. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
g. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
h. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
i. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution
has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is
compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.
B. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within
30 days after commencement of the Work. Requests received after that time may be
considered or rejected at discretion of Architect.
1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the
following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect
will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these
requirements:
a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy
conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities
Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include
compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of
other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.
b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract
Documents.
c. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
indicated results.
d. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified
product provided.
e. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
f. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.
g. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having
jurisdiction.
h. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
i. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
j. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 016350 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
k. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution
has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is
compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 016350
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 016350 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM
Submittal Number and Name:
Product, Fabrication, or Installation Method to be replaced:
All Specifications and Drawings affected:
List all changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work, and/or work performed by Owner,
necessary to accommodate proposed substitution:
Detailed comparison of all of substitution’s significant qualities (e.g. performance, weight, size, durability,
visual effect, warranty, etc.) with specified Work:
Impact of substitution’s effect on schedule compared to schedule without approval of substitution (include
impact on overall Contract Time):
Cost impact on Contract Sum (net change):
Maintenance considerations and availability of local parts and servicing:
The undersigned certifies that the proposed substitution conforms to the requirements in the Contract
Documents in every respect and is appropriate for the applications indicated. The undersigned further
waives any and all rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary due to
the time required to review this Request, due to the failure of the substitution to perform adequately, or
due to additional modifications to the scope of work that may be necessary because of the incorporation
of the substitution.
Signature
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM 016360 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM 016360 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 017000 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the
Work including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Construction layout.
2. Field engineering and surveying.
3. Installation of the Work.
4. Cutting and patching.
5. Progress cleaning.
6. Starting and adjusting.
7. Protection of installed construction.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 011000 "Summary" for limits on use of Project site.
2. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys.
3. Section 017320 "Selective Demolition" for demolition and removal of selected portions of
the building.
4. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project
Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and
levels, and final cleaning.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of
other work.
B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after
installation of other work.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For land surveyor.
B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and elevation of
improvements comply with requirements.
C. Certified Surveys: Submit two copies signed by land surveyor.
D. Final Property Survey: Submit two copies showing the Work performed and record survey data.
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 017000 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in
jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying
services of the kind indicated.
B. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of
construction elements.
1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of
locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding.
Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut
and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity
or increase deflection.
2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components
in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in
increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.
3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or
components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in
reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance
or decreased operational life or safety
4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual
evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a
manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities.
Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually
unsatisfactory manner.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written
recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.
1. Use products for patching that comply with requirements in Section 013610 "Sustainable
Design Requirements."
B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed
surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent
possible.
1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when
installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional
performance of in-place materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate
and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the
Work.
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 017000 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of
sanitary sewer, septic systems, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground
electrical services, and other utilities.
2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities
serving Project site.
B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the
Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where
indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance. Record observations.
1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of
connections before equipment and fixture installation.
2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are
to be installed.
3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing
finishes or primers.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding
with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility that is necessary to adjust, move,
or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances
located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck
measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to
other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before
fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
Work.
C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown
diagrammatically on Drawings.
D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for
clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of
Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in
Section 01310 "Project Management and Coordination."
E. Surface and Substrate Preparation: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for
preparation of substrates to receive subsequent work.
3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on
Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are
discovered, notify Architect promptly.
B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 017000 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of
construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.
2. Establish limits on use of Project site.
3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain
required dimensions.
4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.
5. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses.
6. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable
tolerances.
7. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established
by authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill
and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations.
D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building
foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and
electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels.
Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.
E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and
levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name
and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log
available for reference by Architect.
3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING
A. Identification: Identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property corners.
B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference
points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control
points during construction operations.
1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written
approval of Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points
promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to
Architect before proceeding.
2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base
replacements on the original survey control points.
C. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site,
referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having
jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.
1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record
Documents.
2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide
temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work.
3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked
construction to its original condition.
D. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work
requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations,
angles, and elevations of construction and sitework.
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 017000 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
E. Final Property Survey: Engage a land surveyor to prepare a final property survey showing
significant features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by
land surveyor, that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately
positioned as shown on the survey.
1. Show boundary lines, monuments, streets, site improvements and utilities, existing
improvements and significant vegetation, adjoining properties, acreage, grade contours,
and the distance and bearing from a site corner to a legal point.
2. Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with
authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey."
3.5 INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and
elevation, as indicated.
1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.
2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance
and ease of removal for replacement.
3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated.
4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches in occupied spaces and 90 inches in
unoccupied spaces.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in
applications indicated.
C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.
Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.
D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or
loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.
E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction
items on site and placement in permanent locations.
F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.
G. Tem plates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be
factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that
adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated
requirements.
H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate
size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned
with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify
size and type required for load conditions.
1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at
heights directed by Architect.
2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and
items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver
such items to Project site in time for installation.
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 017000 - 5
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,
arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.
J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered
hazardous.
3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching.
Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.
1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance
of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their
original condition.
B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or
damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials
so as not to void existing warranties.
C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.
D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.
Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be
exposed during cutting and patching operations.
E. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar
operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or
adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply
with original Installer's written recommendations.
1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not
hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with
minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.
2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.
3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a
diamond-core drill.
4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where
required by cutting and patching operations.
5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be
removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent
entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.
6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
F. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations
following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as
practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Sections, where applicable.
1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to
demonstrate physical integrity of installation.
2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish
restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of
patching and refinishing.
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 017000 - 6
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing
materials.
b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.
3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area
into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even
surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall
coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and
appearance.
a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer
and intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply
final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide
additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.
4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-
plane surface of uniform appearance.
5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a
weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure.
G. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint,
mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.
3.7 PROGRESS CLEANING
A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce
requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.
1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and
debris.
2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if
the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F.
3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste.
Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.
a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.
B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for
proper execution of the Work.
1. Remove liquid spills promptly.
2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the
entire work area, as appropriate.
D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written
instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials
specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning
materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed
surfaces.
E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 017000 - 7
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to
ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials
down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 015240
"Construction Waste Management."
H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining
materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from
damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through
the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure
operability without damaging effects.
J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the
construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or
otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.
3.8 STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A. Coordinate startup and adjusting of equipment and operating components with manufacturer’s
requirements.
B. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove
malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
C. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation
without binding.
D. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
E. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 01400 "Quality
Requirements."
3.9 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
END OF SECTION 017000
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 017000 - 8
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including,
but not limited to, the following:
1. Substantial Completion procedures.
2. Final completion procedures.
3. Warranties.
4. Final cleaning.
5. Repair of the Work.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 017000 "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning of Project site.
2. Section 017810 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record
Specifications, and record Product Data.
3. Section 017820 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance
manual requirements.
4. Section 018200 "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing Owner's
personnel.
1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of five days
prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion.
1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's
personnel of changeover in security provisions.
3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment.
4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion.
5. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.
6. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,
construction tools, and similar elements.
7. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
8. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual
defects.
B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Submit the following a minimum of five days prior to
requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed
and corrected (Contractor's punch list).
C. Inspection: After the Contractor’s punch list has been submitted to Architect, submit a written
request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect will
either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will
prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of
items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be
completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.
1.4 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A. Procedures Prior to Final Completion: Complete the following a minimum of five days prior to
requesting inspection for determining date of Final Completion.
1. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,
equipment, and systems.
B. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final
completion, complete the following:
1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction
permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities.
Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.
2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project
record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction
photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and
similar final record information.
a. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in Section 018200
"Demonstration and Training."
3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties,
workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar
documents.
4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools,
spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by
Architect. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.
a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of
maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item
and name and number of related Specification Section.
5. Submit test/adjust/balance records.
6. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and
maintenance.
7. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 01290 "Payment
Procedures."
8. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage
complying with insurance requirements.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
9. Submit pest-control final inspection report.
C. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of
five days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On
receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled
requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify
Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
1.5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by
construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if
necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.
1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order.
2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,
individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
3. Include the following information at the top of each page:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Name of Architect.
d. Name of Contractor.
e. Page number.
4. Submit list of incomplete items as a Microsoft Excel electronic file.
1.6 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES
A. Include warranties in operation and maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or
fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially
hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
1. Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not
applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum
allowable VOC levels.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FINAL CLEANING
A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply
with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution
regulations.
B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each
surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and
maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification
of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:
a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,
including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and
other foreign substances.
b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other
foreign deposits.
c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured
surface.
d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from
Project site.
e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.
f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,
free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural
weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original
condition.
g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs,
plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean
according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain.
j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.
Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials.
Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.
k. Remove labels that are not permanent.
l. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment.
Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign
substances.
m. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains
resulting from water exposure.
n. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed
surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.
o. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during
construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection.
p. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.
q. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
C. Pest Control: Comply with pest control requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities
and Controls." Prepare written report.
D. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 015240
"Construction Waste Management."
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK
A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of
Substantial Completion.
B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective
parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly
adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored,
provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired.
Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified
condition.
1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other
damaged transparent materials.
2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces.
Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration.
a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including
mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels
and identification.
3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede
operation or reduce longevity.
4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and
noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for
new fixtures.
END OF SECTION 017700
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 5
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 6
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 017810 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents,
including the following:
1. Record Drawings.
2. Record Specifications.
3. Record Product Data.
4. Miscellaneous record submittals.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 017000 "Execution Requirements" for final property survey.
2. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures.
3. Section 017820 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance
manual requirements.
1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:
1. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows:
a. Submit one paper-copy set of marked-up record prints.
b. Submit one CD or DVD containing PDF electronic files of scanned record prints.
c. Architect will indicate whether general scope of changes, additional information
recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable.
B. Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy and one CD or DVD containing scanned PDF
electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and
contract modifications.
C. Record Product Data: Submit one paper copy and one CD or DVD containing scanned PDF
electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of each submittal.
1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals,
submit duplicate marked-up Product Data as a component of manual.
D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: See other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record-
keeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Submit
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017810 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
one paper copy and one CD or DVD containing scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up
paper copy of each submittal.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop
Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued.
1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies
from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data,
whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide
information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.
a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be
difficult to identify or measure and record later.
b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique.
c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it.
d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.
e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic
documentation.
2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Dimensional changes to Drawings.
b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings.
c. Depths of foundations below first floor.
d. Locations and depths of underground utilities.
e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.
f. Revisions to electrical circuitry.
g. Actual equipment locations.
h. Duct size and routing.
i. Locations of concealed internal utilities.
j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive.
k. Changes made following Architect's written orders.
l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings.
m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions.
n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.
3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use
personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record
prints.
4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish
between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.
5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted
from original Drawings.
6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order
numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.
B. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial
Completion, review marked-up record prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a full set
of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows:
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017810 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1. Format: PDF electronic file.
2. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints.
Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable.
3. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for resolution.
2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS
A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and
equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to
provide a record of selections made.
4. Note related Change Orders and record Drawings where applicable.
B. Format: Submit one paper copy and scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of
Record Specifications.
2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA
A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in
manufacturer's written instructions for installation.
3. Note related Change Orders and record Drawings where applicable.
B. Format: Submit one paper copy and scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of
Product Data.
1. Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and
title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS
A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous
record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file
miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. Miscellaneous
record submittals include:
1. Testing and inspection reports.
2. Special reports prepared by contractor.
B. Format: Submit one paper copy and scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up
miscellaneous record submittals.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017810 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by Specification Section
number and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE
A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project
record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they
occur; do not wait until end of Project.
B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the
field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record
documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean,
dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record
documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
END OF SECTION 017810
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017810 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 017820 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and
maintenance manuals, including the following:
1. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.
2. Product maintenance manuals.
3. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation
and maintenance manuals.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular
interaction.
B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual
Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed
manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.
1. Architect will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are
acceptable.
2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions
and field conditions.
B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format:
1. PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file.
Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect.
a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable
item name. Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance
directory.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017820 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
b. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals.
2. Three paper copies. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Enclose
title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves. Architect will retain all copies.
C. Initial Manual Submittal: Submit draft copy of each manual at least 30 days before commencing
demonstration and training. Architect will comment on whether general scope and content of
manual are acceptable. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's comments.
D. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form at least 5 days prior to requesting
inspection for Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for
each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a
system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:
1. Title page.
2. Table of contents.
3. Manual contents.
B. Title Page: Include the following information:
1. Subject matter included in manual.
2. Name and address of Project.
3. Name and address of Owner.
4. Date of submittal.
5. Name and contact information for Contractor.
6. Name and contact information for Construction Manager.
7. Name and contact information for Architect.
8. Name and contact information for Commissioning Authority.
9. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the
systems contained in the manuals.
10. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.
C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to
the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project
Manual.
1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to
accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each
volume of the set.
D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by
system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems,
equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.
E. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic
PDF file for each manual type required.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017820 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where
scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable
file size.
2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based on file
names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment
names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each
system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite
manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment
names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark
panel on opening file.
F. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled volumes.
1. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness
necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear
plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to
hold folded oversize sheets.
a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize
data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-
reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper
operation or maintenance of equipment or system.
b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents.
Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.
2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual.
Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components
of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification
Section number and title of Project Manual.
3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic
software storage media for computerized electronic equipment.
4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper.
5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.
a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and
use as foldouts.
b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled
envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in
manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents,
and drawing locations.
2.2 OPERATION MANUALS
A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in
individual Specification Sections and the following information:
1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and
equipment indicated on Contract Documents.
2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility.
3. Operating standards.
4. Operating procedures.
5. Operating logs.
6. Wiring diagrams.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017820 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
7. Control diagrams.
8. Piped system diagrams.
9. Precautions against improper use.
10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.
B. Descriptions: Include the following:
1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract
Documents.
2. Manufacturer's name.
3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.
4. Equipment function.
5. Operating characteristics.
6. Limiting conditions.
7. Performance curves.
8. Engineering data and tests.
9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.
C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Startup procedures.
2. Equipment or system break-in procedures.
3. Routine and normal operating instructions.
4. Regulation and control procedures.
5. Instructions on stopping.
6. Normal shutdown instructions.
7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
9. Special operating instructions and procedures.
D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls
as installed.
E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for
identification.
2.3 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish.
Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and
sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.
B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and
arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and
telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference
Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or
identifier where applicable.
C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Product name and model number.
2. Manufacturer's name.
3. Color, pattern, and texture.
4. Material and chemical composition.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017820 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.
D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:
1. Inspection procedures.
2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.
5. Repair instructions.
E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and
related services.
F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
2.4 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include
source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures,
maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance
service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.
B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual,
identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each
product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance
service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and
drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.
C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation
including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:
1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins.
2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly
and component removal, replacement, and assembly.
3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.
4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.
D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential
maintenance procedures:
1. Test and inspection instructions.
2. Troubleshooting guide.
3. Precautions against improper maintenance.
4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.
5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.
6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available.
E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of
required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine
maintenance and service with standard time allotment.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017820 - 5
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly,
quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.
2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording
maintenance.
F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with
parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local
sources of maintenance materials and related services.
G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and
telephone number of service agent.
H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION
A. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care
and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.
B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance
data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment
not part of a system.
1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information
for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.
2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an
instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.
C. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include
only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each
product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a
tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents.
Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.
1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and
where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment
or systems.
D. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the
relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence
and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to
ensure correct illustration of completed installation.
1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance
manuals.
2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared record Drawings in Section 017810 "Project
Record Documents."
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017820 - 6
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
E. Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and
maintenance documentation.
END OF SECTION 017820
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017820 - 7
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017820 - 8
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 018200 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel,
including the following:
1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment.
2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment.
3. Demonstration and training video recordings.
1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Demonstration and Training Video Recordings: Submit two copies within seven days of end of
each training module.
1. Identification: On each copy, provide an applied label with the following information:
a. Name of Project.
b. Name of Contractor.
c. Date of video recording.
d. Content of video recording.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to
minimize disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's personnel.
B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time,
and course content.
C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM
A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes training for each system and
for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections.
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 018200 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following:
a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.
b. Performance and design criteria.
c. Operating standards.
d. Regulatory requirements.
e. Equipment function.
f. Operating characteristics.
g. Limiting conditions.
h. Performance curves.
2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail:
a. Emergency manuals.
b. Operations manuals.
c. Maintenance manuals.
d. Project record documents.
e. Identification systems.
f. Warranties and bonds.
g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.
3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:
a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages.
b. Instructions on stopping.
c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.
d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits.
e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems.
f. Special operating instructions and procedures.
4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable:
a. Startup procedures.
b. Equipment or system break-in procedures.
c. Routine and normal operating instructions.
d. Regulation and control procedures.
e. Control sequences.
f. Safety procedures.
g. Instructions on stopping.
h. Normal shutdown instructions.
i. Operating procedures for emergencies.
j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure.
k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
m. Special operating instructions and procedures.
5. Adjustments: Include the following:
a. Alignments.
b. Checking adjustments.
c. Noise and vibration adjustments.
d. Economy and efficiency adjustments.
6. Troubleshooting: Include the following:
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 018200 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
a. Diagnostic instructions.
b. Test and inspection procedures.
7. Maintenance: Include the following:
a. Inspection procedures.
b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
d. Procedures for routine cleaning
e. Procedures for preventive maintenance.
f. Procedures for routine maintenance.
g. Instruction on use of special tools.
8. Repairs: Include the following:
a. Diagnosis instructions.
b. Repair instructions.
c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly
instructions.
d. Instructions for identifying parts and components.
e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training
module.
3.2 INSTRUCTION
A. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain
systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.
1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants.
B. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires
seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.
1. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice.
C. Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on-site in the completed and fully
operational facility using the actual equipment in-place. Conduct training using final operation
and maintenance data submittals.
3.3 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING VIDEO RECORDINGS
A. General: Record demonstration and training.
B. Video: Provide minimum 640 x 480 video resolution converted to format file type acceptable to
Owner, on electronic media.
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 018200 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1. Electronic Media: Read-only format compact disc acceptable to Owner, with commercial-
grade graphic label.
2. File Hierarchy: Organize folder structure and file locations according to project manual
table of contents. Provide complete screen-based menu.
3. File Names: Utilize file names based upon name of equipment generally described in
video segment, as identified in Project specifications.
4. Contractor and Installer Contact File: Using appropriate software, create a file for
inclusion on the Equipment Demonstration and Training DVD that describes the following
for each Contractor involved on the Project, arranged according to Project table of
contents:
a. Name of Contractor/Installer.
b. Business address.
c. Business phone number.
d. Point of contact.
e. E-mail address.
END OF SECTION 018200
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 018200 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. All of the Contract Documents, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 General requirements, apply to the work of and are hereby made a part of this
Section.
B. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein
affecting the work of this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this
Section.
C. This section contains information that applies to all work performed under the contract and is
hereby made a part of each specification section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Section includes all labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1. Furnishing, placing, curing and finishing of all plain and reinforced concrete work for the
building and outside the building including but not limited to, foundations, sidewalks,
steps, ramps. Also include all concrete work necessary to complete the work of other
trades including concrete encased ductbanks for electrical, telephone and cable TV
systems, as well as pits and chambers for mechanical, electrical and plumbing
requirements
2. Furnishing and placing of reinforcing steel and related accessories
3. Furnishing, erection and removal of formwork and shoring
4. Furnishing and installation of joint fillers
5. Concrete mix design
6. Coordination with all other trades for location of all pipe sleeves, duct openings, keys,
chases, electrical boxes and conduits, anchors, dowels, inserts, fastenings and other
devices required by other trades
7. Hardening and sealing of exposed concrete floors
8. Finishing of exposed concrete surfaces as herein specified
9. Installation of anchor bolts, keys, dowels, inserts, etc. furnished by other trades
10. Furnishing and installation of exterior pads and interior housekeeping pads for
mechanical, plumbing, fire protection and electrical equipment called for in the drawings
11. Furnishing and placing continuous vapor barrier below all slab-on-grade locations
B. Related Work: Carefully examine all Contract Documents for requirements that affect the work
of this section. Other specification sections which directly relate to the work of this section
include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Section 010250 – UNIT PRICES
2. Section 023000 – EARTHWORK: EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
3. Section 025000 – PAVING AND WALKWAYS
4. Section 055000 – MISCELLANEOUS EMBEDDED ITEMS
5. Section 061000 – ROUGH CARPENTRY
C. Sustainable Design Intent: To the extent possible, comply with the requirements of Energy Star.
1.3 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): Listed Standards.
B. American Concrete Institute (ACI): Listed Standards.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide the following FOR REVIEW in accordance with Section 01300 – SUBMITTALS:
1. Shop and erection drawings for reinforcing steel and manufacturer’s data for other
products for Architect’s approval. Include a full foundation layout shop drawing.
2. Shop drawings for fabricating and placing reinforcing steel. Show all required information
for cutting, bending and placing reinforcing bars, and show all accessories and support
bars on placing drawings. Indicate suitable marks for placing bars.
3. Fabrication of any material or performing of any work prior to the final approval of the
shop drawings will be entirely at the risk of the Contractor.
4. The Contractor is responsible for furnishing and installing materials called for in Contract
Documents, even though these materials may have been omitted from approved shop
drawings.
B. Provide the following in accordance with Section 01300 – SUBMITTALS:
1. Design Mix for each type of concrete
2. Product Data sheets for each additive
1.5 TESTING, CONTROL AND INSPECTION
A. Retain the services of a qualified testing agency, approved by the Architect, to test aggregate
and to prepare a mix design for each strength of concrete specified; and shall submit such mix
designs and test results to the Architect for approval. Mix designs may also be based on
proven current designs accompanied by test results. The cost of all such preliminary services
shall be borne by the Contractor. All other testing and inspection will be performed by the
Owner’s testing agency.
B. A qualified testing agency for such other testing and inspection will be selected by the Owner
and shall be paid directly by the Owner. Structural tests and inspections shall be in accordance
with Chapter 17 of the Mass. Building Code, Eighth Edition.
1. For moisture testing, comply with one or more of the following:
a. ASTM F1869 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission
Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride
b. ASTM F2170 - Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in
Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
c. ASTM F2420 - Standard Test method for determining Relative Humidity on the
Surface of Concrete Floor Slabs Using Relative Humidity Probe Measurement and
Insulated Hood
d. ASTM F710 - Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring
C. Cooperate fully with the testing agency’s work in taking and storing samples. Provide storage
facilities for concrete cylinders at the site. Facilities must protect cylinders from effects of low or
high temperatures.
D. Accept as final results of tests made by the qualified professional testing organization engaged
by the Owner.
E. Testing required because of changes requested by the Contractor in materials, sources of
materials, or mix proportions; and extra testing of concrete or materials because of failure to
meet the Specification requirements are to be paid for by the Contractor.
F. Advise the Testing Agency of intent to place concrete by notification at least 24 hours prior to
time of placement.
G. All materials, measuring, mixing, transportation, placing and curing shall be subject to
inspection by the Architect or by the Testing Agency. However, such inspection, wherever
conducted, shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to furnish materials and
workmanship in accordance with Contract requirements, nor shall inspector’s acceptance of
material or workmanship prevent later rejection of same by the Owner or Architect if defects are
discovered.
1.6 NOTIFICATION OF RELATED TRADES
A. Notify all other trades responsible for installing chases, inserts, sleeves, anchors, louvers, etc.,
when ready for such installation, and for final checking immediately before concrete is placed.
Cooperate with such trades to obtain proper installation.
B. Leave openings in walls for pipes, ducts, etc., for mechanical and electrical work as shown on
Drawings or as required by layout of mechanical systems. Layout and reinforcing of openings
not specifically shown on the Structural Drawings shall be submitted to the Architect for review
prior to execution.
1.7 UNIT PRICES
A. Provide the following unit prices in accordance with Section 010250 – UNIT PRICES:
1. Furnish and place lean concrete mix per cubic yard
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.1 CONCRETE
A. Portland Cement: Low alkali ASTM C-150 Type I at all exposed concrete. Type I and II
elsewhere. All cement of each type shall be from a single source. Cement to have 30% fly ash
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
with loss on ignition not exceeding 6%, in compliance with ACI 226.3R and ASTM C-618 or
30% ground granulated blast-furnace slag in compliance with ACI 226. 1R and ASTM C-989
Covering blast-furnace slag (grades 100 or 120).
B. Natural Aggregates:
1. Fine Aggregates for Concrete: Shall be natural low alkali sand consisting of clean, hard,
durable, uncoated particles, conforming to ASTM C33. Organic content shall be
determined according to ASTM C40, and supernatant liquid above test sample shall
show color no darker than reference standard color solution prepared at same time.
Allow no frozen or partially frozen aggregate in the mix Coarse Aggregate for Concrete:
For normal Eighth concrete use low alkali crushed stone or gravel from approved source
conforming to ASTM C33. Coarse aggregate shall not contain greater amounts of
deleterious material than specified in Table 3, ASTM C33.
C. Water from approved source, potable, clean, and free of oils, salt, alkali, organic matter and
other deleterious material.
D. Admixtures:
1. Mid-Range Water Reducing Agent: Shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C494,
Type A, and shall be “MIRA 70” by W. R. Grace & Company or approved equivalent. A
mid-range water reducing agent shall be utilized in all classes of concrete.
2. High-Range Water Reducing (HRWR) Admixture (Super Plasticizer): Shall comply with
ASTM C494, Type F or Type G and shall contain not more than 0.05% chloride ions. A
high-range water reducing agent shall be utilized in all concrete with a water cement ratio
less than 0.45. High-range water reducing admixtures shall be by one of the following, or
approved equivalent:
a. “ADVA Series”, by W.R. Grace & Co.
b. “Eucon 37", by The Euclid Chemical Co.
c. “Sikament”, by Sika Chemical Corp.
3. Air-Entraining Admixture: Shall be utilized in all classes of concrete and shall comply
with ASTM C260. Air-entraining agent must be by same manufacturer as water-reducing
agent and shall be one of the following, or approved equivalent:
a. “Darex II” by W. R. Grace & Co.
b. “Airmix or Perma-Air”, by The Euclid Chemical Co.
c. “MB-VR”, by Master Builders.
4. Water-Reducing Set Retarders: Shall conform with ASTM C494 Type D and may be used
when ambient temperatures exceed 80°F Set retarders shall be one of the following, or
approved equivalent:
a. “Daratard-17", by W. R. Grace & Co.
b. “Eucon Retarder”, by The Euclid Chemical Co.
c. “Pozzolith 100-XR”, by Master Builders.
5. Accelerator Admixture: Non-chloride and non-corrosive accelerators shall conform to
ASTM C494 Type C and may be used when temperatures are below 50°F The
accelerator admixture shall be one of the following, or approved equivalent:
a. “Polarset”, by W. R. Grace & Co.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
b. “Accelguard 80", by The Euclid Chemical Co.
c. “Pozzutec 20", by Master Builders.
6. Prohibited Admixtures: The use of calcium chloride, thiocynanates and other admixtures
containing greater than 0.05% chloride ions shall not be accepted.
E. Concrete Reinforcement:
1. Reinforcing steel shall conform to ASTM Specification A-615 Grade 60, deformed bars.
2. Welded wire fabric shall conform to ASTM Specification A-1064. Supply in flat sheets.
3. Bar supports, metal accessories and other devices necessary for proper assembly of
concrete reinforcing shall be of standardized factory-made wire bar supports. All bar
supports in exposed concrete shall have plastic tips to prevent rust spots on exposed
surfaces. Wire for tying shall be 18 gauge black annealed wire conforming to ASTM
Specification A-82. Snap ties are to be stainless steel and ALL tie holes (exposed and
below finish grade) shall be plugged and finished smooth with an approved non-shrink
hydraulic cement.
F. Formwork:
1. Forms: Except for exposed surfaces, formwork material shall be APA labeled exterior
plyform Class 1, B-B or as approved by the Architect, not less than 5/8 in. thick. For all
exposed surfaces plywood forms shall be plastic coated. Exposed cylindrical columns
and column encasements shall be formed with steel formwork providing a smooth finish
to the finished concrete. Provide suitable form inserts for reglets, rustication joints, batten
detail and champhers as required on the Architectural Drawings.
2. Form Oil: Oil shall be of a non-staining type, specifically manufactured for concrete forms.
3. Form Ties: Except for exposed surfaces, factory-fabricated, removable or snap back, of
approved design. Wire shall be at least 1-1/2 in. back from surfaces. For all exposed
concrete work forms shall be tied in such a way that no evidence of ties is visible on the
finished surfaces.
4. Design Criteria:
a. Design, construct, erect, support, brace, maintain and remove forms to comply with
ACI 318 parts 1, 2 and 3.
b. Comply with ACI 347 for loads, lateral pressures and allowable stresses and
include wind loads.
c. Construct formwork so concrete surfaces comply with ACI 301 Chapter 4 and ACI
347.
d. Maximum allowable deflection of forming surfaces from concrete pressure is
length/360 between supports.
G. Non-Shrink Grout: Shall be Embeco 153 by Master Builders, Sonogrout by Sonneborn
Building Products, Five Star Grout by U.S. Grout Corporation, or equal approved by the
Architect. Compressive strength of grout shall not be less than 5000 psi at 7 days and 7500
psi at 28 days.
H. Patching Compound: Shall be COLMA-DUR by Sika Chemical Corporation, DARAWELD-C
by W. R. Grace, or equal approved by the Architect. Patching compound and leveling mortar
at floor slab shall be Portland Cement based with minimum 3000 psi compressive strengths,
Sika Repair 222 by Sika Chemical Corporation or equal approved by the Architect.
I. Provide 15-mil polyethylene vapor barrier per Geotechnical Report.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 5
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
J. Chemical surface sealer/hardener for concrete shall be Horne Clear Seal by A.C. Horn
Company, Kure-N-Seal by Sonneborn Building Products, Division of Contech Inc., or KUREZ
DR VOX by Euclid Chemical Co. or approved equal chlorinated rubber base material at 22%
solids. The material shall be applied both in accordance with the Manufacturer’s
recommendations for a curing compound on the wet concrete and as a hardener on fully
cured concrete just prior to the occupancy.
1. Concrete curing methods shall be one of the following:
a. Continuous application of steam (not exceeding 150 degress F) or mist spray; or
b. Application of waterproof sheet material conforming to ASTM C171; or
c. Application of white polyethylene sheeting (4mils thick) conforming to ASTM C171.
K. Concrete inserts shall be as required on the Drawings.
L. Joint Filler: Where used with caulking or sealants shall be non-extruding, self-expanding filler
strips conforming to ASTM D1752, Type III, and AASHO N153, Type II, as manufactured by
Celotex Corporation, W.R. Meadows, Inc., W.R. Grace and Company, or equal approved by the
Architect. Where no sealant or caulking is required, strips may be non-extruding bituminous
type in accordance with ASTM D1751. Use Homex 300 fiberboard joint filler where appropriate.
This filler contains 100% post consumer waste paper material. Joint Filler available from:
Homasote, Inc., Lower Ferry Road., P.O. Box 7240, West Trenton, NJ 08628, Phone: 609-883-
3300, Toll-free:800-257-9491, Fax: 609-883-3497.
M. Joint sealant shall be Formula T-250 two component modified epoxy sealant by Permagile
Corporation or equal approved by the Architect. Also refer to Section 033000.3.5.
N. Bonding Agent: Shall be “Sika” Armatec 110, or approved equal.
O. Waterstops shall be Volclay RX-100 or equal approved by the Architect. Alternative types of
waterstops may be submitted for the approval of the Architect. Submittal shall include a
complete description of the product including installation and jointing procedures.
P. Liquid chemical hardener for concrete shall be Hornolith by A.C. Horn Company; Surfhard by
Euclid Chemical Company, or approved equal zinc and/or magnesium silicofluoride with
penetrating agent. The material shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s written
recommendations and shall be compatible with curing techniques.
2.2 STORAGE OF MATERIALS
A. All materials shall be stored to prevent damage from the elements and other causes.
B. Cement and aggregates shall be stored in such a manner as to prevent deterioration or
intrusion of foreign matter. Any materials which have deteriorated, or which have been
damaged, shall not be used for concrete.
C. Store reinforcement steel on wood skids to protect it from weather, oil, earth and damage from
trucking or other construction operations. Reinforcement shall be free from loose mill scale,
rust, form oil, concrete splatter and other extraneous coatings at the time it is embedded in the
concrete.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 6
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
2.3 CONCRETE MIXES FOR CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by laboratory trial batch or field
experience methods as specified in ACI 301. For the trial batch method, use an independent
testing agency acceptable to Architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs.
1. Do not use the same testing agency for field quality control testing.
2. Confirm cement contains no less than 30% fly ash or ground granulated blast-furnace
slag content by weight.
B. Fly Ash available from:
1. ISG Industries, Steve Madden, 13 Barrington Court, Niskayuna, NY 12309. Phone: (518)
464-9008
2. Combustion Products Management Inc., 105 Cherry Street, PO Box 339, Ithaca, NY
14850. Tel (607) 273-1222 Fax (607) 273-8730
C. Strength, cement and water requirements
Design Compressive Strength
Testing Age Maximum W / cm Ratio
f’c 7 Days 28 Days .
4000 psi 3300 psi 4670 psi 0.48
3000 psi 2500 psi 3500 psi 0.55
* This is total water in mix at time of placement, including free water of aggregates and
liquid mixtures.
**NOTE: For concrete exposed to weather, the maximum water/cement ratio shall be
0.45. Use high-range water reducing admixtures for water/cement ratio equal to or less
than 0.45.
**NOTE: For all concrete with a water/cement ratio greater than 0.45, use a mid-range
water reducing agent.
D. Air-entraining and water-reducing agents shall be used in all concrete in strict accordance with
the manufacturers printed instructions. Total air entrained in freshly-mixed concrete shall be
6.0% plus or minus 1.5% of volume of concrete, except slabs with metallic floor hardener shall
contain 2.0% maximum, with required strengths maintained.
E. Slump of concrete:
1. Slabs-on-grade and footings: 3”
2. Reinforced columns, beams, joists, slabs, slab-on-grade, slabs-on-deck, ramps, walls,
and piers: Not more than 4”
F. Premix admixtures in solution form and dispense as recommended by the manufacturer.
Include the water in the solution in the design water content of the mixtures.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 7
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
3.1 FORMING FOR CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
A. Acceptable tolerances shall be as specified in ACI Standard 247, Recommended Practice for
Concrete Formwork".
B. ACI 301-2005, Specifications for Structural Concrete, Chapter 4 - Formwork, is hereby made a
part of this Specification.
C. Construct formwork conform ing to shapes, lines, and dimensions shown, plumb and straight,
and shall be maintained sufficiently rigid to prevent deformation under load. Construct
sufficiently tight to prevent the leakage of grout. Securely brace and shore forms to prevent the
leakage of grout. Securely brace and shore forms to prevent their displacement and to safely
support the construction loads.
D. Treat forms with a form release agent applied according to the manufacturer’s instructions, by
roller, brush or spray to produce a uniform thin film without bubbles or streaks. Apply the
release agent in two coats for the first use of the form and in one coat for each additional use.
E. ACI-301-2005, Section 13.3 - Forms, is also hereby made a part of this Specification.
3.2 MIXING PROCESS FOR CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
A. Ready-mixed concrete shall be mixed and transported in accordance with Specification for
Ready-Mixed Concrete ASTM C94, Alt No. 3 and ACI STANDARD 304, Recommended
Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete.
3.3 REINFORCING FOR CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
A. ACI 301-2005, Specification for Structural Concrete, Chapter 5 - Reinforcement, is hereby
made a part of this Section.
B. Reinforcing steel in areas noted on the drawings shall be epoxy coated.
3.4 EMBEDDED ITEMS FOR CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
A. Coordinate the installation of all inserts required by other trades. Such inserts normally are to
be in place prior to the placing of reinforcing steel.
B. Place all required anchor bolts, anchor plates and dowels. All anchor bolts shall be set to
correct locations by template.
C. ACI 301-2005, Specification for Structural Concrete, Sections 6.4 and 6.5, are hereby made a
part of this Specification.
3.5 JOINTS FOR CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
A. ACI 301-2005, Specification for Structural Concrete, Sections 6.1, 6.2 and 6.3 are hereby made
a part of this Specification.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 8
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
B. Construction joints shall be formed with keyed bulkheads. The Contractor may submit for the
approval of the Architect alternative forming methods for construction joints at walls and slabs.
Beam joints shall be formed as specified.
C. Control joints shall be as shown on the drawings.
D. Saw-cutting of slabs-on-grade must occur within a maximum of 24 hours after the start of
concrete placement. Fill all saw-cut joints in concrete slabs which are to remain exposed with a
modified epoxy joint sealant (033000.2.1.M). Joints shall not be permanently filled until just
prior to the completion of the Project. Joints which are to be covered with tile or carpeting shall
have joints filled with cement grout flush to the slab surface.
E. As an alternative at slabs which do not remain exposed, control joints may be formed using Zip-
Cap control joint (Model 832) by Greenstreak Plastic Products Company or approved equal.
Installation shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Note that
reinforcing steel will have to be depressed at the joints to permit placement of the Zip-Cap.
3.6 PLACING OF CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
A. Notify the Architect at least 24 hours prior to each placement.
B. Do not place concrete until reinforcing steel, inserts, sleeves and other work to be built into the
concrete have been inspected and approved by the Architect or the Owner’s representative and
by all other trades concerned.
C. In hot weather, all concreting shall be done in accordance with ACI 305, Recommended
Practice for Hot Weather Concreting.
1. When temperature rises above 70°F, all surfaces of concrete shall be protected against
rapid drying.
2. Concrete delivered to the forms shall have a temperature of not over 90°F
3. The temperature of the forms shall be at least 40°F
D. In cold weather, all concreting shall be done in accordance with ACI 306R-88, Recommended
Practice for Cold Weather Concreting.
1. When the average daily temperature falls below 40°F, all surfaces of concrete shall be
maintained at a temperature of at least 50°F, and not over 90°F, for seven (7) days.
2. Concrete delivered to the forms shall have a temperature of at least 60°F, and not over
90°F
3. The temperature of the forms shall be at least 40°F
4. The Contractor shall maintain a record of temperature of the concrete at the most
exposed surfaces of each placement at the beginning and at the end of each day of the
curing period, which record shall be available to the Architect.
E. Conveying: Concrete shall be handled from the mixer to the place of final deposit as rapidly as
practicable by methods which will prevent separation or loss of ingredients and in a manner
which will assure that the required quality of the concrete is retained.
F. Depositing: Delivery and placement of concrete shall be programmed so that the time lapse
between batching and placement shall not exceed 1-1/2 hours. Concrete shall not be allowed
a free fall of over 4 feet. Concrete shall be deposited as nearly as practicable in its final
position to avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 9
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
G. Concrete shall be deposited continuously, in horizontal layers of such thickness (not deeper
than 18 inches) that no concrete will be deposited on concrete which has hardened sufficiently
to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section. Placing shall be
carried out at such a rate that the concrete which is being integrated with fresh concrete is still
plastic. Concrete which has partially hardened or which has been contaminated by foreign
materials shall not be deposited.
H. Concrete shall be compacted thoroughly by vibrating to produce a dense, homogeneous mass
without voids or pockets. Vibrators should be placed in concrete so as to penetrate
approximately 3 inches to 4 inches into the preceding lift so as to blend the two layers.
Vibrating techniques must assure that, when the coarse aggregate reaches the form, it stops
and the matrix fills the voids.
I. Patching: Areas to be patched shall not exceed 1.5 square feet for each 1000 squares of
surface area. Patches shall match in every respect the color and texture of the surrounding
surfaces. Mix formulation shall be determined by trial to obtain a color match when both the
patch and surrounding concrete are cured and dry. After initial set, surfaces of patches shall be
textured manually to obtain a match with the surrounding surfaces. All patches are subject to
Architect’s final acceptance as to appearance and quality. At holes formed by withdrawal of
ends of steel snap-ties, wet and pack solid with patching mortar. Smooth out projections and
fins with wet carborundum stones or power grinders. All voids, honeycombs and air pockets
shall be patched. The Contractor shall make every reasonable effort to avoid voids,
honeycombs and air pockets.
J. If rubbing surface is required, the entire effected area shall be rubbed for uniform appearance.
Such elements include, but are not limited to concrete beams, concrete columns and
encasements, exposed portions of foundation walls and other exposed walls. Not later than
one day after form removal, moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or other
abrasive until a uniform color and texture is produced. Do not apply cement grout other than
that created by the rubbing process.
3.7 SLABS AND SLAB FINISHES
A. ACI-301-2005, Specifications for Structural Concrete, Chapter 11 - Slabs is hereby made a part
of this Specification.
B. Use a troweled finish except floor slabs scheduled to receive an adhered floor finish, where
float finish shall be used.
C. Finished surfaces shall conform to Class B tolerances. Minimum face floor profile numbers shall
be FF30/FL20.
D. Coordinate with, and accommodate Owner testing of floor flatness and floor level requirements.
3.8 CURING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect newly placed concrete against low and high tem perature effects and against rapid loss
of moisture. Moist cure all concrete for at least seven days at a temperature of at least 50°F by
curing methods approved by the Architect.
B. For vertical or near-vertical surfaces, moist cure by keeping the form in contact with the
concrete, or by other effective means approved by the Architect. Intermittent wetting and drying
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 10
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
does not provide acceptable curing. Liquid membrane curing compound per ASTM C309, as
listed in 033000.2.1.J may be used on vertical formed surfaces after forms are removed.
C. Cure floor slabs by methods indicated in 033000.2.1.J.
D. In hot weather, be adequately prepared to protect the concrete from the adverse influence of
heat before the placement of any concrete. Take special precautions to avoid cracking of the
concrete from rapid drying during placement of concrete when air temperature exceeds 70°F,
particularly when the work is exposed to direct sunlight.
1. Cool forms by fog sprayed with water or by protecting them from the direct rays of the
sun.
2. If requested by the Contractor, deemed advisable by the Testing Engineer, and approved
by the Architect, a retardant may be used to delay the initial set of the mix.
E. In cold weather, be adequately prepared to protect the concrete from the adverse influence of
cold before placement of any concrete.
1. When the average daily temperature falls below 50°F, take special precautions to assure
adequate strength gain of the concrete.
2. When the average daily temperature falls below 40°F, prepare concrete with heated
materials such that the concrete delivered to the forms shall have a temperature of at
least 60°F, and not over 90°F. Prewarm the forms to at least 40°F, to prevent the rapid
cooling of the concrete by their contact; keep forms free of all ice and snow. When
heated materials are being used, combine the water with the aggregate in the mixer and
keep the resulting temperature below 90°F before cement is added to the mix. Protect all
concrete by the use of heated enclosures which must be sufficiently strong and windproof
and within which adequate heaters are properly distributed to maintain all concrete at the
required temperatures. Do not allow heaters to locally heat or dry the concrete and do
maintain adequate fire precautions.
3.9 ACCEPTANCE
A. When the tests on control specimens of concrete fall below the required strength, the Architect
shall have the right to require, at the Contractor’s expense, mix redesign, load tests and/or
strengthening as directed, and/or removal and replacement of those parts of the structure in
which such concrete was used.
3.10 CUTTING OF HOLES
A. Cut holes required by other trades in any cast-in-place concrete which did not receive sleeves.
Use a core drilling process or sawing process which produces clean sharp edges and the
minimum hole size which accommodates the piping, conduit, or equipment requiring the
opening. Locations of holes and payment for this work will be by other trades.
B. Obtain approval of Architect before cutting any holes for any trades.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 11
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
3.11 FLOOR SEALING AND HARDENING
A. Except as noted in item B below, floor surfaces, after hardening sufficiently to prevent damage
and normally within several hours after final troweling, shall be treated with floor sealer in
accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Refer to section 033000.2.1.J.
B. All floor surfaces in mechanical/electrical rooms and elevator machine rooms shall be treated
with a liquid chemical hardener in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Refer to
Section 033000-2.1.P.
C. No chemical hardener or sealer shall be used at concrete floor slabs scheduled to receive an
adhered floor finish.
3.12 EPOXY BONDING
A. Where required, new concrete shall be bonded to hardened new concrete or existing concrete
in accordance with the adhesive manufacturer’s instructions.
3.13 CLEANING
A. The exposed faces of the cast-in-place concrete shall be cleaned of all stains, water marks,
and leaked fines.
3.14 FILLING OF SAW -CUT JOINTS IN PAVING SLABS
A. Saw-cut joints which are in slabs to be exposed in the completed structure shall be filled with
the joint sealant specified in Section 033000-2.1.M in accordance with the manufacturer’s
B. Saw-cut joints which are in slabs to be covered in the completed structure shall be filled flush to
the slab surface with non-shrink grout.
C. Joints shall not be sealed or grouted until just prior to substantial completion of the entire
project. All debris shall be thoroughly cleaned from all joints prior to installing sealants and
grout. Refer to alternate method of creating control joints at unexposed slabs described on
Section 033000.3.5.
3.15 WATERSTOPS
A. Waterstops shall be securely held in place to prevent displacement during concrete
placements. All necessary precautions shall be taken to ensure homogeneous concrete
surrounding the waterstop.
B. All straight run, connecting and intersecting joints shall be securely spliced in accordance with
the manufacturer’s recommendations. Spliced joints shall provide bond at least equal to the
strength of the waterstop section.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 12
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
3.16 PERIMETER INSULATION AND W ATERPROOFING FOR FOUNDATION WALLS
A. Refer to Architectural drawings for the location of all perimeter insulation and waterproofing for
foundation walls.
B. Material shall be installed according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
3.17 CONSTRUCTION WASTE
A. Separate and recycle all construction waste.
END OF SECTION 033000
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 13
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 14
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 035410 - GYPSUM UNDERLAYMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of t+-+he Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes gypsum-cement-based, self-leveling underlayment for application below
interior floor coverings.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Installer who is approved by manufacturer for application of
underlayment products required for this Project.
B. Product Compatibility: Manufacturers of underlayment and floor-covering systems certify in
writing that products are compatible.
C. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide gypsum -cement underlayment systems
identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a qualified testing
agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of
another qualified testing agency.
D. Sound Transmission Characteristics: Where indicated, provide gypsum -cement underlayment
systems identical to those of assemblies tested for STC and IIC ratings per ASTM E 90 and
ASTM E 492 by a qualified testing agency.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent deterioration from
moisture or other detrimental effects.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for substrate
temperature, ventilation, ambient temperature and humidity, and other conditions affecting
underlayment performance.
GYPSUM UNDERLAYMENT 035410 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1. Place gypsum-cement-based underlayments only when ambient temperature and
temperature of substrates are between 50 and 80 deg F.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate application of underlayment with requirements of floor-covering products and
adhesives, to ensure compatibility of products.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GYPSUM-CEMENT-BASED UNDERLAYMENTS
A. Underlayment: Gypsum-cement-based, self-leveling product that can be applied in minimum
uniform thickness of 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor
elevations.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Maxxon
Corportation, Gyp-Crete 2000, or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Ardex; K 15 Premium Self-Leveling Underlayment.
b. Hacker Industries, Inc.; Firm-Fill 2010 Floor Underlayment.
c. USG Corporation; Levelrock 2500.
2. Cement Binder: Gypsum or blended gypsum cement as defined by ASTM C 219.
3. Compressive Strength: Not less than 2000 psi at 28 days when tested according to
ASTM C 109/C 109M.
4. Underlayment Additive: If required by manufacturer, provide resilient-emulsion product of
underlayment manufacturer, formulated for use with underlayment when applied to
substrate and conditions indicated.
B. Substitutions from the basis-of-design product shall require approval from the architect.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain gypsum underlayment and acoustic mat underlayment from a single
manufacturer.
D. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch; or coarse sand as recommended by
underlayment manufacturer.
1. Provide aggregate when recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer for
underlayment thickness required.
E. Water: Potable and at a temperature of not more than 70 deg F.
F. Reinforcement: If recommended by manufacturer, for underlayment applied to wood
substrates, provide galvanized metal lath or other corrosion-resistant reinforcement
recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer.
G. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended in writing for substrate,
conditions, and application indicated. Primer shall be for a glue-down or floating engineered
hardwood flooring application.
GYPSUM UNDERLAYMENT 035410 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1. Primer shall have a VOC content of 200 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D.
H. Provide Maxxon overspray sealer.
2.2 ACOUSTIC UNDERLAYMENT
A. Acoustic Mats:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Maxxon
Corportation, Acousti-Mat II, or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Acoustical Solutions
b. Impacta
c. KN Rubber
B. Source Limitations: Obtain gypsum underlayment and acoustic mat underlayment from a single
manufacturer.
C. Provide acoustic underlayment as indicated in drawings that is compatible with the gypsum
underlayment system.
D. Required Ratings:
1. STC: 61
2. IIC: 55
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for conditions affecting performance.
1. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. GENERAL: PREPARE AND CLEAN SUBSTRATE ACCORDING TO MANUFACTURER'S
WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS.
1. Treat nonmoving substrate cracks according to manufacturer's written instructions to
prevent cracks from telegraphing (reflecting) through underlayment.
2. Fill substrate voids to prevent underlayment from leaking.
B. Concrete Substrates: Mechanically remove, according to manufacturer's written instructions,
laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil,
and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond.
1. Moisture Testing: Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with
installation only after substrates do not exceed a maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate
of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.
GYPSUM UNDERLAYMENT 035410 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
C. Wood Substrates: Mechanically fasten loose boards and panels to eliminate substrate
movement and squeaks. Sand to remove coatings that might impair underlayment bond and
remove sanding dust.
1. Install underlayment reinforcement recommended in writing by manufacturer.
D. Metal Substrates: Mechanically remove, according to manufacturer's written instructions, rust,
foreign matter, and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond. Apply corrosion-
resistant coating compatible with underlayment if recommended in writing by underlayment
manufacturer.
E. Nonporous Substrates: For ceramic tile, quarry tile, and terrazzo substrates, remove waxes,
sealants, and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond, and prepare surfaces
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Adhesion Tests: After substrate preparation, test substrate for adhesion with underlayment
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. General: Mix and apply underlayment components according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
1. Close areas to traffic during underlayment application and for time period after application
recommended in writing by manufacturer.
2. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum underlayment-to-substrate and
intercoat adhesion.
3. At substrate expansion, isolation, and other moving joints, allow joint of same width to
continue through underlayment.
B. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate.
C. Apply underlayment to produce uniform, level surface.
1. Apply a final layer without aggregate to product surface.
2. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.
D. Cure underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent contamination
during application and curing processes.
E. Do not install floor coverings over underlayment until after time period recommended in writing
by underlayment manufacturer.
F. Remove and replace underlayment areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate, including
areas that emit a "hollow" sound when tapped.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect underlayment from concentrated and rolling loads for remainder of construction period.
END OF SECTION 035410
GYPSUM UNDERLAYMENT 035410 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 047200 - CAST STONE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Include GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, and all applicable Di-
vision 1 Specification Sections as part of this Section.
B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements that affect work of this Sec-
tion whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.
C. Coordinate work with trades affecting, or affected by, work of this Section. Cooperate with
such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Cast stone lintels and sills
2. Cast stone trim
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" and “Masonry Veneer”.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Cast stone: Cast stone building units intended to simulate natural cut stone.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes for Cast stone units.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for Cast stone units. Include
dimensions; details of reinforcement and anchorages, if any; and indication of finished faces.
C. Samples: For each color and texture of Cast stone required, full size sample of each unit
required.
D. Mortar Samples for Unit Required: For colored mortar, showing the full range of colors
available.
E. Mock-up: provide a full scale 8 foot long mock-up of CMU base and Cast stone cap. Proceed
with construction only after approval by Architect.
F. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
CAST STONE 04720 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information
specified.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing Cast stone units similar to
those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well
as sufficient production capacity to manufacture required units.
B. Source Limitations for Cast stone: Obtain Cast stone units through one source from a single
manufacturer.
C. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality,
including color, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source
or producer for each aggregate.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Pack, handle, and ship Cast stone units in suitable packs or pallets.
1. Lift with wide-belt slings; do not use wire rope or ropes that might cause staining. Move
Cast stone units, if required, using dollies with wood supports.
2. Store Cast stone units on wood skids or pallets with nonstaining, waterproof covers.
Arrange to distribute weight evenly and to prevent damage to units. Ventilate under
covers to prevent condensation.
B. Store installation materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.
C. Store mortar aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained
and contamination avoided.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate production and delivery of Cast stone with unit masonry work to minimize the need
for on-site storage and to avoid delaying the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Contractor to submit list of
manufacturers.
2.2 CAST STONE MATERIALS / ACCESSORIES
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1364 and the following:
B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, containing not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when
tested according to ASTM C 114.
CAST STONE 04720 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
C. Coarse Aggregates: Granite, quartz, or limestone complying with ASTM C 33; gradation as
needed to produce required textures and color.
D. Fine Aggregates: Manufactured or natural sands complying with ASTM C 33, gradation as
needed to produce required textures and color.
E. Reinforcement: Deformed steel bars complying with ASTM A 615/A 615M.
1. Galvanized Coating: ASTM A 767/A 767M.
F. Embedded Anchors and Other Inserts: Fabricated from steel complying with
ASTM A 36/A 36M, and hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123.
2.3 CAST STONE UNITS
A. Provide Cast stone units complying with ASTM C 1364.
1. Provide units that are resistant to freezing and thawing as determined by laboratory
testing according to ASTM C 666, Procedure A, as modified by ASTM C 1364.
B. Reinforce units as indicated and as required by ASTM C 1364. Use galvanized or epoxy-
coated reinforcement when covered with less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) of material.
C. Fabricate units with sharp arris and details accurately reproduced with indicated texture on all
exposed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Slope exposed horizontal surfaces at least 1:12, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Provide drips on projecting elements, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Color and Texture: Provide units with fine-grained texture and buff color resembling Indiana
limestone. Architect to choose from samples provided by manufacturer.
2.4 CORNERSTONE
A. Provide cornerstone with the year that the stone is installed as indicated in drawings.
2.5 MORTAR MATERIALS
A. Sand: ASTM C144
B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type IIA, or Type IIIA Mortar color approved by Architect from
samples provided by Contractor.
C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
D. Water: Potable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
CAST STONE 04720 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of Cast stone.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install Cast stone units to comply with requirements in Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for
installing stone units and as otherwise required by manufacturer.
B. Set Cast stone as indicated on Drawings and as otherwise required by manufacturer. Install
anchors, supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated or necessary to secure units in
place. Set units accurately in locations indicated with edges and faces aligned according to
established relationships and indicated tolerances.
C. Drench units with clear water just before setting.
D. Set units in full bed of mortar with full head joints, unless otherwise indicated. Build anchors
and ties into mortar joints as units are set.
E. Point mortar joints by placing and compacting mortar in layers not greater than 3/8 inch (10
mm). Compact each layer thoroughly and allow to become thumbprint hard before applying
next layer.
F. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint
thickness.
3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Variation from Plumb: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m) or 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6
mm in 6 m) or more.
B. Variation from Level: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm
in 6 m).
C. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1/8 inch in 36 inches (3 mm in
900 mm) or one-fourth of nominal joint width, whichever is less.
D. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Surfaces (Lipping): Do not exceed 1/16-inch (1.5-mm)
difference between planes of adjacent units or adjacent surfaces indicated to be flush with units.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace stained and otherwise damaged units and units not matching approved
Samples. Cast stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved by Architect.
B. Replace units in a manner that results in Cast stone matching approved Samples, complying
with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement.
C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean Cast stone as work progresses. Remove mortar fins and smears
before tooling joints.
CAST STONE 04720 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed Cast stone as follows:
1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape
hoes or chisels.
2. Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid
strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking tape.
3. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by
rinsing thoroughly with clear water.
4. Clean Cast stone by bucket and brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical
Notes No. 20 Revised II, using job-mixed detergent solution.
5. Clean Cast stone with proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
END OF SECTION 04720
CAST STONE 04720 - 5
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
CAST STONE 04720 - 6
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL - NORTH COMMONS 90 % CD Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 Aug 16, 2019
SECTION 048120 – MANUFACTURED STONE VENEER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
1.1.1 Manufactured Stone Veneer.
1.1.2 Manufactured Stone Trim.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
1.2.1 Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry.
1.2.2 Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry.
1.2.3 Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.
1.2.4 Section 079000 - Joint Protection.
1.3 REFERENCES
1.3.1 ASTM A 653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron
Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
1.3.2 ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
1.3.3 ASTM B 370 - Standard Specification for Copper-Beryllium Alloy (UNS Nos. C17000 and
C17200) Forgings and Extrusions.
1.3.4 ASTM C 39 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Spec-
imens.
1.3.5 ASTM C 67 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay
Tile.
1.3.6 ASTM C 144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.
1.3.7 ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
1.3.8 ASTM C 177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal
Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus.
1.3.9 ASTM C 192 - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the La-
boratory.
1.3.10 ASTM C 207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.
1.3.11 ASTM C 270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry.
MASONRY VENEER 048120 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL - NORTH COMMONS 90 % CD Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 Aug 16, 2019
1.3.12 ASTM C 482 - Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Ceramic Tile to Portland Ce-
ment.
1.3.13 ASTM C 847 - Standard Specification for Metal Lath.
1.3.14 ASTM D 226 - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing
and Waterproofing.
1.3.15 ASTM E 2556/E 2256M Standard Specification for Vapor Permeable Flexible Sheet Wa-
ter Resistant Barriers intended for Mechanical Attachment.
1.3.16 UL 723 - Standard for Safety for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
1.3.17 LEED: US Green Building Council's Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design
Green Building Rating System.
1.4 DESIGN / PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
1.4.1 Performance Requirements:
1.4.1.1 Compressive Strength: Not less than 1800 psi (12.4 MPa) average for 5 specimens
and not less than 1500 psi (10.3 MPa) for individual specimen when tested in
accordance with ASTM C 39 and ASTM C 192.
1.4.1.2 Bond Between Manufactured Masonry Unit, Mortar and Backing: Not less than 50 psi
(345 kPa) when tested in accordance with ASTM C 482 using Type S mortar.
1.4.1.3 Thermal Resistance: R-value of not less than 0.355 per inch (25.4 mm) of thickness
when tested in accordance with ASTM C 177.
1.4.1.4 Freeze/Thaw: No disintegration and less than 3 percent weight loss when tested in
accordance with ASTM C 67.
1.4.1.5 Unit Weight: Not more than 15 psf (73 kg/m2).
1.4.1.6 Surface Burning Characteristics: Not more than the following when tested in accord-
ance with UL 723:
1.4.1.6.1 Flamespread: 25.
1.4.1.6.2 Smoke Development: 450.
1.4.2 Building Code Compliance:
1.4.2.1 Building Materials Evaluation Commission (BMEC). 1.4.2.2 Florida Building Code
(FBC): FL4842
1.4.2.3 International Code Council (ICC):
1.4.2.1.1 ES Report: ICC ESR 1364
1.4.2.1.2 UBC Standard No. 14-1, Kraft Waterproof Building Paper.
1.4.2.4 Texas Department of Insurance: Product Evaluation - EC 21 1.4.2.5
US Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD): MR 1316.
1.4.3 Minimum Recycled Content of 50 percent validated by 3rd party analysis.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
1.5.1 Submit under provisions of Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements.
1.5.2 Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1.5.2.1 Preparation instructions and recommendations.
1.5.2.2 Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
1.5.2.3 Installation methods.
1.5.3 Shop Drawings: Submit drawings depicting proper installation and flashing techniques. Coor-
dinate locations with those found on the Drawings.
MASONRY VENEER 048120 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL - NORTH COMMONS 90 % CD Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 Aug 16, 2019
1.5.4 LEED Submittals: Provide documentation of how the requirements of Credit will be met:
1.5.4.1 Product Data for Credit MR 4.1 and MR 4.2: For products having recycled content,
documentation including percentages by weight of post consumer and precon-
sumer recycled content
1.5.4.1.1 Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.
1.5.4.2 Product Data for Credit IAQ 4.6 (Schools): For products used in school construction,
including certification meeting CHPS Low-Emitting Material criteria Section 01 35
00 - Special Procedures
1.5.4.3 Product Data for Credit MR 5.1 and Credit MR 5.2: Submit data, including location
and distance from Project of material manufacturer and point of extraction, har-
vest or recovery for main raw material.
1.5.4.3.1 Include statement indicating cost for each regional material and the fraction
by weight that is considered regional.
1.5.5 Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color sample rep-
resenting manufacturer's full range of available colors and textures.
1.5.6 Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 8 inches
(203 mm) square, representing actual product, color, and texture.
1.5.7 Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.5.8 Closeout Submittals: Provide manufacturer's maintenance instructions that include recom-
mendations for cleaning and repair of components.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.6.1 Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer affiliated with MSJC and ACI with a minimum of 5
years documented experience manufacturing and marketing all Manufactured Stone
products in this section.
1.6.2 Installer Qualifications: Company with documented experience in installation of manufactured
masonry of the type specified including at least five projects within a 400 mile (650km)
radius of the Project.
1.6.3 Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and application
workmanship.
1.6.3.1 Finish panel of size and location designated by Architect.
1.6.3.2 Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship, color, texture and pattern are
approved by Architect.
1.6.3.3 Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1.7.1 Store products off the ground on pallets in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for
installation.
1.7.2 Protect materials from precipitation and freezing temperatures. Product with visible frozen
moisture should not be installed.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
1.8.1 Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits rec-
ommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environ-
mental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
1.9 WARRANTY
MASONRY VENEER 048120 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL - NORTH COMMONS 90 % CD Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 Aug 16, 2019
1.9.1 Provide manufacturers 50 year limited warranty against defects in manufacturing.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.1.1 Acceptable Manufacturer: Cultured Stone® by Boral®, which is located at: 200 Mansell Court
E. Suite 305; Roswell, GA 30076; Toll Free Tel: 800-255-1727; Tel: 866-557-8663;
Email:boralstoneanswers@boral.com; Web:www.culturedstone.com
2.1.2 Substitutions: Not permitted.
2.1.3 Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01 60
00 - Product Requirements.
2.2 MANUFACTURED STONE
2.2.1 Cultured Stone Cast-Fit:
2.2.1.1 Dimensions: 8 inches by 16 inches or 12 inches by 24 inches (200 mm by 400 mm or
305 mm by 610 mm).
2.2.1.2 Color: French Gray.
2.2.1.3 Color: Parchment.
2.2.2 Cultured Stone Cobblefield:
2.2.2.1 Heights: Variable from 2 inches to 8 inches (50 mm to 200 mm).
2.2.2.2 Lengths: Variable from 4 inches to 20 inches (100 mm to 500 mm).
2.2.2.3 Color: Chardonnay.
2.2.2.4 Color: Desert Blend.
2.2.2.5 Color: Gray.
2.2.2.6 Color: San Francisco.
2.2.2.7 Color: Texas Cream.
2.2.3 Cultured Stone Coral Stone:
2.2.3.1 Pattern: Random Ashlar or Repeating.
2.2.3.2 Stone sizes: Variable sizes in increments of 4 inches from 4 inches by 4 inches to 12
i inches by 16 inches (100 mm from 100 mm by 100 mm to 204 mm to 304 mm).
2.2.3.3 Corner sizes: 4 inch, 8 inch and 12 inch heights with 4 inch and 8 inch lengths.
2.2.3.4 Average thickness: 1-1/8 inches and sized for a 1/2 inches (12.5 mm) mortar
joint.
2.2.3.5 Color: Fossil Reef.
2.2.4 Cultured Stone Country Ledgestone:
2.2.4.1 Heights: Variable from 1-1/2 inches to 6-1/2 inches (38 mm to 162 mm).
2.2.4.2 Lengths: Variable from 4-3/4 inches to 22 inches (120 mm to 560 mm).
2.2.4.3 Color: Black Rundle.
2.2.4.4 Color: Aspen.
2.2.4.5 Color: Bucks County.
2.2.4.6 Color: Caramel.
2.2.4.7 Color: Chardonnay.
2.2.4.8 Color: Eucalyptus.
2.2.4.9 Color: Hudson Bay.
2.2.4.10 Color: Mojave.
2.2.4.11 Color: Red Rock.
2.2.4.12 Color: Shale.
2.2.4.13 Color: Wolf Creek.
2.2.4.14 Color: White Oak.
MASONRY VENEER 048120 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL - NORTH COMMONS 90 % CD Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 Aug 16, 2019
2.2.5 Cultured Stone Dressed Fieldstone:
2.2.5.1 Sizes: Variable from 2-1/2 inches to 22 inches (63 mm to 560 mm).
2.2.5.2 Color: Aspen.
2.2.5.3 Color: Bucks County.
2.2.5.4 Color: Chardonnay.
2.2.6 Cultured Stone Drystack Ledgestone:
2.2.6.1 Heights: Variable from 1 inch to 4 inches (25 mm to 100 mm).
2.2.6.2 Lengths: Variable from 4 inches to 16 inches (100 mm to 400 mm).
2.2.6.3 Color: Caramel.
2.2.6.4 Color: Chardonnay.
2.2.6.5 Color: Suede.
2.2.7 Cultured Stone European Castle Stone:
2.2.7.1 Heights: Variable from 2 inches to 12 inches (50 mm to 300 mm).
2.2.7.2 Lengths: Variable from 2 inches to 16 inches (50 mm to 400 mm).
2.2.7.3 Color: Bucks County.
2.2.7.4 Color: Chardonnay.
2.2.8 Cultured Stone Limestone:
2.2.8.1 Heights: Variable from 1-1/4 inches to 6 inches (30 mm to 150 mm).
2.2.8.2 Lengths: Variable from 4 inches to 16-3/4 inches (100 mm to 420 mm). 2.2.8.3
Color: Golden Buckeye
2.2.8.4 Color: Bucks County.
2.2.8.5 Color: Cedar.
2.2.8.6 Color: Chardonnay.
2.2.8.7 Color: Suede.
2.2.9 Cultured Stone Old Country Fieldstone:
2.2.9.1 Heights: Variable from 1-1/2 inches to 10 inches (38 mm to 250 mm).
2.2.9.2 Lengths: Variable from 4 inches to 16 inches (100 mm to 400 mm).
2.2.9.3 Color: Chardonnay.
2.2.9.4 Color: Piedmont.
2.2.9.5 Color: Riviera.
2.2.9.6 Color: Romana.
2.2.9.7 Color: Tudor.
2.2.10 Cultured Stone Pro-Fit Alpine Ledgestone:
2.2.10.1 Height: 4 inches (102 mm).
2.2.10.2 Lengths: Variable from 8 inches to 20 inches (200 mm to 500 mm).
2.2.10.3 Color: Black Mountain.
2.2.10.4 Color: Black Rundle.
2.2.10.5 Color: Chardonnay.
2.2.10.6 Color: Harvest.
2.2.10.7 Color: Pheasant.
2.2.11 Cultured Stone Pro-Fit Ledgestone:
2.2.11.1 Height: 4 inches (102 mm).
2.2.11.2 Lengths: Variable from 8 inches to 20 inches (200 mm to 500 mm).
2.2.11.3 Color: Autumn.
2.2.11.4 Color: Gray.
2.2.11.5 Color: Mojave.
2.2.11.6 Color: Platinum.
2.2.11.7 Color: Shale.
2.2.11.8 Color: Southwest.
MASONRY VENEER 048120 - 5
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL - NORTH COMMONS 90 % CD Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 Aug 16, 2019
2.2.12 Cultured Stone Ancient Villa Ledgestone:
2.2.12.1 Height: Variable from 2 inches to 12 inches (50 mm to 304 mm).
2.2.12.2 Lengths: Variable from 5 inches to 16 inches (127 mm to 406 mm).
2.2.12.3 Color: Chianti.
2.2.12.4 Color: Siena.
2.2.12.5 Color: Toscana.
2.2.13 Cultured Stone Del Mare Ledgestone:
2.2.13.1 Height: Variable from 1 inch to 9-1/4 inches (25 mm to 235 mm).
2.2.13.2 Lengths: Variable from 4-1/2 inches to 16 inches (114 mm to 406 mm).
2.2.13.3 Color: Barossa.
2.2.13.4 Color: Burnt Ochre.
2.2.13.5 Color: Kayalua.
2.2.13.6 Color: Palermo.
2.2.13.7 Color: Patina.
2.2.13.8 Color: Sangria.
2.2.14 Cultured Brick: Used Brick
2.2.14.1 Height: Variable from 2-1/2 inches (63 mm).
2.2.14.2 Lengths: Variable from 8 inches (200 mm).
2.2.14.3 Color: Antique Red.
2.2.14.4 Color: High Desert.
2.2.15 Cultured Stone River Rock:
2.2.15.1 Sizes: Variable from 2 inches to 14 inches (50 mm to 350 mm).
2.2.15.2 Color: Earth Blend.
2.2.15.3 Color: Lake Tahoe.
2.2.15.4 Color: Lakeshore.
2.2.15.5 Color: Whitewater.
2.2.16 Cultured Stone Rockface:
2.2.16.1 Heights: Variable from 2 inches to 8 inches (50 mm to 200 mm).
2.2.16.2 Lengths: Variable from 4 inches to 20 inches (100 mm to 500 mm).
2.2.16.3 Color: Bucks County.
2.2.17 Cultured Stone Southern Ledgestone:
2.2.17.1 Heights: Variable from 1/2 inch to 6 i inches (13 mm to 150 mm).
2.2.17.2 Lengths: Variable from 4 inches to 20 inches (100 mm to 500 mm).
2.2.17.3 Color: Aspen.
2.2.17.4 Color: Bucks County.
2.2.17.5 Color: Chardonnay.
2.2.17.6 Color: Fog.
2.2.17.7 Color: Gray.
2.2.17.8 Color: Rustic.
2.2.17.9 Color: Walnut.
2.2.17.10 Color: White Oak.
2.2.18 Cultured Stone Split Face:
2.2.18.1 Sizes: Variable from 4 inch to 18 inch (100 mm to 450 mm).
2.2.18.2 Color: Superior.
2.2.19 Cultured Stone Stream Stone:
2.2.19.1 Sizes: Variable from 2 inches to 12 inches (50 mm to 300 mm).
2.2.19.2 Skimmer Stones: Smaller fill stones, average 2-1/2 inches (63 mm) tall by 3-1/2
inches to 8 inches (89 mm to 200 mm).
MASONRY VENEER 048120 - 6
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL - NORTH COMMONS 90 % CD Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 Aug 16, 2019
2.2.19.3 Color: Spring
2.2.19.4 Color: Summer.
2.3 ARCHITECTURAL TRIM STONES
2.3.1 Pier Capstones:
2.3.1.1 Surface Texture: Flagstone.
2.3.1.2 Nominal Size: 24 inches by 24 inches (610 mm by 610 mm).
2.3.1.3 Nominal Size: 32 inches by 32 inches (813 mm by 813 mm).
2.3.1.4 Color: Gray.
2.3.1.5 Color: Taupe.
2.3.1.6 Color: Champagne.
2.3.1.7 Color: Mocha.
2.3.2 Flat Wall Capstones:
2.3.2.1 Nominal Size: 12 inches by 20 inches (305 mm by 508 mm).
2.3.2.2 Nominal Size: 16 inches by 20 inches (406 mm by 508 mm).
2.3.2.3 Color: Gray.
2.3.2.4 Color: Taupe.
2.3.2.5 Color: Champagne.
2.3.2.6 Color: Mocha.
2.3.3 Hearthstones:
2.3.3.1 Nominal Size: 19 inches by 20 inches (483 mm by 508 mm).
2.3.3.2 Color: Gray.
2.3.3.3 Color: Blond.
2.3.3.4 Color: Chardonnay.
2.3.3.5 Color: Cream.
2.3.3.6 Color: Marsh.
2.3.4 Trimstones:
2.3.4.1 Nominal Size: 6 inches by 8 inches by 1-7/8 inches (152 mm by 203 mm by 48 mm).
2.3.4.2 Color:Gray.
2.3.4.3 Color: Taupe.
2.3.4.4 Color: Champagne.
2.3.4.5 Color: Mocha.
2.3.5 Keystones:
2.3.5.1 Nominal Size: 8-1/2 inches by 10 inches by 1-7/8 inches (216 mm by 254 mm by 48
mm).
2.3.5.2 Color: Gray.
2.3.5.3 Color: Taupe.
2.3.5.4 Color: Champagne.
2.3.5.5 Color: Mocha.
2.3.6 Tuscan Lintels:
2.3.6.1 Nominal Size: 22 i inches by 6 inches by 2-5/8 inches (559 mm by 152 mm by 67
mm).
2.3.6.2 Color:Gray.
2.3.6.3 Color: Taupe.
2.3.6.4 Color: Champagne.
2.3.6.5 Color: Mocha.
2.3.7 Watertable/Sill Rock Face Texture:
MASONRY VENEER 048120 - 7
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL - NORTH COMMONS 90 % CD Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 Aug 16, 2019
2.3.7.1 Nominal Size: 2 inches (front), 2-1/2 inches (back), by 3 inches by 18 inches (51 mm
(front), 64 mm (back) by 76 mm by 455 mm).
2.3.7.2 Color: Gray.
2.3.7.3 Color: Taupe.
2.3.7.4 Color: Champagne.
2.3.7.5 Color: Mocha.
2.3.7.6 Provide sloped top surface and drip edge.
2.3.8 Watertable/Sill Cast-Fit Texture:
2.3.8.1 Nominal Size: 2-1/2 inches by 20 inches (63 mm by 500 mm).
2.3.8.2 Color: French Gray
2.3.8.3 Color: Parchment
2.3.9 Light Fixture Stones:
2.3.9.1 Nominal Size: 8 inches by 10 inches by 1-7/8 inches (203 mm by 254 mm by 47
mm).
2.3.9.2 Nominal Size: 9-1/2 inches by 15 inches by 1-7/8 inches (242 mm by 381 mm by 47
mm).
2.3.9.3 Nominal Size: As shown on Contract Drawings.
2.3.9.4 Color: Gray.
2.3.9.5 Color: Taupe.
2.3.9.6 Provide 4 inch by 1-1/2 inch (102 mm by 38 mm) UL approved metal octagon exten-
sion box.
2.3.10 Receptacle Stones:
2.3.10.1 Single Receptacle Nominal Size: 6 inches by 8 inches by 1-7/8 inches (152 mm
by 203 mm by 48mm)
2.3.10.2 Color: Gray.
2.3.10.3 Color: Taupe.
2.3.10.4 Electrical Box: 4 inch by 1-1/2 inch (102 mm by 38 mm) UL approved metal octa-
gon extension box supplied by others.
2.4 MORTAR
2.4.1 Pre Mixed Mortar: Complying with ASTM C270:
2.4.1.1 Type: N or S.
2.4.1.2 Color _______.
2.4.2 Portland Cement: Complying with ASTM C 150:
2.4.2.1 Type I.
2.4.2.2 Type __.
2.4.2.3 Color _______.
2.4.3 Mortar Aggregate: Complying with ASTM C 144, standard masonry type.
2.4.4 Hydrated Lime: Complying with ASTM C 207:
2.4.4.1 Type S.
2.4.4.2 Type SA.
2.4.5 Water: Clean and potable.
2.4.6 Iron Oxide Pigments: ASTM C 979; Color_________________.
2.5 ADDITIONAL MATERlALS
2.5.1 Wall Underlayment:
2.5.1.1 Grade D Kraft waterproof building paper, UBC Standard No. 14-1.
MASONRY VENEER 048120 - 8
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL - NORTH COMMONS 90 % CD Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 Aug 16, 2019
2.5.1.2 Asphalt Saturated Felt meeting or exceeding the requirements of ASTM D 226 Type
I.
2.5.1.3 Weather Resistant Barrier meeting the requirements of ICC-ES AC-38.
2.5.1.4 Water Resistive barrier meeting the requirements of ASTM E 2556/E 2556M.
2.5.2 Metal Flashing:
2.5.2.1 0.032 inch aluminum sheet; ASTM B 209.
2.5.2.2 24 gauge galvanized steel; ASTM A 653.
2.5.2.3 16 oz/sq ft (5 kg/sm) copper sheet; ASTM B 370.
2.5.3 Metal Lath: Diamond patterned steel mesh meeting or exceeding the requirements of ASTM
C 847. Minimum 2.5 lb/sq yd (1.37 kg/sm).
3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.1.1 Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
3.1.2 If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfac-
tory preparation before proceeding.
3.2 PREPARATION
3.2.1 Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
3.2.2 Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the
best result for the substrate under the project conditions.
3.3 INSTALLATION
3.3.1 Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.3.2 General:
3.3.2.1 Walls: Provide with Single Color and Texture throughout.
3.3.2.2 Walls: Provide with Blended Color / Texture:
3.3.2.2.1 ___ Percent __________________, Color: _______________.
3.3.2.2.2 ___ Percent __________________, Color: _______________.
3.3.2.3 Special Shapes: Color to match stones specified.
3.3.2.3.1 Provide Stones manufactured specifically for installation at corners where lo-
cated on the Drawings.
3.3.2.3.2 Install Quoins on corners as indicated on the Drawings.
3.3.2.4 Mortar Joints:
3.3.2.4.1 Tight Fit joints.
3.3.2.4.2 Strike all grout joints flush.
3.3.2.4.3 Tool all grout joints.
3.3.2.4.4 Overgrout all grout joints.
3.3.2.5 Windows, Doors and Wall Openings:
3.3.2.5.1 Butt field stones to wall opening.
3.3.2.5.2 Install specified trim stones where located on the Contract Drawings.
3.3.2.6 Sills: Install Sills where located on the Drawings.
3.3.2.7 Caps: Install Capstones where located on the Drawings.
3.3.3 Keep surfaces moist while installing.
3.3.4 Poorly attached stones are considered defective work. After set-up, inspect wall for loose
stones.
MASONRY VENEER 048120 - 9
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL - NORTH COMMONS 90 % CD Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 Aug 16, 2019
3.3.5 Remove and properly replace prior to project close-out.
3.3.6 Seal all joints at wall openings and penetrations with a sealant approved for use with mason-
ry products.
3.4 PROTECTION
3.4.1 Protect finished work from rain and work on either side of the wall during and for 48 hours fol-
lowing installation.
3.4.2 Protect installed products until completion of project.
3.4.3 Clean prior to project closeout.
3.4.4 Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
MASONRY VENEER 048120 - 10
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Include GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, and all applicable Divi-
sion 1 Specification Sections as part of this Section.
B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements that affect work of this Section
whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.
C. Coordinate work with trades affecting, or affected by, work of this Section. Cooperate with such
trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Steel plates.
2. Steel pipes and tubing.
3. Steel angles.
4. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment.
5. Pipe guards.
6. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified
in other Sections.
7. Loose bearing and leveling plates not specified elsewhere.
8. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete not specified in other Sections.
9. Miscellaneous steel trim including steel edgings.
10. Metals as shown at awning and pergola including cables, fasteners, hangers, etc.
B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following:
1. Loose steel lintels.
2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, and wedge-type inserts indicated to be cast into
concrete or built into unit masonry
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance of Ladders: Provide ladders capable of withstanding the effects of loads
and stresses within limits and under conditions specified in ANSI A14.3.
B. Thermal Movements: Provide exterior metal fabrications that allow for thermal movements
resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by
preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and
other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials
due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each material described in this section.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication indicated. Include
plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show
anchorage and accessory items.
1. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections.
2. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis
data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their
preparation.
C. Welding Certificates: Signed by Contractor certifying that welds comply with requirements
specified under the “Quality Assurance” article.
D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information
specified.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing metal fabrications similar to those
indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as
sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
B. Welding Standards: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
2. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum."
3. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
4. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding
processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.
5. Fabricator shall provide quality control testing and protections to ensure that welds are
complete and free of defects, fabricated parts and components are straight and square,
and paint is even and of specified thickness.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Where metal fabrications are indicated to fit walls and other construction,
verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on
Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying
the Work.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings,
templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor
bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver
such items to Project site in time for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METALS, GENERAL
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work,
provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with
exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.
2.2 FERROUS METALS
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type indicated below, fabricated from corrosion-
resistant materials capable of sustaining, without failure, the load imposed within a safety factor
of 4, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing
agency.
1. Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47 (ASTM A 47M)
malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as
needed, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153/A 153M.
2.3 PAINT
A. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd
primer complying with performance requirements in FS TT-P-664; selected for good resistance
to normal atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and capability
to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure.
B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel,
complying with SSPC-Paint 20.
C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12, except
containing no asbestos fibers, or cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
2.4 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide Type 304 or 316 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated
fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, where built into exterior
walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property
Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers.
C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.
D. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3 (ASME B18.6.7M).
E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M).
F. Wood Screws: Flat head, carbon steel, ASME B18.6.1.
G. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, ASME B18.22.1 (ASME B18.22M).
H. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, carbon steel, ASME B18.21.1 (ASME B18.21.2M).
I. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in
unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as
determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1. Material: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 5.
2. Material: Alloy Group 1 or 2 stainless-steel bolts complying with ASTM F 593 and nuts
complying with ASTM F 594.
J. Toggle Bolts: FS FF-B-588, tumble-wing type, class and style as needed.
2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field
splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling
limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units
for reassembly and coordinated installation.
B. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs.
C. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Form
bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise
impairing work.
D. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent
surface.
E. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and
space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated
loads.
F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws,
and similar items.
G. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide weep
holes where water may accumulate.
H. Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient
and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening up of joints, overstressing of
components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation
on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F ambient; 180 deg F , material surfaces.
I. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp
edges.
J. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces.
K. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners
where possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat-head
(countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Provide steel framing and supports indicated and as necessary to complete the Work.
All steel framing, supports, fasteners and associated elements, located in exterior, garage,
trash or other humid locations shall be hot-dipped galvanized.
B. Fabricate units from structural-steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless
otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to
receive adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to
receive hardware, hangers, and similar items.
1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated.
2. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with
integrally welded steel strap anchors 1-1/4 inches wide by 1/4 inch hick by 8 inches long
at 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
3. Furnish inserts if units must be installed after concrete is placed.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM
A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from structural-steel shapes, plates, and bars of
profiles shown with continuously welded joints, and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and
use concealed field splices where possible.
B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation
with other work. Provide anchors, welded to trim, for embedding in concrete or masonry
construction, spaced not more than 6 inches from each end, 6 inches from corners, and 24
inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
2.8 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS
A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and
recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Weld adjoining members
together to form a single unit where indicated. See Drawings for lintel schedule.
B. Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.
C. Refer to section 05120, “Structural steel”.
2.9 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete
construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.
B. Prime plates with zinc-rich primer.
2.10 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES
A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from
concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with not less than
two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 5
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
2.11 METAL LADDERS
A. General:
1. Comply with ANSI A14.3, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Space siderails 16 inches apart, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches o.c. with welded or
bolted brackets, made from same metal as ladder.
B. Steel Ladders:
1. Siderails: Continuous, 3/8-by-2-1/2-inch steel flat bars, with eased edges.
2. Rungs: 3/4-inch- diameter steel bars.
3. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces.
4. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung, either by coating rung with aluminum-oxide
granules set in epoxy-resin adhesive or by using a type of manufactured rung filled with
aluminum-oxide grout.
5. Products:
a. IKG Industries, a Harsco company; Mebac.
b. W. S. Molnar Company; SlipNOT.
c. O’Keeffe’s, Inc.
C. Galvanize exterior ladders and elevator pit ladders, including brackets and fasteners.
2.12 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
2.13 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize all items located in exterior, garage, trash or other humid
environments to comply with applicable standard listed below:
1. ASTM A 123, for galvanizing steel and iron products.
2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.
B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with
minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface-preparation specifications and
environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications:
1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B): SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
2. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
C. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications except those to be embedded in
concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-
PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1," for shop painting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 6
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary
for securing metal fabrications to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete
and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors.
B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal
fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges
and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and
levels.
C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete,
masonry, or similar construction.
D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are
not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
E. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent
surface.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop
painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 055000
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 7
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 8
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 055210 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Steel pipe and tube railings.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 06100 "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking for anchoring railings.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Design railings, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified
professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
B. General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable
design working stresses of railing materials based on the following:
1. Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength.
C. Structural Performance: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following
loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:
a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction.
b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction.
c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
2. Infill of Guards:
a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.
b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints,
overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055210 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
E. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals
and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings.
2. Railing brackets.
3. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer licensed in the state where this Project is located responsible for their
preparation.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,
"Structural Welding Code - Steel."
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with
metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.
1.7 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint
and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats
are compatible with one another.
B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items
with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to
Project site in time for installation.
C. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support
railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METALS, GENERAL
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller
marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055210 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as
supported rails unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 STEEL
A. General: Provide tubing or pipe. Dimensions indicated on drawings are outside dimensions. If
tubing is used, provide tubing of approximately the same dimensions. Provide galvanized finish
for exterior installations and where indicated.
B. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-
consumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.
C. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513.
D. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless
another grade and weight are required by structural loads.
E. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2.3 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide the following:
1. Ungalvanized-Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633 or
ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5 for zinc coating.
2. Hot-Dip Galvanized Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel
fasteners complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 for zinc coating.
B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and
class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of
construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.
C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components:
1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching
them to other work, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors capable of
sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit
masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing
according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with
ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy Group 1
stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
welded.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055210 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
B. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI #25.
C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and
compatible with paints specified to be used over it.
D. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer
complying with MPI #79 and compatible with topcoat.
1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer.
E. Intermediate Coats and Topcoats: Provide products that comply with Section 09910 "Painting."
F. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout
complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for
interior and exterior applications.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions,
member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to
support structural loads.
B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and
assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly
mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain
structural value of joined pieces.
C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius
of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on
exposed surfaces.
D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.
E. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide
weep holes where water may accumulate.
F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.
G. Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections unless otherwise indicated.
H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings
designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness
shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.
I. Form changes in direction as follows:
1. By radius bends of radius indicated.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055210 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
J. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required; maintain
cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or
otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.
K. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
L. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends
of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch or less.
M. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings,
and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated.
1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush-
resistant fillers, or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural
supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate.
N. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry
work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings.
Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.
2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of
railings.
2.7 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. Galvanized Railings:
1. Hot-dip galvanize exterior steel railings, including hardware, after fabrication.
2. Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot-dip galvanized railings.
3. Comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for hot-dip galvanized hardware.
4. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint
adhesion.
5. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to
remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.
B. For galvanized railings, provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and
other ferrous components.
C. Preparing Galvanized Railings for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of
grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner.
D. For nongalvanized steel railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets,
fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors to be embedded in exterior concrete or
masonry.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055210 - 5
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
E. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-
SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
F. Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings unless otherwise
indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1:
Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Primer need not be applied
to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify
that locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for Installer. Locate
reinforcements and mark locations if not already done.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.
B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in
location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.
1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or
finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other
means without further cutting or fitting.
2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet.
3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel
with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet.
C. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.
D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for
securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction.
3.3 RAILING CONNECTIONS
A. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components.
Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article whether welding is
performed in the shop or in the field.
B. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than
required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip-joint internal sleeve extending 2
inches beyond joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to one side, and locate joint
within 6 inches of post.
3.4 ANCHORING POSTS
A. Form or core-drill holes not less than 5 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of post for
installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055210 - 6
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with
anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Leave anchorage joint exposed with 1/8-inch buildup, sloped away from post.
3.5 ATTACHING RAILINGS
A. Attach railings to wall with wall brackets. Provide brackets with 1-1/2-inch clearance from inside
face of handrail and finished wall surface. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at
spacing required to support structural loads.
1. Use type of bracket with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage.
2. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural
loads.
B. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows:
1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger
or lag bolts.
2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts.
3. For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into studs or wood backing between
studs. Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing members.
4. For steel-framed partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing between studs.
Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members.
3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop
painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective
coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of
Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 055210
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055210 - 7
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055210 - 8
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 060670 - PLASTIC AND METAL SURFACING MATERIALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi-
tions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes
1. Solid surface tub surrounds.
2. Solid surface window stool caps.
3. Stainless steel metal sheeting backsplash behind cooktops and ranges.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specifications
Sections.
B. Product data:
1. Indicate product description, fabrication information, and compliance with specified perfor-
mance requirements.
C. Samples:
1. Selection Samples: Submit actual samples to illustrate full range of colors, patterns, and fin-
ishes available.
2. Verification Samples: Submit two samples illustrating each selected surfacing material in
specified color, pattern, and finish.
D. Manufacturer’s Instructions:
1. Submit manufacturer’s printed installation instructions for each product.
2. Submit manufacturer’s Safety and Data Sheets (M.S.D.S.) for each adhesive.
3. Submit manufacturer’s care and maintenance data, including repair and cleaning instructions.
E. Product certificates signed by the manufacturer certifying that materials furnished comply with
specified requirements.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products in accordance with provisions in Section 016000.
B. Store materials to prevent breakage and marring of surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s
printed instruction.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Coordination: Coordinate locations, installation, and sequencing with other work to avoid inter-
ference with and ensure proper installation, operation, adjustment, cleaning, and servicing of all
items.
PLASTIC AND METAL SURFACING PANELS 060670 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
B. Preconditioning: Comply with manufacturer's written requirements for temperature and humidity
conditions during storage and installation. Do not install surfacing materials until these conditions
have been attained and stabilized.
C. Field Measurements: Verify wall panel splash guard size and shape. Cut to fit.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. The warranty provided by the manufacturers shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Own-
er may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run
concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract
Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers Basis-of-Design: Subject to compliance with requirements with requirements, pro-
vide products by one of the following. Substitutions allowed per architect approval.
1. Tub Surround: Reinforced solid surface material:
a. Swanstone by the Swan Corporation, or approved equal
2. Window Stool Cap/Sill: Reinforced solid surface material:
a. Corian Solid Surface, or approved equal.
3. Stainless Steel Backsplash and Sidesplash:
a. Weiss Sheet Metal (508-583-8300), or approved equal
2.02 TUB SURROUND
A. Provide solid surface shower surrounds complying with the following:
1. Product description: Homogenous compression molded material composed of acrylic resins
or polyester/acrylic resin blend, fire-retardant filler materials, fiber reinforcement, and coloring
agents.
2. Nominal sheet thickness: 0.250 inch (6mm). Basis of design: Swanstone SSIT-60-3.
3. 3-panel wall system to include all standard associated trim and battens.
4. Patterns and Finishes to be selected from full range of manufacturers’ available aggregate
colors and tile patterns.
5. Provide solid-surfacing soap dish in pattern/color to match tub surround. Fasten/adhere per
manufacturer’s recommendations. Basis of design: Swanstone Corner Soap Dish SS-7211.
2.02 WINDOW STOOL CAP/SILL
A. Provide solid surface window stool caps complying with the following:
PLASTIC AND METAL SURFACING PANELS 060670 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
6. Product description: Homogenous compression molded material composed of acrylic resins
or polyester/acrylic resin blend, fire-retardant filler materials, fiber reinforcement, and coloring
agents.
7. Nominal sheet thickness: 0.50 inch.
8. Edge Detail: 1.0 inch eased drop edge.
9. Jamb Detail: 1.5 inch dog ear at all vertical jamb.
10. Color: Manufacturer’s standard white.
2.03 STAINLESS STEEL BACKSPLASH AND SIDESPLASH
1. Provide 20-gage, type 304 stainless steel sheet metal, #4 finish, horizontal grain.
2. Install backsplash sheet that extends full width of range or cooktop and from behind the
uppermost surface of the range/cooktop unit to the bottom of the range hood.
3. At cooktops adjacent to wall oven-enclosing casework, provide sidesplash that extends to full
height of backsplash sheet, and extends from adjacent stainless steel backsplash to 1" from
full depth of casework surface.
4. At ranges and cooktops adjacent to wall, provide sidesplash that extends to full height of
backsplash sheet, and extends from adjacent stainless steel backsplash to full depth of range
or cooktop.
5. Adhere to wall with appropriate glue.
6. Exposed stainless steel edge shall be hemmed or sanded until smooth.
2.04 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES
A. Supply materials for installation of products as specified in manufacturer’s printed installation in-
structions including color matched silicon sealant and adhesives where applicable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Preparation and Fabrication: Precondition surfacing materials and surfaces to receive surfacing
materials in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions. Fabrication of seams and fixture
mounting in accordance with factory fabrication manual.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install components plumb and level.
B. Provide holes and cutouts for plumbing and bath accessories as indicated on the drawings.
C. Form field joints using manufacturers recommended adhesive, with joints inconspicuous in fin-
ished work.
D. All surfaces shall have a uniform finish.
E. Remove adhesives, sealants and other stains upon completion of installation per manufacturer’s
written instruction.
PLASTIC AND METAL SURFACING PANELS 060670 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
F. Protect surfaces from damage until project completion.
END OF SECTION 060670
PLASTIC AND METAL SURFACING PANELS 060670 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 1
SECTION 061000 – ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. All of the contract documents, including the general and supplementary conditions and Division
1 general requirements, apply to the work of and are hereby made a part of this section.
B. Examine all drawings and all other sections of the specifications for requirements therein
affecting the work of this section, whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this
section.
C. This section contains information that applies to all work performed under the contract and is
hereby made a part of each specification section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: Provide all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work of
this section, including but not limited to:
1. Wood framing
2. Wood nailers, blocking, and sleepers
3. Wood furring
4. Sheathing
5. Laminated Veneer Lumber (LVL) framing
6. Parallel Strand Lumber (PSL) framing
7. Laminated Strand Lumber (LSL) framing
8. Performance-rated I-joists
9. Rim boards
10. Flitch beams
11. Metal connectors for wood construction
12. Concealed blocking, grounds, nailers, and electrical curbs
13. Backing panels at electrical equipment
14. Wood treatment
B. Sustainable design intent: To the extent possible, comply with the requirements of Energy Star.
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Other specification sections which directly relate to the work of this section include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1. Section 033000 – CAST-IN-PLACE
2. Section 061900 – PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES
3. Section 062000 – INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
4. Section 062100 – EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
5. Section 072720 – AIR BARRIER
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 2
1.4 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS
A. The following standards and publications are applicable to the extent referenced in the text. The
most recent version of these standards is implied unless otherwise stated:
1. Lumber standards: Comply with the American Softwood Lumber Standards PS 20 and
with applicable rules of the respective grading and inspecting agencies for species and
products indicated that are certified by the American Lumber Standard Committee’s
(ALSC) Board of Review:
a. Northeast Lumber Manufacturer’s Association (NELMA): Listed Standards
b. National Lumber Grades Authority (NLGA): Listed Standards
c. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): Listed Standards
d. American Wood Protection Association (AWPA): Listed Standards
e. American Wood Council (AWC): National Design Specifications for Wood
Construction (NDS) and NDS Supplement, Design Values for Wood Construction
2. Plywood product standards: Comply with PS-1 or, for products not manufactured under
PS-1 provisions, comply with the applicable American Plywood Association (APA)
Performance Standard for the type of panel or laminated veneer beam indicated.
1.5 GRADING REQUIREMENTS
A. Grade and trademark: Shall be required on plywood and each piece of framing and softwood
lumber (or on each bundle, in bundled stock). Use only the recognized official marks of the
association under whose rules it is graded.
B. Moisture content: Except for blocking adjacent to finish millwork or where more stringent
requirements are noted on the structural drawings, moisture content shall not exceed 19% for
lumber or 12% for plywood. Moisture content for blocking adjacent to finish millwork shall not
exceed 5%.
C. Quality: Lumber shall be new, sound, commercially dried and seasoned, well-manufactured,
and free from bows, twists, crooks, and wanes that cannot be corrected in the process of
bridging or nailing. All stock shall be dressed on all four sides allowing true surface for
attachment of finished work.
1.6 INTENT
A. A major intent of the work of this section is to provide floor and roof framing as shown on the
structural drawings.
B. A major intent of the work of this section is to provide concealed blocking, grounds, nailers, and
backing panels for all work in the project, including, but not limited to, toilet partitions, toilet
accessories, handrails and railings, shelving, bulletin boards, mailboxes, counters, benches,
telephone and electrical equipment, roofing, flashing and sheet metal, and the like.
C. Coordinate the work of this section with the work specified in Section 092500 – GYPSUM
DRYWALL. Determine which type of blocking (wood or metal) is best suited to each situation
and provide the appropriate type of blocking. Do not use wood blocking in fire-rated assemblies
or other locations prohibited by the authority having jurisdiction.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 3
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide the following FOR REVIEW in accordance with Section 013300 – SUBMITTALS:
1. Detailed framing plans with relevant details for use on the job site. Indicate the specific
location, spacing, and size of all framing members:
a. Floor framing plans for each floor showing the specific location and size of all floor
framing members.
b. Exterior wall framing elevations with specific location and size of all wall framing
members, including studs, headers, cripples, and blocking.
c. Interior wall framing elevations keyed to floor framing plans showing the specific
location and size of all wall framing members, including studs, headers, cripples,
and blocking.
d. Roof framing plans with specific location and size of all roof framing members.
2. Framing plans must be stamped by a structural engineer licensed in the Commonwealth
of Massachusetts and must include all design loads.
3. Stairs including landings with framing plans in conformance with the architectural layout
and elevations. Design calculations and framing plans provided must be stamped by a
structural engineer licensed in the Commonwealth of Massachusetts and must include all
design loads.
B. Provide the following FOR INFORMATION in accordance with Section 013300 – SUBMITTALS:
1. Product data: Submit manufacturer’s specifications, product data, installation instructions,
use limitations, and recommendations for each material used, including, but not limited
to, the materials listed below. Provide certifications stating that the materials comply with
the manufacturer’s requirements:
a. Manufacturer’s data on metal connectors for wood construction.
b. Manufacturer’s data on engineered wood products, including LVLs, PSLs, LSLs,
and performance-rated I-joists.
c. Material certificates: where dimensional lumber is provided to comply with
minimum allowable unit stresses, submittal the listing of the species and grade
selection for each use, and submit evidence of compliance with the specified
requirements. Compliance may be in the form of a signed copy of the applicable
portion of the lumber producer’s grading rules showing design values for the
selected species and grade. Design values shall be as approved by the Board of
Review of American Lumber Standards Committee.
2. Treatment data: for each type of treatment required, provide the manufacturer’s
certification stating the chemicals and processes used, quantities of chemicals retained,
conformance with the applicable standards, and certification that the moisture content
after treatment was reduced to the maximum specified amount. Submit the
manufacturer’s instructions for the proper use of each type of treated material, including,
but not limited to, the following materials:
a. Pressure-treatment: For each type specified, include certification by the treating
plant stating the chemicals and processes used, the net amount of preservative
retained, and conformance with the applicable standards.
b. Water-borne preservative treatment: Include a statement that the moisture content
of the treated materials was reduced to a maximum of 15% prior to shipment to the
project site.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 4
3. LEED Requirements and Submittals:
a. Prerequisite MR 1.1 – Framing Order Waste Factor Limiting:
1) Provide calculation on company letterhead for each type of framing material
used, and for each subcontractor.
2) Limit the overall estimated waste factor to 10% or less. If the waste factor on
any portion of the framing order exceeds 10%, calculate the overall waste
factor as showing in Table 1 of the LEED for Homes Handbook.
b. Credit MR 1.2 – Detailed Framing Documents.
1) Provide detailed framing plans as indicated above.
c. Credit MR 1.4 – Framing Efficiencies
1) Precut framing – provide product data on precut wall panels and all other
precut framing materials. Maximum the use of precut materials.
2) Open-web floor joists – see Section 061900 – PREFABRICATED WOOD
TRUSSES.
3) Advanced framing techniques – provide evidence of advanced framing
techniques.
4) Detailed cut list and lumber order corresponding to framing plans or scopes.
d. Credit MR 1.4 – Framing Efficiencies
1) Precut framing – provide product data on precut wall panels and all other
precut framing materials. Maximum the use of precut materials.
2) Open-web floor joists – see Section 061900 – PREFABRICATED WOOD
TRUSSES.
3) Advanced framing techniques – provide evidence of advanced framing
techniques.
4) Detailed cut list and lumber order corresponding to framing plans or scopes.
C. Provide the following FOR CLOSEOUT in accordance with Section 013300 – SUBMITTALS:
1. Operations and maintenance data: cleaning and repainting instructions for manufactured
products.
2. As-built drawings showing all changes from the structural drawings.
3. Warranty documentation.
1.8 STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store and handle products in strict compliance with the manufacturer’s instructions and
recommendations. Protect from moisture and damage. Stack materials to insure ventilation and
drainage. Protect lumber from the elements and against dampness during and after delivery.
Store all lumber on sleepers, laid flat, under cover in a well-ventilated area of the building.
B. Where sequence of operation permits, deliver no interior lumber material required under this
section until the work containing excess water has been completed for at least ten (10) calendar
days.
C. Sequence deliveries to avoid delays, but minimize on-site storage.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 5
1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Coordinate work of this section with work of other sections to ensure proper location and
attachment of other work. Scribe and trim all work to provide an accurate fit.
1.10 TESTING AND INSPECTION
A. All materials and workmanship under this section shall be subject to inspection in the mill, shop,
or field by the architect or by a qualified inspector selected by the owner and paid directly by the
owner. Structural tests and inspections shall be in accordance with Chapter 17 of the
Massachusetts State Building Code, Ninth Edition.
B. Such inspections, wherever conducted, shall not relieve the contractor of their responsibility to
furnish materials and workmanship in accordance with the contract requirements, nor shall the
inspector’s acceptance of materials or workmanship prevent later rejection of same by the
owner or architect if defects are discovered.
C. The contractor shall give proper notice to the owner’s inspectors and / or testing agencies and
shall allow access and full facilities as required for this inspection.
D. Regardless of any testing done by the owner, the Contractor is responsible for completing the
rough carpentry work in complete compliance with these specifications.
E. The contractor must set up a quality control program in the shop and in the field to ensure
compliance with the specifications.
F. Report in writing to the architect the results of the inspections.
G. When the contractor is satisfied that the work is satisfactorily completed, notify the architect,
who will make arrangements with the testing engineer to be retained by the owner to verify that
the work complies with these specifications.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LUMBER
A. Factory-mark each piece of lumber and plywood with the type, grade, mill, and grading agency,
except omit marking from surfaces to be exposed with transparent finish or without finish.
B. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions. Provide actual sizes as
required by PS-20 for the moisture contents specified for each use.
C. Provide dressed lumber S4S, unless otherwise noted.
D. Provide seasoned lumber with 15% maximum moisture content at the time of dressing.
E. For structural framing, provide Spruce-Pine-Fir No. 1 / No. 2 grade or better unless otherwise
indicated on the structural drawings. Structural framing includes, but is not limited to, joists,
rafters, columns, posts, headers, and load-bearing studs.
F. All lumber indicated to be pressure-treated, including all sills in contact with concrete, shall be
preservative pressure-treated Southern Pine No. 2 or better, unless otherwise noted.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 6
G. Miscellaneous lumber:
1. Provide wood for the support or attachment of other work including nails, blocking,
furring, and similar members. Provide lumber of the size shown or specified.
2. Provide above-ground lumber in contact with roofing, flashing, sheet metal, masonry,
concrete, dampproofing, and waterproofing that is pressure-treated with waterborne
preservatives complying with AWPA LP-2 and AWPA C-2. Lumber shall be kiln-dried to a
maximum moisture content of 15% after treatment.
2.2 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS
A. General: Provide engineered wood products for which current model code evaluations /
research exist that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and that have evidence
indicating compliance for the application listed with the specified requirements and the building
code in effect for this project.
B. Laminated Veneer Lumber (LVL): Lumber manufactured by laminating wood veneers in a
continuous press using an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D2559 to produce
members with grain of veneers parallel with their lengths. The basis-of-design is Microllam®
LVL Series, by TrusJoist by Weyerhaeuser. The final member shall comply with the following
requirements:
1. Factory-mark each piece of LVL with the type, grade, mill, and grading agency, except
omit marking from surfaces to be exposed with transparent finish or without finish.
2. Veneer materials shall comply with NES Report No. NER-481, ICBO ES Report No. ER-
4979, or CCMC Report No. 12627-R.
3. Allowable design stresses shall be as published by the manufacturer, determined from
empirical design or by rational engineering analysis, and demonstrated by
comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent agency. The minimum
design values are as follows:
All LVL members: Fb = 2,600 psi
Fv = 285 psi
E = 2.0 x 106 psi
4. Sizes shall be as indicated on the structural drawings.
5. All members are to be free of finger or scarf joints or mechanical connections in full-
length members.
C. Parallel Strand Lumber (PSL): Lumber manufactured from strands of wood fiber in a continuous
process with strands oriented to the length of the member and then fed into a press, with
adhesives complying with ASTM D2559. The basis-of-design is Parallam® PSL Series, by
TrusJoist by Weyerhaeuser. The final member shall comply with the following requirements:
1. Factory-mark each piece of PSL with the type, grade, mill, and grading agency, except
omit marking from surfaces to be exposed with transparent finish or without finish.
2. Veneer materials shall comply with NES Report No. NER-481, ICBO ES Report No. ER-
4979, or CCMC Report No. 12627-R.
3. Allowable design stresses shall be as published by the manufacturer, determined from
empirical design or by rational engineering analysis, and demonstrated by
comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent agency. The minimum
design values are as follows:
Posts / Columns: Fb = 2,400 psi Beams: Fb = 2,400 psi
Fv = 190 psi Fv = 290 psi
Fc = 2,500 psi Fc = 2,900 psi
E = 1.8 x 106 psi E = 2.0 x 106 psi
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 7
4. Sizes shall be as indicated on the structural drawings.
5. All members are to be free of finger or scarf joints or mechanical connections in full-
length members.
D. Laminated Strand Lumber (PSL): Lumber manufactured from strands of continuous wood fiber
in a continuous process with all of the strands oriented to the length of the member and then
pressed in the desired lay-up pattern with adhesives complying with ASTM D2559. The basis-
of-design is 1 1/4" wide TimberStrand® LSL Rim Board, by TrusJoist by Weyerhaeuser. The
final member shall comply with the following requirements:
1. Factory-mark each piece of LSL rimboard with the type, grade, mill, and grading agency,
except omit marking from surfaces to be exposed with transparent finish or without finish.
2. Veneer materials shall comply with NES Report No. NER-481, ICBO ES Report No. ER-
4979, or CCMC Report No. 12627-R.
3. Allowable design stresses shall be as published by the manufacturer, determined from
empirical design or by rational engineering analysis, and demonstrated by
comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent agency. The minimum
design values are as follows:
All LSL members: Fb = 1,700 psi
Fv = 400 psi
E = 1.3 x 106 psi
4. Sizes shall be as indicated on the structural drawings.
5. All members are to be free of finger or scarf joints or mechanical connections in full-
length members.
E. Performance-rated I-joists: Engineered lumber manufactured using sawn or structural
composite lumber flanges and wood structural panel webs bonded together with exterior-type
adhesive. The basis-of-design is APA-Rated Performace Rated I-Joists with the following
minimum design values:
PRI-50’s: Mallowable = 3,800 lb-ft
Vallowable = 1,120 lbs
EI = 186 x 106 psi
F. Prefabricated wood trusses: Refer to specifications Section 061900.
2.3 FLITCH BEAMS
A. Flitch beams are composite members consisting of one of more steel plates sandwiched
between plies of conventional dimensional lumber or engineered lumber.
B. Steel plates at flitch beams shall be ASTM A36, Grade 36 (Fy = 36 ksi) or better.
C. Steel bolts at flitch beams shall be F3125, Grade A325, or better. Where no bolt size is
indicated on plan, provide a minimum of 1/2"Ø bolts.
2.4 STRUCTURAL WOOD SHEATHING
A. Identify all sheathing panels with the appropriate APA trademark.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 8
B. Floor sheathing: Shall be AdvanTech 23/32” Flooring Sheathing at Series PS-2, Exposure 1 or
approved equal. All floor sheathing panels shall be tongue and groove with a span rating
matching the maximum spacing indicated on plan.
C. Roof sheathing: Shall be AdvanTech 5/8” Roof and Wall Sheathing, Panel Grade Structural 1,
exterior exposure classification, or approved equal. All roof sheathing panels shall be tongue
and groove with a span rating matching the maximum spacing indicated on plan.
D. Exterior wall sheathing: Shall be Zip System Sheathing by Huber Engineered Woods LLC, or
approved equal, consisting of 1/2” wood sheathing panels over 1” of insulation. The exposure
classification shall be Exposure 1 with a span rating matching the maximum wall stud spacing
indicated on the structural drawings.
E. Interior wall sheathing: Shall be APA-Rated Sheathing or Structural-1 sheathing as required in
the structural wall schedules on the structural drawings. Panel thickness shall be a minimum of
7/16” with an Interior exposure durability classification and a span rating matching the maximum
spacing indicated on plan.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners and anchorages: Provide the size, type, material, and finish as indicated on the
structural drawings and as recommended by the applicable standards, complying with the
applicable Federal Specifications for nails, screws, bolts, nuts, washers, and anchoring devices.
B. Provide metal hangers at all flush-framed conditions by Simpson Strong-Tie or approved equal.
Provide nails or screws at each hangers as indicated in the manufacturer’s product data.
C. All metal hangers for prefabricated wood trusses shall be specified by the truss provider.
2.6 WOOD TREATMENT
A. Preservative treatment shall comply with the applicable requirements of AWPA Standards C-2
(lumber) and C-9 (plywood). Mark each treated item with the AWPA Quality Mark requirements
B. Pressure-treat above-ground items with water-borne preservatives complying with the AWPA
Standards. After treatment, kiln-dry the lumber to a maximum moisture content of 15%. Treat all
indicated items, including the following:
1. Nailers, curbs, blocking, stripping, and similar members in contact with roofing, flashing,
vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
2. Wood sills, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with
masonry or concrete.
3. Wood framing members less than 8” above grade.
C. Complete the fabrication of treated items prior to treatment, where possible. If cut after
treatment, coat the cut surfaces of each lumber piece with a heavy brush coat of the same
chemicals used for treatment. Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood after drying and discard
damaged or defective pieces.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 9
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. The installer / erector shall examine all substrates, supports, and conditions under which this
work is to be performed and notify the contractor, in writing, of conditions detrimental to the
proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are
corrected. Beginning work means that the installer accepts substrates and conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION / ERECTION
A. General requirements:
1. Strictly comply with referenced standards, except where more restrictive requirements
are specified in this section. Choose pieces carefully to eliminate split, warped, or twisted
members.
2. Discard units of material with defects which might impair the quality of work, and units
which are too small to fabricate work with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement.
3. Set carpentry work accurately to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true
and accurately cut and fitted.
4. Securely attach carpentry work to the substrate and structure by anchoring and fastening
as shown on the structural drawings and as required by the Massachusetts State Building
Code. Ensure that blocking is capable of supporting the applied work and loading.
Countersink bolts, nail heads, and other fasteners flush with the face of wood on exposed
carpentry work and fill holes.
5. Use common wire nails unless otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for finish work.
Select fasteners of a size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be
exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between
members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood; predrill as required.
6. Saturate cut ends of treated wood with the same chemicals used for the original
treatment.
B. Wood grounds, nailers, and blocking:
1. Provide wherever shown and where required for screeding or attachment of other work.
Form to the shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of work to be
attached. Coordinate locations with other work involved.
2. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts
flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build into masonry during the installation
of the masonry work. Where possible, anchor to formwork before concrete placement.
C. Wood furring:
1. Install plumb and level with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as
required for the tolerances of the finished work.
D. Wood framing, general:
1. Provide framing members of the size and spacing shown, and frame openings as show.
Where framing details are not shown, comply with the recommendations of the Manual
for House Framing by the National Forest Products Association. Do not splice structural
members between supports.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 10
2. Anchor and nail as shown and comply with the recommended nailing schedules in the
IBC and the Massachusetts State Building Code.
3. Firestop concealed spaces with wood blocking not less than 2” thick, if not blocked by
other framing members. Provide blocking at each building story level and at ends of joist
spans.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 11
E. Joist Framing:
1. Provide framing of the size and spacing indicated. Install with crown edges up and
support ends of each member with not less than 1 1/2” of bearing on wood or 3” of
bearing on masonry or steel. Attach to wood bearing members with metal connectors;
frame to wood supporting members with metal hangers. Frame openings with headers
and trimmers supported by metal joist hangers.
2. Do not notch joists in the middle third of the span. Limit notch depths to 1/6 of the joist or
1/3 of the joist depth at joist ends. Do not bore holes larger than 1/3 of the depth of the
joist or locate holes closer than 2” from the top of the bottom of the joist.
3. Refer to the manufacturer’s product data for installation requirements, notch and bored
hole limitations, and other requirements for engineered lumber products (LVLs, PSLs,
and LSLs) and for performance-rated I-joists.
4. Provide bridging between joists when the nominal depth-to-thickness ratio of the joist
exceeds 4. Use bevel cut 1x4 or 2x3 wood bracing double-crossed and nailed at both
ends to the joists or metal bridging at 8’-0” on center (maximum).
5. Comply with the applicable recommendations contained on Form No. E 304, AAPA
Design / Construction Guide – Residential & Commercial, for the installation of plywood
products and applications as indicated. Fasten plywood panels as indicated below:
a. Subflooring: Fasten to framing with deformed shank nails and structural adhesive
b. Roofing: Fasten to framing with deformed shank nails and structural adhesive, with
ends staggered and over firm bearing. Use sheathing clips between roof framing
members.
F. All nailing shall be in accordance with the Massachusetts State Building Code, Ninth Edition.
G. Maintain the premises in a neat, orderly, and safe condition during the execution of work.
END OF SECTION 061000
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 061600 - SHEATHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Gypsum Wall sheathing.
2. Wall sheathing with integral water resistive barrier, air barrier, and insulation.
3. Roof sheathing.
4. Subflooring.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for plywood backing panels.
2. Section 072750 "Weather Barriers" for water-resistive barrier applied over wall sheathing.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component
materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. Indicate
type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.
2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. Include
physical properties of treated materials.
3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated plywood both before
and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent
testing agency according to ASTM D 5516.
4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content
of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.
5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of
treatment.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Inputs for EA Prerequisite 2 and Credit EA 1: Proposed design input for exterior wall
construction with air barrier performance taken into consideration.
2. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.4: For composite wood products, documentation indicating
that product contains no urea formaldehyde.
3. Certificates for Credit MR 5.1 or 5.2: Certificates verifying that materials were extracted,
processed, and manufactured within 500 miles of the project site.
SHEATHING 061600 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
C. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
1. Evaluation Reports: From ICC-ES, for wood sheathing and seam tape.
2. Product Certifications: From manufacturer, indicating that sheathing products comply
with ICC ES AC269 and ICC-ES AC310.
3. Certified Wood Certificates: Certificates indicating that manufacturer is currently certified
by an SFI- or FSC- accredited certification body, and chain-of-custody certificates
indicating that sheathing products comply with forest certification requirements.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack panels flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation.
Protect sheathing from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored.
Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide
materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per
ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance
Directory."
2.2 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS
A. Plywood: Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2 unless otherwise indicated.
B. Oriented Strand Board: DOC PS 2, made with binder containing no added urea formaldehyde.
C. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified, but not less than thickness
indicated.
D. Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard.
2.3 WALL SHEATHING WITH INTEGRAL WATER RESISTIVE BARRIER, AIR BARRIER, AND
INSULATION
A. Oriented-Strand-Board Wall Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing with factory-laminated water-
resistive barrier facer with printed fastener location symbols.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Provide Huber Engineered Woods LLC; ZIP System
Sheathing.
2. Span Rating, Panel Grade and Performance Category: Not less than 24/16; Rated
Sheathing; 7/16 Performance Category
3. Thickness: 1-1/2 inch.
SHEATHING 061600 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
4. Thermal Resistivity (R Value): 6.6.
5. Edge Profile: Square edge
6. Facer: Medium-density, phenolic-impregnated sheet material qualifying as a Grade D
weather-resistive barrier in accordance with ICC AC38.
a. Provide fastener spacing symbols on facer for 16-inch and 24-inch on center
spacing.
7. Perm Rating of Integral Water-Resistive Barrier: 12-16 perms.
8. Assembly maximum air leakage of 0.0072 cfm/sq. ft. infiltration and 0.0023 cfm/ sq. ft.
exfiltration at a pressure differential of 1.57 psf.
9. Exposure Time: Designed to resist weather exposure for 180 days.
2.4 ROOF SHEATHING
A. Oriented-Strand-Board Roof Sheathing: Exposure 1, Structural I sheathing.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Huber
Engineered Woods LLC; AdvanTech Sheathing or a comparable product by one of the
following:
a. Architect approved equal.
2. Span Rating and Performance Category: Not less than 24 oc, 40/20 Performance
Category
3. Edge Profile: Tongue and groove
4. Provide fastening guide on top panel surface with pre-spaced fastening symbols for 16-
inches and 24-inches on center spacing’s.
2.5 SUBFLOORING
A. Oriented-Strand-Board Combination Subfloor-Underlayment: Exposure 1 single-floor panels.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Huber
Engineered Woods LLC; AdvanTech Flooring or a comparable product by one of the
following:
a. Architect approved equal.
2. Span Rating and Performance Category: Not less than 24 oc, 23/32 Performance
Category.
3. Edge Detail: Tongue and groove.
4. Surface Finish: Fully sanded face.
5. Performance Standard: 24 oc, 23/32 Performance Category.
6. Provide fastening guide on top panel surface with pre-spaced fastening symbols for 16-
inches, 19.2-inches, and 24-inches on center spacings.
2.6 PRESERVATIVE-TREATED PLYWOOD
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2.
1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no
arsenic or chromium.
SHEATHING 061600 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
B. Mark plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings and plywood in contact with masonry or
concrete.
2.7 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified
in this article for material and manufacture.
1. For roof sheathing, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with
ASTM A 153/A 153M.
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that
is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by manufacturers of both
adhesives and panels.
1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine framing spacing and alignment to determine if work is ready to receive sheathing.
Proceed with sheathing work once conditions meet requirements.
3.2 SHEATHING INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to
use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces
do not span between fewer than three support members.
B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting
construction unless otherwise indicated.
C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following:
1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code."
D. Use common wire nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully
penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials.
SHEATHING 061600 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Do not allow “shiner” nails to
remain exposed.
E. Coordinate wall and roof sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so
these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from
passing through completed assembly.
F. Air and Moisture Barrier: Coordinate sheathing installation with flashing and joint sealant
sequencing and installation and with adjacent building air and moisture barrier components to
provide complete, continuous air- and moisture- barrier.
G. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of
structural support elements.
H. Install panels with laminated facer to exterior. Stagger end joints of adjacent panel runs.
Support all panel edges.
1. Space square-edged panels 0.125 inch.
2. Butt edges of self-spacing edge panels.
I. Attach sheathing panels securely to substrate with manufacturer-approved fasteners in
compliance with the following:
1. ICC-ES ESR-1539 or ICC-NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.
2. IBC: Table 2304.9.1 Fastening Schedule.
3. IRC: Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2),
"Alternate Attachments."
3.3 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in American Wood Council, “ASD/LRFD
Manual for Engineered Wood Construction,” 2012 edition for types of structural-use panels and
applications indicated.
B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:
1. Combination Subfloor-Underlayment:
a. Glue and nail to wood framing.
b. Glue and screw to cold-formed metal framing.
c. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends.
d. Install fasteners 3/8 inch to 1/2 inch from panel edges.
e. Space fasteners 6 inches on centers on supported edges (4-foot ends), and 12
inches on centers at intermediate support locations.
f. Penetrate wood framing members at least 1 inch.
2. Wall and Roof Sheathing:
a. Nail to wood framing.
b. Screw to cold-formed metal framing.
c. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends.
d. Install fasteners 3/8 inch to 1/2 inch from panel edges.
e. Space fasteners in compliance with requirements of authority having jurisdiction.
SHEATHING 061600 - 5
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
END OF SECTION 06160
SHEATHING 061600 - 6
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 061900 - 1
SECTION 061900 – PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. All of the contract documents, including the general and supplementary conditions and Division
1 general requirements, apply to the work of and are hereby made a part of this section.
B. Examine all drawings and all other sections of the specifications for requirements therein
affecting the work of this section, whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this
section.
C. This section contains information that applies to all work performed under the contract and is
hereby made a part of each specification section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work included: Provide all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work of
this section, including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Furnish and install all wood floor and roof trusses and accessories, including metal
hangers at flush-framed truss conditions
B. Sustainable design intent: To the extent possible, comply with the requirements of Energy Star.
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Other specifications sections which directly relate to the work of this section include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1. Section 061000 – ROUGH CARPENTRY
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All wood trusses and metal connectors shall be designed, fabricated, and installed in
accordance with the “National Design Specification for Wood Construction” by the American
Wood Council (AWC), latest edition, and the “National Design Standard for Metal Plate
Connected Wood Truss Construction” by the Truss Plate Institute, latest edition.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide the following FOR REVIEW in accordance with Section 013300 – SUBMITTALS:
1. Shop drawings indicating the following:
a. Plan of building by floor / roof level locating each truss.
b. Fully-dimensioned drawings showing all connection details.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 061900 - 2
c. Shop drawings shall be prepared under the direction of a professional engineer
licensed in the Commonwealth of Massachusetts.
d. Each truss design and shop drawing shall be submitted to the architect for
approval prior to the fabrication of any truss components.
B. Provide the following FOR INFORMATION in accordance with Section 013300 – SUBMITTALS:
1. Certificates: Evaluation report from ICC-ES or the Canadian Construction Materials
Centre.
2. Design Data: Structural analysis and design of the prefabricated wood trusses in
accordance with the design loads indicated on the structural drawings, including the
following:
a. Name, seal, and registration number of the professional engineer responsible for
the design of the trusses
b. Design and fabrication data
c. Connectors: gauge, size of connectors, and name of manufacturer
d. Lumber specifications
e. Pitch, span, and spacing of trusses
f. Design loading and allowable unit stress increase, if any
g. Force analysis of bar forces in each truss member
h. Size and location of all connector plates
i. Truss supports and anchorage details
j. Camber, if any
k. Permanent bracing and bridging
l. Handling and erection instructions
m. Metal connectors (hangers) for flush-framed truss conditions
3. Test and evaluation reports, indicating compliance with ASTM standards.
4. Manufacturer instructions, including handling and erection instructions.
5. Qualification statements indicating years of experience, key on-site personnel, and list of
projects constructed by those key personnel.
C. Sustainable design submittals:
1. Credit MR 1.2 – Detailed Framing Documents:
a. Detailed framing plans as indicated above.
2. Credit MR 1.4 – Framing Efficiencies:
a. Precut framing – provide product data on all precut framing materials. Maximize
the use of precut materials wherever possible.
D. Provide the following FOR CLOSEOUT in accordance with Section 013300 – SUBMITTALS:
1. Record documentation:
a. As-built drawings showing all changes from the structural framing plans
b. Warranty documentation
2. Sustainable design closeout documentation.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 061900 - 3
E. When the contractor is satisfied that the work is satisfactorily completed, notify the truss
designer, who shall inspect the installation and provide a written certification that the work has
been properly completed.
1.6 TESTING, CONTROL, AND INSPECTION
A. Place truss materials in an area protected by weather immediately upon delivery to the job site.
B. Store materials a minimum of 6” above ground on dunnage or sleepers and cover with a
protective waterproof covering providing for adequate air circulation and ventilation.
C. Do not store seasoned materials in wet or damp portions of the building.
D. All materials and workmanship of this section shall be subject to inspection in the fabrication
plant or in the field by the architect or by qualified inspectors approved by the architect and paid
directly by the owner. Structural tests and inspections shall be in accordance with Chapter 17 of
the Massachusetts State Building Code, Ninth Edition.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Provide wood trusses as indicated, to meet the loading requirements indicated on plan.
B. Mid-span deflection of roof trusses shall not exceed 1/360th of the span under dead / snow
loading or 1/240th of the span under total loading.
C. Mid-span deflection of floor trusses shall not exceed 1/480th of the span under live loading or
1/360th of the span under total loading.
2.2 LUMBER
A. All lumber used for truss members shall conform to the published stress ratings for the species
and grades as set out in the official grading rules of the appropriate lumber grading associations
or as listed in the reference specifications.
B. The moisture content of all lumber shall be within the proper limits, as stated in the reference
specifications, but shall not in any case exceed 19% nor be less than 7% at the time of
fabrication.
C. All lumber shall conform to the species and fully recognized nominal sizes shown on the truss
engineering designs. All members shall be cut from lumber which bears the proper grade-mark
stamp of a recognized grading association or licensed lumber inspection agency. No lumber
shall be used which does not conform to the proper dimensions and grades indicated.
2.3 CONNECTOR PLATES
A. All truss connector plates shall be manufactured from prime commercial-quality galvanized
sheet steel of no less than 18-gauge thickness which has a minimum yield of 33 ksi and a
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 061900 - 4
minimum ultimate tensile strength of 48 ksi. The corrosion-resistant coating shall be ASTM
A653 – G-60 commercial class, hot dipped galvanized.
B. The connector plates shall be manufactured so as to have a series of nail-like projections. Each
projection shall have practically parallel sides throughout its length with no offsets, except that
the end shall be shaped to a blunt point or a wedge. Each nail-like projection shall be
manufactured so that its length is not less than five times the dimension of its greater width and
formed in a manner which permits the projection to separate rather than cut into wood fibers in
accordance with acceptable nailing techniques.
C. Each plate shall bear the stamped name of its manufacturer which shall be the same as the
company furnishing the approved truss engineering shop designs. Where field connections of
truss sub-assemblies are necessary, special nail-on splice plates are acceptable, provided that
the plate sizes and positions are shown on the truss engineering designs as designed by the
truss designer.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. All trusses and other structural components shall be fabricated in a properly equipped
manufacturing facility of a permanent nature. They shall be manufactured by experienced
workmen, using precision cutting and truss fabricating equipment, under the direct supervision
of a qualified foreman. All trusses shall be fabricated under strict rules of inspection and quality
control as recommended by the Truss Plate Institute. The manufacturing facility shall be open to
inspection by the architect and all times.
B. All truss members shall be accurately cut to length and angle and shall be true to line to assure
tight joints for finished trusses.
C. All truss members and connector plates shall be accurately placed in special jigs and the
members tightly clamped in place, remaining in that position until the connector plates have
been pressed into the lumber simultaneously on both sides of the plate.
D. No open joints which depend on the stiffness of the metal connector plate to transmit stresses
or improperly fitting joints will be permitted.
E. Each truss shall be permanently stamped with the name and address of the truss fabricator.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HANDLING AND ERECTION
A. Fabricated trusses and sub-assemblies shall be handled with care so that they are not subject
to change. If the trusses are to be stockpiled or sored prior to erection, they shall be set in
vertical positions, resting upon temporary bearing supports and braced so that they will not be
subjected to unusual bending conditions or prone to tipping over.
B. During erection, care shall be exercised to keep horizontal bending of the trusses to a minimum.
C. Proper erection bracing shall be installed to hold the trusses true and plumb and in a safe
condition until permanent truss bracing and bridging can be solidly nailed in place to form a
structurally sound roof framing system. All erection and permanent bracing shall be installed
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 061900 - 5
and all components permanently fastened before the application of any loads, except the weight
of the erectors.
D. Field erection of the trusses shall include proper handling, safety precautions, temporary
bracing, and any other safeguards or procedures consistent with good workmanship and good
building erection practices.
E. Framing anchors and / or truss hangers shall be provided by the contractor as shown on the
engineering design drawings and erection drawings.
F. During the entire construction period the contractor shall provide means for adequate
distribution of concentrated loads so that the carrying capacity of any one truss or other
component is not exceed.
END OF SECTION 061900
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 064170 – COUNTERTOPS AND WALLSPLASHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Plastic-laminate countertops are to be installed at all kitchens. Stainless steel wallsplashes are
to be installed at all kitchens as indicated in drawings.
B. Section includes:
1. Plastic-laminate countertops.
C. Related Sections:
1. Section 066150 "Solid-Surface-Material Countertops" for bathroom vanity counters with
integral sinks.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product, including panel products, high-pressure decorative
laminate, and adhesive for bonding plastic laminate.
B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale
details, attachment devices, and other components.
1. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other
items installed in plastic-laminate countertops.
C. Samples for Initial Selection:
1. Plastic laminates.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver countertops until painting and similar operations that could damage countertops
have been completed in installation areas. If countertops must be stored in other than
installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements
specified in "Field Conditions" Article.
COUNTERTOPS AND WALLSPLASHES 064170 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install countertops until building is enclosed, wet
work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative
humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install countertops until building is enclosed, wet
work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and
90 deg F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the
construction period.
C. Field Measurements: Where countertops are indicated to fit to other construction, verify
dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress
to avoid delaying the Work.
D. Established Dimensions: Where countertops are indicated to fit to other construction, establish
dimensions for areas where countertops are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and
coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS WITH INTEGRAL BACKSPLASH
A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork
Standards" for grades indicated for construction, installation, and other requirements.
1. Provide certificates from AWI certification program indicating that countertops comply
with requirements of grades specified.
B. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, Grade HGP.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Abet Laminati, Inc.
b. Formica Corporation.
c. Lamin-Art, Inc.
d. Panolam Industries International, Inc.
e. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.
C. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
D. Edge and End Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces.
E. Edge Profile: Square
F. Laminate Thickness: 0.050”
G. Core Material: Particleboard made with exterior glue or exterior-grade plywood.
H. Core Thickness: 3/4 inch.
1. Build up countertop thickness to 1-1/2 inches at front, back, and ends with additional
layers of core material laminated to top.
I. Locations: All kitchen countertops.
COUNTERTOPS AND WALLSPLASHES 064170 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
2.2 WOOD MATERIALS
A. Composite Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced
quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.
2. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
B. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Unpigmented contact cement.
1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces.
C. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives and Sealants: Use products that comply with the
following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24):
1. Wood Glues: 30 g/L.
2. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L.
3. Structural Wood Member Adhesive: 140 g/L.
4. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate countertops to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.
1. Provide front and end overhang of 1 inch over base cabinets.
2. Provide profile to be selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.
3. Provide integral backsplash.
4. Provide sidesplashes where counter ends intersect gypsum wall board and where
indicated on Drawings. Sidesplash height shall match backsplash.
B. Complete fabrication, including assembly, to maximum extent possible before shipment to
Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where
necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Before installation, condition countertops to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation
areas.
B. Before installing countertops, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work
as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.
COUNTERTOPS AND WALLSPLASHES 064170 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Grade: Install countertops to comply with same grade as item to be installed.
B. Assemble countertops and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not
completed in the shop.
1. Provide cutouts for appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items.
C. Field Jointing: Where possible, make in the same manner as shop jointing, using dowels,
splines, adhesives, and fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Prepare edges to be joined
in shop so Project-site processing of top and edge surfaces is not required. Locate field joints
where shown on Shop Drawings.
1. Secure field joints in plastic-laminate countertops with concealed clamping devices
located within 6 inches of front and back edges and at intervals not exceeding 24 inches.
Tighten according to manufacturer's written instructions to exert a constant, heavy-
clamping pressure at joints.
D. Install countertops level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims.
Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.
E. Scribe and cut countertops to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish
at cuts.
F. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other
supports into underside of countertop.
1. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from
a straight line.
2. Secure sidesplashes to walls with adhesive.
3. Seal junctures of tops, splashes, and walls with mildew-resistant silicone sealant or
another permanently elastic sealing compound recommended by countertop material
manufacturer.
G. Plastic-Laminate Wallsplashes: Secure plastic laminate wallsplashes to walls with adhesive.
H. Stainless Steel Wallsplashes: Secure plastic laminate wallsplashes to walls with adhesive and
stainless steel, pan-head screws.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Repair damaged and defective countertops, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual
defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B. Clean exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged
or soiled areas.
END OF SECTION 064170
COUNTERTOPS AND WALLSPLASHES 064170 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 066150 - SOLID-SURFACE-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Solid-surface-material countertops and backsplashes at bathroom vanities.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 221000 "Plumbing" for non-integral sinks and plumbing fittings.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For countertop materials and sinks.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of material exposed to view.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements after base
cabinets are installed but before countertop fabrication is complete.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate locations of utilities that will penetrate countertops or backsplashes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOLID-SURFACE-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS
A. Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front and backsplash style:
1. Front: Straight, slightly eased at top.
2. Backsplash: Straight, slightly eased at corner.
3. Endsplash: Matching backsplash.
B. Countertops: 1/2-inch-thick, solid surface material with front edge built up with same material to
a thickness of 1 1/2" inches.
SOLID-SURFACE MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS 066150 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
C. Backsplashes: 1/2-inch- thick, solid surface material.
D. Fabrication: Fabricate tops in one piece with shop-applied edges and backsplashes unless
otherwise indicated. Comply with solid-surface-material manufacturer's written instructions for
adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing.
1. Install integral sink bowls in countertops in the shop.
E. Locations: All apartment bathroom vanities and accessible sink countertops.
2.2 COUNTERTOP MATERIALS
A. Adhesives: Adhesives shall not contain urea formaldehyde.
B. Solid Surface Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with
ANSI SS1.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Avonite Surfaces.
b. E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company.
c. Formica Corporation.
d. LG Chemical, Ltd.
e. Swan Corporation (The).
f. Wilsonart International.
2. Basis-of-Design: Swanstone Ellipse 22” Single Bowl Vanity Tops
a. Width to be determined by width of vanity base cabinet.
3. Type: Provide Standard Type unless Special Purpose Type is indicated.
4. Integral Sink Bowls: Comply with ISSFA-2 and ANSI Z124.3, Type 5 or Type 6, without a
precoated finish. Coordinate with specified plumbing equipment including faucets and
drains.
5. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install countertops level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet.
B. Fasten countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of
countertop. Pre-drill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer. Align adjacent
surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with
manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches,
and clean entire surface.
1. Install backsplashes and endsplashes to comply with manufacturer's written instructions
for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing.
END OF SECTION 066150
SOLID-SURFACE MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS 066150 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 066150 - SOLID-SURFACE-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. PVC Column Wraps.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry".
2. Section 074600 “Fiber Cement Cladding and Exterior Trim”.
3. Section 079200 “Joint Sealants”.
4. Section 099110 “Exterior Painting”.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For PVC Column Wraps and Moldings.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of material exposed to view.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of Columns by field measurements.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Standard columns shall be guaranteed in writing against defects of materials and workmanship.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. The components incorporated into the drawings show dimensions and styles chosen to
accomplish the Architect's intended aesthetic result and to conform to the building's
configuration in both form and function. The contractor shall verify that all components to be
provided by Royal Corinthian for the work of this section will fit the building's structural elements
PLASTIC AND METAL SURFACING PANELS 060670 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
and meet the visual design criteria on the drawings without materially altering profiles and
alignments.
B. Any additional support or backing components shall be provided by the contractor as part of the
base scope of work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PVC COLUMN WRAPS
A. Manufactuers: Basis-of-Design: Royal Corinthian Inc; Phone: 1.888.265.8661; Web:
www.royalcorinthian.com.
1. Substitutions: Allowed per architect approval.
2. PVC Column Wraps shall be sourced from a single manufacturer. Alternative
manufacturers must be approved by Architect.
3. Shaft, Cap, and Base come as 2 corner halves for onsite assembly.
B. Material: Cellular PVC
1. Shaft/Wall Thickness: 5/8”
2. Cap Profile: Craftsman.
3. Base Profile: Craftsman.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install PVC Column Wraps per manufacturer’s written instructions.
B. Caulk all joints at base/cap to column wall, and at base/cap to adjacent materials.
C. PVC Column Wraps shall be primed and painted.
END OF SECTION 066150
PLASTIC AND METAL SURFACING PANELS 060670 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 071410B – BELOW-GRADE WATERPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Below-grade waterproofing system.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, and tested physical and performance
properties of waterproofing.
2. Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating
substrate.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Show locations and extent of waterproofing.
2. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and
outside corners, tie-ins with adjoining waterproofing, and other termination conditions.
C. Inspection Report: Report from site representative qualified by waterproofing membrane
manufacturer indicating that installed system complies with manufacturer’s requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and
approved by waterproofing manufacturer.
1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate
temperatures recommended in writing by waterproofing manufacturer.
1. Do not apply waterproofing to a damp or wet substrate, when relative humidity exceeds
85 percent, or when temperatures are less than 5 deg F above dew point.
2. Do not apply waterproofing in snow, rain, fog or mist, or when such weather conditions
are imminent during application and curing period.
BELOW -GRADE WATERPROOFING 071410B - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
B. Maintain adequate ventilation during application and curing of waterproofing materials.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WATERPROOFING SYSTEM
A. Source Limitations for Waterproofing System: Obtain components of the waterproofing system
including, but not limited to, membranes, drainage panels, and auxiliary materials from single
source from single manufacturer.
B. Waterproofing System, General: Provide a two-part waterproofing system designed for below-
grade applications consisting of a fluid-applied membrane and a drainage board.
1. Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Grace
Waterproofing Products Procor Composite Waterproofing System or a comparable
product by one of the following:
a. Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofing.
b. TAMKO Building Products.
c. Tremco Commercial Sealants and Waterproofing.
C. Fluid-Applied Membrane: Two-component, self-curing, synthetic rubber waterproofing
complying with ASTM C 836/C 836M.
D. Sheet Membrane: Cross-laminated, high-density polyethylene membrane, 16 mils thick.
E. Drainage Board: Nonwoven-geotextile-faced, molded-sheet drainage panel consisting of a
studded, nonbiodegradable, molded-plastic-sheet drainage core; with a nonwoven, needle-
punched geotextile facing with an apparent opening size not exceeding No. 70 sieve laminated
to one side of the core and a polymeric film bonded to the other side; and with a vertical flow
rate of 9 to 18 gpm per ft..
F. Auxiliary Materials, General: Provide auxiliary materials recommended by waterproofing
manufacturer for intended use and compatible with one another and with waterproofing.
Products may include the following:
1. Primer, sealer, or surface conditioner.
2. Sheet flashing.
3. Adhesive.
4. Joint sealant
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended in
writing by waterproofing manufacturer.
BELOW -GRADE WATERPROOFING 071410B - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
2. Verify that substrate is visibly dry and within the moisture limits recommended in writing
by manufacturer. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to
ASTM D 4263.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide
clean, dust-free, and dry substrates for waterproofing application.
B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage and overspray
affecting other construction.
C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, acid residues,
and other penetrating contaminants or film -forming coatings from concrete.
D. Remove fins, ridges, and other projections, and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and
other voids.
E. Prepare surfaces at terminations and penetrations through waterproofing and at expansion
joints, drains, sleeves, and corners according to waterproofing manufacturer's written
instructions and to recommendations in ASTM C 1471.
3.3 JOINT AND CRACK TREATMENT
A. Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate according to waterproofing
manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in ASTM C 1471. Before coating
surfaces, remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks according to ASTM D 4258.
1. Comply with ASTM C 1193 for joint-sealant installation.
2. Apply bond breaker on sealant surface, beneath preparation strip.
3. Prime substrate along each side of joint and apply a single thickness of preparation strip
at least 6 inches wide along each side of joint. Apply waterproofing in two separate
applications and embed a joint reinforcing strip in the first preparation coat.
B. Install sheet flashing and bond to deck and wall substrates where required according to
waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Extend sheet flashings for 4 inches onto perpendicular surfaces and items penetrating
substrate.
3.4 WATERPROOFING APPLICATION
A. Apply waterproofing according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in
ASTM C 1471.
B. Start installing waterproofing in presence of manufacturer's technical representative.
C. Apply primer over prepared substrate unless otherwise instructed in writing by waterproofing
manufacturer.
BELOW -GRADE WATERPROOFING 071410B - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
D. Unreinforced Waterproofing Applications: Mix materials and apply waterproofing by spray,
roller, notched squeegee, trowel, or other application method suitable to slope of substrate.
1. Apply one or more coats of waterproofing to obtain a seamless membrane free of
entrapped gases and pinholes, with a dry film thickness of 90 mils.
2. Apply waterproofing to prepared wall terminations and vertical surfaces.
3. Verify manufacturer's recommended wet film thickness of waterproofing every 100 sq. ft.
E. Install sheet membrane into wet or tacky fluid-applied membrane with geotextile side embedded
into fluid-applied membrane. Use a hand roller or broom to fully adhere sheet membrane into
fluid-applied membrane.
1. Butt adjacent sheets of sheet membrane.
2. At sidelaps and endlaps, adhere a 12-inch wide strip of sheet flashing, using a roller to
create full adhesion. Overlap sheet flashing strips a minimum of 2 inches. Lap joints to
shed water.
3. Treat all edges of sheet membrane with sealant recommended by manufacturer.
3.5 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANEL INSTALLATION
A. Place and secure molded-sheet drainage panels, with geotextile facing away from wall or deck
substrate, according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesive or another method
that does not penetrate waterproofing. Lap edges and ends of geotextile to maintain continuity.
Protect installed molded-sheet drainage panels during subsequent construction.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a site representative qualified by waterproofing
membrane manufacturer to inspect substrate conditions, surface preparation, membrane
application, flashings, protection, and drainage components. Site representative shall submit a
report to the Architect.
B. If test results or inspections show waterproofing does not comply with requirements, remove
and replace or repair the waterproofing as recommended in writing by manufacturer, and make
further repairs after retesting and inspecting until waterproofing installation passes.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.
B. Correct deficiencies in or remove waterproofing that does not comply with requirements; repair
substrates, reapply waterproofing, and repair sheet flashings.
C. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures
recommended in writing by manufacturer of affected construction.
END OF SECTION 071410
BELOW -GRADE WATERPROOFING 071410B - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
BELOW -GRADE WATERPROOFING 071410B - 5
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
BELOW -GRADE WATERPROOFING 071410B - 6
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 072100 - BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Foam-plastic board insulation.
2. Glass-fiber board insulation
3. Mineral-wool blanket insulation.
4. Loose-fill insulation.
5. Closed Cell Spray foam insulation.
6. Adhesive-Backed Thermal Break Strips
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 048100 "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for insulation installed in cavity walls.
2. Section 061600 "Sheathing" for foam-plastic board sheathing over wood or steel framing.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products having recycled content, documentation
indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content.
Include statement indicating cost for each product having recycled content.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, for each product.
B. Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation, from ICC-ES.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to
ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of
applicable testing agency.
BUILDING INSULATION 072100 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture,
soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's
written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
B. Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows:
1. Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and
concealment.
2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials to Project
site before installation time.
3. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in each
area of construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION
A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: Also called “XPS” or “rigid insulation.”
1. ASTM C 578, of type and minimum compressive strength indicated below, with maximum
flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. DiversiFoam Products.
b. Dow Chemical Company (The).
c. Owens Corning.
d. Pactiv Building Products.
e. Huber Engineered Woods.
3. Type IV, 25 psi.
B. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation
securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates.
2.2 POLYISOCYANURATE FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD
A. Polyisocyanurate Board, Foil Faced: ASTM C 1289, foil faced, Type I, Class 1 or 2.
1. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Passes NFPA 285 testing as part of an approved
assembly.
B. Polyisocyanurate Board, Glass-Fiber-Mat Faced: ASTM C 1289, glass-fiber-mat faced, Type II,
Class 2.
1. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Passes NFPA 285 testing as part of an approved
assembly.
BUILDING INSULATION 072100 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
2.3 GLASS-FIBER BOARD INSULATION
A. Foil-Faced, Glass-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 612, Type IA; faced on one side with foil-
scrim-kraft or foil-scrim-polyethylene vapor retarder, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-
developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84.
1. Nominal density of 3 lb/cu. ft., thermal resistivity of 4.3 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75
deg F.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. CertainTeed.
b. Dow Chemical Company (The).
c. Owens Corning.
d. Knauf Insulation.
e. Johns Manville.
2.4 MINERAL-WOOL BLANKET INSULATION
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Fibrex Insulations Inc.
2. Owens Corning.
3. Roxul Inc.
4. Thermafiber.
B. Unfaced, Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: Also called “SAFB” or “acoustic insulation.”
1. ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with
maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per
ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
2.5 LOOSE-FILL INSULATION
A. Cellulosic-Fiber Loose-Fill Insulation: ASTM C 739, chemically treated for flame-resistance,
processing, and handling characteristics.
1. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer
recycled content not less than 85 percent.
2.6 SPRAY-APPLIED CELLULOSIC INSULATION
A. Self-Supported, Spray-Applied Cellulosic Insulation: ASTM C 1149, Type II (materials
containing a dry adhesive activated by water during installation; intended only for enclosed or
covered applications), chemically treated for flame-resistance, processing, and handling
characteristics.
1. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer
recycled content not less than 85 percent.
BUILDING INSULATION 072100 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
2.7 CLOSED CELL SPRAY FOAM INSULATION
A. Closed-Cell Polyurethane Foam Insulation: Also called “spray polyurethane foam,” “spray-
foam,” or “SPF.” Basis-of-Design: ProSeal LE by Icynene Inc.
1. Thermal Resistance (7.1 for 1 inch of material) (R-Value/inch @75 deg F): ASTM C 518;
4.86 hr.sq ft.degree F/BTU
2. Air Permeance (for 1.3 inch of material): ASTM E 2178: <0.00049 L/s.m2 @75
Pa
3. Water Vapor Transmission (for 2.5 inches of material): ASTM E 96; less than 1
perm
4. Resistance to Fungal Growth: ASTM C 1338: no growth
5. Flame Spread and Smoke Developed Rating: ASTM E 84
a. Flame Spread: Less than 20
b. Smoke Development: Less than 450
6. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Commercial Thermal Solutions, Inc. (TigerFoam Insulation).
b. Dow Chemical Company (Great Stuff and Froth Paks).
c. Icynene, Inc.
7. Minimum density of 0.4 lb/cu. ft., thermal resistivity of 3.4 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75
deg F.
B. CLOSED CELL FOAM THERMAL / IGNITION BARRIER
1. Provide ICC certified fire retardant coating over all open and closed cell polyurethane
foam insulation that is not within a fire protected floor, wall or ceiling cavity.
2.8 ADHESIVE-BACKED THERMAL BREAK STRIPS
A. Adhesive-Backed Thermal Break Insulative Foam Tape: Basis-of-Design: Quick-Stop by
Thermal Design.
1. Substitutions: Allowed per architect approval.
2. Dimensions:
a. Width: 3 inches
b. Thickness: 3/6 inch
c. Roll Length: 108 feet.
2.9 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils thick, with maximum permeance rating of
0.13 perm.
B. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder
manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.
C. Vapor-Retarder Fasteners: Pancake-head, self-tapping steel drill screws; with fender washers.
BUILDING INSULATION 072100 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
D. Single-Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type I, Grade NS, Class 25,
Use NT related to exposure, and Use O related to vapor-barrier-related substrates.
E. Adhesive for Vapor Retarders: Product recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer and has
demonstrated capability to bond vapor retarders securely to substrates indicated.
2.10 INSULATION FASTENERS
A. Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of
holding insulation of specified thickness securely in position indicated with self-locking washer in
place.
1. Plate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square.
2. Spindle: Copper-coated, low-carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch in diameter; length
to suit depth of insulation indicated.
B. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick galvanized-
steel sheet, with beveled edge for increased stiffness, sized as required to hold insulation
securely in place, but not less than 1-1/2 inches square or in diameter.
1. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to
ensure permanent retention of cap in the following locations:
a. Garage Ceiling
b. Floors above unconditioned air
c. As indicated in drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including
removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders, or that interfere with insulation
attachment.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and
applications indicated.
B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice,
rain, or snow at any time.
C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions
and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.
D. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard
thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness
indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.
BUILDING INSULATION 072100 - 5
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
3.3 INSTALLATION OF BELOW -GRADE INSULATION
A. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units using manufacturer's recommended adhesive
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, extend insulation down to top of footing.
B. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, install insulation under entire area of concrete slab-on-grade.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION
A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written
instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use
mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.
B. Foam -Plastic Board Insulation: Seal joints between units by applying adhesive, mastic, or
sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in
completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation
manufacturer.
C. Glass-Fiber or Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members
according to the following requirements:
1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If
more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a
snug fit between ends.
2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between
edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or
protected from contact with insulation.
4. Install eave ventilation troughs between roof framing members in insulated attic spaces at
vented eaves.
5. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced
blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to
flanges of metal studs.
6. For wood-framed construction, install blankets according to ASTM C 1320 and as follows:
D. Loose-Fill Insulation: Apply according to ASTM C 1015 and manufacturer's written instructions.
Level horizontal applications to uniform thickness as indicated, lightly settle to uniform density,
but do not compact excessively.
1. For cellulosic-fiber loose-fill insulation, comply with CIMA's Bulletin #2, "Standard
Practice for Installing Cellulose Insulation."
E. Spray-Applied Insulation: Apply spray-applied insulation according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Do not apply insulation until installation of pipes, ducts, conduits, wiring, and
electrical outlets in walls is completed and windows, electrical boxes, and other items not
indicated to receive insulation are masked. After insulation is applied, make flush with face of
studs by using method recommended by insulation manufacturer.
BUILDING INSULATION 072100 - 6
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
F. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where
required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials:
1. Loose-Fill Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume
equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft.
2. Spray Polyurethane Insulation: Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN CEILINGS AND WALLS FOR SOUND ATTENUATION
A. Where glass-fiber blankets are indicated for sound attenuation above ceilings, install blanket
insulation over entire ceiling area in thicknesses indicated. Extend insulation up to the deck or
48 inches up either side of partitions.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR CONCRETE SUBSTRATES
A. Install board insulation on concrete substrates by adhesively attached, spindle-type insulation
anchors as follows:
1. Fasten insulation anchors to concrete substrates with insulation anchor adhesive
according to anchor manufacturer's written instructions. Space anchors according to
insulation manufacturer's written instructions for insulation type, thickness, and
application indicated.
2. Apply insulation standoffs to each spindle to create cavity width indicated between
concrete substrate and insulation.
3. After adhesive has dried, install board insulation by pressing insulation into position over
spindles and securing it tightly in place with insulation-retaining washers, taking care not
to compress insulation below indicated thickness.
4. Where insulation will not be covered by other building materials, apply capped washers to
tips of spindles.
3.7 INSTALLATION OF CLOSED-CELL SPRAY FOAM INSULATION
A. Site mix liquid components supplied by Icynene and installed by Independent Icynene
Licensed Dealer.
B. Apply insulation to substrates in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Apply insulation to produce thickness required for indicated R Value.
D. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated.
E. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls,
coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and
insulation encapsulates piping.
3.8 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Place vapor retarders on side of construction indicated on Drawings. Extend vapor retarders to
extremities of areas to protect from vapor transmission. Secure vapor retarders in place with
adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarders to cover
miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation.
B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping no fewer than two studs.
BUILDING INSULATION 072100 - 7
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1. Fasten vapor retarders to wood framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of
wall openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches o.c.
2. Before installing vapor retarders, apply urethane sealant to flanges of metal framing
including runner tracks, metal studs, and framing around door and window openings.
Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape according to vapor-
retarder manufacturer's written instructions. Seal butt joints with vapor-retarder tape.
Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates.
3. Firmly attach vapor retarders to metal framing and solid substrates with vapor-retarder
fasteners as recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer.
C. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor
retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and
vapor retarders.
D. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work.
Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarders.
3.9 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures,
physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation
is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction
immediately after installation.
3.10 INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: Install at locations where indicated on Drawings –
Exterior walls, foundation walls, slab edges, and under concrete floor slabs.
B. Extruded-Tapered-Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: Install above flat roof deck as indicated
on Drawings. R-40 minimum at main roof.
C. Unfaced, Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: Fire-rated walls and other areas as indicated on
drawings. Provide thickness as indicated on Drawings.
D. Spray-Applied Cellulosic Insulation: Install in attics, at the open cavities of wood parapet
framing, and other locations indicated on Drawings. Fill framing cavities.
E. Closed-Cell Polyurethane Foam Insulation: Install at the underside of deck of bay window
roofs, all rim joists, miscellaneous gaps in exterior walls as required for air sealing, and at other
areas indicated in drawings. R-21 minimum at exterior 2x6 walls.
F. Low-Expansion Closed-Cell Polyurethane Foam Insulation: Install at gaps between framing and
window/door frames as indicated on Drawings. Seal all door strikes at air-sealed walls.
G. Adhesive-Backed Thermal Break Strips: Install at window and door openings as indicated in the
drawings.
END OF SECTION 072100
BUILDING INSULATION 072100 - 8
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 072750 - WEATHER BARRIERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Building wrap.
2. Self-adhering seam and flashing tape
3. Self-adhering flexible flashing.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 061600 "Sheathing".
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. For building wrap and accessories, include data on air and water-vapor permeance
based on testing according to referenced standards.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WALL SHEATHING WITH INTEGRAL WATER RESISTIVE BARRIER, AIR BARRIER, AND
INSULATION
A. Oriented-Strand-Board Wall Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing with factory-laminated water-
resistive barrier facer with printed fastener location symbols.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Provide Huber Engineered Woods LLC; ZIP System
Sheathing.
2. Span Rating, Panel Grade and Performance Category: Not less than 24/16; Rated
Sheathing; 7/16 Performance Category
3. Thickness: 1-1/2 inch.
4. Thermal Resistivity (R Value): 6.6.
5. Edge Profile: Square edge
6. Facer: Medium-density, phenolic-impregnated sheet material qualifying as a Grade D
weather-resistive barrier in accordance with ICC AC38.
a. Provide fastener spacing symbols on facer for 16-inch and 24-inch on center
spacing.
WEATHER BARRIERS 072750 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
7. Perm Rating of Integral Water-Resistive Barrier: 12-16 perms.
8. Assembly maximum air leakage of 0.0072 cfm/sq. ft. infiltration and 0.0023 cfm/ sq. ft.
exfiltration at a pressure differential of 1.57 psf.
9. Exposure Time: Designed to resist weather exposure for 180 days.
2.2 SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT MATERIAL
A. Self-Adhering Seam and Flashing Tape: Pressure-sensitive, self-adhering, cold-applied, seam
tape consisting of polyolefin film with acrylic adhesive, meeting ICC-ES AC148, and tested as
part of an assembly meeting performance requirements.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Provide Huber Engineered Woods; ZIP System Tape.
2. Thickness: 0.012 inch.
B. Self-Adhering Seam and Flashing Stretch Tape: Pressure-sensitive, self-adhering, cold-
applied, seam tape consisting of polyolefin film with acrylic adhesive, meeting ICC-ES AC148,
and tested as part of an assembly meeting performance requirements.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Provide Huber Engineered Woods; ZIP System Stretch Tape.
2. Thickness: 42 mils.
C. Liquid-Applied Flashing Membrane: Gun-grade, cold-applied, silyl-terminated polyether (STPE)
liquid flashing membrane compatible with sheathing/weather barrier and self-adhering seam
and flashing tape, and tested as part of an assembly meeting performance requirements.
Follow manufacturer’s recommendation for integration with ZIP System Tape.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Provide Huber Engineered Woods; ZIP System Liquid Flash.
2. Hardness, Shore A, ASTM C 661: 40 to 45.
D. Self-Adhering Flexible Flashing Tape: Pressure-sensitive, self-adhering, cold-applied, seam
tape consisting of polyolefin film with acrylic adhesive, meeting ICC-ES AC148, and tested as
part of an assembly meeting performance requirements.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Provide Huber Engineered Woods; ZIP SystemStretch Tape.
2. Thickness: 0.042 inch.
2.3 MEMBRANE FLASHING
A. Performance Characteristics:
1. Water intrusion: No leakage at 75 Pa, when tested in accordance with ASTM E331.
2. Water Vapor Permeability: < 1 perm, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96.
B. Straight Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl
rubber or rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum
foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch.
1. Usage: As indicated in drawings.
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cofair Products, Inc.; Tite-Seal.
b. Dow; WEATHERMATE.
c. Dupont; StraightFlash.
WEATHER BARRIERS 072750 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
d. Grace Construction Products; Vycor Plus.
e. Protecto Wrap Company; BT25XL.
C. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl
rubber compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded
polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.050 inch.
1. Usage: Bottom corners and window sills of openings in exterior walls.
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cofair Products, Inc.; Tite-Seal Flex.
b. Dupont; FlexWrap NF.
c. Protecto Wrap Company; Protecto Sill Pan Flashing.
D. Primer for Membrane Flashing: Product recommended by manufacturer of flashing for
substrate.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl
rubber or rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum
foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.030 inch.
1. Coordination: Contractor shall verify that selected flexible flashing product is compatible
with selected building wrap.
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. DuPont (E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company); DuPont Flashing Tape.
b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Vycor Butyl Self
Adhered Flashing.
c. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; CCW -705-TWF Thru-Wall Flashing.
d. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Vycor Plus
Self-Adhered Flashing.
B. Primer for Flexible Flashing: Product recommended by manufacturer of flexible flashing for
substrate.
C. Nails and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WALL SHEATHING WITH INTEGRAL WATER RESISTIVE BARRIER, AIR BARRIER, AND
INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Install sheathing panels in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, requirements of
applicable Evaluation Reports, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Air and Moisture Barrier: Coordinate sheathing installation with flashing and joint sealant
sequencing and installation and with adjacent building air and moisture barrier components to
provide complete, continuous air- and moisture- barrier.
C. Do not bridge expansion joints; allow joint spacing equal to spacing of structural supports.
WEATHER BARRIERS 072750 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
D. Install panels with laminated facer to exterior. Stagger end joints of adjacent panel runs.
Support all panel edges.
1. Space square-edged panels 0.125 inch (3 mm).
2. Butt edges of self-spacing edge panels.
E. Attach sheathing panels securely to substrate with manufacturer-approved fasteners in
compliance with the following:
1. ICC-ES ESR-1539 or ICC-NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.
2. IBC: Table 2304.9.1 Fastening Schedule.
3. IRC: Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2),
"Alternate Attachments."
F. Apply ZIP System tape at all panel seams, penetrations, and facer defects or cracks to form
continuous weathertight surface. Apply 3-3/4 inch wide ZIP System tape at window flange
jambs and heads. Apply tape according to manufacturer's written instructions and requirements
of ICC-ES applicable to tape application.
G. Apply liquid-applied flashing membrane at penetrations, gaps, and cracks to form continuous
weathertight surface. Apply liquid membrane according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Follow manufacturer’s recommendation for integration with ZIP System Tape.
H. Apply ZIP System Stretch Tape at window sill pans, door frames, radius fenestrations and wall
penetrations to form continuous weathertight surface. Apply tape according to manufacturer’s
written instructions and requirements of IAPMO ER365 application to tape application.
3.2 SELF-ADHERING FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Apply flexible flashing where indicated to COMPLY WITH MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN
INSTRUCTIONS.
1. Prime substrates as recommended by flashing manufacturer.
2. Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches except that at flashing
flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width.
3. Lap flashing over water-resistive barrier at bottom and sides of openings.
4. Lap water-resistive barrier over flashing at heads of openings.
5. Install flexible flashing at bottom corners of openings in exterior walls.
After flashing has been applied, roll surfaces with a hard rubber or metal roller to ensure that flashing is
completely adhered to substrates.
END OF SECTION 072750
WEATHER BARRIERS 072750 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 073110 - ASPHALT SHINGLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Asphalt shingles.
2. Underlayment.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood framing.
2. Section 061600 "Sheathing" for roof sheathing.
3. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing materials, gutters and
downspouts which are installed as part of this Section.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of asphalt shingle indicated.
1. Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For each type of asphalt shingle to include in maintenance manuals.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain ridge and hip cap shingles from single source from single
manufacturer.
ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store roofing materials in a dry, well-ventilated, weathertight location according to asphalt
shingle manufacturer's written instructions. Store underlayment rolls on end on pallets or other
raised surfaces. Do not double stack rolls.
1. Handle, store, and place roofing materials in a manner to avoid significant or permanent
damage to roof deck or structural supporting members.
B. Protect unused underlayment from weather, sunlight, and moisture when left overnight or when
roofing work is not in progress.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install asphalt shingles until spaces are enclosed
and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is
operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels
during the remainder of the construction period.
1. Install self-adhering sheet underlayment within the range of ambient and substrate
temperatures recommended by manufacturer.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace asphalt
shingles that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Manufacturing defects.
b. Structural failures including failure of asphalt shingles to self-seal after a
reasonable time.
2. Material Warranty Period: 30 years from date of Substantial Completion, prorated, with
first three years non-prorated.
3. Workmanship Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED ASPHALT SHINGLES
A. Laminated-Strip Asphalt Shingles: ASTM D 3462, laminated, multi-ply overlay construction,
glass-fiber reinforced, mineral-granule surfaced, and self-sealing. ASTM 3018, Type 1. UL
790, Class A.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide GAF
Timberline Lifetime High Definition Shingles or comparable product by one of the
following:
ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
a. Atlas Roofing Corporation.
b. CertainTeed Corporation.
c. GAF Materials Corporation.
d. IKO.
e. Owens Corning.
f. TAMKO Roofing Products, Inc.
2. Color and Blends: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
B. Hip and Ridge Shingles: Manufacturer's standard units to match asphalt shingles.
2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A. Reinforced synthetic underlayment: Fiberglass- or scrim-reinforced underlayment complying
with ASTM D226 and ASTM D4869, acceptable to shingle manufacturer. Subject to compliance
with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are
not limited to, the following:
1. CertainTeed DiamondDeck Synthetic Roofing Underlayment.
2. GAF Materials Corporation Shingle-Mate Roof Deck Protection.
3. TAMKO Synthetic Underlayment.
B. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment, Polyethylene Faced: ASTM D 1970, minimum of 40-mil-
thick, slip-resisting, polyethylene-film-reinforced top surface laminated to SBS-modified asphalt
adhesive, with release paper backing; cold applied.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Grace Ice &
Water Shield or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc.
b. Grace, W. R. & Co.
c. Henry Company.
d. Johns Manville.
e. Owens Corning.
2.3 RIDGE VENTS
A. Rigid Ridge Vent: Manufacturer's standard, rigid section high-density polypropylene or other
UV-stabilized plastic ridge vent with nonwoven geotextile filter strips; for use under ridge
shingles.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Cor-A-Vent, Inc.
b. GAF Materials Corporation.
c. Owens Corning.
d. The same manufacturer selected for asphalt shingles.
2. Minimum Net Free Area: 18 square inches per linear foot.
ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type II, asbestos free.
B. Roofing Nails: ASTM F 1667; aluminum, stainless-steel, copper, or hot-dip galvanized-steel
wire shingle nails, minimum 0.120-inch- diameter, barbed shank, sharp-pointed, with a minimum
3/8-inch- diameter flat head and of sufficient length to penetrate 3/4 inch into solid wood decking
or extend at least 1/8 inch through OSB or plywood sheathing.
1. Where nails are in contact with metal flashing, use nails made from same metal as
flashing.
2.5 METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
A. General: Comply with requirements in Section 07620 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's
"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other
characteristics of the item.
1. Apron Flashings: Fabricate with lower flange a minimum of 4 inches over and 4 inches
beyond each side of downslope asphalt shingles and 6 inches up the vertical surface.
2. Step Flashings: Fabricate with a headlap of 2 inches and a minimum extension of 4
inches over the underlying asphalt shingle and up the vertical surface.
3. Cricket Flashings: Fabricate with concealed flange extending a minimum of 18 inches
beneath upslope asphalt shingles and 6 inches beyond each side of chimney or skylight
and 6 inches above the roof plane.
4. Open-Valley Flashings: Fabricate in lengths not exceeding 10 feet with 1-inch- high,
inverted-V profile at center of valley and equal flange widths of 12 inches.
5. Drip Edges: Fabricate in lengths not exceeding 10 feet with 2-inch roof-deck flange and
1-1/2-inch fascia flange with 3/8-inch drip at lower edge.
C. Vent Pipe Flashings: One-piece combination EPDM and aluminum boot designed for use in
asphalt roofing systems.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Examine roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing and
blocking or metal clips and that installation is within flatness tolerances.
2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and completely
anchored; and that provision has been made for flashings and penetrations through
asphalt shingles.
B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the
Work.
ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with underlayment manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable
to products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Synthetic Underlayment: Install on roof deck parallel with and starting at the eaves. Lap sides
a minimum of 2 inches over underlying course. Lap ends a minimum of 4 inches. Stagger end
laps between succeeding courses at least 72 inches. Fasten with roofing nails.
1. Install synthetic underlayment on roof deck not covered by self-adhering sheet
underlayment. Lap sides of felt over self-adhering sheet underlayment not less than 3
inches in direction to shed water. Lap ends of felt not less than 6 inches over self-
adhering sheet underlayment.
2. Install fasteners at no more than 36 inch o.c.
C. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install, wrinkle free, on roof deck. Comply with low-
temperature installation restrictions of underlayment manufacturer if applicable. Install at
locations indicated below and on Drawings, lapped in direction to shed water. Lap sides not
less than 3-1/2 inches. Lap ends not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses.
Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within seven days.
1. Eaves: Extend from edges of eaves 36 inches beyond interior face of exterior wall.
2. Fascia: Overlap the fascia board 2 inches to seal the gap in between the edge of the
sheathing and the top of the fascia board.
3. Rakes: Extend from edges of rake 36 inches beyond interior face of exterior wall.
4. Valleys: Extend from lowest to highest point 36 inches on each side.
5. Hips: Extend 18 inches on each side.
6. Ridges: Extend 36 inches on each side without obstructing continuous ridge vent slot.
7. Sidewalls: Extend beyond sidewall 18 inches, and return vertically against sidewall not
less than 12 inches.
8. Dormers, Chimneys, Skylights, and Other Roof-Penetrating Elements: Extend beyond
penetrating element 18 inches, and return vertically against penetrating element not less
than 12 inches.
9. Roof Slope Transitions: Extend 18 inches on each roof slope.
3.3 METAL FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install metal flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements in
Section 07620 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
1. Install metal flashings according to recommendations in ARMA's "Residential Asphalt
Roofing Manual" and asphalt shingle recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing
and Waterproofing Manual."
B. Apron Flashings: Extend lower flange over and beyond each side of downslope asphalt
shingles and up the vertical surface.
C. Step Flashings: Install with a headlap of 2 inches and extend over the underlying asphalt
shingle and up the vertical surface. Fasten to roof deck only.
ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 - 5
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
D. Cricket Flashings: Install against the roof-penetrating element extending concealed flange
beneath upslope asphalt shingles and beyond each side.
E. Rake Drip Edges: Install rake drip edge flashings over underlayment and fasten to roof deck.
F. Eave Drip Edges: Install eave drip edge flashings below underlayment and fasten to roof
sheathing.
G. Pipe Flashings: Fasten and seal as recommended by manufacturer.
3.4 ASPHALT SHINGLE INSTALLATION
A. General: Install asphalt shingles according to manufacturer's written instructions,
recommendations in ARMA's "Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual," and asphalt shingle
recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual."
B. Install starter strip along lowest roof edge, consisting of an asphalt shingle strip with self-sealing
strip face up at roof edge.
1. Extend asphalt shingles 1/2 inch over fasciae at eaves and rakes.
2. Install starter strip along rake edge.
C. Install first and remaining courses of asphalt shingles stair-stepping diagonally across roof deck
with manufacturer's recommended offset pattern at succeeding courses, maintaining uniform
exposure.
D. Fasten asphalt shingle strips with a minimum of five roofing nails located according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Where roof slope exceeds 20:12, seal asphalt shingles with asphalt roofing cement
spots after fastening with additional roofing nails.
2. Where roof slope is less than 4:12, seal asphalt shingles with asphalt roofing cement
spots.
3. When ambient temperature during installation is below 50 deg F, seal asphalt shingles
with asphalt roofing cement spots.
E. Closed-Cut Valleys: Extend asphalt shingle strips from one side of valley 12 inches beyond
center of valley. Use one-piece shingle strips without joints in valley. Fasten with extra nail in
upper end of shingle. Install asphalt shingle courses from other side of valley and cut back to a
straight line 2 inches short of valley centerline. Trim upper concealed corners of cut-back
shingle strips.
1. Do not nail asphalt shingles within 6 inches of valley center.
2. Set trimmed, concealed-corner asphalt shingles in a 3-inch- wide bed of asphalt roofing
cement.
F. Ridge Vents: Install continuous ridge vents over asphalt shingles according to manufacturer's
written instructions. Fasten with roofing nails of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing.
G. Ridge and Hip Cap Shingles: Maintain same exposure of cap shingles as roofing shingle
exposure. Lap cap shingles at ridges to shed water away from direction of prevailing winds.
Fasten with roofing nails of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing.
ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 - 6
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1. Fasten ridge cap asphalt shingles to cover ridge vent without obstructing airflow.
END OF SECTION 073110
ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 - 7
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 - 8
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 074600 – FIBER CEMENT CLADDING AND EXTERIOR TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Fiber-cement panels and accessories.
2. Fiber-cement trim.
3. Fiber-cement soffit.
4. Fiber-cement panel siding vintage wood.
5. Rainscreen Vents.
6. PVC trim.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 054000 “Light Gauge Metal Framing” for metal furring.
2. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, grounds, nailers, and blocking.
3. Section 061600 "Sheathing" for wall sheathing and weather-resistive barriers.
4. Section 072100 “Insulation” for exterior wall insulation.
5. Section 099110 “Exterior Painting” for field painting siding, trim, and soffits.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate siding installation with flashings and other adjoining construction to ensure proper
sequencing.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Fiber cement panels, trim soffit, pvc trim and aluminum trim
including related accessories.
C. Samples for Verification:
1. 4-inch-long-by-6-inch-width Sample of siding.
2. Aluminum Trim – 4-inch long sections of each type of aluminum trim.
3. Fasteners. 2 of each type of fasteners for fiber cement panels, aluminum trim, and
vertical furring.
FIBER CEMENT CLADDING AND EXTERIOR TRIM 074600 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Certificates: For each type of fiber-cement siding and soffit.
B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, for fiber-cement siding.
C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For each type of fiber-cement siding required, from ICC-ES.
D. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For each type of siding and soffit and related accessories to include in
maintenance manuals.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Labeling: Provide fiber-cement siding that is tested and labeled according to ASTM C 1186 by
a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain siding and soffit, including related accessories, from single source
from single manufacturer.
C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1. Build mockup for panel siding and accessories.
a. Size: 120 inches wide by 240 inches high.
b. Include outside corner and inside corner.
2. Build mockup for eave, soffit, and rake at outside corner.
a. Size: 48 inches long.
b. Include return at gable end and gutter.
3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations
in writing.
4. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
D. Boston Redevelopment Authority Mock-up: Fiber-cement Panels and accessories will be
incorporated into the 4 foot by 8 foot free-standing mock-up panel prior to construction.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store products in manufacturer’s unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B. Store siding on edge or lay flat on a smooth level surface. Protect edges and corners from
chipping. Store sheets under cover and keep dry prior to installing.
FIBER CEMENT CLADDING AND EXTERIOR TRIM 074600 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
C. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials,
in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation with flashings and other adjoining construction to ensure proper
sequencing.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Product Warranty: Non-pro-rated product warranty. Warranty shall include labor and materials.
1. Warranty Period: 30 years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Finish Warranty: Warranty against manufacturing finish defects. Warranty shall include labor
and materials.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including peeling, cracking, chipping, and fading.
2. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FIBER-CEMENT PLANK SIDING
A. General: ASTM C 1186, Type A, Grade II, fiber-cement board, noncombustible when tested
according to ASTM E 136; with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to
ASTM E 84.
1. Manufacturers: Basis-of-Design: James Hardie Building Products, Inc., which is located
at: 26300 La Alameda Suite 400 ; Mission Viejo, CA 92691; Toll Free Tel: 866-274-3464;
Tel: 949-367-4980; Fax: 949-367-4981; Email: request info (info@jameshardie.com);
Web: www.jameshardiecommercial.com
2. Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Allura.
b. Cement Board Fabricators, Inc.
c. CertainTeed Corp.
d. Nichiha Fiber Cement.
3. Fiber cement plank siding shall be sourced from a single manufacturer. Alternative
manufacturers must be approved by Architect.
B. Plank Siding: HardiPlank
1. Type: Smooth Lap Siding
2. Width: 6-1/4 inch
3. Exposure: 5 inch
4. Finish: Hardie ColorPlus:
a. Color 1: To be determined.
b. Architect may change the color selection from the manufacturer’s full range.
c.
C. Trim: HardieTrim HZ5 boards.
1. Type: Size as indicated on Drawings.
FIBER CEMENT CLADDING AND EXTERIOR TRIM 074600 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
2. Finish: As selected by architect from the manufacturer’s full range.
D. Soffit: HardieSoffit HZ5 panels.
1. Type: Non-Vented Smooth Soffit Panel 12 inches by 12 feet long by 1/4 inch thick.
2. Finish: Selected by architect from the manufacturer’s full range.
E. Factory Finish:
1. Product: ColorPlus Technology by James Hardie.
2. Definition: Factory applied finish, defined as a finish applied in the same facility and
company that manufacturers the siding substrate.
3. Accessories: Complete finishing system includes pre-packaged touch-up kit provided by
fiber cement manufacturer. Provide quantities as recommended by manufacturer.
2.2 FIBER-CEMENT PANEL SIDING, VINTAGE WOOD
A. General: ASTM C 1186, Type A, Grade II, fiber-cement board, noncombustible when tested
according to ASTM E 136; with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to
ASTM E 84.
1. Manufacturers: Basis-of-Design: Nichiha USA, Inc., which is located at: 6465 E. Johns
Crossing, Suite 250, Johns Creek, GA 30097; Toll Free Tel: 866-424-4421; Web:
www.nichiha.com
2. Fiber cement panel siding shall be sourced from a single manufacturer. Alternative
manufacturers must be approved by Architect.
B. Panel Siding: Nichiha Vintage Wood
1. Profile Colors: Bark, Cedar, Redwood, Ash, and Spruce. Color to be selected by
Architect.
2. Profile: Wood plank texture with three, 3/8 inch grooves running lengthwise, spaced 5-
5/8” apart.
3. Accessory Component Options:
a. Manufactured Corners with 3-1/2” returns for each profile color.
b. Aluminum Trim Options: Corner Key, Open Outside Corner, H-Mold, J-Mold,
Compression Joint, Inside Corner.
1) Finish: Bark, Cedar, Clear Anodized, or Primed.
c. Essential Flashing System: Starter, Overhang.
1) Finish: Matte Black.
4. Dimensions:
a. AWP-1818: 17-7/8 inches (455mm) high by 71-9/16 inches (1818mm) long.
b. AWP-3030: 17-7/8 inches (455mm) high by 119-5/16 inches (3030mm) long.
5. Panel Thickness: 5/8 inch (16 mm).
6. Weight:
a. AWP-1818: 35.27 lbs. per panel.
b. AWP-3030: 57.32 lbs. per panel.
7. Coverage:
a. AWP1818: 8.88 square feet per panel.
b. AWP3030: 14.81 square feet per panel.
8. Factory sealed on six sides.
C. Installation Components
1. Ultimate Clip System:
a. Starter Track: Horizontal Panel Installations – FA 700 – 3030mm galvalume coated
steel.
FIBER CEMENT CLADDING AND EXTERIOR TRIM 074600 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
b. Panel Clips: JEL 778 “Ultimate Clip II” (10mm rainscreen for 16mm AWP) – Zinc-
Aluminum-Magnesium alloy coated steel.
c. Single Flange Sealant Backer – FHK 1015 R (10mm) – 6.5 feet long fluorine
coated galvalume.
d. Double Flange Sealant Backer – FHK 1015 R (10mm) – 10 feet long fluorine
coated galvalume.
e. Corrugated Spacer – FS 1005 (5mm), FS 1010 (10mm) - 4 feet long.
2. Aluminum Trim (optional).
3. Essential Flashing System (optional):
4. Fasteners: Corrosion resistant fasteners, such as hot-dipped galvanized screws
appropriate to local building codes and practices must be used. Use Stainless Steel
fasteners in high humidity and high-moisture regions. Panel manufacturer is not liable for
corrosion resistance of fasteners. Do not use aluminum fasteners, staples or fasteners
that are not rated or designed for intended use. See manufacturer’s instructions for
appropriate fasteners for construction method used.
5. Flashing: Flash all areas specified in manufacturer’s instructions. Do not use raw
aluminum flashing. Flashing must be galvanized, anodized, or PVC coated.
6. Sealant: Sealant shall comply with ASTM C920, Class 35.
2.3 RAINSCREEN VENT
A. Manufactuers: Basis-of-Design: Cor-A-Vent, Inc.; P.O. Box 428; Mishawaka, IN 46546-0428.
Phone: 1.800.837.8369; Web: www.cor-a-vent.com
B. Siding Vent: SV-3 or SV-5 sturdi-strip polypropylene.
1. Sturdi-Strip: 3/8 inch thick by 1-1/2 inches wide.
2. SV-3: 7/16 inch thick by 3 inches high.
3. SV-5: 3/4 inch thick by 3 inches high.
4. Subject to on-site mock-up, the architect will select to appropriate thickness for the insect
screen.
2.4 PVC TRIM
A. General: Cellular polyvinyl chloride (PVC) material in shapes and sizes indicated on Drawings,
with the following characteristics:
1. Density: 0.55 g/cm3 ASTM D 792.
2. Water Absorption: 0.15% ASTM D 570.
3. Tensile Strength: 2,000 psi min. ASTM D 638.
4. Tensile Modulus: 140,000 psi min. ASTM D 638.
5. Flexural Strength: 3,000 psi min. ASTM D 790.
6. Flexural Modulus: 140,000 psi min. ASTM D 790.
7. Nail Hold: 35 lbf/in of penetration ASTM D 1761.
8. Screw Hold: 650 lbf/in of penetration ASTM D 1761
9. Gardner Impact: 100 in-lbs ASTM D 5420.
10. Coefficient of Linear Expansion: 3.2 x 10-5 in/in/deg. F ASTM D 696.
11. Burning Rate: No burn when flame removed ASTM D 635.
12. Flame Spread Index: 25 ASTM E 84.
13. Heat Deflection Temp: 150 deg. F ASTM D 648.
14. Oil Canning at 140 deg. F: Passed ASTM D 648.
B. Profiles and sizes: As indicated in drawings
FIBER CEMENT CLADDING AND EXTERIOR TRIM 074600 - 5
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Flashing: Provide aluminum flashing complying with Section 07620 "Sheet Metal Flashing and
Trim" at window and door heads, above all trim, and where indicated.
B. Fasteners for Fiber Cement Plank Siding:
1. HardiePlank: Hot-dip galvanized metal fasteners with sufficient length to penetrate a
minimum of 1 inch into substrate.
C. Fasteners for Fiber Cement Panels:
1. Hardie Panel HZ5: TW -S-D12 304 series austenitic stainless steel self-tapping cladding
panel to wood fastener. No. 10-12 by 1-3/4 inch long. Fasteners are attached to vertical
1x4 preservative treated wood furring. The low profile TORX drive head shall be color
matched to the fiber-cement panel.
D. Fasteners for Insect Screen:
1. Screw, staple, or power-nail in place with hot-dipped galvanized fasteners, which shall
penetrate a minimum of 1” into wood framing.
E. Fasteners for Fiber Cement Trim:
1. For fastening to wood, use siding nails of sufficient length to penetrate a minimum of 1
inch into substrate.
2. For fastening to metal, use ribbed bugle-head screws of sufficient length to penetrate a
minimum of 1/4 inch, or three screw-threads, into substrate.
3. Fasteners shall be hot-dip galvanized.
F. Fasteners for Aluminum Trim:
1. For fastening to vertical 1x4 preservative treated wood strapping, use hot-dipped
galvanized 8D nails.
G. Fasteners for PVC Trim:
1. Use stainless steel or hot-dipped galvanized screw fasteners designed for pvc trim
(thinner shank, blunt point, full round head).
2. Staples, small brads and wire nails are not allowed.
3. Fasteners shall be long enough to penetrate the solid wood substrate a minimum of 1-1/2
inches.
4. Heads shall be plugged. See 099110 Exterior Painting.
H. Adhesives and Sealants for PVC Trim:
1. Use PVC cement acceptable to trim manufacturer to prevent joint separation.
2. Surfaces to be glued shall be smooth, clean and in complete contact with each other.
3. Use sealants without silicone and install joint sealants as specified in Section 07920
"Joint Sealants."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of siding and soffit and related accessories.
FIBER CEMENT CLADDING AND EXTERIOR TRIM 074600 - 6
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.
B. Vertical wood strapping shall be plumb in both directions, and adjusted so that floor transitions
or change in wall types do not register through to the finish panel.
3.3 FIBER-CEMENT PLANK SIDING INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and
applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply.
1. Do not install damaged components.
B. Install fiber-cement siding, trim, soffit and related accessories.
1. Install fasteners no more than 24 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated
2. Fasteners shall be snug and flush with the panel surface. Do not countersink or recessed
the fastener head in the panel.
3. Adjust siding courses to align with window trim, door trim, and other trim. Do not notch
around trim.
C. All cut edges of the panels shall be primed or painted to prevent moisture absorption.
D. Install joint sealants as specified in Section 07920 "Joint Sealants" and to produce a
weathertight installation.
E. Fiber-Cement is installed as a rainscreen.
3.4 FIBER-CEMENT PANEL SIDING VINTAGE WOOD INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and
applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply.
1. Do not install damaged components.
B. Install fiber-cement panel siding vintage wood.
1. Fiber cement panels can be installed over braced wood, steel studs and sheathing
including plywood, OSB, plastic foam (1” or less) or fiberboard sheathing. Fiber cement
panels can also be installed over Structural Insulated Panels (SIP’s), Concrete Masonry
Units (CMU’s) and Concrete Block Structures (CBS’s) with furring strips, and Pre-
Engineered Metal Construction. Insulated Concrete Forms (ICFs) require added
measures. Consult with Nichiha Technical Services.
2. Allowable stud spacing: 16” on center maximum.
3. A weather resistive barrier is required when installing fiber cement panels. Use an
approved weather resistive barrier (WRB) as defined by the 2015 IBC or IRC. Refer to
local building codes.
FIBER CEMENT CLADDING AND EXTERIOR TRIM 074600 - 7
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
4. Appropriate metal flashing should be used to prevent moisture penetration around all
doors, windows, wall bottoms, material transitions and penetrations. Refer to local
building codes for best practices.
C. Examine site to ensure substrate conditions are within alignment tolerances for proper
installation.
D. Do not install panels or components that appear to be damaged or defective. Do not install wet
panels.
E. Tolerance: W all surface plane must be plumb and level within +/- ¼ inch in 20 feet in any
direction.
1. One layer of Nichiha 5mm (~3/16”) Spacer may be used as shim.
F. Installation: General.
1. Install products in accordance with the latest installation guidelines of the manufacturer
and all applicable building codes and other laws, rules, regulations and ordinances.
Review all manufacturer installation, maintenance instructions, and other applicable
documents before installation.
a. Consult with your local dealer or Nichiha Technical Department before installing
any Nichiha fiber cement product on a building higher than 45 feet or three stories
or for conditions not matching prescribed standard installation guide requirements
and methods. A Technical Design Review (TDR) process is available to evaluate
project feasibility.
b. Vertical Control/Expansion Joints are required with AWP-1818, for walls wider than
30 feet, within 2-12 feet of outside corners finished with metal trim and
approximately every 30 feet thereafter.
1) Vertical Control/Expansion Joints are required at each AWP-3030 vertical
joint, or H-Mold trim may be used instead.
c. Horizontal/Compression Joints are required for multi-story installations of AWP.
Locate joints at floor lines. Joints are flashed minimum ½” breaks. Do not caulk.
Refer to installation guide(s).
1) Wood framed buildings of three or more floors require a compression joint at
each floor.
2) Steel framed buildings (including reinforced concrete core with LGMF
exterior walls) of more than three floors (or 45 feet) require a compression
joint every 25 feet at a floor line.
G. Panel Cutting:
1. Always cut fiber cement panels outside or in a well ventilated area. Do not cut the
products in an enclosed area.
2. Always wear safety glasses and NIOSH/OSHA approved respirator whenever cutting,
drilling, sawing, sanding or abrading the products. Refer to manufacturer SDS for more
information.
3. Use a dust-reducing circular saw with a diamond-tipped or carbide-tipped blade.
a. Recommended circular saw: Makita 7-1/4” Circular Saw with Dust Collector
(#5057KB).
b. Recommended blade: Tenryu Board-Pro Plus PCD Blade (#BP-18505).
c. Shears (electric or pneumatic) or jig saw can be used for complicated cuttings,
such as service openings, curves, radii and scrollwork.
H. Silica Dust Warning: Fiber cement products may contain some amounts of crystalline silica, a
naturally occurring, potentially hazardous mineral when airborne in dust form. Consult product
SDS or visit; https://www.osha.gov/dsg/topics/silicacrystalline/.
I. Immediately clean dust from cut panels as it may bind to the finish.
FIBER CEMENT CLADDING AND EXTERIOR TRIM 074600 - 8
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
J. Cleaning and Maintenance
1. Review manufacturer guidelines for detailed care instructions.
3.5 RAINSCREEN VENT INSTALLATION
A. Install rainscreen in accordance with the manufacturer’s guidelines.
1. Install two fasteners at 16 inches on center at top and bottom, 3/4 inch in from outer edge
for horizontal rainscreen vents.
2. Sturdi-Strips to be installed at 16 inches on center vertically, aligned with studs.
Fasteners to be installed at 16 inches on center.
3.6 PVC TRIM INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer’s product catalog installation instructions and product
technical bulletin instructions.
B. Cutting and Shaping:
1. Use tools used for wood products. Use carbide-tipped saw blades and router bits. Avoid
fine tooth metal cutting blades. Do not use drills made for normal rigid PVC.
2. Provide relief angles of 20 to 30 degrees.
C. Fastening:
1. Use 2 fasteners per every framing member for trim. Trim 12 inches nominal or wider and
sheets require additional fasteners.
2. Install fasteners must be installed no more than 2 inches from the end of each board.
3. Allow for 1/8 inch per 18 linear feet for expansion and contraction.
4. Glue all joints.
5. Provide scarf joints and glue to eliminate joint separation. When gaps are glued on a
longer runs, allow expansion and contraction at ends of the run.
3.7 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove damaged, improperly installed, or otherwise defective materials and replace with new
materials complying with specified requirements.
B. Clean finished surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions and maintain in a clean
condition during construction.
END OF SECTION 074600
FIBER CEMENT CLADDING AND EXTERIOR TRIM 074600 - 9
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
FIBER CEMENT CLADDING AND EXTERIOR TRIM 074600 - 10
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 075430 - THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Adhered thermoplastic polyolefin (TPO) roofing system.
2. Vapor retarder.
3. Roof insulation.
4. Walkways.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 061050 "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking; and for
wood-based, structural-use roof deck panels.
2. Section 061600 "Sheathing" for wood-based, structural-use deck panels.
3. Section 072100 "Building Insulation" for insulation beneath the roof deck.
4. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof flashings and
counterflashings.
5. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants, joint fillers, and joint preparation.
6. Section 154000 "Plumbing" for roof drains.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Roofing Terminology: Definitions in ASTM D 1079 and glossary in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing
and Waterproofing Manual" apply to work of this Section.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work, including:
1. Base flashings and membrane terminations.
2. Tapered insulation, including slopes.
3. Roof plan showing orientation of steel roof deck and orientation of roofing, fastening
spacings, and patterns for mechanically fastened roofing.
4. Insulation fastening patterns for corner, perimeter, and field-of-roof locations.
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 075430 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.
B. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that roofing system
complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.
1. Submit evidence of compliance with performance requirements.
C. Product Test Reports: For components of roofing system, tests performed by manufacturer and
witnessed by a qualified testing agency.
D. Research/Evaluation Reports: For components of roofing system, from ICC-ES.
E. Field quality-control reports.
F. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is UL listed for roofing system
identical to that used for this Project.
B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing
system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive
manufacturer's special warranty.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled
with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or
listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.
B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location
and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored
liquid material from direct sunlight.
1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf
life.
C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight,
moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation
manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
D. Handle and store roofing materials, and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent
deflection of deck.
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 075430 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions
and warranty requirements.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that
fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Special warranty includes roofing, base flashings, roof insulation, fasteners, cover
boards, substrate board, roofing accessories, and other components of roofing system.
2. Warranty Period: 25 years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Project Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's warranty, on warranty form at end of this
Section, signed by Installer, covering the Work of this Section, including all components of
roofing system such as roofing, base flashing, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards, substrate
boards, vapor retarders, roof pavers, and walkway products, for the following warranty period:
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated.
2. Firestone Building Products.
3. GAF Materials Corporation.
4. Johns Manville.
5. Versico Incorporated.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain components including roof insulation and fasteners for roofing
system from same manufacturer as membrane roofing or manufacturer approved by membrane
roofing manufacturer.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: Installed roofing and base flashings shall withstand specified uplift
pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to
defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Roofing and
base flashings shall remain watertight.
1. Accelerated Weathering: Roofing system shall withstand 2000 hours of exposure when
tested according to ASTM G 152, ASTM G 154, or ASTM G 155.
2. Impact Resistance: Roofing system shall resist impact damage when tested according to
ASTM D 3746 or ASTM D 4272.
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 075430 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
B. Material Compatibility: Roofing materials shall be compatible with one another and adjacent
materials under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing
manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
C. Roofing System Design: Tested by a qualified testing agency to resist the uplift pressures in
accordance with the Massachusetts State Building Code.
D. Energy Star Listing: Roofing system shall be listed on the DOE's ENERGY STAR "Roof
Products Qualified Product List" for low-slope roof products.
E. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108 or UL 790, Class A; for application and roof slopes
indicated; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of
applicable testing agency.
F. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly designs indicated.
Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
2.3 TPO ROOFING
A. Fabric-Reinforced TPO Sheet: ASTM D 6878, internally fabric- or scrim-reinforced, uniform,
flexible fabric-backed TPO sheet.
1. Thickness: 60 mils, nominal.
2. Exposed Face Color: White at primary roof level.
3. Exposed Face Color: Grey at 2nd level roof and canopy.
2.4 AUXILIARY ROOFING MATERIALS
A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use
and compatible with roofing.
1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having
jurisdiction.
2. Adhesives and sealants that are not on the exterior side of weather barrier shall comply
with the following limits for VOC content:
a. Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 g/L.
b. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L.
c. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L.
d. Fiberglass Adhesives: 80 g/L.
e. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Adhesives: 250 g/L.
f. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 450 g/L.
g. Nonmembrane Roof Sealants: 300 g/L.
h. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
i. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
j. Other Adhesives and Sealants: 250 g/L.
B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard unreinforced TPO sheet flashing, of same color and
thickness as TPO sheet.
C. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard.
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 075430 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
D. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars,
approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick; with anchors.
E. Metal Battens: Manufacturer's standard, aluminum-zinc-alloy-coated or zinc-coated steel sheet,
approximately 1 inch wide by 0.05 inch thick, prepunched.
F. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-
resistance provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening roofing to substrate, and
acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
G. Rhinobond or Isoweld TPO Welding Plate: A 3” diameter, 0.028 inch thick, corrosion-resistant
steel plate with high solids coating on the top surface. The plate is secured with HP-X fasteners
and the membrane is welded to the top surface using RhinoBond or Isoweld Induction Welding
Tool.
H. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet
flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, lap sealants,
termination reglets, and other accessories.
2.5 SUBSTRATE BOARDS
A. Substrate Board: ASTM C 1278/C 1278M, cellulosic-fiber-reinforced, water-resistant gypsum
substrate, 1/2 inch thick.
B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-
resistance provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening substrate board to roof deck.
2.6 VAPOR RETARDER
A. Polyethylene Film: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils thick, minimum, with maximum permeance rating of
0.13 perm .
1. Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer for
sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.
B. Self-Adhering Seam and Flashing Stretch Tape: Pressure-sensitive, self-adhering, cold-
applied, seam tape consisting of polyolefin film with acrylic adhesive, meeting ICC-ES AC148,
and tested as part of an assembly meeting performance requirements.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Provide Huber Engineered Woods; ZIP System Stretch Tape.
2. Thickness: 42 mils.
2.7 ROOF INSULATION
A. General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured or approved by TPO roofing
manufacturer, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes suitable for application, of
thicknesses indicated.
B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2, felt or glass-fiber
mat facer on both major surfaces.
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 075430 - 5
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
C. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch per
12 inches unless otherwise indicated.
D. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where
indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.
2.8 INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A. General: Roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended
use and compatibility with roofing.
B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-
resistance provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation and cover
boards to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
C. Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended adhesive formulated to attach
roof insulation to substrate or to another insulation layer as follows:
1. Full-spread spray-applied, low-rise, two-component urethane adhesive.
D. Cover Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, 5/8 inch
thick.
2.9 WALKWAYS
A. Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, slip-resisting, surface-textured
walkway rolls, approximately 3/16 inch thick and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
B. Walkway Roof Pavers: Heavyweight, hydraulically pressed concrete units, with top edges
beveled 3/16 inch, factory cast for use as roof pavers; absorption not greater than 5 percent,
ASTM C 140; no breakage and maximum 1 percent mass loss when tested for freeze-thaw
resistance, ASTM C 67; and as follows:
1. Size: 24 by 24 inches. Manufacture pavers to dimensional tolerances of plus or minus
1/16 inch in length, height, and thickness.
2. Weight: 18 lb/sq. ft.
3. Compressive Strength: 6500 psi, minimum.
4. Colors and Textures: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work:
1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place, curbs are set and braced, and
roof-drain bodies are securely clamped in place.
2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at
penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation.
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 075430 - 6
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing
installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp
projections.
B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or
migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking
place or when rain is forecast.
3.3 ROOFING INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install roofing system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from
entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is
forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.
3.4 SUBSTRATE BOARD INSTALLATION
A. Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to roof slopes
with end joints staggered between rows. Tightly butt substrate boards together.
3.5 VAPOR-RETARDER INSTALLATION
A. Polyethylene Film: Loosely lay polyethylene-film vapor retarder in a single layer over area to
receive vapor retarder, side and end lapping each sheet a minimum of 2 inches and 6 inches,
respectively. Continuously seal side and end laps with tape.
B. Completely seal vapor retarder at terminations, obstructions, and penetrations to prevent air
movement into roofing system.
C. Prior to installation of Polyethylene Film, apply ZIP System tape at all roof sheathing panel
seams, penetrations, and facer defects or cracks to form continuous airtight surface. Apply 3-
3/4 inch wide ZIP System tape at perimeter of building and seal to ZIP System sheathing below
all parapet wall framing.
3.6 INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or
left exposed at the end of the workday.
B. Comply with roofing system and insulation manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof
insulation.
C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 075430 - 7
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
D. Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation
thickness is 2.7 inches or greater, install two or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer
staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches in each direction.
E. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and
does not restrict flow of water.
F. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints
staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4
inch with insulation.
1. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations.
G. Mechanically Fastened and Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation to deck using
mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof
insulation to deck type.
1. Fasten first layer of insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of
roof.
2. Set each subsequent layer of insulation in a uniform coverage of full-spread insulation
adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place.
H. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints
staggered between rows. Offset joints of insulation below a minimum of 6 inches in each
direction. Loosely butt cover boards together and fasten to roof deck.
1. Fasten cover boards to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof.
3.7 RHINOBOND OR ISOWELD ROOFING INSTALLATION
A. After placement of insulation on plywood substrate, secure the insulation at a rate of six HP-X
fasteners and RhinoBond/Isoweld plates per 4’x8’ board in the designated field and eight HP-X
fasteners and RhinoBond/Isoweld plates around the perimeter. Refer to manufacturer’s details.
1. Avoid fastener overdrive to prevent plate from deforming.
B. Place membrane over the appropriate RhinoBond or Isoweld plates and allow membrane to
relax.
C. Place RhinoBond Induction Tool over the RhinoBond/Isoweld TPO Welding Plate under the
roofing membrane.
D. Activate induction welding tool and leave in place until heating cycle is complete.
E. Immediately place Magnet on the membrane over the plate and leave in place for 60 seconds.
F. Resume process ensuring membrane is attached to all plates.
G. Additional securement must be provided at the perimeter of each roofing level, roof section,
expansion joint, curb flashing, skylight, interior wall, penthouse, at any inside angle change
where the slope exceeds two inches in one horizontal foot, and at other penetrations in
accordance with membrane manufacturer’s published details.
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 075430 - 8
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
3.8 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories, and adhere to substrates according
to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate, and allow
to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing.
C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet
flashing.
D. Clean seam areas, overlap, and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Hot-air weld side
and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation.
E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through
termination bars.
3.9 METAL ROOF FLASHINGS INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions and details.
3.10 WALKWAY INSTALLATION
A. Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Heat weld to substrate or
adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system
manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Roof-Paver Walkways: Install walkway roof pavers according to manufacturer's written
instructions in locations indicated, to form walkways. Leave 3 inches (75 mm) of space between
adjacent roof pavers.
3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect
roofing installation on completion.
B. Repair or remove and replace components of roofing system where inspections indicate that
they do not comply with specified requirements.
C. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine if
replaced or additional work complies with specified requirements.
3.12 PROTECTING AND CLEANING
A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When
remaining construction does not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and
damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner.
B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair
substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration
at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 075430 - 9
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures
recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
3.13 ROOFING INSTALLER'S WARRANTY
A. WHEREAS _______________________________ of ___________________________, herein
called the "Roofing Installer," has performed roofing and associated work ("work") on the
following project:
1. Owner: Coalition for a Better Acre
2. Address: 571 Moody Street, Lowell, MA 01854
3. Building Name/Type: Gerson Building
4. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. AND WHEREAS Roofing Installer has contracted (either directly with Owner or indirectly as a
subcontractor) to warrant said work against leaks and faulty or defective materials and
workmanship for designated Warranty Period,
C. NOW THEREFORE Roofing Installer hereby warrants, subject to terms and conditions herein
set forth, that during Warranty Period he will, at his own cost and expense, make or cause to be
made such repairs to or replacements of said work as are necessary to correct faulty and
defective work and as are necessary to maintain said work in a watertight condition.
D. This Warranty is made subject to the following terms and conditions:
1. Specifically excluded from this Warranty are damages to work and other parts of the
building, and to building contents, caused by:
a. lightning;
b. fire;
c. failure of roofing system substrate, including cracking, settlement, excessive
deflection, deterioration, and decomposition;
d. faulty construction of parapet walls, copings, chimneys, skylights, vents, equipment
supports, and other edge conditions and penetrations of the work;
e. vapor condensation on bottom of roofing; and
f. activity on roofing by others, including construction contractors, maintenance
personnel, other persons, and animals, whether authorized or unauthorized by
Owner.
2. When work has been damaged by any of foregoing causes, Warranty shall be null and
void until such damage has been repaired by Roofing Installer and until cost and expense
thereof have been paid by Owner or by another responsible party so designated.
3. Roofing Installer is responsible for damage to work covered by this Warranty but is not
liable for consequential damages to building or building contents resulting from leaks or
faults or defects of work.
4. During Warranty Period, if Owner allows alteration of work by anyone other than Roofing
Installer, including cutting, patching, and maintenance in connection with penetrations,
attachment of other work, and positioning of anything on roof, this Warranty shall become
null and void on date of said alterations, but only to the extent said alterations affect work
covered by this Warranty. If Owner engages Roofing Installer to perform said alterations,
Warranty shall not become null and void unless Roofing Installer, before starting said
work, shall have notified Owner in writing, showing reasonable cause for claim, that said
alterations would likely damage or deteriorate work, thereby reasonably justifying a
limitation or termination of this Warranty.
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 075430 - 10
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
5. During Warranty Period, if original use of roof is changed and it becomes used for, but
was not originally specified for, a promenade, work deck, spray-cooled surface, flooded
basin, or other use or service more severe than originally specified, this Warranty shall
become null and void on date of said change, but only to the extent said change affects
work covered by this Warranty.
6. Owner shall promptly notify Roofing Installer of observed, known, or suspected leaks,
defects, or deterioration and shall afford reasonable opportunity for Roofing Installer to
inspect work and to examine evidence of such leaks, defects, or deterioration.
7. This Warranty is recognized to be the only warranty of Roofing Installer on said work and
shall not operate to restrict or cut off Owner from other remedies and resources lawfully
available to Owner in cases of roofing failure. Specifically, this Warranty shall not
operate to relieve Roofing Installer of responsibility for performance of original work
according to requirements of the Contract Documents, regardless of whether Contract
was a contract directly with Owner or a subcontract with Owner's General Contractor.
E. IN WITNESS THEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed this ___________ day of
___________________, ________________.
1. Authorized Signature: _______________________________________.
2. Name: ______________________________________.
3. Title: _______________________________________.
END OF SECTION 075430
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 075430 - 11
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 075430 - 12
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Manufactured through-wall flashing with counterflashing.
2. Manufactured reglets with counterflashing.
3. Formed roof-drainage sheet metal fabrications.
4. Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications.
5. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 048120 “Masonry Veneer” for materials and installation of sheet metal and trim
integral with masonry veneer assemblies.
2. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking.
3. Section 075430 “TPO Roofing" for materials and installation of sheet metal flashing and
trim integral with low-slope roofing.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim layout and seams with sizes and locations of
penetrations to be flashed, and joints and seams in adjacent materials.
B. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim installation with adjoining roofing and wall materials,
joints, and seams to provide leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components
and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory.
B. Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.
2. Detail fabrication and installation layouts, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details.
Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
3. Include identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location
in Project.
4. Include details for forming, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions.
5. Include details for joining, supporting, and securing, including layout and spacing of
fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams.
6. Include details of termination points and assemblies.
7. Include details of expansion joints and expansion-joint covers, including showing
direction of expansion and contraction from fixed points.
8. Include details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, and
counterflashings as applicable.
9. Include details of special conditions.
10. Include details of connections to adjoining work.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sheet metal and accessory indicated with
factory-applied finishes.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing and trim, and its accessories, to include in
maintenance manuals.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing
and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful
in-service performance.
B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate
aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1. Build mockup of typical roof eave, including fascia, approximately 10 feet long, including
supporting construction cleats, seams, attachments and accessories.
2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations
in writing.
3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the
completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might
cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials
away from uncured concrete and masonry.
B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight
and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of sheet metal flashing and trim
installation.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal
flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified
warranty period.
1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.
b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural
movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to
defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed
sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.
B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing
Manual" and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions and
profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint
sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface
temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
2.2 SHEET METALS
A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying
strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.
B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with
temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required; with smooth, flat
surface.
1. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:
a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less
than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply
coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers'
written instructions.
2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
3. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or
polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with minimum total dry
film thickness of 0.5 mil.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other
miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and as
recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal unless otherwise indicated.
B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and
bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by
manufacturer of primary sheet metal.
1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.
a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or
factory-applied coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC sealing washers
under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal.
b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for
metal being fastened.
c. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching
internal gutter width.
2. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.
C. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealant tape
with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape
1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.
D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant; of type, grade,
class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain
watertight.
E. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant;
polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited
movement.
F. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound,
recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints.
2.4 LOW -SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Roof Edge Flashing and Fascia Caps: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch long, but not exceeding
10-foot long, sections.
1. Joint Style: Lap, 4 inches wide concealed back-up plate sealant filled laps.
B. Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long, but not exceeding 10-foot- long, sections.
Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous cleats to support
edge of external leg and drill elongated holes for fasteners on interior leg. Miter corners, seal,
and solder or weld watertight.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1. Joint Style: Single lock standing seams.
2. Fabricate copings from the following material:
a. Aluminum: 0.040 inch thick.
C. Roof and Roof to Wall Transition. Roof to Sheet Metal Roof Edging Transition. Expansion-Joint
Cover: Fabricate from the following material:
1. Aluminum: 0.040 inch thick.
D. Base Flashing, Counter Flashing, Flashing Receivers, Drip Edges and Other Profiles: Fabricate
from the following material:
1. Aluminum: 0.040 inch thick.
2.5 ROOF-DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Built-in Gutters: Fabricate to cross section required, with riveted and soldered joints, complete
with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other special accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum
96-inch long sections. Fabricate expansion joints and accessories from same metal as gutters
unless otherwise indicated.
1. Fabricate gutters with built-in expansion joints and gutter-end expansion joints at walls.
2. Accessories: Continuous, removable leaf screen with sheet metal frame and hardware
cloth screen
3. Fabricate from the Following Materials:
a. Stainless Steel: 0.016 inch thick.
B. Downspouts: Fabricate square downspouts to dimensions indicated, complete with mitered
elbows. Furnish with metal hangers from same material as downspouts and anchors.
1. Hanger Style: Pipe band.
2. Fabricate from the following materials:
a. Stainless Steel: 0.06 inch thick.
3. Fasteners and masonry anchors shall be stainless steel.
C. Downspout Boot: Furnish and install downspout boots at each downspout, complete with stand-
offs.
1. Style: Square downspout to round discharge outlet, designed to empty straight into a pvc
soil pipe below grade.
2. Material: Cast Iron.
3. Height: 48 inches minimum, varies. The top of the downspout boot shall be 8 inches
above the top of the cast stone sill.
4. Finish: Painted primer gray.
D. Parapet Scuppers: Fabricate scuppers to dimensions required, with closure flange trim to
exterior, 4-inch- wide wall flanges to interior, and base extending 4 inches beyond cant or
tapered strip into field of roof. Include aluminum parapet drain stainer. Fabricate from the
following materials:
1. Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick with TPO cladding.
2.6 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Through-Wall Flashing: Fabricate continuous flashings in minimum 96-inch long, but not
exceeding 12-foot long, sections, under copings, and at shelf angles. Fabricate discontinuous
lintel, sill, and similar flashings to extend 6 inches beyond each side of wall openings; and form
with 2-inch high, end dams. Fabricate from the following materials:
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 5
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1. Aluminum: 0.040 inch thick.
B. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill, jamb and similar flashings to
extend 4 inches beyond wall openings. Form head and sill flashing with 2-inch high, end dams.
Fabricate from the following materials:
1. Aluminum: 0.040 inch thick.
C. Wall Expansion-Joint Cover: See 058110 “Architectural Joint Systems”
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, substrate, and other conditions affecting performance of
the Work.
1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates.
2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely
anchored.
3. Verify that air- or water-resistant barriers have been installed over sheathing or backing
substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment, wrinkle free, using adhesive to minimize use of
mechanical fasteners under sheet metal flashing and trim. Apply in shingle fashion to shed
water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches.
B. Synthetic Underlayment: Install synthetic underlayment, wrinkle free, according to
manufacturers' written instructions, and using adhesive where possible to minimize use of
mechanical fasteners under sheet metal.
C. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free.
Prime substrate if recommended by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature
restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer for installing underlayment
at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6
inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches.
Roll laps and edges with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in
place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners[, solder], protective
coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet
metal flashing and trim system.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 6
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform, neat
seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.
2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight
performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating
sheet metal.
3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Attach each cleat with at least two
fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.
4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil canning, and free of buckling
and tool marks.
5. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.
6. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts
pressure-treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or
corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent
separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard.
1. Coat concealed side of sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where
flashing and trim contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.
2. Underlayment: Where installing sheet metal flashing and trim directly on cementitious or
wood substrates, install underlayment and cover with slip sheet.
C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space
movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints within 24 inches of corner or intersection.
1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled
with sealant concealed within joints.
D. Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate wood blocking or sheathing not less than 1-1/4
inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws.
E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to
minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight
installation.
F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction.
1. Use sealant-filled joints unless otherwise indicated. Embed hooked flanges of joint
members not less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant.
When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint
members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for
installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at
temperatures below 40 deg F.
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 07920 "Joint
Sealants."
G. Rivets: Rivet joints where necessary for strength.
3.4 ROOF-DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal roof-drainage items to produce complete roof-drainage system
according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate installation of
roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof-drainage system.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 7
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
B. Built-in Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered joints. Provide for thermal expansion.
Slope to downspouts. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant.
1. Install underlayment layer in built-in gutter trough and extend to drip edge at eaves and
under underlayment on roof sheathing. Lap sides minimum of 2 inches over underlying
course. Lap ends minimum of 4 inches. Stagger end laps between succeeding courses at
least 72 inches. Fasten with roofing nails. Install slip sheet over underlayment.
2. Anchor and loosely lock back edge of gutter to continuous cleat.
3. Anchor back of gutter that extends onto roof deck with cleats spaced not more than 36
inches apart.
C. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch telescoping joints.
1. Provide hangers with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls. Locate
hangers at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c.
2. Connect downspouts to underground drainage system with cast iron downspout boots..
D. Parapet Scuppers: Continuously support scupper, set to correct elevation, and seal flanges to
interior wall face, over cants or tapered edge strips, and under roofing membrane.
1. Anchor scupper closure trim flange to exterior wall and seal with elastomeric sealant to
scupper.
2. Loosely lock front edge of scupper with conductor head.
E. Expansion-Joint Covers: Install expansion-joint covers at locations and of configuration
indicated. Lap joints minimum of 4 inches in direction of water flow.
3.5 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements and
cited sheet metal standard. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to
line, levels, and slopes. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight
and weather resistant.
B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations
in cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge
flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at staggered 3-inch centers.
C. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in cited sheet
metal standard unless otherwise indicated.
1. Interlock exterior bottom edge of coping with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at
16-inch centers.
D. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top
edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending minimum of 4 inches over base flashing. Install
stainless-steel draw band and tighten.
E. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing.
Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend
counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints minimum of 4 inches.
Secure in waterproof manner by means of interlocking folded seam or blind rivets and sealant
unless otherwise indicated.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 8
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
F. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of
roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to
pipes that penetrate roof.
3.6 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture
according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate installation of
wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers.
B. Through-Wall Flashing: Installation of through-wall flashing is specified in Section 04812
"Masonry Veneer."
C. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Install continuous head, sill, and similar flashings to
extend 4 inches beyond wall openings.
3.7 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance
of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch
offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and
weathering.
B. Clean off excess sealants.
C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim
are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On
completion of sheet metal flashing and trim installation, remove unused materials and clean
finished surfaces as recommended by sheet metal flashing and trim manufacturer. Maintain
sheet metal flashing and trim in clean condition during construction.
D. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated
beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 076200
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 9
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 10
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 077200 – ROOF ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Roof curbs.
2. Roof hatches.
3. Equipment supports.
4. Preformed flashing sleeves.
5. Pipe and Duct Penetrations in Roofing
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 055210 "Pipe and Tube Railings" for safety railing systems not attached to roof-
hatch curbs.
2. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for shop- and field-formed metal
flashing, roof-drainage systems, roof expansion-joint covers, and miscellaneous sheet
metal trim and accessories.
3. Section 112400 "Fall Restraint Equipment" for Roof Anchors.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: Roof accessories shall withstand exposure to weather and resist
thermally induced movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement due to
defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s Data Sheets for each type of roof accessory indicated. Include
construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles,
and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For roof accessories. Include plans, elevations, keyed details, and attachments
to other work. Indicate dimensions, loadings, and special conditions. Distinguish between plant-
and field-assembled work.
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, prepared on
Samples of size to adequately show color.
ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200- 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Roof plans, drawn to scale, and coordinating penetrations and roof-
mounted items. Show the following:
1. Size and location of roof accessories specified in this Section.
2. Method of attaching roof accessories to roof or building structure.
3. Other roof-mounted items including mechanical and electrical equipment, ductwork,
piping, and conduit.
4. Required clearances.
B. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For roof accessories to include in operation and maintenance
manuals.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of roof accessories with roofing membrane and base flashing
and interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, weathertight, secure, and
noncorrosive installation.
B. Coordinate dimensions with rough-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be
supported.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer
agrees to repair finishes or replace roof accessories that show evidence of deterioration of
factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.
1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.
b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL MATERIALS
A. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90coating designation and mill
phosphatized for field painting where indicated.
1. Mill-Phosphatized Finish: Manufacturer's standard for field painting.
ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200- 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
2. Factory Prime Coating: Where field painting is indicated, apply pretreatment and white or
light-colored, factory-applied, baked-on epoxy primer coat, with a minimum dry film
thickness of 0.2 mil.
3. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with
ASTM A 755/A 755M. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to
comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer Finish: AAMA 621. System consisting of primer and
fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by
weight.
4. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply
manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and
thermosetting topcoat, with a minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil for topcoat. Comply with
coating manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum
dry film thickness of 2 mils.
5. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or
polyester-backer finish consisting of prime coat and wash coat, with a minimum total dry
film thickness of 0.5 mil.
B. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, AZ50 coated.
1. Factory Prime Coating: Where field painting is indicated, apply pretreatment and white or
light-colored, factory-applied, baked-on epoxy primer coat, with a minimum dry film
thickness of 0.2 mil.
2. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with
ASTM A 755/A 755M. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to
comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer Finish: AAMA 621. System consisting of primer and
fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by
weight.
3. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply
manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and
thermosetting topcoat, with a minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil for topcoat. Comply with
coating manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum
dry film thickness of 2 mils.
4. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or
polyester-backer finish consisting of prime coat and wash coat, with a minimum total dry
film thickness of 0.5 mil.
C. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, manufacturer's standard alloy for finish required, with temper to
suit forming operations and performance required.
1. Mill Finish: As manufactured.
2. Factory Prime Coating: Where field painting is indicated, apply pretreatment and white or
light-colored, factory-applied, baked-on epoxy primer coat, with a minimum dry film
thickness of 0.2 mil.
3. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal
surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer Finish: AAMA 620. System consisting of primer and
fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by
weight.
ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200- 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
4. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film
thickness of 1.5 mils. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for
cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.
5. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or
polyester-backer finish consisting of prime coat and wash coat, with a minimum total dry
film thickness of 0.5 mil.
D. Aluminum Extrusions and Tubes: ASTM B 221, manufacturer's standard alloy and temper for
type of use, finished to match assembly where used, otherwise mill finished.
E. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 370, manufacturer's standard temper.
F. Stainless-Steel Sheet and Shapes: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304.
G. Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 123/A 123M unless
otherwise indicated.
H. Steel Tube: ASTM A 500, round tube.
I. Galvanized-Steel Tube: ASTM A 500, round tube, hot-dip galvanized according to
ASTM A 123/A 123M.
J. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, galvanized.
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other
miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation.
B. Cellulosic-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 208, Type II, Grade 1, thickness as indicated.
C. Glass-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 726, thickness as indicated.
D. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, thickness as indicated.
E. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for
aboveground use, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, containing no arsenic or
chromium, and complying with AWPA C2; not less than 1-1/2 inchesthick.
F. Underlayment:
1. Felt: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated.
2. Polyethylene Sheet: 6-mil-thick polyethylene sheet complying with ASTM D 4397.
3. Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3-lb/100 sq. ft. minimum, rosin sized.
G. Fasteners: Roof accessory manufacturer's recommended fasteners suitable for application and
metals being fastened. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened.
Provide nonremovable fastener heads to exterior exposed fasteners. Furnish the following
unless otherwise indicated:
1. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated or Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: Series 300 stainless
steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.
2. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Alum inum or Series 300 stainless steel.
ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200- 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
3. Fasteners for Copper Sheet: Copper, hardware bronze, or passivated Series 300
stainless steel.
4. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel.
H. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene, EPDM, PVC, or
silicone or a flat design of foam rubber, sponge neoprene, or cork.
I. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant as recommended by roof
accessory manufacturer for installation indicated; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use
classifications required to seal joints and remain watertight.
J. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant;
polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for expansion joints with limited movement.
K. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.
2.3 ROOF CURBS & EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Roof Curbs: Internally reinforced roof-curb units with integral spring-type vibration isolators and
capable of supporting superimposed live and dead loads, including equipment loads and other
construction indicated on Drawings; with welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner
joints, stepped integral metal cant raised the thickness of roof insulation, and integrally formed
deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Roof Curb Systems
b. Roof Products and Systems
c. LM Curbs
d. Thybar Corporation
e. Curbs Plus, Inc.
f. Custom Solution Roof and Metal Products
C. Size: Coordinate dimensions with roughing-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be
supported.
D. Construction:
1. Insulation: Factory insulated with 1-1/2-inch thick glass-fiber board insulation.
2. Liner: Same material as curb, of manufacturer's standard thickness and finish.
3. Factory-installed wood nailer at top of curb, continuous around curb perimeter.
4. Fabricate curbs to minimum height of 12 inches above roof insulation unless otherwise
indicated.
5. Top Surface: Level around perimeter with roof slope accommodated by sloping the deck-
mounting flange.
6. Sloping Roofs: Where roof slope exceeds 1:48, fabricate curb with perimeter curb height
tapered to accommodate roof slope so that top surface of perimeter curb is level. Equip
unit with water diverter or cricket on side that obstructs water flow.
7. Security Grille: Provide where indicated.
ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200- 5
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
2.4 PIPE AND DUCT SUPPORTS
A. Fixed-Height Cradle-Type Pipe Supports: Polycarbonate pipe stand accommodating up to 1-
1/2-inch diameter pipe or conduit; with provision for pipe retainer and with manufacturer's
support pad or deck plate as recommended for penetration-free installation over roof membrane
type; as required for quantity of pipe runs and sizes.
B. Fixed-Height Roller-Bearing Pipe Supports: Polycarbonate pipe stand with polycarbonate or
stainless-steel roller carrying assembly accommodating up to 7-inch diameter pipe or conduit;
with provision for pipe retainer and with manufacturer's support pad or deck plate as
recommended for penetration-free installation over roof membrane type; as required for quantity
of pipe runs and sizes.
C. Adjustable-Height Roller-Bearing Pipe Supports: Polycarbonate pipe stand base, pipe support,
and roller housing, with stainless-steel threaded rod designed for adjusting support height,
accommodating up to 18 inch diameter pipe or conduit; with provision for pipe retainer and with
manufacturer's support pad or deck plate as recommended for penetration-free installation over
roof membrane type; as required for quantity of pipe runs and sizes.
D. Adjustable-Height Structure-Mounted Pipe Supports: Extruded-aluminum tube, filled with
urethane insulation; 2 inches in diameter; accommodating up to 7-inch diameter pipe or conduit,
with provision for pipe retainer; with aluminum baseplate, EPDM base seal, manufacturer's
recommended hardware for mounting to structure or structural roof deck as indicated, stainless-
steel roller and retainer, and extruded-aluminum carrier assemblies; as required for quantity of
pipe runs and sizes.
E. Curb-Mounted Pipe Supports: Galvanized steel support with welded or mechanically fastened
and sealed corner joints, stepped integral metal cant raised the thickness of roof insulation, and
integrally formed deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom; with adjustable-height roller-
bearing pipe support accommodating up to 20-inch diameter pipe or conduit and with provision
for pipe retainer; as required for quantity of pipe runs and sizes.
F. Duct Supports: Extruded-aluminum, urethane-insulated supports, 2 inches in diameter; with
manufacturer's recommended hardware for mounting to structure or structural roof deck.
2.5 PIPE PORTALS
A. Curb-Mounted Pipe Portal: Insulated roof-curb units with welded or mechanically fastened and
sealed corner joints, stepped integral metal cant raised the thickness of roof insulation, and
integrally formed deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom; with weathertight curb cover with
single or multiple collared openings and pressure-sealed conically shaped EPDM protective
rubber caps sized for piping indicated, with stainless-steel snaplock swivel clamps.
B. Flashing Pipe Portal: Formed aluminum membrane-mounting flashing flange and sleeve with
collared opening and pressure-sealed conically shaped EPDM protective rubber cap sized for
piping indicated, with stainless-steel snaplock swivel clamps.
ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200- 6
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
2.6 PREFORMED FLASHING SLEEVES
A. Exhaust Vent and Vent Stack Flashing: Double-walled metal flashing sleeve or boot, insulation
filled, with integral deck flange, 12 inches high, with removable metal hood and slotted metal
collar.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Custom Solution Roof and Metal Products
b. Menzies Metal Products
c. Thaler Metal Industries.
2. Metal: Aluminum sheet, 0.063 inch thick.
3. Diameter: As indicated.
4. Finish: Manufacturer's standard.
2.7 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations,
dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored.
C. Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Install roof accessories level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping, jogs
in alignment, excessive oil canning, buckling, or tool marks.
2. Anchor roof accessories securely in place so they are capable of resisting indicated
loads.
3. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to
complete installation of roof accessories and fit them to substrates.
4. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, or
loosening of fasteners and seals.
ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200- 7
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from
contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with
bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.
1. Coat concealed side of [uncoated aluminum] [stainless-steel] roof accessories with
bituminous coating where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious
construction.
2. Underlayment: Where installing roof accessories directly on cementitious or wood
substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet, or install a
course of polyethylene sheet.
3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by manufacturers of
roof accessories for waterproof performance.
C. Roof Curb Installation: Install each roof curb so top surface is level.
D. Equipment Support Installation: Install equipment supports so top surfaces are level with each
other.
E. Roof-Hatch Installation:
1. Install roof hatch so top surface of hatch curb is level.
2. Verify that roof hatch operates properly. Clean, lubricate, and adjust operating
mechanism and hardware.
3. Attach safety railing system to roof-hatch curb.
4. Attach ladder-assist post according to manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Heat and Smoke Vent Installation:
1. Install heat and smoke vent so top perimeter surfaces are level.
2. Install and test heat and smoke vents and their components for proper operation
according to NFPA 204.
G. Gravity Ventilator Installation: Verify that gravity ventilators operate properly and have
unrestricted airflow. Clean, lubricate, and adjust operating mechanisms.
H. Pipe Support Installation: Install pipe supports so top surfaces are in contact with and provide
equally distributed support along length of supported item.
I. Security Grilles: Weld bar intersections and, using tamper-resistant bolts, attach the ends of
bars to structural frame or primary curb walls.
J. Roof Walkway Installation:
1. Verify that locations of access and servicing points for roof-mounted equipment are
served by locations of roof walkways.
2. Remove ballast from top surface of low-slope roofing at locations of contact with roof-
walkway supports.
3. Install roof walkway support pads prior to placement of roof walkway support stands onto
low-slope roofing.
4. Redistribute removed ballast after installation of support pads.
K. Preformed Flashing-Sleeve Installation: Secure flashing sleeve to roof membrane according to
flashing-sleeve manufacturer's written instructions.
L. Seal joints with elastomeric or butyl sealant as required by roof accessory manufacturer.
ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200- 8
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
3.3 REPAIR AND CLEANING
A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing according to ASTM A 780.
B. Touch up factory-primed surfaces with compatible primer ready for field painting according to
Section 09911 "Exterior Painting" and Section 09912 "Interior Painting."
C. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Clean off excess sealants.
E. Replace roof accessories that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by
finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance
of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch
offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and
weathering.
B. Clean off excess sealants.
C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim
are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On
completion of sheet metal flashing and trim installation, remove unused materials and clean
finished surfaces as recommended by sheet metal flashing and trim manufacturer. Maintain
sheet metal flashing and trim in clean condition during construction.
D. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated
beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 076200
ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200- 9
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200- 10
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 078410 - FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Include GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, and all applicable Di-
vision 1 Specification Sections as part of this Section.
B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements that affect work of this Sec-
tion whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.
C. Coordinate work with trades affecting, or affected by, work of this Section. Cooperate with
such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes firestopping for the following:
1. Annular ring penetrations through fire-resistance-rated floor, roof, wall, and partition
construction at all new and existing openings containing cables, pipes, ducts, con-
duits, and other penetrating items.
2. Sealant joints in fire-resistance-rated construction.
1.03 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide firestopping systems that are produced and installed to resist the spread of
fire, according to requirements indicated, and the passage of smoke and other gases.
B. F-Rated Through-Penetration Firestop Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop sys-
tems per ASTM E 814, but not less than that equaling or exceeding the fire-resistance rating
of the constructions penetrated.
C. Fire-Resistive Joint Sealants: Provide joint sealants with fire-resistance ratings, as deter-
mined per ASTM E 119, but not less than that equaling or exceeding the fire-resistance rating
of the construction in which the joint occurs.
D. For firestopping exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide products
that do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions.
1. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide mois-
ture-resistant through-penetration firestop systems.
2. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches or more in width and
exposed to possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of support-
ing the floor loads involved either by installing floor plates or by other means.
3. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration firestop sys-
tems not requiring removal of insulation.
E. For firestopping exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread values of less than 25
and smoke-developed values of less than 450, as determined per ASTM E 84.
FIRESTOPPING 078410 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specifica-
tion Sections.
B. Product data for each type of product specified.
1. Certification by firestopping manufacturer that products supplied comply with LEED
for Homes VOC limits set by SCAQMD Rule 1168..
C. Shop drawings detailing materials, installation methods, and relationships to adjoining con-
struction for each through-penetration firestop system, and each kind of construction condi-
tion penetrated and kind of penetrating item. Include firestop design designation of qualified
testing and inspecting agency evidencing compliance with requirements for each condition
indicated.
1. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting
agency that is applicable to each through-penetration firestop configuration for con-
struction and penetrating items.
D. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of firestopping products certifying that their
products comply with specified requirements.
E. Product test reports from, and based on tests performed by, a qualified testing and inspecting
agency evidencing compliance of firestopping with requirements based on comprehensive
testing of current products.
F. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" article to demon-
strate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with project names,
addresses, names of Architects and Owners, and other information specified.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide firestopping that complies with the following re-
quirements and those specified under the "System Performance Requirements" article:
1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A
qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL, Warnock Hersey, or another agency
performing testing and follow-up inspection services for firestop systems that is ac-
ceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Through-penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per ASTM E 814
under conditions where positive furnace pressure differential of at least 0.01 inch of
water is maintained at a distance of 0.78 inch below the fill materials surrounding the
penetrating items in the test assembly. Provide rated systems complying with the fol-
lowing requirements:
a. Through-penetration firestop system products bear classification marking of qual-
ified testing and inspecting agency.
b. Through-penetration firestop systems correspond to those indicated by reference
to through-penetration firestop system designations listed by UL in their "Fire Re-
sistance Directory," by Warnock Hersey, or by another qualified testing and in-
specting agency.
FIRESTOPPING 078410 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
3. Fire-resistive joint sealant systems are identical to those tested for fire-response
characteristics per ASTM E 119 under conditions where the positive furnace pressure
differential is at least 0.01 inch of water, as measured 0.78 inch from the face ex-
posed to furnace fire. Provide systems complying with the following requirements:
a. Fire-Resistance Ratings of Joint Sealants: As indicated by reference to design
designations listed by UL in their "Fire Resistance Directory" or by another quali-
fied testing and inspecting agency.
b. Joint sealants, including backing materials, bear classification marking of quali-
fied testing and inspection agency.
B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed firestopping that
is similar to that required for Project and that has performed successfully.
C. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain through-penetration firestop systems for each kind of
penetration and construction condition indicated from a single manufacturer.
D. Provide firestopping products containing no detectable asbestos as determined by the meth-
od specified in 40 CFR Part 763, Subpart F, Appendix A, Section 1, "Polarized Light Micros-
copy."
E. Coordinating Work: Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure
that designated through-penetration firestop systems are installed per specified requirements.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver firestopping products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages with
intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer; date of manu-
facture; lot number; shelf life, if applicable; qualified testing and inspecting agency's classifi-
cation marking applicable to Project; curing time; and mixing instructions for multicomponent
materials.
B. Store and handle firestopping materials to prevent their deterioration or damage due to mois-
ture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Do not install firestopping when ambient or substrate tempera-
tures are outside limits permitted by firestopping manufacturers or when substrates are wet
due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
B. Ventilation: Ventilate firestopping per firestopping manufacturers' instructions by natural
means or, where this is inadequate, forced air circulation.
1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Do not cover up those firestopping installations that will become concealed behind other con-
struction until Architect has examined each installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL
FIRESTOPPING 078410 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
A. A. Where required, provide fire-resistive joint systems that are produced and installed to resist
spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases,
and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assemblies in or between which fire-resistive joint
systems are installed. Fire-resistive joint systems shall accommodate building movements
without im pairing their ability to resist the passage of fire and hot gases.
B. Joints in or between Fire-Resistance-Rated Construction: Provide fire-resistive joint systems
with ratings determined per ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079:
1. Joints include those installed in or between fire-resistance-rated walls, floor or
floor/ceiling assemblies, and roofs or roof/ceiling assemblies.
2. Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of construction
they will join.
C. Joints at Exterior Curtain-Wall/Floor Intersections: Provide fire-resistive joint systems with rating
determined by ASTM E 119 based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg
or ASTM E 2307.
1. Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the floor
assembly.
D. Joints in Smoke Barriers: Provide fire-resistive joint systems with ratings determined per
UL 2079.
1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/ft of joint at 0.30 inch wg at both ambient and elevated
temperatures.
E. Exposed Fire-Resistive Joint Systems: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-
developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.
F. VOC Content: Fire-resistive joint system sealants shall comply with the following limits for VOC
content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.
2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
G. Low-Emitting Materials: Fire-resistive joint system sealants shall comply with the testing and
product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for
the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale
Environmental Chambers."
H. Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including primers and forming
materials that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only
components specified by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer and approved by the qualified
testing agency for systems indicated.
2.02 MIXING
A. For those products requiring mixing prior to application, comply with firestopping manufactur-
er's directions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing
equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures
FIRESTOPPING 078410 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
needed to produce firestopping products of uniform quality with optimum performance char-
acteristics.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting per-
formance of firestopping. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings and joints immediately prior to installing firestopping
to comply with recommendations of firestopping manufacturer and the following require-
ments:
1. Remove all foreign materials from surfaces of opening and joint substrates and from
penetrating items that could interfere with adhesion of firestopping.
2. Clean opening and joint substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound
surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with firestopping. Remove loose par-
ticles remaining from cleaning operation.
3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete.
B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended by firestopping manufacturer using that
manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do
not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces
that will remain exposed upon completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently
stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from
firestopping materials. Remove tape as soon as it is possible to do so without disturbing fire-
stopping's seal with substrates.
3.03 INSTALLING THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOPS
A. General: Comply with the "System Performance Requirements" article in Part 1 and the
through-penetration firestop manufacturer's installation instructions and drawings pertaining
to products and applications indicated.
B. Install forming/damming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill ma-
terials during their application and in the position needed to produce the cross-sectional
shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings of designated through-penetration firestop
systems. After installing fill materials, remove combustible forming materials and other ac-
cessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop systems.
C. Install fill materials for through-penetration firestop systems by proven techniques to produce
the following results:
1. Completely fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories,
and penetrating items.
FIRESTOPPING 078410 - 5
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and
penetrating items.
3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce
smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
3.04 INSTALLING FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with the "System Performance Requirements" article in Part 1, with ASTM
C 1193, and with the sealant manufacturer's installation instructions and drawings pertaining
to products and applications.
B. Install joint fillers to provide support of sealants during application and at position required to
produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths
that allow optimum sealant movement capability and develop fire-resistance rating required.
C. Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wet-
ting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and
providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint width that optimum
sealant movement capability. Install sealants at the same time joint fillers are installed.
D. Tool nonsag sealants immediately after sealant application and prior to the time skinning or
curing begins. Form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated or required to produce
fire-resistance rating, as well as to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion
of sealants with sides of joint. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do
not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by
sealant manufacturer.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner and Architect will examine completed firestopping to determine, in general, if it is be-
ing installed in compliance with requirements.
B. Do not proceed to enclose firestopping with other construction until reports of examinations
are issued.
C. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace firestopping so that it complies with require-
ments.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess fill materials and sealants adjacent to openings and joints as work pro-
gresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of firestopping
products and of products in which opening and joints occur.
B. Protect firestopping during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substanc-
es or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are
without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protec-
tion, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated firestop-
ping immediately and install new materials to produce firestopping complying with specified
requirements.
END OF SECTION 072700
FIRESTOPPING 078410 - 6
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the following:
1. Interior joint sealants.
2. Exterior joint sealants.
3. Acoustical joint sealants.
4. Joint sealant backing.
5. Precured, extruded-silicone joint sealants.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 027640 "Pavement Joint Sealants" for sealing joints in paved roads, parking lots,
walkways, and curbing.
2. Section 092500 "Gypsum Board" for sealing perimeter joints.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For sealants and sealant primers used inside the
weatherproofing system, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.
2. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4.1: For sealants and sealant primers used inside
the weatherproofing system, documentation indicating that products comply with the
testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's
(formerly, the California Department of Health Services') "Standard Method for the
Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources
Using Environmental Chambers."
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants
showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.
D. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:
1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation.
2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.
3. Joint-sealant formulation.
4. Joint-sealant color.
JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved
for installation of units required for this Project.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single
manufacturer.
C. Mockups: Install sealant in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are
indicated to receive joint sealants specified in this Section. Use materials and installation
methods specified in this Section.
1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-
sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.
2. When joint substrates are wet.
3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for
applications indicated.
4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed
from joint substrates.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not
comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified
warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible
with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers used inside the
weatherproofing system shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.
2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
C. Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for
each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920
classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.
JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
D. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous
substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have
not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.
E. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come in
repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.
F. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.2 JOINT SEALANTS
A. Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component, Acid-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920,
Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. BASF Building Systems; Omniplus.
b. Dow Corning Corporation; 786 Mildew Resistant.
c. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; Sanitary SCS1700.
d. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 200 Sanitary.
2. Locations:
a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.
b. Tile control and expansion joints where indicated.
c. Other joints as indicated.
B. Single-Component, Nonsag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS,
Class 25, for Use NT.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolastic NP1.
b. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol I-XL.
c. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikaflex 15LM.
d. Tremco Incorporated; Dymonic FC.
2. Locations:
a. Exterior vertical and horizontal non-traffic joints between precast architectural
concrete units or between cast stone units.
b. Exterior vertical control and expansion joints in unit masonry.
c. Exterior vertical joints between wood or cementitious panels and masonry.
d. Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete.
e. Joints between plant-precast architectural concrete units.
f. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry.
g. Joints in dimension stone cladding.
h. Joints in exterior insulation and finish systems.
i. Joints between metal panels.
j. Joints between different materials listed above.
k. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors, windows,
and louvers.
l. All other exterior joints not otherwise specified.
JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
C. Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolac.
b. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+.
c. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834.
1. Locations:
a. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of doors and windows.
b. Joints between kitchen counters and interior wall surfaces.
c. Other joints as indicated.
D. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant
complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through
perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative
assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Accumetric LLC; BOSS 824 Acoustical Sound Sealant.
b. Grabber Construction Products; Acoustical Sealant GSC.
c. Pecora Corporation; AIS-919.
d. Specified Technologies, Inc.; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant.
e. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
2. Acoustical joint sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
3. Locations:
a. Acoustical joints at unit demising walls, floors and ceilings.
b. Other joints as indicated.
E. Precured, Extruded Silicone Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard pre-engineered silicone
material.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide each of the following:
a. Tremco Incorporated; Proglaze ETA Connection
b. Emseal; Seismic Colorseal
2. Locations:
a. Building expansion joints.
2.3 JOINT SEALANT BACKING
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material that are non-staining; are compatible with joint
substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated
by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin),
and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum
sealant performance.
C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant
manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint
surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of
sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate
tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants
and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or
harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to
promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Non-staining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and
surfaces adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-
sealant performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of
joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and
approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint
sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.
2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a
combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing
optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning
operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.
Porous joint substrates include the following:
a. Concrete.
b. Masonry.
c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
d. Exterior insulation and finish systems.
JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 5
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do
not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint
sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:
a. Metal.
b. Glass.
c. Porcelain enamel.
d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as
indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-
sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with
adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or
by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Rem ove tape immediately after
tooling without disturbing joint seal.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products
and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint
sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position
required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint
widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application
and replace them with dry materials.
D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between
sealants and backs of joints.
E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or
curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form
smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure
contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 6
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not
discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Provide flush joint profile where indicated per Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193.
5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per
Figure 8C in ASTM C 1193.
a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.
G. Single-Component, Nonsag, Urethane Joint Sealant: Do not install in cold weather or large
quantities. 2-part, chemically catalyzed sealants shall be used in cold weather.
H. Acoustical Sealant Installation: At sound-rated assemblies and elsewhere as indicated, seal
construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a
continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at
perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's
written recommendations.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by
methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and
of products in which joints occur.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances
and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without
deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage
or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately
so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.
END OF SECTION 079200
JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 7
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 8
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Standard and custom hollow metal doors and frames.
2. Steel sidelight, borrowed lite and transom frames.
3. Louvers installed in hollow metal doors.
4. Light frames and glazing installed in hollow metal doors.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for embedding anchors for hollow metal work into
masonry construction.
2. Division 08 Section “Flush Wood Doors”.
3. Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glass view panels in hollow metal doors.
4. Division 08 Section "Door Hardware".
5. Division 09 Sections "Exterior Painting" and "Interior Painting" for field painting hollow
metal doors and frames.
6. Division 28 Section "Access Control Hardware".
C. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having
Jurisdiction.
1. ANSI/SDI A250.8 - Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
2. ANSI/SDI A250.4 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for
Steel Doors, Frames, Frames Anchors and Hardware Reinforcing.
3. ANSI/SDI A250.6 - Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcing on Standard Steel
Doors and Frames.
4. ANSI/SDI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel
Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames.
5. ANSI/SDI A250.11 - Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames.
6. ASTM A1008 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural,
High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability.
7. ASTM A653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-
Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
8. ASTM A924 - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-
Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.
9. ASTM C 1363 - Standard Test Method for Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by
Means of a Hot Box Apparatus.
10. ANSI/BHMA A156.115 - Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Frames.
11. ANSI/SDI 122 - Installation and Troubleshooting Guide for Standard Steel Doors and
Frames.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
12. ANSI/NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows; National Fire Protection
Association.
13. ANSI/NFPA 105: Standard for the Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies.
14. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; National Fire Protection
Association.
15. UL 10C - Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
16. UL 1784 - Standard for Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, core descriptions, hardware reinforcements, profiles, anchors, fire-resistance
rating, and finishes.
B. Door hardware supplier is to furnish templates, template reference number and/or physical
hardware to the steel door and frame supplier in order to prepare the doors and frames to
receive the finish hardware items.
C. Shop Drawings: Include the following:
1. Elevations of each door design.
2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses.
3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses.
4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.
5. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections.
6. Details of accessories.
7. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing.
8. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.
D. Samples for Verification:
1. Samples are only required by request of the architect and for manufacturers that are not
current members of the Steel Door Institute.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal doors and frames through one source from a single
manufacturer wherever possible.
B. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, furnish SDI-Certified manufacturer
products that comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8, latest edition, "Recommended Specifications for
Standard Steel Doors and Frames".
C. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by
a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive
pressure according to UL10C (neutral pressure at 40” above sill) or UL 10C.
1. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies Construction: For units exceeding sizes of tested
assemblies, attach construction label certifying doors are built to standard construction
requirements for tested and labeled fire rated door assemblies except for size.
2. Temperature-Rise Limit: Where indicated and at vertical exit enclosures (stairwell
openings) and exit passageways, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted
temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F (250 deg C) above ambient after 30
minutes of standard fire-test exposure.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
3. Smoke Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105.
a. Smoke "S" Label: Doors to bear “S” label, and include smoke and draft control
gasketing applied to frame and on meeting stiles of pair doors.
D. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are
listed and labeled, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257.
Provide labeled glazing material.
E. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct conference in compliance with requirements in Division 01
Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier, Installer, and
Contractor to review proper methods and procedures for installing hollow metal doors and
frames and to verify installation of electrical knockout boxes and conduit at frames with
electrified or access control hardware.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and
Project site storage. Do not use non-vented plastic.
B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded
to jambs and mullions.
C. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a
vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch high wood blocking. Do
not store in a manner that traps excess humidity.
1. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.
Door and frames to be stacked in a vertical upright position.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before
fabrication.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings,
templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor
bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
B. Warranty includes installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of
defective doors.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide steel doors and frames from a
SDI Certified manufacturer:
1. CECO Door Products (C).
2. Curries Company (CU).
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for
exposed applications.
B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with
minimum G60 (Z180) or A60 (ZF180) metallic coating.
C. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Commercial Steel (CS), Type B;
with minimum G60 (Z180) or A60 (ZF180) metallic coating.
2.3 HOLLOW METAL DOORS
A. General: Provide 1-3/4 inch doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated;
fabricated with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seam s on exposed faces unless
otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and ANSI/NAAMM HMMA 867.
B. Exterior Doors (Energy Efficient): Face sheets fabricated of commercial quality hot-dipped zinc
coated steel that complies with ASTM A924 A60. Provide doors complying with requirements
indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model, and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for
physical performance level.
1. Design: Flush panel.
2. Core Construction: Foamed in place polyurethane and steel reinforced core with no
stiffener face welds.
a. Provide 18 gauge steel vertical reinforcements 6 inches apart and welded in place.
Foamed in place polyurethane core is chemically bonded to all interior surfaces.
No face welding is permitted.
b. Thermal properties to rate at a fully operable minimum U-Factor 0.374 and R-
Value 2.53, including insulated door, Mercury thermal-break frame and threshold.
c. Kerf Type Frames: Thermal properties to rate at a fully operable minimum U-
Factor 0.378 and R-Value 2.5, including insulated door, kerf type frame, and
threshold.
3. Level/Model: Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Minimum 16
gauge (0.053-inch - 1.3-mm) thick steel, Model 2.
4. Vertical Edges: Vertical edges to be mechanically interlocked with hairline seam. Beveled
Lock Edge, 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3 mm in 50 mm).
5. Top and Bottom Edges: Reinforce tops and bottoms of doors with a continuous steel
channel not less than 16 gauge, extending the full width of the door and welded to the
face sheet. Doors with an inverted top channel to include a steel closure channel, screw
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
attached, with the web of the channel flush with the face sheets of the door. Plastic or
composite channel fillers are not acceptable.
6. Hinge Reinforcement: Minimum 7 gauge (3/16") plate 1-1/4" x 9".
7. Hardware Reinforcements: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing
plates from same material as door face sheets.
C. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated of commercial quality hot-dipped zinc coated steel that
complies with ASTM A 653/A 653M, Coating Designation A60. Provide doors complying with
requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and
ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:
1. Design: Flush panel.
2. Vertical Edges: Vertical edges to have the face sheets joined by a continuous weld
extending the full height of the door. Welds are to be ground, filled and dressed smooth.
Beveled Lock Edge, 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3 mm in 50 mm).
3. Top and Bottom Edges: Reinforce tops and bottoms of doors with a continuous steel
channel not less than 16 gauge, extending the full width of the door and welded to the
face sheet. Doors with an inverted top channel to include a steel closure channel, screw
attached, with the web of the channel flush with the face sheets of the door. Plastic or
composite channel fillers are not acceptable.
4. Hinge Reinforcement: Minimum 7 gauge (3/16") plate 1-1/4" x 9" or minimum 14 gauge
continuous channel with pierced holes, drilled and tapped.
5. Hardware Reinforcements: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing
plates from same material as door face sheets.
D. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated of commercial quality cold rolled steel that complies with
ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by
referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical
performance level:
1. Design: Flush panel.
a. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection and temperature-rise ratings
indicated.
2. Level/Model: Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Minimum 18 gauge
(0.042-inch - 1.0-mm) thick steel, Model 2.
3. Vertical Edges: Vertical edges to have the face sheets joined by a continuous weld
extending the full height of the door. Welds are to be ground, filled and dressed smooth.
Beveled Lock Edge, 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3 mm in 50 mm).
4. Top and Bottom Edges: Reinforce tops and bottoms of doors with a continuous steel
channel not less than 16 gauge, extending the full width of the door and welded to the
face sheet.
5. Hinge Reinforcement: Minimum 7 gauge (3/16") plate 1-1/4" x 9" or minimum 14 gauge
continuous channel with pierced holes, drilled and tapped.
6. Hardware Reinforcements: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing
plates from same material as door face sheets.
E. Manufacturers Basis of Design:
1. Curries Company (CU) - Polystyrene Core - 707 Series.
2. Curries Company (CU) - Energy Efficient - 797 Mercury Series.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 5
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
2.4 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile.
B. Thermal Break Frames: Subject to the same compliance standards and requirements as
standard hollow metal frames. Tested for thermal performance in accordance with NFRC 102,
and resistance to air infiltration in accordance with NFRC 400. Where indicated provide
thermally broken frame profiles available for use in both masonry and drywall construction.
Fabricate with 1/16” positive thermal break and integral vinyl weatherstripping.
C. Exterior Frames: Fabricated of hot-dipped zinc coated steel that complies with ASTM
A 653/A 653M, Coating Designation A60.
1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. Profile as indicated on drawings.
2. Frames: Minimum 14 gauge (0.067-inch -1.7-mm) thick steel sheet.
3. Manufacturers Basis of Design:
a. Curries Company (CU) – Thermal Break TQ Series.
D. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet that complies with
ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.
1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. Profile as indicated on drawings.
2. Frames: Minimum 16 gauge (0.053-inch -1.3-mm) thick steel sheet.
3. Manufacturers Basis of Design:
a. Curries Company (CU) - C Series.
b. Curries Company (CU) - M Series.
E. Fire rated frames: Fabricate frames in accordance with NFPA 80, listed and labeled by a
qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated.
F. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 Table 4 with reinforcement
plates from same material as frames.
2.5 FRAME ANCHORS
A. Jamb Anchors:
1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size,
formed from A60 metallic coated material, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated
or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not
less than 0.177 inch thick.
2. Stud Wall Type: Designed to engage stud and not less than 0.042 inch thick.
3. Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on (Knock-Down) Frames: Adjustable compression
anchors.
B. Floor Anchors: Floor anchors to be provided at each jamb, formed from A60 metallic coated
material, not less than 0.042 inches thick.
C. Mortar Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inches thick.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 6
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
2.6 LOUVERS
A. Metal Louvers: Door manufacturer's standard metal louvers unless otherwise indicated.
1. Blade Type: Vision proof inverted V or inverted Y.
2. Metal and Finish: Galvanized steel, 0.040 inch thick, factory primed for paint finish with
baked enamel or powder coated finish. Match pre-finished door paint color where
applicable.
B. Louvers for Fire Rated Doors: Metal louvers with fusible link and closing device, listed and
labeled for use in doors with fire protection rating of 1-1/2 hours and less.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide door manufacturers
standard louver to meet rating indicated.
2. Metal and Finish: Galvanized steel, 0.040 inch thick, factory primed for paint finish with
baked enamel or powder coated finish. Match pre-finished door paint color where
applicable.
2.7 LIGHT OPENINGS AND GLAZING
A. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form
corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints at fabricator’s shop. Fixed
and removable stops to allow multiple glazed lites each to be removed independently.
Coordinate frame rabbet widths between fixed and removable stops with the type of glazing and
installation indicated.
B. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors and Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 20
gauge thick, fabricated from same material as door face sheet in which they are installed.
C. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch (16
mm) high unless otherwise indicated. Provide fixed frame moldings and stops on outside of
exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames.
D. Preformed Metal Frames for Light Openings: Manufacturer's standard frame formed of 0.048-
inch-thick, cold rolled steel sheet; with baked enamel or powder coated finish; and approved for
use in doors of fire protection rating indicated. Match pre-finished door paint color where
applicable.
2.8 ACCESSORIES
A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors.
B. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inches thick.
2.9 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form
metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where
practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. When shipping limitations so dictate,
frames for large openings are to be fabricated in sections for splicing or splining in the field by
others.
B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in ANSI/SDI A250.8.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 7
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
C. Hollow Metal Doors:
1. Exterior Doors: Provide optional weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit
moisture to escape where specified.
2. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors with applied trim or kits to fit. Factory install
glazing where indicated.
3. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragals as noted in door hardware sets in Division 08
Section "Door Hardware" on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80 for fire-
performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch beyond edge of door on
which astragal is mounted.
4. Continuous Hinge Reinforcement: Provide welded continuous 12 gauge strap for
continuous hinges specified in hardware sets in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware".
5. Electrical Raceways: Provide hollow metal doors to receive electrified hardware with
concealed wiring harness and standardized Molex™ plug connectors on both ends to
accommodate up to twelve wires. Coordinate connectors on end of the wiring harness to
plug directly into the electrified hardware and the through-wire transfer hardware or wiring
harness specified in hardware sets in Division 08 Sections "Door Hardware" and "Access
Control Hardware". Wire nut connections are not acceptable.
D. Hollow Metal Frames:
1. Shipping Limitations: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling
limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness
metal as frames.
2. Welded Frames: Weld joints continuously through full throat width of frames, including
rabbets, soffits, and stops; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible.
a. Welded frames are to be provided with two steel spreaders temporarily attached to
the bottom of both jambs to serve as a brace during shipping and handling.
Spreader bars are for bracing only and are not to be used to size the frame
opening.
3. Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face
seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at
crossings and to jambs by butt welding.
4. Equal Rabbet Frames: Provide frames with equal rabbet dimensions unless glazing and
removable stops require wider dimensions on glass side of frame.
5. High Frequency Hinge Reinforcement: Provide high frequency hinge reinforcements at
door openings 48-inches and wider with mortise butt type hinges at top hinge locations.
6. Continuous Hinge Reinforcement: Provide welded continuous 12 gauge straps for
continuous hinges specified in hardware sets in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware".
7. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners
unless otherwise indicated for removable stops, provide security screws at exterior
locations.
8. Mortar Guards: Provide guard boxes at back of hardware mortises in frames at all hinges
and strike preps regardless of grouting requirements.
9. Electrical Thru-Wiring: Provide hollow metal frames receiving electrified hardware with
loose wiring harness (not attached to open throat components or installed in closed
mullion tubes) and standardized Molex™ plug connectors on one end to accommodate
up to twelve wires. Coordinate connectors on end of the wiring harness to plug directly
into the electric through-wire transfer hardware or wiring harness specified in hardware
sets in Division 08 Sections "Door Hardware" and "Access Control Hardware".
10. Electrical Knock Out Boxes: Factory weld 18 gauge electrical knock out boxes to frame
for electrical hardware preps; including but not limited to, electric through wire transfer
hardware, electrical raceways and wiring harnesses, door position switches, electric
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 8
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
strikes, magnetic locks, and jamb mounted card readers as specified in hardware sets in
Division 08 Sections "Door Hardware" and "Access Control Hardware".
a. Provide electrical knock out boxes with a dual 1/2-inch and 3/4-inch knockouts.
b. Conduit to be coordinated and installed in the field (Division 26) from middle hinge
box and strike box to door position box.
c. Electrical knock out boxes to comply with NFPA requirements and fit electrical
door hardware as specified in hardware sets in Division 08 Section "Door
Hardware".
d. Electrical knock out boxes for continuous hinges should be located in the center of
the vertical dimension on the hinge jamb.
11. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot
welds per anchor.
12. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of
frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:
1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.
2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.
3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high.
4) Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches
or fraction thereof above 120 inches high.
b. Stud Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of
frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:
1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.
2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.
3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high.
4) Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches
or fraction thereof above 96 inches high.
5) Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches wide and mounted in
metal stud partitions.
13. Door Silencers: Except on weatherstripped or gasketed doors, drill stops to receive door
silencers. Silencers to be supplied by frame manufacturer regardless if specified in
Division 08 Section "Door Hardware".
14. Bituminous Coating: Where frames are fully grouted with an approved Portland Cement
based grout or mortar, coat inside of frame throat with a water based bituminous or
asphaltic emulsion coating to a minimum thickness of 3 mils DFT, tested in accordance
with UL 10C and applied to the frame under a 3rd party independent follow-up service
procedure.
E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive template mortised
hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door
Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 08 Section "Door
Hardware."
1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.
2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive non-template, mortised and surface mounted door
hardware.
3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series
specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 9
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with
Division 26 Sections.
2.10 STEEL FINISHES
A. Prime Finishes: Doors and frames to be cleaned, and chemically treated to insure maximum
finish paint adhesion. Surfaces of the door and frame exposed to view to receive a factory
applied coat of rust inhibiting shop primer.
1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead and chromate free primer
complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer
manufacturer for substrate; and compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. General Contractor to verify the accuracy of dimensions given to the steel door and frame
manufacturer for existing openings or existing frames (strike height, hinge spacing, hinge back
set, etc.).
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove welded in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding,
filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed
faces.
B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for square, level,
twist, and plumb condition.
C. Tolerances shall comply with SDI-117 "Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and
Frames."
D. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive non-template, mortised, and surface-mounted door
hardware.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place;
comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with
ANSI/SDI A250.11 and NFPA 80 at fire rated openings.
1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, leveled, aligned, and braced securely until
permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete and frames properly set and
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 10
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
secured, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. Shim as
necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and
secure with post-installed expansion anchors.
3. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between
frames and masonry with mortar.
4. Grout Requirements: Do not grout head of frames unless reinforcing has been installed in
head of frame. Do not grout vertical or horizontal closed mullion members.
C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified
below. Shim as necessary.
1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors:
a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch.
b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch.
c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch.
d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4
inch.
2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.
D. Field Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with
hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final
inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace
defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation.
C. Prime-Coat and Painted Finish Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or
damaged areas of prime coat, or painted finishes, and apply touchup of compatible air drying,
rust-inhibitive primer, zinc rich primer (exterior and galvanized openings) or finish paint.
END OF SECTION 081113
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 11
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 12
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 082110 - WOOD DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Stile and Rail Solid-core doors.
2. Shop priming wood doors.
3. Factory fitting wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 099100 "Painting" for field finishing doors.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction and trim for
openings. Include factory-finishing specifications.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door;
construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following:
1. Dimensions and locations of blocking.
2. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
3. Dimensions and locations of cutouts.
4. Undercuts.
5. Requirements for veneer matching.
6. Doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.
7. Fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For factory-finished doors.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons.
C. Mark each door on bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.
WOOD DOORS AND FRAMES 082110 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and
weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and
maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during remainder
of construction period.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section.
b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch
span.
2. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.
3. Warranty Period for Hollow-Core Interior Doors: Two year(s) from date of Substantial
Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.
2. Eggers Industries.
3. Masonite.
4. Mohawk Doors.
5. VT Industries, Inc.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain wood doors from single manufacturer.
2.2 WOOD DOORS, GENERAL
A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's
"Architectural Woodwork Standards."
B. Low-Emitting Materials: Fabricate doors with adhesives and composite wood products that do
not contain urea formaldehyde.
C. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Heavy Duty.
D. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a
qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive
pressure according to NFPA 252.
WOOD DOORS AND FRAMES 082110 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1. Cores: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire-protection rating
indicated.
E. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Listed and labeled for smoke and draft control,
based on testing according to UL 1784.
F. Particleboard-Core Doors:
1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-1 or Grade LD-2, made with binder containing no
urea-formaldehyde.
2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as follows:
a. 5-inch top-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have closers.
b. 10-inch bottom-rail blocking, in exterior doors and doors indicated to have kick,
mop, or armor plates.
3. Provide doors with glued-wood-stave or structural-composite-lumber cores instead of
particleboard cores for doors indicated to receive exit devices.
G. Structural-Composite-Lumber-Core Doors:
1. Structural Composite Lumber: WDMA I.S.10.
a. Screw Withdrawal, Face: 700 lbf.
b. Screw Withdrawal, Edge: 400 lbf.
H. Mineral-Core Doors:
1. Core: Noncombustible mineral product complying with requirements of referenced
quality standard and testing and inspecting agency for fire-protection rating indicated.
2. Blocking: Provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability approved
for use in doors of fire-protection ratings indicated as follows:
a. 5-inch top-rail blocking.
b. 10-inch bottom-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have protection plates.
c. 5-inch midrail blocking, in doors indicated to have exit devices.
3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with improved
screw-holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for
exposed edges.
a. Screw-Holding Capability: 475 lbf per WDMA T.M.-10.
2.3 DOORS FOR OPAQUE FINISH
A. Interior Solid-Core Doors:
1. Grade: Custom.
2. Faces: Any closed-grain hardwood of mill option, hardboard or MDF. No urea
formaldehyde.
a. Hardboard Faces: ANSI A135.4, Class 1 (tempered) or Class 2 (standard).
b. MDF Faces: ANSI A208.2, Grade 150 or Grade 160.
WOOD DOORS AND FRAMES 082110 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
3. Core: Particleboard.
4. Construction: Three plies, either bonded or nonbonded.
2.4 LIGHT FRAMES
A. Wood Beads for Light Openings in Wood Doors: Provide manufacturer's standard wood beads
unless otherwise indicated.
1. Wood Species: Species compatible with door faces.
2. Profile: Flush rectangular beads.
3. At wood-core doors with 20-minute fire-protection ratings, provide wood beads and metal
glazing clips approved for such use.
B. Wood-Veneered Beads for Light Openings in Fire-Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard wood-
veneered noncombustible beads matching veneer species of door faces and approved for use
in doors of fire-protection rating indicated. Include concealed metal glazing clips where required
for opening size and fire-protection rating indicated.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of
referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.
1. Comply with NFPA 80 requirements for fire-rated doors.
B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply
with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, BHMA-
156.115-W, and hardware templates.
1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment
before factory machining.
2. Metal Astragals: Factory machine astragals and formed-steel edges for hardware for
pairs of fire-rated doors.
C. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors.
1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.
2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished.
2.6 SHOP PRIMING
A. Doors for Opaque Finish: Shop prime faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises with
one coat of wood primer specified in Section 09912" Interior Painting."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors.
WOOD DOORS AND FRAMES 082110 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location,
and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.
2. Reject doors with defects.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 087100 "Door Hardware."
B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and
referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
1. Install fire-rated doors according to NFPA 80.
2. Install smoke- and draft-control doors according to NFPA 105.
C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated
below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-
rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises
after fitting and machining.
1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8
inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise
indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide1/4 inch from bottom of door
to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated.
a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
b. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges.
D. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
END OF SECTION 082110
WOOD DOORS AND FRAMES 082110 - 5
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
WOOD DOORS AND FRAMES 082110 - 6
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 084110 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Exterior and interior storefront framing.
2. Exterior and interior manual-swing entrance doors.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components
and profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts. Include plans, elevations,
sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work.
1. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for draining
moisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior.
2. Include full-size isometric details of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of aluminum-
framed entrances and storefronts, showing the following:
a. Joinery, including concealed welds.
b. Anchorage.
c. Expansion provisions.
d. Glazing.
e. Flashing and drainage.
3. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor
barriers.
C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes.
D. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under supervision of supplier, detailing
fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams.
Coordinate final entrance door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to
ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of entrance door hardware.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084110 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Energy Performance Certificates: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts,
accessories, and components, from manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: NFRC-certified energy performance values for each aluminum-
framed entrance and storefront.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For aluminum -framed entrances and storefronts to include in maintenance
manuals.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and
approved by manufacturer.
B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for
aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated
by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they
relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction.
1. Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with
Architect's approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data
to Architect for review.
1.7 MOCKUPS
A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1. Build mockup of typical wall area. Area to be determined by Architect during construction.
2. Testing shall be performed on mockups according to requirements in "Field Quality
Control" Article.
3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations
in writing.
4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the
completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed
entrances and storefronts that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.
b. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084110 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
d. Water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas.
e. Failure of operating components.
2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by
testing of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts representing those indicated for this
Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in
construction.
1. Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand movements of supporting
structure including, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long-term
creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.
2. Failure also includes the following:
a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.
b. Glass breakage.
c. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.
d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.
e. Failure of operating units.
B. Air Infiltration: Test according to ASTM E 283 for infiltration as follows:
1. Fixed Framing and Glass Area:
a. Maximum air leakage of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure differential of 1.57
lbf/sq. ft.
2. Entrance Doors:
a. Pair of Doors: Maximum air leakage of 1.0 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure
differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft..
b. Single Doors: Maximum air leakage of 0.5 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure
differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft..
C. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test according to ASTM E 331 as follows:
1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested
according to a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind-load
design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft..
D. Energy Performance: Certify and label energy performance according to NFRC as follows:
1. Storefront Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have
U-factor of not more than 0.37 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F as determined according to
NFRC 100. Provide Low-E 366.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084110 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
2. Entrance Door Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas shall
have U-factor of not more than 0.43 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F as determined according to
NFRC 100. Provide Low-E 366.
3. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have a solar heat gain
coefficient of no greater than 0.35 as determined according to NFRC 200.
4. Condensation Resistance: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have an NFRC-certified
condensation resistance rating of no less than 25 as determined according to NFRC 500.
E. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface
temperature changes:
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Kawneer Trifab
VersaGlaze 451-T-VG Thermal framing with Kawneer Series AA 425 Thermal Entrance Doors
or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Cardinal
2. EFCO Corporation.
3. TRACO.
4. Vistawall.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain all components of aluminum-framed entrance and storefront
system, including framing, spandrel panels, venting windows, and accessories, from single
manufacturer.
2.3 FRAMING
A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of
thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
1. Construction: Thermally broken.
2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides.
3. Glazing Plane: Front.
4. Finish: Kawneer Permaflour 70% PVDF, AAMA 2605, Flouropolymer.
a. Color to be determined by architect from manufacturer’s full range.
5. Fabrication Method: Field-fabricated stick system.
B. Backer Plates: Manufacturer's standard, continuous backer plates for framing members, if not
integral, where framing abuts adjacent construction.
C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with
nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
D. Materials:
1. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
indicated.
a. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209.
b. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084110 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
c. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429/B 429M.
d. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.
2. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer
complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation
and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in
SSPC-SP COM, and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.
a. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
b. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.
c. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.
2.4 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS
A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation.
1. Door Construction: 2-1/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch-thick,
extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with
reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate
concealed tie rods.
a. Thermal Construction: High-performance plastic connectors separate aluminum
members exposed to the exterior from members exposed to the interior.
2. Door Design:
a. Vertical Stile: 5 inch
b. Top Rail: 4 inch
c. Bottom Rail: 10 inch
3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed
gaskets.
2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE
A. General: Provide entrance door hardware for each entrance door to comply with requirements
in this Section.
1. Entrance Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and
products equivalent in function and comparable in quality to named products.
2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of
operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated.
3. Opening-Force Requirements:
a. Egress Doors: Not more than 15 lbf to release the latch and not more than 30 lbfto
set the door in motion and not more than 15 lbf to open the door to its minimum
required width.
b. Accessible Interior Doors: Not more than 5 lbf to fully open door.
B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive
qualities of each type of entrance door hardware are indicated in "Entrance Door Hardware
Sets" Article. Products are identified by using entrance door hardware designations as follows:
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084110 - 5
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for
each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements.
Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in "Entrance Door Hardware Sets" Article.
2. References to BHMA Standards: Provide products complying with these standards and
requirements for description, quality, and function.
C. Pivot Hinges: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1.
1. Offset-Pivot Hinges: Provide top, bottom, and intermediate offset pivots at each door
leaf.
D. Mortise Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1.
E. Automatic and Self-Latching Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1.
F. Panic Exit Devices: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1, listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing
according to UL 305.
G. Cylinders: As specified in Section 08710 "Door Hardware."
H. Strikes: Provide strike with black-plastic dust box for each latch or lock bolt; fabricated for
aluminum framing.
I. Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6.
J. Closers: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1, with accessories required for a complete installation, sized as
required by door size, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use; adjustable to
comply with field conditions and requirements for opening force.
K. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components.
1. Compression Type: Made of ASTM D 2000, molded neoprene, or ASTM D 2287, molded
PVC.
L. Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard exterior-door bottom sweep with concealed
fasteners on mounting strip.
M. Silencers: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1.
N. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21, raised thresholds beveled with a slope of not more than 1:2, with
maximum height of 1/2 inch.
2.6 GLAZING
A. Provide manufacturer’s 1” double glazing (3/16” glass thickness), Superspacer, argon filled
cavities, clear, sealed insulated glazing. IGCC number shall appear on the space of the glass
unit. All insulated glass units shall conform to ASTM E774-88 Class C specifications.
1. All glazing shall be PPG Solarban 60 LowE on one interior surface of the glazing.
B. Safety glazing shall be clear, tempered, ¼” thick conforming to ASTM specification 1048-85
Kind FT, Class 1, Quality Q3 (glazing select).
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084110 - 6
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
C. Glazing tape as required for installation of wet-glazed insulated glass units shall be pre-
shimmed, self-adhesive polyisobutylene tape 1/8”x3/8” or as required to properly install the
work. Tape shall be Tremco 440 by the Tremco Corp., PTI 606 Architectural Sealant Tape by
Protective Treatments, or approved equal.
D. Cleaners, as required for glazing tape installation, shall be recommended by the tape
manufacturer.
E. Setting blocks shall be of sufficient height to provide a horizontal and true bearing for the
glazing assembly. Setting blocks shall be a minimum of 4” long and 1” wide and shall conform
to ASTM C864-84.
F. Sealant for cap beads on glazing shall be a one part silicone sealant conforming to ASTM C920
Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, uses NT, M, G and A. Sealant shall be Dow Corning 795 as
manufactured by the Dow Corning Corporation or approved equal.
G. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of black,
resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers.
H. Glazing Sealants: As recommended by manufacturer.
I. Sealants shall have a VOC content of less than 250 g/L.
2.7 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining,
nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from
thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.
2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.
B. Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors with minimum adjustment of 1 inch that accommodate
fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with adjoining materials
and recommended by manufacturer.
1. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel
inserts complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M requirements.
C. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding
flashing compatible with adjacent materials.
D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12
requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat.
2.8 FABRICATION
A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.
B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of
finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or
grinding.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084110 - 7
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:
1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.
2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.
3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.
4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to
maintain required glazing edge clearances.
5. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior.
6. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest
extent possible.
D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.
E. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and
for installing entrance door hardware.
1. At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops.
2. At interior doors, provide silencers at stops to prevent metal-to-metal contact. Install
three silencers on strike jamb of single-door frames and two silencers on head of frames
for pairs of doors.
F. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware.
1. At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding-type weather stripping retained in adjustable
strip and mortised into door edge.
2. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms.
G. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest
extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying
finishes.
H. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop
Drawings.
2.9 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of
1.5 mils. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion
coating, and applying and baking finish.
1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084110 - 8
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Do not install damaged components.
3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.
5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic
deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints.
6. Seal perimeter and other joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.
B. Metal Protection:
1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by
painting contact surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer for this purpose
or by installing nonconductive spacers.
2. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by
painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
C. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Section 07920 "Joint
Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.
D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.
E. Install operable units level and plumb, securely anchored, and without distortion. Adjust
weather-stripping contact and hardware movement to produce proper operation.
F. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.
1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather
stripping.
2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door
hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using
concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.
3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts to comply with the
following maximum tolerances:
1. Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet.
2. Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet.
3. Alignment:
a. Where surfaces abut in line or are separated by reveal or protruding element up to
1/2 inch wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch.
b. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element from 1/2 to 1 inch
wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/8 inch.
c. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element of 1 inch wide or
more, limit offset from true alignment to 1/4 inch.
4. Location: Limit variation from plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/2 inch over total length.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084110 - 9
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
END OF SECTION 084110
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084110 - 10
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 085413 - FIBERGLASS WINDOWS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Section Includes
A. Polymer Arcade 63 CW windows.
B. Configurations of windows required: fixed, in-swing casement, in-swing hopper, in-swing dual
action.
1.2 References
A. Publications listed below are part of this specification to the extent they are referenced. When
publications are cited in these specifications by use of shortened names or by standard
number alone, it must be understood that reference is made to the full publication and edition
as listed here.
B. AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440-08/12: North American Fenestration
Standard/Specification for windows, doors, and skylights (use appropriate specifications
depending on certification for each product type).
C. NFRC: National Fenestration Rating:
D. 100: Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product U-Factors
E. 200: Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Solar Heat Gain Coefficient and Visible
Transmittance at Normal Incidence
F. 500: Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Condensation Resistance Values
G. E 90-09: Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission
Loss of Building Partitions and Elements
H. E 413: Classification for Rating Sound Insulation
I. E 1332: Standard Classification for Rating Outdoor-Indoor Sound Attenuation
J. E 2235-04 (2012): Standard Test Method for Determination of Decay Rates for Use in Sound
Insulation Test Methods
K. E 2190: Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance Evaluation.
L. ANSI Z97.1-2015, CPSC 16 CRF 1201 (1977), & CAN/CGSB 12.1-M90 (1990)
M. City of New York Department of Health Window Falls Prevention Program, Chapter 12-11,
Specifications for Window Guards for Other Than Double Hung Windows
N. American Society of Civil Engineers: ASCE 7-10 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and
Other Structures, ASCE/SEI 2010
1.3 Performance Requirements for CW class windows:
A. Windows shall meet a rating of CW – DP 50 specifications in accordance with
ANSI/AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2/A440-08/12.
B. Window Air Leakage, ASTM E 283: Window air leakage when tested at 1.57psf, shall be 0.05
cfm/ft2, or less.
C. Window Water Penetration, ASTM E 547 and ASTM E 331: No water penetration through
window when tested under static pressure of 4.59psf.
D. Thermal Performance: Windows have been tested in accordance with the NFRC. The
products were evaluated in full compliance with NFRC requirements. The windows, including
glass and Polymer framing, shall have a thermal transmittance of:
E. U-factor (Btu/hr/ft2/°F):
1. Maximum center-of-glazing U-value: 0.176.
POLYMER WINDOWS 085350 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
2. Maximum frame U-value: 0.211.
F. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.467.
1. SHGC: 0.467.
2. VT: [ ].
1.4 Thermal Movement
A. Allow for thermal movement of the window based on site mean temperature +/- 70 F,
window/element size and coefficient of linear expansion of Polymer.
1. If non-white windows are chosen, allow for thermal movement of the window based on
solar-heat absorption.
1.5 Acoustical Performance
B. Windows shall meet or exceed requirements of OITC, when tested in accordance to ASTM E
1332; or STC, when tested according to ASTM E 90. The windows, including glass and
Polymer framing, shall have an acoustical performance of:
1. Fixed window: STC [ ], OITC [ ].
2. Operable windows: STC [ ], OITC [ ].
1.6 Submittals
A. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's shop drawings, indicating dimensions, construction,
component connections and locations, anchorage methods and locations, hardware locations,
and installation details.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, including installation instructions
C. Samples:
1. Submit color samples displaying manufacturer’s standard options and finishes.
1.7 Quality Assurance
A. Mockup:
1. Provide mock up to determine acceptability of window installation methods], [for field
testing window performance requirements.
2. Field testing, if required by the Architect or Owner, shall be conducted in accordance with
AAMA 502-08
3. Approved mockup shall represent minimum quality required for the Work.
4. Approved mockup shall remain in place within the Work if approved by architect.
1.8 Delivery
A. A temporary covering shall protect exposed surfaces after completing fabrication of products.
B. Deliver in manufacturer’s original packaging with labels intact.
POLYMER WINDOWS 085350 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1.9 Storage and Handling
A. Products are heavy and fragile. Special care, sufficient manpower, tools, and equipment shall
be used for unloading, transporting, warehousing, and installing the products. Two forklifts
should be used to unload container on job site.
B. Industrial straps (at least 5,000 lbs.) MUST be used to unload large pallets.
C. Store window units in an upright position in a clean and dry storage area above ground to
protect from weather.
D. Cover materials with tarpaulins or plastic hung on frames to provide air circulation and prevent
contaminants from contacting polymer.
E. Remove all paper type wrappings and interleaving that are wet or which could become wet
when unloading materials.
F. Glass must never be stored or transported in a horizontal/flat orientation.
G. Store crated glass in a cool, dry, and well-ventilated area where it will not be subject to rain or
direct sun.
H. Minimize handling by scheduling shipments by floors and by initially locating crated products
as close to their installation as possible.
I. Use mechanized window handling and installation equipment with vacuum suction cups for
windows heavier than 150 lbs.
J. For a more information about storage and handling windows, refer to the complete and current
instructions are available at https://www.intuswindows.com/support-documents/
1.10 INTUS Windows limited warranty*:
A. The products supplied by Seller shall be free from material defects, in material and
workmanship, for a period of 10 from the date of substantial completion of the project.
B. Clear insulating glass with stainless steel or warm edge spacers is warranted against seal failure
resulting in visible obstruction through the glass for 20 years from the SOW date under the
normal use conditions. Glass is warranted against stress cracks caused by manufacturing
defects for one (1) year from the SOW date
C. The laminated glass is warranted to be free of defects in materials and workmanship for
products which use PVB interlayer which are warranted for a period of five (5) years, from the
SOW date.
D. The polymer white profiles without laminate will resist cracking, peeling, chalking, blistering,
flaking, and significant ultraviolet discoloration (greater than 6 Delta E) caused by natural
environmental atmospheric conditions for the period of five (5) years from the SOW date.
E. The polymer laminated exterior finishes (using Renolit EXOFOL FX films) will resist cracking,
peeling, chalking, delaminating, blistering, flaking, and significant ultraviolet discoloration
(greater than 6 Delta E) caused by natural environmental atmospheric conditions for the period
of 20 years.
F. Non-glass components are warranted to be free from manufacturing defects for 5 years from
the SOW date
*The following limited warranty is subject to conditions and exclusions. There are certain conditions or
applications over which INTUS Windows has no control. Defect or problems as a result of such conditions
or applications are not the responsibility of INTUS Windows. For a full INTUS Windows limited warranty,
refer to the complete and current warranty information which is available at
https://www.intuswindows.com/support-documents/#9-warranty.
POLYMER WINDOWS 085350 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Manufacturer
INTUS Windows: 2720 Prosperity Ave Suite 400-1, Fairfax, Virginia 22031. 1-888-380-9940.
www.INTUSWindows.com.
2.2 Materials
A. Window system: Arcade 63 CW, fixed, in-swing casement, in-swing hopper, [in-swing dual
action window.
B. Minimum Outside Nominal Wall Thickness:
1. Primary frame and sash extrusions exterior walls: 0.106” (2.7mm)
2. Secondary extrusions (e.g. glazing stops and closures): 0.059” (1.5mm)
C. Face dimensions (nominal): as indicated on Architectural Drawings.
D. The frames feature accessory grooves which allow for snap-in attachment of Polymer nailing
flange, trim profile(s) and mulled window joint covers.
E. Window Sash and Frame shall be configured to receive glazing beads (stops) that snap into
the interior side of the insulating glass.
F. Reinforcement:
1. Galvanized steel shall be in size, configuration, and location within the window as
indicated in the test reports and INTUS Windows Arcade Reinforcement instructions.
G. Weatherseals:
1. Co-extruded polymer replaceable weatherseals:
a. Shapes, designs, and thickness as needed to satisfy performance requirements
b. Standard color: black
H. Glass:
1. Glass shall comply with requirements of AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101.I.S.2/A440-05, Section
10.2
2. Insulating glass panels shall have an overall nominal thickness of 0.94” (24mm) – 1.575”
(40mm)
3. Glazing type: float glass, tempered.
4. Glass type: low-e coated.
5. Filling: Argon
6. Spacer: Warm edge spacer
POLYMER WINDOWS 085350 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
2.3 Hardware
A. Provide manufacturer’s standard single handle turn-tilt multi-point locking system. Locking
points interact with a manually operated handle to bring window sashes into a turn or a tilt
position.
B. Standard hardware is used for securing window sashes and to position them in different
ventilation positions. Normally it is necessary to overcome the counter force of a seal when
closing. Any other type of usage is not in accordance with the intended application. Windows
for special applications (i.e. burglar-resistance or for installation in humid conditions / in
environments with corrosive atmospheric substances) require special fittings with separately
agreed performance criteria, designed for the particular application.
C. Handle: Provide standard handle. Standard Color: White, Silver, Titanium, Bronze, Brown
D. Limiters: 4″ limiter without friction; 4″ limiter with friction
2.4 Fasteners
E. Exposed fasteners shall be selected to prevent galvanic reaction with any reinforcement
materials fastened.
F. Above criteria is applicable to screws used to secure internal reinforcement and to fasteners
used in window mulling connections, if required.
G. Avoid exposed fasteners to greatest extent possible.
H. Where exposed fasteners are unavoidable in finished surfaces, use flathead countersunk
Phillips head screws.
I. Installation anchors must be approved by the responsible engineer/architect for the project.
2.5 Insect Screen
A. Aluminum frame profile with fiberglass net.
B. Frame finish: to match the exterior window frame finish.
C. Net finish: grey
D. Shipped separately, installed by the client.
E. Insect screens are mounted on the outside of the window. They must be removable from the
inside.
2.6 Installation accessories:
A. Mounting brackets and screws
2.7 Finish
A. Application of laminated color foils from RENOLIT shall be performed under specification
issued by RENOLIT and INTUS Windows
B. All exterior laminates shall be RENOLIT FX grade.
C. The laminated surface shall be uniform and free from streaks, blisters, sags, or other surface
imperfections
D. Standard Colors: White, Dark Bronze, Smooth Black, Warm Stone, Anodized Silver
E. Protection:
1. Provide film to protect exposed finished surfaces during shipment, storage, and installation
whenever possible
2. Film shall not affect factory finish after finished component is installed and film is stripped,
no residue, adhesive, or film covering, visual non-uniformity or other deleterious effects or
substances shall remain on surfaces
3. Factory applied protective film must be removed immediately after installation
4. When cleaning agents/paint etc. are applied to the building the windows must be protected
POLYMER WINDOWS 085350 - 5
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
Part 3 Execution
3.1 Examination
A. Site Verification of Conditions: Before installation, examine window openings and adjacent
building structure where windows will be applied for conditions that will prevent proper
execution of this portion of Work and endanger permanency. Do not proceed with installation
until defects have been corrected.
B. Verify sealant compatibility and adhesion to Polymer in conjunction with sealant manufacturer.
C. Acceptance of Condition: Beginning installation confirms acceptance of existing conditions.
3.2 Installation
A. General Requirements:
B. Comply with manufacturer’s instruction and recommendations for installation of work.
C. Do not erect warped, bowed, deformed, or otherwise damaged or defaced members. Replace
materials that are damaged during installation as directed.
D. Set units level, plumb, and true to line, with uniform joints. Support units on shims and secure
in place by approved installation anchors/fasteners that properly engage into supporting
structure.
E. Insulation must be used around the perimeter of the window in accordance with shop drawings
and the insulation manufacturer’s guidelines. Insulation must allow for expansion and
contraction of the installed window.
F. Flashing and other materials used around window opening shall be corrosion-resistant, non-
staining, non-bleeding, and compatible with adjoining materials.
G. Erection Tolerances:
1. Variations from Plumb: +/- 1/8” maximum in window height
2. Variations from Level: +/- 1/8” maximum in 10’ run, non-cumulative
3.3 Field Quality Control
A. Field Check for Water Leakage:
1. Newly installed fenestration product(s) shall be field tested in accordance with AAMA
502-12, "Voluntary Specification for Field Testing of Newly Installed Fenestration
Products."
2. AAMA 502-12 test shall be performed during construction, prior to an issuance of the
building occupancy permit, but no later than six months after installation of the
fenestration products.
3. Architect will determine the quantity and type(s) of window(s) to be tested.
4. In case of water penetration take corrective action and re-test as necessary until the
problem is resolved.
5. Default field test conditions are not the same as NAFS requirements for lab testing
6. Unless otherwise specified, water test shall be conducted at a static test pressure equal
or less to 2/3 of the tested and rated laboratory performance per AAMA/WDMA/CSA
101/I.S. 2/A440.
7. CW class windows shall be tested to a complete four-cycle water penetration resistance
test in accordance with ASTM E547. Each complete cycle shall consist of 5 minutes with
the pressure applied and 1 minute with the pressure released, during which the water
spray is continuously applied. The total test duration shall be a minimum of 24 minutes.
8. AW class windows shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E331. The test duration
shall be 15 minutes.
POLYMER WINDOWS 085350 - 6
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
9. Unless otherwise specified the air test shall be conducted at 1.5 times of the tested and
rated laboratory performance per AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S. 2/A440. Or minimum
window performance grade rating as per AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S. 2/A440.
3.4 Adjusting
A. Weatherseal contact shall be checked and any required final hardware adjustment made for
proper operation and performance of units.
B. Adjustments/maintenance should be made at least once per year.
3.5 Cleaning
A. Remove visible labels and adhesive residue according to manufacturer’s instruction.
B. Clean completed system in compliance with manufacturer’s recommendations, inside and out,
promptly after erection and installation of glass and sealants. Remove excess glazing and joint
sealants, dirt, and other substances from finished surfaces promptly after erection.
C. Remove protective material from prefinished surfaces.
D. Wash down exposed surfaces using a solution of mild detergent in warm water applied with
soft, clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean.
3.6 Protection
A. Institute protective measures and other precautions needed to assure Work will be without
damage or deterioration, other than normal weathering, at time of acceptance.
B. Protect windows from damage by chemicals, solvents, paint or other construction operations
that may cause damage.
END OF SECTION 085350
POLYMER WINDOWS 085350 - 7
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
POLYMER WINDOWS 085350 - 8
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL - NORTH COMMONS 90 % CD Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 Aug 16, 2019
SECTION 087100 – DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes commercial door hardware for the following:
1. Swinging doors.
2. Sliding doors.
3. Other doors to the extent indicated.
B. Door hardware includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following:
1. Mechanical door hardware.
2. Electromechanical door hardware.
3. Automatic operators.
4. Cylinders specified for doors in other sections.
C. Related Sections:
1. Division 08 Section “Door Hardware Schedule”.
2. Division 08 Section “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames”.
3. Division 08 Section “Flush Wood Doors”.
4. Division 08 Section “Automatic Door Operators”.
5. Division 28 Section “Access Control Hardware”.
D. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having
Jurisdiction.
1. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities.
2. ICC/IBC - International Building Code.
3. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
4. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.
5. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.
6. NFPA 105 - Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies.
7. UL/ULC and CSA C22.2 – Standards for Automatic Door Operators Used on Fire and
Smoke Barrier Doors and Systems of Doors.
8. State Building Codes, Local Amendments.
E. Standards: All hardware specified herein shall comply with the following industry standards:
1. ANSI/BHMA Certified Product Standards - A156 Series
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL - NORTH COMMONS 90 % CD Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 Aug 16, 2019
2. UL10C – Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets including installation details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operational descriptions and
finishes.
B. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication
and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door
Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness,
hand, function, and finish of door hardware.
1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and
Format for the Hardware Schedule."
2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating
complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Organize door
hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3.
Submittals that do not follow the same format and order as the Door Hardware Sets will
be rejected and subject to resubmission.
3. Content: Include the following information:
a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware
item.
b. Manufacturer of each item.
c. Fastenings and other pertinent information.
d. Location of door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor
plans and in door and frame schedule.
e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.
f. Mounting locations for door hardware.
g. Door and frame sizes and materials.
h. Warranty information for each product.
4. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date,
particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of
other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data,
Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information
essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule.
C. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified access control hardware indicating the following:
1. Wiring Diagrams: Upon receipt of approved schedules, submit detailed system wiring
diagrams for power, signaling, monitoring, communication, and control of the access
control system electrified hardware. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and
field-installed wiring. Include the following:
a. Elevation diagram of each unique access controlled opening showing
location and interconnection of major system components with respect to
their placement in the respective door openings.
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL - NORTH COMMONS 90 % CD Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 Aug 16, 2019
b. Complete (risers, point-to-point) access control system block wiring
diagrams.
c. Wiring instructions for each electronic component scheduled herein.
2. Electrical Coordination: Coordinate with related sections the voltages and wiring details
required at electrically controlled and operated hardware openings.
D. Keying Schedule: After a keying meeting with the owner has taken place prepare a separate
keying schedule detailing final instructions. Submit the keying schedule in electronic format.
Include keying system explanation, door numbers, key set symbols, hardware set numbers and
special instructions. Owner must approve submitted keying schedule prior to the ordering of
permanent cylinders/cores.
E. Informational Submittals:
1. Product Test Reports: Indicating compliance with cycle testing requirements, based on
evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a
qualified independent testing agency.
F. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturers operating and maintenance
manuals for each item comprising the complete door hardware installation in quantity as
required in Division 01, Closeout Submittals.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Engage qualified manufacturers with a minimum 5 years of
documented experience in producing hardware and equipment similar to that indicated for this
Project and that have a proven record of successful in-service performance.
B. Installer Qualifications: A minimum 3 years documented experience installing both standard and
electrified door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project
and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
C. Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Experienced commercial door hardware distributors with
a minimum 5 years documented experience supplying both mechanical and electromechanical
hardware installations comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this
Project. Supplier recognized as a factory direct distributor by the manufacturers of the primary
materials with a warehousing facility in Project's vicinity. Supplier to have on staff a certified
Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available during the course of the Work to consult
with Contractor, Architect, and Owner concerning both standard and electromechanical door
hardware and keying.
D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware specified in this section from
a single source unless otherwise indicated.
1. Electrified modifications or enhancements made to a source manufacturer's product line
by a secondary or third party source will not be accepted.
2. Provide electromechanical door hardware from the same manufacturer as mechanical
door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL - NORTH COMMONS 90 % CD Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 Aug 16, 2019
E. Each unit to bear third party permanent label demonstrating compliance with the referenced
standards.
F. Keying Conference: Conduct conference to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section
"Project Meetings." Keying conference to incorporate the following criteria into the final keying
schedule document:
1. Function of building, purpose of each area and degree of security required.
2. Plans for existing and future key system expansion.
3. Requirements for key control storage and software.
4. Installation of permanent keys, cylinder cores and software.
5. Address and requirements for delivery of keys.
G. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct coordination conference in compliance with requirements in
Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier(s),
Installer(s), and Contractor(s) to review proper methods and the procedures for receiving,
handling, and installing door hardware.
1. Prior to installation of door hardware, conduct a project specific training meeting to
instruct the installing contractors' personnel on the proper installation and adjustment of
their respective products. Product training to be attended by installers of door hardware
(including electromechanical hardware) for aluminum, hollow metal and wood doors.
Training will include the use of installation manuals, hardware schedules, templates and
physical product samples as required.
2. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in, power supply connections, and other
preparatory work performed by other trades.
3. Review sequence of operation narratives for each unique access controlled opening.
4. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials.
5. Review the required inspecting, testing, commissioning, and demonstration procedures
H. At completion of installation, provide written documentation that components were applied to
manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and according to approved schedule.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up and shelving for door hardware
delivered to Project site. Do not store electronic access control hardware, software or
accessories at Project site without prior authorization.
B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware
Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.
C. Deliver, as applicable, permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access control credentials, software
and related accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight package service.
Instructions for delivery to the Owner shall be established at the "Keying Conference".
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other
work specified to be factory prepared for installing standard and electrified hardware. Check
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL - NORTH COMMONS 90 % CD Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 Aug 16, 2019
Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and
installing hardware to comply with indicated requirements.
B. Door Hardware and Electrical Connections: Coordinate the layout and installation of scheduled
electrified door hardware and related access control equipment with required connections to
source power junction boxes, low voltage power supplies, detection and monitoring hardware,
and fire and detection alarm systems.
C. Door and Frame Preparation: Doors and corresponding frames are to be prepared, reinforced
and pre-wired (if applicable) to receive the installation of the specified electrified, monitoring,
signaling and access control system hardware without additional in-field modifications.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements. Special warranties specified
in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of
the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties
made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Warranty Period: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer(s), agreeing to repair or replace
components of standard and electrified door hardware that fails in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period after final acceptance by the Owner. Failures include, but are
not limited to, the following:
1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage.
2. Faulty operation of the hardware.
3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.
4. Electrical component defects and failures within the systems operation.
C. Standard Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise
indicated.
D. Special Warranty Periods:
1. Ten years for mortise locks and latches.
2. Five years for exit hardware.
3. Ten years for manual surface door closer bodies.
4. Five years for motorized electric latch retraction exit devices.
5. Two years for electromechanical door hardware.
1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and
maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and
removal and replacement of door hardware.
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 5
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL - NORTH COMMONS 90 % CD Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 Aug 16, 2019
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE
A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in Door Hardware
Sets and each referenced section that products are to be supplied under.
B. Designations: Requirements for quantity, item, size, finish or color, grade, function, and other
distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Sets at
the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:
1. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for
each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing requirements.
Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule.
C. Substitutions: Requests for substitution and product approval for inclusive mechanical and
electromechanical door hardware in compliance with the specifications must be submitted in
writing and in accordance with the procedures and time frames outlined in Division 01,
Substitution Procedures. Approval of requests is at the discretion of the architect, owner, and
their designated consultants.
2.2 HANGING DEVICES
A. Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1 certified butt hinges with number of hinge knuckles and other
options as specified in the Door Hardware Sets.
1. Quantity: Provide the following hinge quantity:
a. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches.
b. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches.
c. Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches.
d. For doors with heights more than 120 inches, provide 4 hinges, plus 1 hinge
for every 30 inches of door height greater than 120 inches.
2. Hinge Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, with hinge widths sized for
door thickness and clearances required:
a. Widths up to 3’0”: 4-1/2” standard weight.
b. Sizes over 3’0” or high frequency: 5” heavy weight.
3. Hinge Base Material: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:
a. Exterior Doors: Heavy weight, non-ferrous, ball bearing or oil impregnated
bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate standard weight.
b. Interior Doors: steel, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges unless
Hardware Sets indicate non-ferrous.
4. Hinge Options: Comply with the following:
a. Non-removable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened
into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for
the all out-swinging lockable doors.
5. Manufacturers:
a. McKinney Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (MK).
B. Continuous Geared Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.26 Grade 1-600 certified continuous geared
hinge. with minimum 0.120-inch thick extruded 6060 T6 aluminum alloy hinge leaves and a
minim um overall width of 4 inches. Hinges are non-handed, reversible and fabricated to
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 6
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL - NORTH COMMONS 90 % CD Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 Aug 16, 2019
template screw locations. Factory trim hinges to suit door height and prepare for electrical cut-
outs.
1. Manufacturers:
a. McKinney Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (MK).
b. Pemko Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (PE).
2.3 POWER TRANSFER DEVICES
A. Electrified Quick Connect Transfer Hinges: Provide electrified transfer hinges with Molex™
standardized plug connectors and sufficient number of concealed wires (up to 12) to
accommodate the electrified functions specified in the Door Hardware Sets. Connectors plug
directly to through-door wiring harnesses for connection to electric locking devices and power
supplies. Wire nut connections are not acceptable.
1. Manufacturers:
a. McKinney Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (MK) -
QC (# wires) Option.
B. Electric Door Wire Harnesses: Provide electric/data transfer wiring harnesses with standardized
plug connectors to accommodate up to twelve (12) wires. Connectors plug directly to through-
door wiring harnesses for connection to electric locking devices and power supplies. Provide
sufficient number and type of concealed wires to accommodate electric function of specified
hardware. Provide a connector for through-door electronic locking devices and from hinge to
junction box above the opening. Wire nut connections are not acceptable. Determine the length
required for each electrified hardware component for the door type, size and construction,
minimum of two per electrified opening.
1. Provide one each of the following tools as part of the base bid contract:
a. McKinney Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (MK) -
Electrical Connecting Kit: QC-R001.
b. McKinney Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (MK) -
Connector Hand Tool: QC-R003.
2. Manufacturers:
a. McKinney Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (MK) –
QC-C Series.
2.4 DOOR OPERATING TRIM
A. Flush Bolts and Surface Bolts: ANSI/BHMA A156.3 and A156.16, Grade 1, certified.
1. Flush bolts to be furnished with top rod of sufficient length to allow bolt retraction device
location approximately six feet from the floor.
2. Furnish dust proof strikes for bottom bolts.
3. Surface bolts to be minimum 8” in length and U.L. listed for labeled fire doors and U.L.
listed for windstorm components where applicable.
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 7
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL - NORTH COMMONS 90 % CD Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 Aug 16, 2019
4. Provide related accessories (mounting brackets, strikes, coordinators, etc.) as required
for appropriate installation and operation.
5. Manufacturers:
a. Rockwood Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (RO).
B. Door Push Plates and Pulls: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 certified door pushes and pulls of type and
design specified in the Hardware Sets. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as
required where conflicting hardware dictates.
1. Push/Pull Plates: Minimum .050 inch thick, size as indicated in hardware sets, with
beveled edges, secured with exposed screws unless otherwise indicated.
2. Door Pull and Push Bar Design: Size, shape, and material as indicated in the hardware
sets. Minimum clearance of 2 1/2-inches from face of door unless otherwise indicated.
3. Offset Pull Design: Size, shape, and material as indicated in the hardware sets. Minimum
clearance of 2 1/2-inches from face of door and offset of 90 degrees unless otherwise
indicated.
4. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as indicated in Hardware
Sets.
5. Manufacturers:
a. Rockwood Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (RO).
2.5 CYLINDERS AND KEYING
A. General: Cylinder manufacturer to have minimum (10) years experience designing secured
master key systems and have on record a published security keying system policy.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of keyed cylinder and keys from the same source
manufacturer as locksets and exit devices, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Cylinders: Original manufacturer cylinders complying with the following:
1. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and cams to suit hardware application.
2. Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised
trim ring.
3. Bored-Lock Type: Cylinders with tailpieces to suit locks.
4. Mortise and rim cylinder collars to be solid and recessed to allow the cylinder face to be
flush and be free spinning with matching finishes.
D. Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; finish face to match lockset; complying with the
following:
1. Removable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key, and for use with only
the core manufacturer's cylinder and door hardware. Provide removable core (small or
large format) as specified in Hardware Sets.
E. Patented Cylinders: ANSI/BHMA A156.5, Grade 1, certified patented cylinders employing a
utility patented and restricted keyway requiring the use of a patented key. Cylinders are to be
protected from unauthorized manufacture and distribution by manufacturer’s United States
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 8
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL - NORTH COMMONS 90 % CD Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 Aug 16, 2019
patents. Cylinders are to be factory keyed with owner having the ability for on-site original key
cutting.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Medeco (MC) - X4 Series.
F. Keying System: Each type of lock and cylinders to be factory keyed.
1. Conduct specified "Keying Conference" to define and document keying system
instructions and requirements.
2. Furnish factory cut, nickel-silver large bow permanently inscribed with a visual key control
number as directed by Owner.
3. New System: Key locks to a new key system as directed by the Owner.
G. Key Quantity: Provide the following minimum number of keys:
1. Change Keys per Cylinder: Three (3).
2. Master Keys (per Master Key Level/Group): Five (5).
3. Construction Keys (where required): Ten (10).
4. Construction Control Keys (where required): Two (2).
5. Permanent Control Keys (where required): Two (2).
H. Construction Keying: Provide construction master keyed cylinders.
I. Construction Keying: Provide temporary keyed construction cores.
J. Key Registration List (Bitting List):
1. Provide keying transcript list to Owner's representative in the proper format for importing
into key control software.
2. Provide transcript list in writing or electronic file as directed by the Owner.
K. Key Control Cabinet: Provide a key control system including envelopes, labels, and tags with
self-locking key clips, receipt forms, 3-way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent
markers, and standard metal cabinet. Key control cabinet shall have expansion capacity of
150% of the number of locks required for the project.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Lund Equipment (LU).
b. MMF Industries (MM).
c. Telkee (TK).
L. Key Control Software: Provide one network version of "Key Wizard" branded key management
software package that includes one year of technical support and upgrades to software at no
charge. Provide factory key system formatted for importing into “Key Wizard” software.
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 9
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL - NORTH COMMONS 90 % CD Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 Aug 16, 2019
2.6 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHING DEVICES
A. Mortise Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.13, Series 1000, Operational
Grade 1 certified. Locksets are to be manufactured with a corrosion resistant steel case and be
field-reversible for handing without disassembly of the lock body.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) – 8800FL Series.
B. Multi-Point Locksets: Vertical rod locking devices designed for openings requiring multiple
latching points within one locking mechanism. Rods are retracted by dual mounted outside lever
trim controls available in a variety of ANSI/BHMA operational functions. Option for single top
latching only eliminates the need for bottom strikes.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) – MP9800 Series.
b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 7000 Series.
C. Tubular Locksets:
1. Standard tubular locksets designed to fit ANSI standard 161 door prep without additional
through-bolt preps.
2. Manufacturers:
a. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) - RL Series.
2.7 AUXILIARY LOCKS
A. Mortise Deadlocks, Large Case: ANSI/BHMA A156.13, Series 1000, Grade 1, certified large
case mortise type deadlocks constructed of heavy gauge wrought corrosion resistant steel. One
piece stainless steel bolts with a 1" throw. Deadlocks to be products of the same source
manufacturer and keyway as other locksets.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) - 8800 Series.
2.8 LOCK AND LATCH STRIKES
A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with
curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise
indicated, and as follows:
1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by
manufacturer.
2. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim.
3. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Provide manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for
aluminum framing.
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 10
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL - NORTH COMMONS 90 % CD Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 Aug 16, 2019
4. Double-lipped strikes: For locks at double acting doors. Furnish with retractable stop for
rescue hardware applications.
B. Standards: Comply with the following:
1. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13.
2. Strikes for Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2.
3. Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA A156.36.
4. Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16.
2.9 CONVENTIONAL EXIT DEVICES
A. General Requirements: All exit devices specified herein shall meet or exceed the following
criteria:
1. At doors not requiring a fire rating, provide devices complying with NFPA 101 and listed
and labeled for "Panic Hardware" according to UL305. Provide proper fasteners as
required by manufacturer including sex nuts and bolts at openings specified in the
Hardware Sets.
2. Where exit devices are required on fire rated doors, provide devices complying with
NFPA 80 and with UL labeling indicating "Fire Exit Hardware". Provide devices with the
proper fasteners for installation as tested and listed by UL. Consult manufacturer’s
catalog and template book for specific requirements.
3. Except on fire rated doors, provide exit devices with hex key dogging device to hold the
pushbar and latch in a retracted position. Provide optional keyed cylinder dogging on
devices where specified in Hardware Sets.
4. Devices must fit flat against the door face with no gap that permits unauthorized dogging
of the push bar. The addition of filler strips is required in any case where the door light
extends behind the device as in a full glass configuration.
5. Electromechanical Options: Subject to same compliance standards and requirements as
mechanical exit devices, electrified devices to be of type and design as specified in
hardware sets. Include any specific controllers when conventional power supplies are not
sufficient to provide the proper inrush current.
6. Lever Operating Trim: Where exit devices require lever trim, furnish m anufacturer's heavy
duty escutcheon trim with threaded studs for thru-bolts.
a. Lock Trim Design: As indicated in Hardware Sets, provide finishes and
designs to match that of the specified locksets.
b. Where function of exit device requires a cylinder, provide a cylinder (Rim or
Mortise) as specified in Hardware Sets.
7. Vertical Rod Exit Devices: Where surface or concealed vertical rod exit devices are used
at interior openings, provide as less bottom rod (LBR) unless otherwise indicated.
Provide dust proof strikes where thermal pins are required to project into the floor.
8. Narrow Stile Applications: At doors constructed with narrow stiles, or as specified in
Hardware Sets, provide devices designed for maximum 2” wide stiles.
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 11
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL - NORTH COMMONS 90 % CD Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 Aug 16, 2019
9. Dummy Push Bar: Nonfunctioning push bar matching functional push bar.
10. Rail Sizing: Provide exit device rails factory sized for proper door width application.
11. Through Bolt Installation: For exit devices and trim as indicated in Door Hardware Sets.
B. Conventional Push Rail Exit Devices (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.3, Grade 1 certified panic
and fire exit hardware devices furnished in the functions specified in the Hardware Sets. Exit
device latch to be stainless steel, pullman type, with deadlock feature.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) - 7000 Series.
C. Tube Steel Removable Mullions: ANSI/BHMA A156.3 removable steel mullions with malleable-
iron top and bottom retainers and a primed paint finish.
1. Provide keyed removable feature where specified in the Hardware Sets.
2. Provide stabilizers and m ounting brackets as required.
3. Provide electrical quick connection wiring options as specified in the hardware sets.
4. Manufacturers:
a. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) - M200 Series.
2.10 DOOR CLOSERS
A. All door closers specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria:
1. General: Door closers to be from one manufacturer, matching in design and style, with
the same type door preparations and templates regardless of application or spring size.
Closers to be non-handed with full sized covers including installation and adjusting
information on inside of cover.
2. Standards: Closers to comply with UL-10C for Positive Pressure Fire Test and be U.L.
listed for use of fire rated doors.
3. Cycle Testing: Provide closers which have surpassed 15 million cycles in a test
witnessed and verified by UL.
4. Size of Units: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for sizing of door
closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of
use. Where closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the physically
handicapped, provide units complying with ANSI ICC/A117.1.
5. Closer Arms: Provide heavy duty, forged steel closer arms unless otherwise indicated in
Hardware Sets.
6. Closers shall not be installed on exterior or corridor side of doors; where possible install
closers on door for optimum aesthetics.
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 12
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL - NORTH COMMONS 90 % CD Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 Aug 16, 2019
7. Closer Accessories: Provide door closer accessories including custom templates, special
mounting brackets, spacers and drop plates as required for proper installation. Provide
through-bolt and security type fasteners as specified in the hardware sets.
B. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Unitrol): Unitrol arms to have door stop mechanism to absorb
dead stop shock on arm and top hinge. Hold-open arms to have a spring loaded mechanism in
addition to shock absorber assembly. Arms to be provided with rigid steel main arm and
secondary arm lengths proportional to the door width.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - Unitrol Series.
b. Norton Door Controls (NO) - Unitrol Series.
c. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) - Unitrol Series.
C. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Cam Action): ANSI/BHMA 156.4, Grade 1 certified surface
mounted, high efficiency door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6;
and fully operational adjustable according to door size, frequency of use, and opening force.
Closers to be of the cam and roller design, one piece cast aluminum silicon alloy body with
adjustable backcheck and independently controlled valves for closing sweep and latch speed.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Corbin Russwin (RU) - DC5000 Series.
b. Norton Door Controls (NO) - 2800ST Series.
c. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 422 Series.
2.11 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS
A. General: Door stops and holders to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware
Sets.
B. Door Stops and Bumpers: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 certified door stops and wall
bumpers. Provide wall bumpers, either convex or concave types with anchorage as indicated,
unless floor or other types of door stops are specified in Hardware Sets. Do not mount floor
stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall bumpers are not appropriate, provide
overhead type stops and holders.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Rockwood Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (RO).
C. Overhead Door Stops and Holders: ANSI/BHMA A156.6, Grade 1 certified overhead stops and
holders to be surface or concealed types as indicated in Hardware Sets. Track, slide, arm and
jamb bracket to be constructed of extruded bronze and shock absorber spring of heavy
tempered steel. Provide non-handed design with mounting brackets as required for proper
operation and function.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Rixson Door Controls (RF).
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 13
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL - NORTH COMMONS 90 % CD Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 Aug 16, 2019
b. Rockwood Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (RO).
c. Sargent Manufacturing (SA).
2.12 ARCHITECTURAL SEALS
A. General: Thresholds, weatherstripping, and gasket seals to be of type and design as specified
below or in the Hardware Sets. Provide continuous weatherstrip gasketing on exterior doors and
provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated. At exterior
applications provide non-corrosive fasteners and elsewhere where indicated.
B. Smoke Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by
a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke control
ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784.
1. Provide smoke labeled perimeter gasketing at all smoke labeled openings.
C. Fire Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings
indicated, based on testing according to UL-10C.
1. Provide intumescent seals as indicated to meet UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure
Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, and NPFA 252, Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door
Assemblies.
D. Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting
agency, for sound ratings indicated.
E. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily
replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.
F. Manufacturers:
1. Pemko Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (PE).
2.13 FABRICATION
A. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally
prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to
manufacturers recognized installation standards for application intended.
2.14 FINISHES
A. Standard: Designations used in the Hardware Sets and elsewhere indicate hardware finishes
complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.18, including coordination with traditional U.S. finishes
indicated by certain manufacturers for their products.
B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness,
and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified
by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 14
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL - NORTH COMMONS 90 % CD Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 Aug 16, 2019
C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine scheduled openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and
other conditions affecting performance.
B. Notify architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the door schedule, door types,
drawings and scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or conflicts have
been resolved in writing.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115 series.
B. Wood Doors: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115-W series.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install each item of mechanical and electromechanical hardware and access control equipment
to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and according to specifications.
1. Installers are to be trained and certified by the manufacturer on the proper installation
and adjustment of fire, life safety, and security products including: hanging devices;
locking devices; closing devices; and seals.
B. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable
publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations:
1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural
Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for
Wood Flush Doors."
3. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI A117.1
"Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities."
4. Provide blocking in drywall partitions where wall stops or other wall mounted hardware is
located.
C. Retrofitting: Install door hardware to comply with manufacturer's published templates and
written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into
surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage,
and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9
Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on
substrates involved.
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 15
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL - NORTH COMMONS 90 % CD Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 Aug 16, 2019
D. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with
requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
E. Storage: Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed.
Control the handling and installation of hardware items so that the completion of the work will
not be delayed by hardware losses before and after installation.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field Inspection: Supplier will perform a final inspection of installed door hardware and state in
report whether work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door
hardware is properly installed, operating and adjusted.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to
ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to
operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating
and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect all hardware stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. Protect exposed
hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. Install any and all hardware at the
latest possible time frame.
B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.
C. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper finish. Provide final protection and
maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of
owner occupancy.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain mechanical and
electromechanical door hardware.
3.8 DOOR HARDW ARE SETS
A. The hardware sets represent the design intent and direction of the owner and architect. They
are a guideline only and should not be considered a detailed hardware schedule.
Discrepancies, conflicting hardware and missing items should be brought to the attention of the
architect with corrections made prior to the bidding process. Omitted items not included in a
hardware set should be scheduled with the appropriate additional hardware required for proper
application and functionality.
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 16
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL - NORTH COMMONS 90 % CD Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 Aug 16, 2019
B. The supplier is responsible for handing and sizing all products and providing the correct option
for the appropriate door type and material where more than one is presented in the hardware
sets. Quantities listed are for each pair of doors, or for each single door.
C. Refer to Section 080671, Door Hardware Sets, for hardware sets.
END OF SECTION 087100
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 17
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL - NORTH COMMONS 90 % CD Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 Aug 16, 2019
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 18
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL - NORTH COMMONS 90 % CD Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 Aug 16, 2019
SECTION 080671 – DOOR HARDWARE SETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Refer to PART 1 in each of the specification sections listed in 3.1.C below.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE
A. Refer to “PART 3 – EXECUTION” for required specification sections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DOOR HARDWARE SETS
A. The door hardware sets represent the design intent and direction of the owner and architect. They are a
guideline only and should not be considered a detailed hardware schedule. Discrepancies, conflicting
hardware and missing items should be brought to the attention of the architect with corrections made
prior to the bidding process. Omitted items not included in a hardware set should be scheduled with the
appropriate additional hardware required for proper application and functionality.
B. The supplier is responsible for handing and sizing all products and providing the correct option for the
appropriate door type and material where more than one is presented in the hardware sets. Quantities
listed are for each pair of doors, or for each single door. GC is responsible for confirming quantities and
carrying costs for hardware and installation for all doors shown on the floor plans.
C. Products listed in the Door Hardware Sets must meet the requirements described in the specification
sections noted.
1. Section 08 71 00 – Door Hardware.
2. Section 08 71 13 – Automatic Door Operators.
3. Section 28 15 00 – Access Control Hardware Devices.
D. Manufacturer’s Abbreviations:
1. MK - McKinney
2. PE - Pemko
3. RO - Rockwood
4. AD - Adams Rite
5. YA - Yale
6. RU - Corbin Russwin
7. HS - HES
8. RF - Rixson
9. NO - Norton
10. SA - Sargent
11. HD - HID
12. SU - Securitron
DOOR HARDWARE SETS 087101 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL - NORTH COMMONS 90 % CD Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 Aug 16, 2019
Hardware Sets
Set: 1.0
Doors: 001
Description: Aluminum Pair Door with Card reader and Operator
2 Continuous Hinge BSPFM83SLF-HD1 EL-CEPTxBSP BSP PE 087100
1 Removable Mullion KRM200F 8' 600 YA 087100
1 Exit Device (exit only) 7100 B EO BSP YA 281500 ⚡
1 Exit Device (rim, fail secure) 7100F B P MO691F K625xCT7SL BSP YA 281500 ⚡
2 Cylinder complete/ permanent core as req'd BSP YA 087100
2 Concealed Overhead Stop 2-X36 630 RF 087100
1 Door Closer UNI7500 BSP NO 087100
1 Door Operator 6060/ 6070 BSP NO 087113 ⚡
1 Threshold to architect detail PE 087100
1 Gasketing S773BL PE 087100
2 Sweep 18061CNB PE 087100
2 ElectroLynx Harness - Frame QC-C1500 MK 087100 ⚡
2 ElectroLynx Harness - Door QC-CXXX (Size as required) MK 087100 ⚡
1 Wiring Diagram WD-SYSPK SA 281500
1 Switch 3287 SA 281500
1 Card Reader R10SE HD 281500
1 ADA Actuator 502/ 503 NO 087113 ⚡
1 Power Supply AQD6 SU 281500 ⚡
4 Kick Plates
1 Head rain divertor
Notes: The door shall be normally closed and locked.
Valid card read on ingress side will momentarily activate door switch or door switch at egress side will
momentarily retract latch of exit device while simultaneously engaging automatic operator. Depressing the push
bar of the exit device in the path of egress will activate the request to exit switch.
Free egress at all times.
In event of power failure or fire alarm the ingress trim will be locked.
Set: 2.0
Door: 002
Description: Aluminum Door with Card reader and Operator
1 Continuous Hinge BSPFM83SLF-HD1 EL-CEPTxBSP BSP PE 087100
1 Exit Device (exit only) 7100 B EO BSP YA 281500 ⚡
1 Exit Device (rim, fail secure) 7100F B P MO691F K625xCT7SL BSP YA 281500 ⚡
1 Cylinder complete/ permanent core as req'd BSP YA 087100
1 Concealed Overhead Stop 2-X36 630 RF 087100
1 Door Closer UNI7500 BSP NO 087100
1 Door Operator 6060/ 6070 BSP NO 087113 ⚡
1 Threshold to architect detail PE 087100
1 Gasketing S773BL PE 087100
1 Sweep 18061CNB PE 087100
1 ElectroLynx Harness - Frame QC-C1500 MK 087100 ⚡
1 ElectroLynx Harness - Door QC-CXXX (Size as required) MK 087100 ⚡
1 Wiring Diagram WD-SYSPK SA 281500
1 Switch 3287 SA 281500
1 Card Reader R10SE HD 281500
1 ADA Actuator 502/ 503 NO 087113 ⚡
DOOR HARDWARE SETS 087101 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL - NORTH COMMONS 90 % CD Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 Aug 16, 2019
1 Power Supply AQD6 SU 281500 ⚡
2 Kick Plates
1 Head rain divertor
Notes: The door shall be normally closed and locked.
Valid card read on ingress side will momentarily activate door switch or door switch at egress side will
momentarily retract latch of exit device while simultaneously engaging automatic operator. Depressing the push
bar of the exit device in the path of egress will activate the request to exit switch.
Free egress at all times.
In event of power failure or fire alarm the ingress trim will be locked.Doors: 106
Description: Fail Secure exit device - single - cont hinge
Set: 3.0
Doors: 002
Description: Aluminum Pair Doors with Operator
2 Continuous Hinge BSPFM83SLF-HD1 EL-CEPTxBSP BSP PE 087100
1 Removable Mullion KRM200F 8' 600 YA 087100
1 Exit Device (exit only) 7100 B EO BSP YA 281500 ⚡
1 Exit Device (rim, fail secure) 7100F B P MO691F K625xCT7SL BSP YA 281500 ⚡
2 Cylinder complete/ permanent core as req'd BSP YA 087100
2 Concealed Overhead Stop 2-X36 630 RF 087100
1 Door Closer UNI7500 BSP NO 087100
1 Door Operator 6060/ 6070 BSP NO 087113 ⚡
1 Threshold to architect detail PE 087100
1 Gasketing S773BL PE 087100
2 Sweep 18061CNB PE 087100
2 ElectroLynx Harness - Frame QC-C1500 MK 087100 ⚡
2 ElectroLynx Harness - Door QC-CXXX (Size as required) MK 087100 ⚡
1 Wiring Diagram WD-SYSPK SA 281500
1 Switch 3287 SA 281500
1 ADA Actuator 502/ 503 NO 087113 ⚡
1 Power Supply AQD6 SU 281500 ⚡
4 Kick Plates
1 Head rain diverter
Notes: The door shall be normally closed and locked.
Valid card read on ingress side will momentarily activate door switch or door switch at egress side will
momentarily retract latch of exit device while simultaneously engaging automatic operator. Depressing the push
bar of the exit device in the path of egress will activate the request to exit switch.
Free egress at all times.
In event of power failure or fire alarm the ingress trim will be locked.
Set: 4.0
Door: 004
Description: Aluminum Door with Operator
1 Continuous Hinge BSPFM83SLF-HD1 EL-CEPTxBSP BSP PE 087100
1 Exit Device (exit only) 7100 B EO BSP YA 281500 ⚡
1 Exit Device (rim, fail secure) 7100F B P MO691F K625xCT7SL BSP YA 281500 ⚡
1 Cylinder complete/ permanent core as req'd BSP YA 087100
1 Concealed Overhead Stop 2-X36 630 RF 087100
1 Door Closer UNI7500 BSP NO 087100
1 Door Operator 6060/ 6070 BSP NO 087113 ⚡
1 Threshold to architect detail PE 087100
1 Gasketing S773BL PE 087100
DOOR HARDWARE SETS 087101 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL - NORTH COMMONS 90 % CD Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 Aug 16, 2019 1 Sweep 18061CNB PE 087100
1 ElectroLynx Harness - Frame QC-C1500 MK 087100 ⚡
1 ElectroLynx Harness - Door QC-CXXX (Size as required) MK 087100 ⚡
1 Wiring Diagram WD-SYSPK SA 281500
1 Switch 3287 SA 281500
1 ADA Actuator 502/ 503 NO 087113 ⚡
1 Power Supply AQD6 SU 281500 ⚡
2 Kick Plates
1 Head rain diverter
Set: 5.0
Doors: 005, 006
Description: Exterior exit only exit device - single
3 Hinge TA314 FT BSP MK 0871001
1 Fail Secure Lock MOR4 8891FL K625xCT7SL REX LBM BSP YA 281500 ⚡
1 Exit Device (rim, fail secure) 7100 B MO691F K625xCT7SL BSP YA 281500 ⚡
1 Cylinder complete/ permanent core as req'd BSP YA 087100
1 Door Closer UNI7500 689 NO 087100
1 Gasketing 290APK x 2891APK PE 087100
1 ElectroLynx Harness - Frame QC-C1500 MK 087100 ⚡
1 ElectroLynx Harness - Door QC-CXXX (Size as required) MK 087100 ⚡
1 Switch 3287 SA 281500
1 Head rain diverter
Notes: The concealed switch will be connected to the security system and the door shall be normally closed and
locked from the exterior.
Exit Only exit device will have request to exit switch that will bypass door contact if connected.
Set: 6.0
Doors: 007
Description: Exterior exit only exit device - single
3 Hinge TA314 FT BSP MK 0871001
1 Fail Secure Lock MOR4 8891FL K625xCT7SL REX LBM BSP YA 281500 ⚡
1 Exit Device (rim, fail secure) 7100 B MO691F K625xCT7SL BSP YA 281500 ⚡
1 Cylinder complete/ permanent core as req'd BSP YA 087100
1 Door Closer UNI7500 689 NO 087100
1 Gasketing 290APK x 2891APK PE 087100
1 Head rain diverter
Set: 7.0
Door:008
Description: Exterior Aluminum Door with Operator
1 Continuous Hinge BSPFM83SLF-HD1 EL-CEPTxBSP BSP PE 087100
1 Exit Device (exit only) 7100 B EO BSP YA 281500 ⚡
1 Exit Device (rim, fail secure) 7100F B P MO691F K625xCT7SL BSP YA 281500 ⚡
1 Cylinder complete/ permanent core as req'd BSP YA 087100
1 Concealed Overhead Stop 2-X36 630 RF 087100
1 Door Closer UNI7500 BSP NO 087100
1 Door Operator 6060/ 6070 BSP NO 087113 ⚡
1 Threshold to architect detail PE 087100
1 Gasketing S773BL PE 087100
1 Sweep 18061CNB PE 087100
DOOR HARDWARE SETS 087101 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL - NORTH COMMONS 90 % CD Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 Aug 16, 2019
1 ElectroLynx Harness - Frame QC-C1500 MK 087100 ⚡
1 ElectroLynx Harness - Door QC-CXXX (Size as required) MK 087100 ⚡
1 Wiring Diagram WD-SYSPK SA 281500
1 Switch 3287 SA 281500
1 ADA Actuator 502/ 503 NO 087113 ⚡
1 Power Supply AQD6 SU 281500 ⚡
2 Kick Plates
1 Head rain diverter
Set: 8.0
Doors: 009
Description: Interior Aluminum Pair Doors with Operator
2 Continuous Hinge BSPFM83SLF-HD1 EL-CEPTxBSP BSP PE 087100
1 Removable Mullion KRM200F 8' 600 YA 087100
1 Exit Device (exit only) 7100 B EO BSP YA 281500 ⚡
1 Exit Device (rim, fail secure) 7100F B P MO691F K625xCT7SL BSP YA 281500 ⚡
2 Cylinder complete/ permanent core as req'd BSP YA 087100
2 Concealed Overhead Stop 2-X36 630 RF 087100
1 Door Closer UNI7500 BSP NO 087100
1 Door Operator 6060/ 6070 BSP NO 087113 ⚡
1 Gasketing S773BL PE 087100
2 ElectroLynx Harness - Frame QC-C1500 MK 087100 ⚡
2 ElectroLynx Harness - Door QC-CXXX (Size as required) MK 087100 ⚡
1 Wiring Diagram WD-SYSPK SA 281500
1 Switch 3287 SA 281500
1 ADA Actuator 502/ 503 NO 087113 ⚡
1 Power Supply AQD6 SU 281500 ⚡
4 Kick Plates
Notes: The door shall be normally closed and locked.
Valid card read on ingress side will momentarily activate door switch or door switch at egress side will
momentarily retract latch of exit device while simultaneously engaging automatic operator. Depressing the push
bar of the exit device in the path of egress will activate the request to exit switch.
Free egress at all times.
In event of power failure or fire alarm the ingress trim will be locked.
Set: 9.0
Doors: 010, 011
Description: Interior Closet pair
6 Hinge TA714 FT US26D MK 087100
2 Dummy Trim TCR4 RL255 626 YA 087100
2 Roller Latch 592/ 593 US26D RO 087100
2 Surface Overhead Stop 10-X36 630 RF 087100
Check with TCB to see if they want to be able to lock these closets
Set: 10.0
Door: 012
Description: Passage set with closer
3 Hinge TA714 FT US26D MK 087100
1 Passage Latch MOR4 8801FL 626 YA 087100
1 Surface Closer 2800ST/ P2800ST 689 NO 087100
1 Gasketing S773BL PE 087100
Check with TCB to see if they want this room to be lockable. Kick plates?
DOOR HARDWARE SETS 087101 - 5
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL - NORTH COMMONS 90 % CD Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 Aug 16, 2019
Set: 11.0
Doors: 013, 014
Description: Single privacy with closer
3 Hinge TA714 FT US26D MK 087100
1 Privacy Lock MOR4 8802FL IND 626 YA 087100
1 Surface Closer 2800ST/ P2800ST 689 NO 087100
1 Gasketing S773BL PE 087100
2 Kick Plates
Set: 12.0
Doors: 015, 023, 027, 028, 030, 033, 038, 039, 042,
Description: Passage set with closer
3 Hinge TA714 FT US26D MK 087100
1 Passage Latch MOR4 8801FL 626 YA 087100
1 Surface Closer 2800ST/ P2800ST 689 NO 087100
1 Gasketing S773BL PE 087100
1 Header rain diverter (039 only)
Set: 13.0
Doors: 016
Description: Private office
3 Hinge TA714 FT US26D MK 087100
1 Classroom or Office Lock MOR4 8809FL K625xCT7SL 626 YA 087100
1 Cylinder complete/ permanent core as req'd 626 RU 087100
1 Wall Stop RM867 US15 RO 087100
3 Silencer 608 RO 087100
1 Coat Hook RM802 US32D RO 087100
2 Kick Plates
Set: 14.0
Doors: 017
Description: Interior Closet
3 Hinge TA714 FT US26D MK 087100
1 Dummy Trim TCR4 RL255 626 YA 087100
1 Roller Latch 592/ 593 US26D RO 087100
1 Surface Overhead Stop 10-X36 630 RF 087100
Check with TCB to see if they want to be able to lock this closet
Set: 15.0
Doors: 018, 020, 021, 022, 024, 026, 029, 031, 035, 037, 048
Description: Storeroom with closer - single
3 Hinge TA714 FT US26D MK 087100
1 Storeroom or Closet Lock MOR4 8805FL K625xCT7SL 626 YA 087100
1 Cylinder complete/ permanent core as req'd 626 YA 087100
1 Surface Closer 2800ST/ P2800ST 689 NO 087100
1 Gasketing S773BL PE 087100
Sets ?????
DOOR HARDWARE SETS 087101 - 6
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL - NORTH COMMONS 90 % CD Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 Aug 16, 2019 Common Closet on each floor?
Laundry entry door – automatic opener? FOB?
Laundry closet?
Unit Interiors
Set 16.0
Description: Apartment Entry
3 Hinge TA714 FT US26D MK 087100
1 Entrance or Apartment Lock MOR4 8847FL K625xCT7SL 626 YA 087100
1 Cylinder complete/ permanent core 626 YA 087100
1 Surface Closer 2800ST/ P2800ST 689 NO 087100
1 Gasketing S773BL PE 087100
1 Door Bottom/Sweep 420APKL PE 087100
1 Coat Hook RM802 US32D RO 087100
1 Knocker/ Viewer (2 at ADA) 614V Engraved with Apt # US26D RO 087100
1 Threshold
2 Kick Plates (at ADA)
Set 17.0
Description: Interior Closet pair
6 Hinge TA714 FT US26D MK 087100
2 Dummy Trim TCR4 RL255 626 YA 087100
2 Roller Latch 592/ 593 US26D RO 087100
2 Surface Overhead Stop 10-X36 630 RF 087100
2 Wall Stops RM867 US15 RO 087100
Adjust quantities for single closet doors
Set 18.0
Description: Interior privacy without closer (Bedrooms and Bathrooms)
3 Hinge TA714 FT US26D MK 087100
1 Privacy Lock TCR4 RL202 626 YA 087100
1 Wall Stop RM867 US15 RO 087100
3 Silencer 608 RO 087100
DOOR HARDWARE SETS 087101 - 7
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 087113 - AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Low energy automatic door operators for swinging doors.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 08 Section “Door Schedule”.
2. Division 08 Section “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames”.
3. Division 08 Section “Flush Wood Doors”.
4. Division 08 Section “Door Hardware”.
5. Division 26 Section “Electrical”.
6. Division 28 Section “Access Control”.
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having
Jurisdiction.
1. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities.
2. ANSI/BHMA A156.4 - Door Controls, Door Closers.
3. ANSI/BHMA A156.19 - Power Assist and Low-Energy Power Operated Doors.
4. ICC/IBC - International Building Code.
5. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
6. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.
7. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.
8. NFPA 105 - Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies.
9. UL/ULC and CSA C22.2 – Standards for Automatic Door Operators Used on Fire and
Smoke Barrier Doors and Systems of Doors.
10. UL 325 - Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and Systems.
11. State Building Codes, Local Amendments.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Automatic door operators to be used on interior or exterior doors; up to 200 pounds (91 kg)
weight and maximum door width of 48" (1219 mm).
1. Auto door operator capable of operating within temperature ranges of -22°F (-30°C) and
122°F (50°C).
AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS 087113 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets including installation details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for automatic door
operators, including activation devices. Include operating characteristics, electrical
characteristics, and furnished accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Include details and attachments to other work.
1. Include locations and elevations of each unique entrance showing activation devices.
2. Indicate required clearances, components, and location and size of field connections.
3. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and activation wiring.
C. Qualification Data: Provide copy of manufacturer's official certification or accreditation document
indicating proof of status as a qualified and authorized installer of automatic door operators and
accessories.
D. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturer's operating and maintenance
manual for each item comprising the automatic door operator installation in quantity as required
in Division 01, Closeout Submittals. The manual to include the name, address, and contact
information of the manufacturer and Installer providing the operators and installation. The final
copies delivered after completion of the installation test to include "as built" modifications made
during installation, checkout, and acceptance.
E. Warranties and Maintenance: Special warranties and maintenance agreements specified in this
Section.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved
for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
B. Certified Installer Qualifications: Locally certified ASSA ABLOY Power Operator Preferred
Installer required for the installation and maintenance of the automatic door operator units and
accessories indicated for the Project.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain automatic door operators, including activation devices, from single
source, qualified supplier unless otherwise indicated.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
E. Exit Door Requirements: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for doors
with automatic door operators serving as a component of a required means of egress.
F. Fire Rated Door Assemblies: Provide operators for fire rated door assemblies that are listed and
labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use
on types and sizes of labeled fire doors required.
G. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct coordination conference in compliance with requirements in
Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier, Installer,
and Contractor to review proper methods and the procedures for receiving, handling, and
installing automatic door operators.
AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS 087113 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1. Prior to installation of automatic door operators, arrange for certified Installer's
representative to conduct a project specific meeting to review the installation and
maintenance of their respective products. Project meeting to be attended by
representatives of related trades furnishing and installing the aluminum, hollow metal and
wood doors sections.
2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Electrical Systems Coordination: Coordinate the layout and installation of scheduled automatic
door operators and related activation devices, with required connections to source power
junction boxes, remote power supplies, access control equipment, detection and monitoring
hardware, and fire alarm system.
B. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved, templates for doors, frames, operators,
and other work specified to be factory prepared and reinforced for installing automatic door
operators. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made
for locating and installing automatic door operators to comply with indicated requirements.
C. Door and Frame Preparation: Related Division 08 Sections (Steel, Aluminum and Wood) doors
and corresponding frames are to be prepared, reinforced and pre-wired (if applicable) to receive
the installation of the specified automatic door operators without additional in-field modifications.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements. Special warranties specified
in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of
the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties
made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Special Warranty: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace
components of automatic door operators that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period after final acceptance by Owner. Failures include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Faulty or sporadic operation of automatic door operator, including activation and safety
devices.
2. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering or
use.
C. Special Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
D. Provide extended warranty from defects in material or workmanship under normal use for a
period of 3 years from the date of substantial completion for units installed by a certified ASSA
ABLOY Power Operator Preferred Installer in accordance with the manufacturer's written
warranty certificate.
1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, and running concurrent with the
specified warranty period, provide continuous (6) months full maintenance by skilled employees
of automatic door operator Installer. Include planned and preventive maintenance, repair or
AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS 087113 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required
for proper door operation. Provide parts and supplies the same as those used in the
manufacture and installation of original equipment.
B. Extended Maintenance Support and Service Agreement: Submit for Owner’s consideration an
optional extended Service Agreement for the installed automatic door operator system. The
extended Service Agreement is considered elective and is without manufacturer's requirement
stipulating mandatory coverage for owner and/or vendor system support.
1. A published copy of this agreement to be included with the submittal package
2. Support for the installed automatic door operator system is provided through the vendor
under a specified, limited 24 hour support program.
3. Automatic door operators and components are to be available on a one-day turn around
time frame from the vendor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ELECTROHYDRAULIC DOOR OPERATORS
A. General: Provide low energy operators of size recommended by manufacturer for door size,
weight, and movement; for condition of exposure; and for compliance with UL 325. Coordinate
operator mechanisms with door operation, hinges, and activation devices.
1. Fire-Rated Doors: Provide door operators for fire-rated door assemblies that comply with
NFPA 80 for fire-rated door components and are listed and labeled by a qualified testing
agency.
B. Standard: Certified ANSI/BHMA A156.19.
C. Performance Requirements:
1. Opening Force if Power Fails: Not more than 15 lbf required to release a latch if provided,
not more than 30 lbf required to manually set door in motion, and not more than 15 lbf
required to fully open door.
2. Entrapment Protection: Not more than 15 lbf required to prevent stopped door from
closing or opening.
D. Configuration: Surface mounted or in-ground as required. Door operators to control single
swinging and pair of swinging doors.
E. Operation: Power opening and spring closing operation capable of meeting ANSI A117.1
accessibility guideline. Provide time delay for door to remain open before initiating closing cycle
as required by ANSI/BHMA A156.19. When not in automatic mode, door operator to function as
manual door closer with fully adjustable opening and closing forces, with or without electrical
power.
F. Features: Operator units to have full feature adjustments for door opening and closing force and
speed, backcheck, motor assist acceleration from 0 to 30 seconds, time delay, vestibule
interface delay, obstruction recycle, and hold open time from 0 up to 30 seconds.
G. Provide outputs and relays on board the operator to allow for coordination of exit device latch
retraction, electric strikes, magnetic locks, card readers, safety and motion sensors and
specified auxiliary contacts.
AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS 087113 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
H. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard, fabricated from aluminum with
nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
I. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. LCN Closers (LC) - 4640 Series.
2. Norton Door Controls (NO) - 6000 Series.
3. Stanley Security Solutions (ST) – D-4990 Series.
2.2 ACTIVATION DEVICES
A. General: Provide activation devices in accordance with ANSI/BHMA A156.19 standard, for
condition of exposure indicated and for long term, maintenance free operation under normal
traffic load operation. Coordinate activation control with electrified hardware and access control
interfaces. Activation switches are standard SPST, with optional DPDT availability.
B. Push-Plate Switch: Momentary contact door control switch with push-plate actuator.
1. Configuration: Square or round push-plate control switch with single or double gang
junction box mounting. Provide narrow profile face plate where indicated for jamb or
mullion mounting.
a. Mounting Location: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Push-Plate Material: Stainless steel.
3. Message: International symbol of accessibility with "Push (Press) to Open (Operate)"
text.
4. Manufacturers:
a. Norton Door Controls (NO) – 500 Series.
C. Touch Less Wall Switch: Momentary contact door control switch with movement required
activation. Single or double gang box junction box mounting.
1. Doppler radar sensor.
2. Mounting Location: As indicated on Drawings.
3. Manufacturers:
a. Norton Door Controls (NO) – 700 Series.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Relay Logic Modules: Module containing 3 relays allowing the operator to be used with external
locking hardware (exits or locks) or access controls that require dry contact inputs.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Norton Door Controls (NO) – 5900RLM Series.
B. Signage: As required by cited ANSI/BHMA A156.19 standard for the type of operator.
AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS 087113 - 5
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
2.4 FINISHES
A. Standard: Designations used to indicate hardware finishes complying with ANSI/BHMA
A156.18, including coordination with traditional U.S. finishes indicated by certain manufacturers
for their products.
B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness,
and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified
by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware. Units will be sprayed with a
combination of waterborne acrylic and polyester powder coat.
C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances, door and frame preparation and reinforcements, power connections, electrical
systems interfaces, and other conditions affecting performance of automatic door operators.
B. Notify architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the door schedule, door types,
drawings and scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or conflicts have
been resolved in writing.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install complete automatic door operators according to manufacturer's written
instructions and ANSI/BHMA A156;19 standard, including activation devices, control wiring,
remote power units if any, connection to the building's fire alarm system, and required signage.
B. Power Connection: Reference Division 26 "Electrical" Sections for connection to electrical
power distribution system.
C. Access Control System: Coordinate connections and operation with access control system
D. Signage: Apply signage as required by ANSI/BHMA A156.19 standard for type of door operator
and direction of pedestrian travel.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspection: Certified Installer' representative to inspect and test automatic door operators to
determine compliance of installed systems with specifications and ANSI/BHMA A146.19
standard. Report discrepancies in writing to Architect and Contractor within 24 hours after
inspection.
AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS 087113 - 6
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Comply with requirements of ANSI/BHMA A156.19 standard. Adjust automatic door operators to
function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Certified Installer's representative to provide eight (8) hours of training to Owner's maintenance
personnel in the proper adjustment, operation, and maintenance of automatic door operators.
END OF SECTION 087113
AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS 087113 - 7
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS 087113 - 8
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 091110 - NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies.
2. Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings, soffits, and grid systems.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-
load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in
assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.
B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction
identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 90 and classified
according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 or coating with equivalent corrosion
resistance of ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated.
B. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.
1. Steel Studs and Runners:
a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.027 inch.
b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. If no depth is indicated, provide 3-5/8 inches.
NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 091110 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
C. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following:
1. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- deep flanges in
thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner
and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the top of studs to provide lateral
bracing.
2. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes
applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in
thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.
D. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.053-inch minimum base-metal thickness, with minimum
1/2-inch- wide flanges.
1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches.
2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch-thick, galvanized steel.
E. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch.
2. Depth: 7/8 inch.
F. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch-deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound
transmission.
1. Configuration: Asymmetrical.
G. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches, wall attachment
flange of 7/8 inch, minimum uncoated-metal thickness of 0.018 inch, and depth required to fit
insulation thickness indicated.
2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- diameter wire, or
double strand of 0.048-inch- diameter wire.
B. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch in diameter.
C. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.053
inch and minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges.
1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches or 2-1/2 inches.
D. Furring Channels (Furring Members):
1. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.
a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch.
b. Depth: 2-1/2 inches.
2. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.
a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch.
b. Depth: 7/8 inches.
3. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch-deep members designed to reduce sound
transmission.
NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 091110 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
a. Configuration: Asymmetrical.
E. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system
composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems.
b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; Drywall Grid System.
c. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System.
2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.
1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding
power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide the following:
1. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener
penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal
frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other
conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of
overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building
structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and
that hangers will develop their full strength.
1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in
advance of time needed for coordination and construction.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.
1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to
framing installation.
NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 091110 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim,
grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.
C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.
D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing
members. Frame both sides of joints independently.
3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than
spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.
1. Spacing: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior
walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.
D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural
supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to
terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above
ceiling.
1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to
produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished
assemblies.
2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames;
install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.
a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.
b. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of
overhead structure.
3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as
required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of
openings to match framing required above door heads.
4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated
assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to
underside of solid structure.
5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated.
6. Curved Partitions:
a. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs.
b. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along
arcs. On straight lengths of no fewer than two studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6
inches o.c.
E. Direct Furring:
1. Screw to wood framing.
2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment,
or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.
NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 091110 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
F. Z-Furring Members:
1. Erect insulation, specified in Section 07210 "Building Insulation," vertically and hold in
place with Z-furring members spaced 24 inches o.c.
2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with
concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners
spaced 24 inches o.c.
3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange
extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring
channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more
than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit.
G. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than
1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
3.5 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than
spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.
1. Hangers: 48 inches o.c.
2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches o.c.
3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches o.c.
B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by
building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.
C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.
a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting
horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension
system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of
trapezes or equivalent devices.
a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads
within performance limits established by referenced installation standards.
3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts,
eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate,
and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
4. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.
E. Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems with hangers used for support.
NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 091110 - 5
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
F. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems
meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other
and butt-cut to fit into wall track.
G. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet
measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between
parallel members that will receive finishes.
END OF SECTION 091110
NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 091110 - 6
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 092500 - GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Interior gypsum board.
2. Tile backing boards at bathroom walls.
3. Paperless fiber-reinforced gypsum board.
4. Sound attenuation blankets.
5. Aluminum angle rodent protection.
6. Gypsum board accessories
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 079200 “Joint Sealants” for interior and acoustical joint sealants at gypsum board
assemblies.
2. Section 091110 "Non-Load-Bearing Steel Framing" for non-structural framing and
suspension systems that support gypsum board panels.
3. Section 092650 “Gypsum Boars Shaft-Wall Assemblies” for rated mechanical shafts.
4. Section 093100 "Ceramic Tile" for cementitious backer units installed as substrates for
ceramic tile.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4: For adhesives used to laminate gypsum board panels
to substrates, documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and product
requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing
of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental
Chambers."
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather,
condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack
panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.
GYPSUM BOARD 092500 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board
manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.
C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold
damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and
construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an
independent testing agency.
B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction
identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according
to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
A. Recycled Content of Gypsum Panel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of
preconsumer recycled content not less than 85 percent.
B. Regional Materials: Gypsum panel products shall be manufactured within 500 miles of Project
site from materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured,
within 500 miles of Project site.
C. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and
that correspond with support system indicated.
2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. American Gypsum.
2. CertainTeed Corp.
3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC.
4. Lafarge North America Inc.
5. National Gypsum Company.
6. USG Corporation.
GYPSUM BOARD 092500 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1. Thickness: 5/8 inch, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
C. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1. Thickness: 5/8 inch.
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
D. Foil-Backed Gypsum Board, Type X : ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1. Thickness: 5/8 inch.
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
E. Abuse Resistant Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1629/C 1629M.
1. Thickness: 5/8 inch.
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
F. Gypsum Ceiling Board, Type C: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Manufactured to have increased fire-
resistive capability.
1. Thickness: 5/8 inch.
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
G. Moisture and Mold Resistant Paper-less Gypsum Board with Fiberglass Mats:
1. Thickness: 5/8 inch.
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
3. Rating: Provide Type X at 1-hr rated walls and Type C at 1-hr rated ceilings.
H. Fiberglass-Mat Faced Gypsum Backing Board for Tile:
1. Thickness: ¼ inch, ½ inch, 5/8 inch.
2. Long Edges: Square.
3. Rating: Provide Type X at 1-hr rated walls.
2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc.
2. Shapes:
a. Typical Cornerbead.
b. Wide Cornerbead.
c. J-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
d. F-Reveal: F- shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
e. Z-Reveal: Z- shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
f. Typical Reveal: general; both exposed long flanges receives joint compound.
B. Wet Location Trim: ASTM C 1047.
GYPSUM BOARD 092500 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1. Material: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet.
2. Shapes:
a. Cornerbead.
b. J-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
B. Joint Tape:
1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.
2. Glass-Mat Interior Gypsum Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh.
3. Wet Location applications: As recommended by panel manufacturer
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible
with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas,
use setting-type taping compound.
2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and
trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.
a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.
3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
D. Joint Compound for Glass-Mat Interior Gypsum Board: As recommended by backing panel
manufacturer.
E. Joint Compound for Exterior Applications:
1. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Use setting-type taping compound and setting-type,
sandable topping compound.
2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: As recommended by sheathing board
manufacturer.
F. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:
1. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by backing panel
manufacturer.
2. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer.
3. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting-type taping compound and setting-
type, sandable topping compound.
2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
manufacturer's written recommendations.
GYPSUM BOARD 092500 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum
panels to continuous substrate.
1. Laminating adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from
0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.
D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing)
produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag
wool, or rock wool.
1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.
E. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 07210 "Building Insulation."
F. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Section 07210 "Building Insulation."
2.7 ALUMINUM ANGLE RODENT PROTECTION
A. Provide 4 inch by 4 inch by 24 gauge aluminum angle behind all unit kitchen cabinets and
appliances as detailed in drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer
present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A. Comply with ASTM C 840.
B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid
abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent
panels not less than one framing member.
C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with
not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.
D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate
supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered
GYPSUM BOARD 092500 - 5
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not
make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.
E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.
F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings,
etc.), except in chases braced internally.
1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke
ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.
2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof
slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow
1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant.
G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural
abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations and trim
edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and
abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached
to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
I. Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner
construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber,
including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members or provide control
joints to counteract wood shrinkage.
J. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, unit demising walls, unit exterior
walls, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of
acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and
through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written
recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through
assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.
K. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily
installed after panels have been installed on one side.
3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:
1. Gypsum Wallboard: Interior horizontal and vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Gypsum Wallboard Type X: Interior vertical surfaces at demising walls and at other
indicated surfaces required for fire-resistance-rated assembly.
3. Foil-Backed Gypsum Wallboard Type X: Interior vertical surfaces at exterior walls as
indicated in drawings.
4. Abuse Resistant Gypsum Wallboard Type X: Interior vertical surfaces at lobby,
vestibules, and common corridors.
5. Gypsum Ceiling Board Type C: Interior horizontal surfaces as indicated in drawings.
6. Moisture and Mold Resistant Paper-less gypsum board: For use in all wet or damp
locations (all bathroom walls and ceiling, kitchen walls and ceilings, janitor’s closets,
common laundry room, and utility/mechanical spaces). Type X and vertical surfaces and
Type C at horizontal surfaces.
GYPSUM BOARD 092500 - 6
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
B. Single-Layer Application:
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest
extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing) unless
otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end
joints.
a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses
of panels.
3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end
joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.
4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
C. Multilayer Application:
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on
walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to
framing members and offset face-layer joints one framing member, 16 inches minimum,
from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-
rated assembly.
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers
vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring
member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer
joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger
joints on opposite sides of partitions.
3. On Z-furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer
either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical
joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring
members.
4. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with
screws.
D. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate
(other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum
board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels
until fastening adhesive has set.
E. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Comply with manufacturer's written installation
instructions and install at showers, tubs, bathroom walls and where indicated. Install with 1/4-
inch gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations.
3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same
fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved
by Architect for visual effect.
C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:
1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners and as indicated in drawings.
GYPSUM BOARD 092500 - 7
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
2. J-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
3. F-Reveal: As indicated in drawings.
4. Z-Reveal: As indicated in drawings.
5. Typical-Reveal: As indicated in drawings.
D. All trim shall be installed with drywall screws.
3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,
fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces
for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for
tape.
D. Apply veneer plaster over paperless gypsum board wall and ceiling surfaces. Use products and
methods as recommended by board manufacturer.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other
non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall
application.
B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,
construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION 092500
GYPSUM BOARD 092500 - 8
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 093100 - CERAMIC TILE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Ceramic tile.
2. Porcelain tile.
3. Stone thresholds.
4. Combination waterproof and crack isolation membrane.
5. Mortar grout.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of tile and grout indicated. Include Samples of
accessories involving color selection.
1. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required.
2. Stone thresholds in 6-inch lengths.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from one source or
producer.
1. Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of consistent
quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area.
B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality
for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from one manufacturer and each aggregate
from one source or producer.
C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this
Section from a single manufacturer for each product:
1. Stone thresholds.
2. Waterproof membrane.
3. Crack isolation membrane.
4. Joint sealants.
CERAMIC TILE 093100 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels
intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages.
B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination can be avoided.
D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing.
E. Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated
surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding
surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and
ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in
referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types,
compositions, and other characteristics indicated.
1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements unless otherwise indicated.
B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.02,
ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCA
installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified.
C. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and
package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from
other packages and match approved Samples.
D. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard
with manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.
1. Where tile is indicated for installation in wet areas, do not use back- or edge-mounted tile
assemblies unless tile manufacturer specifies in writing that this type of mounting is
suitable for installation indicated and has a record of successful in-service performance.
E. Factory-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type, protect
exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by precoating with continuous
film of petroleum paraffin wax, applied hot. Do not coat unexposed tile surfaces.
CERAMIC TILE 093100 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
2.2 COMMON SPACE TILE PRODUCTS
A. General: Colorbody porcelain tile.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated on
Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. American Olean; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc.
b. Crossville, Inc.
c. Daltile; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc.
B. Lobby Floor/Wall Tile 2:
1. Basis-of-Design: Fabric Art by Daltile
2. Tile Sizes:
a. 24 inch by 24 inch field tile
b. 12 inch by 24 inch field tile
c. 1 inch by 3 inch straight joint mosaic
3. Thickness: 3/8 inch.
4. Face: Unpolished.
5. Tile Pattern: As indicated drawings.
6. Tile Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
7. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
8. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable and
matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows, selected from
manufacturer's standard shapes:
a. Base: Bullnose cove base, 6 inches by 24 inches
b. Floor bullnose base is intended to coordinate with floor field tile in the standard 90
degree orientation.
2.3 BATHROOM TILE PRODUCTS
A. General: Factory-mounted ceramic tile.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated on
Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. American Olean; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc.
b. Crossville, Inc.
c. Daltile; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc.
d. Porcelanosa.
B. Unit Bathroom Floor Tile 1:
1. Basis-of-Design: Balans by Daltile.
2. Field Tile Size:
a. 12 inches by 24 inches.
b. 18 inches by 18 inches.
c. 12 inches by 12 inches.
d. 10 inches by 14 inches.
e. 4 inches by 12 inches.
3. Mosaic Tile Size: 2 inches by 4 inches.
4. Thickness: 5/16 inch.
5. Face: Patterned with square edges.
6. Tile Pattern: As indicated in drawings
7. Tile Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. Architect may select
different colors for the field tile and mosaic tile.
8. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
CERAMIC TILE 093100 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
9. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable and
matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows, selected from
manufacturer's standard shapes:
a. Base: Floor Bullnose
1) Base Size: 3 inches by 12 inches
b. External Corners: Mitered.
c. Internal Corners: Mitered.
C. Unit Bathroom Wall Tile (See Alternates):
1. Basis-of-Design: Emblem by Daltile.
2. Field Tile Size:
a. 12 inches by 24 inches.
b. 18 inches by 18 inches.
c. 12 inches by 12 inches.
d. 10 inches by 14 inches.
e. 4 inches by 12 inches.
3. Mosaic Tile Size: 2 inches by 4 inches.
4. Thickness: 5/16 inch.
5. Face: Patterned with square edges.
6. Tile Pattern: As indicated in drawings
7. Tile Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. Architect may select
different colors for the field tile and mosaic tile.
8. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
9. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable and
matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows, selected from
manufacturer's standard shapes:
a. Wall Bullnose
1) Base Size: 3 inches by 10 inches
b. External Corners: Mitered.
c. Internal Corners: Mitered.
D. Kitchen Range Backslash Tile (See Alternates):
1. Basis-of-Design: White Subway Tile
2. Module Size: 2 by 4 inches.
3. Thickness: 1/4 inch.
4. Face: Plain with cushion edges.
5. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.4 THRESHOLDS
A. General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between
adjacent floor finishes.
1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, with lower edge of bevel aligned with or up to 1/16 inch above
adjacent floor surface. Finish bevel to match top surface of threshold. Limit height of
threshold to 1/2 inch or less above adjacent floor surface.
B. Stone Thresholds: ASTM C 503, with a minimum abrasion resistance of 12 per ASTM C 1353
or ASTM C 241 and with honed finish.
1. Description: Single-sloped, fine- to medium-grained cream/beige travertine.
CERAMIC TILE 093100 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
2.5 COMBINATION WATERPROOFING AND CRACK-SUPPRESSION MEMBRANE
A. General: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI A118.10 and ANSI A118.12
and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement
and accessories recommended by manufacturer.
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Custom Building Products; RedGard.
b. LATICRETE International, Inc.; 9235 Waterproof Membrane.
c. Mapei; Mapelastic HPG with Fiberglass Mesh.
d. Mapei; Mapelastic 315 with Fiberglass Mesh.
2.6 SETTING MATERIALS
A. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company.
b. Bostik, Inc.
c. C-Cure.
d. Custom Building Products.
e. Laticrete International, Inc.
f. MAPEI Corporation.
2. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, vinyl acetate or acrylic
additive to which only water must be added at Project site.
3. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging
mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4.
2.7 GROUT MATERIALS
A. Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company.
b. Bostik, Inc.
c. C-Cure.
d. Custom Building Products.
e. Laticrete International, Inc.
f. MAPEI Corporation.
2. Polymer Type: Acrylic resin in liquid-latex form for addition to prepackaged dry-grout mix.
CERAMIC TILE 093100 - 5
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
2.8 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS
A. General: Provide sealants, primers, backer rods, and other sealant accessories that comply
with Section 07920 "Joint Sealants."
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based
formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations
indicated.
B. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and
grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout
manufacturers.
2.10 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT
A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout
manufacturers' written instructions.
B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.
C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and
other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance
characteristics for installations indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of installed tile.
1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, free of coatings that are
incompatible with tile-setting materials including curing compounds and other substances
that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by
ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.
2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thin-set mortar comply with
surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.
a. Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been mechanically
scarified.
b. Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding or
grinding.
3. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical
units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed.
4. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if
not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.
CERAMIC TILE 093100 - 6
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thin-set
mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-setting
material manufacturer.
B. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar
bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/8 inch per foot toward drains.
C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and
packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from
other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to
manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.
3.3 TILE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for TCA installation methods
specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 Series
"Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCA installation methods,
specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used.
B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete
covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at
obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring
visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight
aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so
plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges.
E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center
tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize
the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise
indicated.
1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within
tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work.
2. Where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same
size, align joints.
3. Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining tiles on
floor, base, walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated.
F. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths:
1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch.
G. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds in same type of setting bed as adjacent floor unless
otherwise indicated.
CERAMIC TILE 093100 - 7
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1. Do not extend waterproofing and crack isolation membrane under thresholds set in latex-
portland cement mortar. Fill joints between such thresholds and adjoining tile set on
waterproofing and crack isolation membrane with elastomeric sealant.
3.4 WATERPROOFING AND CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
A. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A108.13 and ASNSI A108.17 and
manufacturer's written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness and bonded
securely to substrate.
B. Do not install tile or setting materials over membrane until membrane has cured.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are
free of foreign matter.
1. Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible.
2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written
instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners
recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners
are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect
metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean
water before and after cleaning.
B. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to
prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of
neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors.
C. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is
completed.
D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from
tile surfaces.
3.6 INTERIOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. Interior Floor Installations, Wood Subfloor, Typical: TCA F180.
1. Floor tile and grout.
2. Thin-set mortar
3. Waterproofing and crack-suppression membrane.
4. Gypsum underlayment.
5. Wood subfloor.
B. Interior Floor Installations, Concrete: TCA F122.
1. Floor tile and grout.
2. Thin-set mortar.
3. Waterproofing and crack-suppression membrane.
4. Concrete.
END OF SECTION 093100
CERAMIC TILE 093100 - 8
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 096510 - RESILIENT FLOOR TILE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Linoleum plank floor tile.
2. Rubber floor tile.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer’s full range of colors and patterns for each
type of floor tile indicated.
C. Product Schedule: For floor tile.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance manuals.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Build mockups for floor tile including resilient base and accessories.
a. Size: Minimum 100 sq. ft. for each type, color, and pattern in locations directed by
Architect.
2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations
in writing.
3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the
completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 096510 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient
temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50
deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store floor tiles on flat surfaces.
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than
70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods:
1. 48 hours before installation.
2. During installation.
3. 48 hours after installation.
B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range
recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.
C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.
D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.
E. Flooring installer shall perform resilient flooring manufacturer’s recommended bond, moisture
test, and pH test. Submit results to Architect. Do not install flooring over concrete substrates
until substrates have cured and are dry to bond with adhesive.
F. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LUXURY VINYL FLOOR TILE (LVT)
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
1. Adore Floors.
2. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
3. Forbo Flooring Systems.
4. Johnsonite; a Tarkett Company.
5. Mannington Commercial.
6. Shaw Contract Group; a Berkshire Hathaway company.
B. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1700.
1. Class: Class III, printed film vinyl tile.
2. Type: B, embossed surface.
3. IIC: 50 or greater
C. Slip Resistance: Meets or exceeds 0.6 when tested according to ASTM D 2047.
D. Static Load Limit: 1,000 psi minimum when tested according to ASTM F 970.
RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 096510 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
E. Basis-of-Design LVT 1: Shaw Downtown
1. Overall Thickness: 2.5 mm
2. Wear Layer Thickness: 12 mil
3. Size: 6 inches x 48 inches
4. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.
F. Basis-of-Design LVT 2: Shaw Downtown
1. Overall Thickness: 2.5 mm
2. Wear Layer Thickness: 20 mil
3. Size: 6 inches x 48 inches
4. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.
G. Basis-of-Design LVT 3: Shaw Downtown
1. Overall Thickness: 2.5 mm
2. Wear Layer Thickness: 12 mil
3. Size: 6 inches x 48 inches
4. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.
H. Substitutions: Not Allowed.
I. Colors and Patterns: Subject to change. Architect to select color from manufacturer’s full range.
2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, Portland cement based or
blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by floor tile manufacturer for
applications indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by floor tile and adhesive manufacturers to suit
floor tile and substrate conditions indicated.
1. Adhesives shall comply with the following limits for VOC content:
a. Vinyl Composition Tile Adhesives: 50 g/L or less.
b. Rubber Floor Adhesives: 60g/L or less.
C. Floor Polish: Provide protective, liquid floor-polish products recommended by floor tile
manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum
moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified
in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and
foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 096510 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
3.2 PREPARATION
A. PREPARE SUBSTRATES ACCORDING TO FLOOR TILE MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN
INSTRUCTIONS to ensure adhesion of resilient products.
B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives
and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by
floor tile manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor tile manufacturer.
Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale
recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 9 pH.
4. Moisture Testing: PROCEED WITH INSTALLATION ONLY AFTER SUBSTRATES
PASS TESTING ACCORDING TO FLOOR TILE MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN
RECOMMENDATIONS, but not less stringent than the following:
a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test according to ASTM F 1869. Proceed with
installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3
lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.
b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes according to ASTM F 2170.
Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative
humidity level.
C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
D. Do not install floor tiles until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be
installed.
1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient floor tile and installation
materials into spaces where they will be installed.
E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient
floor tile.
3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.
B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets,
so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut
widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.
1. Lay tiles square with room axis and in pattern indicated.
C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as
manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed
tiles.
1. Lay tiles with grain direction alternating in adjacent tiles (basket-weave pattern).
RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 096510 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures
including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.
E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles
to center of door openings.
F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting
by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking
device.
G. Install floor tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, building expansion-joint covers,
and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern
between pieces of tile installed on covers and adjoining tiles. Tightly adhere tile edges to
substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters.
H. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to
produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,
telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. COMPLY WITH MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS FOR CLEANING AND
PROTECTING FLOOR TILE.
B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation:
1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.
2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
C. Protect floor tile from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
D. Sealers and Finish Coats: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor tile
surfaces before applying liquid cleaners, sealers, and finish products.
1. Sealer: Apply two base coats of liquid sealer.
2. Finish: Apply two coats of liquid floor finish.
E. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 096510
RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 096510 - 5
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 096510 - 6
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 096520 - RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes linoleum sheet flooring.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified in manufacturer's
standard size.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer.
B. Concrete Substrates: Bond, moisture test, and pH test results.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For each type of resilient sheet flooring to include in maintenance manuals.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are
competent in techniques required by manufacturer for resilient sheet flooring installation and
seaming method indicated.
1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by
resilient sheet flooring manufacturer for installation techniques required.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store resilient sheet flooring and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather,
with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less
than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store rolls upright.
RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 096520 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than
70 deg F or more than 85 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient sheet flooring during the following
time periods:
1. Seven days hours before installation.
2. During installation.
3. Seven days after installation.
B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range
recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.
C. Close spaces to traffic during resilient sheet flooring installation.
D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after resilient sheet flooring installation.
E. Flooring installer shall perform resilient flooring manufacturer’s recommended bond, moisture
test, and pH test. Submit results to Architect. Do not install flooring over concrete substrates
until substrates have cured and are dry to bond with adhesive.
F. Install resilient sheet flooring after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For resilient sheet flooring, as determined by testing
identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
2.2 RUBBER STAIR FLOORING
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to
ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Allstate Rubber Corp.
2. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
3. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; a division of Burke Industries Inc.
4. Flexco.
5. Johnsonite.
6. Nora Systems, Inc.
7. Roppe Corporation, USA.
8. VPI Corporation.
RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 096520 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
C. Stair Treads: ASTM F 2169.
1. Type: TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset).
2. Class: 2 (pattern; embossed, grooved, or ribbed).
3. Group: 1 (embedded abrasive strips).
4. Nosing Style: Square, adjustable to cover angles between 60 and 90 degrees.
5. Nosing Height: 1-1/2 inches.
6. Grit Strip: Provide grit strip on top of nosing.
7. Thickness: 1/4 inch and tapered to back edge.
8. Size: Lengths and depths to fit each stair tread in one piece.
9. Integral Risers: Smooth, flat; in height that fully covers substrate.
D. Stringers: Height and length after cutting to fit risers and treads and to cover stair stringers;
produced by same manufacturer as treads and recommended by manufacturer for installation
with treads.
1. Thickness: 0.125 inch.
E. Landings: Provide rubber sheet flooring to match treads; produced by same manufacturer as
treads and recommended by manufacturer for installation with treads.
F. Locations: Provide rubber stair accessories in areas indicated.
G. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.
2.3 RUBBER MOLDING ACCESSORY
A. Provide products by the same manufacturer as the wall base.
B. Description: Rubber transition strips and other accessories as required.
C. Profile and Dimensions: As required for the particular condition.
D. Locations: Provide rubber molding accessories in locations indicated and as required to provide
smooth transitions between various types of flooring.
E. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.
2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or
blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient sheet flooring
manufacturer for applications indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers to suit
resilient sheet flooring and substrate conditions indicated.
1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less.
C. Seamless-Installation Accessories:
1. Heat-Welding Bead: Manufacturer's solid-strand product for heat welding seams.
RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 096520 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
a. Color: Match flooring.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum
moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified
in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and
foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient sheet flooring.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to resilient sheet flooring manufacturer's written instructions to
ensure adhesion of resilient sheet flooring.
B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
1. Moisture Testing: Conduct moisture tests on all concrete floors regardless of the age,
grade level or the presence of existing flooring. Conduct calcium chloride tests in
accordance with ASTM F 1869. Measure the internal relative humidity of the concrete
slab in accordance with ASTM F 2170. One test of each type should be conducted for
every 1,000 square feet of flooring (minimum of 3). Conduct tests around the perimeter
of the room, at columns, and anywhere moisture may be evident. Concrete moisture
vapor emissions must not exceed 8.0 lbs. per 1,000 square feet in 24 hours. Concrete
internal relative humidity must not exceed 85%. Submit a diagram of the area showing
the location and results of each test to the Architect. If the test results exceed these
limitations, do not proceed with installation until the problem has been corrected.
2. pH Test: Perform pH tests on concrete floors regardless of the age or grade level. If the
pH is greater than 11, it must be neutralized prior to beginning the installation.
C. Wood Subfloors: Comply with ASTM F 1482 “Standard Practice for Installation and Preparation of
Panel Type Underlayments to Receive Resilient Flooring.”
D. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
E. Do not install resilient sheet flooring until it is the same temperature as the space where it is to
be installed.
1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move flooring and installation materials into
spaces where they will be installed.
F. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient
sheet flooring.
RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 096520 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
3.3 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient sheet flooring.
B. Unroll resilient sheet flooring and allow it to stabilize before cutting and fitting.
C. Lay out resilient sheet flooring as follows:
1. Maintain uniformity of flooring direction.
2. Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at least
6 inches away from parallel joints in flooring substrates.
3. Match edges of flooring for color shading at seams.
4. Avoid cross seams.
D. Scribe and cut resilient sheet flooring to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent
fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.
E. Extend resilient sheet flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.
F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting
by repeating on resilient sheet flooring as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other
nonpermanent marking device.
G. Install resilient sheet flooring on covers for telephone and electrical ducts and similar items in
installation areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of flooring
installed on covers and adjoining flooring. Tightly adhere flooring edges to substrates that abut
covers and to cover perimeters.
H. Adhere resilient sheet flooring to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate
to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,
telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
I. Seamless Installation:
1. Heat-Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F 1516. Rout joints and heat weld with
welding bead to permanently fuse sections into a seamless flooring. Prepare, weld, and
finish seams to produce surfaces flush with adjoining flooring surfaces.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient sheet
flooring.
B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient sheet flooring
installation:
1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from surfaces.
2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
C. Protect resilient sheet flooring from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from
construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of
construction period.
RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 096520 - 5
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
D. Cover resilient sheet flooring until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 096520
RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 096520 - 6
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 096530 - RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Resilient base.
2. Resilient molding accessories.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated.
C. Product Schedule: For resilient base and accessory products.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with
ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less
than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F.
1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than
70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time
periods:
1. 48 hours before installation.
2. During installation.
3. 48 hours after installation.
B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range
recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.
C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096530 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RUBBER BASE 1
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Allstate Rubber Corp.
2. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
3. Burke Mercer Flooring Products, Division of Burke Industries Inc.
4. Flexco.
5. Johnsonite; A Tarkett Company.
6. Roppe Corporation, USA.
7. VPI, LLC, Floor Products Division.
B. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TP (thermoplastic rubber).
1. Group: I (solid, homogeneous).
2. Style and Location:
a. Basis of Design: Johnsonite, Reveal Millwork, MW -XXA-F.
b. Location: See finish schedule.
C. Minimum Thickness: 0.25 inch.
D. Height: 4.25 inches.
E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.
F. Outside and Inside Corners: Job formed.
G. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. Architect may
select multiple colors.
2.2 VINYL BASE 1
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Allstate Rubber Corp.
2. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
3. Burke Mercer Flooring Products, Division of Burke Industries Inc.
4. Flexco.
5. Johnsonite; A Tarkett Company.
6. Roppe Corporation, USA.
7. VPI, LLC, Floor Products Division.
B. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TV (vinyl, thermoplastic).
1. Group: I (solid, homogeneous).
2. Style and Location:
a. Style A, Straight: Provide in areas with carpet.
RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096530 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
b. Style B, Cove: Provide in areas with resilient flooring.
C. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch.
D. Height: 4 inches.
E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.
F. Outside and Inside Corners: Job formed.
G. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. Architect may
select multiple colors.
2.3 VINYL MOLDING ACCESSORY
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the same
manufacturer selected for vinyl base.
B. Description: Vinyl reducer strip for resilient flooring, transition strips, and other profiles and
dimensions as required.
C. Locations: Provide vinyl molding accessories as required to provide smooth transitions
between various types of flooring.
D. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. Architect may
select multiple colors.
2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or
blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient-product
manufacturer for applications indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient
products and substrate conditions indicated.
1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less.
C. Stair-Tread Nose Filler: Two-part epoxy compound recommended by resilient stair-tread
manufacturer to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours.
D. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to
protect exposed edges of flooring, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints.
E. Floor Polish: Provide protective, liquid floor-polish products recommended by resilient stair-
tread manufacturer.
RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096530 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum
moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified
in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and
foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. PREPARE SUBSTRATES ACCORDING TO MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS
TO ENSURE ADHESION OF RESILIENT PRODUCTS.
B. Concrete Substrates for Resilient Stair Accessories: Prepare horizontal surfaces according to
ASTM F 710.
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives
and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by
manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed
with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale
recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 9 pH.
4. Moisture Testing: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing according
to manufacturer's written recommendations, but not less stringent than the following:
a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test according to ASTM F 1869. Proceed with
installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3
lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.
b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes according to ASTM F 2170.
Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum 75 percent relative
humidity level.
C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
D. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they
are to be installed.
1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and installation
materials into spaces where they will be installed.
E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient
products.
RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096530 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.
B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and
other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of
adjacent pieces aligned.
D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in
continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.
F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient
base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.
G. Job-Formed Corners:
1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns
not less than 6 inches in length.
a. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends.
2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns
not less than 6 inches in length.
a. Miter or cope corners to minimize open joints.
3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.
B. Resilient Stair Accessories:
1. Use stair-tread-nose filler to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours.
2. Tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece.
C. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates
throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor covering that would
otherwise be exposed.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. COMPLY WITH MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS FOR CLEANING AND
PROTECTING RESILIENT PRODUCTS.
B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient-product installation:
1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.
2. Sweep and vacuum horizontal surfaces thoroughly.
3. Damp-mop horizontal surfaces to remove marks and soil.
RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096530 - 5
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from resilient stair treads
before applying liquid floor polish.
1. Apply two coat(s).
E. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 096530
RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096530 - 6
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 096700 – FLUID APPLIED FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Fluid-applied epoxy flooring.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300, Submittal Procedures.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each paint and coating product should include:
1 Product characteristics
2 Surface preparation instructions and recommendations
3 Primer requirements and finish specification
4 Storage and handling requirements and recommendations
5 Application methods
6 Cleanup information
C. Selection Samples: Submit a complete set of color chips that represent the full range of manufac-
turer’s color samples available.
D. Coating Maintenance Manual: upon conclusion of the project, the Contractor or paint manufac-
ture/supplier shall furnish a coating maintenance manual, such as Sherwin-Williams “Custodian
Project Color and Product Information” report or equal. Manual shall include an Area Summary
with finish schedule, Area Detail designating where each product/color/finish was used, product
data pages, Material Safety Data Sheets, care and cleaning instructions, touch-up procedures,
and color samples of each color and finish used.
1.4 MOCK-UP
Include a mock-up if the project size and/or quality warrant taking such a precaution. The following is
one example of how a mock-up on a large project might be specified. When deciding on the extent of
the mock-up, consider all the major different types of painting on the project.
A. Finish surfaces for verification of products, colors, & sheens
B. Finish area designated by Architect
C. Provide samples that designate prime & finish coats
D. Do not proceed with remaining work until the Architect approves the mock-up samples
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
FLUID-APPLIED FLOORING 096700 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
A. Delivery: Deliver manufacturer's unopened containers to the work site. Packaging shall bear the
manufacturer’s name, label, and the following list of information:
1 Product name, and type (description)
2 Application & use instructions
3 Surface preparation
4 VOC content
5 Environmental handling
6 Batch date
7 Color number
B. Storage: Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based
materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.
Store materials in an area that is within the acceptable temperature range, per manufacturer’s in-
structions. Protect from freezing.
C. Handling: Maintain a clean, dry storage area, to prevent contamination or damage to the coat-
ings.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recom-
mended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not apply coatings under environmental condi-
tions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
manufactured by The Sherwin-Williams Company; or a comparable products by one of the
following:
1. Belzona.
2. Benjamin Moore & Co.
3. Florock
4. Milamar Coatings.
B. Substitutions: Allowed per architect approval.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain all products from single source manufacturer.
D. Heavy Duty Chemical Resistant Two-Part Epoxy:
1. 1st Coat: ArmorSeal 33 Epoxy Primer/Sealer, B58-33 Series 7.0-9.0 mils dry
2. 2nd Coat: ArmorSeal 650 SL/RC Self-Leveling Epoxy, B58-650 Series 10.0-30.0 mils dry
2.2 MATERIALS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A Paints and Coatings - General:
1 Unless otherwise indicated, provide factory-mixed coatings. When required, mix coatings to
correct consistency in accordance with manufacturer's instructions before application. Do not
FLUID-APPLIED FLOORING 096700 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedure is
specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions.
B Primers:
1. Where the manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular substrate, use primer
categorized as "best" by the manufacturer.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A Coating Application Accessories:
1. Provide all primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding materials, and clean-
up materials required, per manufacturer’s specifications.
B Cove Base Accessories:
1. Provide all cove base formers and termination strips required to install integral cove base.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A Do not begin application of coatings until substrates have been properly examined and prepared.
Notify Architect or Specifier of unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding.
B If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory
preparation before proceeding.
C Proceed with work only after conditions have been corrected, and approved by all parties, other-
wise application of coatings will be considered as an acceptance of surface conditions.
D Previously Painted Surfaces: Verify that existing painted surfaces do not contain lead based
paints, notify Architect immediately if lead based paints are encountered.
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
A Proper product selection, surface preparation, and application affect coating performance. Coat-
ing integrity and service life will be reduced because of improperly prepared surfaces. Selection
and implementation of proper surface preparation ensures coating adhesion to the substrate and
prolongs the service life of the coating system.
B Selection of the proper method of surface preparation depends on the substrate, the environ-
ment, and the expected service life of the coating system. Economics, surface contamination, and
the effect on the substrate will also influence the selection of surface preparation methods.
C Surface must be clean, dry, and in sound condition. Remove all oil, dust, grease, dirt, loose rust,
and other foreign material to ensure adequate adhesion.
D Poured Concrete:
1 New:
For surface preparation, refer to SSPC-SP13/NACE 6/ICRI # 03732. Surfaces must be clean,
dry, sound and offer sufficient profile to achieve adequate adhesion. Minimum substrate cure
is 28 days at 75°F. Remove all form release agents, curing compounds, salts, efflorescence,
laitance, and other foreign matter by sandblasting, shotblasting, mechanical scarification, or
suitable chemical means. Refer to ASTM D4260. Rinse thoroughly to achieve a final pH
between 8.0 and 10.0. Allow to dry thoroughly prior to coating.
FLUID-APPLIED FLOORING 096700 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
F Fill all cracks, voids, bug holes and joints with appropriate filler or ArmorSeal Crack Filler, Armor-
Seal Joint Sealant, or ArmorSeal Expresspatch.
G Always follow the ASTM methods listed below:
1 ASTM F1869 Moisture Test by use of Calcium Chloride
2 ASTM D4258 Standard Practice for Cleaning Concrete.
3 ASTM D4259 Standard Practice for Abrading Concrete.
4 ASTM D4260 Standard Practice for Etching Concrete.
5 ASTM D4263 Plastic Sheet Method for Checking Moisture in Concrete.
6 SSPC-SP 13/Nace 6 Surface Preparation of Concrete
7 ICRI # 03732 Surface Preparation of Concrete
3.3 INSTALLATION
A Apply all coatings and materials with the manufacturer’s specifications in mind. Mix and thin coat-
ings according to manufacturer’s recommendation.
B Do not apply to wet or damp surfaces.
1 Wait at least 28 days before applying to new concrete or masonry. Or follow manufacturer’s
procedures to apply appropriate coatings prior to 28 days.
2 Test new concrete for moisture content.
C Apply coatings using methods recommended by manufacturer.
D Uniformly apply coatings without runs, or sags, without brush marks, and with consistent sheen.
E Apply coatings at spreading rate required to achieve the manufacturer’s recommended dry film
thickness.
F Inspection: The coated surface must be inspected and approved by the Architect or Engineer just
prior to the application of each coat.
3.4 PROTECTION
A Protect finished coatings from damage until completion of project.
B Touch-up damaged coatings after substantial completion, following manufacturer’s recommenda-
tion for touch up or repair of damaged coatings. Repair any defects that will hinder the perfor-
mance of the coatings.
3.5 SCHEDULES
A See finished schedule in drawings.
END OF SECTION 096700
FLUID-APPLIED FLOORING 096700 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL - NORTH COMMONS 90 % Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 099120 – INTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Include GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, and all applicable Divi-
sion 1 Specification Sections as part of this Section.
B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements that affect work of this Section
whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.
C. Coordinate work with trades affecting, or affected by, work of this Section. Cooperate with such
trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following
interior substrates:
1. Concrete.
2. Steel.
3. Galvanized metal.
4. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated).
5. Wood and MDF.
6. Gypsum board.
B. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of stain and transparent finish
systems on the following interior substrates:
1. Wood.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat
indicated.
1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square.
2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.
3. Label each coat of each Sample.
4. Label each Sample for location and application area.
D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:
1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same
designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
INTERIOR PAINTING 099120 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL - NORTH COMMONS 90 % Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in
Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.
E. Sustainability Submittals:
1. Manufacturers' product data for paints, including printed statement of VOC content and
chemical components for all products together with manufacturer's technical information,
including paint label analysis, VOC content, and Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
2. All flat and non-flat paints shall meet the Green Seal GS-11 standard for VOC content .
3. All anticorrosive and antirust paints applied to interior ferrous metal substrates shall meet
Green Seal Standard GC-03 for VOC content.
4. Other finishes and coatings shall meet the South Coast Air Quality Management District
(SCAQMD) rule 113 for VOC content.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Master Painter’s Institute (MPI) Standards:
1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products
List." Provide manufacturer’s products that provide highest possible MPI (Master
Painter’s Institute) ratings for VOC content (the higher the rating E1, E2, E3, the lower the
VOC content
2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting
Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated.
B. Provide manufacturer’s products that provide highest possible EPR (Environmental
Performance Rating)
C. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction and, for
interior paints and coatings applied at Project site, the following VOC limits, exclusive of
colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24).
1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L.
2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L.
3. Dry-Fog Coatings: 400 g/L.
4. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L.
5. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L.
6. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L.
7. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L.
8. Floor Coatings: 100 g/L.
9. Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L.
10. Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L.
D. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color and finish
selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate
aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of
each paint system specified in Part 3.
a. Wall and Ceiling Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 20 sq. ft.
INTERIOR PAINTING 099120 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL - NORTH COMMONS 90 % Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
2. Apply benchmark samples after permanent lighting and other environmental services
have been activated.
3. Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples.
a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark
samples of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient
temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.
1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are
between 50 and 95 deg F.
B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5
deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as
materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and
color applied.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Benjamin Moore & Co.
2. California Paints.
3. Duron, Inc.
4. ICI Paints.
5. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.
6. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).
7. Pratt & Lambert (P & L)
INTERIOR PAINTING 099120 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL - NORTH COMMONS 90 % Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
2.02 STAINS AND TRANSPARENT FINISHES, GENERAL
A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with the MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its
“MPI Approved Products List”.
B. Material Compatibility:
1. Provide materials for use within each stain and transparent finish system that are
compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and
application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a stain and transparent finish system, provide products recommended in
writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in stain and transparent finish system, and on
substrate indicated.
C. Stain Colors: As selected by Architect from Manufacturer’s full range.
D. Source Limitations: Provide all stains and transparent finish systems from one manufacturer.
2.03 PAINT, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility:
1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another
and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
B. Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that
comply with the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base,
when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24) and the following
chemical restrictions; these requirements do not apply to primers or finishes that are applied in
a fabrication or finishing shop:
1. Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L.
2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L.
3. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by
weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more
benzene rings).
4. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following:
a. Acrolein.
b. Acrylonitrile.
c. Antimony.
d. Benzene.
e. Butyl benzyl phthalate.
f. Cadmium.
g. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate.
h. Di-n-butyl phthalate.
i. Di-n-octyl phthalate.
j. 1,2-dichlorobenzene.
k. Diethyl phthalate.
INTERIOR PAINTING 099120 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL - NORTH COMMONS 90 % Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
l. Dimethyl phthalate.
m. Ethylbenzene.
n. Formaldehyde.
o. Hexavalent chromium.
p. Isophorone.
q. Lead.
r. Mercury.
s. Methyl ethyl ketone.
t. Methyl isobutyl ketone.
u. Methylene chloride.
v. Naphthalene.
w. Toluene (methylbenzene).
x. 1,1,1-trichloroethane.
y. Vinyl chloride.
C. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.04 PRIMERS/SEALERS
A. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI #50.
1. VOC Content: E Range of E3.
2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 3
B. Interior Alkyd Primer/Sealer: MPI #45.
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
C. Wood-Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for use in paint
systems indicated.
2.05 METAL PRIMERS
A. Alkyd Anticorrosive Metal Primer: MPI #79.
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
B. Quick-Drying Alkyd Metal Primer: MPI #76.
1. VOC Content: E Range of E3.
C. Rust-Inhibitive Primer (Water Based): MPI #107.
1. VOC Content: E Range of E3.
2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 3.
D. Cementitious Galvanized-Metal Primer: MPI #26.
1. VOC Content: E Range of E1.
E. Waterborne Galvanized-Metal Primer: MPI #134.
1. VOC Content: E Range of E3.
2. Environmental Performance Rating EPR 3.
INTERIOR PAINTING 099120 - 5
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL - NORTH COMMONS 90 % Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
F. Vinyl Wash Primer: MPI #80.
1. VOC Content: E Range of E3.
G. Quick-Drying Primer for Aluminum: MPI #95.
1. VOC Content: E Range of E3.
2.06 WOOD PRIMERS
A. Interior Latex-Based Wood Primer: MPI #39.
1. VOC Content: E Range of E3.
2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 3
2.07 LATEX PAINTS
A. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex (Low Sheen): MPI #144 (Gloss Level 2).
1. VOC Content: E Range of E3.
2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 4.5.
B. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex (Eggshell): MPI #145 (Gloss Level 3).
1. VOC Content: E Range of E3.
2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 4.5.
C. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex (Semigloss): MPI #147 (Gloss Level 5).
1. VOC Content: E Range of E3.
2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 5.5.
D. High-Performance Architectural Latex (Low Sheen): MPI #138 (Gloss Level 2).
1. VOC Content: E Range of E3.
2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 6.
E. High-Performance Architectural Latex (Eggshell): MPI #139 (Gloss Level 3).
1. VOC Content: E Range of E3.
2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 6.
F. High-Performance Architectural Latex (Satin): MPI #140 (Gloss Level 4).
1. VOC Content: E Range of E3.
2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 6.5.
G. High-Performance Architectural Latex (Semigloss): MPI #141 (Gloss Level 5).
1. VOC Content: E Range of E3.
2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 7.
H. Exterior Latex (Flat): MPI #10 (Gloss Level 1).
1. VOC Content: E Range of E3.
I. Exterior Latex (Semigloss): MPI #11 (Gloss Level 5).
1. VOC Content: E Range of E3.
INTERIOR PAINTING 099120 - 6
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL - NORTH COMMONS 90 % Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
2.08 ALKYD PAINTS
A. Interior Alkyd (Flat): MPI #49 (Gloss Level 1).
1. VOC Content: E Range of E3.
B. Interior Alkyd (Eggshell): MPI #51 (Gloss Level 3).
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
C. Interior Alkyd (Semigloss): MPI #47 (Gloss Level 5).
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 3
D. Interior Alkyd (Gloss): MPI #48 (Gloss Level 6).
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
2.09 QUICK-DRYING ENAMELS
A. Quick-Drying Enamel (Semigloss): MPI #81 (Gloss Level 5).
1. VOC Content: E Range of E3.
B. Quick-Drying Enamel (High Gloss): MPI #96 (Gloss Level 7).
1. VOC Content: E Range of E3.
2.010 ALUMINUM PAINT
A. Aluminum Paint: MPI #1.
1. VOC Content: E Range of E3.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements
for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter
as follows:
1. Concrete: 12 percent.
2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.
3. Wood: 15 percent.
4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
5. Plaster: 12 percent.
C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing
finishes and primers.
INTERIOR PAINTING 099120 - 7
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL - NORTH COMMONS 90 % Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces
are dry.
1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and
conditions.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural
Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.
B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be
painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide
surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall
items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and
incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required
to produce paint systems indicated.
D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk.
Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that
permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods recommended in
writing by paint manufacturer.
F. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal
fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that
promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.
G. Aluminum Substrates: Remove surface oxidation.
H. Wood Substrates:
1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer.
2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off.
3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.
4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood
filler. Sand smooth when dried.
I. Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and
sanded smooth.
INTERIOR PAINTING 099120 - 8
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL - NORTH COMMONS 90 % Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
3.03 APPLICATION
A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed
surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or
furniture with prime coat only.
3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar
hinged items to match exposed surfaces.
B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of
same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide
sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film
has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,
roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color
breaks.
E. Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment rooms and
occupied spaces including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Mechanical Work:
a. Uninsulated ferrous metal piping.
b. Pipe hangers and supports.
c. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.
d. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets
and outlets.
e. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field
painting.
2. Electrical Work:
a. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field
painting.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any
time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paints are being applied:
1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials
being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed,
and certified in presence of Contractor.
2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements.
3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being
used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying-
paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with
rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from
INTERIOR PAINTING 099120 - 9
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL - NORTH COMMONS 90 % Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are
incompatible.
3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from
Project site.
B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by
washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of
other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and
leave in an undamaged condition.
D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or
defaced painted surfaces.
3.06 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. See Finish Schedule in the drawings for finishes required in specific locations.
B. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces:
1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System (MPI INT 3.1C):
a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkali resistant, water based, MPI #3.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching
topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #139.
C. Concrete Substrates, Traffic Surfaces:
1. Water-Based Clear Sealer System (MPI INT 3.2G):
a. First Coat: Sealer, water based, for concrete floors, MPI #99.
b. Topcoat: Sealer, water based, for concrete floors, MPI #99.
D. Clay-Masonry Substrates:
1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System (MPI INT 4.1L):
a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkali resistant, water based, MPI #3.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching
topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #139.
E. Concrete Masonry Unit Substrates:
1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Latex block filler primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex matching topcoat.
INTERIOR PAINTING 099120 - 10
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL - NORTH COMMONS 90 % Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
c. Topcoat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex - sheen varies
F. Steel Substrates:
1. Alkyd System: MPI INT 5.1E.
a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Interior alkyd – sheen varies
2. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: MPI INT 5.1S.
a. Prime Coat: Rust-inhibitive primer (water based).
b. Intermediate Coat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex - sheen varies
G. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:
1. Alkyd System: MPI INT 5.3C.
a. Prime Coat: Cementitious galvanized-metal primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Interior alkyd - sheen varies
2. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: MPI INT 5.3N.
a. Prime Coat: Waterborne galvanized-metal primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex - sheen varies
H. Aluminum (Not Anodized or Otherwise Coated) Substrates:
1. Latex System: MPI INT 5.4H.
a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying primer for aluminum.
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Interior latex - sheen varies
2. Alkyd Over Quick-Drying Primer System: MPI INT 5.4J.
a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying primer for aluminum.
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Interior alkyd - sheen varies
3. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: MPI INT 5.4G.
a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying primer for aluminum.
b. Intermediate Coat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex - sheen varies
I. Dressed Lumber Substrates: Including architectural woodwork, doors, and trim .
1. Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI INT 6.3U.
a. Prime Coat: Interior alkyd primer/sealer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Interior latex semigloss.
2. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: MPI INT 6.3V.
a. Prime Coat: Interior latex-based wood primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex - sheen varies
J. Wood Panel Substrates: Including painted plywood, medium-density fiberboard, and
hardboard.
1. Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI INT 6.4A.
INTERIOR PAINTING 099120 - 11
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL - NORTH COMMONS 90 % Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
a. Prime Coat: Interior alkyd primer/sealer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Interior latex - sheen varies
2. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: MPI INT 6.4T.
a. Prime Coat: Interior latex-based wood primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex - sheen varies
K. Gypsum Board Substrates on exterior walls:
1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: MPI INT 9.2M (VAPOR RETARDER
PRIMER).
a. Prime Coat: Interior latex vapor diffusion retarder/primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex - sheen varies.
L. Gypsum Board Substrates – typical walls and ceilings:
1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: MPI INT 9.2M.
a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex - sheen varies.
M. Gypsum Board Substrates – bathroom ceilings:
1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Alkyd over Latex System: MPI INT 9.2M.
a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior alkyd with mildewcide
matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior alkyd with mildewcide - flat.
N. Gypsum Board and Plaster Substrates – bathroom walls:
1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Alkyd over Latex System: MPI INT 9.2M.
a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior alkyd with mildewcide
matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior alkyd with mildewcide – satin.
3.07 INTERIOR STAIN AND TRANSPARENT FINISH SCHEDULE
A. Wood Substrates: Wood trim as noted in drawings and 06020.
1. Water-Based Varnish over Stain System MPI INT 6.3W:
a. Stain Coat: Stain, semitransparent, for interior wood, MPI #90.
b. First Intermediate Coat: Water-based varnish matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Varnish, water based, clear, semi-gloss, MPI Gloss Level 5, MPI #129.
INTERIOR PAINTING 099120 - 12
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL - NORTH COMMONS 90 % Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
3.08 WASTE MANAGEMENT
1. Separate waste in accordance with the Waste Management Plan. Set aside extra paint
for future color matches, or reuse by Owner, school theater set designers, Habitat for
Humanity, etc. Where local options exist for leftover paint recycling, collect all waste paint
by type and provide for delivery to recycling or collection facility.
2. Close and tightly seal all partly used paint and finish containers and store protected in
well-ventilated, fire-safe area at moderate temperature.
3. Place empty containers of solvent-based paints in areas designated for hazardous
materials.
END OF SECTION 099120
INTERIOR PAINTING 099120 - 13
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 102600 - WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Corner guards.
2. Abuse-resistant wall coverings.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications".
2. Section 092500 "Gypsum Board"
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, impact strength, dimensions of
individual components and profiles, and finishes.
2. Include fire ratings of units recessed in fire-rated walls and listings for door-protection
items attached to fire-rated doors.
B. Shop Drawings: For each type of wall and door protection showing locations and extent.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of impact-resistant wall-protection unit indicated, in
each color and texture specified.
1. Include Samples of accent strips and accessories to verify color selection.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish on the following products, prepared on
Samples of size indicated below:
1. Wall Guards: 12 inches long. Include examples of joinery, corners, end caps, top caps,
and field splices.
2. Corner and End-Wall Guards: 12 inches long. Include example top caps.
3. Abuse-Resistant Wall Covering: 6 by 6 inches square.
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 102600 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For each type of wall and door protection product to include in maintenance
manuals.
1. Include recommended methods and frequency of maintenance for maintaining best
condition of plastic covers under anticipated traffic and use conditions. Include
precautions against using cleaning materials and methods that may be detrimental to
finishes and performance.
1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Wall-Guard Covers: Full-size plastic covers of maximum length equal to 2 percent of
each type, color, and texture of cover installed, but no fewer than two, 96-inch long units.
2. Bed-Locator Covers: Full-size plastic covers equal to 2 percent of each type, color, and
texture of cover installed, but no fewer than two units.
3. Corner-Guard Covers: Full-size plastic covers of maximum length equal to 2 percent of
each type, color, and texture of cover installed, but no fewer than 2, 48-inch long units.
4. Mounting and Accessory Components: Amounts proportional to the quantities of extra
materials. Package mounting and accessory components with each extra material.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store wall and door protection in original undamaged packages and containers inside well-
ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity.
1. Maintain room temperature within storage area at not less than 70 deg F during the
period plastic materials are stored.
2. Keep plastic materials out of direct sunlight.
3. Store plastic wall- and door-protection components for a minimum of 72 hours, or until
plastic material attains a minimum room temperature of 70 deg F.
a. Store corner-guard covers in a vertical position.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of wall- and door-
protection units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including detachment of components from each other or from
the substrates, delamination, and permanent deformation beyond normal use.
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 102600 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, plastics, and other materials beyond normal
use.
2. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain wall- and door-protection products from single source from single
manufacturer.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84 or UL 723; testing by a qualified
testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural &
Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings
and Facilities and ICC A117.1
2.3 CORNER GUARDS
A. Surface-Mounted, Metal Corner Guards: Fabricated as one piece from formed or extruded
metal with formed edges; with 90- or 135-degree turn to match wall condition.
1. Material: Stainless-steel sheet.
a. Thickness: Minimum 0.0781 inch
b. Finish: Directional satin, No. 4.
2. Wing Size: Nominal 3-1/2 by 3-1/2 inches
3. Corner Radius: 1/16 inch
4. Mounting: Adhesive.
2.4 ABUSE-RESISTANT W ALL COVERING 1
A. Abuse-Resistant Sheet Wall Covering: Fiberglass Reinforced Panels (FRP).
1. Size: 48 by 96 inches
2. See the Evaluations for manufacturer's recommendations of sheet thickness for different
levels of abuse.
3. Sheet Thickness: 3/32 inch
4. Color and Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range
5. Height: As indicated.
6. Trim and Joint Moldings: Extruded rigid plastic that matches wall-covering color.
7. Mounting: Adhesive.
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 102600 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Factory Assembly: Assemble components in factory to greatest extent possible to minimize field
assembly. Disassemble only as necessary for shipping and handling.
B. Quality: Fabricate components with uniformly tight seams and joints and with exposed edges
rolled. Provide surfaces free of wrinkles, chips, dents, uneven coloration, and other
imperfections. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, and rigid hairline joints.
2.6 FINISHES
A. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary
protective covering before shipping.
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and wall areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine walls to which wall and door protection will be attached for blocking, grounds, and
other solid backing that have been installed in the locations required for secure attachment of
support fasteners.
1. For wall and door protection attached with adhesive, verify compatibility with and
suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing wall and door protection.
B. Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Installation Quality: Install wall and door protection according to manufacturer's written
instructions, level, plumb, and true to line without distortions. Do not use materials with chips,
cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished Work.
B. Mounting Heights: Install wall and door protection in locations and at mounting heights indicated
on Drawings.
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 102600 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
C. Accessories: Provide splices, mounting hardware, anchors, trim, joint moldings, and other
accessories required for a complete installation.
1. Provide anchoring devices and suitable locations to withstand imposed loads.
2. Where splices occur in horizontal runs of more than 20 feet, splice aluminum retainers
and plastic covers at different locations along the run, but no closer than 12 inches apart.
3. Adjust end and top caps as required to ensure tight seams.
D. Abuse-Resistant Wall Covering: Install top and edge moldings, corners, and divider bars as
required for a complete installation.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Immediately after completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using a
standard ammonia-based household cleaning agent.
B. Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended in writing by
manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 102600
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 102600 - 5
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 102600 - 6
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 104310 - SIGNS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Include GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, and all applicable Divi-
sion 1 Specification Sections as part of this Section.
B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements that affect work of this Section
whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.
C. Coordinate work with trades affecting, or affected by, work of this Section. Cooperate with such
trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract.
1.03 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Panel signs.
2. Dimensional characters (letters and numbers) and logos.
3. Signage accessories.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes for each type of sign.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, and large-scale sections of typical members and
other components. Show mounting methods, grounds, mounting heights, layout, spacing,
reinforcement, accessories, and installation details.
1. Provide message list for each sign, including large-scale details of wording, lettering,
artwork, and Braille layout.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sign material indicated that involves color
selection.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of sign, include the following Samples to verify color
selected:
1. Dimensional Characters: Full-size Samples of each type of dimensional character (letter
and number) required. Show character style, material, finish, and method of attachment.
2. Casting: Show representative texture, character style, spacing, finish, and method of
attachment.
3. Approved samples will be returned for installation into Project.
E. Qualification Data: For Installer.
SIGNS 104340 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
F. Maintenance Data: For signage cleaning and maintenance requirements to include in
maintenance manuals.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by signage manufacturer.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each sign type through one source from a single manufacturer.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and with
code provisions as adopted by authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Interior Code Signage: Provide signage as required by accessibility regulations and
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. These include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a. Illuminated Exit Signs: Refer to Division 16.
b. Stairway Identification
c. Signs for Accessible Spaces
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Measurements: Where sizes of signs are determined by dimensions of surfaces on which they
are installed, verify dimensions by field measurement before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings.
1.07 COORDINATION
A. For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction, advise installers of anchorage
devices about specific requirements for placement of anchorage devices and similar items to be
used for attaching signs.
1. For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction, furnish templates
for installation of anchorage devices.
B. Coordinate location of remote transformers with building construction. Ensure that transformers
are accessible after completion of Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for
product selection:
SIGNS 104340 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the manufacturers specified.
2.2 PANEL SIGNS
A. General: Provide panel signs that comply with requirements indicated for materials,
thicknesses, finishes, colors, designs, shapes, sizes, and details of construction.
1. Produce smooth panel sign surfaces constructed to remain flat under installed conditions
within tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally.
B. Available Manufacturers:
1. Allenite Signs; Allen Marking Products, Inc.
2. American Graphics Inc.
3. Andco Industries Corp.
4. APCO Graphics, Inc.
5. ASI Sign Systems, Inc.
6. Best Manufacturing Co.
7. Grimco, Inc.
8. Innerface Sign Systems, Inc.
9. Kaltech Industries Group, Inc.
10. Mills Manufacturing, Inc.
11. Mohawk Sign Systems.
12. Seton Identification Products.
13. Signature Signs, Inc.
14. Supersine Company (The).
C. Cast-Acrylic Sheet: Manufacturer's standard and as follows:
1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
D. Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy and temper recommended by
aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the
strength and durability properties of 5005-H15.
E. PVC: Extruded, high-impact PVC plastic in color as selected by Architect.
F. Unframed Panel Signs: Fabricate signs with edges mechanically and smoothly finished to
comply with the following requirements:
1. Edge Condition: Square cut.
2. Corner Condition: Square.
G. Frames: Fabricate frames to profile indicated; comply with the following requirements for
materials and corner conditions:
1. Material: Aluminum, extruded or cast.
2. Corner Condition: Square.
H. Laminated Panels: Permanently laminate face panels to backing sheets of material; use
manufacturer's standard process.
SIGNS 104340 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
I. Brackets: Fabricate brackets and fittings for bracket-mounted signs from extruded aluminum to
suit panel sign construction and mounting conditions indicated. Factory-paint brackets in color
matching Architect's sample.
J. Graphic Content and Style: Provide sign copy that complies with requirements indicated on
artwork supplied on electronic media by Architect for size, style, spacing, content, mounting
height and location, material, finishes, and colors of signage.
K. Tactile and Braille Copy: Manufacturer's standard process for producing copy complying with
ADA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1. Text shall be accompanied by Grade 2
Braille. Produce precisely formed characters with square cut edges free from burrs and cut
marks.
1. Panel Material: Opaque acrylic sheet.
2. Raised-Copy Thickness: Not less than 1/32 inch.
L. Applied Copy: Die-cut characters from vinyl film of nominal thickness of 3 mils with pressure-
sensitive adhesive backing. Apply copy to glass, doors.
1. Panel Material: Clear acrylic sheet with opaque color coating, subsurface applied.
M. Colored Coatings for Acrylic Sheet: For copy and background and frame colors, provide
Pantone Matching System (PMS) colored coatings, including inks and paints that are
recommended by acrylic manufacturers for optimum adherence to acrylic surface and are
nonfading for application intended.
2.3 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS
A. Available Manufacturers:
1. American Graphics Inc.
2. A.R.K. Ramos.
3. ASI Sign Systems, Inc.
4. Charleston Industries, Inc.
5. Gemini Incorporated.
6. Grimco, Inc.
7. Innerface Sign Systems, Inc.
8. Kaltech Industries Group, Inc.
9. Metal Arts; Div. of L&H Mfg.
10. Mills Manufacturing, Inc.
11. Mohawk Sign Systems.
12. Signature Sign Signs, Inc.
13. Southwell Co. (The).
B. Aluminum Castings: Provide aluminum castings of alloy and temper recommended by sign
manufacturer for casting process used and for type of use and finish indicated.
C. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy and temper recommended by
aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the
strength and durability properties of 6063-T5.
D. Stainless-Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip: Provide stainless-steel plate, sheet, and strip, Type 302
or Type 304, complying with ASTM A 666.
SIGNS 104340 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
E. Cast-Acrylic Sheet: Manufacturer's standard and as follows:
1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
F. Cast Characters: Form individual letters and numbers by casting. Produce characters with
smooth flat faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles, free from pits, scale,
sand holes, and other defects. Cast lugs into back of characters and tap to receive threaded
mounting studs. Comply with requirements indicated for finish, style, and size.
1. Material: Aluminum.
G. Cutout Characters: Cut characters from solid plate of thickness and metal indicated. Produce
precisely cut characters with square cut, smooth edges. Comply with requirements indicated for
finish, style, and size.
1. Metal: Stainless steel.
H. Fabricated Characters: Fabricate letters and numbers to required sizes and styles, using
metals and thicknesses indicated. Form exposed faces and sides of characters to produce
surfaces free from warp and distortion. Include internal bracing for stability and attachment of
mounting accessories. Comply with requirements indicated for finish, style, and size.
1. Aluminum Sheet: Not less than 0.090 inch thick.
2. Bronze Plate: Not less than 0.032 inch thick.
3. Brass Plate: Not less than 0.032 inch thick.
4. Stainless-Steel Sheet: Not less than 0.050 inch thick for face and 0.031 inch thick for
returns.
5. Character Height: As indicated.
6. Character Style: As selected by architect.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Vinyl Film: Provide opaque reflective vinyl film, 0.0035-inch minimum thickness, with pressure-
sensitive adhesive backing suitable for both exterior and interior applications.
B. Mounting Methods: Use double-sided vinyl tape fabricated from materials that are not corrosive
to sign material and mounting surface.
C. Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for
exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or
lead expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set
into concrete or masonry work.
D. Note Holders: Manufacturer's standard aluminum paper sheet holders.
2.5 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
SIGNS 104340 - 5
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
acceptable if they are within one-half of range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in
same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable
if they are within range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize
contrast.
2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Clear Anodic Finish: Manufacturer's standard clear anodic coating, 0.018 mm or thicker, over a
satin mechanical finish.
B. Clear Finish: Natural satin finish with clear polyurethane protective coat.
2.7 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES
A. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish. Grind and polish surfaces to
produce uniform, directionally textured, polished finish indicated, free of cross scratches. Run
grain with long dimension of each piece.
B. Bright, Cold-Rolled, Unpolished Finish: No. 2B finish.
C. Bright, Directional Polish: No. 4 finish.
D. Satin, Directional Polish: No. 6 finish.
E. Satin, Reflective, Directional Polish: No. 7 finish.
F. Mirrorlike Reflective, Nondirectional Polish: No. 8 finish.
G. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter
and leave surfaces chemically clean.
2.8 SIGNAGE SCHEDULE
NOTE: Font of all signage text and numbers to be of sans serif font as selected by architect from manu-
facturer’s full range of available fonts. Height of stenciled letters and text on plastic signs to be 1” unless
otherwise noted. Color of stencils and plastic signs to be selected by architect from full range of manu-
facturers’ colors.
A. STAIRS AND EGRESS:
1. Plastic signs with pictogram, Braille, and engraved letters at corridor side of stair doors.
2. Plastic tactile directional sign inside each stair door indicating: stair number, floor number, lev-
el of exit discharge, highest level of stair, and other information as required by the Fire Depart-
ment. (Typically 24”x12”)
B. UNIT ENTRIES
1. Cast aluminum numbers and letters. Height: 3”. 3 numbers (i.e. 302) mounted on 12”x6”
aluminum placard with raised braille.
a. Finish to be clear mill finish aluminum.
b. Font to be sans serif as selected by architect from manufacturer’s full range.
SIGNS 104340 - 6
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
D. COMMON SPACES
1. Plastic signs with pictogram (6” minimum), Braille, and engraved letters (3/4” minimum) at all
other rooms including but not limited to:
A. Common rooms: Laundry Room, Community Room, etc.
B. Management offices.
C. Common Uni-Sex Bathrooms.
D. Mechanical/Electrical Rooms, Janitors Closets, Storage, Control Room, etc.
2. Color to be selected by architect from manufacturer’s full range.
E. SITE & MISC.:
1. Cast aluminum address: “###”
Coordinate location and design with Architect. Individual letters/numbers shall be mounted on
aluminum stand-offs, 1” in depth. Provide 1/2 inch thick aluminum mounting plate secured to
wall framing through the cladding.
a. Quantity: 2 locations to be coordinated in the field.
b. Address Number: The building address number is not yet determined.
2. Ground Mount Signage: See civil/landscape drawings.
3. Provide additional labels, tags, and signs as required by the Fire Department
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Verify that items including anchor inserts, and electrical power provided under other sections of
Work are sized and located to accommodate signs.
C. Examine supporting members to ensure that surfaces are at elevations indicated or required to
comply with authorities having jurisdiction and are free from dirt and other deleterious matter.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types
described and in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion
and other defects in appearance.
2. Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable.
Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent
walls. Locate to allow approach within 3 inches of sign without encountering protruding
objects or standing within swing of door.
SIGNS 104340 - 7
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
B. Wall-Mounted Panel Signs: Attach panel signs to wall surfaces using methods indicated below:
1. Silicone-Adhesive Mounting: Use liquid-silicone adhesive recommended in writing by
sign manufacturer to attach signs to irregular, porous, or vinyl-covered surfaces. Use
double-sided vinyl tape where recommended in writing by sign manufacturer to hold sign
in place until adhesive has fully cured.
2. Shim Plate Mounting: Provide 1/8-inch-thick, concealed aluminum shim plates with
predrilled and countersunk holes, at locations indicated, and where other mounting
methods are not practicable. Attach plate with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure
attachment to substrate. Attach panel signs to plate using method specified above.
3. Mechanical Fasteners: Use non-removable mechanical fasteners placed through
predrilled holes. Attach signs with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure attachment
to substrate as recommended in writing by sign manufacturer.
C. Dimensional Characters: Mount characters using standard fastening methods recommended in
writing by manufacturer for character form, type of mounting, wall construction, and condition of
exposure indicated. Provide heavy paper template to establish character spacing and to locate
holes for fasteners.
1. Flush Mounting: Mount characters with backs in contact with wall surface.
3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Protect signs from damage until acceptance by Owner.
END OF SECTION 104310
SIGNS 104340 - 8
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 105220 - FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes fire-protection cabinets for portable fire extinguishers.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 10523 "Fire Extinguishers."
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Show door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and
panel style. Include roughing-in dimensions and details showing mounting method and
relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For fire-protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers
indicated are accommodated.
B. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire protection cabinets with wall depths and fire-ratings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Rated Fire-Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in
ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed.
2.2 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET
A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher.
FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 105220 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1. Basis-of-Design: J.L. Industries, Cosmopolitan Stainless Steel Fire Extinguisher Cabinet,
Recessed.
2. Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Fire-End & Croker Corporation.
b. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc.
c. J.L. Industries, Inc.
d. Larsens Manufacturing Company.
B. Cabinet Construction: Match fire-resistance rating of wall and provide 1-hour fire rated or 2-
hour fire rated as required.
1. Fire-Rated Cabinets: Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from
0.043-inch-thick cold-rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8-inch-thick fire-barrier
material. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.
C. Cabinet Material: Cold-rolled steel sheet.
D. Recessed Cabinet: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping
surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend).
1. At 2x6 Wall Locations: Flat-Edge Trim, 3/8 inch.
2. At 2x4 Wall Locations: Square Trim, 1-1/2 inch.
E. Cabinet Trim and Door Material: Stainless-steel sheet.
F. Door Style: Vertical duo panel with pull handle.
G. Door Glazing: Clear tempered glass.
H. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet
type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.
1. Provide projecting door pull and friction latch.
2. Provide continuous hinge, of same material and finish as trim, permitting door to open
180 degrees.
I. Accessories:
1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to
fire-protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers
indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish.
2. Door Lock: Cam lock that allows door to be opened during emergency by pulling sharply
on door handle.
3. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size,
spacing, and location. Locate as indicated.
a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire-protection cabinet with the words "FIRE
EXTINGUISHER."
1) Location: Applied to cabinet door.
2) Application Process: Decals.
3) Lettering Color: Red.
4) Orientation: Vertical.
FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 105220 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
J. Materials:
1. Cold-Rolled Steel: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.
a. Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat.
b. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.
2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304 with no. 4 directional satin finish.
3. Transparent Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), with Finish 1
(smooth or polished).
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and
hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated.
1. Weld joints and grind smooth.
2. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.
B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials
indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles.
1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2
inch thick.
2. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.
C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground
smooth.
2.4 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with NAAMM's AMP 500, "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products,"
for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire-protection cabinets from damage by
applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Finish fire-protection cabinets after assembly.
D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where cabinets will be
installed.
FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 105220 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare recesses for recessed fire-protection cabinets as required b y type and size of cabinet
and trim style.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Locations: Install fire-protection cabinets in locations indicated on Drawings. If not indicated on
Drawings, coordinate locations with Architect and provide as indicated below:
1. Provide one cabinet at each floor for each stairwell, total of three per floor. Locate cabinet
on wall adjacent to stair door.
B. Mounting Height: Install fire-protection cabinets at mounting heights indicated or, if not
indicated, at 54 inches above finished floor to top of cabinet.
C. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide semi-recessed fire-protection cabinets.
2. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire-protection cabinets, square and plumb.
D. Identification: Apply decals at locations indicated.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire-protection cabinets
are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B. Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking
devices operate properly.
C. On completion of fire-protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as
recommended by manufacturer.
D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire-protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory-
finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire-
protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers.
E. Replace fire-protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond
successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 105220
FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 105220 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 105230 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 105220 "Fire Protection Cabinets."
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include rating and classification, material descriptions,
dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire extinguisher.
B. Product Schedule: For fire extinguishers. Coordinate final fire-extinguisher schedule with fire-
protection cabinet schedule to ensure proper fit and function.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire-protection cabinets to ensure fit and
function.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10.
b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers.
2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 105230 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable
Fire Extinguishers."
B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2.2 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire-protection cabinet indicated.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Badger Fire Protection.
b. Fire End & Croker Corporation.
c. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc.
d. JL Industries, Inc.
e. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division.
f. Larsens Manufacturing Company.
g. Nystrom Building Products.
2. Valves, Handles, and Levers: Manufacturer's standard.
3. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10,
Appendix B.
B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type: UL-rated 2A-10B:C, 5 lbs. nominal capacity, with
monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in manufacturer's standard enameled
container.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.
1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Locations: Install fire extinguishers in each fire-protection cabinet and in compliance with
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
END OF SECTION 105230
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 105230 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 105500 - POSTAL SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. USPS-approved horizontal mail receptacles.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of
postal specialty.
B. Shop Drawings: For postal specialties. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work.
1. Include identification sequence for compartments.
2. Include layout of identification text.
3. Include setting drawings, templates, and installation instructions for anchor bolts and
other anchorages installed as part of the work of other Sections.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Certificates: For each type of postal specialty required to comply with USPS
regulations, signed by product manufacturer. Include written approval by Postmaster General.
B. Other Informational Submittals: Final USPS local postmaster approval for installed postal
specialties to be served by USPS.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For postal specialties and finishes to include in maintenance manuals.
1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Key Blanks: 5 for every lock, for each type of compartment-door lock installed.
POSTAL SPECIALTIES 105500 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations for Each Type of Postal Specialty: Obtain from single source from single
manufacturer. For USPS-approved products, use only those included on current lists of USPS
manufacturers and models.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of recessed and semi-recessed postal specialties with wall
construction.
B. Templates: Obtain templates for installing postal specialties and distribute to parties involved.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of postal specialties that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures.
b. Faulty operation of hardware.
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Manufacturer's standard alloy and temper for type of use and finish indicated, and
as follows:
1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209.
2. Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 221.
2.2 USPS-APPROVED HORIZONTAL MAIL RECEPTACLES
A. Front-Loading, USPS-Approved Horizontal Mail Receptacles: Consisting of multiple
compartments with fixed, solid compartment backs, enclosed within recessed wall box. Provide
access to compartments for distributing incoming mail from front of unit by unlocking master
lock and swinging side-hinged master door to provide accessibility to entire group of
compartments. Provide access to each compartment for removing mail by swinging
compartment door. Comply with USPS-STD-4C.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following
products or a comparable product by one of the manufacturers listed below:
POSTAL SPECIALTIES 105500 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
a. Florence Manufacturing: Versatile 4C Front Load Mailbox, 4C13D-12 (quantity 1)
in the residential lobby
b. Exterior Key Keeper, Model KK, near the residential entrance.
2. Alternate Manufacturers:
a. Jensen Industries.
b. Salsbury Industries.
c. Security Manufacturing Corporation.
3. Mail Delivery: USPS.
4. Compartments: Layout as indicated on Drawings.
a. Residential Units: Provide 12 compartments for residential units with inside
dimensions not less than 3 inches high by 12 inches wide by 15 inches deep.
b. Outgoing Mail: Provide 1 compartments for outgoing mail.
c. Parcels: Provide 2 compartments with inside dimensions not less than 17inches
high by 12 inches wide by 15 inches deep.
5. Front-Loading Master Door: Fabricated from extruded aluminum and braced and framed
to hold compartment doors; prepared to receive master-door lock.
a. Master-Door Lock: Door prepared to receive lock provided by local postmaster.
6. Compartment Doors: Fabricated from extruded aluminum. Equip each with lock and
tenant identification as required by cited standard. Provide custom engraved
compartment doors with black-filled lettering. Provide mail slot in the outgoing mail
compartment.
a. Compartment-Door Locks: Comply with USPS-L-1172C, PSIN O910, for locks
and keys, or equivalent as approved by USPS; with three keys for each
compartment door. Key each compartment differently.
7. Frames: Fabricated from extruded aluminum or aluminum sheet; ganged and nested
units, with cardholder and blank cards for tenant's identification within each compartment.
8. Snap-on Trim: Fabricated from same material and finish as compartment doors.
9. Concealed Components and Mounting Frames: Aluminum or steel sheet with
manufacturer's standard finish.
10. Exposed Aluminum Finish: Finish surfaces exposed to view as follows:
a. Anodic Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Form postal specialties to required shapes and sizes, with true lines and angles, square, rigid,
and without warp, and with metal faces flat and free of dents or distortion. Make exposed metal
edges and corners free of sharp edges and burrs and safe to touch. Fabricate doors of postal
specialties to preclude binding, warping, or misalignment.
B. Preassemble postal specialties in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly.
C. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Cope or miter corner joints. Form joints exposed to weather to
exclude water penetration.
POSTAL SPECIALTIES 105500 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
D. Drill or punch holes required for fasteners and remove burrs. Use security fasteners where
fasteners are exposed. If used, seal external rivets before finishing.
E. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible without distorting or discoloring exposed
surfaces. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces.
F. Fabricate tubular and channel frame assemblies with manufacturer's standard welded or
mechanical joints. Provide subframes and reinforcement as required for a complete system to
support loads.
G. Where dissimilar metals will contact each other, protect against galvanic action by painting
contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by applying other permanent separation as
recommended by manufacturers of dissimilar metals.
2.4 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for roughing-in
openings, clearances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine walls and other adjacent construction for suitable conditions where units will be
installed.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install postal specialties level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written
instructions and roughing-in drawings.
1. Where dissimilar metals will be in permanent contact with each other, protect against
galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by applying other
permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.
2. Where aluminum will contact grout, concrete, masonry, or wood, protect against
corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating.
3. Final acceptance of postal specialties served by USPS depends on compliance with
USPS requirements.
POSTAL SPECIALTIES 105500 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
B. Horizontal Mail Receptacles: Install horizontal mail receptacles with center of tenant-door lock
cylinders and bottom of compartments at the maximum and minimum heights above finished
floor established by USPS and manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Install removable-core and keyed-in door lock cylinders as required for each type of
cylinder lock.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Arrange for USPS personnel to examine and test postal specialties served by USPS after they
have been installed according to USPS regulations.
B. Obtain written final approval of postal specialties to be served by USPS. Obtain this approval
from USPS postmaster that authorizes mail collection for the served installation.
3.4 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as postal specialties are
installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B. Adjust doors, hardware, and moving parts to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended
by manufacturer. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly.
C. Touch up marred finishes or replace postal specialties that cannot be restored to factory-
finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by postal
specialty manufacturer.
D. Replace postal specialties that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful
repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
E. On completion of postal specialty installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as
recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 105500
POSTAL SPECIALTIES 105500 - 5
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
POSTAL SPECIALTIES 105500 - 6
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 106700 – STORAGE SHELVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Vinyl-coated ventilated shelving.
B. Laminated closet systems.
C. Adjustable shelf systems.
D. Shelf standards, brackets and accessories.
E. Storage accessories.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 061000 - Rough Carpentry.
B. Section 062020 – Interior Finish Carpentry.
C. Section 092600 - Gypsum Board Assemblies.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 013000.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog data, detail sheets, and specifications.
C. Shop Drawings: Prepared specifically for this project; show dimensions of shelving and inter-
face with other products.
D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips repre-
senting manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.
E. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches
square representing actual product, color, and patterns.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: All primary products specified in this section will be supplied by a
single manufacturer with a minimum of ten years experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: All products listed in this section are to be installed by a single installer
with a minimum of five years demonstrated experience in installing products of the same type and
scope as specified.
C. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and application
workmanship.
1. Finish areas designated by Architect.
2. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship, color, and sheen are approved
by Architect.
3. Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recom-
mended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental
conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
STORAGE SHELVING 106700 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1.7 WARRANTY
A. At project closeout, provide to Owner or Owner's Representative an executed copy of the
manufacturer's standard limited warranty against manufacturing defect, outlining its terms,
conditions, and exclusions from coverage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1 ClosetMaid Corp.
2 Knape & Vogt Mtg. Co.
3 Stanley Hardware.
B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01600.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Steel Wire: Basic cold drawn, Grade C-1006; average tensile strength over 100, 000 psi (690
MPa); coated.
B. Wire Coating: Proprietary heavy-duty polyvinyl chloride (PVC) formula resin, plasticizers, sta-
bilizers, pigments, and other additives.
1. Thickness: 7 to 17 mil (0.178 to 0.432 mm).
2. Classification: No ingredients listed as hazardous per OSHA 29CFR1910.0017.
2.3 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Coated Wire Shelving:
1. SuperSlide/Linen: 1 inch (25 mm) spacing.
a. Color: White Wire.
b. Color: Satin Chrome.
c. Closet Rod Support: Part # 925.
d. 3/4 inch (19 mm) Closet Rod: Part # 2012.
e. Internal Closet Rod Cap: Part # 2081.
f. Pre-Loaded Side Wall Bracket: Part # 979.
g. Corner Closet Rod: Part # 5649/5748.
2. Close Mesh: 5/8 inch (16 mm) spacing.
a. Color: White Wire.
b. Color: Satin Chrome.
3. TotalSlide: 1 inch (25 mm) spacing.
a. Color: White Wire.
4. Shelf & Rod: 1 inch (25 mm) spacing.
a. Color: White Wire.
5. Linen: 1 inch (25 mm) spacing.
a. Color: White.
B. Laminated Systems: Thermal-Fused Melamine Laminated Particle Board System:
1. Product:
STORAGE SHELVING 106700 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
a. Storage Shelf Thickness: 3/4 inch (19mm).
b. Edge Banding: 0.039 inch (1 mm) PVC.
c. Hang Rod: 1 inch (25 mm) diameter by 20 gauge (0.91 mm) tubular steel.
d. Color: Warm Cognac.
e. Color: Antique White.
f. Color: Chocolate Pear.
g. Color: Candlelight.
h. Color: Clean White.
C. Accessories:
1. Wall Clips.
2. End Brackets.
3. Support Brackets.
4. Poles.
5. Standards.
6. Shelf Brackets.
7. Pole Clips.
8. Hang Track.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions:
1. Prepared spaces are sized and located in accordance with shop drawings.
2. Framing, reinforcement, and anchoring devices are correct type and are located in ac-
cordance with shop drawings.
B. Installer's Examination:
1. Examine conditions under which installation is to be performed; submit written notification
if such conditions are unacceptable.
2. Installation activities started before unacceptable conditions have been corrected is pro-
hibited.
3. Installation indicates installer's acceptance of conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Cut shelves 1/2 inch to 1-3/8 inches (12.7 to 35 mm) shorter than actual wall measurements;
cap all exposed ends.
B. Install shelving plumb and level at heights indicated in accordance with shop drawings and
manufacturer's printed installation instructions.
C. Place wall clips No. 910, 911 every 10 to 12 inches (254 to 305 mm) on level line.
D. Install end brackets No. 932, 933, 914, 940, and 941 on same level line as wall clips, cen-
tered on the front rods of shelves. Support shelves 36 inches (914 mm) maximum with end
brackets, support brackets, or poles.
E. Drill holes where required using sharp bit; do not punch.
F. Drywall: Drill 1/4 inch (6 mm) hole, insert No. 910 or 911 wall clip. Use No. 658 # 8 x 1 inch
(25 mm) pin to expand anchor if unloaded.
G. Wood: Drill 1/4 inch (6 mm) hole into wood, secure wall clip with No. 8 x 1 inch (25 mm)
screw or secure pole clip No. 978 directly to wood with No. 8 x 1-1/4 inch (31 mm) screws.
H. Concrete: Drill 1/4 inch (6 mm) hole with masonry bit, insert wall clip No. 911 or 978 with 250
anchor, secure with No. 8 x 1 inch (25 mm) screws. I. Standards and Brackets:
STORAGE SHELVING 106700 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1. Install standards vertically every 16 inches (406 mm) to a maximum of 24 inches (610
mm) on studs or hang from horizontal hang track.
2. Hang track shall be secured to studs. Once standards are hung from track, secure with
anchors to keep from moving.
3. Attach shelf brackets with SuperSlide, Heavy Duty, Linen, Shelf and Rod and Close
Mesh.
4. For all 12-inch (305 mm), 16-inch (406 mm), and 20-inch (508 mm) decking.
J. Attach shelf brackets with SuperSlide, Heavy Duty, Linen, Shelf and Rod and Close
Mesh for 12-inch (305 mm) shelving and for 16 or 20 inches (406 or 508 mm) decking.
K. Use lightning pole clip No. 978 for linen shelving, clip No. 977 for shelf and rod shelving.
L. Shelf Supports:
1. Place shelf support brackets No. 1164, 1166 or 1180 vertically to the shelf, attach with
No. 954 or 955 wall anchors.
2. Install down clips No 978, 981, or multi-purpose No. 612 with No. 250 anchor or secure to
stud with 1-1/4 inch (31 mm) screws (preferred) on the back rod behind every support
bracket.
3. Spacing, 24 inches (610 mm) to 36 inches (914 mm) o.c. maximum.
M. Attach No. 977 or 978 pole clips at same elevations as wall clips for a given shelf; use with
No. 117, 118, 2117 or 2118 poles.
N. Use No. 120 corner support brackets on all corner "butt" joints.
O. For wall to wall installation, use lightning end bracket No. 932, 933, 940 or 941; drill 1/4 inch
(6 mm) holes, and secure with No. 658 # 8 x 1 inch (25 mm) pins. P. SuperSlide Component
Installation:
1. Place hang bar supports No. 925 or 5672 every 24 to 36 inches (610 to 914 mm); place
express support brackets (No. 1164) adjacent to supports.
2. Use SuperSlide end bracket No. 979 or 980 at side wall where pole is used.
3. Use 12 inch (305 mm) support brackets (No. 1164) for 12 inches or 16 inches (305 or
406 mm) deep shelves.
4. Place pole caps No. 2083 on cut ends of poles.
5. Use pole connector No. 2085 to connect 3/4 inch (19 mm) poles; rest joints in brackets
No. 925.
6. For side wall installation, use end bracket No. 979 or 980.
7. For open end installations, use down clips No. 978, 981, or 612 (612 stud installation
recommended).
Q. TotalSlide Component Installation:
1. Use end bracket No. 947 or 948 at side wall.
2. Use 12 inch (305 mm) express support brackets (No. 1164) for 12 inches deep shelves.
3. Place shelf stop (No. 969) on open ends.
4. For support pole installation use No. 952 or 951 pole clips; use with No. 117, 118, 2117
or 2118 poles.
5. For open end installations, use down clips No. 978, 981, or 612 (612 stud installation pre-
ferred).
3.3 CLEANING
A. As work proceeds, maintain premises free of unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment,
surplus materials, and debris related to this work.
B. Upon completion of installation, clean all surfaces that have become soiled during installation.
END OF SECTION 106700
STORAGE SHELVING 106700 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 108010 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Bathroom accessories.
2. Underlavatory guards.
3. Custodial accessories.
B. Related Requirement:
1. Section 060670 “Plastic and Metal Surfacing Panels” for shower surrounds.
2. Section 061000 “Rough Carpentry” for framed openings and blocking.
3. Section 092500 “Gypsum Board” for fire rated assemblies behind medicine cabinets.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Product Schedule:
1. Identify locations using room designations indicated on Drawings.
2. Identify products using designations indicated on Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BATHROOM ACCESSORIES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc.
2. American Specialties, Inc.
3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
4. Bradley Corporation.
5. General Accessory Manufacturing Co. (GAMCO).
6. Ketcham Medicine Cabinets.
B. Toilet Tissue Dispenser 1:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Moen Toilet Paper Holder YB8099.
2. Description: Single-roll dispenser.
3. Mounting: Surface mounted.
4. Operation: Non-control delivery with standard spindle.
5. Capacity: Designed for 4-1/2- or 5-inch-diameter tissue rolls.
6. Material and Finish: Zinc, chrome finish.
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 108000 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
C. Toilet Tissue Dispenser 2:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: American Specialties, Inc. Toilet Paper Dispenser 20030.
2. Description: Twin Hide-a-roll dispenser.
3. Mounting: Surface mounted.
4. Operation: Controlled delivery with theft resistant rollers.
5. Capacity: Designed for 4-1/2- or 5-inch-diameter tissue rolls.
6. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
D. Shower Curtain Rod:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: American Specialties, Inc. Heavy-duty Shower Curtain Rod
1214.
2. Description: 1-inch OD; fabricated from nominal 0.0375-inch- thick stainless steel.
3. Mounting Flanges: Stainless-steel flanges designed for exposed fasteners.
4. Finish: No. 4 (satin).
E. Shower Curtain at Roll-in Showers:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: KR Specialties Water Control Systems, CUR-132.
2. Mounting: Stainless Steel Hooks on Shower Curtain Rod.
3. Material: Soft Polyester Fabric, stain and flame resistant.
4. Dimensions: 66 inches by 72 inches for 60 inch shower opening.
F. Corner Soap Dish 1:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Swanstone Corner Soap Dish SS-7211.
2. Mounting: Surface mounted.
3. Material and Finish: Match wall surround.
4. Note: See 060670 “Plastic and Metal Surfacing Panels”
G. Corner Soap Dish 2 (see alternate #3 for tile at shower-tub surrounds):
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Dal-Tile Cast Metal Corner Soap Dish.
2. Mounting: Surface mounted with Flange.
3. Material and Finish: Stainless CN14
4. Size: 9-1/8 inch
H. Corner Soap Dish 3 (see alternate #3 for tile at shower-tub surrounds):
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Dal-Tile Cast Metal Corner Soap Dish.
2. Mounting: Surface mounted with Flange.
3. Material and Finish: Stainless CN14
4. Size: 5-1/4 inch
I. Medicine Cabinet:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Ketcham Deluxe Series, 178
2. Mounting: Recessed
3. Size: 18 inch by 36 inch by 4-5/8 inch deep.
4. Rough Opening: Continuous GWB at rated walls.
5. Door: Framed mirror door in stainless steel, satin finish, with continuous piano hinge and
magnetic door catch. Reversible in field.
6. Shelves: Four, adjustable, glass.
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 108000 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
7. Frame: 26 gauge stainless steel.
8. ADA Compliant
J. Wall Mirror 1:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: American Specialties, Inc. Mirror 0600-T.
2. Mounting: Surface – Adjustable Tilt.
3. Glass: Standard.
4. Size: 24 inches by 36 inches
5. Material and Finish: Stainless Steel, satin finish.
K. Wall Mirror 2:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: American Specialties, Inc. Mirror 0600-T.
2. Mounting: Surface – Adjustable Tilt.
3. Glass: Standard.
4. Size: 18 inches by 36 inches
5. Material and Finish: Stainless Steel, satin finish.
L. Robe Hook:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Moen Double Robe Hook, YB8003.
2. Description: Two hooks with concealed fasteners.
3. Material and Finish: Zinc, chrome finish.
M. Towel Bar:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Moen. Round Towel Bar YB8094.
2. Description: 1 inch diameter by 20 gauge tube with circular end brackets.
3. Mounting: Support posts.
4. Length: 24 inches.
5. Material and Finish: Zinc and aluminum, chrome finish.
N. Towel Ring:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Moen Towel Ring YB8086.
2. Description: Ring style with concealed fasteners.
3. Mounting: Surface.
4. Material and Finish: Zinc and Aluminum, Chrome finish.
O. Grab Bar:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: American Specialties, Inc. Grab Bar 3700-P Series.
2. Mounting: Snap-on-Flanges with concealed fasteners.
3. Material: Stainless steel, 18 gauge thick.
a. Finish: Smooth, satin finish on ends and slip-resistant, or peended, texture in grip
area.
4. Outside Diameter: 1-1/4 inches.
5. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings.
P. Tub Seat:
1. (Included in shower unit.)
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 108000 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
Q. Covered Waste Receptacle:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: American Specialties, Inc. 7317.
2. Description: Free standing covered waste receptacle with pedal opening.
3. Size: 2 gallons.
4. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, bright finish.
R. Automatic Hand Dryer:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: American Specialties, Inc. 20200-1.
2. Description: High Speed Hand Dryer.
3. Mounting: Surface
4. Power: GC to coordinate electrical connections with manufacturer’s instructions.
5. Material and Finish: Silver.
S. Automatic Foam Soap Dispenser:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: American Specialties, Inc. 20365.
2. Description: Automatic Foam Soap Dispenser.
3. Mounting: Surface
4. Power: (4) AA 1.5V Batteries
5. Material and Finish: Silver.
T. Shelf with Utility Hooks and Mop Strip:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: American Specialties, Inc. 1308-4.
2. Description: Mop holder with hooks and shelf.
3. Mounting: Surface, 66” above finish floor.
4. Size: 44 inches wide.
5. Material and Finish: Stainless Steel.
U. Utility Hook Strip:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: American Specialties, Inc. 1307-5.
2. Description: Utility hooks on mounting channel.
3. Mounting: Surface, 72” above finish floor.
4. Size: 46 inches wide.
5. Material and Finish: Stainless Steel.
V. Surface Mounted Shelf:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: American Specialties, Inc. 0692-5.
2. Description: Wall mounted shelf with brackets.
3. Mounting: Surface, 42” above finish floor.
4. Size: 48 inches wide by 8 inches deep.
5. Material and Finish: Stainless Steel.
2.2 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc.
2. TCI Products.
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 108000 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
3. Truebro, Inc.
B. Underlavatory Guard:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: TrueBro Lav Guard 2.
2. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies that
prevents direct contact with and burns from piping, and allows service access without
removing coverings.
3. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded-plastic, white.
C. Locations: Install underlavatory guards at all exposed piping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SCHEDULE
A. At unit full bathrooms types 1 and 2, provide the following:
1. One (1) toilet tissue dispenser 1.
2. One (1) corner soap dish in shower.
3. One (1) 12 inch grab bar.
4. One (1) medicine cabinet.
5. One (1) robe hook.
6. Two (2) towel bars.
7. One (1) towel ring.
B. At the fully accessible unit bathroom, provide the following:
1. One (1) toilet tissue dispenser 1.
2. One (1) shower curtain rod (unless provided in shower unit)
3. One (1) shower curtain at roll-in showers.
4. One (1) medicine cabinet.
5. One (1) wall mirror 1.
6. One (1) robe hook.
7. Two (2) towel bars.
8. One (1) towel ring.
9. One (1) 36 inch grab bar at toilet.
10. One (1) 42 inch grab bar at toilet.
11. (shower grab bars include in shower unit)
12. (tub seat included in shower unit)
C. At accessible public bathroom, provide the following:
1. One (1) toilet tissue dispenser 2.
2. One (1) wall mirror 1.
3. One (1) covered waste receptacle.
4. One (1) automatic hand dryer.
5. One (1) automatic soap dispenser.
6. Two (2) 42 inch grab bar at toilet.
D. At Janitor Closet, provide the following:
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 108000 - 5
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1. One (1) shelf with utility hooks and mop strip.
2. One (1) utility hook strip.
3. One (1) surface mounted shelf.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate
to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and
firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
B. Install grab bars and towel bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, complying with
ASTM F 446.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms function smoothly.
Replace damaged or defective items.
B. Clean and polish all exposed surfaces strictly according to manufacturer’s recommendations
after removing temporary labels and protective coatings.
END OF SECTION 108010
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 108000 - 6
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 11451 - RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Cooktops.
2. Ranges.
3. Range hood exhaust ventilation.
4. Wall Ovens.
5. Refrigeration appliances.
6. Dishwashers
7. Laundry Equipment.
B. Related Requirements:
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating
characteristics, dimensions, furnished accessories, and finishes for each appliance.
B. ENERGY STAR: Documentation that products are ENERGY STAR certified.
C. Product Schedule: For appliances. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each residential appliance to include in operation and
maintenance manuals.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of residential appliance from single manufacturer.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the following:
1. ENERGY STAR: PROVIDE APPLIANCES THAT ARE ENERGY STAR CERTIFIED.
2. NFPA: Provide electrical appliances listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 114510 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
C. Accessibility: Where residential appliances are indicated to comply with accessibility
requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's
ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines, ICC/ANSI A117.1, and 521 CMR (MAAB).
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranties: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
residential appliances or components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1. Amana.
2. Broan
3. Electrolux Home Products (Frigidaire).
4. General Electric Company (GE).
5. Jenn-Air.
6. KitchenAid.
7. LG Appliances.
8. Maytag.
9. Sears Brands LLC (Kenmore).
10. Whirlpool Corporation.
2.2 COOKTOPS
A. Electric Cooktop: 30 inch Built-In
1. Basis-of-Design: GE Model # JP5030SJSS
2. Width: 29-7/8 inches.
3. Depth: 21 inches
4. Height: 4 inches.
5. Electric Burner Elements: Four.
a. Smoothtop:
1) 6 inch 1,200W
2) 7 inch 1,500W
3) 7 inch 1,500W
4) 9 inch 3,100W
b. Controls: Front Center.
c. Indicator Lights: Four.
6. Electric Power Supply: 240 V, 60 Hz, 1 phase, 40 A.
7. Material: Stainless steel.
8. Finish: Stainless steel on black.
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 114510 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
2.3 RANGES
A. Electric Range: 30 inch, Free Standing
1. Basis-of-Design: GE Model # PB911SJSS
2. Width: 29-7/8 inches.
3. Depth: 28 inches.
4. Height: 47 inches.
5. Electric Burner Elements: Five.
a. Smoothtop:
1) 6/9 inch 3,100W
2) 6 inch 1,200W
3) 9/12 inch 3,000W
4) 6 inch 1,200W
5) 6 inch 80W
b. Controls: Rear Display
c. Heating Elements Indicator Lights: Five.
d. Hot Surface Indicator Lights: One.
6. Oven Features:
a. Capacity: 5.3 cu. ft.
b. Cleaning: Self-clean.
c. Operation:
1) 6-Pass Bake Element
2) 6-Pass Broil Element
d. Oven Door(s): Counterbalanced, removable, with observation window and full-
width handle.
e. Electric Power Rating:
1) Oven: 2,585 W.
2) Broiler: 3,410 W.
f. Controls: Digital panel controls and timer display.
7. Storage: Removable full-width stainless steel drawer.
8. Electric Power Supply: See electrical drawings.
9. Material: Porcelain-enameled steel.
10. Finish: Stainless Steel.
2.4 RANGE HOOD EXHAUST VENTILATION
A. Overhead Exhaust Hood:
1. Basis-of-Design: GE Model #JVX5305EJES
2. Type: Wall-mounted, exhaust-hood system.
3. Dimensions:
a. Width: 29-7/8 inches.
b. Depth: 20 inches.
c. Height: 5-1/2 inches
4. Exhaust Fan: Two-speed fan, 100 CFM and 270 CFM.
a. Venting: Vented to outside.
b. Fan/Light Controls: Hood-mounted fan switch.
1) Fan/Light controls to be mounted in counter apron at accessible units.
5. Duct Type: Manufacturer's standard.
6. Finish: Stainless Steel.
7. Features:
a. Permanent, washable aluminum mesh filter(s).
b. Dual LED.
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 114510 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
2.5 WALL OVEN
A. Electric Wall Oven: 30 inch Cabinet width.
1. Basis-of-Design: GE Model #JT1000SFSS
2. Width: 29-3/4 inches.
3. Depth: 26-3/4 inches.
4. Height: 28-5/8 inches.
5. Oven Features:
a. Capacity: 5.0 cu. ft.
b. Cleaning: Self-clean.
c. Operation:
1) 6-Pass Bake Element, min.
2) 6-Pass Broil Element, min.
d. Oven Door(s): Counterbalanced, removable, with observation window and full-
width handle.
e. Electric Power Rating:
1) Oven: 2,850 W.
2) Broiler: 4,000 W.
f. Controls: Digital panel controls and timer display.
6. Electric Power Supply: 240 V, 60 Hz, 1 phase, 40 A.
7. Material: Porcelain-enameled steel.
8. Finish: Stainless Steel.
2.6 REFRIGERATOR / FREEZER 1
A. Refrigerator/Freezer, Typical: Two-door refrigerator/freezer with freezer on top.
1. Basis-of-Design: GE Model #GTE18ISHSS
2. Type: Freestanding.
3. Dimensions:
a. Width: 29-1/2 inches.
b. Depth: 34-1/2 inches.
c. Height: 66-5/8 inches.
4. Storage Capacity:
a. Overall: 18.2 cu. ft.
b. Refrigeration Compartment Volume: 13.1 cu. ft.
c. Freezer Volume: 5.1 cu. ft.
5. Features:
a. Separate temperature controls for each compartment.
b. Interior light in refrigeration compartment.
c. Compartment Storage: Two vegetable crispers and one meat compartment.
d. Door Storage: Modular compartments with gallon-milk-container storage.
e. Automatic defrost.
f. Ice Maker: None.
g. ADA Compliant: Yes.
h. Energy Star: Yes.
6. Finish: Stainless Steel.
2.7 REFRIGERATOR / FREEZER 2
A. Refrigerator/Freezer, Typical: Two-door refrigerator/freezer with freezer on top.
1. Basis-of-Design: GE Model #GTE21GSHSS
2. Type: Freestanding.
3. Dimensions:
a. Width: 32-7/8 inches.
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 114510 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
b. Depth: 34 inches.
c. Height: 66-3/4 inches.
4. Storage Capacity:
a. Overall: 21.1 cu. ft.
b. Refrigeration Compartment Volume: 15.1 cu. ft.
c. Freezer Volume: 6.0 cu. ft.
5. Features:
a. Separate temperature controls for each compartment.
b. Interior light in refrigeration compartment.
c. Compartment Storage: Two vegetable crispers and one meat compartment.
d. Door Storage: Modular compartments with gallon-milk-container storage.
e. Automatic defrost.
f. Ice Maker: None.
g. ADA Compliant: Yes.
h. Energy Star: Yes.
6. Finish: Stainless Steel.
2.8 REFRIGERATOR / FREEZER 3
A. Refrigerator/Freezer, Accessible: Side-by-side refrigerator/freezer.
1. Basis-of-Design: Whirlpool Model #WRS331SDHM
2. Type: Freestanding.
3. Dimensions:
a. Width: 32-3/4 inches.
b. Depth: 33-5/8 inches.
c. Height: 66-5/8 inches.
4. Storage Capacity:
a. Overall: 21.4 cu. ft.
b. Refrigeration Compartment Volume: 14.63 cu. ft.
c. Freezer Volume: 6.77 cu. ft.
5. Features:
a. Separate temperature controls for each compartment.
b. Interior light in refrigeration compartment.
c. Compartment Storage: Two vegetable crispers and one meat compartment.
d. Door Storage: Modular compartments with gallon-milk-container storage.
e. Automatic defrost.
f. Ice Maker: Yes.
g. Water Filter: Yes.
h. ADA Compliant: Yes.
i. Energy Star: Yes.
6. Finish: Stainless Steel.
2.9 DISHWASHER 1
A. Dishwasher: Complying with AHAM DW -1 and ASSE 1006.
1. Basis-of-Design: GE Model #GDT605PSMSS
2. Type: Built-in undercounter.
3. Dimensions:
a. Width: 23-3/4 inches.
b. Depth: 24 inches.
c. Height: 34 inches.
4. Sound Level: Maximum 50 dBA.
5. Tub and Door Liner: Molded-plastic door and tub liner with sealed detergent and
automatic rinsing-aid dispensers.
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 114510 - 5
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
6. Rack System: Nylon-coated sliding dish racks, with removable cutlery basket.
7. Controls: Touch-pad controls with four wash cycles and hot-air and heat-off drying cycle
options.
8. Features:
a. Waste food disposer.
b. Self-cleaning food-filter system.
c. Hot-water booster heater for 140 deg F wash water with incoming water at 100
deg F.
d. Delay-wash option.
e. Digital display panel.
9. Energy Star: Yes
10. Finish: stainless steel
2.10 DISHWASHER 2
A. Dishwasher: Complying with AHAM DW -1 and ASSE 1006.
1. Basis-of-Design: GE Model #GLDT696JSS
2. Type: Built-in undercounter.
3. Dimensions:
a. Width: 23-3/4 inches.
b. Depth: 24 inches.
c. Height: 32-11/32 inches.
4. Sound Level: Maximum 50 dBA.
5. Tub and Door Liner: Stainless steel tub and molded-plastic door liner with sealed
detergent and automatic rinsing-aid dispensers.
6. Rack System: Nylon-coated sliding dish racks, with removable cutlery basket.
7. Controls: Touch-pad controls with four wash cycles and hot-air and heat-off drying cycle
options.
8. Features:
a. Waste food disposer.
b. Self-cleaning food-filter system.
c. Hot-water booster heater for 140 deg F wash water with incoming water at 100
deg F.
d. Delay-wash option.
e. Digital display panel.
9. Energy Star: Yes
10. Finish: stainless steel.
2.11 DISHWASHER 3
A. Dishwasher: Complying with AHAM DW -1 and ASSE 1006.
1. Basis-of-Design: GE Model #PDT145SSlSS
2. Type: Built-in undercounter.
3. Dimensions:
a. Width: 17-3/4 inches.
b. Depth: 23-1/2 inches.
c. Height: 32-1/2 inches.
4. Sound Level: Maximum 47 dBA.
5. Tub and Door Liner: Stainless steel tub and molded-plastic door liner with sealed
detergent and automatic rinsing-aid dispensers.
6. Rack System: Nylon-coated sliding dish racks, with removable cutlery basket.
7. Controls: Touch-pad controls with four wash cycles and hot-air and heat-off drying cycle
options.
8. Features:
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 114510 - 6
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
a. Waste food disposer.
b. Self-cleaning food-filter system.
c. Hot-water booster heater for 140 deg F wash water with incoming water at 100
deg F.
d. Delay-wash option.
e. Digital display panel.
9. Energy Star: Yes
10. Finish: stainless steel
2.12 COMMERCIAL LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT
A. Commercial Washer & Dryers: To be provided by vendors.
1. The general contractor is responsible for coordinating the mechanical, plumbing and
electrical device locations for the commercial laundry equipment.
2. The GC shall submit an RFI for commercial laundry equipment specifications prior to the
installation of the MEP systems.
2.13 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SCHEDULES
A. At typical studio and one-bedroom and two-bedroom unit kitchens, provide the following:
1. Refrigerator / Freezer 1
2. 30 Inch Range
3. 30 Inch Range Hood Exhaust
4. Dishwasher 3
B. At two-bedroom unit kitchens, provide the following:
1. Refrigerator / Freezer 2
2. 30 Inch Range
3. 30 Inch Range Hood Exhaust
4. Dishwasher 1
C. At the one (1) fully accessible MAAB Group 2 two-bedroom unit kitchen, provide the following:
1. Refrigerator / Freezer 2
2. 30 Inch Cooktop.
3. 30 Inch Range Hood Exhaust.
4. 30 Inch Wall Oven
5. Dishwasher 2
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 114510 - 7
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
D. At the two (2) fully accessible CBH one-bedroom unit kitchens, provide the following:
1. Refrigerator / Freezer 1
2. 30 Inch Cooktop.
3. 30 Inch Range Hood Exhaust.
4. 30 Inch Wall Oven
5. Dishwasher 2
E. At the common kitchen, provide the following:
1. Refrigerator / Freezer 1
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, power connections, and other conditions affecting installation and
performance of residential appliances.
B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before
appliance installation.
C. Examine walls, ceilings, and roofs for suitable conditions where overhead exhaust hoods will be
installed.
D. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the
Work.
E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Built-in Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or countertops with concealed
fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and that rough openings
are completely concealed.
C. Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in
each area. Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate equipment.
D. Range Anti-Tip Device: Install at each range according to manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Utilities: Comply with plumbing and electrical requirements.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests and Inspections:
1. Perform visual, mechanical, and electrical inspection and testing for each appliance
according to manufacturers' written recommendations. Certify compliance with each
manufacturer's appliance-performance parameters.
2. Leak Test: After installation, test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 114510 - 8
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
3. Operational Test: After installation, start units to confirm proper operation.
4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and components.
B. An appliance will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 114510
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 114510 - 9
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 114510 - 10
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 122400 - WINDOW SHADES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of the
Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1. Roller shades and manual shade operators:
a. Light filtering fabric.
b. Blackout fabric.
B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1. Section 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY for wood blocking and grounds for mounting roller
shades and accessories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include styles, material descriptions, construc-
tion details, dimensions of individual components and profiles, features, finishes, and operating
instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of roller shades. Include elevations, sections, details,
and dimensions not shown in Product Data. Show installation details, mountings, attachments
to other work, operational clearances, and relationship to adjoining work.
C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are
shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:
1. Ceiling suspension system members and attachment to building structure.
2. Ceiling-mounted or penetrating items including light fixtures, air outlets and inlets, speakers,
sprinklers, recessed shades, and special moldings at walls, column penetrations, and
other junctures of acoustical ceilings with adjoining construction.
3. Shade mounting assembly and attachment.
4. Size and location of access to shade operator and adjustable components.
5. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch = 1 foot.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each colored component of each type of shade indicated.
WINDOW SHADES 122400 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1. Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection. E. Samples for Verifica-
tion:
1. Complete, full-size operating unit not less than 16 inches wide for each type of roller shade
indicated.
2. For the following products:
a. Shade Material: Not less than 12-inch- square section of fabric, from dye lot used for
the Work, with specified treatments applied. Show complete pattern repeat. Mark
top and face of material.
b. Valance: Full-size unit, not less than 12 inches long.
F. Window Treatment Schedule: For roller shades. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
G. Product Certificates: For each type of roller shade, signed by product manufacturer.
H. Qualification Data: For Installer.
I. Product Test Reports: For each type of roller shade.
J. Maintenance Data: For roller shades to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following:
1. Methods for maintaining roller shades and finishes.
2. Precautions about cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to fabrics, fin-
ishes, and performance.
3. Operating hardware.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain roller shades through one source from a single manufacturer.
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide roller shade band materials with the fire-
testresponse characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test
method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authori-
ties having jurisdiction:
1. Flame-Resistance Ratings: Passes NFPA 701.
D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate
aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Sub-
stantial Completion.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer and product name, fire-
testresponse characteristics, and location of installation using same designations indicated on
Drawings and in a window treatment schedule.
WINDOW SHADES 122400 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and wet and dirty finish
work in spaces, including painting, is complete and ambient temperature and humidity condi-
tions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
B. Field Measurements: Where roller shades are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimen-
sions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measure-
ments on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operable glazed units' operation hardware
throughout the entire operating range. Notify Architect of discrepancies. Coordinate fabrication
schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Rollers Shades: Before installation begins, for each size, color, texture, and pattern indicat-
ed, full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Blind Saver
2. Draper Inc.
3. Hunter Douglas Contract; RB 500 Shading Systems.
4. MechoShade Systems, Inc.
5. Ventea Blinds
2.2 ROLLER SHADES
A. Shade Band Material: Refer to Finish Schedule.
1. Bottom Hem: Straight.
B. Rollers: Electrogalvanized or epoxy primed steel or extruded-aluminum tube of diameter and wall
thickness required to support and fit internal components of operating system and the weight
and width of shade band material without sagging; designed to be easily removable from sup-
port brackets; with removable spline fitting integral channel in tube for attaching shade material.
1. Direction of Roll: Regular, from back of roller
C. Mounting Brackets: Galvanized or zinc-plated steel.
D. Fascia: L-shaped, formed-steel sheet or extruded aluminum; long edges returned or rolled; con-
tinuous panel concealing front and bottom of shade roller, brackets, and operating hardware
and operators; length as indicated on Drawings removable design for access.
WINDOW SHADES 122400 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
E. Top/Back Cover: L-shaped; material and finish to match fascia; combining with fascia and end
caps to form a six-sided headbox enclosure sized to fit shade roller and operating hardware in-
side.
F. Pocket-Style Headbox: U-shaped, formed-steel sheet or extruded aluminum; long edges re-
turned or rolled; with a bottom cover consisting of slot opening of minimum dimension to allow
lowering and raising of shade and a removable or an openable, continuous metal access panel
concealing shade roller, brackets, and operating hardware and operators within.
G. Bottom Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum. Provide concealed, by pocket of shade material, inter-
nal-type bottom bar with concealed weight bar as required for smooth, properly balanced shade
operation.
H. Mounting: As indicated on Drawings, mounting permitting easy removal and replacement without
damaging roller shade or adjacent surfaces and finishes.
I. Hold-Down Brackets and Hooks or Pins: Manufacturer's standard for anchoring roller shade bot-
tom in place and keeping shade band material taut.
2.3 ROLLER SHADE FABRICATION
A. Product Description: Roller shade consisting of a roller, a means of supporting the roller, a flexible
sheet or band of material carried by the roller, a means of attaching the material to the roller, a bottom
bar, and an operating mechanism that lifts and lowers the shade. B. Concealed Components: Noncor-
rodible or corrosion-resistant-coated materials.
1. Lifting Mechanism: With permanently lubricated moving parts.
C. Unit Sizes: Obtain units fabricated in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, meas-
ured at 74 deg F:
1. Shade Units Installed between (Inside) Jambs: Edge of shade not more than 1/4 inch from
face of jamb. Length equal to head to sill dimension of opening in which each shade is
installed.
2. Shade Units Installed Outside Jambs: Width and length as indicated, with terminations be-
tween shades of end-to-end installations at centerlines of mullion or other defined vertical
separations between openings.
D. Installation Brackets: Designed for easy removal and reinstallation of shade, for supporting fas-
cia, roller, and operating hardware and for hardware position and shade mounting method indi-
cated.
E. Installation Fasteners: No fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal noncorro-
sive to shade hardware and adjoining construction; type designed for securing to supporting
substrate; and supporting shades and accessories under conditions of normal use.
F. Color-Coated Finish: For metal components exposed to view, apply manufacturer's standard
baked finish complying with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation including
pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.
WINDOW SHADES 122400 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
2.4 MANUALLY OPERATED SHADES WITH SINGLE ROLLERS
A. Chain-and-Clutch Operating Mechanisms: With continuous-loop bead chain and clutch that stops
shade movement when bead chain is released; permanently adjusted and lubricated.
1. Bead Chains: Manufacturer's standard.
a. Loop Length: Full length of roller shade.
b. Limit Stops: Provide upper and lower ball stops.
2. Provide chain retainers and break- away chains for child safety.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
for installation tolerances, operational clearances, other conditions affecting performance.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 ROLLER SHADE INSTALLATION
A. Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's writ-
ten instructions, and located so shade band is not closer than 2 inches to interior face of glass. Al-
low clearances for window operation hardware.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or mal-
function throughout entire operational range.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean roller shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and In-
staller, that ensure that roller shades are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion.
C. Replace damaged roller shades that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect, be-
fore time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 122400
WINDOW SHADES 122400 - 5
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
WINDOW SHADES 122400 - 6
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 123560 - RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes kitchen and vanity cabinets.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 061000 “Rough Carpentry”
2. Section 064170 "Countertops and Wallsplashes."
3. Section 092500 “Gypsum Board”
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Cabinets.
2. Cabinet hardware.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, details, and attachments to other work. Show
materials, finishes, filler panels, and hardware.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For cabinet finishes. Provide samples for each finish on each
wood species as well as a secondary option for each frame style and finish.
D. Samples for Verification: Exposed hardware, for each type of item.
1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install casework until building is enclosed, wet
work is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining
temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the
construction period.
B. Established Dimensions: Where casework is indicated to fit to other construction, establish
dimensions for areas where casework is to fit. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual
dimensions correspond to established dimensions. Provide fillers and scribes to allow for
trimming and fitting.
C. Field Measurements: Where casework is indicated to fit to existing construction, verify
dimensions of existing construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Provide fillers and scribes to allow for trimming and fitting.
RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK 123560 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of blocking and reinforcement in partitions for support of
casework.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CABINETS
A. General: Architect to select cabinet style, wood species, staining, and finishes from
manufacturer’s full range.
B. Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with HUD “Severe Use” requirements, provide
Advanta Cabinets, or comparable product by one of the following per architect approval:
1. Advanta Cabinets.
2. Cardell Cabinetry.
3. Crotone Kitchens Inc.
4. Dudley Cabinets, Inc.
5. Echelon Cabinetry.
6. Evans Cabinet Corporation.
7. Kraftmaid Cabinetry, Inc.
8. Lanz Cabinets.
9. Legacy Cabinets Inc.
10. MasterBuilt Cabinets, Inc.
11. Master WoodCraft Cabinetry LLC.
12. Metropolitan Cabinets.
13. Mid-America Cabinets.
14. Republic Industries.
15. S & W Cabinets, Inc.
16. Saco Industries, Inc.
17. Smart Cabinetry LLC.
18. Tru-Wood Cabinets, Inc.
C. Quality Standard: Provide cabinets that comply with HUD “Severe Use” requirements.
D. Face Style: Full overlay.
E. Unit Kitchen and Unit Bathroom Cabinet Style: Trevent SLAB. Subject to change to other
available style selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.
F. Unit Kitchen Cabinet Finish: Autumn Brown. Subject to change to other available finish selected
by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.
G. Unit Bathroom Cabinet Finish: Truffle. Subject to change to other available finish selected by
Architect from manufacturer’s full range.
H. Common Kitchen Cabinet Style: Trevent SLAB. Finish, Mocha. Subject to change to other
available style and finish selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.
I. Door and Drawer Fronts: Solid-wood stiles and rails, 5/8 inch thick, with 3/4-inch- thick, solid-
wood center panels.
RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK 123560 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
J. Face Frames: 3/4-by-2-1/2-inch solid wood with glued mortise and tenon or doweled joints.
K. Exposed Cabinet End Finish: Wood veneer.
L. Cabinet End Construction: 1/2-inch- thick multi-ply Type 1 exterior glue hardwood plywood,
dadoed to receive tops and bottoms.
M. Cabinet Tops and Bottoms: 1/2-inch-thick multi-ply hardwood plywood, fully supported by and
secured in rabbets in end panels and back rail.
N. Hanging Rails: 3/4-by-3-inch solid wood at wall cabinets. 3/4-by-7-1/4-inch solid wood at base
cabinets. Interlocking with end panels and rabbeted to receive top and bottom panels. Back
rails secured under pressure with glue and with mechanical fasteners.
O. Wall-Hung-Unit Back Panels: 1/4-inch- thick hardwood plywood fastened to rear edge of end
panels and to top and bottom rails.
P. Base-Unit Back Panels: 1/4-inch- thick hardwood plywood fastened to rear edge of end panels
and to top and bottom rails.
Q. Front Frame Drawer Rails: 3/4-by-1-1/4-inch solid wood mortised and fastened into face frame.
R. Drawers: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws from interior
of body.
1. Join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued rabbeted joints supplemented by mechanical
fasteners.
2. Subfronts, Backs, and Sides: 11/16-inch-thick solid wood.
3. Bottoms: 1/4-inch-thick hardwood plywood.
S. Shelves: 1/2-inch-thick multi-ply hardwood plywood.
T. Toe Board: Toe kick is 4 inches high and recessed 4 inches. Nominal 3 /4 inch thick, ACQ
pressure treated toe board captured between end panels.
U. Joinery: Rabbet backs flush into end panels and secure with concealed mechanical fasteners.
Connect tops and bottoms of wall cabinets and bottoms and stretchers of base cabinets to ends
and dividers with mechanical fasteners. Rabbet tops, bottoms, and backs into end panels.
V. Breadboards: Breadboards shall be installed in the factory with drawer guides per
123560.2.3.E.2.
W. Factory Finishing: Finish cabinets at factory. Furniture Quality protective finish system on
doors, drawer fronts, front frames, and veneer plywood end panels consisting of sanding, stain,
catalyzed sealer and catalyzed clear top coats.
2.2 CABINET MATERIALS
A. General:
1. Adhesives and Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Do not use products that
contain urea formaldehyde.
2. Hardwood Lumber: Kiln dried to 7 percent moisture content.
RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK 123560 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
3. Softwood Lumber: Kiln dried to 10 percent moisture content.
4. Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1; made with adhesive containing no urea formaldehyde.
5. Particleboard: Not permitted.
6. MDF: Not permitted.
7. Hardboard: Not permitted.
B. Exposed Materials:
1. Exposed Wood Species: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
a. Select materials for compatible color and grain. Do not use two adjacent exposed
surfaces that are noticeably dissimilar in color, grain, figure, or natural character
markings.
b. Staining and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2. Solid Wood: Clear hardwood lumber of species indicated, free of defects.
3. Plywood: Hardwood plywood with face veneer of species indicated, with Grade A faces
and Grade C backs of same species as faces.
a. Edge band exposed edges with veneer edging of same species as face veneer.
C. Semi-exposed Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide one of the following:
1. Solid Wood: Sound hardwood lumber, selected to eliminate appearance defects. Same
species as exposed surfaces or stained to be compatible with exposed surfaces.
2. Plywood: Hardwood plywood with Grade C faces and not less than Grade 3 backs of
same species as faces. Face veneers of same species as exposed surfaces or stained
to be compatible with exposed surfaces.
D. Concealed Materials: Solid wood or plywood, of any hardwood or softwood species, with no
defects affecting strength or utility.
E. Crown Moldings: Small Cove Crown Molding, SMCC8.
1. Specie and finish to match cabinets.
2.3 CABINET HARDWARE
A. General: Manufacturer's standard units complying with BHMA A156.9, of type, size, style,
material, and finish as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
B. Pulls: Contemporary wire pulls, stain nickel, 154 mm length.
C. Knobs: Contemporary T knob, satin nickel, 40 mm length.
D. Hinges: Heavy-duty, high-quality steel, concealed 6-way adjustable hinge with gentle-touch,
soft-close feature.
E. Drawer Guides: High-quality epoxy coated steel, Extreme Grade, side mounted guides, self-
adjusting in mounting brackets, which are screwed into solid wood sides. Built-in stop, self-
closing, and stay-closed features with a 100 lbs. rated load capacity.
1. See alternates for drawer guide upgrades.
2. Breadboard guides shall be heavy duty ball-bearing full-extension guides with a 220 lbs.
rated load capacity.
RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK 123560 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances, location of framing and reinforcements, and other conditions affecting performance
of casework.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install cabinets with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces; use concealed shims.
Where cabinets abut other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit. Provide filler strips,
scribe strips, and moldings in finish to match cabinet face.
B. Install cabinets without distortion so doors and drawers fit the openings, are aligned, and are
uniformly spaced. Complete installation of hardware and accessories as indicated.
C. Install cabinets level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet.
D. Fasten cabinets to adjacent units and to backing.
1. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16
inches O.C. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for not less than 1-1/2-inch penetration
into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips.
2. GC is responsible for coordinating blocking locations for all Residential Casework.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust cabinets and hardware so doors and drawers are centered in openings and operate
smoothly without warp or bind. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by
manufacturer.
B. GC is responsible for protecting all factory finishes during construction. Damaged, dinged or
scratched factory finishes on exposed and semi-exposed factory finishes are not acceptable.
C. Clean casework on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces.
END OF SECTION 123560
RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK 123560 - 5
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK 123560 - 6
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 14210 – ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Include GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, and all applicable Di-
vision 1 Specification Sections as part of this Section.
B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements that affect work of this Sec-
tion whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.
C. Coordinate work with trades affecting, or affected by, work of this Section. Cooperate with
such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies electric traction elevators.
B. Work Required:
1. The work required under this section consists of all labor, materials and services re-
quired for the complete installation (including operational verification) of all the
equipment required for the elevator as herein specified.
2. All work shall be performed in a first class, safe and workmanlike manner.
3. In all cases where a device or part of the equipment is herein referred to in the singu-
lar, it is intended that such reference shall apply to as many of such devices or parts
as are required to make complete installation.
C. Related work not specified herein: The following sections contain requirements that relate to
this section and are performed by trades other than the elevator manufacturer/installer.
1. Division 1 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: protection of floor open-
ings and personnel barriers; temporary power and lighting.
2. Division 2 - Earthwork: excavation for elevator pit.
3. Division 3 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: elevator pit, Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: ma-
sonry hoistway enclosure, building-in and grouting hoistway doorframes, and grouting
of sills.
4. Division 5 - Metal Fabrications: divider beams, and supports for entrances and rails.
5. Division 7 - Cementitious Waterproofing: waterproofing of elevator pit.
6. Division 8 - Gypsum Board Assemblies for portions of the elevator shaft
7. Division 15 - Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning: ventilation and temperature
control of elevator equipment space.
8. Division 16 - Electrical: Main disconnects for each elevator. Electrical power for ele-
vator installation and testing. The installation of dedicated GFCI receptacles in the pit
and overhead. Lighting in controller space, machine area and pit. Wiring for tele-
phone service to controller, installation of fire and smoke detectors at required loca-
tions and interconnecting devices; fire alarm signal lines to contacts in the machine
room, ADAAG-required emergency telephone communications equipment.
D. Applicable Codes: Comply with applicable building codes and elevator codes at the project
site, including but not limited to the following:
1. 780 CMR Massachusetts State Building Code 9th Edition
ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS 14210 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
2. 521 CMR Massachusetts State Access Code
3. 527 CMR Massachusetts State Electric Code
4. ASME, ANSI, A 17.1 2004 Elevator Code
5. 524 CMR, Section 35, Massachusetts State Elevator Code
1.03 WORK INCLUDED
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Equipment Description: Kone EcoSpace traction elevator. A Machine Room is required in
Massachusetts.
B. Equipment Control: Electronic Control System .
C. Quantity of Elevators: 1
D. Elevator Stop Designations: 5
E. Stops: Level 0, Level 1, Level 2, Level 3, Level 4
F. Openings: In line
G. Travel: 41’
H. Rated Capacity: 3500 lb.
I. Rated Speed: 200 fpm
J. Platform Size: See Drawings
K. Cab Clear Inside Dimensions: 6’ 8" W x 5’-6-3/16”
L. Cab Height: 8’ 0”
M. Clear height under suspended ceiling: See drawings
N. Entrance Type and Width: Left-Hand and Right-Hand Doors 3' 6"
O. Entrance Height: 7' 0" (2134 mm)
P. Main Power Supply: 208v, three-Phase, with a separate equipment grounding conductor.
Q. Car Lighting Power Supply: 120 Volts, Single-phase, 15 Amp, 60 Hz.
R. Machine Location: Inside the hoistway mounted on car guide rail
S. Signal Fixtures: Manufacturer's Vandal Resistant. ADA and CMR code approved.
T. Controller Location: Controller shall be located adjacent to the hoistway at the fourth floor.
U. Performance:
1. Car Speed: +/-5 % of contract speed under any loading condition or direction of travel.
2. Car Capacity: Safely lower, stop and hold up to 125% of rated load.
V. Ride Quality:
1. Vertical Vibration (maximum): 25 milli-g
2. Horizontal Vibration (maximum): 25 milli-g
3. Vertical Jerk (maximum): 4.6 ± 1.0 ft./sec2 (1.4 ± 0.3 m/sec2)
4. Acceleration/Deceleration (maximum): 1.3 ft/sec3
5. In Car Noise: 50 - 55 dB(A)
6. Stopping Accuracy: ± 0.2 in. (± 5 mm)
7. Re-leveling Distance: ± 0.4 in. (± 10 mm)
W. Operation: Duplex Collective Operation: Using a microprocessor-based controller, the opera-
tion shall be automatic by means of the car and hall buttons. In the absence of system activi-
ty, one car can be made to park at the pre-selected main landing. The other (free) car shall
remain at the last landing served. Only one car shall respond to a hall call. If either car is re-
moved from service, the other car shall immediately answer all hall calls, as well as its own
car calls.
X. Operating Features:
1. Full Collective Operation
2. Anti-nuisance.
3. Fan and Light Protection.
4. Load Weighing Bypass.
5. Independent Service.
6. Firefighters' Service Phase I and Phase II
7. Top of Car Inspection.
ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS 14210 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
8. MRO Manual Rescue Operation
Y. Operation Features:
1. Car Secure Access.
2. Emergency Medical Service.
3. Solid State Controls
4. Battery operated recall system
Z. Door Control Features:
1. Door control to open doors automatically when car arrives at a landing in response to
a normal hall or car call.
2. Elevator doors shall be provided with a reopening device that will stop and reopen
the car door(s) and hoistway door(s) automatically should the door(s) become ob-
structed by an object or person.
a. Primary door protection shall consist of a two dimensional, multi-beam array
projecting across the car door opening. Under normal operation and for any
door position, the system shall detect as a blockage an opaque object that is
equal to or greater than 1.3 inches (33 mm) in diameter when inserted between
the car doors at vertical positions from within 1 inch (25 mm) above the sill to
71 inches (1800 mm) above the sill. Under degraded conditions (one or more
blocked or failed beams), the primary protection shall detect opaque objects
that are equal to or greater than 4" (100 mm) in diameter for the same vertical
coverage. If the system performance is degraded to the point that the 4" object
cannot be detected, the system shall maintain the doors open.
b. The door reopening device shall also include a secondary, three dimensional,
triangular infrared multi-beam array projecting across the door opening and ex-
tending into the hoistway door zone. The door opening device will cause the
doors to reopen when it detects a person(s) or object(s) entering or exiting the
car in the area between the hoistway doors or the entryway area adjacent to
the hoistway doors.
d. The secondary protection shall have an anti-nuisance feature that will ignore
detection in the secondary zone after continual detection occurs for a signifi-
cant time period in the secondary zone without corresponding detection in the
primary protection zone; i.e. a person/object is in the entryway but does not en-
ter. Normal secondary protection shall be re-enabled whenever detection oc-
curs in the primary zone.
e. The reaction time of the door detector sub-system shall not exceed 60 millisec-
onds when both primary and secondary protection capabilities are active; nor
40 milliseconds when the secondary protection is disabled. Door nudging shall
be eliminated during normal operation. The doors will remain in the open posi-
tion until the person moves or the obstruction is removed the doorway.
AA. Provide equipment according to seismic zone for project: Zone 2.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for each system proposed for use. Include
the following:
1. Signal and operating fixtures, operating panels and indicators.
2. Cab design, dimensions and layout.
3. Hoistway-door and frame details.
ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS 14210 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
4. Electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
5. Expected heat dissipation of elevator equipment in control room space and machine
space (BTU).
6. Color selection chart for Cab and Entrances.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit approval layout drawings. Include the following:
1. Clearances and travel of car.
2. Clear inside hoistway and pit dimensions.
3. Location and layout of equipment and signals.
4. Car, guide rails, buffers and other components in hoistway.
5. Maximum rail bracket spacing.
6. Maximum loads imposed on building structure.
7. Hoist beam requirements.
8. Location and sizes of access doors.
9. Location and details of hoistway doors and frames.
10. Electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
C. Operations and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturer's standard operations and
maintenance manual.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Elevator manufacturer shall be ISO 9002 certified.
B. Installer: Elevators shall be installed by a qualified installer.
C. Permits, Inspections and Certificates: The Elevator Contractor shall obtain and pay for nec-
essary State Inspection and permit fees as required by the elevator inspection authority, and
make such tests as are called for by the regulations or such authorities. These tests shall be
made in the presence of such authorities or their authorized representatives. All prime time
inspection costs shall be the responsible of the Elevator Contractor unless requested by the
Owner.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Should the building or the site not be prepared to receive the elevator equipment at the
agreed upon date, the General Contractor will be responsible to provide a proper and suitable
storage area on or off the premises.
B. Should the storage area be off-site and the equipment not yet delivered, then the elevator
contractor, upon notification from the General Contractor, will divert the elevator equipment to
the storage area. If the equipment has already been delivered to the site, then the General
Contractor shall transport the elevator equipment to the storage area. The cost of elevator
equipment taken to storage by either party, storage, and redeliver to the job site shall not be
at the expense of the elevator contractor.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. The elevator contractor's acceptance is conditional on the understanding that their warranty
covers defective material and workmanship. The guarantee period shall not extend longer
than three (3) year from the date of completion or acceptance thereof by beneficial use,
whichever is earlier, of the elevator. The guarantee excludes: ordinary wear and tear or im-
proper use, vandalism, abuse, misuse, or neglect or any other causes beyond the control of
ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS 14210 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
the elevator contractor and this express warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, express or
implied, including any warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose.
1.08 MAINTENANCE and SERVICE
A. A complete preventive maintenance program, consisting replacing worn or defective parts,
and regular examinations and adjustments of the elevator equipment shall be provided by the
elevator contractor for a period of three (3) years after the elevator has been turned over for
the customer's use. This service shall not be subcontracted but shall be performed by the el-
evator contractor. All work shall be performed by competent, licensed employees during
regular working hours of regular working days and shall include emergency 24-hour callback
service. This service shall not cover adjustments, repairs or replacement of parts due to neg-
ligence, misuse, abuse or accidents caused by persons other than the elevator contractor.
Only genuine parts and supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of the original
equipment shall be provided.
B. The periodic lubrication of elevator components shall be required, including: Sheaves, Rails,
Belts, Ropes, Car and CWT guides, etc. The elevator control system must:
1. Provide in the controller the necessary devices to run the elevator in inspection oper-
ation.
2. Provide on top of the car the necessary devices to run the elevator in inspection op-
eration.
3. Provide in the controller an emergency stop switch. This emergency stop switch
when opened disconnects power from the brake and prevents the motor from run-
ning.
4. Provide in the event of a power outage, means from the controller to electrically lift
and control the elevator brake to safely bring the elevator to the nearest available
landing.
5. Provide the means from the controller to reset the governor over speed switch and
also trip the governor.
6. Provide the means from the controller to reset the emergency brake when set be-
cause of an unintended car movement or ascending car over speed.
7. Provide the means from the controller to reset elevator earthquake operation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 DESIGN AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. Provide AC gearless machine room-less elevator system subject to compliance with the de-
sign and performance requirements of this specification. Elevator manufacturers may include
but are not limited to one of the following:
1. Basis of Design: EcoSpace traction elevators by KONE, Inc. (www.kone.com)
2. Other acceptable machine room-less products: manufacturer with minimum 15 years
experience in manufacturing, installing, and servicing elevators of the type required
for the project, per architect approval.
2.02 EQUIPMENT: CONTROL ROOM COMPONENTS
A. Controller: A microcomputer based control system shall be provided to perform all of the
functions of safe elevator operation.
ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS 14210 - 5
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1. All high voltage (110V or above) contact points inside the controller cabinet shall be
protected from accidental contact in a situation where the controller doors are open.
2. Controller shall be separated into two distinct halves; Motor Drive side and Control
side. High voltage motor power conductors shall be routed so as to be physically seg-
regated from the rest of the controller.
3. Field conductor terminations points shall be segregated; high voltage (>30 volts DC
and 110 VAC,) and low voltage (< 30 volts DC)
4. The controller shall be designed and tested for Electromagnetic Interference (EMI)
immunity (May 1998): "EMC Product Family Standards for lifts, escalators, and pas-
senger conveyors Part 2 - immunity"
5. The controller shall be equipped with the following filters and gaskets to reduce Elec-
tromagnetic Interference (EMI) emissions to levels that comply with the EN 12015
(May 1998): "EMC Product Family Standards for lifts, escalators, and passenger
conveyors Part 1 - Emission":
a. Current Harmonic Filter
b. Anti Pollution Device
c. Single Phase Filter
d. Current Controlled Choke
e. SOFT-SHIELD® 5000 Conductive Fabric over Foam Gaskets
B. Drive: A Variable Voltage Variable Frequency AC drive system shall be provided.
2.03 EQUIPMENT: HOISTWAY COMPONENTS
A. Machine: AC gearless machine, with permanent-magnet motor, direct current electro-
mechanical disc brakes and integral traction drive sheave, mounted to the car at the top of
the hoistway.
B. Governor: Friction type over-speed governor rated for the duty of the elevator specified.
C. Buffers, Car and Counterweight: Polyurethane type buffers shall be used.
D. Hoistway Operating Devices:
1. Emergency stop switch in the pit
2. Terminal stopping switches.
3. Emergency stop switch on the machine.
E. Positioning System: System consisting of magnets and proximity switches.
F. Guide Rails and Attachments: Guide rails shall be Tee-section steel rails with brackets and
fasteners. Side counterweight arrangements shall have a dual-purpose bracket that com-
bines both counterweight guide rails, and one of the car guide rails to building fastening.
G. Coated Steel Belts: Standard Steel Roping
H. Governor Rope: Governor rope shall be steel and shall consist of at least eight strands
wound about a sisal core center.
I. Fascia: Galvanized sheet steel shall be provided at the front of the hoistway.
ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS 14210 - 6
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
J. Hoistway Entrances:
1. Frames: Entrance frames shall be of bolted construction for complete one-piece unit
assembly. All frames shall be securely fastened to fixing angles mounted in the
hoistway and shall be of 14-gauge (2 mm) sheet steel.
2. Sills: Shall be of nickel silver.
3. Doors: Entrance doors shall be of hollow metal construction with vertical internal
channel reinforcements.
4. Fire Rating: Entrance and doors shall be UL fire rated for 1-1/2 hour.
5. Entrance Finish: Painted steel on all floors. Color to be selected by architect from the
paint manufacturer's standard color chart.
6. Entrance Marking Plates: Entrance jambs shall be marked with 4" x 4" (102 mm x
102 mm) plates having raised floor markings with Braille located underneath the floor
marking. Marking plates shall be provided on both sides of the entrance.
7. Sight Guards: Sight guards will be furnished with the same material of the finished
doors.
2.04 EQUIPMENT: CAR COMPONENTS
A. Car Frame and Safety: A car frame fabricated from formed or structural steel members shall
be provided with adequate bracing to support the platform and car enclosures. The car safety
shall be integral to the car frame and shall be Type "B", flexible guide clamp type.
B. Cab Options: Steel Shelf Cab with laminated vertical removable panels. Finish to be selected
by Architect from manufacturer’s full range. Brushed Stainless Steel finished base plate lo-
cated at top and bottom. Basis-of-design for cab interior is Standard, Classic Chic, 42003.
C: Steel Cab Finish: Satin stainless steel.
D. Car Door Finish: Satin stainless steel.
E. Ceiling Type: Rectangular LED Light Panel
F. Emergency Car Lighting: An emergency power unit employing a 6-volt sealed rechargeable
battery and totally static circuits shall be provided to illuminate the elevator car and provide
current to the alarm bell in the event of building power failure.
G. Fan: A one-speed 120 VAC fan will be mounted to the ceiling to facilitate in-car air circulation,
meeting A17.1 code requirements. The fan shall be rubber mounted to prevent the transmis-
sion of structural vibration and will include a baffle to diffuse audible noise. A switch shall be
provided in the car-operating panel to control the fan. A variable speed fan will be available
when Glassback cab option is selected.
H. Handrail: Handrails shall be provided on the rear wall of the car enclosure. Handrails shall be
round 1-1/4" diameter extruded stainless steel with satin finish. Handrail ends shall return to
the wall.
I. Threshold: Extruded Aluminum
J. Emergency Pulsating Siren: Siren mounted on top of the car that is activated when the Alarm
button in the car operating panel is engaged. Siren shall have a rated sound pressure level of
80 dB(A) at a distance of 3.0 m from the device. Siren shall respond with a delay of not more
than 1 second after the switch or push button has been pressed.
ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS 14210 - 7
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
K. Emergency Exit Contact: An electrical contact shall be provided on the car-top exit.
L. Slide Guides: Provide manufacturer’s standard slide guides.
M. Platform: The car platform shall be constructed of metal. Load weighing device shall be
mounted on the belts at the top of the hoistway.
N. Certificate frame: Provide a Certificate frame with a satin stainless steel finish.
O. The LED ceiling lights and the fan should automatically shut off when the system is not in use
and be powered back up after a passenger calls the elevator and pushes a hall button.
P. Car Floor Finish: Tile by others to match adjacent Lobby. See finish schedule.
Q. Skirting: Stainless Steel with Satin Finish.
2.05 EQUIPMENT: SIGNAL DEVICES AND FIXTURES
A. Car Operating Panel: A car operating panel shall be provided which contains all push but-
tons, key switches, and message indicators for elevator operation. The car operating panel
shall have a satin stainless steel finish.
B. Hinged swing car operating panel shall be furnished. It shall contain a bank of round mechan-
ical illuminated buttons. Flush mounted to the panel and marked to correspond to the land-
ings served, an emergency call button, door open and door close buttons, and switches for
lights, inspection and the exhaust fan. The emergency call button shall be connected to a bell
that serves as an emergency signal. All buttons to have raised numerals and Braille mark-
ings. LED red halo illumination with 1/8" projecting targets. Target finish is satin stainless
steel.
The car operating panel shall be equipped with the following features:
1. Raised markings and Braille shall be provided to the left hand side of each push-
button.
2. Car Position Indicator at the top of and integral to the car operating panel.
3. Door open and door close buttons.
4. Light key-switch.
5. Fan key-switch.
6. Inspection key-switch.
7. Elevator Data Plate marked with elevator capacity and car number.
8. Illuminated alarm button with raised markings.
9. In car keyed stop switch
10. Firefighter's hat (standard USA)
11. Firefighter's Phase II Key-switch (standard USA)
12. Call Cancel Button (standard USA)
13. Help Button - The help button shall initiate two-way communication between the car
and a location inside the building, switching over to another location if the call is un-
answered, where personnel are available who can take the appropriate action. Visual
indicators are provided for call initiation and call acknowledgement.
14. Firefighter's Phase II emergency in-car operating instructions, worded according to
A17.1 2000, Article 2.27.7.2.
15. Landing Passing Signal: A chime bell shall sound in the car to signal that the car is
either stopping at or passing a floor served by the elevator.
ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS 14210 - 8
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
C. Car Position Indicator: A digital, LED car position indicator shall be integral to the car operat-
ing panel.
D. Hall Fixtures: Hall fixtures shall feature round mechanical buttons in flush mount face frame
with vandal resistant buttons. Buttons shall be 1/8" projecting in vertically mounted fixture.
Hall lanterns and position indicators shall be illuminated by means of LED. Fixture shall be
satin stainless steel finish.
E. Car Lantern and Chime: A directional lantern visible from the corridor shall be provided in the
car entrance. When the car stops and the doors are opening, the lantern shall indicate the di-
rection in which the car is to travel and a chime will sound.
F. Telephone Cabinet: A telephone compartment shall be furnished in the return panel below
the car operating panel. Necessary wires for the telephone shall be included in the compart-
ment and connected to the car traveling cable. The telephone instrument shall be furnished
by others.
G. Access key-switch at top floor in entrance jamb.
H. Access key-switch at lowest floor in entrance jamb.
I. Coaxial cable (RG6) in traveling cable.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Field measure and examine substrates, supports, and other conditions under which elevator
work is to be performed.
B. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
C. Prior to start of Work, verify hoistway is in accordance with shop drawings. Dimensional tol-
erance of hoistway from shop drawings: -0 inches +2 inches. Do not begin work of this sec-
tion until dimensions are within tolerances.
D. Prior to start of W ork, verify projections greater then 2 inches (4 inches if ASME A17.1/CSA
B44 2000 applies) must be beveled not less then 75 degrees from horizontal.
E. Prior to start of Work, verify landings have been prepared for entrance sill installation. Tradi-
tional sill angle or concrete sill support shall not be required.
F. Prior to start of Work, verify elevator pit has been constructed in accordance with require-
ments, is dry and reinforced to sustain vertical forces, as indicated in approved submittal.
Verify that sumps or sump pumps located within pit will not interfere with installed elevator
equipment.
G. Prior to start of Work, verify control space has been constructed in accordance with require-
ments, with access coordinated with elevator shop drawings, including Sleeves and pene-
trations.
H. Verify installation of GFCI protected 20-amp in pit and adjacent to each signal control cabinet
in control space.
ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS 14210 - 9
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
3.02 PREPARATION
I. Coordinate installation of anchors, bearing plates, brackets and other related accessories.
3.03 INSTALLATION
J. Install equipment, guides, controls, car and accessories in accordance with manufacturer in-
stallation methods and recommended practices.
K. Properly locate guide rails and related supports at locations in accordance with manufactur-
er’s recommendations and approved shop drawings. Anchor to building structure using iso-
lation system to minimize transmission of vibration to structure.
L. All hoistway frames shall be securely fastened to fixing angles mounted in the hoistway. Co-
ordinate installation of sills and frames with other trades.
M. Lubricate operating system components in accordance with manufacturer recommendations.
N. Perform final adjustments, and necessary service prior to substantial completion.
3.04 CONSTRUCTION
O. Interface with Other Work:
1. Guide rail
brackets attached to steel shall be installed prior to application of fireproofing.
2. Coordi-
nate construction of entrance walls with installation of door frames and sills. Maintain
front wall opening until elevator equipment has been installed.
a. Ensure adequate support for entrance attachment points at all landings.
b. Coordinate wall openings for hall push buttons, signal fixtures and sleeves. Each ele-
vator requires sleeves within the hoistway wall.
c. Coordinate emergency power transfer switch and power change pending signals as
required for termination at the primary elevator signal control cabinet in each
group.
d. Coordinate interface of elevators and fire alarm system.
e. Coordinate interface of dedicated telephone line.
f. Coordinate the installation of the non-fused three phase permanent power disconnect
in hoist way at top landing
3.05 TESTING AND INSPECTIONS
P. Perform recommended and required testing in accordance with authority having jurisdiction.
Q. Obtain required permits and provide originals to Owner’s Representative.
3.06 DEMONSTRATION
ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS 14210 - 10
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
R. Prior to substantial completion, instruct Owner’s Representative on the proper function and
required daily maintenance of elevators. Instruct personnel on emergency procedures.
END OF SECTION 14210
ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS 14210 - 11
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS 14210 - 12
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 124840 - FLOOR MATS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Resilient entrance floor mats.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For floor mats and adhesive.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For floor mats.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For floor mats to include in maintenance manuals.
1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Entrance Mats: Equal to 100 percent of amount installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS, GENERAL
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural &
Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings
and Facilities, ICC A117.1, and 521 CMR.
2.2 RESILIENT ENTRANCE MATS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Forbo Coral Brush,
5741 Cannon Grey; or a comparable product by one of the following:
FLOOR MATS 124840 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1. American Floor Products Company, Inc.
2. American Mat & Rubber Company.
3. Arden Architectural Specialties, Inc.
4. Balco, Inc.
5. C/S Group.
6. Flexco.
7. Mats Inc.
8. Pawling Corporation; Architectural Products Division.
9. U.S. Mat & Rubber Corporation.
B. Carpet-Type Mats: Approximately 3/16-inch-thick polypropylene carpet bonded to 1/4-inch-
thick, flexible rubber backing to form mats 7/16 inch thick with nonraveling edges.
1. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry
colors.
2. Mat Size: As indicated on Drawings. Mat shall extend under door thresholds.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesive: Adhesive as recommended by mat manufacturer for substrate indicated.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Floor Mats: Shop fabricate units to greatest extent possible in sizes indicated. Unless
otherwise indicated, provide single unit for each mat installation; do not exceed manufacturer's
recommended maximum sizes for units that are removed for maintenance and cleaning. Where
joints in mats are necessary, space symmetrically and away from normal traffic lanes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and floor conditions for compliance with requirements for location, sizes,
and other conditions affecting installation of floor mats.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install surface-type units to comply with manufacturer's written instructions for glue-down
application at locations indicated; coordinate with entrance locations and traffic patterns.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Maintain protection until construction traffic has ended and Project has reached Substantial
Completion.
END OF SECTION 124840
FLOOR MATS 124840 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
FIRE PROTECTION 210000 - i
SECTION 21 00 00
FIRE PROTECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND REFERENCES ....................................................................... 1
1.2 DEFINITIONS .................................................................................................................................. 1
1.3 SCOPE ............................................................................................................................................. 2
1.4 RELATED WORK UNDER OTHER SECTIONS ............................................................................. 3
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................................. 3
1.6 SUBMITTALS ................................................................................................................................... 5
1.7 SURVEYS AND MEASUREMENTS ................................................................................................ 8
1.8 COORDINATION ............................................................................................................................. 8
1.9 ELECTRICAL COORDINATION ...................................................................................................... 8
1.10 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION DRAWINGS................................................ 9
1.11 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................... 10
1.12 TYPICAL DETAILS ........................................................................................................................ 10
1.13 SLEEVES, INSERTS ..................................................................................................................... 10
1.14 FIRESTOPPING, SMOKEPROOFING & WATERPROOFING ..................................................... 10
1.15 CORING, DRILLING ...................................................................................................................... 10
1.16 ACCESSIBILITY ............................................................................................................................ 10
1.17 SUPPLEMENTARY SUPPORTING STEEL .................................................................................. 11
1.18 TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................ 11
1.19 PORTABLE AND DETACHABLE PARTS ..................................................................................... 11
1.20 RECORD DRAWINGS, PROJECT CLOSEOUT ........................................................................... 11
1.21 GUARANTEE/WARRANTY ........................................................................................................... 12
1.22 OPERATING, INSTRUCTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS ................................................. 13
1.23 QUALITY ASSURANCE ................................................................................................................ 13
1.24 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING ..................................................................................... 14
1.25 STAGING AND SCAFFOLDING .................................................................................................... 14
1.26 EXTRA MATERIALS ...................................................................................................................... 14
1.27 DESIGN CRITERIA ........................................................................................................................ 15
1.28 FIRE PROTECTION WORKING PLANS ....................................................................................... 15
1.29 UNIT PRICES ................................................................................................................................ 18
PART 2 PRODUCTS .................................................................................................................................. 18
2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS ..................................................................................................................... 18
2.2 UNDERGROUND FIRE SERVICE ................................................................................................ 19
2.3 WET PIPE SPRINKLER AND STANDPIPE (175 psi) ................................................................... 19
2.4 DRY PIPE SPRINKLER ................................................................................................................. 20
2.5 VALVES ......................................................................................................................................... 21
2.6 HANGERS, ANCHORS, CLAMPS AND INSERTS ....................................................................... 23
2.7 FIRE DEPARTMENT INLET CONNECTION................................................................................. 23
2.8 SPRINKLER HEADS ..................................................................................................................... 23
2.9 SPRINKLER CABINET .................................................................................................................. 24
2.10 SIGNALING DEVICES ................................................................................................................... 24
2.11 WATER PRESSURE GAUGES ..................................................................................................... 25
2.12 SLEEVES AND PENETRATIONS ................................................................................................. 25
PART 3 EXECUTION .................................................................................................................................. 26
3.1 COORDINATION ........................................................................................................................... 26
3.2 SHUT DOWNS ............................................................................................................................... 26
3.3 TESTS ............................................................................................................................................ 26
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
FIRE PROTECTION 210000 - ii
3.4 PIPE VALVE AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION ..................................................................... 27
3.5 ANCHORS AND INSERTS ............................................................................................................ 28
3.6 TYPICAL DETAILS ........................................................................................................................ 28
3.7 CORING, DRILLING ...................................................................................................................... 28
3.8 SUPPLEMENTARY SUPPORTING STEEL .................................................................................. 28
3.9 SPRINKLER / STANDPIPE INSTALLATION................................................................................. 29
3.10 WATER SERVICE ......................................................................................................................... 29
3.11 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS................................................................................................................. 30
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
FIRE PROTECTION 210000 - 1
SECTION 21 00 00
FIRE PROTECTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND REFERENCES
A. Include “General Requirements” and applicable parts of Division 1 as part of this section.
B. Examine all other sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work under this
Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this section. Where paragraphs of
this section conflict with similar paragraphs of Division 1, requirements of this section shall
prevail.
C. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this section.
Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract.
D. The Subcontractor shall be responsible for filing all documents, payment of all fees, and securing
of all inspections and approvals necessary for the work of this section.
E. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall carry in the Bid Price all Utility Company and Municipal
back charges for all materials furnished and work performed by them in conjunction with this
Contract and pay same to the respective agency upon demand. The Fire Protection
Subcontractor shall not be entitled to additional compensation after the submittal of his bid price
should he fail, for any reason, to obtain the total back charge costs to be incurred by the local
utility companies or municipal agencies.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. As used in this section, “provide,” means “furnish and install”, and “POS” means “Provided Under
Other Sections”.
B. As used in the Contract Drawings and Specifications for Fire Protection work, certain non-
technical words shall be understood to have specific meanings as follows, regardless of
indications to the contrary in the General Conditions of other documents governing the Fire
Protection work.
1. “Furnish” means: Purchase and deliver to the project site complete with every necessary
appurtenance and support all as part of the Fire Protection work. Purchasing shall include
payment of all sales taxes and other surcharges as may be required to assure that purchased
item(s) are free of all liens, claims, or encumbrances.
2. “Install” means: Unload at the delivery point at the site and perform every operation
necessary to establish secure mounting and correct operation at the proper location in the
project, all as part of the Fire Protection work.
3. “Provide” means: “Furnish” and “Install”.
4. “New” means: Manufactured within the past two (2) years and never before used.
C. Except where modified by a specific notation to the contrary, it shall be understood that the
indication and/or description of any fire protection item in the Contract Drawings or Specifications
for Fire Protection work carries with it the instruction to furnish, install and connect the item as
part of the Fire Protection work, regardless of whether or not this instruction is explicitly stated.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
FIRE PROTECTION 210000 - 2
D. It shall be understood that the Specifications and Drawings for Fire Protection work are
complimentary and are to be taken together for a complete interpretation of the Fire Protection
work.
1.3 SCOPE
A. Perform work and provide material and equipment as shown on Drawings and as specified or
indicated in this Section of the Specifications. Completely coordinate work of this Section with
work of other trades and provide a complete and fully functional installation.
1. Water supply from existing main to building.
2. Exterior water service piping.
3. Wet pipe sprinkler system and all components.
4. Dry pipe sprinkler system for attic and all components.
5. Fire department inlet connections.
6. Sprinkler heads, piping, fittings, hangers and valves.
7. Gate valves, check valves, drain valves, fire department valves.
8. Preparation of complete and detailed Shop Drawings in accordance with NFPA No. 13.
9. Preparation of complete and detailed Working Plans.
10. Submitting Drawings and obtaining necessary approvals, permits and certificates.
11. Tests.
12. Securing hydrant flow test data reports.
13. Hydraulic calculations.
14. Miscellaneous steel support.
15. Combined sprinkler and standpipe system and all components.
16. Assisting the Owner in preparing a fire protection impairment plan.
17. Furnish and install water flow switches and tamper switches. Flow and tamper switches shall
be wired to the fire alarm system under the Electrical section of this specification.
B. Drawings and Specifications form complimentary requirements; provide work specified and not
shown, and work shown and not specified as though explicitly required by both. Although work is
not specifically shown or specified, provide supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances, devices and materials obviously necessary for a sound, secure and complete
installation.
C. Give notices, file plans, obtain permits and licenses, pay fees and back charges, and obtain
necessary approvals from Authorities Having Jurisdiction as required to perform work in
accordance with all legal requirements and with Specifications, Drawings, Addenda and Change
Orders, all of which are part of Contract Documents.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
FIRE PROTECTION 210000 - 3
1.4 RELATED WORK UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
A. The following items are not included in this section and will be performed under the designated
sections.
1. Temporary Facilities.
2. Earthwork: Excavation and backfill.
3. Concrete:
a. Equipment foundations.
b. Housekeeping pads.
c. Rebar for items “a, and b” above.
4. Masonry: All openings in masonry walls.
5. Waterproofing, Dampproofing and Caulking.
6. Roofing and Flashing.
7. Painting: All painting.
8. Finished Carpentry and Millwork.
9. Steel Doors and Frames.
10. Finished Hardware.
11. Elevators and Lifts.
12. Electrical.
13. Plumbing.
14. HVAC.
15. Electric power wiring for all equipment.
16. Fire alarm system and controls.
17. Utilities beyond 10’-0” from the building.
18. Installation of access panels.
19. Electric heat tracing.
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with all applicable Federal and State laws, and all Local Codes, By-laws and Ordinances.
B. Where provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the
latter shall govern. Where the contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or
regulations, the contract provisions shall govern unless the Architect rules otherwise.
C. Request inspections from Authorities Having Jurisdiction, and obtain all permits and pay for all
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
FIRE PROTECTION 210000 - 4
fees and inspection certificates as applicable and/or required. All permits and certificates shall be
turned over to the Owners at the completion of the work. Copies of permits shall be given to the
resident engineer prior to the start of work.
D. Unless otherwise specified or indicated, materials and workmanship and equipment performance
shall conform with the adapted by the State edition of the following standards, codes,
Specifications, requirements and regulations:
1. State Building Code.
2. National Electric Code (NEC).
3. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA).
4. Department of Environmental Protection (DEP).
5. Local Ordinances, Regulations of the City or Town of Northampton.
6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
7. Owner’s Insurance Underwriters.
8. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
9. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).
10. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM).
11. American Welding Society (AWS).
12. Commercial Standards, U.S. Department of Commerce (CS).
13. Factory Mutual (FM).
14. Industrial Risk Insurers (IRI).
15. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
16. American Gas Association (AGA).
17. Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. (UL).
18. U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, Guidelines for Construction and Equipment
for Hospital and Medical Facilities.
19. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE).
20. Massachusetts or State Water Resource Authority (MWRA).
21. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry (MSS).
22. Architectural Access Board (AAB).
23. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
E. All Fire Protection work shall meet or exceed any other State and Local Codes and/or Authorities
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
FIRE PROTECTION 210000 - 5
Having Jurisdiction including all other standards indicated herein.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. This paragraph shall supplement Division 1.
B. Definitions:
1. Shop Drawings: Scaled detailed working Drawings (system layout) and equipment
Specifications (cut sheets) indicating all information in accordance with requirements of the
applicable NFPA Standards for the specific fire protection systems to be installed in
accordance with the Registered Professional Engineer’s plans and Specifications.
2. Coordination Drawings: Detailed, large-scale layout Shop Drawings showing HVAC,
Electrical, Plumbing and Fire Protection work superimposed to identify conflicts and ensure
inter-coordination of Mechanical, Electrical, Architectural, Structural and other work.
C. Submittals, Procedures and Format:
1. Review submittal packages for compliance with Contract Documents and then submit to
Architect for review. Submit transparency and two (2) blue or black-line reproductions of
each Shop Drawing larger than 8-1/2” x 11”. Submit eight (8) sets of each smaller shop
drawing. After review, transparency original of each large Shop Drawing and six (6) sets of
each small shop drawing will be returned with reviewer’s marks. Electronically submitted
shop drawings are acceptable.
2. Each Shop Drawing shall indicate in title block, and each Product Data package shall indicate
on cover sheet, the following information:
a. Title.
b. Name and location of project.
c. Names of Architect, Engineer, Contractor and Subcontractor(s).
d. Names of Manufacturer, Supplier, Vendor, etc.
e. Date of submittal.
f. Whether original submittal or resubmitted.
g. Contractors’ license number and expiration date.
3. Shop Drawings showing manufacturer’s product data shall contain detailed dimensional
Drawings, accurate and complete description of materials of construction, manufacturer’s
published performance characteristics and capacity ratings (performance data alone is not
acceptable), electrical requirements and wiring diagrams.
D. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. The Fire Protection design for this project is based on the single manufacturer listed in the
specification, schedule or shown on the Contract Drawings. In these Specifications certain
“Alternate Manufacturers” are listed as being acceptable. These are acceptable only if, as a
minimum, they:
a. Meet all performance criteria listed in the schedules and outlined in the Specifications.
b. Have identical operating characteristics to those called for in the Specifications.
c. Fit within the available space it was designed for, including space for maintenance and
component removal, with no modifications to either the space or the product. Clearances
to walls, ceilings and other equipment will be at least equal to those shown on the
Contract Documents. The fact that a manufacturer’s name appears as acceptable shall
not be taken to mean the Architect has determined that the manufacturer’s products will
fit within the available space. This determination is solely the responsibility of the
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
FIRE PROTECTION 210000 - 6
Contractor.
d. For equipment mounted in areas where structural matters are a consideration, the
products must have a weight no greater than the product listed in the schedules or
Specifications.
e. Products must adhere to all architectural considerations including, but not limited to,
being the same size and of the same physical appearance as scheduled or specified
products.
E. Substitutions: Substitution of products by manufacturers other than those listed shall only be done
in accordance with subparagraph “F” “Substitutions and Deviations”.
F. Substitutions and Deviations:
1. Deviations from the Contract Documents and the substitution of materials or equipment
relative to the “Acceptable Manufacturers” (referred to above) shall be requested individually
in writing whether deviations result from field conditions, standard shop practice, or other
cause. Submit letter with transmittal of Shop Drawings which flags the substitution or
deviation to the attention of the Architect. The letter shall describe changes in the system
shown and physical characteristics (connections to adjacent materials, electrical services,
service access requirements, and other characteristics), and differences in operating
characteristics.
2. Without letters flagging the substitution or deviation to the Architect, it is possible that the
Architect may not notice such substitution or deviation or may not realize its ramifications.
Therefore, if such letters are not submitted to the Architect, the Contractor shall hold the
Architect and his consultants harmless for any and all adverse consequences resulting from
the deviations being implemented. Adverse consequences shall include, but not be limited
to, excessive noise, excessive maintenance, shortened longevity, spatial coordination
problems, and inadequate performance versus scheduled design. This shall apply
regardless of whether the Architect has reviewed or approved Shop Drawings containing the
deviation, and will be strictly enforced.
3. Do not request substitute materials or equipment unless identical material or equipment has
been operated successfully for at least three (3) consecutive years. Such materials and
equipment shall be a regular cataloged item shown in the current catalog of the
manufacturer. When deviation or substitution is permitted, coordinate fully with related
changes to Architectural, Structural, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Mechanical, and other work.
Ensure that related changes necessary for coordination of substituted items are made within
the Contract Price. Assume full responsibility for safety, operation and performance of the
altered system.
4. Substitutions of equipment, systems, etc. requiring approval of local Authorities must comply
with such regulations and be filed by the Contractor (should filing be necessary).
5. Consideration will not be given to claims that the substituted item meets the performance
requirements with lesser construction. Performance, as delineated in schedules and in the
Specifications, shall be interpreted as minimum performance.
6. Approval of proposed deviations or substitutions, if any, will be made at discretion of
Architect.
7. If equipment is proposed for substitution that is not tested and rated according to industry-
wide standards, the Architect shall have the right to have performance tests completed, at the
Contractor’s expense, to confirm the manufacturer’s performance claims.
G. Submittal Notations: Submittals will be returned from the Architect marked as illustrated below:
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
FIRE PROTECTION 210000 - 7
NO EXCEPTION TAKEN
NOT ACCEPTED
ACCEPTED AS NOTED
REVISE AND RESUBMIT
1. Checking is only for general conformance with the design concept of the project and general
compliance with the information given in the contract documents. Any action shown is
subject to the requirements of the Contract Drawings and Specifications. Contractor is
responsible for dimensions which shall be confirmed and correlated at the job site; fabrication
process and techniques of construction; coordination of his work with that of all other trades;
and the satisfactory performance of his work.
H. Schedule: Incorporated the Shop Drawing review period into the construction schedule so that
work is not delayed. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for delays caused by not
incorporating the following Shop Drawing review time requirements into his project schedule.
Allow at least ten (10) working days, exclusive of transmittal time, for review each time shop a
Shop Drawing is submitted or resubmitted with the exception that fifteen (15) working days,
exclusive of transmittal time, are required for the following:
1. Coordination Drawings, if required by this Specification.
2. If more than five (5) Shop Drawings of this trade are received in one (1) calendar week.
I. List of Proposed Equipment and Materials: Within four (4) weeks after Award of Contract and
before ordering materials or equipment, submit a complete list of proposed materials and
equipment and indicate manufacturer’s names and addresses. No consideration will be given to
partial lists submitted out of sequence.
J. Responsibility:
1. The intent of submittal review is to check for capacity, rating, and certain construction
features. Contractor shall ensure that work meets requirements of the Contract Documents
regarding information that pertains to fabrication processes or means, methods, techniques,
sequences and procedures of construction; and for coordination of work of this and other
Sections. Work shall comply with submittals marked “REVIEWED” to extent that they agree
with the Contract Documents. Submittal review shall not diminish responsibility under this
Contract for dimensional coordination, quantities, installation, wiring, supports and access for
service, nor the Shop Drawing errors or deviations from requirements of the Contract
Documents. The Architect’s noting of some errors while overlooking others will not excuse
the Contractor for proceeding in error. Contract Document requirements are not limited,
waived, nor superseded in any way by review.
2. Inform Subcontractors, Manufacturers, Suppliers, etc. of scope and limited nature of review
process and enforce compliance with the Contract Documents.
K. Material and equipment requiring Shop Drawing Submittals shall include but not be limited to:
1. Wet pipe sprinkler system components including alarm valves, pipe, fittings, sprinkler heads,
pressure gauges, etc.
2. Dry pipe sprinkler system components including dry pipe valves, pipe, fittings, sprinkler
heads, air compressor, pressure gauges, etc.
3. Fire department connections.
4. Sprinkler heads, pipe, fittings, hangers and valves.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
FIRE PROTECTION 210000 - 8
5. Valves including gate, fire department, drain and test type.
6. Access panels.
7. Seismic restraints.
8. Sprinklers shall be referred to on drawings and shall be specifically identified by the listed
manufacturer’s style or series designation. Trade names and abbreviations are not
permitted.
1.7 SURVEYS AND MEASUREMENTS
A. Base all required measurements, both horizontal and vertical, on reference points established by
the General Contractor and be responsible for the correct laying out of the Fire Protection work.
In the event of a discrepancy between actual measurements and those indicated, notify the
General Contractor in writing. Do not proceed with the work required until written instructions
have been issued by the General Contractor.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, and Electrical Drawings are diagrammatic. They indicate
general arrangements of Mechanical and Electrical systems and other work. They do not show
all offsets required for coordination nor do they show the exact routings and locations needed to
coordinate with Structural and other trades and to meet Architectural requirements.
B. Work shall be performed in cooperation with other trades on the project and so scheduled as to
allow speedy and efficient completion of the work.
C. Furnish to other trades advance information on locations and sizes of all frames, boxes, sleeves
and openings needed for their work. Furnish information and Shop Drawings necessary to allow
trades affected by the work to install their work properly and without delay.
D. In all spaces, prior to installation of visible material and equipment, including access panels,
review Architectural Drawings for exact locations and where not definitely indicated, request
information from Architect. Where the Fire Protection work shall interfere with the work of other
trades, assist in coordinating the space conditions to make satisfactory adjustments before
installation. Without extra cost to the Owner, make reasonable modifications to the work as
required by normal Structural interferences. Pay the General Contractor for additional openings,
or relocating and/or enlarging existing openings through concrete floors, walls, beams and roof
required for any work which was not properly coordinated. Maintain maximum headroom at all
locations. All piping, duct, conduit, and associated components to be as tight to underside of
structure as possible.
E. If any Fire Protection work has been installed before coordination with other trades so as to cause
interference with the work of such trades, all necessary adjustments and corrections shall be
made by the fire protection trades involved without extra cost to the Owner.
F. Where conflicts or potential conflicts exist and engineering guidance is desired, submit sketch of
proposed resolution to Architect for review and approval.
G. Protect all materials and work of other trades from damage which may be caused by the Fire
Protection work, and repair all damages without extra cost to the Owner.
1.9 ELECTRICAL COORDINATION
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
FIRE PROTECTION 210000 - 9
A. Fire Protection Subcontractor shall furnish and install various electrical items relating to the fire
protection equipment and control apparatus. The Electrical Subcontractor shall be required to
connect power wiring to this equipment unless noted otherwise.
B. The Fire Protection and Electrical Subcontractors shall coordinate their respective portions of the
work, as well as the electrical characteristics of the fire protection equipment.
C. All power wiring and local disconnect switches will be provided by the Electrical Subcontractor for
the line voltage power.
D. 120V and above power wiring sources extended and connected to fire protection control panels,
transformers and switches shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Subcontractor.
E. Flow and tamper switches shall be connected to the Building’s fire alarm system by the Electrical
Subcontractor.
1.10 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Coordination Drawings:
1. The Sheetmetal Subcontractor shall prepare a complete set of electronic Drawings at a scale
not less than 3/8” equals 1’-0”, showing structure and other information as needed for
coordination. He shall show sheetmetal layout thereon. These will be the Coordination
Drawings.
2. The main paths of egress and for equipment removal, from main Mechanical and Electrical
rooms must be clearly shown on the Coordination Drawings.
3. Each of the below specialty trades shall add its work to these background Drawings with
appropriate elevations and grid dimensions. Specialty trade information is required for fan
rooms and mechanical rooms, horizontal exits from duct shafts, crossovers, and for spaces in
and above ceilings where congestion of work may occur such as corridors, and even entire
floors. Drawings shall indicate horizontal and vertical dimensions, to avoid interference with
structural framing, ceilings, partitions, and other services.
a. Specialty Trades:
1) Plumbing System.
2) HVAC Piping and Associated Control System.
3) Electrical.
4) Sheet Metal Work.
5) Sprinkler System.
4. Each specialty trade shall sign and date each electronic Coordination Drawing. Return
Drawings to the Sheetmetal Subcontractor, who shall route them sequentially to all specialty
trades.
5. Where conflicts occur with placement of materials of various trades, the Sheetmetal
Subcontractor will be responsible to coordinate the available space to accommodate all
trades. Any resulting adjustments shall be initialed and dated by the specialty trade. The
Sheetmetal Subcontractor shall then final date and sign each Coordination Drawing. If he
cannot resolve conflicts, the decision of the General Contractor shall be final, subject to the
approval of the Architect.
6. A Subcontractor who fails to promptly review and incorporate his work on the Coordination
Drawings shall assume full responsibility of any installation conflicts affecting his work and of
any schedule ramifications.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
FIRE PROTECTION 210000 - 10
7. Sheetmetal Subcontractor shall make electronic copies of all Coordination Drawings.
Fabrication shall not start until such transparencies of completed Drawings are received by
the Architect/Engineer and have been reviewed.
8. Review of Coordination Drawings shall not diminish responsibility under this Contract for final
coordination of installation and maintenance clearances of all systems and equipment with
Architectural, Structural, Mechanical, and Electrical Contractors.
1.11 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The arrangement of all Fire Protection work shown on the Contract Drawings is diagrammatic
only and indicates the minimum requirements of the work. Conditions at the building including
actual measurements shall determine the details of the installation. All work shall be laid out and
installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and patching.
B. Check the Architectural plans and Specifications before ordering any material and equipment.
Any discrepancies shall be brought to the attention of the Architect for his determination prior to
proceeding with the work.
1.12 TYPICAL DETAILS
A. Typical details where shown on the Contract Drawings shall apply to each and every item of the
project where such items are applicable. They are not repeated in full on the Contract Drawings,
which in many cases are diagrammatic only, but with the intention that such details shall be
incorporated in full. Any alternate method proposed for use by the Contractor shall have the prior
approval of the Architect.
1.13 SLEEVES, INSERTS
A. Furnish and install all sleeves, inserts, anchor bolts and similar items to be set into masonry or
concrete, as required for Fire Protection work as indicated in Division 01. Internal diameter of
sleeve shall be 1/2” larger than the outside diameter of the pipe or insulation covered line passing
through it.
1.14 FIRESTOPPING, SMOKEPROOFING & WATERPROOFING
A. All cutting, patching, firestopping and waterproofing shall be performed by the Fire Suppression
Subcontractor. Refer to Sections 01 73 29 – CUTTING AND PATCHING, 07 00 01 –
WATERPROOFING, DAMPPROOFING & CAULKING, and 07 84 13 PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING for project requirements.
1.15 CORING, DRILLING
A. Core, cut and/or drill all holes in walls and floors required for the installation of sleeves and
supports for the Fire Protection work.
1.16 ACCESSIBILITY
A. Install all work such that parts requiring periodic inspection, operation, maintenance and repair
are readily accessible.
B. Furnish all access panels appropriate to particular conditions, to be installed by trades having
responsibility for the construction of actual walls, floors or ceilings at required locations.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
FIRE PROTECTION 210000 - 11
1.17 SUPPLEMENTARY SUPPORTING STEEL
A. Provide all supplementary (non-structural) steelwork required for mounting or supporting
equipment and materials.
B. Steelwork shall be firmly connected to building construction as required. Locations and methods
of attachment shall be approved by the Architect.
C. Steelwork shall be of sufficient strength to allow only minimum deflection in conformity with
manufacturer’s published requirements.
D. All supplementary steelwork shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner parallel to floor,
wall and ceiling construction: all turns shall be made at forty-five and ninety degrees, and/or as
dictated by construction and installation conditions.
E. All manufactured steel parts and fittings shall be galvanized.
1.18 TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Provide all tools and equipment required for the fabrication and installation of the mechanical and
electrical equipment at the site.
1.19 PORTABLE AND DETACHABLE PARTS
A. Contractors shall retain in their possession all portable and/or detachable parts and portions of
materials, devices, equipment, etc. necessary for the proper operation and maintenance of the
Fire Protection system until final completion of the work, at which time they shall be handed over
to the Owners.
1.20 RECORD DRAWINGS, PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A. As the work progresses and for the duration of Contract, maintain a complete and separate set of
prints of Contract Drawings at job site at all times. Record work completed and all changes from
original Contract Drawings clearly and accurately including work installed as a modification or
addition to the original design. Work shall be updated on a weekly basis and shall be made
available for review by Architect. Failure to perform this work shall be reason for withholding
requisition payments. In addition, take photographs of all concealed equipment in gypsum board
ceilings, shafts, and other concealed, inaccessible work. At completion of work, make copies of
photographs with written explanation on back. These shall become part of Record Documents.
B. At completion of the work prepare a complete set of electronic Record Drawings showing all
syst ems as actually installed, including all fire alarms and electrical circuitry. The electronic
copies will be made available for the Fire Protection Contractor’s copying, at his expense, for the
Record Drawings. The quantity of electronic copies which are made available shall in no way be
interpreted as setting a limit to the number of Drawings necessary to show the required
information. The Fire Protection Contractor’s professional Draft Person shall transfer changes to
electronic copies. Submit sets of prints to Architect for comments as indicated in Division 01 –
01 77 00 – CONTRACT CLOSEOUT.
C. The Architect will not certify the accuracy of the Record Drawings. This is the sole responsibility
of the Fire Protection and General Contractors.
D. This trade shall submit the Record Drawings for approval by the Fire and Building Departments in
a form acceptable to the departments, when required by the jurisdiction.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
FIRE PROTECTION 210000 - 12
E. Record Drawings shall show record condition of details, sections, riser diagrams, control changes
and corrections to schedules. Schedules shall show actual manufacturer, make and model
numbers of final equipment installation.
1.21 GUARANTEE/WARRANTY
A. Guarantee and 24 hour service.
1. Guarantee Work of this Section in writing for not less than one (1) year following the date of
acceptance by the Owner. If the equipment is used for temporary service etc, prior to
acceptance by the Owner, the bid price shall include an extended period of warranty covering
the one (1) year of occupancy, starting from the date of acceptance by the Owner. The
guarantee shall repair or replace defective materials, equipment, workmanship and
installation that develop within this period, promptly and to the Architect’s satisfaction and
correct damage caused in making necessary repairs and replacements under guarantee
within Contract Price.
2. In addition to guarantee requirements of Division 1 and of Subparagraph A above, obtain
written equipment and material warranties offered in manufacturer’s published data without
exclusion or limitation, in Owner’s name.
3. Upon receipt of notice from the Owner of failure of any part of the systems or equipment
during the warranty period, the affected part or parts shall be replaced by this Contractor
without any reimbursement.
4. Replace material and equipment that require excessive service during guarantee period as
defined and as directed by Architect.
5. Provide 24 hour service beginning on the date the project is accepted by the Owner, whether
or not fully occupied, and lasting until the termination of the guarantee period. Service shall
be at no cost to the Owner. Service can be provided by this Contractor or a separate service
organization. Choice of service organization shall be subject to Architect and Owner
approval. Submit name and a phone number that will be answered on a 24 hour basis each
day of the week, for the duration of the service.
6. Submit copies of equipment and material warranties to Architect before final payment.
7. At end of guarantee period, transfer manufacturer’s equipment and material warranties still in
force to Owner.
8. This paragraph shall not be interpreted to limit Owner’s rights under applicable codes and
laws and under this Contract.
9. PART 2 paragraphs of this Specification may specify warranty requirements that exceed
those of this paragraph. Those paragraphs shall govern.
10. Use of systems provided under this Section for temporary services and facilities shall not
constitute Final Acceptance of Work by Owner, and shall not initiate the guarantee period.
11. Provide manufacturer’s engineering and technical staff at site to analyze and rectify problems
that develop during guarantee period immediately. If problems cannot be rectified
immediately to Owner’s satisfaction then advise the Architect in writing, describe efforts to
rectify situation, and provide analysis of cause of problem. The Architect and/or Engineer will
direct course of action.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
FIRE PROTECTION 210000 - 13
1.22 OPERATING, INSTRUCTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Refer to Section 01 70 00 – CONTRACT CLOSEOUT and 01 78 23 – OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE DATA for submittal procedures pertaining to Operating and Maintenance
Manuals.
B. Each copy of the approved Operating and Maintenance Manual shall contain copies of approved
Shop Drawings, equipment literature, cuts, bulletins, details, equipment and engineering data
sheets and typewritten instructions relative to the care and maintenance for the operation of the
equipment, all properly indexed. Each manual shall have the following minimum contents:
1. Table of Contents.
2. Introduction:
a. Explanation of manual and its purpose and use.
b. Description of systems.
c. Safety precautions necessary for equipment.
d. Illustrations, schematics and diagrams.
e. Installation drawing.
3. Maintenance:
a. Maintenance and lubricating instructions.
b. Replacement charts.
c. Trouble-shooting charts for equipment components.
d. Testing instructions for each typical component.
e. Two (2) typed sets of instructions for ordering spare parts. Each set shall include name,
price, telephone number and address of where they may be obtained.
4. Manufacturer’s Literature: The equipment for which Shop Drawings have been submitted and
approved.
1.23 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The requirements of the State Building Code and Local regulations establish the minimum
acceptable quality of workmanship and materials, and all work shall conform thereto unless m ore
stringent requirements are indicated or specified herein.
B. All work shall comply with the adapted by the State editions of the codes as referenced herein.
C. All grooved joint couplings, fittings, valves, and specialties shall be the products of a single
manufacturer. Grooving tools shall be of the same manufacturer as the grooved components.
1. All castings used for coupling housings, fittings, valve bodies, etc., shall be date stamped for
quality assurance and traceability.
D. Follow manufacturer’s directions for articles furnished, in addition to directions shown on
Drawings or specified herein.
E. Protect all work, materials, and equipment from damage during process of work. Replace all
damaged or defective work, materials and equipment without additional cost to the Owner.
F. All equipment and materials for permanent installation shall be the products of recognized
manufacturers and shall be new.
G. Equipment and materials shall:
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
FIRE PROTECTION 210000 - 14
1. Where normally subject to Underwriters Laboratory Inc. listing or labeling services, be so
listed and labeled.
2. Be without blemish or defect.
3. By products which will meet with the acceptance of all Authorities Having Jurisdiction over the
work. Where such acceptance is contingent upon having the products examined, tested and
certified by Underwriters or other recognized testing laboratory, the product shall be so
examined, tested and certified.
H. All items of equipment or material of one generic type shall be the product of one manufacturer
throughout.
I. For items which are to be installed but not purchased as part of the Fire Protection work, the Fire
Protection work shall include:
1. The coordination of their delivery.
2. Their unloading from delivery trucks driven into any point on the property line at grade level.
3. Their safe handling and field storage until the time of permanent placement in the project.
4. The correction of any damage, defacement or corrosion to which they may have been
subjected. Replacement, if necessary, shall be coordinated with the Contractor who
originally purchased the item.
5. Mounting in place, including the purchase and installation of all dunnage, supporting
members, and fastenings, necessary to adapt them to architectural and structural conditions.
J. Items which are to be installed but not purchased as part of the Fire Protection work shall be
carefully examined upon delivery to the project. Claims that any of these items have been
received in such condition that their installation will require procedures beyond the reasonable
scope of the electric work will be considered only if presented in writing within one (1) week of the
date of delivery to the project of the items in question. The Fire Protection work includes all
procedures, regardless of how extensive, necessary to put into satisfactory operation, all items for
which no claims have been submitted as outlined above.
1.24 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. All materials for the work of this section shall be delivered, stored and handled so as to preclude
damage of any nature. Manufactured materials shall be delivered and stored in their original
containers, plainly marked with the products’ and manufacturer’s name. Materials in broken
containers or in packages showing watermarks or other evidence of damage shall not be used
and shall be removed from the site.
1.25 STAGING AND SCAFFOLDING
A. Provide staging and scaffolding for all the work of this section complying with Division 1
requirements.
1.26 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described in following product specification sections that match products
installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels clearly
describing contents.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
FIRE PROTECTION 210000 - 15
SPECIFIER TO EDIT FOR PROJECT.
1.27 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Provide wet-pipe sprinklers in all areas. Provide dry-type sprinkler system in all areas where
ambient temperature is 40 deg. F or below.
B. Design sprinkler system according to the following:
1. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications as follows:
a. Building Services Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 2.
b. Electrical Equipment Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.
c. General Storage Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 2.
d. Mechanical Equipment Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 2.
e. Public Areas: Light Hazard.
f. Residential Living Areas: Light Hazard.
2. Minimum Density for Automatic Sprinkler Piping Design – as follows:
a. Light-Hazard Occupancy: 0.10 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. area.
b. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 0.15 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. area.
c. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: 0.20 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. area.
3. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler – as follows:
a. Public space: 225 sq. ft.
b. Storage Areas: 130 sq. ft.
c. Mechanical Equipment Rooms: 130 sq. ft.
d. Electrical Equipment Rooms: 130 sq. ft.
e. Processing Area: 100 sq. ft.
f. Residential Areas: Per manufacturers listing
C. Secure water flow test data taken from fire hydrants nearest site. If recent flow test data is not
available from city records, make necessary tests as required by NFPA Standard to determine
character of water supply.
D. Run piping horizontally and at right angles to walls and ceilings. Center sprinkler heads with
respect to ceiling components, such as ceiling grid, lighting fixtures, HVAC diffusers and
speakers, as directed by Architect.
E. Add a 10 psi safety factor to hydraulic calculations for a cushion against future pipe main
deterioration. Pipe velocity in sprinkler piping shall not exceed 20 FPS.
F. Provide dry sprinkler system for sprinklers in areas subject to freezing.
G. Provide test connections at highest point of main portion of each sprinkler system, with 1” pipe
and valve. Test pipe shall be connected to sprinkler pipe at least 1-1/4” in size and shall
discharge outside building.
H. Utilize Victaulic Testmaster 2 for inspectors test and draining the system.
I. Provide sprinklers in all areas except where exempted by code or AHJ.
1.28 FIRE PROTECTION WORKING PLANS
A. Submit working plans to indicate actual sprinkler system and/or combination system piping layout.
Working plans shall be signed and sealed by a professional engineer.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
FIRE PROTECTION 210000 - 16
B. Seismic restraints: All seismic restraints shall be indicated on working plans including locations
and type of plan, details and calculations.
C. Hydraulic calculations shall be signed and sealed by Professional Engineer. Submit working
plans and hydraulic calculations to:
1. Architect/Engineer.
2. Insurance Underwriter.
3. Building Department.
4. Fire Department.
D. Submit working plans and hydraulic calculations in one complete package. When it is not
possible to submit entire system design in one package due to job conditions, submit plans of
entire building indicating areas not yet defined. Submit working plans and hydraulic calculations
to:
1. Architect/Engineer.
2. Insurance Underwriter.
3. Building Department.
4. Fire Department.
E. Working plans shall be at least 1/8”=1’ scale of sheets of uniform size. Working plans shall show
all data required by NFPA No. 13, including but not limited to:
1. Name of Owner and Occupant.
2. Location, including street address.
3. Point of compass.
4. Full height cross section, or schematic diagram, if required for clarity; including ceiling
construction and method of protection for nonmetallic piping.
5. Location of partitions.
6. Location of fire walls.
7. Occupancy class of each area or room.
8. Location and size of concealed spaces, closets, attics, and bathrooms.
9. Any small enclosures in which no sprinklers are to be installed.
10. Size of city main in street and whether dead-end or circulating; and, if dead-end, direction
and distance to nearest circulating main. City main test results and system elevation relative
to test hydrant.
11. Other sources or water supply, with pressure or elevation.
12. Make, type, and nominal orifice size of sprinklers.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
FIRE PROTECTION 210000 - 17
13. Temperature rating and location of high-temperature sprinklers.
14. Total area protected by each system on each floor.
15. Number of sprinklers on each riser per floor.
16. Total number of sprinklers on each dry pipe system .
17. Approximate capacity in gallons of each dry pipe system.
18. Pipe type and schedule of wall thickness.
19. Nominal pipe size and cutting lengths of pipe (or center-to-center dimensions).
a. Note: Where typical branch lines prevail, it will be necessary to size only one typical line.
20. Location and size of riser nipples.
21. Type of fittings and joints and location of all welds and bends. The Contractor shall specify
on drawing any sections to be shop welded and the type of fittings or formations to be used.
22. Type and locations of hangers, sleeves, braces, and methods of securing sprinklers when
applicable.
23. All control valves, check valves, drain pipes, and test connections.
24. Make, type, model, and size of alarm or dry pipe valve.
25. Kind and location of alarm bells.
26. Size and location of hose outlets, hand hose, and related equipment.
27. Underground pipe size, length, location, weight, material, point of connection to city main; the
type of valves, meters, and valve pits; and the depth that the top of the pipe is laid below
grade.
28. Piping provisions for flushing.
29. For hydraulic designed systems, the information on the hydraulic data nameplate.
30. A graphic representation of the scale used on all plans.
31. Name and Address of Contractor.
32. Hydraulic reference points shown on the plan shall correspond with comparable reference
points on the hydraulic calculation sheets.
33. The minimum rate of water application (density), the design area of water application, in-rack
sprinkler demand, and the water required for hose streams both inside and outside.
34. The total quantity of water and the pressure required noted at a common reference point for
each system.
35. Relative elevations of sprinklers, junction points, and supply or reference points.
36. If room design method is used, all unprotected wall openings throughout the floor protected.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
FIRE PROTECTION 210000 - 18
37. Calculation of loads for sizing, and details of sway bracing.
38. Information about backflow preventers (manufacturer, size, type).
F. Working plans will be subject to Architect’s final approval. Submit to Architect after review by
other Authorities. If necessary to submit plans to Architect before review by other Authorities,
identify Authorities that have not reviewed plans and resubmit for final approval when review by
all parties is complete.
G. Sprinkler pipe and standpipe pipe sizing shall be based on hydraulic calculations.
H. Fire protection contractor shall provide piping layout on measured Drawings. For renovation
projects, this shall require Contractor to field survey existing building and prepare reproducible
Drawings on which to show building background and all Fire Protection work.
I. Working Plans shall show all hangers and supports from floors, walls, underside of slabs and
structural steel members. Where piping cannot be supported from walls or slabs, contractor shall
provide additional structural steel bracing to support pipe.
J. Working Plans shall be submitted with the shop drawing cover sheet from Division 01. Any
deviations from original plans and Specifications shall be noted. Any hydraulic deviations shall be
noted.
1.29 UNIT PRICES
A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall list the following unit prices in bid proposal which shall
include the complete installation (labor and materials) for each item(s):
1. Cost for addition of pendent head.
2. Cost for addition of sidewall head.
3. Cost for addition of upright head
4. Savings or deduction for eliminating a sprinkler head.
B. Above prices shall include 10 feet of piping, connection, sprinkler heads, fittings, hangers, labor
system draining and refill, drawing involvement and any other associated costs for the addition or
deletion of a sprinkler head.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Piping shall meet applicable ANSI or ASTM standard requirements and shall have manufacturer’s
name and standard marked on each length. Joints shall meet applicable ANSI or ASTM
standards requirements. Where ANSI or ASTM standard does not exist, joints and fittings shall
bear UL listing symbol.
PIPE MATERIAL SPECIFICATION INDEX
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
FIRE PROTECTION 210000 - 19
2.2 UNDERGROUND FIRE SERVICE
Ductile Iron
2” and Smaller
2-1/2” and Larger
Pipe Type “K” copper water tube
conforming to ASTM B88
annealed.
Ductile iron AWWA C151. Cement
lining ANSI A21.4 and AWWA
C104. The outside coating shall
be a bituminous coating of 1ml
minimum thickness. The pipe shall
be clearly marked with the letters
“Ductile” of “DI” and shall indicate
weight, class and casting period.
Fittings ANSI/ASME B16.22 wrought
copper and bronze pressure
fittings.
Ductile iron 250 psi rating
conforming to AWWA C-11,
cement lining AWWA C-104. The
fittings shall be clearly marked with
the letters “Ductile” or “DI” and
shall have an outside bituminous
coating of 1 ml.
Joints ANSI/AWS A5.8 BcuP silver
braze.
Push on joint shall conform to a
single rubber gasket joint per ANSI
A21.11 and AWWA C111. Flange
joints and pipe flanges shall
conform to ANSI B16.1. Flanged
joints are to be fitted such that the
contact faces bear uniformly on the
gasket and are made with uniform
bolt stress.
Flanges Flanges shall be plain faced, CI150
and shall match the piping system
and fittings on which they are
installed.
Gaskets/Bolts Gaskets shall be full-face rubber
1/8” thick. Bolts and nuts shall
conform to ANSI B18.2.1 and
B18.2.2, respectively.
A. Notes:
1. This contractor shall make submittal to the Water Authority having jurisdiction and secure all
local permits and approval for the underground water piping system prior to submitting Shop
Drawings to the engineer. The shop drawing submittal to the engineer shall include an
approval notification from the local water authority.
2. Receiving, Storage and Handling: Pipe shall be unloaded using slings, hooks, pipe tongs or
skids. Care should be taken to avoid injury to coating or lining. Store lubricant for rubber
joints in a sanitary condition and as an aid in disinfection of the main. Rubber gaskets shall
be used on a first in, first out basis and stored in a cool, dark location.
3. Thrust restraint shall be installed at all changes in direction, tees, deadends and where
changes in pipe size occur by the use of concrete thrust blocks, restrained joints and tie rods.
4. Excavation, shoring and dewatering will be done under Division 2.
2.3 WET PIPE SPRINKLER AND STANDPIPE (175 psi)
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
FIRE PROTECTION 210000 - 20
Carbon Steel 2” and Smaller 2-1/2” and Larger
Pipe Welded and seamless black steel
pipe conforming to ASTM A53,
ASTM A795 or ANSI/ASTM A135,
Schedule 40.
Welded and seamless black steel
pipe conforming to ASTM A795 or
ANSI/ASTM A135, Schedule 10.
Fittings Cast iron fittings. ANSI/ASME
B16.1 and B16.4
Mechanical grooved couplings with
ductile iron housing clamps to
engage and lock, “C” shaped
composition sealing gasket, steel
bolts, nuts and Vic plug gasket
(pre-tube).
Joints Thread. Apply joint compound or
Teflon tape to male pipe threads
on threaded systems.
Weld or roll groove. Welding
procedures shall conform to the
requirements of AWS D.10.9, level
AR3.
Flanges Flanges shall be plain faced and
shall be CI-150 and shall conform
to ANSI B.16.5.
Flanges shall be plain faced and
shall be CI-150 and shall conform
to ANSI B16.5.
Gaskets/Bolts Gaskets shall be full face rubber
1/8” thick. Bolts and nuts shall
conform to ANSI B18.2.1 and
B18.2.2, respectively.
Gaskets shall be full face rubber
1/8” thick. Bolts and nuts shall
conform to ANSI B18.2.1 and
B18.2.2, respectively.
A. Notes: Pipe material and fittings shall meet the standards set forth for pipe and tube in the
National Fire Code NFPA 13, Section 6.3.
B. Grooved joint couplings shall consist of two (2) ductile iron housing segments, pressure
responsive elastomer gasket, and ASTM A449 zinc-electroplated steel bolts and nuts.
1. Rigid: Coupling housings with offsetting, angle-pattern bolt pads shall be used to provide
system rigidity and support and hanging in accordance with NFPA-13. Couplings shall be
fully installed at a visual pad-to-pad offset contact. Couplings that require gapping of bolt
pads or specific torque ratings for proper installation are not permitted. Installation-Ready, for
direct stab installation without field disassembly. Basis of Design: Victaulic Style 009H and
107N.
2. Flexible: Use in locations where vibration attenuation and stress relief are required. Basis of
Design: Victaulic Style 177 Installation-Ready, and Style 77.
2.4 DRY PIPE SPRINKLER
Galvanized
Steel
2” and Smaller
2 - 2-1/2” and Larger
Pipe Welded and seamless black steel
pipe conforming to ASTM A53
Schedule 40. Galvanized to
ASTM A795.
Welded and seamless black steel
pipe conforming to ASTM A53
Schedule 40 or Schedule 10.
Galvanized to ASTM A795.
Fittings Galvanized cast iron Class 150
fittings ANSI/ASTM B16.1 and
screw fittings per ANSI/ASME
B.16.4. Mechanical grooved
couplings with malleable iron
housing clamps to engage and
lock, “C” shaped composition
sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts
and washers.
Galvanized cast iron class 150
fittings ANSI/ASME B.16.1 and
screw fittings per ANSI/ASME
B.16.4, ASME 31.1, 31.3.
Mechanical grooved couplings with
ductile iron housing clamps to
engage and lock, “C” shaped
composition sealing gasket, steel
bolts, nuts, Vic plus pre-tube
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
FIRE PROTECTION 210000 - 21
gasket.
Joints Roll grooved, cut grooved or
thread. Apply joint compound or
Teflon to male pipe threads on
threaded systems.
Roll groove or thread. Apply joint
compound or Teflon tape to male
pipe threads on threaded systems.
Flanges Flanges shall be plain face and
shall be C1-150 and shall conform
to ANSI B16.5.
Gaskets/Bolts Gaskets shall be full face rubber
1/8” thick. Bolts and nuts shall
conform to ANSI B18.2.1 and
B18.2.2, respectively.
A. Notes:
1. Pipe material fittings shall meet the standards set forth for pipe and tube in the NFPA 13,
Section 2-3.
2. Holes drilled or cut into the pipe system for fittings such as Mechanical tees, shall be re-
galvanized after the hole drilling process.
3. Galvanic protection shall be reapplied after all cut groove processes.
4. Rubber gaskets or rubber flange gasket and couplings with rubber or neoprene gaskets are
not allowed where ambient temperatures exceed 150°F unless listed for this service.
B. Grooved joint couplings shall consist of two (2) ductile iron housing segments, pressure
responsive elastomer gasket, and ASTM A449 zinc-electroplated steel bolts and nuts.
1. Rigid: Coupling housings with offsetting, angle-pattern bolt pads shall be used to provide
system rigidity and support and hanging in accordance with NFPA-13. Couplings shall be
fully installed at visual pad-to-pad offset contact. Couplings that require gapping of bolt pads
or specific torque ratings for proper installation are not permitted. Installation-Ready, for
direct stab installation without field disassembly. Basis of Design: Victaulic Style 009H and
107N.
2. Flexible: Use in locations where vibration attenuation and stress relief are required. Basis of
Design: Victaulic Style 177 Installation-Ready, and Style 77.
2.5 VALVES
A. Valves shall be of materials and weights required by NFPA standards.
B. Valves that control mains inside building shall be approved OS&Y, 175 psi, unless noted
otherwise, Basis of Design: Victaulic Series 771. Valves shall be normally open and shall
accommodate tamper switches wired under Electrical Section. Victaulic Series 705 grooved end
butterfly valves with pressure responsive seat, stainless steel stem (stem shall be offset from the
disc centerline to provide complete 360-degree circumferential seating), and weatherproof
actuator housing with built-in tamper switches UL/FM approved to 300 psi is acceptable.
C. Check valves shall be approved pattern, 250 psi, installed vertically or horizontally, Victaulic
Series 717. Alarm valves shall be 300 psi UL/FM Victaulic Series 751 or approved equal suitable
for variable pressure operation and wet pipe system.
D. Valves shall be UL-listed and FM-approved. Valves 2A and smaller shall be bronze body iron
sized threaded end, Victaulic style 717, UL/FM approved 250 psi; valves 2-1/2” and larger shall
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
FIRE PROTECTION 210000 - 22
be ductile iron body grooved end, Victaulic Series 705 butterfly valve UL/FM approved at 300 psi.
Valves at fire pump shall be iron body butterfly.
E. Sprinkler Alarm Valves:
1. Sprinkler alarm valves and trim are described in the following charts: See Drawings for valve
location and quantities.
Wet Pipe Valve
Description 175 psig working pressure, ductile iron body, grooved seat
alarm port, external bypass, brass seat and removable hand
hole cover hinged to a stainless steel clapper assembly. Valve
internal components shall be replaceable with valve in the
installed position. Size range: 1-1/2” to 8”.
Manufacturers and Model No. Victaulic Series 751 alarm check valve.
Trim Required 300 psig trim kit. Victaulic Variable Pressure trim kit with
retarding chamber, water pressure gauges to indicate the inlet
and outlet pressures and water motor and electric pressure
switch with approved connected alarms. All installed trim must
be UL listed and FM approved for use with the Wet valve.
Prefabrication Requirements All components ready for maintenance and inspection. Provide
drip check valve, drain cup, alarm test shut-off valve, drain
check valve. Provide the standard trim kit with gages.
Certification/Approvals UL listed.
FM approved.
Accepted by the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction.
Guarantee
Start-up and Service Test and set valve to the satisfaction of the authority having
jurisdiction. Instruct Owner’s representative for valve actuation
and maintain.
Capacities See hydraulic data.
Acceptable Manufacturers Viking Corporation
Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co.
Victaulic Co.
Dry Pipe Valve
Description Latching low differential valve utilizing external activator air
pressure to provide a positive differential and mechanical seal.
Provide a complete trim kit with a water motor alarm and
electrical switches. Provide an accelerator with the system (as
needed). Valve shall be externally resettable, and all internal
components shall be replaceable with valve in the installed
position. Required air pressure shall be 13-psi (90-kPa).
Manufacturers and Model No. Victaulic Series 768-NXT dry pipe valve.
Accelerator As required.
Air Compressor Maintenance air compressor. Coordinate and match voltage
requirements with field electrical service.
Prefabrication Requirements All components ready for maintenance and inspection. Provide
drip check valve, drain cup, alarm test shut-off valve, drain
check valve. Provide the standard trim kit with gauges.
Provide air compressor, dry actuator, air low pressure switch
and system accelerator (if needed).
Certification/Approvals UL listed.
FM approved.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
FIRE PROTECTION 210000 - 23
Accepted by the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction.
Guarantee
Start-up and Service Test and set valve to the satisfaction of the authority having
jurisdiction. Instruct Owner’s Representative on dry valve
operation and reset procedure.
Capacities See Drawings.
Acceptable Manufacturers Viking Corporation
Reliable Sprinkler Company
Victaulic Co.
2.6 HANGERS, ANCHORS, CLAMPS AND INSERTS
A. Hangers shall meet NFPA Standards. Provide adjustable swivel rings for piping 3” and smaller
and adjustable clevis hangers for 4” and larger piping. Support piping from building structure to
maintain required grade and pitch of pipe lines, prevent vibration, secure piping in place. Secure
hangers to insets where practical. Hanger rods shall have machine threads.
B. Provide vertical brackets and guides for pipe risers at each floor and where horizontal piping is
racked along walls. Trapeze hangers may be used where conditions permit.
C. Hanger rods shall be connected to beam clamp, or UL-listed concrete inserts. Beam clamps shall
have retaining straps.
D. Hanger spacing shall meet requirements of state and local codes.
E. Pipe supports, vertical and horizontal, shall not bear on sleeves.
F. All support devices shall conform to seismic standards.
G. Provide seismic restraint calculations.
2.7 FIRE DEPARTMENT INLET CONNECTION
A. Provide polished brass inlet connections where shown on Drawings, of size and type indicated,
with brass caps and chains. Provide integral lettering as required by local Fire Department to
indicate use for sprinklers and fire standpipe. Threads shall match local Fire Department.
B. On branch line to inlet connection, provide approved straightway check valve installed in
horizontal position. Piping shall be arranged to drain between check valve and fire department
inlet connection by approved ball drip connection piped to nearest drain or through wall.
C. Fire Department flush inlet connection shall be Potter-Roemer STORZ Figure No. 5795, chrome-
plated. Square plate with lettering [AUTO SPRINKLER/STANDPIPE] with cap and chain.
D. At the low point near each fire department connection, provide a 90-degree elbow with drain
connection to allow for localized system drainage to prevent freezing. Basis of Design: Victualic
FireLock #10-DR.
2.8 SPRINKLER HEADS
A. Provide UL-listed and/or FM-approved, (quick response for light hazard) sprinkler heads.
B. Heads shall have ordinary degree temperature ratings, except in areas subject to abnormal
heating conditions, where sprinkler heads shall have temperature ratings high enough to prevent
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
FIRE PROTECTION 210000 - 24
accidental discharge. Minimum fusing temperature shall be 155°F.
C. Sprinklers shall be glass bulb type, with hex shaped wrench boss integrally cast into the sprinkler
body to reduce the risk of damage during installation. (Wrenches shall be provided by the
sprinkler manufacturer that directly engage the cast wrench boss). Basis of Design: Victaulic.
D. Sprinkler heads shall be by Victaulic, Tyco, or Reliable.
E. The following table indicates head types:
Sprinkler Head Specifications
Upright Sprinkler Finish:
Temperature Rating:
Link:
Response Application:
Approvals:
Equivalent to:
Bronze
155°F (212°F Mechanical Rooms)
Glass bulb
QR
UL, FM, Local Authority Having
Jurisdiction
Victaulic V27 or V34
Concealed Finish:
Cover Plate:
Temperature Rating:
Link:
Response Application:
Approvals:
Equivalent to:
White (coordinate with Architect)
White
155°F
Glass bulb
QR
UL, FM, Local Authority Having
Jurisdiction
Victaulic V38
Recessed Pendent Finish:
Temperature Rating:
Link:
Response Application:
Approvals:
Equivalent to:
White
155°F - 165°F
Glass bulb
QR
UL listed for 175 psig, FM
approved to 175 psig, Local
Authority Having Jurisdiction
Victaulic V27 or V34 (for light
hazards only)
F. Flexible Stainless Steel Sprinkler Drop Systems may be used to locate sprinklers as required by
final finished ceiling tiles and walls. The drop shall include a UL approved Series AH2 braided
hose with a bend radius to 2-inch to allow for proper installation in confined spaces. The hose
shall be listed for [(4) bends at 31” length] [(5) bends at 36” length] [(8) bends at 48” length] [10
bends at 60” length] [(12) bends at 72” length]. Union joints shall be provided for ease of
installation. The flexible drop shall attach to the ceiling grid using a one-piece open gate Series
AB1 or AB2 bracket. The bracket shall allow installation before the ceiling tile is in place. The
braided drop system is UL listed and FM Approved for sprinkler services to 175 psi (1206 kPa).
Basis of Design: Victaulic Vic-Flex.
2.9 SPRINKLER CABINET
A. Provide enameled steel sprinkler cabinet with approved number of sprinkler heads as required by
NFPA. Provide appropriate sprinkler wrench with each type of head in each cabinet.
2.10 SIGNALING DEVICES
A. Tamper Switches to be:
1. “Potter” OSYSU-2 with two sets of SPDT contacts for installation on S+OS&Y valves or
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
FIRE PROTECTION 210000 - 25
equivalent tamper switch.
2. “Potter" PCVS-2 with two sets of SPDT contacts for installation on PIV and butterfly valves or
equivalent tamper switch.
3. Milwaukee BB-SCK02 with two sets of SPDT contacts for installation on built-in tamper
switches for butterfly valves.
B. Water flow switches to be “Potter” WSR-F with retard and two sets of SPDT contacts or
equivalent.
C. Pressure switches to be “Potter” PS100-2A with two sets of SPDT contacts.
D. High/low pressure switches to be Potter PS40-2A with two sets of SPDT contacts. One set of
contacts to operate on decrease of pressure and the other to operate on increase of pressure.
E. Electric bell to be “Potter” PBA-AC.
2.11 WATER PRESSURE GAUGES
A. Water pressure gauges of the double spring Bourdon type, as manufactured by U.S. Gauge
American, Mueller, Trerice, Ashcroft or approved equal, shall be installed at the top of standpipe
risers and at fire pump and alarm check valves. The gauges shall have 3-1/2” diameter face with
brass case and shall be Underwriter’s approved.
B. Gauges shall be controlled by a valve with arrangements for drainage. An outlet, at least one
quarter of an inch in size, plugged for the installation of the inspector’s gauge shall be located
between each valve and gauge.
C. Dial graduations reading in “psig” shall be such that the normal operating pressure of the system
installed shall be indicated near the middle of the scale.
D. The accuracy of the gauges shall be within one (1) percent of the scale range.
2.12 SLEEVES AND PENETRATIONS
A. Pipe Sleeve Materials:
1. Sleeves through floors and through exterior, structural and fire-rated construction shall be
galvanized Schedule 40 steel pipe.
2. Sleeves through partitions and non-fire-rated construction shall be 26 gauge galvanized steel
with lock longitudinal seams or approved plastic pipe.
3. Provide waterproofing membrane locking devices at floors. Provide 150 lb. Slip-on welding
flanges at exterior wall penetrations.
B. Fire stop penetration seals in fire-rated construction shall conform to ASTM E814 and shall be
ceramic fiber (Proset Systems Firefill); mineral fiber (Manville Thermo-mat); or silicone foam (Dow
RTV 3-6548). Provide mineral fiberboard, matting or putty for damming and forming. Finish
seals flush to wall surface and fill gaps with silicone adhesive sealant caulking (Dow 96-081 RTV
or approved equal). Provide 1” thick ceramic fiber board on both sides of penetrations in 2 and 3
hour rated walls and floors less than 8” thick. All penetration seals shall be installed in
accordance with listing requirements.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
FIRE PROTECTION 210000 - 26
C. Packing for sleeves that do not require maintenance of fire rating shall be oakum, silicate, foam,
ceramic fiber or mineral fiber with approved sealant. Pack or foam to within one inch of both wall
surfaces. Seal penetration packing with approved caulking and paintable waterproof mastic
surface finish or silicone caulking.
D. Wall and floor penetration fire stops shall be UL listed, FM approved.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 COORDINATION
A. Cooperate and coordinate with work of other Sections in executing work of this Section.
B. Verify conditions and take field measurements as required to ensure work shall fit actual
conditions. Field corrections to fabricate work and adjustments to adjacent work where required
for proper installation of work shall be subject to Architect’s approval. Corrections and
adjustments shall be permitted only when not detrimental to appearance and function of work.
3.2 SHUT DOWNS
A. Work with Owner in maintaining integrity of new or existing fire protection system. Coordinate
and minimize any and all shut downs of fire protection system as follows:
1. Give proper notice to Owner when making shutdowns, a minimum of two full weeks.
2. Perform all duties required by Owner when making a shut down.
3. Fill out a shut down notice form answering all items requested such as time and location of
shut down, systems affected, areas affected, etc. when requesting a shut down.
4. Provide fire watch as required during a shut down.
5. Duration of shut downs shall be kept to a minimum.
6. In no case shall the fire protection system be shut down during off-hours of work day without
a fire watch.
7. System shall be returned to normal operating conditions at end of work day.
3.3 TESTS
A. Test sprinkler system as required by NFPA Insurance Underwriters, Factory Mutual and agencies
that have jurisdiction.
B. Test water flow detecting devices including associated alarm circuits through inspection test
connection.
C. Test sprinkler system under pressure of 200 psi for two hours. Correct defects and leaks.
Caulking will not be allowed.
D. Submit written approval of tests from Authorities Having Jurisdiction over installation to Owner
before Final Acceptance of work.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
FIRE PROTECTION 210000 - 27
E. Submit written approval of tests from Authorities Having Jurisdiction over installation to Owner
before Final Acceptance of work.
F. Do not backfill before testing and approval.
G. Notify Architect and various departments and bureaus 48 hours before tests are to be made.
H. Operating test of sufficient duration shall be made for systems, equipment, fixtures and
accessories to Owner’s satisfaction.
I. General:
1. Test sprinkler and standpipe system and make watertight before painting and concealment.
Make partial tests as required, during progress of work. Tests shall be witnessed by: General
Contractor, Insurance Underwriter’s Representative, Municipal Inspector and a representative
of the Architect.
2. Standpipe and sprinkler system shall be tested to hydrostatic test of 200 psi in accordance
with NFPA requirements.
3. If inspection or test show defects, such defective work or material shall be replaced and
inspection and tests shall be repeated. Repairs to piping shall be made with new material.
3.4 PIPE VALVE AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide color-coded pipe identification markers. Pipe markers shall be snap-on laminated plastic
with acrylic coating. Pipe markers shall be applied after painting.
B. Provide arrow marker with each pipe content marker to indicate direction of flow. If flow can be in
either direction, use double-headed arrow marker.
C. Mains shall be labeled at points of entrance and exit from mechanical room, next to valves, on
risers, at tee fittings, at points of entrance and exit from building, at least once in each room and
at intervals not longer than 20 feet.
D. In general, 2” high legend shall be used for pipe lines 4” diameter and larger than ¾” high legend
shall be used for pipe lines 3” diameter and smaller.
E. Markers shall be Seton Setmark or approved equal.
F. Color banding shall meet latest ANSI and OSHA requirements.
G. Markers shall have legend with “black” letters:
Service
Legend
Background
Color
Sprinkler
Sprinkler
Red
Combination Sprinkler-standpipe
Sprinkler-Fire
Red
Fire
Fire
Red
H. Valve Tags:
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
FIRE PROTECTION 210000 - 28
1. All valves on pipes of every description shall have neat, circular brass valve tags of at least
1.5 inches in diameter, attached with brass hook to each valve stem. Stamp on these valve
tags in letter as large as practical, the number of the valve and the service such as “S.P.” for
sprinkler. The numbers of each service shall be consecutive.
2. All valves on equipment, tanks and pumps shall be numbered by 3 inch diameter red metal
discs with white numbers 2 inches high secured to stem of valves by means of brass hooks
or small solid link brass chain.
I. Equipment:
1. Nameplates shall be made of black surface, white core laminated “Bakelite” with indented
letters.
2. Nameplates shall be a minimum of 3 inches long by 1.5 inches high and bear the equipment
name as designated in these Specifications.
3. Equipment identification designations shall be taken from equipment schedules as indicated
on the Contract Drawings or specified herein.
3.5 ANCHORS AND INSERTS
A. Inserts shall be UL listed and FM approved and shall be steel of type to receive machine bolt
head or nut after installation. Inserts shall permit adjustment of bolt in one horizontal direction
and shall develop strength of bolt when installed in properly cured concrete.
B. Provide anchors as necessary for attachment of equipment supports and hangers.
3.6 TYPICAL DETAILS
A. Typical details where shown on the Contract Drawings shall apply to each and every item of the
project where such items are applicable. They are not repeated in full on the Control Drawings,
which in many cases are diagrammatic only, but with the intention that such details shall be
incorporated in full. Any alternate method proposed for use by the Contractor shall have the prior
approval of the Owner.
3.7 CORING, DRILLING
A. Core, cut and/or drill all holes in walls and floors required for the installation of sleeves and
supports for the Fire Protection work.
3.8 SUPPLEMENTARY SUPPORTING STEEL
A. Provide all supplementary steelwork required for mounting or supporting equipment and
materials.
B. Steelwork shall be firmly connected to building construction as required.
C. Steelwork shall be of sufficient strength to allow only minimum deflection in conformity with
manufacturer’s published requirements.
D. All supplementary steelwork shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner parallel to floor,
wall and ceiling construction; all turns shall be made at forty-five and ninety degrees, and/or as
dictated by construction and installation conditions.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
FIRE PROTECTION 210000 - 29
E. All manufactured steel parts and fittings shall be galvanized; manufacturer shall be Unistrut or
equivalent.
3.9 SPRINKLER / STANDPIPE INSTALLATION
A. Standpipes shall have pressure gauges at the top and supervised control valves at the bottom.
B. Final standpipe test shall be witnessed by authority having jurisdiction, Owner’s Representative
and an Insurance Underwriter’s Representative.
C. Install at least one new standpipe riser up through the floors with temporary hose, nozzle and
valves, as required for fire protection during construction. Standpipes shall be supplied through a
temporary 2-1/2” x 2-1/2”x 4” siamese inlet at grade located where directed by Fire Department if
standpipe is not connected to building fire supply system. Access to temporary siamese inlet
connection shall be kept clear and accessible at all times. Contractor shall ensure temporary fire
protection supply availability at all times.
D. Grooved Joints: Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s latest published installation
instructions. Pipe ends shall be clean and free from indentations, projections and roll marks in
the area from pipe end to (and including) groove. Gasket shall be manufactured by the coupling
manufacturer and verified as suitable for the intended service. A factory trained representative
(direct employee) of the coupling manufacturer shall provide on-site training for contractor’s field
personnel in the use of grooving tools, application of groove, and product installation. The
representative shall periodically visit the job site and review installation to ensure best practices in
grooved joint installation are being followed. Contractor shall remove and replace any improperly
installed products.
E. Signaling devices shall consist of the following:
1. Electric micro switch locks on zone valves and water flow control switches on each floor
supply be wired to fire alarm panel and Building Automation System.
2. Alarm devices provided on alarm valves and pipes by Sprinkler Contractor.
3. Fire alarm zone panels and wiring by Electrical Contractor and System Automation
Contractor.
4. Complete coordination shall be exercised between Sprinkler Contractor and Electrical
Contractor to ensure electrical connections are compatible with fire alarm system described
under Electrical Section.
F. Electric micro switch locks on zone valves and water flow control switches on each floor supply
wired to fire alarm panel and Building Automation Sprinkler.
G. Alarm devices provided on alarm valves and pipes by Sprinkler Contractor.
H. Fire alarm zone panels and wiring by Electrical Contractor.
I. Complete coordination exercised between Sprinkler Contractor and Electrical Contractor to
ensure electrical connections are compatible with fire alarm system described under Section
26 00 00.
3.10 WATER SERVICE
A. Provide water service piping. Provide offsets required to avoid conflicts with ledge and other
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
FIRE PROTECTION 210000 - 30
unforeseen circumstances. Work associated with street main tapping and water service piping to
building shall meet requirement of Local Authority. When work is not in progress, plug open ends
of pipe to ensure that foreign matter does not enter piping system.
B. Tap existing main under pressure with a full tapping sleeve. Taping valve shall be UL listed and
FM approved, iron body, bronze-mounted, non-rising stem, square head, mechanical joint end,
175 psi working pressure with valve box extensions to grade; box shall be approved by local
Water Department.
C. Provide thrust blocks and tie rods for fittings used to change direction of water service piping.
Where adequate bearing cannot be obtained for thrust blocks, provide tie rods.
D. Coordinate with pipe bedding provided under Division 2. Keep excavation open until system has
been inspected, tested and approved.
E. Test water service piping at 200 psi for two (2) hours. Leakage shall not exceed 2 quarts per
hour per 100 joints regardless of pipe diameter. Before connection to building water system,
flush and disinfect water service.
3.11 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
A. All piping, equipment and devices shall be seismically supported as required by Local and State
Codes, and NFPA.
END OF SECTION 21 00 00
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
PLUMBING 220000 - i
SECTION 22 00 00
PLUMBING TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND REFERENCES ....................................................................... 1
1.2 DEFINITIONS .................................................................................................................................. 1
1.3 SCOPE ............................................................................................................................................. 2
1.4 RELATED WORK UNDER OTHER SECTIONS ............................................................................. 3
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................................. 4
1.6 SUBMITTALS ................................................................................................................................... 4
1.7 SURVEYS AND MEASUREMENTS ................................................................................................ 8
1.8 COORDINATION ............................................................................................................................. 8
1.9 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION .................................................................... 9
1.10 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION DRAWINGS................................................ 9
1.11 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................... 10
1.12 TYPICAL DETAILS ........................................................................................................................ 10
1.13 SLEEVES, INSERTS ..................................................................................................................... 11
1.14 FIRESTOPPING, SMOKEPROOFING & WATERPROOFING ..................................................... 11
1.15 CORING, DRILLING ...................................................................................................................... 11
1.16 ACCESSIBILITY ............................................................................................................................ 11
1.17 SUPPLEMENTARY SUPPORTING STEEL .................................................................................. 11
1.18 TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................ 11
1.19 PORTABLE AND DETACHABLE PARTS ..................................................................................... 12
1.20 RECORD DRAWINGS, PROJECT CLOSEOUT ........................................................................... 12
1.21 GUARANTEE/WARRANTY ........................................................................................................... 12
1.22 OPERATING, INSTRUCTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS ................................................. 13
1.23 QUALITY ASSURANCE ................................................................................................................ 14
1.24 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING ..................................................................................... 15
PART 2 PRODUCTS .................................................................................................................................. 15
2.1 PIPE MATERIALS .......................................................................................................................... 15
2.2 COPPER PIPE (FOR CW, HWR, HW SYSTEMS) ........................................................................ 16
2.3 STEEL PIPE (FOR PROPANE GAS SYSTEM) ............................................................................ 17
2.4 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT, STORM DRAIN ......................................................................... 18
2.5 PRESSURE, FLOW AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL DEVICES .............................................. 19
2.6 INSULATION .................................................................................................................................. 20
2.7 PIPE SUPPORTS .......................................................................................................................... 21
2.8 SLEEVES, INSERTS, FIRE STOPPING AND ESCUTCHEONS .................................................. 22
2.9 TRAPS AND STRAINERS ............................................................................................................. 23
2.10 THERMOMETERS AND PRESSURE GAUGES .......................................................................... 24
2.11 WALL HYDRANTS AND HOSE BIBBS ......................................................................................... 24
2.12 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS .................................................................................................. 25
2.13 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM ............................................................................................... 25
2.14 EQUIPMENT – GENERAL............................................................................................................. 26
2.15 WATER HEATERS ........................................................................................................................ 26
2.16 PUMPS........................................................................................................................................... 26
PART 3 EXECUTION .................................................................................................................................. 27
3.1 COORDINATION ........................................................................................................................... 27
3.2 EXPANSION PROVISIONS ........................................................................................................... 27
3.3 PIPE IDENTIFICATION ................................................................................................................. 27
3.4 TAGS, VALVES, EQUIPMENT AND INSTRUMENTS .................................................................. 28
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
PLUMBING 220000 - ii
3.5 FLASHING AND COUNTER FLASHING ....................................................................................... 28
3.6 JOINTS AND CONNECTIONS ...................................................................................................... 29
3.7 INTERIOR WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM ......................................................................................... 29
3.8 INTERIOR SANITARY WASTE, STORM, DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING ................................ 30
3.9 WATER ENTRANCE ..................................................................................................................... 30
3.10 EXTERIOR SANITARY SEWER ................................................................................................... 31
3.11 WATER METER ............................................................................................................................. 31
3.12 FIXTURE ROUGHINGS................................................................................................................. 31
3.13 EQUIPMENT ROUGHINGS AND CONNECTIONS ...................................................................... 32
3.14 INSTALLATION OF SPECIALTY ITEMS ....................................................................................... 32
3.15 INSTALLATION OF FIXTURES ..................................................................................................... 32
3.16 GAS SERVICE, VENTS AND PIPING ........................................................................................... 33
3.17 CROSS CONNECTION PROTECTION ........................................................................................ 33
3.18 CLEANING ..................................................................................................................................... 34
3.19 DISINFECTION OF WATER SYSTEMS - INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR ....................................... 34
3.20 TESTING AND ADJUSTING – GENERAL .................................................................................... 35
3.21 TESTING: PIPING SYSTEMS ...................................................................................................... 37
3.22 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS................................................................................................................. 39
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
PLUMBING 220000 - 1
SECTION 22 00 00
PLUMBING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND REFERENCES
A. Include “General Requirements” and applicable parts of Division 1 as part of this section.
B. Examine all other sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work under this
Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this section. Where paragraphs of
this section conflict with similar paragraphs of Division 1, requirements of this section shall
prevail.
C. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this section.
Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract.
D. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall be responsible for filing all documents, payment of all fees, and
securing of all inspections and approvals necessary for the work of this section.
E. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall carry in the Bid Price all Utility Company and Municipal back
charges for all materials furnished and work performed by them in conjunction with this Contract
and pay same to the respective agency upon demand. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall not be
entitled to additional compensation after the submittal of his bid price should he fail, for any
reason, to obtain the total back charge costs to be incurred by the local utility companies or
municipal agencies.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. As used in this section, “provide” means “furnish and install”, and “POS” means “Provided Under
Other Sections”.
B. As used in the Contract Drawings and Specifications for Plumbing work, certain non-technical
words shall be understood to have specific meanings as follows, regardless of indications to the
contrary in the General Conditions of other documents governing the Plumbing work.
1. “Furnish” means: Purchase and deliver to the project site complete with every necessary
appurtenance and support, all as part of the Plumbing work. Purchasing shall include
payment of all sales taxes and other surcharges as may be required to assure that purchased
item(s) are free of all liens, claims, or encumbrances.
2. “Install” means: Unload at the delivery point at the site and perform every operation
necessary to establish secure mounting and correct operation at the proper location in the
project, all as part of the Plumbing work.
3. “Provide” means: “Furnish” and “Install”.
4. “New” means: Manufactured within the past two (2) years and never before used.
C. Except where modified by a specific notation to the contrary, it shall be understood that the
indication and/or description of any plumbing item in the Contract Drawings or Specifications for
Plumbing work carries with it the instruction to furnish, install and connect the item as part of the
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
PLUMBING 220000 - 2
Plumbing work, regardless of whether or not this instruction is explicitly stated.
D. It shall be understood that the Specifications and Drawings for Plumbing work are complimentary
and are to be taken together for a complete interpretation of the Plumbing work except that
indications on the Contract Drawings, which refer to an individual element of work, take
precedence over the Specifications where they conflict.
1.3 SCOPE
A. Perform work and provide material and equipment as shown on Drawings and as specified or
indicated in this Section of the Specifications. Completely coordinate work of this Section with
work of other trades and provide a complete and fully functional installation.
1. Domestic water piping system.
2. Exterior water service piping for domestic water beginning 10’-0” outside exterior wall of the
building.
3. Non-potable water system including reduced pressure backflow preventer for HVAC.
4. Backflow preventers.
5. Domestic water heaters.
6. Interior sanitary waste and vent piping system.
7. Interior sanitary drainage system extended to a point 10’-0” outside the interior face of the
foundation wall of the building.
8. Circulation Pumps.
9. Interior rainwater drainage system to a point 10’-0” outside wall of the building.
10. Plumbing fixtures and trim.
11. Propane gas system.
12. Extend all gas train vents to atmosphere.
13. Final connection to all gas fired equipment including valves, regulators, drip and dirt pockets,
unions and necessary appurtenances.
14. Roof and floor drains.
15. Hose bibs and wall hydrants.
16. Insulation.
17. Valves.
18. Water hammer arresters.
19. Fittings unions, flanges and couplings.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
PLUMBING 220000 - 3
20. Flashing of floor drains.
21. Hangers, plates and inserts.
22. Cleaning, testing and disinfection of piping systems.
23. All supplementary steel for piping and equipment support.
24. Guarantees.
25. Drilling for installation of inserts.
26. Core drilling.
27. Fire seal off all penetrations in floors and walls to the rating of the barrier.
B. Drawings and Specifications form complimentary requirements; provide work specified and not
shown, and work shown and not specified as though explicitly required by both. Although work is
not specifically shown or specified, provide supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances, devices and materials obviously necessary for a sound, secure and complete
installation.
1.4 RELATED WORK UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
A. The following items are not included in this section and will be performed under other sections.
1. Temporary Facilities.
2. Earthwork: Excavation and backfill.
3. Concrete:
a. Equipment foundations.
b. Housekeeping pads.
4. Masonry: All openings in masonry walls.
5. Waterproofing, Dampproofing and Caulking.
6. Roofing and Flashing.
7. Painting: All painting except as specified herein.
8. Finish Carpentry and Millwork.
9. Steel Doors and Frames.
10. Finish Hardware.
11. Elevators and Lifts.
12. Fire Protection.
13. Electrical.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
PLUMBING 220000 - 4
14. HVAC.
15. Foundation drains.
16. Site drainage.
17. Furnishing of toilet accessories such as toilet paper holders, mirrors and soap dispensers.
18. Utility structures.
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with all applicable Federal and State laws, and all Local codes, By-laws and Ordinances.
B. Where provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the
latter shall govern. Where the contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or
regulations, the contract provisions shall govern unless the Architect rules otherwise.
C. Request inspections from Authorities Having Jurisdiction, obtain all permits and pay for all fees
and inspection certificates as applicable and/or required. All permits and certificates shall be
turned over to the Owners at the completion of the work. Copies of permits shall be given to the
resident engineer prior to the start of work.
D. Unless otherwise specified or indicated, materials and workmanship and equipment performance
shall conform with the latest edition of the following standards, codes, Specifications,
requirements and regulations:
1. Local and State Building, Plumbing, Mechanical, Electrical, Fire and Health Department
Codes.
2. American Gas Association (AGA).
3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
4. American Insurance Association (AIA), formerly National Board of Fire Underwriters.
5. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA).
6. Factory Mutual Association (FM).
7. Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL).
E. All Plumbing work shall meet or exceed any other state and local codes and/or Authorities Having
Jurisdiction including all other standards indicated herein.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. This paragraph shall supplement Division 1.
B. Definitions:
1. Shop Drawings: Information prepared by the Contractor to illustrate portions of the work in
more detail than shown in the Contract Documents.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
PLUMBING 220000 - 5
2. Coordination Drawings: Detailed, large-scale layout Shop Drawings showing HVAC,
Electrical, Plumbing and Fire Protection work superimposed to identify conflicts and ensure
inter-coordination of Mechanical, Electrical, Architectural, Structural and other work.
C. Submittals Procedures and Format:
1. Review submittal packages for compliance with Contract Documents and then submit to
Architect for review. Submit transparency and two (2) blue or black-line reproductions of
each Shop Drawing larger than 8-1/2” x 11”. Submit eight (8) sets of each smaller shop
drawing. After review, transparency original of each large Shop Drawing and six (6) sets of
each small shop drawing will be returned with reviewer’s marks. Electronically submitted
shop drawings are acceptable.
2. Each Shop Drawing shall indicate in title block, and each Product Data package shall indicate
on cover sheet, the following information:
a. Title.
b. Name and location of project.
c. Names of Architect, Engineer, Contractor and Subcontractor(s).
d. Names of Manufacturer, Supplier, Vendor, etc.
e. Date of submittal.
f. Whether original submittal or resubmitted.
3. Shop Drawings showing manufacturer’s product data shall contain detailed dimensional
Drawings, accurate and complete description of materials of construction, manufacturer’s
published performance characteristics and capacity ratings (performance data alone is not
acceptable), plumbing requirements and wiring diagrams. Drawings shall clearly indicate
location (terminal block or wire number), voltage and function for all field terminations, and
other information necessary to demonstrate compliance with all requirements of Contract
Documents.
D. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. The Architect’s Plumbing design for each project is based on the single manufacturer listed in
the schedule or shown on the Contract Drawings. In Division 15 of these Specifications
certain “Alternate Manufacturers” are listed as being acceptable. These are acceptable only
if, as a minimum, they:
a. Accepted by Architect and Engineer.
b. Meet all performance criteria listed in the schedules and outlined in the Specifications.
c. Have equivalent operating characteristics to those called for in the Specifications.
d. Fit within the available space it was designed for, including space for maintenance and
component removal, with no modifications to either the space or the product. Clearances
to walls, ceilings and other equipment will be at least equal to those shown on the
Contract Documents. The fact that a manufacturer’s name appears as acceptable shall
not be taken to mean the Architect has determined that the manufacturer’s products will
fit within the available space. This determination is solely the responsibility of the
Contractor.
e. For equipment mounted in areas where structural matters are a consideration, the
products must have a weight no greater than the product listed in the schedules or
Specifications.
f. Products must adhere to all architectural considerations including, but not limited to,
being the same size and of the same physical appearance as scheduled or specified
products.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
PLUMBING 220000 - 6
E. Substitutions: Substitution of products by manufacturers other than those listed shall only be done
in accordance with subparagraph “F” “Substitutions and Deviations”.
F. Substitutions and Deviations:
1. Deviations from the Contract Documents and the substitution of materials or equipment
relative to the “Acceptable Manufacturers” referred to above, shall be requested individually
in writing whether deviations result from field conditions, standard shop practice, or other
cause. Submit letter with transmittal of Shop Drawings which flags the substitution or
deviation to the attention of the Architect. The letter shall describe changes in the system
shown and physical characteristics (connections to adjacent materials, plumbing services,
service access requirements, and other characteristics), and differences in operating
characteristics or cycles.
2. Without letters flagging the substitution or deviation to the Architect, it is possible that the
Architect may not notice such substitution or deviation or may not realize its ramifications.
Therefore, if such letters are not submitted to the Architect, the Contractor shall hold the
Architect and his consultants harmless for any and all adverse consequences resulting from
the deviations being implemented. Adverse consequences shall include, but not be limited
to, excessive noise, excessive maintenance, shortened longevity, spatial coordination
problems, and inadequate performance versus scheduled design. This shall apply
regardless of whether the Architect has reviewed or approved Shop Drawings containing the
deviation, and will be strictly enforced.
3. Do not request substitute materials or equipment unless identical material or equipment has
been operated successfully for at least three (3) consecutive years. Such materials and
equipment shall be a regular cataloged item shown in the current catalog of the
manufacturer. When deviation or substitution is permitted, coordinate fully with related
changes to Architectural, Structural, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Mechanical, and other work.
Ensure that related changes necessary for coordination of substituted items are made within
the Contract Price. Assume full responsibility for safety, operation and performance of the
altered system.
4. Substitutions of equipment, systems, etc. requiring approval of local Authorities must comply
with such regulations and be filed by the Contractor (should filing be necessary).
5. Consideration will not be given to claims that the substituted item meets the performance
requirements with lesser construction. Performance, as delineated in schedules and in the
Specifications, shall be interpreted as minimum performance.
6. Approval of proposed deviations or substitutions, if any, will be made at discretion of
Architect.
7. If equipment is proposed for substitution that is not tested and rated according to industry-
wide standards, the Architect shall have the right to have performance tests completed, at the
Contractor’s expense, to confirm the manufacturer’s performance claims.
G. Submittal Notations: Submittals will be returned from the Architect marked as illustrated below:
NO EXCEPTION TAKEN
NOT ACCEPTED
ACCEPTED AS NOTED
REVISE AND RESUBMIT
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
PLUMBING 220000 - 7
1. Checking is only for general conformance with the design concept of the project and general
compliance with the information given in the Contract Documents. Any action shown is
subject to the requirements of the Contract Drawings and Specifications. Contractor is
responsible for dimensions which shall be confirmed and correlated at the job site; fabrication
process and techniques of construction; coordination of his work with that of all other trades;
and the satisfactory performance of his work.
H. Schedule: Incorporated the Shop Drawing review period into the construction schedule so that
work is not delayed. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for delays caused by not
incorporating the following Shop Drawing review time requirements into his project schedule.
Allow at least ten (10) working days, exclusive of transmittal time, for review each time a Shop
Drawing is submitted or resubmitted with the exception that fifteen (15) working days, exclusive of
transmittal time, are required for the following:
I. Schedule:
1. Copies of all backflow preventer permits.
2. Certification of domestic water system disinfection.
3. Coordination Drawings, if required by this Specification.
4. Adjustment and balancing certification.
5. If more than five (5) Shop Drawings of this trade are received in one (1) calendar week.
J. List of Proposed Equipment and Materials: Within four (4) weeks after Award of Contract and
before ordering materials or equipment, submit a complete list of proposed materials and
equipment and indicate manufacturer’s names and addresses. No consideration will be given to
partial lists submitted out of sequence.
K. Responsibility:
1. The intent of submittal review is to check for capacity, rating, and certain construction
features. Contractor shall ensure that work meets requirements of the Contract Documents
regarding information that pertains to fabrication processes or means, methods, techniques,
sequences and procedures of construction; and for coordination of work of this and other
Sections. Work shall comply with submittals marked “REVIEWED” to extent that they agree
with the Contract Documents. Submittal review shall not diminish responsibility under this
Contract for dimensional coordination, quantities, installation, wiring, supports and access for
service, nor the Shop Drawing errors or deviations from requirements of the Contract
Documents. The Architect’s noting of some errors while overlooking others will not excuse
the Contractor for proceeding in error. Contract Documents requirements are not limited,
waived, nor superseded in any way by review.
2. Inform Subcontractors, Manufacturers, Suppliers, etc. of scope and limited nature of review
process and enforce compliance with the Contract Documents.
L. Material and equipment requiring Shop Drawing Submittals shall include but not be limited to:
1. Plumbing fixtures and trim.
2. Sump pumps.
3. Water heaters.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
PLUMBING 220000 - 8
4. Roof and floor drains.
5. Hose bibs and wall hydrants.
6. Piping.
7. Fittings, unions, flanges and couplings.
8. Insulation.
9. Sleeve packing.
10. Valves
11. Water hammer arresters.
12. Flashing of floor drains.
13. Backflow preventers.
14. Hangers, plates and inserts.
15. Receptors for condensate drainage.
16. Circulation pumps.
17. Fire-rated penetration assembles (ASTM E814, UL 1479).
18. Access panels.
19. Shop Drawings shall be submitted as a single bound package, organized and titled.
1.7 SURVEYS AND MEASUREMENTS
A. Base all required measurements, both horizontal and vertical, on reference points established by
the General Contractor and be responsible for the correct laying out of the Plumbing work. In the
event of a discrepancy between actual measurements and those indicated, notify the General
Contractor in writing. Do not proceed with the work required until written instructions have been
issued by the General Contractor.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, and Electrical Drawings are diagrammatic. They indicate
general arrangements of Mechanical and Electrical systems and other work. They do not show
all offsets required for coordination nor do they show the exact routings and locations needed to
coordinate with Structural and other trades and to meet Architectural requirements.
B. Work shall be performed in cooperation with other trades on the project and so scheduled as to
allow speedy and efficient completion of the work.
C. Furnish to other trades advance information on locations and sizes of all frames, boxes, sleeves
and openings needed for their work. Furnish information and Shop Drawings necessary to allow
trades affected by the work to install their work properly and without delay.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
PLUMBING 220000 - 9
D. In all spaces, prior to installation of visible material and equipment, including access panels,
review Architectural Drawings for exact locations and where not definitely indicated, request
information from Architect. Where the Plumbing work shall interfere with the work of other trades,
assist in coordinating the space conditions to make satisfactory adjustments before installation.
Without extra cost to the Owner, make reasonable modifications to the work as required by
normal Structural interferences. Pay the General Contractor for additional openings, or relocating
and/or enlarging existing openings through concrete floors, walls, beams and roof required for
any work which was not properly coordinated. Maintain maximum headroom at all locations. All
piping, duct, conduit, and associated components to be as tight to underside of structure as
possible.
E. If any Plumbing work has been installed before coordination with other trades so as to cause
interference with the work of such trades, all necessary adjustments and corrections shall be
made by the plumbing trades involved without extra cost to the Owner.
F. Where conflicts or potential conflicts exist and engineering guidance is desired, submit sketch of
proposed resolution to Architect for review and approval.
G. Protect all materials and work of other trades from damage which may be caused by the
Plumbing work, and repair all damages without extra cost to the Owner.
1.9 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION
A. Plumbing Subcontractor shall furnish and install various electrical items relating to the plumbing
equipment and control apparatus. The Electrical Subcontractor shall be required to connect
power wiring to this equipment unless noted otherwise.
B. The Plumbing and Electrical Subcontractors shall coordinate their respective portions of the work,
as well as the electrical characteristics of the plumbing equipment.
C. All power wiring and local disconnect switches will be provided by the Electrical Subcontractor for
the line voltage power. All control and interlocking wiring shall be the responsibility of the
Plumbing Subcontractor.
D. 120V and above power wiring sources extended and connected to heating and ventilating control
panels, transformers and switches shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Subcontractor. All
low voltage thermostats, zone valve and any switch wiring shall be the responsibility of the HVAC
Subcontractor.
E. Temperature control and equipment wiring shall be installed by the Plumbing Subcontractor.
F. Pipe heat tracing shall be furnished and installed by the Electrical Subcontractor. Power
connections shall be by the Electrical Subcontractor.
G. The Electrical Subcontractor will provide all magnetic starters except those furnished as an
integral part of packaged equipment.
1.10 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Coordination Drawings:
1. The Sheetmetal Subcontractor shall prepare a complete set of electronic Drawings at a scale
not less than 3/8” equals 1’-0”, showing structure and other information as needed for
coordination. He shall show sheetmetal layout thereon. These will be the Coordination
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
PLUMBING 220000 - 10
Drawings.
2. The main paths of egress and for equipment removal, from main Mechanical and Electrical
rooms must be clearly shown on the Coordination Drawings.
3. Each of the below specialty trades shall add its work to these background Drawings with
appropriate elevations and grid dimensions. Specialty trade information is required for fan
rooms and mechanical rooms, horizontal exits from duct shafts, crossovers, and for spaces in
and above ceilings where congestion of work may occur such as corridors, and even entire
floors. Drawings shall indicate horizontal and vertical dimensions, to avoid interference with
structural framing, ceilings, partitions, and other services.
a. Specialty Trades:
1) Plumbing System.
2) HVAC Piping and Associated Control System.
3) Electrical.
4) Sheet Metal Work.
5) Sprinkler System.
4. Each specialty trade shall sign and date each electronic Coordination Drawing. Return
Drawings to the Sheetmetal Subcontractor, who shall route them sequentially to all specialty
trades.
5. Where conflicts occur with placement of materials of various trades, the Sheetmetal
Subcontractor will be responsible to coordinate the available space to accommodate all
trades. Any resulting adjustments shall be initialed and dated by the specialty trade. The
Sheetmetal Subcontractor shall then final date and sign each Coordination Drawing. If he
cannot resolve conflicts, the decision of the General Contractor shall be final, subject to the
approval of the Architect.
6. A Subcontractor who fails to promptly review and incorporate his work on the Coordination
Drawings shall assume full responsibility of any installation conflicts affecting his work and of
any schedule ramifications.
7. The Sheetmetal Subcontractor shall make electronic copies of all Coordination Drawings.
Fabrication shall not start until such transparencies of completed Drawings are received by
the Architect/Engineer and have been reviewed.
8. Review of Coordination Drawings shall not diminish responsibility under this Contract for final
coordination of installation and maintenance clearances of all systems and equipment with
Architectural, Structural, Mechanical, and Electrical Contractors.
1.11 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The arrangement of all Plumbing work shown on the Contract Drawings is diagrammatic only and
indicates the minimum requirements of the work. Conditions at the building including actual
measurements shall determine the details of the installation. All work shall be laid out and
installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and patching.
B. Review the Architectural Drawings and Specifications before ordering any material and
equipment. Any discrepancies shall be brought to the attention of the Architect for his
determination prior to proceeding with the work.
1.12 TYPICAL DETAILS
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
PLUMBING 220000 - 11
A. Typical details where shown on the Contract Drawings shall apply to each and every item of the
project where such items are applicable. They are not repeated in full on the Contract Drawings,
which in many cases are diagrammatic only, but with the intention that such details shall be
incorporated in full. Any alternate method proposed for use by the Contractor shall have the prior
approval of the Architect.
1.13 SLEEVES, INSERTS
A. Furnish and install all sleeves, inserts, anchor bolts and similar items to be set into masonry or
concrete, as required for Plumbing work. Internal diameter of sleeve ball shall be 1/2" larger than
the outside diameter of the pipe or insulation covered line passing through it.
1.14 FIRESTOPPING, SMOKEPROOFING & WATERPROOFING
A. All cutting, patching, firestopping and waterproofing shall be performed by the Fire Suppression
Subcontractor. Refer to Sections 01 73 29 – CUTTING AND PATCHING, 07 00 01 –
WATERPROOFING, DAMPPROOFING & CAULKING, and 07 84 13 PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING for project requirements.
1.15 CORING, DRILLING
A. Core, cut and/or drill all small holes 4.5” diameter or less in walls and floors required for the
installation of sleeves and supports for the Plumbing work.
1.16 ACCESSIBILITY
A. Install all work such that parts requiring periodic inspection, operation, maintenance and repair
are readily accessible.
B. Furnish all access panels appropriate to particular conditions, to be installed by trades having
responsibility for the construction of actual walls, floors or ceilings at required locations.
1.17 SUPPLEMENTARY SUPPORTING STEEL
A. Provide all supplementary (non-structural) steelwork required for mounting or supporting
equipment and materials.
B. Steelwork shall be firmly connected to building construction as required. Locations and methods
of attachment shall be approved by the Architect.
C. Steelwork shall be of sufficient strength to allow only minimum deflection in conformity with
manufacturer’s published requirements.
D. All supplementary steelwork shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner parallel to floor,
wall and ceiling construction: all turns shall be made at forty-five and ninety degrees, and/or as
dictated by construction and installation conditions.
E. All manufactured steel parts and fittings shall be galvanized.
1.18 TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Provide all tools and equipment required for the fabrication and installation of the plumbing
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
PLUMBING 220000 - 12
equipment at the site.
1.19 PORTABLE AND DETACHABLE PARTS
A. Contractors shall retain in their possession all portable and/or detachable parts and portions of
materials, devices, equipment, etc. necessary for the proper operation and maintenance of the
Mechanical and Electrical systems until final completion of the work, at which time they shall be
handed over to the Owners.
1.20 RECORD DRAWINGS, PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A. As work progresses and for the duration of Contract, maintain a complete and separate set of
prints of Contract Drawings at job site at all times. Record work completed and all changes from
original Contract Drawings clearly and accurately including work installed as a modification or
addition to the original design. Work shall be updated on a weekly basis and shall be made
available for review by Architect. Failure to perform this work shall be reason for withholding
requisition payments. In addition, take photographs of all concealed equipment in gypsum board
ceilings, shafts, and other concealed, inaccessible work. At completion of work, make copies of
photographs with written explanation on back. These shall become part of Record Documents.
B. At the completion of work, prepare a complete set of electronic Record Drawings showing all
systems as actually installed. The electronic copies will be made available for the Plumbing
Contractor’s copying, at his expense. The quantity of copies which are made available shall in no
way be interpreted as setting a limit to the number of Drawings necessary to show the required
information. The Plumbing Contractor’s professional Draft Person shall transfer changes to
electronic copies. Submit sets of prints to Architect for comments as indicated in Division 01 – 01
77 00 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT.
C. The Architect will not certify the accuracy of the Record Drawings. This is the sole responsibility
of the Plumbing Contractor.
D. This trade shall submit the Record Drawings for approval by the Fire and Building Departments in
a form acceptable to the departments, when required by the jurisdiction.
E. Record Drawings shall show record condition of details, sections, riser diagrams, control changes
and corrections to schedules. Schedules shall show actual manufacturer, make and model
numbers of final equipment installation.
1.21 GUARANTEE/WARRANTY
A. Guarantee and 24 Hour Service:
1. Guarantee Work of this Section in writing for not less than one (1) year following the date of
acceptance by the Owner. If the equipment is used for temporary power etc, prior to
acceptance by the Owner, the bid price shall include an extended period of warranty covering
the one (1) year of occupancy, starting from the date of acceptance by the Owner. The
guarantee shall repair or replace defective materials, equipment, workmanship and
installation that develop within this period, promptly and to the Architect’s satisfaction and
correct damage caused in making necessary repairs and replacements under guarantee
within Contract Price.
2. In addition to guarantee requirements of Division 1 and of Subparagraph A above, obtain
written equipment and material warranties offered in manufacturer’s published data without
exclusion or limitation, in Owner’s name.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
PLUMBING 220000 - 13
3. Upon receipt of notice from the Owner of failure of any part of the systems or equipment
during the warranty period, the affected part or parts shall be replaced by this Contractor
without any reimbursement.
4. Replace material and equipment that require excessive service during guarantee period as
defined and as directed by Architect.
5. Provide 24 hour service beginning on the date the project is accepted by the Owner, whether
or not fully occupied, and lasting until the termination of the guarantee period. Service shall
be at no cost to the Owner. Service can be provided by this Contractor or a separate service
organization. Choice of service organization shall be subject to Architect and Owner
approval. Submit name and a phone number that will be answered on a 24 hour basis each
day of the week, for the duration of the service.
6. Submit copies of equipment and material warranties to Architect before final payment.
7. At end of guarantee period, transfer manufacturer’s equipment and material warranties still in
force to Owner.
8. This paragraph shall not be interpreted to limit Owner’s rights under applicable codes and
laws and under this Contract.
9. PART 2 paragraphs of this Specification may specify warranty requirements that exceed
those of this paragraph. Those paragraphs shall govern.
10. Use of systems provided under this Section for temporary services and facilities shall not
constitute Final Acceptance of Work by Owner, and shall not initiate the guarantee period.
11. Provide manufacturer’s engineering and technical staff at site to analyze and rectify problems
that develop during guarantee period immediately. If problems cannot be rectified
immediately to Owner’s satisfaction, advise the Architect in writing, describe efforts to rectify
situation, and provide analysis of cause of problem. The Architect and/or Engineer will direct
course of action.
1.22 OPERATING, INSTRUCTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Refer to Section 01 77 00 – CONTRACT CLOSEOUT and 01 78 23 – OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE DATA for submittal procedures pertaining to operating and maintenance
manuals.
B. Each copy of the approved operating and maintenance manual shall contain copies of the
approved Shop Drawings, equipment literature, cuts, bulletins, details, equipment and
engineering data sheets and typewritten instructions relative to the care and maintenance for the
operation of the equipment, all properly indexed. Each manual shall have the following minimum
contents:
1. Table of Contents.
2. Introduction:
a. Explanation of manual and its purpose and use.
b. Description of the plumbing systems.
c. Safety precautions necessary for equipment.
d. Illustrations, schematics and diagrams.
e. Installation drawing.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
PLUMBING 220000 - 14
3. Maintenance:
a. Maintenance and lubricating instructions.
b. Replacement charts.
c. Trouble-shooting charts for equipment components.
d. Testing instructions for each typical component.
e. Two (2) typed sets of instructions for ordering spare parts. Each set shall include name,
price, telephone number and address of where they may be obtained.
4. Manufacturer’s Literature:
a. The equipment for which Shop Drawings have been submitted and approved.
1.23 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The requirements of the State Building Code and Local regulations establish the minimum
acceptable quality of workmanship and materials, and all work shall conform thereto unless more
stringent requirements are indicated or specified herein.
B. All work shall comply with the latest editions of the codes as referenced herein.
C. Follow manufacturer’s directions for articles furnished, in addition to directions shown on the
Contract Drawings or specified herein.
D. Protect all work, materials, and equipment from damage during process of work. Replace all
damaged or defective work, materials and equipment without additional cost to the Owner.
E. All equipment and materials for permanent installation shall be the products of recognized
manufacturers and shall be new.
F. Equipment and materials shall:
1. Where normally subject to Underwriters Laboratory Inc. listing or labeling services, be so
listed and labeled.
2. Be without blemish or defect.
3. Not be used for temporary purposes.
4. Be in accordance with the latest applicable ASME standards.
G. Products shall meet with the acceptance of all Authorities Having Jurisdiction over the work.
Where such acceptance is contingent upon having the products examined, tested and certified by
Underwriters or other recognized testing laboratory, the product shall be so examined, tested and
certified.
H. All items of equipment or material of one generic type shall be the product of one manufacturer
throughout.
I. For items which are to be installed but not purchased as part of the Electrical work, the Electrical
work shall include:
1. The coordination of their delivery.
2. Their unloading from delivery trucks driven into any point on the property line at grade level.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
PLUMBING 220000 - 15
3. Their safe handling and field storage until the time of permanent placement in the project.
4. The correction of any damage, defacement or corrosion to which they may have been
subjected. Replacement, if necessary, shall be coordinated with the Contractor who
originally purchased the item.
5. Field erection and internal wiring as necessary for their proper operation.
6. Mounting in place, including the purchase and installation of all dunnage, supporting
members, and fastenings, necessary to adapt them to architectural and structural conditions.
7. Their connection to building wiring including the purchase and installation of all termination
junction boxes necessary to adapt and connect them to this wiring. Included also shall be the
purchase and installation of any substitute lugs or other wiring terminations as may be
necessary to adapt their terminals to the building wiring as called for and to the connection
methods set forth in these Specifications.
J. Items which are to be installed but not purchased as part of the Plumbing work shall be carefully
examined upon delivery to the project. Claims that any of these items have been received in
such condition that their installation will require procedures beyond the reasonable scope of the
Plumbing work will be considered only if presented in writing within one (1) week of the date of
delivery to the project of the items in question. The Plumbing work includes all procedures,
regardless of how extensive, necessary to put into satisfactory operation, all items for which no
claims have been submitted as outlined above.
1.24 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. All materials for the work of this section shall be delivered, stored and handled so as to preclude
damage of any nature. Manufactured materials shall be delivered and stored in their original
containers, plainly marked with the products’ and manufacturer’s name. Materials in broken
containers or in packages showing watermarks or other evidence of damage shall not be used
and shall be removed from the site.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE MATERIALS
A. The table below indicates pipe class for each service. Refer to the following pages for expanded
Specifications for the respective class.
PIPE MATERIALS SPEC INDEX
Service
Code
Maximum
Operating
(psig)
Service Limits
(Temperature °F)
Pipe
Material
Domestic Cold Water CW 150 below grade 250 Copper
Domestic Hot Return HWR 150 below grade 250 Copper
Domestic Hot Water HW 150 below grade 250 Copper
Non-Potable Water NPW 100 250 Copper
Propane Gas LP 50 70 C. Steel
Sanitary Waste & Vent S Gravity 120 Cast Iron/PVC
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
PLUMBING 220000 - 16
Storm Drain D Gravity 80 Cast Iron/PVC
B. Each valve type shall be the product of a single manufacturer. Each system shall be provided
with valves as required by Code and shown on the Contract Drawings and shall be installed to
facilitate operation, replacement and repair.
C. Provide access panels for concealed valves behind non-removable ceilings or walls.
D. Provide shut-off valves on supply piping to individual pieces of equipment.
E. Provide pipe dope, Teflon tape, wax rings, neoprene gaskets and other jointing compounds as
required by best standard practice and only on service as recommended by manufacturer.
F. Apply putties and jointing compounds for plumbing fixtures and trim as recommended by
manufacturers.
G. Valves on insulated piping system shall be equipped with extended handles to accommodate
insulation thickness.
2.2 COPPER PIPE (FOR CW, HWR, HW SYSTEMS)
1/2” to 3”
4” and Larger
Pipe Seamless copper water tube,
drawn temper, Type L. ASTM B-
88. See Note 1 or CPVC.
Seamless copper water tube,
drawn temper, Type L. ASTM B-
8. See Notes 2 & 5.
Fittings Wrought copper, solder-joint.
ASTM B-16.22, or CPVC.
Ductile iron coupling with copper
alkyd enamel paint coating,
ASTM A-536. Grade “E” EPDM
elastomer gasket. ASTM D-
2000. Equal to Victaulic Style
606 coupling. ASTM B-75
copper alloy fittings. ASTM B-
584 grooved end cast bronze
fittings for 6” pipe size.
Joints ASTM B-32 solder filled material,
Alloy Sb5 “95/5.” ASTM B-813
liquid or paste flux. Soldering
procedures shall comply with
ASTM B-828, or CPVC.
Rolled groove prepared and
assembled in accordance with
manufacturers instructions.
Mechanical Joints Cast copper alloy unions,
hexagonal stock with ball-and-
socket joint, solder joint ends.
ASME B-6.18.
ANSI Class 150 flange adapter
equal to Victaulic Style 641 for
connections to flanged
equipment. ANSI B-16.1 flange
dimensions. Watts G-4000-FDA
series.
Valves Gate Use ball valve. Use ball valve.
Ball All bronze, 3 piece, full port,
PTFE seats, solder end
connections. 600 psig WOG.
Apollo 82-200, Milwaukee BA-
350, Watts B-6801.
Class 125, cast iron body, epoxy
coated. Full port, flanged ends,
stainless steel ball and stem.
ANSI B16.1 flange dimensions.
Watts G-4000 FDA series.
Check Bronze body and clapper, solder
ends, 200 WOG. Jenkins 4093,
Iron body, bronze mounted,
flanged ends, 200 Jenkins 625-
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
PLUMBING 220000 - 17
WOG. Milwaukee 1509,
Stockham B-309.
C, Milwaukee F-2974-M,
Stockham G-931.
Balancing All bronze, 2 piece, RPTFE seats,
solder end connections. 600 psig
WOG. Apollo 70-100, Milwaukee
BA-150, Watts B-6001. CamLock
handle.
Cast iron lug body butterfly
valve. Bronze disc, replaceable
EPT liner and stainless steel
stem, 200 psig CWP.
A. Notes:
1. Below grade water piping 3” and smaller be Type K copper with bituminous coating copper
brazed joints, BcuP filler alloy. ANSI/AWS A5.8 procedures shall be per ANSI/AWS B2.2.
2. Below grade water piping 4” and larger shall be ductile iron with AWWA C104 cement lined
Class AWWA C151 piping with push-on joints.
3. Contact between dissimilar metals shall be made with dielectric couplings or dielectric
flanges. Contact between ferrous and stud bolts and bronze flanges shall be electrically
insulated with non-metallic washers.
4. Provide mechanical joint connections to all equipment such as water heaters, pumps,
compressors, etc.
2.3 STEEL PIPE (FOR PROPANE GAS SYSTEM)
2” and Smaller
2-1/2” and Larger
Pipe Schedule 40 carbon steel ASTM
A53 Grade B, A106 Grade A or
A120.
Schedule 40 Carbon Steel
ASTM A-53, Grade B, A106
Grade A or A120.
Fittings Screwed malleable iron 125 psi. Butt weld carbon steel
Schedule 40, A234.
Unions Screw 150X malleable iron A105
Grade II.
Use flange.
Flanges 150# raised face, screwed, A105. 150# raised face weld neck
A105 ASTM A181. Grade I.
150# flat face for cast iron
valve.
Valves, Plugs,
Gas Cock
Use ball valve. Iron body, greaseable and
lubricated tapered plug, flanged
end, 175 working pressure
Nordstrom 143, Serck Audco
LSW -133-GG, Walworth.
Solenoid Honeywell Skinner Value
U121XXXXX/423/XXXXX with
coils, printed circuit and other parts
for intrinsic safe Specifications
completely encapsulated within the
enclosure using epoxy material.
Operated at 24 VDC with an
intrinsic safety barrier.
Ball (Gas) Bottom loaded pressure stem.
Valve rated at 600 psi WOG.
Watts B-6000-UL-MASS or equal.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
PLUMBING 220000 - 18
Emergency Gas
Shut-Off
Zurn Accudoor custom valve box
with brushed stainless finish.
Flush door, glass pane, labeled
“Safety Gas Shut-off Valve”, T-
handle locks. Furnish and install
approved ball valve as specified
above.
Check (Gas) 150# Class, bronze swing check
valve, aluminum disc, screwed cap
and threaded ends. Approved
equal to Eclipse, Inc. series 1000.
Gaskets 1/16” red rubber, wire inserted.
150# raised face and 125 flat-face
gasket.
A. Notes:
1. Provide two wrenches for each gas cock size.
2. The Contractor, at his option, may weld piping down to 1-1/4” if permitted by local codes.
3. All welders for gas piping must be certified per the requirements of Section 15000.
4. All exterior black steel gas piping shall be painted with two (2) coats of epoxy-based paint.
(Color by Owner.)
5. When steel comes in contact with dissimilar material, provide dielectric couplings or dielectric
flanges. Contact between ferrous stud bolts and bronze flanges shall be electrically insulated
with non-metallic washers. Provide union connections to all pneumatically operated
equipment.
2.4 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT, STORM DRAIN
Above Grade Below Grade
Piping 3” and Larger: Hubless cast
iron soil pipe, service weight.
ASTM-A-888, CISPI 130, or
SCH. 40 PVC.
2-1/2” and Smaller: Hubless
cast iron soil pipe, service
weight. ASTM A-88, CISPI 130
or type M copper tubing. ASTM
B8872. See Note 1, or SCH. 40
PVC.
2” and Larger: Hub and spigot
cast iron soil pipe, extra heavy.
ASTM A-74 or service weight if
Code approved. Piping shall be
asphalt or coal tar pitch coated
or SCH. 40 PVC.
Fittings 3” and Larger: Hubless cast
iron fittings, service weight.
ASTM-A-888, CISPI 801 or
SCH. 40 PVC.
2-1/2” and Larger: Hubless
cast iron fittings, service weight,
ASTM A-888, CISPI 301 or
wrought copper DWV fittings.
See Note 1 or SCH. 40 PVC.
2” and Larger: Hub and spigot
cast iron fittings, extra heavy.
ASTM A-74. Asphalt or coal tar
pitch coated. DWV pattern or
SCH. 40 PVC.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
PLUMBING 220000 - 19
Joints Hubless Cast Iron: Heavy-duty
stainless steel band coupling
with neoprene gasket. Bank
torque of 80 foot/pounds 15
psig pressure rating. Husky SD
4000 or CLAMP-ALL HI-
TORQUE 80 or SCH. 40 PVC.
Caulked with leak and oakum or
neoprene compression gaskets
conforming to ASTM C-564 or
SCH. 40 PVC.
Backwater Valve Cast iron gravity flow type,
bronze mounted, hub end.
Exterior shall be mastic coated,
bolted or extended cover in
accordance with installation
parameters. J.R. Smith Co.
7012-7022, JOSAM 67500,
Zurn Industries Z-1095.
A. Notes:
1. Copper tube and fittings shall not be used on urinal wastes.
2. CISPI 310 no-hub couplings will not be accepted as equal to manufacturer’s listed.
2.5 PRESSURE, FLOW AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL DEVICES
A. Thermostatic Mixing Valves:
1. Pre-piped thermostatic mixing valve, inlet check valves, isolation valves, dial thermometer
and mounting hardware.
2. Acceptable manufacturers: Powers, Leonard or Lawler.
B. Pressure and Temperature Relief Valves on Water Heaters:
1. Combination pressure and temperature (P&T) relief valves shall be automatic, ASME-rated,
AGA and CGA-certified, ANSI standard, bronze body. Pressure relieving setting shall be
150% of the working pressure of the unit to a maximum of 150 psi; temperature relieving
setting shall be 120° F. Temperature relieving capacity shall be selected on AGA-CGA
rating.
2. Valves shall be by Watts Regulator Co. Approved equivalent valves by Robertshaw or Cash-
Acme may be provided.
C. Vacuum Relief Valves on Cold Water Inlet to Water Heaters and Tanks:
1. Relief valves shall be bronze body composition disc with 200 psi working pressure and 250°
F temperature rating.
2. Valves shall be by Watts Regulator Co. Approved equivalent valves by Taco or B&G may be
provided.
D. Vacuum Breakers:
1. Atmospheric vacuum breakers shall be all-bronze, for temperature up to 210° F: Watts 800
or equivalent by Neptune or Febco.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
PLUMBING 220000 - 20
2.6 INSULATION
A. Insulation shall be by Owens-Corning, Certain-Teed or Manville.
B. Insulation shall be installed by insulation firm regularly specializing in this work and employing
men particularly skilled therein. No covering applied by plumber's “helpers” will be acceptable.
C. Insulation installation shall meet manufacturer’s recommendations. No insulation shall be applied
until piping has passed tests as required by Authorities Having Jurisdiction.
D. Insulation, jackets and adhesives shall be flame-retardant and shall have ASTM E-84 fire hazard
ratings of 25 flame spread, 50 smoke developed and 50 fuel contributed.
1. Interior Applications – Jackets:
a. Type a – Vapor Barrier Jackets: Kraft reinforced foil vapor barrier with self-sealing
adhesive joints. Jacket shall be heavy duty fire retardant material with glass fiber
reinforcing and self-sealing lap. Jacket will be factory applied to the insulation. Jacket
shall have neat, white Kraft finish or white vinyl suitable for painting, with bead puncture
resistance of 50 units minimum. Vapor barrier shall be .001” aluminum foil adhered to
the inner surface of the jacket. Permeance shall not exceed 0.02 perms. Jacket shall be
Owens-Corning Fiberglass “ASJ-SSL” or Manville Flamesafe “AP-T”.
b. Type b – PVC Jackets: One piece, pre-molded type.
E. Insulation and jacketing shall be in accordance with following:
1. Type A: Glass fiber insulation; ANSI/ASTM C547; “k” value of 0.22 – 0.28 at 100° F non-
combustible.
2. Type B: Molded, flexible closed cell vinyl, ASTM D635; “k” value of 1.17 bacterial resistant.
F. Schedule: The following piping systems require insulation:
Piping System
Type
Insulation
Thickness
Inch (mm)
Jacket
Type
Domestic Hot Water Supply/Return Less Than 1-1/2” A 1” a, b
Domestic Hot Water Supply/Return 1-1/2” and Larger A 1-1/2” a, b
Domestic Cold Water A 1” a, b
Roof Drains and Horizontal Rainwater A 1” a, Note 3
Non-Potable Water A 1/2” a, b
Handicap Lav. Hot Water and Waste B 1/8” b
1. Notes:
a. Unless noted otherwise, Section “F” pertains to all piping specified system. This note
pertains to all piping scheduled above.
G. Pipe hangers shall be outside insulation and shall incorporate 12”, 26 gauge protection shields.
Insulation on piping that passes through walls or partitions shall pass continuously through
sleeves, except at firewalls, smoke partitions and floor penetrations where space between
sleeves and piping shall be fire stopped with approved packing.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
PLUMBING 220000 - 21
2.7 PIPE SUPPORTS
A. Provide adjustable clevis hangers for hanger sizes 4” and larger and cast brass split-ring hinged
hangers or band type hangers for smaller. Support piping from building structure to maintain
required grade and pitch of pipe lines, prevent vibration, secure piping in place and provide for
expansion and contraction. Hangers on all insulated pipe shall be clevis type.
B. Provide vertical brackets and guides for horizontal piping where it is racked along walls. Trapeze
hangers may be used where conditions permit. Provide all necessary pipe clips, anchors and
sundries for proper alignment and support of piping. Hangers for copper piping shall be coated
for dielectric isolation. Hangers for PVC, polypropylene and other plastic piping shall be extended
V-shaped, with angle iron pipe supports as necessary.
C. Hangers for gas piping shall be steel hangers with cast rollers or pipe and roller supports.
D. Hanger rods shall have machine threads. Beam clamps, concrete inserts and expansion shields
shall be provided as required. No ramset or shot shields will be allowed.
E. Hanger spacing shall meet requirements of State and Local Plumbing Codes. In no case shall
horizontal piping be supported at intervals greater than 10’-0”.
F. Piping below basement or lowest level slab (that is, buried piping), need not be supported from
structure if slab is not designed as structural slab. The Plumbing Contractor shall support all
piping under structural slabs on grade.
G. Pipe supports shall not bear on sleeves.
H. Friction clamps shall be installed at base of plumbing risers and at each floor. Friction clamps
shall not be supported from or rest on sleeves.
I. Horizontal piping shall be suspended from building structure by mild steel rod connecting pipe
hanger to inserts, beam clamps, angle brackets and lag screws as required by Building
Construction in accordance with the following:
Rod Size
Pipe Size
3/8” 1/2" to 2”
1/2" 2-1/2” to 4”
5/8” 5” to 12”
3/4" 15”
J. Hangers on insulated lines shall be sized to fit the outside diameter of pipe insulation. Provide
hangers for insulated piping with 12” long, 18 gauge galvanized insulation shields.
K. Piping at equipment and control valves shall be supported to prevent strains or distortions in
connected equipment and control valves. Piping at equipment shall be supported to allow for
removal of equipment, valves and accessories with a minimum of dismantling and without
requiring additional support after these items are removed.
L. Piping installed under this Section shall be independently supported from building structure by
means of beam attachments and not from piping, ductwork or conduit of other trades.
Supplementary steel, including factory-fabricated channels, required to meet the requirements
specified herein, shall be provided by the Plumbing Contractor.
M. Maximum spacing of hangers on runs of steel, copper or brass pipe shall be as follows:
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
PLUMBING 220000 - 22
Schedule: Hanger Spacing in Feet/Pipe Material
Pipe Size
(Inches)
Steel
(Feet)
Copper or Brass
(Feet)
1/2 to 1 7 5
1 to 1/4 10 6
1 to 1/2 10 8
2 to 8 10 10
N. Maximum spacing of hangers on no hub cast iron soil pipe and shall be 5’ and hangers shall be
provided at all changes in direction. Hanger rods to support piping from the structure or
supplementary steel shall not exceed 4’ in total length. Where pipe support assemblies exceed 4’
in total length, Plumbing Contractor shall provide factory-fabricated channels and associated
accessories.
O. All thermoplastic piping systems shall be hung in strict accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations.
P. Hangers in areas exposed to weather or in unheated spaces shall be provided with a shop coat of
rust inhibited paint. Hanger rods shall be hot dipped galvanized.
Q. Hangers and rods for under slab piping shall be hot dipped galvanized.
2.8 SLEEVES, INSERTS, FIRE STOPPING AND ESCUTCHEONS
A. All pipes passing through floors, walls or partitions shall be provided with sleeves having an
internal diameter one inch larger than the outside diameter of pipe. Pipe Sleeve Materials:
1. Sleeves through floors and through exterior, structural and fire-rated construction, shall be
hot dipped galvanized Schedule 40 steel pipe. Sleeves shall extend 1” above finished floor.
2. Sleeves through partitions and non-fire-rated construction shall be 26 gauge galvanized steel
with lock longitudinal seams or approved plastic pipe.
3. Provide waterproofing membrane locking devices at floors. Provide 150 lb. Slip-on welding
flanges at exterior wall penetrations.
B. Fire stop penetration seals in fire-rated construction shall be products of STI SpecSeal, 3M,
Proset Systems Firefill or Dow and shall be installed in accordance with the latest requirements of
ASTM E814 (UL 1479). Fire stop penetration sealants for non-metallic and insulated piping shall
be intumescent (STI SpecSeal Series 100 Sealant or SpecSeal Collar or approved equal).
Provide mineral fiberboard, matting or putty for damming and forming. Finish seals flush to wall
surface and fill gaps with silicone adhesive sealant caulking (Dow 96-081 RTV or approved
equal). Provide 1” thick ceramic fiberboard on both sides of penetrations in 2 and 3 hour rated
walls and floors less than 8” thick.
C. Packing for sleeves that do not require maintenance of fire rating shall be oakum, silicate foam,
ceramic fiber or mineral fiber with approved sealant. Pack or foam to within one inch of both wall
surfaces. Seal penetration packing with approved caulking and paintable waterproof mastic
surface finish or silicone caulking.
D. Waterproof Pipe Penetrations:
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
PLUMBING 220000 - 23
1. Sleeves through outside walls shall be provided with pipe to wall penetration closures equal
to Link-Seal Thunderline Corporation. Seals shall be mechanical type of interlocking rubber
links shaped to fill space between pipe and sleeve. Links shall be assembled with bolts to
form a belt around the pipe with pressure plate under each bold head and nut. After seal
assembly is positioned, tightening of bolts will provide watertight seal. This Contractor shall
determine the required inside diameter of each individual sleeve before ordering, fabricating
or installing. The inside diameter of each sleeve shall be sized as recommended by the
manufacturer to fit the pipe and Link-Seal to assure a watertight joint.
2. Prefabricated modular sleeves shall be Mason Industries (SWS) or approved equal stiffened
galvanized steel sleeves with preformed closed-cell elastomeric seal (non-fire rated) or
preformed mineral fiber or silicone foam seal (fire rated).
3. Provide waterproof 1” single ring set in silicone and bolted to floor or wall at chipped and
drilled penetrations of existing slabs on grade and existing walls below grade.
E. Inserts shall be individual or strip type or pressed steel construction with accommodation for
removable nuts and threaded rods up to 3/4" diameter, permitting lateral adjustment. Individual
inserts shall have an opening at the top to allow reinforcing rods up to 1/2" diameter to be passed
through the insert body. Strip inserts shall have attached rods with hooked ends to allow
fastening to reinforcing rods.
F. Unless otherwise specified herein, escutcheons shall be cast brass chrome plated type and
provided with a set screw to properly hold escutcheon in place.
2.9 TRAPS AND STRAINERS
A. Provide cleanouts in soil, waste and storm drainage piping on straight runs at changes in
directions and at foot of stacks and other points where required by inspecting Authorities.
Cleanouts shall suit construction in which they are to be installed.
B. Maximum horizontal distance on straight runs between cleanouts in piping 4” and smaller shall be
50 feet. In piping 5” and larger, maximum horizontal distance between cleanouts shall be 100
feet.
C. Cleanouts shall be same size as pipe 4” and smaller. Cleanouts for piping larger than 4” shall be
sized per local code and in no circumstance shall they be less than 4” in diameter. No reduction
in cleanout sizes for pipe 4” and smaller is permitted.
D. Traps not integral with fixtures and in accessible locations shall have brass trap screw protected
by water seal and will be regarded as cleanout.
E. Bodies of cleanout ferrules in bell and spigot piping shall be standard pipe sizes conforming in
thickness to that required for pipe and fittings and shall extend not less than 3/4" above hub of
pipe.
1. Cleanout plug shall be cast brass with raised nut 3/4" high.
2. Cleanouts in copper waste piping shall be soldered brass cleanout fittings with extra heavy
brass screw plugs of same size as line.
3. Cleanouts in threaded waste piping shall be cast iron, drainage T pattern, 90 branch fitting
with extra heavy brass screw plugs of same size as pipe.
4. Floor cleanouts in finished areas shall be per schedules equivalent to J.R. Smith, Wade or
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
PLUMBING 220000 - 24
Zurn.
5. Floor cleanouts in unfinished areas shall be per schedules equivalent to J.R. Smith, Wade or
Zurn.
F. Provide test tees with cleanout plugs at foot vertical soil, waste, acid waste and roof conductor
lines and at each floor. Cleanouts on vertical lines concealed behind finished walls shall extend
to back of finish wall; provide wall plate. Obtain Architect’s approval for wall plate locations and
reroute piping if necessary.
G. Cleanouts shall open in direction of flow of drainage line served or at right angles thereto.
H. Keep cleanout plugs clean and unimpeded. Prevent covering with cement, plaster or other
permanent finished materials.
2.10 THERMOMETERS AND PRESSURE GAUGES
A. Provide bronze Bourdon tube pressure gauges where shown on Drawings and where specified,
by U.S. Gauge, Trerrice or Weksler, accurate to +1%.
1. Gauges shall have white faces with black-filled engraved lettering. Gauge bodies shall be set
in phenolic cases. Provide pulsation dampers and gauge cocks to isolate each gauge.
2. Gauges shall be easily accessible and easily read. Gauges readable from floor at less than 5
feet shall be 4-1/2” dials. Other gauges shall have 6” dials. Gauges graduations shall meet
limit requirements of normal operation. Gauges shall indicate at mid-scale.
3. Provide pressure gauges at the inlet and outlet of each pump.
4. Provide pressure gauges at each water entrance, downstream of the water meter and on
each side of PRV stations.
B. Provide separable well V-case thermometers by U.S. Gauge, Terrice or Weksler where shown on
Drawings and where specified. Thermometers shall have 9” scale and white face with black-filled
engraved letters. Thermometers shall be angular or straight stemmed, as conditions necessitate.
Thermometer wells shall be bronze and shall be installed so as to ensure minimum restriction of
water flow in pipe and shall be installed to be able to be viewed from the floor.
1. Provide thermometer at the inlet and outlet of each water heater and where shown on
Drawings. Thermometers shall have scale range of 30°-240° F with 2° scale division.
2. Provide thermometer in hot water return system at each hot water recirculation pump and
where shown on Drawings. Scale range shall be 30°-240° F with 2° scale division.
2.11 WALL HYDRANTS AND HOSE BIBBS
A. Provide wall hydrants as shown on the Contract Drawings. Provide hose bibs in every toilet core
where more than one (1) flushing fixture is shown.
B. Wall hydrant shall be recessed box anti-siphon, non-freeze, key-operated, 3/4". Hydrant shall be
J.R. Smith or equivalent by Josam or Zurn. Coordinate cover and plate finish with Architect prior
to ordering any units.
C. Hose bib shall be chrome plated bronze or brass with replaceable hexagonal disc, hose thread
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
PLUMBING 220000 - 25
spout and integral vacuum breaker in conformance to ANSI/ASSE 1011. Hose bib shall be equal
to Chicago No. 952 or equivalent, T&S Brass or Watersaver.
2.12 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS
A. Provide water hammer arresters at fixtures with automatic solenoid or cylinder operated valves,
automatic flush valves quick-closing valves or solenoid valves and where indicated on Drawings.
B. Fixtures and equipment in battery installation may use single water hammer arrester properly
sized for connected load.
C. Provide proper access to water hammer arresters in chases, utilizing a minimum 12” x 12” access
panel furnished by this Contractor.
D. Water hammer arresters shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations
and not less than one (1) installed per core piping hot system and core piping cold system.
Arresters shall be equal to J.R. Smith, Zurn or PPP.
2.13 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM
A. Refer to Architectural and Plumbing Drawings for quantities, locations and mounting heights of
fixtures provided under this Section.
B. Fixture trim, traps, faucets, escutcheons and waste pipes exposed to view in finished spaces
shall be I.P.S. brass with polished chromium plating (CP) over nickel finish.
C. Vitreous china fixtures shall be regular selection fused and vitrified to produce homogeneous
material with close grain without pores. Surfaces that contact walls, floors and other fixtures shall
be set true.
D. Enameled surfaces on cast iron fixtures shall be of suitable thickness to provide the highest
commercial grade. Exterior exposed surfaces not enameled shall be treated at factory with one
(1) coat of filler.
E. Affix manufacturer’s guarantee label or trademark to fixture to indicate first quality. Acid-resisting
enamel fixture shall bear manufacturer’s symbol signifying resistance to acid.
F. Set fixtures with wall outlet flanges at proper distance from floors and walls with closet setting
compound or gasket.
G. Catalog designations and manufacturer’s names of vitreous china and enameled cast iron fixtures
are specified to establish standards of quality for performance and materials. Equivalent fixtures
by Kohler, American Standard or Eljer may be submitted for consideration.
H. Vitreous china and enameled cast-iron fixtures shall be white throughout, unless specified
otherwise. Closet seats shall match closet fixture color.
I. Fixture Types: As listed on Drawings.
1. Notes:
a. Standards:
1) Floor Drains:
a) Cast Iron – ASME A112.21.1M
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
PLUMBING 220000 - 26
b) Plastic – ASTM A112.21.M
c) Cast Iron Trench Drains – ASME A112.21.1M
2) Cleanouts: Cast Iron – ASME A112.36.2M
3) Roof Drains: Cast Iron – ASME A112.21.2M
4) Sleeve Systems: UL 1479
2.14 EQUIPMENT – GENERAL
A. The following mechanical equipment is to be supplied by a single manufacturer as part of this
package unless otherwise noted.
B. Equipment Tags:
1. All equipment shall be tagged using black phenol background with a 1/4" white engraved
lettering tag affixed to the piece. Tag shall be minimum of 2” high and 4” long for large
equipment and shall include the tag number and the piece.
2. Equipment Tag Sequence (Example):
a. G-CMP – 1XXX where:
b. G – Indicates system (Natural Gas)
c. CMP – Indicates equipment (Booster Pump)
d. 1 – Indicates piece number (1, 2, 3…)
e. XXX – Indicates building number (if applicable)
C. All equipment furnished in the following pages shall be furnished with seismic anchoring points.
Equipment supplied shall be constructed with a seismic rating.
2.15 WATER HEATERS
A. Provide water heaters of sizes and types indicated on the schedule sheets. Heaters shall be
tested at 200 psi and rated for working pressure of 150 psi and shall bare stamp certifying testing
and rating. Tanks with capacity greater than 120 gallons or input rating greater than 200,000
Btu/hr shall meet ASME Boiler and Pressure and Vessel Code requirements.
B. Provide pressure and temperature relief valve and vacuum relief valve.
1. Pressure and temperature relief valves shall be at least 3/4" and shall be rated and listed for
heater input rating and as required by ANSI and ASME Standards. Temperature relief valves
shall be installed within top 6” of tank.
2. Vacuum relief valves shall meet ANSI standards requirements and shall be rated and listed
for heater input rating and as required by ANSI and ASME Standards. Temperature relief
valves shall be installed within top 6” of tank.
C. Heaters shall be of size and type as scheduled on Drawings.
2.16 PUMPS
A. The following pumps are included:
1. Hot water circulating pumps:
a. Hot water circulating pumps shall be all bronze, centrifugal of sizes indicated on the
schedule sheets or equivalent by Armstrong, B&G or Grundfoss.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
PLUMBING 220000 - 27
b. Provide Minneapolis-Honeywell or approved equivalent line voltage aquastat with
separable socket to control each pump, approximately 15’-0” from pump, on suction side.
Provide a disconnect switch for each pump. (Allow for constant circulation if thermostatic
mixing valves are used on the water heater.)
c. Pump capacity and motor shall be indicated on the Contract Drawings. All motors to be
high efficiency.
2. Sump pumps shall be of sizes and types indicated on schedule sheets or equivalent by
Aurora, Stancor or Liberty Pumps.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 COORDINATION
A. Cooperate and coordinate with work of other Sections in executing work of this Section.
3.2 EXPANSION PROVISIONS
A. Allow for expansion with offsets, loops, swing joints, expansion joints and other means, where
necessary to protect piping systems as shown. Take-offs from mains to run outs shall not have
less than a three (3) elbow swing.
B. Anchor mains and risers with loops or offsets to structure to impart expansion toward loops and
offsets. Anchors shall be forged wrought iron, secured to pipe and structure. Provide vibration
isolation as required and as specified.
C. Provide pipe alignment guides to guide expanding pipe to move freely from anchor points towards
expansion joints, offsets and other expansion provisions.
3.3 PIPE IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide color-coded pipe identification markers on piping installed under this section. Pipe
markers shall be snap-on laminated plastic protected by clean acrylic coating. Pipe markers shall
be applied after Architectural painting where such is required.
B. Provide arrow marker with each pipe content marker to indicate direction of flow. If flow can be in
either direction, use double-headed arrow marker.
C. Main shall be labeled at points of entrance and exit from mechanical room, adjacent to each
valve, on each riser, at each tee fitting, at points of entrance and exit from building, at least once
in each room and at intervals no longer than 20’.
D. In general, 2” high legend shall be used for pipe lines 4” in diameter and larger, and 3/4" high
legend shall be used for pipe lines 3” in diameter and smaller.
E. Markers shall be Seton, MIS or approved equivalent.
F. Color banding shall meet ANSI latest and OSHA requirements.
G. Markers shall have legends and color coding with black letters:
1. Markers are to be applied to all piping, regardless of under jacket colors per the following
schedule:
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
PLUMBING 220000 - 28
Service
Legend
Background
Color
Cold Water Cold Water Green
Hot Water Domestic Hot Water Yellow
Hot Water Return Domestic Hot Water Return Yellow
Non-Potable Water Non-potable Yellow
Exhaust Gas Exhaust Gas Yellow
Sanitary Sanitary Sewer Green
Vent Vent Yellow
Rainwater Storm Sewer Green
Pump Discharge Pump Discharge Green
Fuel Gas Fuel Gas Yellow
H. In Plumbing Room, Janitor’s Closets and other areas without hung ceilings, colored PVC jackets
shall be used per the following schedule:
1. All insulated piping exposed in mechanical rooms shall be covered with a Ceel-Co plastic
jacket. Color pattern and system identification legend shall be as in the following schedule:
2. This plastic jacket shall include fitting covers and piping covers.
3. Piping to be covered with this plastic jacket shall be insulated and finished as herein specified
and then the plastic jacket shall be applied.
3.4 TAGS, VALVES, EQUIPMENT AND INSTRUMENTS
A. Upon completion of work, attach engraved laminated plastic tags to all valves and
instrumentation. Equipment shall bear a stamped stainless tag. Tags shall have black
characters on white face, consecutively numbered and prefixed with letter “P” for general valves.
Tags shall bear the number used in the P&IDs for those items so marked.
B. Embossed or engraved aluminum or brass tags may be substituted if desired. Tags shall be at
least 1/8” thick.
C. Tags shall be at least 1” diameter with numerals at least 3/8” high and attached by “S” hooks and
chains.
D. Nameplates, catalog numbers and rating identifications shall be securely attached to electrical
and mechanical equipment with screws or rivets. Adhesives or cements will not be permitted.
E. Non-potable water outlets shall be identified with permanently attached yellow color-code or 4”
high triangle tag reading “Water Unsafe”.
F. Coordinate numbering system with existing piping tags as not to duplicate numbers.
3.5 FLASHING AND COUNTER FLASHING
A. Floor drains shall be flashed watertight with 20 ounce sheet copper flashing which shall extend 8”
beyond drain flashing flange.
B. Provide counter flashing for roof penetrations required under this Section including vents and roof
drains.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
PLUMBING 220000 - 29
C. Flashing of vents, roof drains and other penetrations of roof required under this Section shall be
done under other Sections.
3.6 JOINTS AND CONNECTIONS
A. Joints and connections shall be permanent and shall be gas and water-tight. Jointing shall be
types specified for serviced indicated. Joints and connections shall meet requirements of
manufacturer’s best recommended practice. All transitions between different piping materials
shall be made using approved adapters. Adapters for transitions between two (2) types of piping
materials shall be manufactured for purpose intended.
3.7 INTERIOR WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM
A. Provide a complete, new (domestic and/or protected) hot and cold water piping system as
indicated on Drawings and as specified, including supplies to fixtures and indicated equipment.
Piping shall be pitched at least 1” in 40 feet so that it can be drained completely at low points with
drain valves. Piping shall be pitched up toward fixtures for proper air relief. Provide automatic air
vents with outlet piped to floor and gate valve ahead of air vents, where offsets cannot be vented
by means of fixture connections.
1. Pipe used in piping assembly shall be clean and shall have ends square and reamed before
putting into fittings.
2. Cut tube to required length with hacksaw or tube cutter designed for copper work.
3. Remove burrs from inside and outside of cut edge and clean end of tube with steel wool or
sand cloth until discoloration is removed and metal is smooth and bright.
4. Oxides shall be removed by sand cloth and brush.
5. Removal of oxides or discoloration of pipe and fittings by acids or self-cleaning flux is
forbidden.
6. Apply a thin, uniform and complete coating of reliable brand of soldering flux (Nokorode or
Crest) to cleaned surfaces of tube and fittings.
7. When joints are soldered, remove excess solder with a cloth or brush leaving a fillet of solder
in chamber at end of the fitting.
8. Where quick closing valves such as solenoid or flush valves are being used, piping shall be
protected from water hammer by shock absorbers. Shock absorbers shall be installed at all
batteries of fixtures that are operated by flush valves. Shock absorbers shall be as
manufactured by PPP, J.R. Smith, or Zurn, and shall conform to the Plumbing and Drainage
Institute (PDI) published requirements.
9. Connections to tanks and equipment shall be made with unions.
10. Water services supplying the building shall flow through in-line strainers and shall have
containment backflow protection as indicated.
11. Shut-off and control valves on main distribution and branch lines shall be located for easy
access and operation. Branch piping shall be valved with access panels provided as
required at locations shown on Drawings and determined in field.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
PLUMBING 220000 - 30
3.8 INTERIOR SANITARY WASTE, STORM, DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING
A. Provide waste, drainage and vent lines shown in building as shown on Drawings. Vents shall
extend through roof and shall increase to at least 4”. Piping shall be assembled and installed
without undue strains and stresses and provision shall be made for expansion, contraction and
structural settlement.
B. Interior horizontal sanitary waste and storm drainage piping shall be installed in practical
alignment at uniform grade of at least 1/8” per foot, but 1/4" per foot where code dictates and as
shown on Drawings.
C. Vents from fixtures or line of fixtures, when connected to vent line serving other fixtures, shall be
extended at least 6” above flood level rim of highest of fixtures to prevent use of vent line as
waste. No vent terminal shall be directly beneath door, window or other ventilating opening of
building, nor shall any vent be within 12 feet horizontally of such opening.
D. Provide sleeves for pipe that pass through walls.
E. Provide 3” air gap on equipment and drains that discharge to floor drains.
F. Provide an air gap in which the vertical distance through the free atmosphere between the waste
pipe and the floor rim of the receptacle into which it is discharging is a minimum of 2 pipe
diameters greater.
G. Piping shall be run straight and plumb and offsets shall be made at an angle of not less than 45.
H. Carefully lay out work in advance so pipes pass through openings and permit proper pitch to
stacks. Due to extensive ventilation and lighting systems all trades shall coordinate work with
work of other trades.
I. Hub and spigot soil pipe shall be thoroughly assembled with joints of picked oil-free oakum
packed tightly into space between pipes to a depth of 1-1/2”. Remaining space shall be filled in
by pouring with molten lead, caulked to ensure tight joints without straining bell. After caulking,
lead shall be flush with ends of bell.
J. No hub soil pipe shall be assembled with any hub heavy-duty stainless steel couplings and
neoprene gaskets.
K. Cleanouts:
1. Provide cleanouts with brass caps and screws same size as pipe up to 4 inches and not less
than 4 inches for larger piping at the ends of all branches on soil and waste piping and in
such other portions of the piping where run is over 50 feet. Locate floor cleanouts as
indicated on Drawings.
3.9 WATER ENTRANCE
A. Run exterior water service piping for domestic water, beginning 10’-0” outside building wall, as
shown on Drawings.
B. When water pipe laying is not in progress, close ends of pipe with watertight plugs. If water
enters pipe, flush and clean line.
C. Keep excavation for underground water main open until system has been tested, inspected and
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
PLUMBING 220000 - 31
approved.
D. Piping shall be bedded as specified in Division 2.
3.10 EXTERIOR SANITARY SEWER
A. Sanitary line ending 10’-0” outside exterior building wall shall run by gravity as shown on
Drawings.
B. Check line and grade of piping with laser designed for purpose intended.
C. Plug open ends of piping when work is not in progress.
D. Piping shall be bedded as specified in Division 2.
3.11 WATER METER
A. Provide compound water meters that meet AWWA C701-70 requirements for cold water meters
and the Municipal Water Authority.
B. Registers shall be straight reading, hermetically sealed calibrated in cubic feet and shall meet
Section 9.3 of AWWA standard requirements. Provide center swept test hands.
C. Meter shall register at least 98% and no more than 102% of water actually passing through meter
at any rate of flow, within range of 15 gpm to 800 gpm.
D. Main casing shall be bronze. Bolts shall be stainless steel.
E. Meter shall permit easy removal of interior parts without disturbing meter connections to pipeline.
F. Provide magnetic couplings to transmit motion from measuring chamber to register unit.
G. Provide remote register. Remote register plug/jack to conform to and be compatible with Owner'’
standard building automated system.
H. Measuring chamber shall be removable from main line case for repair and re-calibration.
I. Meter shall be by Rockwell, Hersey or Neptune Products, and shall be approved by local water
and sewer authority.
3.12 FIXTURE ROUGHINGS
A. Install rough plumbing including fixture carriers and supports, valves and water hammer arresters
within chase tolerances. Supply roughing through finish walls and at hose bibbs and shower
heads shall be secure and free of movement. Locate valves and water hammer arresters within
12 inches of approved access panel location.
B. Align exposed waste and supply pipe roughings with fixture connections within 1 inch tolerance.
Provide flush valves in alignment with the fixture, without vertical or horizontal offsets. Obtain
fixture manufacturer roughing data sheets for recommended roughing dimensions.
C. Provide fixture templates for Casework Contractor for counter mounted sinks and lavatories.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
PLUMBING 220000 - 32
1. Rough handicapped use water closets to locate the flush valve handle on the wide side of the
toilet stall.
D. Secure fixture supports to floor slab construction with lag bolts and metal expansion shields to
support at least 250 pounds on the front rim of the fixture for 5 minutes.
E. Mounting heights shall be in accordance with all local and state codes and latest ADA Standards.
F. Provide fixture rough-in piping connections, sizes in accordance with schedule on Drawings.
3.13 EQUIPMENT ROUGHINGS AND CONNECTIONS
A. Provide roughing and final connections for water, waste, air and gas systems including indirect
wastes, traps, tailpieces, stops and supplies, valves and unions for all equipment and fixtures
including those supplied under other sections.
B. Provide complete plumbing roughings with capped and valved service with union of flange to suit
Owner furnished equipment.
C. Refer to Architectural floor plans and Equipment schedules for all equipment provided under
other sections or by Owner. Roughing for all equipment including floor drain locations shall be
based on approved Shop Drawings. Install indirect waste discharge to spill into floor drain funnel.
Floor drain grate and sediment bucket shall be removable.
3.14 INSTALLATION OF SPECIALTY ITEMS
A. Install vacuum relief valves located above the top of the heater on cold water supply lines to
water heaters.
B. Gauges: Install gauges where indicated on the Contract Drawings and as specified. Install
pressure gauges at water service entrance on inlet and outlet sides of strainers, filters, backflow
preventers and pumps. Install temperature gauges on inlet and outlet side of water heaters and
on recirculation line at least 10 feet upstream of circulation pumps. Gauges shall be legible from
4 feet to 6 feet above the floor.
C. Trap Primers: Install trap primer and related piping through the floor and connect to primer
connection on floor drains in all areas where maintaining the trap seal could be a problem.
D. Water Hammer Arresters: Provide water hammer protection at all self-closing fixtures and
equipment. Equip quick-closing valves such as flush valves and solenoids with water hammer
arresters. Banks of plumbing fixtures may be protected with a single properly sized and located
PDI certified arrester. Obtain approval for access panel location prior to installation.
3.15 INSTALLATION OF FIXTURES
A. Mount fixtures level at the elevations shown on Architectural Drawings. Refer to toilet room
elevations and casework details.
B. Install handicapped use fixtures in accordance with the requirements to the Architectural Access
Board Code, latest ADA standards and ANSI A117.1. Insulate hot water supply and waste piping
under lavatories.
1. Where urinals are provided, install one urinal with the rim mounted 17 inches above the finish
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
PLUMBING 220000 - 33
floor in compliance with the Handicapped Code.
C. Grout walls and floor mounted fixtures watertight where the fixtures are in contact with walls and
floors.
D. Caulk deck-mounted trim at the time of assembly, including fixture and casework mounted. Caulk
self-rimming sinks installed in casework.
3.16 GAS SERVICE, VENTS AND PIPING
A. Gas piping from gas tank to building will be provided by Gas Company. Pay charges associated
with Gas Company installation. Gas piping provided under this Section shall begin at building
regulator.
B. Piping shall be done by licensed gas fitter (as required by Code).
C. Gas piping shall pitch to drain and shall have drip pockets at least 6” long with removable caps at
low points. Branch connections shall be taken from top or side of horizontal running main.
Provide gas cock or valve on connections to fixtures or equipment.
D. Provide union connection between shut-off cock and equipment to permit disconnection of
equipment.
E. Provide pressure reducing valve between meter and building piping, as required by Gas
Company, piped and vented to outside of building.
F. Provide individual vents from regulators, pressure switches and reliefs on factory packaged
equipment gas trains at all equipment located on this system. It is this Contractor’s responsibility
to extend all vents to atmosphere terminal at a safe location in conjunction with the Fuel Gas
Code.
G. Gas piping and safety devices shall meet requirements of NFPA No. 54 and shall be subject to
inspection and approval of State Gas Regulatory Board.
1. Special Note: Provide aluminum check valves on all gas pipes that enter rooms where
compressed air is installed or when both compressed air and gas piping connect to the same
piece of equipment. This is required in all areas where gas and air are present.
H. Provide a gas cock valve at each branch run out from main or riser serving gas outlets.
I. Piping shall be securely fastened, separately hung, and shall not support any other weight or
piping. Piping dropped in concrete block walls shall be factory wrapped for corrosion protection.
J. Gas valves or cocks shall not be concealed and shall be readily accessible for inspection and
repair.
K. Welded piping shall conform to the latest requirements of the (Massachusetts) Fuel Gas Code.
3.17 CROSS CONNECTION PROTECTION
A. All potable water piping outlets and connections to equipment or machinery shall be protected
against backflow by means of an air-gap or approved backflow preventer.
B. Backflow preventer type, application and installation shall comply with the Commonwealth of
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
PLUMBING 220000 - 34
(Massachusetts), Department of Environmental Protection (DEP) Drinking Water Regulations 310
CMR 22.00.
C. Mount backflow preventers horizontally, unless device is approved for vertical installation, at
heights and with clearances as required by DEP regulations.
1. Reduced pressure backflow preventers shall be installed between 36” to 48” above the floor
with a minimum of 6” clear space all around.
2. Double check valve assemblies shall be installed such that the top of the device is between
30” and 53” above the finished floor, with 12” clear space all around.
D. Submit plans to DEP and obtain permit for each reduced pressure or double check valve
backflow preventer installation and submit copies of permit to Architect for record.
E. Provide indirect waste piping with funnel to receive discharge from reduced pressure backflow
preventer atmospheric vents and spill through air gap into floor drain.
3.18 CLEANING
A. Clean systems thoroughly before testing. Fixtures, equipment, pipe, valves and fittings shall be
free of grease, metal cuttings, dirt and other foreign material. Remove protective covers.
Fixtures (including lavatories, water closets and urinals) shall be cleaned and ready for use.
B. Repair stoppage, discoloration and damage to parts of building, finish and furnishings due to
failure to properly clean piping system within Contract Price.
C. After completion of project, clean the exterior surface of equipment included in this section,
including concrete residue.
D. After the completion of the work, all materials and equipment surfaces shall be thoroughly
cleaned and polished in accordance with the finish of the material. All chromed surfaces shall be
highly polished.
E. Before the systems are tested and balanced, pipes and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned so
that no dirt, dust, or other foreign matter will be deposited in or carried through the systems.
F. Water systems shall be thoroughly flushed and cleansed of any and all deleterious materials at
least once before system is placed in operation. At this time, these systems will be carefully
checked for leaking and defects as hereinafter specified. An approved cleansing agent will be
used in flushing.
G. At all times, keep the premises clear of undue accumulation of rubbish.
H. On completion of the work, remove all rubbish and debris resulting from this contract and dispose
of same. At any time should the General Contractor be dissatisfied with the performance of
clean-up responsibilities, he may elect, after proper notification, to undertake this operation and
back charge this Subcontractor accordingly.
I. All equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned and left in a satisfactory condition for proper operation
at project completion.
3.19 DISINFECTION OF WATER SYSTEMS - INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
PLUMBING 220000 - 35
A. Water piping systems shall be thoroughly disinfected with a solution containing no less than 50
parts per million of available chlorine. Chlorinating materials shall be either liquid chlorine or
sodium hypochlorite solution, and shall be introduced into the system and drawn to all points in
the system. Disinfection solution shall be allowed to remain in system for 24 hours. During this
time, valves and faucets shall be opened and closed several times. After disinfection, solution
shall be flushed from the system with clear water until residual chlorine content is no greater than
0.2 parts per million.
1. Notify all parties 48 hours prior to cleaning system.
2. Bypass all building filters.
3. Perform chlorination prior to heating the domestic hot water system. Run circulation pumps
on the domestic HW system.
4. Provide advance notice to all trades prior to procedure. Post warning signs throughout the
job site.
5. Collect samples randomly and at end user points.
B. Work shall be supervised by Owner and performed by approved chemical testing laboratory and
results sent to the Architect or Architect’s representative for verification.
C. Testing laboratory shall submit a summary of test procedure for approval prior to any work
performed. Subcontractor shall provide valves required to disinfect water supply system in part
as required by phasing of construction and to provide isolating valves and draw-off valves for
proper containment, phasing and flushing.
3.20 TESTING AND ADJUSTING – GENERAL
A. Scope:
1. Test and adjust plumbing systems as specified and as required by Code.
2. Testing, balancing and adjusting shall in no way relieve guarantee requirements.
3. Provide services of qualified personnel, equipment and apparatus required to perform tests.
4. All systems shall be thoroughly adjusted for perfect intended operation. All mechanical
equipment shall be adjusted for flow, temperature, etc. of fluid. The entire hot water
circulation system shall be thoroughly balanced so hot water draw from fixtures shall be as
quickly available as possible. Pumps, relief valves and pressure reducing valves shall be
adjusted as required. Submit in writing to the Engineer upon completion of this work that it is
complete and ready for use.
B. Before date of acceptance, furnish Architect with certificates of testing and inspection indicating
approval of Authorities Having Jurisdiction and conformance with requirements of Contract
Documents.
C. General:
1. Submit proposed test procedures, recording forms and test equipment for review before
testing.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
PLUMBING 220000 - 36
2. Notify Architect and Authorities involved at least 48 hours before testing and inspection.
3. Do not paint, cover or conceal work before testing, inspecting and obtaining approval; this
includes backfilling and application of insulation.
4. Costs of repairs and restoration of work of other trades and of existing building surfaces or
material damaged during cleaning or testing shall be borne by trade performing cleaning or
testing.
D. No tests shall be started until systems have been cleaned as described under “Cleaning”
paragraph. Provide temporary piping and connections for testing, flushing or draining systems to
be tested.
1. Repair or replace leaks, damage and defects that result from tests to like-new condition.
Remove and replace defective materials with acceptable materials.
2. Piping and joints shall be made tight without caulking. Continue tests until systems operate
without adjustments and repair to equipment or piping.
3. Provide testing instruments, force pumps, gauges, equipment and labor necessary to conduct
tests. Instruments used for testing and balancing shall have been calibrated within six
months before balancing. Instrument calibration shall be certified.’
4. Submit six (6) copies of complete testing and balancing report to Architect for review.
E. Final test shall be made after vertical and horizontal pipes and roughing-in have been run and
before sewer or fixture connection is made.
1. After soil, waste and storm lines, etc. have been installed outlets shall be temporarily plugged
up.
2. Fill pipes with water to top of vertical lines and allow them to remain so filled for 24 hours.
3. Retesting after leaks are repaired shall be at no additional cost.
F. Pressurized Piping Systems:
1. Leak tests shall be conducted in accordance with ANSI applicable codes and as specified
herein.
2. Before piping of various systems has been covered or furred-in, piping systems shall be
tested tight for 1 hour under hydrostatic pressure, 1-1/2 times systems working pressures, but
not greater than test pressure of 150 psig.
3. Tests shall be witnessed by Architect and pronounced satisfactory before pressure is
removed or any water drained off.
4. Equipment shall be valved off or removed during test if equipment pressure rating is less than
test pressure.
5. Retest systems after leaks are repaired within Contract Price.
G. Gravity Systems: Test under water pressure at heads specified in Plumbing Codes. Fill pipe
lines with water to top of 5 foot vertical section of pipe or to level of top of vent pipe; maintain
head pressure for 30 minutes.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
PLUMBING 220000 - 37
H. Potable Water System Test:
1. Certification of the potable water system integrity shall be required where separate systems
of potable and non-potable water are provided to supply plumbing fixtures.
2. Fill potable water system to capacity with clean clear water. Introduce water at top of piping
system (Hot and Cold). During filling, introduce green food coloring dye into piping system.
A floor-by-floor survey shall be conducted. Operate each outlet (Hot and Cold) connected to
potable water system until coloring has been observed. A method of maintaining the level of
water and coloring shall be employed in order to make up the drawn off amounts. A survey
sheet shall indicate each floor and the room number sequentially.
3. This survey is required to be performed after all pressure testing and flushing of the piping
system, but before sterilization. Further, it is required that all fixtures connected to the
potable water system be installed prior to the test.
I. Pumps shall be tested to check impeller trim and operating characteristics. Following data shall
be recorded and submitted to Architect for review:
1. Flow at operating conditions where flow venturi or orifices are installed in system.
2. Shutoff pressure required to check impeller trim.
3. Discharge pressure at operating conditions.
4. Suction pressure at operating conditions.
5. Motor amperage on each phase at operating conditions.
J. Prove capacity and performance of each piece of equipment by field tests as specified herein
various paragraphs. Equipment and instruments required for tests, as well as additional
thermowells or gauge connections shall be installed at no additional cost to Owner.
1. Qualified representative of Equipment Manufacturer shall be present. Architect may witness
tests, if he so desires.
2. Test requirements shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
a. Domestic water pumps.
b. Sump pumps.
K. Examine PART 2 for supplemental testing requirements.
3.21 TESTING: PIPING SYSTEMS
A. General:
1. Piping systems shall be subjected to testing water or air as noted and shall hold tight at the
pressure head stated for the time interval required without adding air or water. While any
system is being tested, required head or pressure shall be maintained until joints are
inspected.
2. Tests shall be witnessed by inspector having jurisdiction, and the Architect within 48 hour
notice, given these Authorities.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
PLUMBING 220000 - 38
3. Equipment, material, and labor required for testing of various systems, or part thereof, shall
be provided by Plumbing Contractor.
B. Sanitary, Waste and Roof Water Conductor System:
1. Water test shall be applied to drainage system either in their entirety or in sections as
required, after rough piping has been installed.
2. If applied to entire system, openings in piping system shall be tightly closed, except the
highest opening and system filled with water to point of overflow.
3. If system is tested in sections, each opening shall be tightly closed except highest opening in
the section under test and each section shall be filled with water but no section shall be
tested with less than a 10’ head of water.
4. In testing successive sections, at least upper 10’ of next preceding section shall be tested so
that no joint of piping in building, except the uppermost 10’ of the system shall be submitted
to a test of less than a 10’ head of water.
5. Water shall be kept in system for at least 15 minutes before inspection starts; the system
shall then be made tight at all points.
C. Points of drainage systems tested with air instead of water shall be tested by attaching an air
compressor testing apparatus to suitable opening and, after closing all other inlets or outlets,
forcing air into systems until a uniform gauge pressure of 5 psi or sufficient pressure to balance a
column of mercury 10” high. Pressure shall be held without introduction of additional air for a
period of at least 15 minutes.
D. All new and existing sanitary, waste and vent piping installed under the floor slab, in the area of
work, shall be video camera scoped and recorded upon completion and prior to final acceptance.
Any debris found in underground piping shall be flushed and removed as part of this contract. All
video recordings and results shall be submitted to the Owner as part of the closeout documents.
E. Interior Water Piping System: Upon completion of water supply systems or section thereof, as
required, system shall be tested and proved tight under a water pressure of 150 psi. Gauge shall
be located on lowest new floor and pressure shall hold for a period of one (1) hours without
introducing additional water. Water used for testing shall be from a potable source of supply.
F. Propane Gas Piping Systems – Domestic Gas:
1. Upon completion of gas piping system or section thereof, as required, test by attaching an air
compressor testing apparatus to any suitable opening, and after closing all other inlets and
outlets, force air into the system until a uniform pressure of at least 6” mercury or 3 lb. gauge
for a period of no less than 30 minutes for each 500 cubic feet of pipe volume without
showing any drop in pressure. Pressure shall be measured with a mercury manometer,
slope gauge, or an equivalent device calibrated to read in increments of no greater than 1/10
lbs.
G. Testing Summary:
1. W&V – with water to a 10 foot head for 30 minutes.
2. Water – with potable water to 150 psi for one hour.
3. Propane Gas (Low Pressure) – with air to 6” mercury for ten minutes.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
PLUMBING 220000 - 39
H. Defective Work: If inspection or tests show defects, such defective work or material shall be
replaced and inspection and tests shall be repeated. Repairs to piping shall be made with new
material. No caulking or screwed joints or holes shall be acceptable.
I. Additional Tests:
1. Provide additional tests such as smoke pressure tests as required by regulations or as
directed by Authorities making the inspection.
2. Provide for any repeated test as directed by the Architect, to make all systems tight as
required.
3. Visual inspections of joints and valves shall be made as directed by the Architect.
3.22 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
A. All piping, equipment and devices shall be seismically supported as required by the Building
Code.
END OF SECTION 22 00 00
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - i
SECTION 23 00 00 – HVAC TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND REFERENCES ....................................................................... 1
1.2 DEFINITIONS .................................................................................................................................. 1
1.3 SCOPE ............................................................................................................................................. 2
1.4 RELATED WORK UNDER OTHER SECTIONS ............................................................................. 4
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................................. 4
1.6 SUBMITTALS ................................................................................................................................... 5
1.7 SURVEYS AND MEASUREMENTS ................................................................................................ 8
1.8 COORDINATION ............................................................................................................................. 8
1.9 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION .................................................................... 9
1.10 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION DRAWINGS ............................................... 9
1.11 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................... 10
1.12 TYPICAL DETAILS ........................................................................................................................ 11
1.13 SLEEVES, INSERTS ..................................................................................................................... 11
1.14 CORING, DRILLING ...................................................................................................................... 11
1.15 ACCESSIBILITY ............................................................................................................................ 11
1.16 SUPPLEMENTARY SUPPORTING STEEL .................................................................................. 11
1.17 TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................ 11
1.18 PORTABLE AND DETACHABLE PARTS ..................................................................................... 11
1.19 RIGGING REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................................................... 12
1.20 RECORD DRAWINGS, PROJECT CLOSEOUT ........................................................................... 12
1.21 GUARANTEE/WARRANTY ........................................................................................................... 12
1.22 OPERATING, INSTRUCTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS ................................................. 13
1.23 SERVICE CHARACTERISTICS .................................................................................................... 14
1.24 QUALITY ASSURANCE ................................................................................................................ 14
1.25 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING ..................................................................................... 15
PART 2 PRODUCTS .................................................................................................................................. 15
2.1 DUCTWORK AND AIR DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT ................................................................. 16
2.2 ACOUSTICAL DUCT LINING ........................................................................................................ 25
2.3 DUCT INSULATION: ...................................................................................................................... 26
2.4 PIPING AND FITTINGS ................................................................................................................. 28
2.5 VALVES AND STRAINERS ........................................................................................................... 29
2.6 PIPE INSULATION ........................................................................................................................ 29
2.7 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS ............................................................................................... 30
2.8 DUCT SILENCERS ........................................................................................................................ 30
2.9 SLEEVES AND PENETRATIONS ................................................................................................. 32
2.10 ESCUTCHEONS AND DUCT COLLARS ...................................................................................... 33
2.11 MOTORS, STARTERS AND WIRING ........................................................................................... 33
2.12 DRIVES .......................................................................................................................................... 34
2.13 VRF HEAT RECOVERY SYSTEM ................................................................................................ 37
2.14 DUCTLESS SPLIT AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM ...................................................................... 45
2.15 ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS .......................................................................................................... 48
2.16 VIBRATION ISOLATION (NON-SEISMIC) .................................................................................... 48
2.17 AIRFLOW/TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT DEVICES ............................................................ 54
2.18 CEILING EXHAUST FAN (ULTRA-QUIET) ................................................................................... 56
2.19 ROOFTOP SUPPORT SYSTEMS ................................................................................................. 56
2.20 ULTRA HIGH EFFICIENCY OUTDOOR ENERGY RECOVERY UNIT (ERU) ............................. 59
2.21 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS (DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL) .............................. 61
2.22 VRF BAS CENTRAL CONTROLLER AND PULSE METERING................................................... 74
2.23 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS .................................................................................................... 87
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - ii
PART 3 EXECUTION .................................................................................................................................. 87
3.1 COMMISSIONING OF EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS .................................................................. 87
3.2 SPECIAL RESPONSIBILITIES ...................................................................................................... 88
3.3 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP ............................................................................................. 90
3.4 CONTINUITY OF SERVICES ........................................................................................................ 91
3.5 TAGS.............................................................................................................................................. 91
3.6 PIPE AND DUCT IDENTIFICATION .............................................................................................. 91
3.7 ACCESS AND ACCESS PANELS ................................................................................................. 92
3.8 PENETRATIONS AND SLEEVES ................................................................................................. 92
3.9 ANCHORS AND INSERTS ............................................................................................................ 94
3.10 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT ................................................................................................. 94
3.11 PAINTING ...................................................................................................................................... 94
3.12 CLEANING ..................................................................................................................................... 94
3.13 STARTUP, TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC ............................................ 95
3.14 VRF SYSTEM PROJECT SUPERVISION ..................................................................................... 99
3.15 VRF SYSTEM OWNER TRAINING AND TECHNICAL SUPPORT ............................................ 100
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 1
SECTION 23 00 00 – HVAC
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND REFERENCES
A. Include “General Requirements” and applicable parts of Division 1 as part of this section. Building
will be Passive House certified.
B. Examine all other sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work under this
Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this section. Where paragraphs of
this section conflict with similar paragraphs of Division 1, requirements of this section shall prevail.
C. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this section.
Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract.
D. The HVAC Subcontractor shall be responsible for filing all documents, payment of all fees, and
securing of all inspections and approvals necessary for the work of this section.
E. For all penetrations through rated assemblies refer to architectural details for additional requirements.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. As used in this section, “provide” means “furnish and install”, “POS” means “Provided Under
Other Sections” and “HVAC” means “Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning”.
B. As used in the Drawings and Specifications for Mechanical Work, certain non-technical words
shall be understood to have specific meanings as follows, regardless of indications to the contrary
in the General Conditions of other documents governing the HVAC work.
1. “Furnish” means: Purchase and deliver to the project site complete with every necessary
appurtenance and support, all as part of the HVAC work. Purchasing shall include payment
of all sales taxes and other surcharges as may be required to assure that purchased item(s)
are free of all liens, claims, or encumbrances.
2. “Install” means: Unload at the delivery point at the site and perform every operation
necessary to establish secure mounting and correct operation at the proper location in the
project, all as part of the HVAC work.
3. “Provide” means: “Furnish” and “Install”.
4. “New” means: Manufactured within the past two (2) years and never before used.
C. Except where modified by a specific notation to the contrary, it shall be understood that the
indication and/or description of any HVAC item in the Drawings or Specifications for HVAC work
carries with it the instruction to furnish, install and connect the item as part of the HVAC work,
regardless of whether or not this instruction is explicitly stated.
D. It shall be understood that the Specifications and Drawings for HVAC work are complimentary
and are to be taken together for a complete interpretation of the HVAC work except that
indications on the Drawings, which refer to an individual element of work, take precedence over
the Specifications where they conflict.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 2
1.3 SCOPE
A. Perform work and provide material and equipment as shown on Drawings and as specified or
indicated in this Section of the Specifications. Completely coordinate work of this Section with
work of other trades and provide a complete and fully functional installation.
B. All equipment and product, and the installation of such and testing methods must meet the
requirements of PHIUS for certification. Additional leak testing of ductwork will be required to
meet this requirement.
C. Drawings and Specifications form complimentary requirements; provide work specified and not
shown, and work shown and not specified as though explicitly required by both. Although work is
not specifically shown or specified, provide supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances, devices and materials obviously necessary for a sound, secure and complete
installation.
D. Give notices, file plans, obtain permits and licenses, pay fees and back charges, and obtain
necessary approvals from Authorities that have jurisdiction as required to perform work in
accordance with all legal requirements and with Specifications, Drawings, Addenda and Change
Orders, all of which are part of Contract Documents.
E. Work shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following:
1. Ultra-high efficiency energy recovery roof top units (PHIUS certified)
2. Special coordination of chases and plenums as specified in Paragraph 3.2 (SPECIAL
RESPONSIBILITIES).
3. Hoisting and rigging required to complete the work of this Section.
4. Sleeves, inserts and hangers.
5. Flexible connections for pumps and other vibrating and rotating equipment.
6. Equipment bases and supports.
7. Vibration isolation.
8. Motors.
9. Pressure gauges and thermometers.
10. Sheetmetal work.
11. Complete air distribution system including low and medium pressure ductwork, diffusers,
registers, grilles, splitters, dampers, etc.
12. Insulation for duct and piping.
13. Exhaust and ventilating air fans.
14. Multi unit heat recovery VRF cooling and heating systems and controls.
15. Ductless air-cooled split systems.
16. Condensate pumps and piping from cooling coil drain pipes.
17. Electric wall heaters, unit heaters.
18. Prime painting.
19. Pipe, duct, valve and equipment identification.
20. Instruction manuals and startup instructions.
21. Testing and balancing.
22. Aeroseal-TM all ERV low pressure ductwork.
23. Automatic air regulating valves
24. Cleaning.
25. Automatic temperature controls and other controls.
F. Participation in Passive house PHIUS certification as outlined by the PHIUS certifier. Additional
work required to pass the testing and verification of the mandatory requirements to include but
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 3
not limited to the following and any reworking of duct sealing to meet the requirements to the
satisfaction of the PHIUS+ rater/verifier :
a. Whole Building Tightness-<-0.05 CFM@50 Pa/SF of building shell.
b. Dwelling unit Compartmentalization- 0.30 CFM@50 Pa/sqft of dwelling unit shell
c. Proper sealing of all envelope and interior room partition penetrations by control wiring,
ductwork, airflow registers, piping, etc.
d. Proper performance ratings and installation of insulation to meet PHIUS.
e. Heating, cooling and ventilation air distribution system tightness testing. PHIUS
requirements for duct sealing and insulation as per spec.
f. Heating and Cooling Unit Duct pressure testing documentation as specified herewithin as
required prior to the PHIUS certified HERS rater “blower door testing” which will be
evidence of conformance to the PHIUS pressurization and de-pressurization requirement.
g. Air Balancing to confirm minimum air changes in each room of each dwelling unit as per
the design airflows in order for the Passive House certifier to complete Ventilation
Commissioning as per the PHIUS Certification. ERVs airflows must be within 10% for the
total of all exhaust and supply airflows.
h. Compliance with all Energy Star Home requirements ESv3 checklists.
G. Work to be done under this section is shown on the following Drawings:
M001 MECHANICAL SCHEDULES, NOTES & LEGENDS
M002 MECHANICAL SCHEDULES
M003 MECHANICAL SCHEDULES
M004 REFRIGERANT PIPING DIAGRAMS
M005 REFRIGERANT PIPING DIAGRAMS
M102 FIRST FLOOR MECHANICAL PLAN
M103 SECOND FLOOR MECHANICAL PLAN
M104 THIRD FLOOR MECHANICAL PLAN
M105 ATTIC MECHANICAL PLAN
M106 ROOF MECHANICAL PLAN
M201 TYPICAL UNIT MECHANICAL PLANS
M202 TYPICAL UNIT MECHANICAL PLANS
M203 TYPICAL UNIT MECHANICAL PLANS
M204 TYPICAL UNIT MECHANICAL PLANS
M300 MECHANICAL DETAILS
M301 MECHANICAL DETAILS
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 4
H. Before submitting bid, visit and carefully examine site to identify existing conditions and difficulties
that will affect work of this Section. No extra payment will be allowed for additional work caused
by unfamiliarity with site conditions that are visible or readily construed by experienced observer.
Site visit is particularly important because this is renovation work.
I. Before starting work in a particular area of the project, visit site and examine conditions under which
work must be performed including preparatory work done under other Sections or Contracts or by
Owner. Report conditions that might affect work adversely in writing through Contractor to Architect.
Do not proceed with work until defects have been corrected and conditions are satisfactory.
Commencement of work shall be construed as complete acceptance of existing and preparatory work.
1.4 RELATED WORK UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
A. The following items are not included in this section and will be performed under the designated
sections.
1. Excavation and backfill.
2. Concrete work, including concrete housekeeping pads and other pads and blocks for
vibrating and rotating equipment.
3. Cutting and patching of masonry, concrete, tile and other parts of structure, with the
exception of drilling for hangers and providing holes and openings in metal decks.
4. Flashing of roof fans, or rooftop HVAC units, and of ductwork and all roof penetrations.
5. Installation of access panels in floor, wall, furred space or above ceiling.
6. Painting, except as specified herein.
7. Electric power wiring for all equipment.
8. Structural supports necessary to distribute loading from equipment to roof or floor except as
specified herein.
9. Temporary light, power, water, heat, gas and sanitary facilities for use during construction
and testing.
10. Gypsum drywall enclosures of supply and return ductwork on all rooftop air handlers, supply
and return airshafts, as shown on Drawings.
11. Finish carpentry and millwork.
12. Fire protection.
13. Plumbing.
14. Electrical.
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Perform work strictly as required by rules, regulations, standards, codes, ordinances and laws of
Local, State and Federal governments, and all other Authorities that have legal jurisdiction over
the site. Materials and equipment shall be manufacturer installed and tested as specified in latest
editions of applicable publications, standards, rulings and determinations of:
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 5
1. Local and State Building, Plumbing, Mechanical, Electrical, Fire and Health Department
Codes as well as the MA Department of Public Health Certification.
2. American Gas Association (AGA).
3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
4. American Insurance Association (A.I.A.) (formerly National Board of Fire Underwriters).
5. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA).
6. Factory Mutual Association (FM).
7. Underwriters’ Laboratories (UL).
B. Material and equipment shall be listed by Underwriters’ Laboratories (UL), and approved by
ASME and AGA for intended service.
C. When requirements cited in this Specification conflict with each other or with Contract Documents
the most stringent shall govern work. The Architect may relax this requirement when such
relaxation does not violate the rulings of Authorities that have jurisdiction. Approval for such
relaxation shall be obtained in writing.
D. Most recent editions of applicable Specifications and publications of the following organizations
shall form part of the Contract Documents.
1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).
3. National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
4. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
5. American Water Works Association (AWWA).
6. American Society for Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE).
7. Air Moving and Conditioning Association (AMCA).
8. Sheetmetal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA).
9. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI).
10. Thermal Insulation Manufacturers Association (TIMA).
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. This section shall supplement Division 1.
B. Definitions:
1. Shop Drawings: Information prepared by the Contractor to illustrate portions of the work in
more detail than shown in the Contract Documents.
2. Coordination Drawings: Detailed, large-scale layout Shop Drawings showing HVAC,
Electrical, Plumbing and Fire Protection work superimposed to identify conflicts and ensure
inter-coordination of Mechanical, Electrical, Architectural, Structural and other work.
3. Manufacturer’s Product Data: Information prepared by the manufacturer which depicts
standard equipment.
C. Submittals Procedures and Format:
1. Review submittal packages for compliance with Contract Documents and then submit to
Architect and Engineer for review. Submittal packages shall be sent electronically, either
emailed or through utilization of a web based construction administration application such as
Procore or Submittal Exchange. All reviews will be returned in kind, either by email or through
the web based application with a cover sheet and applicable submittal notations per below.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 6
2. Each Shop Drawing shall indicate in title block, and each Product Data package shall indicate
on cover sheet, the following information:
a. Title.
b. Name and location of project.
c. Names of Architect, Engineer, Contractor and Subcontractor(s).
d. Names of Manufacturer, Supplier, Vendor, etc.
e. Date of submittal.
f. Whether original submittal or resubmitted.
3. Shop Drawings showing layouts of systems shall contain sufficient plans, elevations,
sections, details and schematics to describe work clearly. They shall be ¼” = 1’-0” and shall
indicate work of other Sections where physical clearances are critical and where
interferences are possible. Provide larger scale details as necessary. Sheetmetal Drawings
shall show elements of Architect’s reflected ceiling plan, exposed ductwork, walls, partitions,
diffusers, registers, grilles, fire dampers, sleeves and other aspects of construction as
necessary for coordination.
D. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. The Architect’s Mechanical/Electrical design for each project is based on the single
manufacturer listed in the schedule or shown on the Drawings. In Division 15 of these
Specifications certain “Alternate Manufacturers” are listed as being acceptable. These are
acceptable only if, as a minimum, they:
a. Meet all performance criteria listed in the schedules and outlined in the Specifications.
b. Have identical operating characteristics to those called for in the Specifications.
c. Fit within the available space it was designed for, including space for maintenance and
component removal, with no modifications to either the space or the product. Clearances
to walls, ceilings and other equipment will be at least equal to those shown on the Contract
Documents. The fact that a manufacturer’s name appears as acceptable shall not be taken
to mean the Architect has determined that the manufacturer’s products will fit within the
available space. This determination is solely the responsibility of the Contractor.
d. For equipment mounted in areas where structural matters are a consideration, the
products must have a weight no greater than the product listed in the schedules or
Specifications.
e. Products must adhere to all architectural considerations including, but not limited to,
being the same size and of the same physical appearance as scheduled or specified
products.
E. Substitutions: Substitution of products by manufacturers other than those listed shall only be done
in accordance with subparagraph “F” “Substitutions and Deviations”.
F. Substitutions and Deviations:
1. Deviations from the Contract Documents and the substitution of materials or equipment
relative to the “Acceptable Manufacturers” referred to above, shall be requested individually
in writing whether deviations result from field conditions, standard shop practice, or other
cause. Submit letter with transmittal of Shop Drawings which flags the substitution or
deviation to the attention of the Architect. The letter shall describe changes in the system
shown and physical characteristics (connections to adjacent materials, electrical services,
service access requirements, and other characteristics), and differences in operating
characteristics or cycles.
2. Without letters flagging the substitution or deviation to the Architect, it is possible that the
Architect may not notice such substitution or deviation or may not realize its ramifications.
Therefore, if such letters are not submitted to the Architect, the Contractor shall hold the
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 7
Architect and his consultants harmless for any and all adverse consequences resulting from
the deviations being implemented. Adverse consequences shall include, but not be limited
to, excessive noise, excessive maintenance, shortened longevity, spatial coordination
problems, and inadequate performance versus scheduled design. This shall apply
regardless of whether the Architect has reviewed or approved Shop Drawings containing the
deviation, and will be strictly enforced.
3. Do not request substitute materials or equipment unless identical material or equipment has
been operated successfully for at least three (3) consecutive years. Such materials and
equipment shall be a regular cataloged item shown in the current catalog of the manufacturer.
When deviation or substitution is permitted, coordinate fully with related changes to
Architectural, Structural, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Mechanical, and other work. Ensure that
related changes necessary for coordination of substituted items are made within the Contract
Price. Assume full responsibility for safety, operation and performance of the altered system.
4. Substitutions of equipment, systems, etc. requiring approval of local Authorities must comply
with such regulations and be filed by the Contractor (should filing be necessary).
5. Consideration will not be given to claims that the substituted item meets the performance
requirements with lesser construction. Performance, as delineated in schedules and in the
Specifications, shall be interpreted as minimum performance.
6. Approval of proposed deviations or substitutions, if any, will be made at discretion of Architect.
7. If equipment is proposed for substitution that is not tested and rated according to industry-
wide standards, the Architect shall have the right to have performance tests completed, at the
Contractor’s expense, to confirm the manufacturer’s performance claims.
G. Submittal Notations: will be returned from the Architect marked as illustrated below:
NO EXCEPTION TAKEN
NOT ACCEPTED
ACCEPTED AS NOTED
REVISE AND RESUBMIT
1. Checking is only for general conformance with the design concept of the project and general
compliance with the information given in the Contract Documents. Any action shown is
subject to the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications. Contractor is responsible for
dimensions which shall be confirmed and correlated at the job site; fabrication process and
techniques of construction; coordination of his work with that of all other trades; and the
satisfactory performance of his work.
H. Schedule: Incorporate the Shop Drawing review period into the construction schedule so that work
is not delayed. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for delays caused by not incorporating
the following Shop Drawing review time requirements into his project schedule. Allow at least ten
(10) working days, exclusive of transmittal time, for review each time a Shop Drawing is submitted
or resubmitted with the exception that fifteen (15) working days, exclusive of transmittal time, are
required for the following:
1. Automatic temperature controls.
2. Coordination Drawings, if required by this Specification.
3. If more than five (5) Shop Drawings of this trade are received in one (1) calendar week.
I. List of Proposed Equipment and Materials: Within four (4) weeks after Award of Contract and
before ordering materials or equipment, submit a complete list of proposed materials and
equipment and indicate manufacturer’s names and addresses. No consideration will be given to
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 8
partial lists submitted out of sequence.
J. Responsibility:
1. The intent of submittal review is to check for capacity, rating, and certain construction
features. Contractor shall ensure that work meets requirements of the Contract Documents
regarding information that pertains to fabrication processes or means, methods, techniques,
sequences and procedures of construction; and for coordination of work of this and other
Sections. Work shall comply with submittals marked “REVIEWED” to extent that they agree
with the Contract Documents. Submittal review shall not diminish responsibility under this
Contract for dimensional coordination, quantities, installation, wiring, supports and access for
service, nor the Shop Drawing errors or deviations from requirements of the Contract
Documents. The Architect’s noting of some errors while overlooking others will not excuse
the Contractor for proceeding in error. Contract Document requirements are not limited,
waived, nor superseded in any way by review.
2. Inform Subcontractors, Manufacturers, Suppliers, etc. of scope and limited nature of review
process and enforce compliance with the Contract Documents.
K. Material and equipment requiring Shop Drawing and/or Manufacturer’s Data Submittals shall
include but not be limited to:
1. Condensate pumps.
2. Ultra high efficient energy recovery roof top units.
3. Fittings, valves and strainers.
4. VRF system and piping.
5. Diffusers, registers, grilles, splitters, dampers and accessories.
6. Exhaust fans.
7. Electric heaters.
8. Automatic controls.
9. Insulation and acoustical lining.
10. Vibration isolation.
11. Pressure gauges and thermometers.
12. Pipes, pipe hangers, sleeves and inserts.
13. Equipment bases and supports.
14. Identification for pipe, duct, valves and equipment.
15. Complete ductwork Shop Drawings, construction details and duct construction standards.
16. Ductless split DX cooling units.
17. Access panels.
18. Color selection charts and samples for equipment and systems in finished areas.
1.7 SURVEYS AND MEASUREMENTS
A. Base all required measurements, both horizontal and vertical, on reference points established by
the General Contractor and be responsible for the correct laying out of the Mechanical work. In
the event of a discrepancy between actual measurements and those indicated, notify the General
Contractor in writing. Do not proceed with the work required until written instructions have been
issued by the General Contractor.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, and Electrical Drawings are diagrammatic. They indicate
general arrangements of Mechanical systems and other work. They do not show all offsets
required for coordination nor do they show the exact routings and locations needed to coordinate
with Structural and other trades and to meet Architectural requirements.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 9
B. Work shall be performed in cooperation with other trades on the project and so scheduled as to
allow speedy and efficient completion of the work.
C. Furnish to other trades advance information on locations and sizes of all frames, boxes, sleeves
and openings needed for their work. Furnish information and Shop Drawings necessary to allow
trades affected by the work to install their work properly and without delay.
D. In all spaces, prior to installation of visible material and equipment, including access panels, review
Architectural Drawings for exact locations and where not definitely indicated, request information
from Architect. Where the HVAC work shall interfere with the work of other trades, assist in
coordinating the space conditions to make satisfactory adjustments before installation. Without extra
cost to the Owner, make reasonable modifications to the work as required by normal Structural
interferences. The Mechanical Contractor shall be liable for any additional openings, or relocating
and/or enlarging existing openings through concrete floors, walls, beams and roof required for any
work which was not properly coordinated. Maintain maximum headroom at all locations. All piping,
duct, conduit, and associated components to be as tight to underside of structure as possible.
E. If any HVAC work has been installed before coordination with other trades so as to cause
interference with the work of such trades, all necessary adjustments and corrections shall be
made by the trades involved without extra cost to the Owner.
F. Where conflicts or potential conflicts exist and engineering guidance is desired, submit sketch of
proposed resolution to Architect for review and approval.
G. Protect all materials and work of other trades from damage which may be caused by the
Mechanical work, and repair all damages without extra cost to the Owners.
1.9 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION
A. The HVAC Subcontractor shall furnish and install various electrical items relating to the heating
and ventilating equipment and control apparatus. The Electrical Subcontractor shall be required
to connect power wiring to this equipment unless noted otherwise.
B. The HVAC and Electrical Subcontractors shall coordinate their respective portions of the work, as
well as the electrical characteristics of the heating, ventilating and air conditioning equipment.
C. All power wiring and local disconnect switches will be provided by the Electrical Subcontractor for
the line voltage power. All control and interlocking wiring shall be the responsibility of the HVAC
Subcontractor.
D. 120V and above power wiring sources extended and connected to HVAC control panels,
transformers and switches shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Subcontractor. All low
voltage thermostats and any switch wiring shall be the responsibility of the HVAC Subcontractor.
E. Temperature control and equipment wiring shall be installed by the HVAC Subcontractor.
F. The Electrical Subcontractor will provide all magnetic starters except those furnished as an
integral part of packaged equipment.
1.10 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Coordination Drawings:
1. The Sheetmetal Subcontractor shall prepare a complete set of electronic Drawings at a scale
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 10
not less than 3/8” equals 1’-0”, showing structure and other information as needed for
coordination. He shall show sheetmetal layout thereon. These will be the Coordination
Drawings.
2. The main paths of egress and for equipment removal, from main Mechanical and Electrical
rooms must be clearly shown on the Coordination Drawings. All fire and smoke partitions
must be highlighted on the Coordination Drawings for appropriate coordination.
3. Each of the below specialty trades shall add its work to these background Drawings with
appropriate elevations and grid dimensions. Specialty trade information is required for fan
rooms and mechanical rooms, horizontal exits from duct shafts, crossovers, and for spaces in
and above ceilings where congestion of work may occur such as corridors, and even entire
floors. Drawings shall indicate horizontal and vertical dimensions, to avoid interference with
structural framing, ceilings, partitions, and other services.
a. Specialty Trades:
1) Plumbing System.
2) HVAC Piping and Associated Control System.
3) Electrical.
4) Sheet Metal Work.
5) Sprinkler System.
4. Each specialty trade shall sign and date each electronic Coordination Drawing. Return Drawings
to the Sheetmetal Subcontractor, who shall route them sequentially to all specialty trades.
5. Where conflicts occur with placement of materials of various trades, the Sheetmetal
Subcontractor will be responsible to coordinate the available space to accommodate all
trades. Any resulting adjustments shall be initialed and dated by the specialty trade. The
Sheetmetal Subcontractor shall then final date and sign each Coordination Drawing. If he
cannot resolve conflicts, the decision of the General Contractor shall be final, subject to the
approval of the Architect.
6. A Subcontractor who fails to promptly review and incorporate his work on the Coordination
Drawings shall assume full responsibility of any installation conflicts affecting his work and of
any schedule ramifications.
7. The Sheetmetal Subcontractor shall make electronic copies of all Coordination Drawings.
Fabrication shall not start until such electronic Drawings are received by the
Architect/Engineer and have been reviewed.
8. Review of Coordination Drawings shall not diminish responsibility under this Contract for final
coordination of installation and maintenance clearances of all systems and equipment with
Architectural, Structural, Mechanical, and Electrical Contractors.
1.11 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The arrangement of all HVAC work shown on the Drawings is diagrammatic only and indicates
the minimum requirements of the work. Conditions at the building including actual measurements
shall determine the details of the installation. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to
require the least amount of cutting and patching.
B. Review the Architectural Drawings and Specifications before ordering any material and
equipment. Any discrepancies shall be brought to the attention of the Architect for his
determination prior to proceeding with the work.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 11
1.12 TYPICAL DETAILS
A. Typical details where shown on the Drawings shall apply to each and every item of the project
where such items are applicable. They are not repeated in full on the Drawings, which in many
cases are diagrammatic only, but with the intention that such details shall be incorporated in full.
Any alternate method proposed for use by the Contractor shall have the prior approval of the
Architect.
1.13 SLEEVES, INSERTS
A. Furnish and install all sleeves, inserts, anchor bolts and similar items to be set into masonry or
concrete, as required for mechanical work. Internal diameter of sleeve ball shall be 1/2" larger
than the outside diameter of the pipe or insulation covered line passing through it.
1.14 CORING, DRILLING
A. Core, cut and/or drill all small holes 4.5” diameter or less in walls and floors required for the
installation of sleeves and supports for the Mechanical Electrical work.
1.15 ACCESSIBILITY
A. Install all work such that parts requiring periodic inspection, operation, maintenance and repair
are readily accessible.
B. Furnish all access panels appropriate to particular conditions, to be installed by trades having
responsibility for the construction of actual walls, floors or ceilings at required locations.
1.16 SUPPLEMENTARY SUPPORTING STEEL
A. Provide all supplementary (non-structural) steelwork required for mounting or supporting
equipment and materials.
B. Steelwork shall be firmly connected to building construction as required. Locations and methods
of attachment shall be approved by the Architect.
C. Steelwork shall be of sufficient strength to allow only minimum deflection in conformity with
manufacturer’s published requirements.
D. All supplementary steelwork shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner parallel to floor,
wall and ceiling construction: all turns shall be made at forty-five and ninety degrees, and/or as
dictated by construction and installation conditions.
E. All manufactured steel parts and fittings shall be galvanized.
1.17 TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Provide all tools and equipment required for the fabrication and installation of the mechanical
equipment at the site.
1.18 PORTABLE AND DETACHABLE PARTS
A. Contractors shall retain in their possession all portable and/or detachable parts and portions of
materials, devices, equipment, etc. necessary for the proper operation and maintenance of the
Mechanical and Electrical systems until final completion of the work, at which time they shall be
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 12
handed over to the Owners.
1.19 RIGGING REQUIREMENTS
A. The work to be done under this Section of the Specifications shall include all hoisting, scaffolding
and planking including the furnishing, set-up and maintenance of all derricks, hoisting machinery,
cranes, helicopters, scaffolds, staging and planking as required for the work.
B. Provide installation and erection information including; lifting requirements, and any special
rigging or installation requirements for all equipment under the submittals.
1.20 RECORD DRAWINGS, PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A. As work progresses and for the duration of Contract, maintain a complete and separate set of
prints of Contract Drawings at job site at all times. Record work completed and all changes from
original Contract Drawings clearly and accurately including work installed as a modification or
addition to the original design. Work shall be updated on a weekly basis and shall be made
available for review by Architect. Failure to perform this work shall be reason for withholding
requisition payments. In addition, take photographs of all concealed equipment in gypsum board
ceilings, shafts, and other concealed, inaccessible work. At completion of work, make copies of
photographs with written explanation on back. These shall become part of Record Documents.
B. At the completion of work, prepare a complete set of Record Drawings showing all systems as
actually installed. The copies will be made available for the HVAC Contractor’s copying, at his
expense, to serve as backgrounds for the Record Drawings. The quantity of copies which are
made available shall in no way be interpreted as setting a limit to the number of Drawings
necessary to show the required information. The HVAC Contractor’s professional Draft Person
shall transfer changes to electronic CAD files. Submit three (3) sets of electronic copies to
Architect for comments as to compliance with this section.
C. The Architect will not certify the accuracy of the Record Drawings. This is the sole responsibility
of the Mechanical Contractor.
D. This trade shall submit the Record Drawings for approval by the Fire and Building Departments in
a form acceptable to the departments, when required by the jurisdiction.
E. Record Drawings shall show record condition of details, sections, riser diagrams, control changes
and corrections to schedules. Schedules shall show actual manufacturer, make and model
numbers of final equipment installation.
1.21 GUARANTEE/WARRANTY
A. Guarantee and 24 hour service.
1. Guarantee Work of this Section in writing for not less than one (1) year following the date of
acceptance by the Owner. If the equipment is used for temporary heat, cooling, etc, prior to
acceptance by the Owner, the bid price shall include an extended period of warranty covering
the one (1) year of occupancy, starting from the date of acceptance by the Owner. The
guarantee shall repair or replace defective materials, equipment, workmanship and
installation that develop within this period, promptly and to the Architect’s satisfaction and
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 13
correct damage caused in making necessary repairs and replacements under guarantee
within Contract Price.
2. In addition to guarantee requirements of Division 1 and of Subparagraph A above, obtain
written equipment and material warranties offered in manufacturer’s published data without
exclusion or limitation, in Owner’s name.
3. Upon receipt of notice from the Owner of failure of any part of the systems or equipment
during the warranty period, the affected part or parts shall be replaced by this Contractor
without any reimbursement.
4. Replace material and equipment that require excessive service during guarantee period as
defined and as directed by Architect.
5. Provide 24 hour service beginning on the date the project is accepted by the Owner, whether
or not fully occupied, and lasting until the termination of the guarantee period. Service shall
be at no cost to the Owner. Service can be provided by this Contractor or a separate service
organization. Choice of service organization shall be subject to Architect and Owner
approval. Submit name and a phone number that will be answered on a 24 hour basis each
day of the week, for the duration of the service.
6. Submit copies of equipment and material warranties to Architect before final payment.
7. At end of guarantee period, transfer manufacturer’s equipment and material warranties still in
force to Owner.
8. This paragraph shall not be interpreted to limit Owner’s rights under applicable codes and
laws and under this Contract.
9. PART 2 paragraphs of this Specification may specify warranty requirements that exceed
those of this paragraph. Those paragraphs shall govern.
10. Use of systems provided under this Section for temporary services and facilities shall not
constitute Final Acceptance of Work by Owner, and shall not initiate the guarantee period.
11. Provide manufacturer’s engineering and technical staff at site to analyze and rectify problems
that develop during guarantee period immediately. If problems cannot be rectified
immediately to Owner’s satisfaction, advise the Architect in writing, describe efforts to rectify
situation, and provide analysis of cause of problem. The Architect and/or Engineer will direct
course of action.
1.22 OPERATING, INSTRUCTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Obtain at time of purchase of equipment, three copies of operation, lubrication and maintenance
manuals for all items. Assemble literature in coordinated manuals with additional information
describing combined operation of field-assembled units, including as-built wiring diagrams. The
manual shall contain the names and addresses of manufacturers and local representatives who stock
or furnish repair parts for items or equipment. Divide manuals into three sections or books as follows:
1. Directions for and sequence of operation of each item of HVAC system, e.g. energy recovery
units and VRF systems. Sequence shall list dampers and devices used to start, stop and
control system. Detail procedure to be followed in case of malfunctions.
2. Detailed maintenance and troubleshooting manuals containing data furnished by
manufacturer for complete maintenance. Include copy of balancing report.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 14
3. Lubrication instructions detailing type of lubricant, amount and intervals recommended by
manufacturer for each item of equipment. Include additional instructions necessary for
implementation of first class lubrication program. Include approved summary of lubrication
instructions in chart form, where appropriate.
B. Furnish three copies of manuals to the Architect for approval and distribution to the Owner.
Deliver manuals no less than 30 days prior to acceptance of equipment to permit the Owner’s
personnel to become familiar with equipment and operation prior to acceptance.
C. Operating Instructions: Upon completion of installation or when the Owner accepts portions of
building and equipment for operational use, instruct the Owner’s operating personnel in any or all
parts of the various systems. Instructions shall be performed by factory authorized personnel.
The Owner shall determine which systems require additional instructions. The duration of
instructions shall take equipment through complete cycle of operation (at least five working days).
Make adjustments under operating conditions.
D. Each contractor shall be responsible for his work and equipment until finally inspected, tested and
accepted. Carefully store materials and equipment which are not immediately installed after
delivery to site. Close open ends of work with temporary covers or plug during construction to
prevent entry of obstructing material.
E. Each separate contractor shall protect the work and material of other trades that might be
damaged by his work or workmen and make good all damage thus caused.
1.23 SERVICE CHARACTERISTICS
A. Secondary Building Voltage – Low Level: 120/208.
B. All equipment and wiring shall be suitable for the applied voltage.
C. All motors rated 1/2 horsepower and above shall be 208V, 3-phase.
1.24 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The requirements of the State Building Code and Local regulations establish the minimum
acceptable quality of workmanship and materials, and all work shall conform thereto unless more
stringent requirements are indicated or specified herein.
B. All work shall comply with the latest editions of the codes as referenced herein.
C. Follow manufacturer’s directions for articles furnished, in addition to directions shown on
Drawings or specified herein.
D. Protect all work, materials, and equipment from damage during process of work. Replace all
damaged or defective work, materials and equipment without additional cost to the Owner.
E. All equipment and materials for permanent installation shall be the products of recognized
manufacturers and shall be new.
F. Equipment and materials shall:
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 15
1. Where normally subject to Underwriters Laboratory Inc. listing or labeling services, be so
listed and labeled.
2. Be without blemish or defect.
3. Not be used for temporary purposes.
4. Be in accordance with the latest applicable ASHRAE standards.
G. Purchase products which will meet with the acceptance of all Authorities Having Jurisdiction over
the work. Where such acceptance is contingent upon having the products examined, tested and
certified by Underwriters or other recognized testing laboratory, the product shall be so examined,
tested and certified.
H. Except for plans, all items of equipment or material of one generic type shall be the product of
one manufacturer throughout.
I. For items which are to be installed but not purchased as part of the HVAC work, the Mechanical
Contractor work shall include:
1. The coordination of their delivery.
2. Their unloading from delivery trucks driven into any point on the property line at grade level.
3. Their safe handling and field storage until the time of permanent placement in the project.
4. The correction of any damage, defacement or corrosion to which they may have been
subjected. Replacement, if necessary, shall be coordinated with the Contractor who
originally purchased the item.
5. Field erection and internal wiring as necessary for their proper operation.
6. Mounting in place, including the purchase and installation of all dunnage, supporting
members, and fastenings, necessary to adapt them to architectural and structural conditions.
J. Items which are to be installed, but not purchased as part of the HVAC work shall be carefully
examined upon delivery to the project. Claims that any of these items have been received in
such condition that their installation will require procedures beyond the reasonable scope of the
HVAC work will be considered only if presented in writing within one (1) week of the date of
delivery to the project of the items in question. The mechanical work includes all procedures,
regardless of how extensive, necessary to put into satisfactory operation, all items for which no
claims have been submitted as outlined above.
1.25 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. All materials for the work of this section shall be delivered, stored and handled so as to preclude
damage of any nature. Manufactured materials shall be delivered and stored in their original
containers, plainly marked with the products’ and manufacturer’s name. Materials in broken
containers or in packages showing watermarks or other evidence of damage shall not be used
and shall be removed from the site.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 16
2.1 DUCTWORK AND AIR DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT
A. Reference Standards:
1. Material, construction and installation shall meet requirements of most recent editions of the
following standards and references, except for more stringent requirements specified or
shown on the Drawings:
Standard As Applicable To
SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction
Standards Metal and Flexible
Sheetmetal Ductwork; Duct Liners;
Adhesives; Fasteners; Flexible Ductwork
SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test
Manual
Duct Leakage Testing
SMACNA Fibrous Glass Duct
Construction Standards
Fibrous Glass Ductwork; Tapes
SMACNA Ducted Electric Heat Guide
for Air Handling Systems
Electric Duct Heaters
ADC and TIMA Flexible Duct
Performance Standards
Flexible Ductwork
NFPA 90A Fire Dampers; Fire Resistance Standards for
Ducts and Liners
B. General:
1. Provide supporting and hanging devices necessary to install the entire HVAC system
including ductwork and equipment, and to prevent vibration.
2. Provide vertical and horizontal supports as required by code to meet minimum applicable
earthquake resistance standards.
3. Ductwork shall be free from vibration under all conditions of operation. Dimensions shown on
the Drawings for lined ductwork are net inside dimensions. Increase ductwork dimensions to
accommodate lining requirements.
4. Pipe or conduit crossing duct: No pipe, conduit, hanger, Architectural element nor structural
member shall pass through ductwork.
5. When making offsets and transformations necessary to accommodate structural conditions,
preserve full cross-sectional area of the ductwork as shown on the Drawings.
6. Ductwork shall have pressure-velocity classifications as follows:
Duct
Construction
Class
Static
Pressure
Rating Pressure
SMACNA
Seal
Class
SMACNA
Leakage
Class Velocity
2” 2” Pos. or Neg. A 8, 16 2500 fpm or less
1” 1” Pos. or Neg. A 8, 16 2500 fpm or less
1/2” 1/2” Pos. or Neg. A 8, 16 2000 fpm or less
a. Seal Class 16 for rectangular and Class 8 for round and flexible ductwork.
b. Unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings, the following pressure
classifications shall be used for the types of ductwork listed below:
1) 2” Class: All other ductwork.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 17
7. Sealing requirements in accordance with Passive House are for Class A, Leakage Class 1,
non-welded, galvanized or aluminum ductwork. Central, constant ventilation systems:
constructed, installed and sealed per SMACNA Duct Construction Standards based on Class
rating of duct system or the municipal mechanical code requirement where the project is
permitted, whichever is more stringent.
a. In addition, all central ventilation ductwork shall be sealed using the Aeroseal process or
equivalent as per paragraph below.
b. Transverse Joints:
1) During assembly seal all flanged transverse joints with sealing tape of quality equal to
Hardcast Inc. Model 1902-FR. Corners shall be sealed as described by SMACNA
and when applicable per manufacturer’s published procedures.
2) Seal all non-flanged transverse joints with Hardcast Inc. Versa Grip Model 102 or
approved equal.
c. Longitudinal Seams: Seal all longitudinal seams during ductwork fabrication with
Hardcast Inc. Cold Seal Model 1001 or approved equal.
d. Mastic applied at major duct connections and duct pinch weld.
e. Mastic the top of horizontal ducts before pinning ducts to the ceiling.
f. Air seal/caulk ducts to the drywall at register opening before installing register.
g. Firestop all vertical duct penetrations.
8. Areoseal-TM Duct Sealing
a. Aeroseal shall be used for all low pressure ductwork to and from the central ventilation
ERVs in accordance with Passive House requirements.
b. Aeroseal installation method shall be in accordance with their SMACNA leakage method
as per sections above.
c. The Aeroseal shall be warrantied for a minimum of 3 years.
9. Support:
a. Space hangers as required by SMACNA (8 ft. max.) for horizontal duct on 8 ft. centers,
unless concentrated loadings require closer spacing.
b. Support vertical duct on each floor or slab it penetrates.
c. Supports for ductwork and equipment shall be galvanized unless specified otherwise.
10. Connections:
a. Connect inlets and outlets of air handling units and fans to ductwork with flexible
connections unless fan has vibration isolator mounts inside unit with flexible connections
and no external vibration isolators. Exception: Do not use flex on life safety smoke
exhaust fans.
b. Indoors, flexible connections shall be neoprene-coated fibrous glass fire retardant fabric,
by Ventifabrics, or Durodyne. Outdoors, flexible connections shall be DuPont hyplon-
coated fibrous glass fire, weather and UV-resistant by Ventifabrics or Durodyne.
c. Secure flexible connections tightly to air handlers with metal bands. Bands shall be same
material as duct construction.
d. Connections from trunk to branch duct shall be as detailed on Drawings.
11. Construction:
a. No sharp metal edges shall extend into air streams.
b. Install drive slips on air-leaving side of duct with sheetmetal screws on 6” centers.
c. Spin in collars shall NOT be used for branch connections in 3” or higher pressure class
ductwork.
12. Joints:
a. Longitudinal lock seams shall be double-locked and flattened to make tight joints.
b. Make transverse joints, field connections, collar attachments and flexible connections to
ducts and equipment with sheetmetal screws or bolts and nuts. Do not use rivets or
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 18
staples.
13. Prefabricated Transverse Duct Joints:
a. Transverse joints in galvanized sheetmetal ductwork may be made with galvanized
gasketed frame and angle duct systems by Ductmate, TDF, TDC or approved equal.
Angles shall be at least 20 gauge. Prefabricated transverse duct joints shall not be used
for duct 16 ga. and heavier, nor for duct 23 ga. and lighter.
b. Secure angles to duct with screws (using clutched arbor) or spot-welds spaced as
recommended by manufacturer for duct pressure class.
14. Elbows and Bends:
a. Elbows and bends for rectangular ducts shall have centerline radius of 1-1/2 times duct
width wherever possible. Elbows for grease exhaust and fume hood exhaust shall be full
radius. Vanes or mitered duct are not allowed.
b. Where centerline radius is less than 1-1/2 times duct width (on supply, return and
exhaust ductwork), elbows shall be radius throat (square throat allowed when turning
around column or other close objects) with radius heel. For elbows whose width is
greater than 48 inches and/or where shown on plans, provide splitter vanes. Install
vanes in accordance with SMACNA. Where multiple elbows are separated by less than
ten duct diameters use splitter (full length) vanes.
c. For round ductwork provide stamped elbows, with centerline radii equal to 1-1/2 times
duct diameter, or gored elbows as follows:
Elbow Angle
No. of Gores
0 - 36 2
37 - 72 3
73 - 90 5
d. Elbows for flat oval ducts shall have centerline radii equal to 1-1/2 times duct diameter in
plane of bend, or gored elbows with gores as specified for round ducts.
15. Access Panels/Doors:
a. Provide proper pressure and leakage rated, gasketed, duct mounted access
panels/doors for the following items with minimum sizes, as indicated. Access doors
shall be of double wall construction. Access doors in insulated ducts shall be insulated.
Gauges of door materials, number of hinges, number and type of door locks shall be as
required by the SMACNA Duct Construction Standards. Hinged doors are not
acceptable, screwed or bolted access panels are not acceptable. Doors shall be chained
to frame with a minimum length of 6” to prevent loss of door. For seal Class A, access
doors shall be leakage rated, neoprene gasketed UL 94 HF1 listed, DUCTMATE
“sandwich” or approved equal. Door metal shall be the same gauge as the attached duct
material. For grease and high temperature ducts, door assembly shall be rated for 2300
F. The minimum sizes shall be:
1) Fire dampers – 12” x 12”, or larger.
2) Combination Fire/Smoke dampers – 12” x 12”, or larger.
3) Smoke dampers – 6” x 6” minimum.
4) Automatic control dampers – 6” x 6” minimum.
5) Manual volume dampers 2 sq. ft. and larger – 6” x 6” minimum.
6) Inlet side to all coils – 12” x 12”, or larger.
7) Suction and discharge sides of inline fans – 24” x 24” minimum
8) At additional locations indicated on Drawings, or specified elsewhere – 12” x 12”
minimum.
9) Generally access doors are not shown on the Drawings, but shall be provided in
accordance with the above.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 19
16. Connections to roof fans:
a. Shall be at least 22 gauge galvanized steel soldered watertight.
b. Solder side seams at least 12” up from bottom.
c. Provide suitable dielectric gaskets to join dissimilar materials.
17. Plenums and Connections to Louvers:
a. Shall be 18 ga. minimum cross-broken and properly reinforced with galvanized angle
irons to SMACNA requirements.
b. Shall have bottom and corner seams soldered watertight at least 12” up from bottom.
c. Shall have neoprene gaskets or other non-corrodible material to make connections to
louvers watertight.
d. Shall pitch connection back towards the louver. Provide half-coupling drain connection at
bottom of plenum unless noted otherwise. Pipe drain to nearest floor drain.
e. Shall have unused portions of louvers blocked-off with sheetmetal; sealed air and
watertight; insulated with 2” thick 6 lb. Density rigid or board insulation.
18. Duct Pressure Tests:
a. Pressure test in accordance with PASSIVE HOUSE requirements.
b. Pressure test ducts after takeoffs and wall penetrations are in place and before applying
exterior insulation. Correct any leaks.
c. Pressure test 25% of low-pressure ductwork at 100% of operating system pressure. Duct
shall be constructed so there is no joint or structural failure at the test pressure.
19. Duct Leakage Tests
Leak testing will be conducted by a third party hired by owner in residential units in
accordance with Energy Star V3.1, and all PHIUS+ 2015 co-requisite programs.
a. The heating and cooling supply ductwork is leak tested as a representative random
sample, as per Energy Star testing requirements. If the heating and cooling supply
ductwork is passing the duct leakage thresholds then the sample size is approximately 1
out of every 7 units. If there are failures, the contractor will be required to test and sample
more units as per Energy Star.
b. Leak testing shall be per SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. Provide orifice
assembly including straightening vanes, orifice-plate mounted in straight tube with
properly located pressure taps, and U-tube manometer or other device as specified by
SMACNA. The orifice assembly shall be calibrated accurately and shall come with
calibration curve. Leakage classes shall be as previously specified.
c. Third party shall Submit leak test report (per SMACNA format) for Architect review.
Drawings of ductwork tested shall also be submitted with report, indicating presence of
takeoffs, wall penetrations, joints, etc.
20. Materials:
a. Sheetmetal ducts shall be constructed of hot-dipped galvanized sheetmetal with G90
Commercial coating according to ASTM 527 unless specified otherwise.
b. Aluminum ductwork shall be Alclad 3003-1414 or alloy 552-H32, of thickness required by
the SMACNA duct construction standards with Alloy 6061 bracing angles, and Pittsburgh
lock longitudinal corner and double-side seaming.
c. Flexible Ductwork:
1) Flexible ductwork, connecting to un-insulated or unlined duct, shall be polyester core
with corrosion-resistant helical wire reinforcing. The polyester core shall be minimum
two-ply and shall have a minimum thickness of 0.0017”. Flex duct shall be UL rated
for 6” WC positive pressure, 2” WC negative pressure with a maximum velocity of
4000 FPM. Flexduct must be listed as a Class 1 Connector according to UL 181 and
shall meet the requirements of NFPA 90A. The maximum ASTM E-84 fire-hazard
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 20
rating shall be 25 flame spread, 50 fuel contributed and 50 smoke developed. Un-
insulated flexible duct shall be equivalent to Wiremold, Type WB, or Flexmaster
Types 2 and 4 (not type 9).
2) Flexible duct connected to insulated or lined duct shall also be insulated and shall be
equivalent to Wiremold Type WK or Flexmaster Types 2 or 4 (not type 9), with 1-1/2”
3/4 lb. density fiberglass insulation and an aluminized reinforced vapor barrier.
3) Submittals shall include data or number of polyester plies and minimum thickness of
polyester core, in addition to other data listed above required to ensure that
submitted product meets the requirements of these Specifications.
4) If flex duct other than the model numbers of the vendors listed above is submitted, a
sample of the flex duct shall be submitted to the Architect. The Architect shall have
sole discretion in determining whether the submitted flex duct is equivalent to that of
the named vendors above.
5) Unless otherwise indicated, flexible duct shall not exceed 5’-0” long.
C. 2” and Lower Pressure Class Ductwork – Rectangular:
1. Ducts wider than 19” with more than 10 square feet of un-braced panel shall be beaded or
cross-broken.
2. Internal stiffening struts shall only be used upon prior written approval of the Architect.
3. Make changes in duct size with tapered connections as required by SMACNA. Changes
shall NOT exceed 30 from line of airflow. Take-off to the diffusers shall be 45 leading edge
type or bellmouth type.
4. Transverse joints shall be TDF/TDC or slip joints; use flat or standing seam according to
SMACNA. Where the duct size requires a standing seam but space restrictions dictate flat
seam, notify Architect prior to fabrication.
D. 2” and Lower Pressure Class Ductwork – Round:
1. Joints:
a. Longitudinal joints shall be spiral seam, butt welded, lap and seam welded, or ACME lock-
grooved seam. Snap lock seams shall be used on 1/2" w.g. pressure class duct only.
b. Transverse joints shall be beaded sleeve joint or other approved joints listed in SMACNA. Use
three (3) or more sheetmetal screws at 15” uniform intervals along circumference of joints.
2. Branch fittings shall be conical tee (Buckley or equal) or combination tee as shown in SMACNA.
E. Flexible Duct:
1. Flexible ductwork shall be Flexmaster Triple-Lock Buck Duct Flexible Air Duct (insulated or
non-insulated) as manufactured by Buckley Associates, ATCO, or equal. Flexible duct, non-
insulated, shall be Underwriters Laboratory Listed UL 181 Class 0 air duct and constructed in
accordance with NFPA Standards 90A and 90B. It shall have a smoke/flame spread rating of
50/25.
2. The duct shall be made from a tape of dead soft aluminum sheet, spiral wound into a tube
and spiral corrugated to provide strength and stability. The joint shall consist of a triple lock
mechanically performed without the use of adhesives to make a durable airtight seam. A
double lock is not acceptable.
3. Flexible duct connected to insulated or lined duct shall also be insulated. Flexmaster
insulated flex shall have a gray Fire Retardant Polyethylene outer jacket with a 1/2 lb.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 21
density, 1-1/2” thick fiberglass insulation blanket, factory wrapped, providing a thermal
performance of R-6 overall. Flexible Duct, insulated, shall be Underwriters Laboratory Listed
and constructed in accordance with NFPA Standards 90A and 90B. It shall have a
smoke/flame spread rating of 50/25.
4. The flexible duct shall be supported as required.
5. Flexible ductwork shall be rated at 12” positive pressure. Flexible ductwork from 3” to 16” in
diameter shall have a negative pressure rating of 12”. Flexible ductwork 18” to 20” in
diameter shall have a negative pressure rating of 8”.
6. All flexible ductwork shall be individually boxed and labeled for delivery to the jobsite for
maximum protection.
7. Submittals shall include data on minimum thickness of aluminum core, in addition to other
data listed above, required to ensure that submitted product meets the requirements of these
Specifications.
8. Provide sealing compound for installation. See further paragraphs in this Specification and
details for other installation requirements.
F. Fire Dampers:
1. Provide fire dampers throughout the air distribution system(s) as required by applicable
codes, standards and Authorities. Provide an access door for each fire damper of sufficient
size to repair the internal fusible link (see access panel/door section). Fire dampers indicated
on the Drawings may not fully represent the exact number required for this project. It is the
Contractor’s responsibility, at no additional cost to the Owner, to provide all required
dampers.
2. Fire dampers shall be the fusible link spring loaded type. Where in ductwork served by fans
which shut off during a fire alarm condition, dampers shall be the static type, similar to
Greenheck Model FD series. Where in ductwork served by fans which do not shut off during
a fire alarm condition, dampers shall be the dynamic type, similar to Greenheck Model DFD
series.
3. Fire damper frames shall be fitted with angle iron stop and stainless steel spring latch, and
shall be securely fastened to building construction.
4. Seal spaces between damper frames and walls and between damper frames and floor with
approved fire-retardant material.
5. The use of fire dampers shall NOT reduce net free area of duct below that shown on
Drawings. Fire dampers shall be Type B with the blades of the fire dampers out of the air
stream.
6. Samples of fire dampers shall be submitted to and approved by Local Authorities Having
Jurisdiction.
7. Dampers shall bear 1-1/2 hour UL-rating fire damper label and shall be constructed and
installed as required by UL-555.
8. Fire dampers shall be Buckley, Greenheck, Ruskin, Nailor Industries, Pottorff or Prefco for
use in the proper duct pressure classification.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 22
9. Dampers shall be installed per SMACNA with breakaway connections and nose pieces on
duct liner (see SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards).
G. Airflow regulators:
1. Constant airflow regulators shall be by American Aldes Ventilation Corp. model # CAR-II, or
approved equivalent. Regulators shall operate on duct pressure and require no external
power supply. Each regulator shall be preset and factory calibrated, requiring no field
adjustment to the airflows as indicated on the plans. Regulators shall be rated for use in
temperatures ranging from -25 F to 140 F.
2. Constant airflow regulators shall be capable of maintaining a constant airflow within +/-10% of
the scheduled airflows rates. (15% for 50 cfm or less), within the operating range of 0.2 to 0.8
in. w.g. differential. And between 0.1 and 0.42 in. w.g. on low-pressure models (Car-II-LP).
3. Regulators shall be provided as an assembly consisting of a 94V-0 UL ABS plastic body
housed within a round sleeve for mounting in a round duct. Each round sleeve must be fitted
with a lip gasket to ensure perimeter air tightness with the interior surface of the duct.
4. All regulators must be classified per UL 2043 and carry the UL mark indicating compliance.
5. All regulators will require no maintenance.
6. Warranty for 5 years.
7. All regulators shall be installed per the manufacturer’s requirements and in accordance with
all local and codes. Ductwork must be tight.
H. Zone Register Terminal
1. Zone terminal regulators shall be American ALDES Ventilation Corp. or approved or equal by
AAB or Trox. Provide model ZRT-IL-1 for on/off based on occupancy and optional maximum
airflow control.
2. Terminals shall be installed as per the capacities and ductwork sizes and locations as shown
on the drawings and with features as noted on plans.
3. Terminal construction shall include a 24 gauge G90 galvanized steel with integral duct collar
that allows either rigid or flexible ductwork. Unit shall include a gasketed tight-seal damper
blade for.
4. Unit be provided with all terminal casing, mounting hardware and brackets suitable for installation.
5. Actuator motor for damper shall be 120V.
6. Normally closed and powered-opened, spring return two-position damper.
a. Unit shall be installed only within systems that are within a maximum 1.0″w.g. of
differential pressure.
7. Optional ceiling supply or exhaust register shall be provided.
8. Optional communication options:
a. Telkonet.
b. WCOSG stand-alone occupancy sensor and comm. relay by Aldes.
9. Provide CAR II Maximum Air flow regulator may be installed on the inlet side similar to Aldes
CAR II. Refer to “Airflow Regulator” section of the spec.
10. Provide optional Minimum Air flow regulator if required by Passivehouse.
11. Unit entire assembly shall be factory labeled by UL and for the use.
12. Unit shall be installed per the manufacturer’s listing requirements and in accordance with all
local and State bldg. codes. Ductwork must be tight to prevent leakage.
13. Unit shall be warrantied for 3 years.
I. Volume Dampers:
1. Provide manually adjustable rectangular parallel blade dampers for duct heights less than 12”
with factory-installed locking hand quadrants extended 2” for all dampers installed in
externally insulated duct:
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 23
a. On each supply, return and general duct take-off.
b. At each take-off to register, grille or diffuser (not all are shown on Drawings for clarity).
2. Volume dampers shall be manufactured approximately 5/16” smaller in width and 1/8” smaller
in height than size of duct in which they are installed; e.g., nominal damper size is 24” x 10”;
actual size is approximately 23-11/16” x 9-7/8”.
3. Volume damper frames shall be constructed of #6063 extruded aluminum reinforced channel
with minimum thickness of 0.050”. Opposed damper blades shall be #6063 extruded
aluminum with minimum thickness of 0.050” and shall include reinforcing ribs. Each blade
shall be supported in the damper frame by individual Teflon axle bearings, and shall be
driven by stainless steel connecting slide linkage controlled by 3/8” square steel control shaft.
4. All required volume dampers may not be indicated on Drawings, but volume dampers shall
be provided as necessary for systems balancing.
5. Dampers 12” and larger in height shall be opposed multi-blade type.
6. Where volume dampers are inaccessible, use locking type ceiling regulators and miter gear
or worm gear for all horizontal dampers. Bearing coupling for bottom duct control may be
used for shaft on vertical blade dampers. The 3/8” rod between ceiling regulator and damper
shall be provided by Contractor.
7. Damper blades shall be two gauges heavier than adjoining ductwork, and shall be riveted to
supporting rods. Hem over edges parallel to rods.
8. Brackets shall be galvanized metal, secured to ductwork with sheetmetal screw with locking
quadrant arms (see Seal Class Section for additional requirements). Provide 2” handle
extension for all dampers on externally insulated ductwork.
9. Note: All required volume dampers may not be indicated on Drawings but dampers shall be
provided as necessary for system balancing.
J. Remote Control Operated Balancing Dampers:
1. Round remote control operated balancing dampers applicable for use in HVAC systems with
velocities to 2,600 fpm by United Enertech model i-3, Young Regulators or equal as approved
by engineer.
2. Submit manufacturer’s product data including performance data.
a. Include differential pressure ratings and maximum system velocity.
b. Indicate materials, dimensions, construction, and installation details.
c. Include damper pressure drop data based on procedures performed in accordance with
AMCA 500-D.
3. Ratings:
a. Temperature Rating 35F to 120F (2C to 49C)
b. Maximum Velocity: 2600 fpm (13.2 m/s)
c. Maximum Differential Pressure Rating: 3" w.g.
4. Construction:
a. Frame: Min. 24 ga. galvanized steel, 8" deep
b. Blade: Round, minimum 24 ga. galvanized steel, mechanically fastened to blade
c. Axels: Zinc Plated Steel Pins
d. Bearings: Nylon 6/6 Molded synthetic
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 24
e. Mounting: Vertical and/or Horizontal
f. Actuator: DC voltage, Direct Drive, Electronic pulse
g. Remote: Portable hand held power pack with RJ-11 cable
h. Finish: Mill Galvanized
5. Accessories and Options:
a. Custom RJ-11 cable length to be confirmed in field and submitted based on actual length.
b. Oval damper in lieu of round as required. Contractor to select.
c. RJ-11 cable terminal points: J100
6. Installation:
a. Install dampers at locations indicated on the drawings and in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
b. Install dampers round and free from racking. Do not stretch or compress damper frame or
sleeve into the opening or duct.
c. Handle dampers using the sleeve or frame. Do not move or lift the damper by the blades,
cable, or actuator
d. Install remote options J100 Terminal points.
e. Connect RJ-11 cable from the damper to the female outlet, making sure cable is secured
and cannot be pulled out of the terminal.
f. Coordinate power requirements with electrician.
K. Automatic Dampers: Install automatic dampers furnished under Automatic Temperature Control
Paragraph of this Section, as shown on Drawings, and as specified. Provide sealed wall
penetrations for Seal Class A ductwork. All dampers shall be Class 1A ultra low leakage rated.
L. Diffusers, Registers and Grilles:
1. Provide diffusers, registers and grilles for supply, return and exhaust outlets, of size, type and
design shown on Drawings. Acceptable manufacturers shall be Anemostat, Krueger,
Metal*Aire, Price, or Titus.
2. Equipment shall be tested and rated per ASHRAE 91-70.
3. Equipment shall handle air quantities at operating velocities:
a. With maximum diffusion within space supplied or exhausted.
b. Without objectionable air movement as determined by Architect.
c. With sound pressure level not to exceed NC 30.
4. Supply, return and exhaust outlets shall have opposed blade volume dampers operable from
front.
5. Supply registers shall have two (2) sets of directional control blades.
6. Diffusers within same room or area shall be of same type and style to provide Architectural
uniformity.
7. Diffusers, registers and grilles shall be furnished with gaskets and installed with faces set
level and plumb, tightly against mounting surface.
8. Finish shall be as directed by the Architect.
9. Coordinate diffusers, registers and grilles with ceiling and wall construction. Refer to
Architectural Drawings for exact lengths and for framing and mitering arrangements that may
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 25
differ from those shown on HVAC Drawings.
M. Branch Duct Take-off Fittings:
1. Contractor shall provide bellmouth take-offs at all branch duct locations.
2. Bellmouth fitting shall be provided with damper.
3. Bellmouths shall be constructed of heavy-duty galvanized steel. Bellmouths shall include an
airtight neoprene gasket to ensure a tight fitting with minimal leakage. Pre-drilled holes shall
be provided for quick mounting.
4. Standard damper hardware to be constructed of 26-gauge galvanized material with a
quadrant damper and tight-fitting gasket to ensure minimal leakage at damper pivot points.
5. Optional heavy-duty hardware shall be provided at locations of higher static pressure where
shown on the Drawings.
6. Ninety-degree (90) take-offs are not permitted on this project.
2.2 ACOUSTICAL DUCT LINING
A. Provide 1” thick acoustical lining by Certain-teed, Knauf, Owens Corning or Manville for following
ductwork:
1. Supply and return ductwork, including plenums for minimum of 20 feet from rooftop or air
handling units (or to sound attenuator if attenuator is located further than 20 feet from fan).
Exception: 3 feet before and 10 feet after humidifiers and dedicated life safety smoke
exhaust systems.
2. Exhaust ductwork, including plenums, for minimum of 20 feet from fan inlet.
3. Sound attenuation boots.
4. Other ductwork indicated as lined on Drawings.
5. Increase duct dimensions to accommodate lining while maintaining inside clear dimensions
shown on the Drawings.
6. Lining shall be as follows:
Lining for
Material
Minimum
NRC
Maximum K-Factor
At 75 F Mean
Low-pressure ductwork
(below 4” S.P.)
Black, Matfaced, 2 lb.
density, flexible glass
0.75
0.24
7. Materials and installation shall meet following standards, as applicable:
a. NFPA-90A, UL723, NFPA-255.
b. SMACNA Duct Liner Applications Standard.
c. SMACNA Mechanical Fasteners Standard.
d. Adhesive and Sealant Council: Adhesives Standard for Duct Liner – ASC-A-7001A
e. ASTM E-84 fire hazard classifications of 25 flame spread, 50 smoke developed and 50
fuel contributed.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 26
8. Duct liner shall be installed without interruptions or gaps, using 100% coverage of adhesive
and mechanical fasteners. Mechanical fasteners shall be welded or secured mechanically to
duct on 12” maximum centers.
9. Cut liner to ensure overlapped and compressed longitudinal joints at corners. Transverse
joints in liner shall abut precisely. Seal joints against fiber entrainment with approved
adhesive, as recommended by manufacturer. Use sheetmetal nosing at beginning of lining
(in direction of flow) to prevent erosion.
10. The Contractor shall ensure the integrity of acoustical lining when slip-in duct heaters are
installed; loose lining shall not flap about in the airstream. Secure edges of lining with
sheetmetal nosing, where liner is interrupted to make room for slip in heaters.
11. Submit samples and catalog data for duct liner, mechanical fasteners and adhesives to
Architect for approval.
12. Friction coefficient correction factor at 1000 FPM shall be no greater than 1.1. Liner shall be
Certain-teed Ultra Liner, Knauf Duct Liner M or Johns Manville Linacoustic. Other liners from
these manufacturers with friction coefficient correction factors greater than listed above, are
not acceptable.
13. Mylar used for vapor barrier shall meet ASTM E-84 classification.
14. Any cut liner due to duct take-offs and branches shall be totally sealed at edges (with
sheetmetal nose pieces) to prevent entrainment of loose fibers.
15. Do not insulate lined duct.
2.3 DUCT INSULATION:
A. All ductwork insulation products and installation shall meet the requirements outlined by PHIUS
certification.
B. Fire Wrap Insulation (for systems that are not protected by fire dampers): For all dryer exhaust
and for any other systems which are shown on the drawings that penetrate fire rated walls, floors,
ceilings or shafts, provide fully encapsulated fire rated insulation equal to Unifrax FryeWrap Elite
1.5, Fire Master Fast Wrap XL, or 3M Fire Barrier System 615+. Fire wrap insulation shall be
non-asbestos and rated to maintain 2-hour (both T and F - ratings) fire separation with zero
clearance to combustibles at all points for the entire duct run after it leaves the fire zone (first
penetrates fire rated construction).
1. Insulation for non-grease ducts shall be tested to meet ASTM E84, ASTM D6329, ISO 6944,
ISO 834, ASTM E 814, and comply with requirements of NFPA 96, and the International
Mechanical Code. Manufacturer may substitute single layer (with overlapped seams)
system, providing all the above requirements are met and documented on the submittal.
2. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions to maintain rating with all
cut edges sealed with aluminum tape. Insulation shall be held in place with minimum ½ inch
wide and 0.015-inch thick stainless steel bands and clips. Provide insulation pins and clips
(per manufacturer’s recommendations) on the bottom of horizontal ducts to prevent sagging.
3. Seal all fire rated penetrations per manufacturer’s details to maintain full 2-hour rating.
4. Provide removable insulation sections for all access and clean-out doors per manufacturer’s
details to maintain full 2-hour rating. Install easy to read warning labels on insulation every
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 27
20 feet and at each clean-out door. Labels shall say “Fire Resistive Enclosure – Do Not
Remove”.
5. Exposed duct wrap systems shall be protected where subject to physical damage.
C. General:
1. Insulation shall be Certain-Teed, Knauf, Manville or Owens Corning. Install insulation,
mastics, adhesives, coatings, covers, weather-protection and other work exactly as required
by manufacturer’s recommendations. Materials shall meet requirements of Adhesive and
Sealant Council Standards and SMACNA.
2. Apply insulation after systems have been tested, proved tight and approved by Architect.
Remove dirt, scale, oil, rust and other foreign matter prior to installation of insulation.
3. Leaks in vapor barrier or voids in insulation will not be accepted.
4. ASTM E-84 minimum fire hazard ratings shall be 25 flame-spread, 50 fuel contributed and 50
smoke developed.
5. Where ducts are insulated, flexible connections to ducts shall be insulated.
6. Insulate standing seams with same material and thickness as duct.
7. Acoustically lined ductwork shall not be insulated externally, except as noted otherwise.
8. Return ductwork in ceiling plenums shall not be insulated.
9. Insulation shall be continuous through wall and ceiling openings and in sleeves.
10. Transmission rates of vapor barriers shall not exceed 0.02 perms.
11. Do not insulate fibrous glass duct.
D. Concealed Rectangular, Flat Oval and Circular Ductwork:
1. Insulate supply and outside air ductwork and plena in concealed spaces and return ductwork not
in ceiling plenum with 1-1/2” thick glass duct wrap; with foil-Kraft flame-resistant vapor barrier.
2. Insulation shall provide a minimum R-6 value.
3. If insulation does not have pre-cut lap, make lapped butt joints by cutting 2” strip of insulation
away from vapor barrier. Apply 6” strips of approved adhesive on 16” centers and wrap duct
with insulation. Staple lapped joint with outward-clinching staples. Seal stapled joints airtight
with approved matching pressure-sensitive tape.
4. For rectangular duct 24” or larger in any dimension, augment application method specified in
item 3 with approved mechanical fasteners, such as weld pins with speed washers, on 18”
centers on bottom of duct.
5. Cover breaks in vapor material with patches of same material, secured with adhesive and
staples. Seal staples with approved pressure sensitive tape.
6. Fill voids in insulation at jacket penetrations and seal with pressure sensitive tape.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 28
7. Seal and flash terminations and punctures with fibrous glass cloth between two (2) coats of
pressure sensitive tape.
8. Terminate vapor barrier and extend insulation at standoff brackets.
E. Exposed rectangular ductwork shall be minimum R-8 value.
1. Insulate exposed supply, return and outside air ducts and exposed plena with 1” thick, semi-
rigid fibrous glass boards with factory-applied fire retardant foil-faced jacket. All foil seams
shall be taped.
2.4 PIPING AND FITTINGS
A. General: Pipe materials and fitting materials shall be as indicated in Schedule of Pipe and Fitting
Materials.
B. Schedule of Pipe and Pipe Fitting Materials:
Service
Systems
Description
Pipe
Size
Pipe
Material
Joints
Fitting
Material
Fitting Rating
PSI/Class/
Weight
Equipment
Drains
D All
CSteel A53
Grade B,
Smls or
ERW
Schedule
Standard
Butt Welded
Note 1
Wrought
Steel, A234
Grade WPB
C Standard
Weight
Condensate
Drain
CD All PVC.
Schedule 40
Note 1
Solvent
Welded
PVC,
Schedule 40
Class 150
Refrigerant R All Copper,
ACR
Silver Brazed Wrought
Copper
200 PSI
1. Note 1: Use copper for drain lines through fire-rated walls. Copper tubing must be insulated
for 12” from equipment. All other drains may be PVC or PEX tubing.
C. Connections:
1. Provide dielectric fittings at connections of dissimilar materials.
2. Provide eccentric reducing couplings to bring pipes flush on top for water service and flush on
bottom for steam service.
3. Branch lines in welded piping shall be made with welding tees except that branch lines less
than one half diameter of main may be made with Weld-O-Lets or Sock-O-Lets.
4. Nipples shall be same material, make and thickness as pipe with which they are used. Close
nipples shall not be used.
5. Make piping connections 2-1/2” diameter and larger to valves and equipment with welding
neck flanges, ANSI B16.5, pressure rating to match system, flat or raised face as required.
6. Make piping connections 2” diameter and smaller to valves and equipment with steel body,
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 29
300 psi brass seat unions on steel piping and with heavy semi-finished brass unions on
copper tubing.
7. Fit flanged joints with Johns-Manville or approved equal full-face gaskets. Flanges shall be
faced and drilled to ASA standards and fitted with semi-finished hexagon machine bolts and
nuts of proper number and size.
8. Make screw joints tight with Teflon (polytetrafluoroethylene) tape or litharge-glycerin mixture
applied to male threads. Use tapered threads.
9. Make fusion welded joints as required by ANSI B31.1. Make changes in direction of pipe with
welded fittings only. Bevel connections before welding, mechanically or by flame cutting.
2.5 VALVES AND STRAINERS
A. Valves shall be 125 psi unless noted otherwise. Pressure ratings of valves for steam and
condensate services shall be as specified. Provide balancing valves where shown on Drawings.
B. Valves shall have name of manufacturer and guaranteed working pressure cast or stamped on
bodies. Valves of similar type shall be by single manufacturer.
C. Check valves 2” and smaller shall be bronze, screwed ends, swing pattern. Check valves for hot
water, chilled water, and condenser water pump discharge shall be spring loaded, silent check,
as manufactured by APCO, Milwaukee, Mueller or Stockham.
D. Provide refrigerant isolation valves at all change-over boxes on the VRF system.
2.6 PIPE INSULATION
A. Insulation shall be fibrous glass insulation with factory-applied fire retardant vapor barrier jacket by
Owens Corning, Certain-Teed, Manville or Knauf, installed as required by manufacturer. ASTM E-
84 fire hazard ratings shall be 25 flame spread, 50 smoke developed and 50 fuel contributed.
B. Apply insulation after systems have been tested, proved tight and approved by the Architect.
Remove dirt, scale, oil, rust and foreign matter prior to installation of insulation.
C. Provide fibrous dual temperature insulation with factory applied vapor barrier jacket on
condensate drain piping, unless noted otherwise.
D. Drain piping shall have 1/2" thick insulation.
E. Refrigeration Line Insulation:
1. Suction lines, hot bypass lines and outdoor liquid lines shall be insulated with 3/4" thick rigid
closed cell foam insulation. Armstrong Rigid Armaflex, Manville, Owens Corning or
Halstead/Nomaco (Insultube), except in computer room plena.
2. Installation shall meet manufacturer’s recommendations. Seal butt joints with insulation
manufacturers approved adhesive.
3. Outside above ground insulation shall be protected with two (2) coats of approved vinyl
lacquer coating over woven glass mesh adhered to insulation with Insulcolor or approved
equal lagging adhesive, as recommended by manufacturer.
4. Refrigerant piping in hung ceiling and under floor supply and return plena shall be insulated
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 30
with 1” thick fibrous glass insulation that meets applicable requirements of this paragraph.
5. VRF systems require all refrigerant lines to be insulated from the outdoor unit to the indoor
terminal units.
2.7 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Provide pipe stands, supports, hangers and other supporting devices in accordance with ANSI
B31.9 and MSS-69, as necessary to support work required by Contract Documents.
B. Secure vertical piping to building construction to prevent sagging or swinging.
C. Space hangers for horizontal piping as follows:
Pipe Size
Rod Diameter
Maximum Spacing
Up to 1-1/4” 3/8” 8 ft.-0”
1-1/2” and 2” 3/8” 10 ft.-0”
2-1/2” and 3” 1/2" 10 ft.-0”
4” and 5” 5/8” 12 ft.-0”
6” 3/4" 12 ft.-0”
8” and over 7/8” 12 ft.-0”
D. Horizontal copper tubing shall have maximum hanger spacing of 5 ft. for tubing 1-1/4” diameter and
smaller and 10’ for tubing 1-1/2” and larger. Maximum spacing for PVC pipe hanger shall be 4”.
E. Reduce spacing to a maximum of 10’-0” apart, regardless of pipe size, as necessary for fittings,
valves and other concentrated loads.
F. Support piping 4” diameter and larger from structure with pipe roll hangers with adjustable steel
rod hangers, sized to accommodate insulation.
G. Support piping 3” diameter and under from structure with Carpenter and Patterson Fig. 100 clevis
hangers or approved equal.
H. Hangers shall be as manufactured by Carpenter and Patterson, F&S or Grinnell Co. Figure
numbers of Carpenter and Patterson are specified to establish standards of quality for
performance and materials.
I. Provide spring hangers with travel stops as specified in Vibration Isolation Paragraph, where
necessary and where shown on Drawings.
J. Hangers for horizontal lines shall be vertically adjustable to obtain pitch requirements of Piping
Paragraph.
2.8 DUCT SILENCERS
A. Provide prefabricated duct silencers as scheduled and as described herein, at locations shown on
Drawings, by VAW Systems Ltd., IAC, Price, Kinetics, Vibroacoustics, or equal.
B. Materials:
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 31
1. Outer casings of rectangular silencers shall be made of 22 gauge type #G-90 lock former
quality galvanized steel.
2. Outer casings of tubular silencers shall be made of type #G-90 lock former quality galvanized
steel in the following gauges:
Outside Diameter
Metal Gauge
12 – 36 inches
22 gauge
38 – 60 inches
18 gauge
3. Interior partitions for rectangular silencers shall not be less than 26 gauge type #G-90
galvanized lock former quality perforated steel. Interior construction of tubular silencers shall
be compatible with the respective outside casing.
4. Filler material shall be inorganic glass fiber of a proper density to obtain the specified
acoustic performance and be packed under not less than 5% compression to eliminate voids
due to vibration and setting. Material shall be inert, vermin and moisture proof.
5. Combustion ratings for the silencer acoustic fill shall be not greater than the following when
tested to ASTM E 84, NFPA Standard 255 or UL No. 723:
a. Flame Spread Classification: 20.
b. Smoke Development Rating: 20.
C. Construction:
1. Units shall be constructed in accordance with the ASHRAE Guide recommendations for high
pressure ductwork. Seams shall be lock formed and mastic filled. Rectangular casing seams
shall be in the corners of the silencer shell to provide maximum unit strength and rigidity.
Interior partitions shall be fabricated from single piece margin perforated sheets and shall
have die-formed entrance and exit shapes so as to provide the maximum aerodynamic
efficiency and minimum self-noise characteristics in the sound attenuator. Blunt noses or
squared-off partitions will not be accepted.
2. Attachment of the interior partitions to the casings shall be by means of an interlocking track
assembly. Tracks shall be solid galvanized steel and shall be welded to the outer casing.
Attachment to the interior partitions to the tracks shall be such that a minimum of 4 thicknesses
of metal exist at this location. The track assembly shall stiffen the exterior casing, provide a
reinforced attachment detail for the interior partitions and shall maintain a uniform airspace width
along the length of the silencer for consistent aerodynamic and acoustic performance. Interior
partitions shall be additionally secured to the outer casing with welded nose clips at both ends of
the sound attenuator.
a. Interior partitions for tubular silencers shall be secured with galvanized steel radial
mounting brackets welded to the partition and the outer casing. The radial brackets shall
be installed full length and at 120 degree angles to each other to assure uniform spacing
for consistent aerodynamic and acoustic performance.
b. Sound attenuating units shall not fail structurally when subjected to a differential air
pressure of 8 inches water gauge from inside to outside the casing. Airtight construction
shall be provided by use of a duct sealing compound on the jobsite; material and labor
furnished by the Contractor.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 32
D. Acoustic Performance: All silencer ratings shall be determined in a duct-to-reverberant room test
facility which provides airflow in both directions through the test silencer in accordance with
ASTM Specification E-477. The test set-up and procedure shall be such that all effects due to
end reflection, directivity, flanking transmission, standing waves, and test chamber sound
absorption are eliminated. Acoustic ratings shall include Dynamic Insertion Loss (DIL) and Self-
Noise (SN) Power Levels for both FORWARD FLOW (air and noise in same direction) and
REVERSE FLOW (air and noise in opposite directions) with airflow of at least 2000 fpm entering
face velocity. Data for rectangular and tubular type silencers shall be presented for tests
conducted using silencers no smaller than the following cross-sections:
1. Rectangular, in. – 24x24, 24x30 or 24x36.
2. Tubular, in. – 12, 24, 36 and 38.
E. Aerodynamic Performance: Static pressure loss of silencers shall not exceed those listed in the
silencer schedule at the airflow indicated. Airflow measurements shall be made in accordance
with ASTM specification E-477 and applicable portions of ASME, AMCA and ADC airflow test
codes. Tests shall be reported on the identical units for which acoustic data is presented.
F. Certification: With submittals, the manufacturer shall supply certified test data on Dynamic
Insertion Loss, Self-Noise Power Levels and Aerodynamic Performance for Reverse and Forward
Flow test conditions. Test data shall be for a standard product. All rating tests shall be
conducted in the same facility and shall utilize the same silencer and be open to inspection upon
request from the Architect/Engineer.
G. Duct Transitions: When transitions are required to adapt silencer dimensions to connecting
ductwork they shall be furnished by the installing Contractor.
2.9 SLEEVES AND PENETRATIONS
A. Pipe Sleeves:
1. Sleeves through floors and through exterior, structural and fire-rated construction shall be
hot-dipped galvanized Schedule 40 steel pipe.
2. Sleeves through partitions and non-rated construction shall be 26-gauge galvanized steel
with lock longitudinal seams, or approved plastic pipe.
3. Provide waterproofing membrane locking devices at floors. Provide 150 lb. slip-on welding
flanges at exterior wall penetrations.
B. Duct Sleeves and Openings:
1. Sleeves through floors, through exterior structure, through fire-rated construction and through
smoke partitions that require smoke dampers shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe for
round duct and shall meet the SMACNA Fire Damper and Heat Stop Guide for rectangular
ducts. Fireproof packing shall be applied to seal any openings between sleeve and wall.
Materials shall maintain the fire rating of the wall, and shall be installed in accordance with
the SMACNA Fire Damper and Heat Stop Guide.
2. Openings in walls, partitions and other fire-rated construction that do not require smoke
dampers shall meet NFPA 90A, Section 3-3.8.
3. Materials for prepared openings in partitions shall match construction penetrated.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 33
C. Pipe Sleeve Packing:
1. Packing between the pipe and the sleeve (or wall or slab opening) in fire-rated walls or slabs
shall be a combination of fireproof insulation and fireproof caulk. The combination of
materials shall have the same fire rating, in hours, as the wall or slab, as tested in
accordance with the latest edition of ASTME-814 (UL 1479). The combination of materials
shall be classified by UL, (fill, void or cavity materials) for the fire rating required and shall be
listed as a numbered system in the UL Fire Resistance Director. Fiberglass shall not be used
as the insulation material.
2. Acceptable fireproof insulation materials shall be: Kaolin (Kaowool by Babcock and Wilcox);
ceramic fiber blanket (Fiberfrax by Standard Oil) or fire-rated material wool (Thermafiber by
USG). Acceptable fireproof caulks shall be: Silicone (Firestop by Dow Corning, Hilti CS240);
ceramic fiber (Fyreputty by Standard Oil) or intumescent synthetic elastomer (Fire Barrier
Caulk by 3M, Hilti CS2420).
3. Packing for sleeves that do not require maintenance of fire rating shall be oakum, silicate
foam, ceramic fiber or mineral fiber with approved sealant. Pack or foam to within 1” of both
wall surfaces. Seal penetration packing with approved caulking and paintable waterproof
mastic surface finish or silicone caulking.
4. All materials must be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions; all gaps must
be sealed. Finish caulk flush with wall or slab surface if piping runs exposed.
D. Other Waterproof Pipe Penetrations:
1. Modular mechanical penetration seals shall be interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to
fill annular space continuously, with galvanized carbon steel bolts, nuts and pressure plates
to expand rubber seal between pipe and sleeve. Sleeve seal shall be watertight.
2. Prefabricated modular sleeves shall be Mason Industries (SWS) or approved equal stiffened
galvanized steel sleeves with preformed closed-cell elastomeric seal (non-fire-rated) or
preformed mineral fiber or silicone seal (fire-rated).
3. Provide waterproof 1” single ring set in silicone and bolted to floor or wall at chipped and
drilled penetrations of existing slabs-on-grade and existing walls-below-grade.
2.10 ESCUTCHEONS AND DUCT COLLARS
A. Provide adjustable escutcheons on exposed piping that passes through finished floors, walls and
ceilings. Escutcheons shall be chromium-plated cast brass, sized to cover sleeve opening and to
accommodate pipe and insulation.
B. Provide 4” wide, 20 gauge galvanized sheetmetal collars at sleeves and prepare openings, sized
to cover entire duct penetration including sleeve and seal, and to accommodate duct and
insulation as necessary. Edges shall have milled lips ground smooth. Paint to match finish of
duct or as directed by the Architect.
C. Provide #316 stainless steel/No. 4 finish collar for emergency generator exhaust piping which
passes through exterior wall.
2.11 MOTORS, STARTERS AND WIRING
A. Provide motors and controls, and furnish starters for HVAC equipment, except units served by MCC
provided under Section 16100 – ELECTRICAL WORK. Provide control and other related wiring
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 34
including interlocks. Power wiring (to panelboards, disconnect switches, starters and motors) will be
provided under Section 16100 – ELECTRICAL WORK. Starters that are not integral to equipment
will be furnished, installed and wired under Section 16100 – ELECTRICAL WORK.
B. Unless otherwise specified, motors shall be NEMA Design B, constant speed, self-ventilated
squirrel cage induction. Motors shall have 1.15-service factor unless totally enclosed. Motors
shall have Class B insulation.
1. Motors 1/2HP and over shall be as required in schedules.
C. All motors shall be high or premium efficiency type. They shall conform to NEMA Standard MG-
1-12.53a and shall have their efficiencies determined in accordance with IEEE Standard 112
Method B. The NEMA nominal efficiency shall be listed on the motor nameplate. Minimum
nominal efficiencies shall be as follows:
Size (HP) Nominal Efficiency (Minimum)
1 – 3 84%
5 – 7-1/2 88.5%
10 – 25 90%
30 –100 93%
100+ 95%
D. Starters that require interlocks or remote control shall be magnetic with HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC
switch in cover. Provide magnetic starters as necessary, with auxiliary contacts, buttons and
switches in required configurations. Refer to paragraph AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE
CONTROLS and to Drawings for interlock requirements. Starters shall be as manufactured by
one of the following manufacturers: Cutler-Hammer, Clark, Arrow Hart, or Square D.
1. Each 3-phase, 60 Hz motor shall be provided with magnetic starter with either ON-OFF push
button or hand-off-automatic switch.
2. Other motors shall be provided with a manual starter with ON-OFF switch.
3. Control relay for each starter shall be for operation on 120 V, single-phase, and transformer
of sufficient capacity within starter case shall be furnished for this purpose.
4. Provide inverse time limit overload and under voltage protection in each leg and with pilot
lights. Provide “red” and “green” On-Off pilot lights.
5. Provide nameplates with engraved “white” lettering to designate area and equipment served.
6. Starters for refrigeration machines shall be furnished by Unit Manufacturer.
7. Provide starters for two-speed motors with deceleration relay.
8. Furnish for all single speed motors, 25 HP and above, 95% power factor correction
capacitors. Capacitors shall be in NEMA enclosure of the same rating as the motor’s starter.
2.12 DRIVES
A. Drives for belted motors shall be flame-retardant and by Allis-Chalmers, Browning or Woods V-
belt drives with adjustable motor sheave. Drives shall be as short as practical and shall have
number of belts necessary to transmit required horsepower without undue slip or strain.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 35
1. Sheaves shall be balanced statically and dynamically.
2. Hazardous exhaust drives shall be two-groove (2 belt) minimum.
B. Variable Frequency Drives:
1. The VFD shall be provided by the HVAC Contractor and wired to the pump or fan by the
Electrical Contractor. All VFDs for air handling units and rooftop unit shall be furnished and
installed and provided with integral microprocessor controls at the factory by the air handling
unit or rooftop unit manufacturer.
2. Reference Standards and Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. The variable frequency drives (VFDs) with all options shall be UL and ETL listed as a
complete assembly and shall be built in compliance with the latest standards of ANSI,
IEEE, NEMA and the National Electric Code.
b. Acceptable manufacturers, provided they meet the other requirements of this
specification shall be:
1) Allen Bradley
2) ASEA Brown Boveri
3) Reliance
4) Titan
5) Schneider Electric
6) Toshiba
7) Danfoss
8) Yaskawa
3. Construction:
a. The VFD’s shall be solid-state, with a Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) output wave form.
The VFD shall employ a full wave rectifier to prevent input line notching, a DC bus choke,
DC bus capacitors and Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistors (IGBT) as the output switching
device. The VFD efficiency shall be 97% or better at full speed and full load.
Fundamental power shall be 98% at all speeds and loads.
b. VFDs located inside an AHU vestibule, inside an RTU casing, or inside the building
protected from the elements shall be housed in NEMA 1 rated metal enclosure. VFDs
exposed to the weather shall be housed in NEMA 4 rated metal enclosure. Electric
heaters shall be provided to prevent condensation for any drives exposed to
temperatures below 50 degrees F.
c. Standard operating conditions shall be:
1) Incoming 3-phase 480 volt AC power, + 10%, 60 Hz.
2) Humidity 0 to 95% (non-condensing and non-corrosive).
3) Altitude 0 to 3,000 feet above sea level, without de-rating.
4) Ambient temperature 0 to 40C.
d. VFDs shall include the following system interfaces:
1) Process control speed reference interface to receive an isolated 0-10 volts DC or 4-
20 MA DC signal.
2) Run relay with an isolated set of Form C contacts.
3) Dedicated terminal blocks for interface with remote start contact and remote safety trips.
4) 120 volt control to allow VFD to interface with remote contacts at a distance up to 500
feet and with three wire control.
5) The Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for all control wiring between the
terminal strip and contacts provided with the VFD, and the Automatic Temperature
Control system. The Mechanical Contractor shall also be responsible for ensuring
that the control output signal (4-20 MA, 1-10 VDC, etc.) from the ATC system is
compatible with the input signal required by the drive.
e. The VFD shall include the following protective features:
1) Input thermal magnetic circuit breaker door interlocked and pad-lockable.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 36
2) Electronic instantaneous overcurrent protection.
3) Under voltage protection.
4) DC bus over voltage protection.
5) Able to withstand output line-to-line short circuits without component failure.
6) Surge protection from AC line transients.
7) Individual visible status indication of the following protection functions: Logic, Error,
Under Voltage, Over Current, DC Bus Over voltage, Controller Over Temperature,
Over Frequency and Phase Loss. A single flashing light to indicate and AFC trip is
not acceptable.
8) A dry contact output to indicate protection trip-out (open on trip).
9) Provide electronic motor overload protection to proper motor and drive at all
frequencies. Electronic overload circuits which protect motor only at full speed shall
not be acceptable. VFD shall sense load and recalibrate thermal trip curve to insure
low speed motor protection.
10) Overload capability shall be 110% of the motor FLA based on the NEC ratings for 60
seconds.
11) The VFD manufacturer shall provide calculations specific to this installation showing
that the Total Harmonic Distortion for the VFD’s reflected into the electrical
distribution system is limited to the level defined by IEEE-519 (latest edition) for
general systems.
12) Harmonic analysis shall be included with the VFD submittal for approval by the
Engineer.
13) The VFD manufacturer shall conduct on-site harmonic measurements before and after
startup of the VFD’s. Results of the measurements, showing harmonic contribution of
the VFD’s shall be provided to the Engineer one (1) month after startup.
14) If the site measurements show that the IEEE-519 levels have been exceeded, the
VFD manufacturer will provide proper filtering to attain the IEE-519 levels, at no
additional cost to the Owner.
15) Three-phase, AC input line reactors shall be provided as a minimum with all VFD’s.
The line reactors are to provide attenuation of line side voltage transients, thus
preventing overloads, trips, or other unnecessary VFD shutdowns, and provide a
reduction in harmonic distortion.
16) Line reactors shall be as manufactured by T.C.I., Milwaukee, Wisconsin and must
meet the following requirements:
a) Minimum of 2-1/2% line impedance.
b) 150% continuous current rating for one (1) minute.
c) Saturation rating no less than 2.5 times the continuous current rating.
d) UL recognized.
17) Opening of an output disconnect under load will not result in component damage.
18) Continuous auto restart for source related faults only.
19) The VFD shall employ three (3) current limit circuits to provide trip free operation.
a) The Slow Current Regulation limit circuit shall be adjustable to 125% (minimum)
of VFD’s variable torque current rating.
b) The Rapid Current Regulation limit shall be adjustable to 170% (minimum) of the
VFD’s variable torque current rating.
c) The Current Switch Off – limit shall be fixed at 255% (minimum, instantaneous)
of the VFD’s variable torque current rating.
f. Standard adjustments shall include minimum speed, maximum speed, acceleration time
(1-120 seconds), deceleration time (1-120 seconds), dwell time, voltage boost and
volts/hertz.
g. Provide front-mounted, digital control keypad and plain English display to provide
following operation information and control functions:
1) Run/Stop selection.
2) Auto/Manual speed control selection.
3) Manual speed adjustment.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 37
4) Frequency meter.
5) Elapsed time meter.
6) Power on indication.
7) Run indication.
8) KWH meter.
9) Motor speed RPM.
h. Output Voltage:
1) Service: The VFD manufacturer shall provide a startup service package for all VFD’s
provided. Service shall include inspection, final adjustment, operational checks and a
final report for record purposes. The service package shall include a two (2) year,
on-site, parts and labor warranty from date of shipment and be performed by local
factory employed service engineers. The service center must be permanently
located within 50 miles of the jobsite. Provide 24-hour service availability.
i. Other Required Features:
1) Output contactor to provide electrical output isolation when the AFC is not running.
2) Provide the following in the same enclosure as the variable frequency drive:
a) Manual transfer to line power via contactors; including motor thermal overload
and fuse protection while in bypass capability.
b) Service switch which provides the ability to service the controller (electrically
isolated) while in bypass operation without having to remove power to the motor.
3) Critical frequency avoidance circuit to avoid operation at speeds which cause
excessive vibration in the driven equipment. Option board to have at least two (2)
field adjustable bands.
4) Adjustable current/torque limit (50-110%) which limits current by lowering the output
frequency when excessive current is drawn.
5) Multiple attempt restart which will perform three (3) restarts in 10 minutes for all AFC
internal trips.
6) AC ammeter.
7) The variable frequency drive shall be capable of starting from power interruption into
spinning load without stopping motor or creating fault condition. VFD shall speed
search motor RPM and synchronize phase rotation to return motor to se speed. All
the drives control programming, including all setpoints, shall be maintained during a
power interruption.
8) VFD shall not cog at frequencies greater than 6 Hz. Drive manufacturer shall include
a statement to this effect with his submittal. Drive manufacturer shall be fully liable
for any damage to pump couplings or other HVAC equipment caused by low
frequency clogging.
9) RS 485 communication port.
j. Quality Assurance:
1) All components are inspected and functionally tested for conformance with vendors,
engineering, and quality assurance Specifications.
2) All power sectors are to be run under rated load conditions for at least 48-hours at
40 C.
3) The drive is to be functionally tested with a motor before shipment to assure proper
operation. All specified parameters are to be tested.
2.13 VRF HEAT RECOVERY SYSTEM
A. System Description: The variable capacity, heat pump heat recovery air conditioning system shall
be a Lennox, Daikin, JCI- York, Mitsubishi Electric CITY MULTI, or equal VRF (Variable
Refrigerant Flow) zoning system.
B. Quality Assurance:
1. The units shall be listed by Electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL) and bear the ETL label.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 38
2. All wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code (N.E.C.).
3. The units shall be manufactured in a facility registered to ISO 9001 and ISO14001 which is a
set of standards applying to environmental protection set by the International Standard
Organization (ISO).
4. All units must meet or exceed the 2010 Federal minimum efficiency requirements and the
proposed ASHRAE 90.1 efficiency requirements for VRF systems. Efficiency shall be
published in accordance with the DOE alternative test procedure, which is based on the Air-
Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (AHRI) Standards 340/360, 1230 and ISO
Standard 13256-1.
5. A full charge of R-410A for the condensing unit only shall be provided in the condensing unit.
C. Delivery, Storage and Handling: Unit shall be stored and handled according to the manufacturer’s
recommendation.
D. Control Architecture:
1. The control system shall consist of a low voltage communication network of unitary built-in
controllers with on-board communications and a web-based operator interface. A web controller
with a network interface card shall gather data from this system and generate web pages
accessible through a conventional web browser on each PC connected to the network. Operators
shall be able to perform all normal operator functions through the web browser interface.
2. Provide a portable tablet device with manufacturer’s software installed.
3. System controls and control components shall be installed in accordance with the
manufacturer’s written installation instructions.
4. Furnish energy conservation features such as optimal start, night setback, request-based
logic, and demand level adjustment of overall system capacity as specified in the sequence.
5. System shall provide direct and reverse-acting on and off algorithms based on an input
condition or group conditions to cycle a binary output or multiple binary outputs.
6. Provide capability for future system expansion to include monitoring and use of occupant
card access, lighting control and general equipment control.
7. System shall be capable of email generation for remote alarm annunciation.
8. Control system start-up shall be a required service to be completed by the manufacturer or a
duly authorized, competent representative that has been factory trained in their controls
system configuration and operation. The representative shall provide proof of certification
indicating successful completion of no more than two (2) years prior to system installation.
This certification shall be included as part of the equipment and/or controls submittals. This
service shall be equipment and system count dependent and shall be a minimum of one (1)
eight (8) hour period to be completed during normal working hours.
E. Warranty:
1. The units shall be covered by the manufacturer’s limited warranty for a period of one (1) year
from date of installation.
a. If the systems are:
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 39
1) Designed by a certified
2) Installed by a contractor that has successfully completed the manufacturer’s service
course, AND
3) Verified with a completed commissioning report submitted to and approved by the
manufacturer’s service department,
b. The units shall be covered by an extended manufacturer’s limited warranty for a period of
five (5) years from date of installation.
c. In addition the compressor shall have a manufacturer’s limited warranty for a period of
seven (7) years from date of installation.
d. If, during this period, any part should fail to function properly due to defects in
workmanship or material, it shall be replaced or repaired at the discretion of the
manufacturer.
2. Additional Warranties
a. Provide manufacturers 5 year compressor warranty.
b. Provide optional 2 year overall warranty for labor including travel.
F. Outdoor Unit:
1. The refrigerant piping to and from the outdoor unit shall be installed in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommendations. No additional sight glasses or filter/dryers shall be
required. All field installed refrigerant piping shall be nitrogenized ACR copper tubing and
shall be meet ASTM B280. All branch piping joints shall be approved by the manufacturer.
2. The single-phase VRF heat recovery system shall be capable of the following refrigerant
piping lengths:
a. Total system piping length: 3,280 feet.
b. Maximum piping length from refrigerant piping branch to indoor unit: 132 feet.
c. Maximum piping length from first branch to furthest indoor unit: up to 295 feet.
d. Maximum vertical separation from outdoor unit to indoor unit, when outdoor unit is above:
360 feet.
e. Maximum vertical separation from outdoor unit to indoor unit, when outdoor unit is below 131 feet.
1) The air-conditioning system shall use R410A refrigerant.
2) The system shall be capable of an automatic refrigerant charge function to ensure
the proper amount of refrigerant is installed into the system.
3) Refrigerant circuit configuration for Heat Recovery System
4) The refrigerant circuit shall be constructed using field provided ACR copper, de-
hydrated, and piped together with manufacturer supplied Y- branches or headers
connected to multiple (ducted, non-ducted or mixed combination indoor units to
effectively and efficiently control heating or cooling operation of the VRF system.
Other pipe materials shall not be allowed.
f. Each refrigerant pipe, y-branches, elbows and valves shall be individually insulated with
no air gaps. Insulation R-value (thickness) shall not be less than the minimum called for
by the local building code, local energy code or as a minimum per manufacture
installation requirements. In no case shall the insulation be allowed to be compressed at
any point in the system.
g. The condensing unit will be factory charged with R-410A.
h. Depending on the size and length of the piping when installed, it may require additional
trim charging in the field.
i. The condensing unit shall include a refrigerant charge volume analyzer that includes an
automatic refrigerant assessment system to check whether or not the correct amount of
refrigerant charge exists in a given refrigerant cycle.
3. Electrical:
a. The condensing unit power supply shall be 208/230V, 1 phase, 60 Hertz per schedule.
b. The condensing unit shall have an acceptable voltage range of 187-253V.
c. The control circuit between the condensing unit, changeover boxes, and indoor units
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 40
shall use AWG18-2 type control wire.
4. Safety:
a. The condensing unit shall include protection devices including a high pressure switch at
4.15 MPa (601psi), over current protection for the inverter and for the PCB, and over heat
protection for the inverter and the compressor.
5. Energy Savings:
a. The system shall be equipped with power demand limiting control which prevents
excessive energy consumption during peak operating conditions and automatically
detects electric current flow and prevents the system from using too much energy.
G. Indoor Air Handling Units:
1. General:
a. Indoor unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volt, 1-phase, 60 hertz as scheduled.
b. Indoor unit controls shall be as provided by the manufacturer to perform the functions
necessary to operate the system. Refer to “Automatic Temperature Control System”
portion of these specifications and the plans for “Sequence of Operation”.
c. Unit control boards shall consist of contacts for control of external heat source (as
applicable). Boards shall have no less than 4 digital inputs capable of customizable
control strategies and no less than 3 digital outputs capable of being used for
customizable control strategies.
2. Ceiling Concealed/Ducted Units:
a. Units shall be factory assembled, wired and run-tested. Unit shall contain all factory
wiring, piping, electronic modulating linear expansion valve, control circuit board and fan
motor. Unit shall have self-diagnostic function, 3-minute time delay mechanism, auto
restart function, emergency operation function, and test run switch. Indoor unit refrigerant
pipes shall be charged with dehydrated air before shipment.
b. Unit cabinet shall be concealed/ducted type with provisions for field installed filtered
outside air intake.
c. Unit shall be equipped with a brushless DC fan motor drive. The ducted medium static
indoor unit shall consist of four fan speeds including: low (Lo), medium (Me), high (Hi),
and high 2 (Hi2).
d. Unit filter shall standard disposable pleated type.
e. Provide filter box with MERV 8 filters.
f. The indoor coil shall be nonferrous construction with smooth plate fins on copper tubing.
Tubing shall have inner grooves and be brazed with phos-copper or silver alloy. Coils
shall be pressure tested at the factory. There shall be an integral condensate drain pan
under the coil and condensate shall be gravity drained from the unit.
g. Both refrigerant lines to the indoor unit shall be insulated in accordance with the
installation manual.
H. Indoor Unit – 1-Way Cassette:
1. General:
a. The unit shall have the ability to be recessed into the ceiling with a ceiling grill and shall
be a 1-way air distribution type.
b. The unit shall be factory assembled, piped, and wired, as well as run tested at the factory.
c. The unit and refrigerant pipes will be charged with dehydrated air (nitrogen gas) prior to
shipment from the factory.
d. The 1-way cassette shall be equipped with an electronic expansion valve.
e. All sizes of 1-Way Cassettes shall be equipped with a built-in condensate pump with 33.5” lift.
f. The unit shall have an automatic swing louver.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 41
g. The 1-way cassette shall be available with optional energy saving motion and radiant
heat sensor for optimized airflow and temperature control.
h. The unit cabinet shall be space saving and have the ability to be recessed into a ceiling.
i. The 1-way panel shall be affixed to the bottom of the unit allowing for 1-way airflow.
j. The 1-way cassette (without panel) shall be no larger than 9-1/4” x 35-7/16” x 27-5/16”
and weigh no more than 57 lbs.
k. An outside air knockout shall exist to for branch ducting supply air.
2. Fan:
a. Unit shall be equipped with a brushless DC fan motor drive.
b. The 1-way cassette shall consist of four fan speeds including: low (Lo), medium (Me),
high (Hi), and high 2 (Hi2).
3. Filter:
a. The standard 1” air filter shall be made of an anti-mold polypropylene that is also a
washable type.
4. Sound:
a. The 1-way cassette sound pressure shall range 27 dB(A) to 31 dB(A) at low speed.
5. Electrical:
a. The unit shall be 208-230V, 1 phase, 60 Hertz.
b. The 1-way cassette shall have an acceptable voltage range of 187-255V.
c. The control circuit between the condensing unit, changeover boxes, and indoor units
shall use AWG18-2 type control wire.
I. Controls Devices:
1. General: The VRF microprocessor central controller & network (CN) infrastructure shall be
capable of supporting remote controllers, centralized controllers, an integrated web based
interface, graphical user workstation, and system integration to Building Management
Systems via BACnet® and LonWorks®.
2. Electrical Characteristics:
a. General: The CN shall operate at 30VDC. Controller power and communications shall be
via a common non-polar communications bus.
b. Wiring:
1) Control wiring shall be installed in a daisy chain configuration from indoor unit to
indoor unit, to the BC controller (main and subs, if applicable) and to the outdoor unit.
Control wiring to remote controllers shall be run from the indoor unit terminal block to
the controller associated with that unit.
2) Control wiring for the smart remote controller shall be from the remote controller to
the first associated indoor unit connection. The space remote controller shall be
assigned an address.
3) Control wiring for the simple and wireless remote controllers shall be from the remote
controller (receiver) to the first associated indoor unit (TB-15) then to the remaining
associated indoor units (TB-15) in a daisy chain configuration.
4) Control wiring for centralized controllers shall be installed in a daisy chain
configuration from outdoor unit to outdoor unit, to the system controllers (centralized
controllers and/or integrated web based interface), to the power supply.
c. Wiring Type:
1) Wiring shall be 2-conductor (16 AWG), twisted, stranded, shielded wire or as
required.
3. Controls Network (CN) consists of remote controllers, centralized controllers, and/or
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 42
integrated web based interface communicating over a high-speed communication bus. The
network shall support operation monitoring, scheduling, occupancy, error email distribution,
personal web browsers, tenant billing, online maintenance support, and integration with
Building Management Systems (BMS) BACnet® interfaces. The below figure illustrates a
sample System Configuration.
a. Backlit Simple MA Remote Controller
1) Shall be capable of controlling up to 16 indoor units (defined as 1 group). The Backlit
Simple MA Remote Controller shall be compact in size, approximately 3” x 5” and
have limited user functionality. The Backlit Simple MA supports temperature display
selection of Fahrenheit or Celsius. The Backlit Simple MA Remote Controller shall
allow the user to change on/off, mode (cool, heat, auto (with heat recovery systems),
dry, setback (with heat recover systems) and fan), temperature setting, and fan
speed setting and airflow direction. The Backlit Simple MA Remote Controller shall
be able to limit the set temperature range from the Backlit Simple MA. The Backlit
Simple MA Remote controller shall be capable of night setback control with upper
and lower set temperature settings. The room temperature shall be sensed at either
the Backlit Simple MA Remote Controller or the Indoor Unit dependent on the indoor
unit dipswitch setting. The Backlit Simple MA Remote Controller shall display a four-
digit error code in the event of system abnormality/error.
2) The Backlit Simple MA Remote Controller shall require no addressing. The Backlit
Simple MA Remote Controller shall connect using two-wire, stranded, non-polar
control wire to TB15 connection terminal on the indoor unit. The Simple MA Remote
Controller shall require cross-over wiring for grouping across indoor units.
b. Backlit Standard Wired Remote Controller (CIW01):
1) The Backlit Standard Wired Remote Controller (CIW01) shall be capable of
controlling up to 16 indoor units (defined as 1 group). The Backlit Standard Wired
Remote Controller shall be approximately 4.75” x 4.75” in size and white in color with
an auto-timeout touch screen LCD display. The Standard Remote Controller shall
support a selection from multiple languages (English, Spanish, French, Dutch and
Italian) for display information. The Standard Wired Remote supports temperature
display selection of Fahrenheit or Celsius. The Standard Wired Remote Controller
shall control the following grouped operations: On/Off, Operation Mode (cool, heat,
auto*, dry, fan and setback* (* 7-Day programmability with 5 events per day)),
temperature set point, fan speed setting, and airflow direction setting. The Standard
2) Wired Remote Controller shall support a programmable schedule of
on/off/temperature over 7 days up to 5 times per day in 5-minute increments. The
Standard Wired Remote Controller shall support an Auto Off timer. The room
temperature shall be sensed at either the Standard Wired Remote Controller or the
Indoor Unit dependent on the indoor unit dipswitch setting.
3) The Standard Wired Remote Controller shall display a four-digit error code in the
event of system abnormality or error. The controller shall display temperature
setpoint in one degree increments with a range of 62-86⁰F (16-30⁰C).
4) On/Off status shall be displayed by green LED lit power button. Error codes will be
displayed in the event of system abnormality/error with a two digit code. Power button
LED shall turn red in the event of an alarm. The following system operating
parameters can be displayed to assist service personnel in troubleshooting: Return
Air Temperature, Discharge Air Temperature, Saturated Liquid Line Temperature,
Gas Line Temperature, Remote Controller Sensor Temperature, System low side
pressure, System high side pressure and Expansion valve position.
5) The Standard Wired Remote Controller shall connect using two-wire, stranded, non-
polar control wire to terminal on the indoor unit.
4. Centralized Controller:
a. Centralized Controller: The Centralized Controller shall be capable of controlling a
maximum of 64 indoor units across multiple outdoor units. The Centralized Controller
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 43
shall be approximately 8-1/2”x10” in size and shall be powered from the external power
supply provided by the manufacturer. The Centralized Controller shall support system
configuration, daily/weekly scheduling, monitoring of operation status, night setback
settings, free contact interlock configuration and malfunction monitoring. The Centralized
Controller shall have five basic operation controls which can be applied to an individual
indoor unit, a group of indoor units (up to 50 indoor units), or all indoor units (collective
batch operation). This basic set of operation controls for the Centralized Controller shall
include on/off, operation mode selection (cool, heat, auto (heat recovery units only), dry,
setback (heat recovery units only) and fan), temperature setting, fan speed setting, and
airflow direction setting. The centralized control it shall be able to enable or disable
operation of local remote controllers. In terms of scheduling, the Centralized Controller
shall allow the user to define both daily and weekly schedules with operations consisting
of ON/OFF, mode selection, temperature setting, air flow (vane) direction, fan speed, and
permit/prohibit of remote controllers.
5. The CN shall be capable of supporting integration with Building Management Systems (BMS).
a. BACnet® Interface: The cooling & heating BACnet® interface, shall be compliant with
BACnet® Protocol (ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2004) and be certified by the (BTL) BACnet®
Testing Laboratories. The BACnet® interface shall support BACnet Broadcast
Management (BBMD). The BACnet® interface shall support a maximum of 50 indoor
units. Operation and monitoring points include, but are not limited to, on/off, operation
mode, fan speed, prohibit remote controller, filter sign reset, alarm state, error code, and
error address.
b. The interface wiring shall consist of a non-polar two-wire connection to the H-LINK
terminals at any point in the communication bus. The Interface for use in BACnet is wall
or panel mounted and is used as a translator between the BACnet Building Management
System (BMS) and the VRF HLINK-II communication bus to maintain the optimal
operation of the connected indoor unit(s).
c. The Interface for use in BACnet must be used in conjunction with the CIW01, CIS01
(Standard Remote Controller), the CCM01 & CCL01 (Central Controllers) to control the
same indoor unit groups. Manual addressing via DIP and rotary switch is required of each
indoor unit.
d. The Interface for use in BACnet shall be equipped with one RJ-45 Ethernet port to
support interconnection with a network PC via the Internet or Local Area Network (LAN).
The Ethernet connection shall be capable of transmission on 10Base-T and/or 100Base-
TX connection at 100 Mbps.
e. The interface for use in BACnet shall be installed with a UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply).
f. The Interface for use in BACnet shall be capable of supporting Change of Value (COV)
notification for all available objects.
g. Installation and Mounting: The Interface for use in BACnet shall be mounted on the wall
or in an enclosure. The interface shall require a power supply over a range of 100VAC
through 240VAC.
h. Display Features:
1) The Interface for use in BACnet shall be approximately 9.5” x 6.0” x 2.7” in size.
2) LED display provides the interface’s operational status (Power, H-LINK, LAN) and
alarm.
3) The Interface for use in BACnet shall be capable of displaying indoor unit objects on
the BACnet building management system.
4) The Interface for use in BACnet shall provide the BACnet building management
system the capability to command the setpoint temperature in 1.0⁰C increments over
a range of 16⁰C - 30⁰C.
5) Display of temperature setpoint information shall be degrees Celsius.
6) The Interface for use in BACnet shall provide the BACnet building management
system the capability to display the room temperature in 1.0°C increments with a
range -62°C - 127°C.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 44
7) Display of room temperature information shall be degrees Celsius.
8) Error codes generated by the indoor units and outdoor units shall be displayed on the
BACnet building management system in the event of system abnormality/error with a
two digit error code as specified by York.
i. Basic Operation:
1) The Interface for use in BACnet will provide up to 16 objects that can be
monitored/controlled via the BACnet building management system (see the
Communication Control Specification P5414818)
2) Capable of controlling and monitoring up to 64 VRF Systems, 160 Indoor units per
HLINK-II port (1 HLINK-II port standard).
3) The Building Management System shall control and monitor the following indoor unit
operations:
a) Unit Enable Mode
b) System mode
c) Zone Temperature Setpoint
d) Supply Fan Speed
e) Remote Control Lockout
f) Filter Status Reset
g) Supply Fan Status
h) System Status
i) Zone Temperature
j) Remote Zone Temperature
k) Supply Fan Status
l) Filter Status
m) Expansion Valve Position
n) Liquid Pipe Temperature
o) Gas Pipe Temperature
p) Return Air Temperature
q) Discharge Air Temperature
r) Coil Differential Temperature
s) Requested Compressor Speed
t) Unit Alarm Status
u) Alarm Code
4) The Building Management System shall monitor the following outdoor unit
operations:
a) System Mode
b) System Status
c) Heat Exchanger State
d) Inverter State
e) Fan Controller State
f) Inverter Hours
g) Compressor Hours
h) Inverter Compressor Frequency
i) Total Frequency
j) Fan Output
k) Expansion Valve Position
l) Discharge Pressure
m) Suction Pressure
n) Outdoor Air Temperature
o) Inverter Compressor Primary Current
p) Inverter Compressor Secondary Current
q) Compressor 2 Current
r) Inverter Compressor Top Temperature
s) Compressor 2 Top Temperature
t) Protection Code
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 45
u) Defrost Status
v) Emergency Run Status
w) Alarm Code
x) Inverter Status
y) Fan Status
j. Remote Configuration (Wi-Fi) - The VRF Smart Gateway allows for configuration of
zones prior to integration into the BMS front end. Any alternates incapable of this
function shall include a central touch screen controller for such configuration.
6. Energy Consumption Monitoring Accessory:
a. Device shall require the contractor to provide a pulse meter for each outdoor unit that
provide signal via a wire to the outdoor unit. For every 1 KWh used the device will send a
pulse.
b. The outdoor unit takes this information and sends it via the control wiring back to the
central controller.
c. Factory software as part of the central control system will tabulate the data based on
individual indoor unit energy consumption.
d. The pulse metering device shall be provided for each outdoor unit that is compatible by
the ATC contractor.
e. The pulse meter provided by the ATC contractor shall be in the voltage range of 208-480
VAC.
f. The pulse meter shall provide 1 pulse per KWh.
g. The bandwidth shall be greater than or equal to 50 milliseconds.
h. Normally open contact relay or opto-isolator
2.14 DUCTLESS SPLIT AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
A. Furnish and install ductless split system air conditioner as shown and scheduled on the drawings
and as detailed herein. The systems shall consist of a compact wall mounted packaged
evaporator section and matching air cooled outdoor unit.
B. Indoor Units:
1. Indoor, direct-expansion, ceiling-suspended fan coil. Fan coil shall be shipped complete with
cooling coil, fan, fan motor, piping connectors, electrical controls, and mounting brackets.
2. Units shall be rated per ARI Standard 210/240. Units shall be certified by UL and CSA.
3. Cabinet shall be zinc-coated bonderized steel finished with a baked enamel paint. Inlet grilles
shall be attractively styled, high-impact polystyrene. Matching mounting bracket shall be provided.
4. Fans shall be centrifugal blower type with air intake in the bottom rear of the unit and
discharge in the front. Automatic motor-driven vertical air sweep shall be provided.
5. Coils shall be copper tube with aluminum fins and galvanized steel tube sheets. Fins will be
bonded to the tubes by mechanical expansion. A drip pan under the coil shall have a drain
connection for attachment of piping to remove condensate.
6. Motors shall be permanently lubricated with inherent overload protection. Fan motor shall be
3-speed.
7. Controls shall regulate space temperature and determine optimum fan speed. The
temperature control range shall be from 64°F to 84°F. The unit shall have the following
functions as a minimum:
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 46
a. An automatic restart after power failure at the same operating conditions as at failure.
b. Remote wireless controller to provide cooling set points and day/night setback modes.
c. Filter status indication after 250 hours of indoor fan operation.
d. Automatic air sweep control to provide on or off activation of air sweep louvers.
e. Cooling mode to provide modulating fan speed based on difference between temperature
setpoint and space temperature.
f. Fan only operation to provide room air circulation when no cooling is required.
g. Fan speed control shall be user-selectable: high, medium, low, or automatic operation
during all operating modes.
8. Filters: Unit shall have filter track with factory-supplied cleanable filters.
9. Electrical Requirements: Unit shall operate on the power as specified on the equipment schedule.
10. Provide the following accessories:
a. Remote controller shall provide 7-day programmable scheduling. Remote controller shall
also provide 3-speed fan switchover capability, air sweep auto changeover, and allow for
multiple cooling set points.
b. Integral condensate pump shall be provided where continuously pitched gravity drain
pipe is not possible.
c. Provide a high level water detector in the drip pan wired to de-energize the cooling and
provide alarm. Provide auxiliary alarm contacts for alarm through the BAS.
C. Outdoor Units:
1. Factory assembled, single piece, air-cooled outdoor unit. Contained within the unit enclosure
shall be all factory wiring, piping, controls, compressor, full charge of R-410a refrigerant.
2. Quality Assurance:
a. Unit construction shall comply with ANSI/ASHRAE 15, latest revision, and with the NEC.
b. Units shall be constructed in accordance with UL standards.
c. Units shall be listed in the CEC directory.
d. Unit cabinet shall be capable of withstanding Federal Test Standard No. 141 (Method
6061) 500-Hour Salt Spray Test.
e. Air-cooled condenser coils shall be leak-tested at 660 psig air pressure with the coil
submerged in water.
3. Unit Cabinet:
a. Unit cabinet shall be constructed of galvanized-steel, bonderized and coated with a
baked-enamel finish.
b. Unit access panels shall be removable with minimal screws and shall provide full access
to the compressor, fan, and control components.
c. Outdoor compartment shall be isolated and have an acoustic lining to assure quiet
operation.
4. Fans:
a. Outdoor fans shall be direct-drive propeller type, and shall discharge air horizontally. Fan
shall blow air through the outdoor coil.
b. Outdoor fan motors shall be totally enclosed, single-phase motors with class B insulation
and permanently lubricated sleeve bearings. Motor shall be protected by internal thermal
overload protection.
c. Shaft shall have inherent corrosion resistance.
d. Fan blades shall be corrosion resistant and shall be statically and dynamically balanced.
e. Outdoor fan openings shall be equipped with PVC coated protection grille over fan and
coil.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 47
5. Compressor:
a. Compressor shall be inverter driven (variable speed) scroll type.
b. Compressor shall be equipped with oil system, operating oil charge, and motor. Internal
overloads shall protect the compressor from over-temperature and overcurrent. Scroll
compressors shall also have high discharge gas temperature protection if required.
c. Motor shall be inverter duty, NEMA rated class F, suitable for operation in a refrigerant
atmosphere.
d. Compressor assembly shall be installed on vibration isolators.
e. Compressors shall be single-phase as specified on the contract drawings.
6. Coil shall be constructed of aluminum fins mechanically bonded to internally enhanced,
seamless copper tubes which are cleaned, dehydrated, and sealed.
7. Refrigerant circuit components shall include brass external liquid line service valve with
service gage port connections, suction line service valve with service gage connection port,
service gage port connections on compressor suction and discharge lines with Schrader-type
fittings with brass caps, accumulator, pressure relief, and a full charge of refrigerant.
8. Operating controls and safeties shall be factory selected, assembled, and tested. The
minimum control functions shall include the following:
a. Controls:
1) Automatic restart on power failure.
2) A time delay control sequence provided through the fan coil board, thermostat, or
controller.
3) Liquid line low-pressure switches.
4) Automatic outdoor-fan motor protection.
5) Start capacitor and relay (single-phase units without scroll compressors.
b. Safeties:
1) System diagnostics provided through some indoor controls.
2) Compressor motor current and temperature overload protection.
3) Outdoor fan failure protection.
9. Electrical Requirements:
a. All units shall operate on the power as specified on the equipment schedule.
b. Unit electrical power shall be a single point connection.
c. Unit control voltage to the indoor-fan coil shall be 24 v.
d. All power and control wiring must be installed per NEC and all local building codes.
e. High and low voltage terminal block connections.
10. Provide the following accessories:
a. Low-Ambient Kit: Control shall regulate fan-motor cycles in response to saturated
condensing pressure of the unit. The control shall be capable of maintaining a
condensing temperature of 100°F ± 10°F with outdoor temperatures to -20°F. Installation
of kit shall not require changing the outdoor-fan motor.
b. Winter start control shall permit start-up cooling operation under low-load conditions and
at low-ambient temperatures by bypassing the low-pressure switch for a 3 minute delay
period.
c. Crankcase heater shall prevent refrigerant migration to the compressor during the off
cycle.
d. Wind Baffle Kit: Kit shall be a fabricated sheet metal wrapper used to provide improved
unit operation during high winds, and low-ambient temperatures.
D. Warranty: The units shall have a manufacturer’s warranty for a period of one (1) year from date
of installation. The compressor shall have a warranty of five (5) years from date of installation.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 48
E. Additional Options:
1. Provide the optional refrigerant piping kits. Kits to include sufficient lengths of pre-insulated
refrigerant liquid piping and pre-insulated refrigerant gas piping to connect indoor units to
outdoor units. Pipe sizes shall be as directed by the manufacturer for the final installation pipe
routing. Piping shall be completely compatible with indoor and outdoor units. All pipe
insulation installed outside shall be weatherproofed. Refer to “Insulation Section” for details.
Installation to be in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. If optional refrigerant
piping kit is not used, refrigerant piping shall be Type L hard drawn ACR tubing, conforming
with ASTM B280. Fittings shall be wrought copper, conforming with ANSI B16.22. Joints shall
be made with silver solder, minimum 45% silver brazing alloy, cadmium free, conforming to
ASTM B32. Insulation to be closed-cell polyolefin foam insulation with a heat transfer
coefficient not to exceed 0.24 BTU/hr./ft2/°F per inch of thickness. Density to be 1.5 lbs./cu.ft.
2. Insulation to have pre-slit and pre-glued longitudinal seams with Mylar release liner.
Thickness shall be 1/2 inch.
2.15 ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS
A. Provide electric unit heaters of horizontal discharge type, by Q Mark, Markel, Brasch or Trane, as
shown on Drawings and on Schedules.
B. Casings shall be heavy gauge steel with mounting bracket.
C. Horizontal heaters shall have adjustable steel discharge louvers.
D. Electric motor shall have integral overload protection and shall be equipped with combination fan
guard/motor support resiliently mounted to absorb motor vibration.
E. Fan blades shall be aluminum directly connected to fan motor and shall be dynamically balanced.
F. Fan switching shall be available to operate fan independently for summer circulation.
G. Automatic reset thermal overheat protection shall be wired for instantaneous pilot operation of
built-n control contractor holding coil.
2.16 VIBRATION ISOLATION (NON-SEISMIC)
A. General:
1. Manufacturer responsibility:
a. Manufacturer of vibration equipment shall have the following responsibilities:
b. Guarantee specified isolation system deflections.
c. Provide installation instructions, Drawings and field supervision to insure proper
installation and performance of systems.
2. Quality Assurance:
a. All vibration isolators shall have calibration markings or some method to determine
adjustment, the actual deflection under the imposed load after installation and adjustment.
b. All isolators shall operate within the linear position of their load vs. deflection curves.
Load vs. deflection curves shall be furnished by the manufacturer and must be linear over
a deflection range of not less than 50% above the design deflection.
c. The theoretical vertical natural frequency for each support point, based upon load per
isolator and isolator stiffness, shall not differ from the design objectives for the equipment
as a whole by more than +10%.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 49
d. Substitution of internally isolated equipment in lieu of the isolation specified in this section
is acceptable provided all conditions of this section are met. The equipment
manufacturer shall provide a letter of guarantee stating that the specified noise and
vibration levels will be obtained or the cost of converting to the specified external
vibration isolation shall be borne by the equipment manufacturer.
e. The following Specifications describe spring hangers with 30 degree misalignment
feature. This requirement is mandatory. The Contractor shall replace any hangers
without the 30 degree capability discovered on site at no additional cost to Owner.
B. Products:
1. Description:
a. All vibration isolation devices shall be the product of a single manufacturer. Products of
other manufacturers are acceptable provided their systems strictly comply with intent,
structural design, performance and deflections of the base manufacturer.
b. Acceptable manufacturers of vibration isolation products shall be: Novia Associates,
Mason Industries, Amber Booth Company, Peabody Noise Control, Korfund Dynamics
Corporation, Vibration Mountings and Equipment and Vibration Eliminator Co., provided
they meet the requirements of this specification. Mason Industries model numbers have
been used in this specification to establish quality of components, but are in no way to
limit competitive bidding by other manufacturers.
c. Refer to Table A at the end of this article for application of the various types listed to
appropriate equipment and efficiency level.
2. Vibration Isolation Types:
a. Vibration Isolators:
1) Type A: Spring Isolator.
a) Having a minimum O.D. to O.H. of 0.8:1.
b) Corrosion resistance where exposed to corrosive environment with:
(1) Springs cadmium plated or electro-galvanized.
(2) Hardware cadmium plated.
(3) All other metal parts hot-dip galvanized.
c) Reverse deflection (from loaded to solid height) of 50% of rated deflection.
d) Minimum 1/4" thick neoprene acoustical base pad on underside.
e) Design and installed so that ends of springs remain parallel.
f) Non-resonant with equipment forcing frequencies or support structure natural
frequency.
(1) Mason Ind. Type SLF.
2) Type B: Spring isolator shall be the same as Type A with the following additional
features:
a) Built-in vertical limit stops with minimum 1/4" clearance under normal operation.
b) Tapped holes in top plate for bolting to equipment.
c) Capable of supporting equipment at fixed elevation during equipment installation.
Installed and operating heights shall be identical.
d) Adjustable and removable spring pack with separate neoprene isolation pad.
(1) Mason Ind. Type SLR.
3) Type C: Spring hanger rod isolator:
a) Spring element seated on a steel washer within a neoprene cup incorporating a
rod isolation bushing.
b) Steel retainer box encasing the spring and neoprene cup.
c) When used on ductwork, provide eyebolts for attachment to duct straps.
(1) Mason Ind. Type H5, WHS.
4) Type D: Double deflection neoprene mountings:
a) All metal surfaces shall be neoprene covered and have friction pads top and
bottom.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 50
b) Be capable of .035” deflection at rated load.
c) Steel rails shall be employed to compensate for overhand on units such as small
vent sets, close coupled pumps, etc.
(1) Mason Ind. Type ND or Rails Type DNR.
5) Type E: Elastomer hanger rod isolator:
a) Molded (min. 1-3/4” thick) neoprene element with projecting bushing lining the
rod clearance hole. Static deflection at rated load shall be a minimum of 0.35”.
b) Steel retainer box encasing neoprene mounting capable of supporting equipment
up to four times the rated capacity of the element.
(1) Mason Ind. Type HD.
6) Type F: Combination spring/elastomer hanger rod isolator:
a) Spring and neoprene elements in a steel retainer box with the features as
described for Type A and E isolators.
(1) Mason Ind. Type DNHS.
7) Type G: Pad type elastomer isolator:
a) 0.75” minimum thickness, 50 psi maximum loading, ribbed or waffled design.
b) Minimum 0.1” deflection.
c) 1/16” galvanized steel plate between multiple pad layers.
d) Load distribution plate where attachment to equipment bearing surface is less
than 75% of the pad area (Type “GM”).
(1) Mason Ind. Type Super W Pad.
8) Type H: Pad type elastomer isolator:
a) Laminated canvas duct and neoprene, maximum loading 1,000 psi, minimum
1/2" thick.
b) Load distribution plate where attachment to equipment bearing surface is less
than 75% of the pad area (Type HM).
(1) Mason Ind. Type HL Pad.
(2) Note: When bolting is required, neoprene and duct washers and bushings
shall be provided to prevent short-circuiting.
9) Type I: Thrust restraints:
a) A spring element similar to Type A isolator shall be combined with steel angles,
backup plates, threaded rod, washers and nuts to produce a pair of devices
capable of limiting movement of air handling equipment to 1/4".
b) Restraint shall be easily converted to the field from a compression type to tension
type.
c) Units shall be factory pre-compressed.
d) Thrust restraints shall be installed on all cabinet fan heads, axial or centrifugal
fans whose thrust exceeds 10% of unit weight.
(1) Mason Ind. Type WB.
10) Type J: Steel rails:
a) Steel members of sufficient strength to prevent equipment flexure during
operation.
b) Height saving brackets as required to reduce operating height and cradle the
unit.
(1) Mason Ind. Type ICS.
(2) Mason Ind. Type WB.
11) Type K: Pipe anchors:
a) All directional acoustical pipe anchor consisting of a telescopic arrangement of
two sizes of steel tubing separated by a minimum 1/2" thickness of Type H pad.
b) Vertical restraints shall be provided by a similar material arranged to prevent
vertical travel in either direction.
c) Allowable loads on isolation materials shall not exceed 500 psi and the direction
shall be balanced for each resistance in any direction.
(1) Mason Ind. Type ADA.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 51
12) Type L: Isolated clevis hanger:
a) Combination clevis or rod roller hanger and a Type C (LC), E (LE), or F (LF)
isolation hanger.
b) System shall be pre-compressed to allow for rod insertion and standard leveling.
(1) Mason Ind. Type CIH.
13) Type M: Flashable restrained isolator:
a) Shall have all features of Type B isolator.
b) Shall have waterproof spring covers for adjustment or removal of springs.
c) Unit shall have a structural top plate for welding or bolting of supplementary
support steel.
d) Isolator shall accept 2” roofing insulation and be flashed directly into the
waterproofing membrane.
e) To be complete with wood nailer and flashing.
(1) Mason Ind. Type REVRS.
3. Equipment Bases:
a. General:
1) All curbs and roof rails are to be bolted or welded to the building steel or concrete
deck to attain 110 mph wind resistance requirement.
2) Type B-1: Integral structural steel base:
a) Reinforced as required to prevent base flexure at equipment startup and
misalignment of driver and driven units. Centrifugal fan bases shall be complete
with motor slide rails and drilled for driver and driven units.
b) Height saving brackets as required to reduce operating height.
(1) Mason Ind. Type M or WF.
3) Type B-2: Concrete inertia base: Rectangular structural concrete forms for floating
foundations. Base for split case pumps shall be large enough to support elbows.
The base depth shall be a minimum of 1/10 the longest span, but not less than 6” or
greater than 14”. Forms shall include concrete reinforcement consisting of 1/2" bars
or angles welded in place on 6” centers both ways. A layer 1-1/2” above the bottom
and an additional top layer of reinforcing for all bases exceeding 120” in one
direction. Isolators shall be set into pocket housings which are an integral part of the
base construction and set at the proper height to maintain 1” clearance below the
base. Base shall be furnished with templates and anchor bolt sleeves.
a) Mason Ind. Type K, BMK or KIPWF.
4) Type B-4: Flashable roof rail system:
a) Rooftop fans, condensing units, air handlers, etc. shall be mounted on
continuous support piers that combine equipment support and isolation into one
assembly.
b) Rails shall incorporate Type A isolators which are adjustable, removable and
interchangeable after equipment has been installed.
c) The system shall maintain the same installed and operation height with or without
the equipment load.
d) The system shall have full plywood nailers on all four sides, designed to accept
membrane waterproofing and shall be dry galvanized or plastic coated.
e) Unit to be supplied with flashing.
(1) Curbs shall be Mason Type R-7000 having a minimum 3” rated static deflection.
5) Type B-5: Roof rail base:
a) Rails shall be constructed from structural steel angles as required to prevent
flexure and misalignment under load.
b) Each rail shall be the full length of the supported equipment and be welded to a
series of Type B isolators. Bolt-on angle cross ties at the ends and center shall
form one rigid platform.
c) Roof Rail Type TRSLR.
b. Flexible Connectors:
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 52
1) All connectors shall be installed on the equipment side of shutoff valves, horizontal
and parallel to shafts whenever possible.
2) Type FC-1: Elastomer connector:
a) Manufactured of nylon tire cord and EPDM, both molded and cured in hydraulic
presses.
b) Straight connectors to have two (2) spheres reinforced with a molded-in, external
ductile iron ring between the spheres.
c) Rated at 250 psi/170 F, dropping in a straight line to 170 psi/250 F for sizes
1-1/2” to 12”.
d) Sizes 10” and 12” at 200 psi and greater operating pressure to employ control
cables with neoprene end fittings isolated from anchor plates by means of 1/2"
bridge bearing neoprene bushings.
e) Connectors shall be pre-extended per manufacturer’s recommendations to
prevent elongation under pressure.
f) Minimum safety factor 3.6:1 at maximum pressure ratings shall be certified by
test reports. Submittals shall also include two (2) test reports by independent
consultants showing minimum reduction of 20 Db in vibration accelerations and
10 Db in sound pressure levels at typical blade passage frequencies.
g) Connectors bolted to Victaulic type couplings or gate, butterfly or check valves to
have a minimum 5/8” flange spacer installed between the connector and the
coupling flange.
h) Neoprene in lieu of EPDM is not acceptable.
(1) Mason Ind. Super-Flex Types: MFTNC or NFTFU.
C. Execution:
1. General: Isolation systems must be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s
written instructions. Vibration isolators shall not cause any change of position of equipment
resulting in stress on equipment connections.
2. Equipment Installation:
a. Equipment shall be isolated as per Table A at the end of this section.
b. Place floor mounted equipment on 4” high concrete housekeeping pads properly doweled
or expansion shielded to the deck. Mount vibration isolators and/or bases on
housekeeping pads. Concrete work specified in Division 3.
c. Additional requirements:
1) The minimum operating clearance under inertia bases shall be 2”.
2) The minimum operating clearance under other bases shall be 1”.
3) All bases shall be placed in position and supported temporarily by blocks or shims, as
appropriate, prior to the installation of the machine, isolators.
4) The isolators shall be installed without raising the equipment.
5) After the entire installation is complete and under full operational load, the isolators
shall be adjusted so that the load is transferred from the blocks to the isolators are
properly adjusted, shall be barely free and shall be removed. Remove all debris from
beneath the equipment and verify that there is no short circuit of the isolation. The
equipment shall be free in all directions.
6) Install equipment with flexibility in wiring.
3. Piping and Ductwork Isolation:
a. All piping and ductwork is included in this section.
b. Installation:
1) Isolate piping and ductwork outside shafts as follows:
a) All in mechanical rooms.
b) All exposed on roof.
c) All within 50 feet or 100 pipe diameters (whichever is greater) from connected
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 53
rotating or reciprocating equipment and pressure reducing stations.
d) Control air piping from compressor discharge to receiver.
2) The isolators shall be installed with the hanger box attached to, or hung as closely as
possible to the structure.
3) The isolators shall be suspended from substantial structural members sized for 0.08”
deflection at center of span, not from slab diaphragm, unless specifically permitted.
4) Hanger rods shall not circuit the hanger box.
5) Horizontal suspended pipe 1-1/4” to 2” and all steam piping shall be suspended by
Type E isolators with a minimum 3/8” deflection. Water pipe larger than 2” shall be
supported by Type F isolators with a minimum 1” deflection or same deflection as
equipment for the first 3 locations nearest equipment, whichever is greater. Note:
Type L hangers may be submitted.
6) Ductwork shall be supported by Type C (WHS) hangers.
7) Horizontal floor and roof supported pipe shall be the same as C.3.b.5 except use
isolators Type D and Type A, respectively.
8) Vertical risers pipe supports under 2” diameter shall utilize Type H isolation.
9) Vertical riser guides, if required shall avoid direct contact of piping with the building.
10) Pipe anchors or guides where required, shall utilize Type K isolators.
11) Riser sway supports, where required, shall utilize two (2) neoprene elements (Type G
or H) to accommodate tension and compression forces.
12) Pipe extension and alignment connectors: Provide Type FC-2 connectors at riser
takeoffs, cooling and heating coils and elsewhere as required to accommodate
thermal expansion and misalignment.
13) Install Type FC-1 flexible connectors at all connections of pipe to equipment such as
pumps, chillers, cooling towers and as shown on the Drawings.
14) Install FC-2 type connectors at all locations which exceed temperature limitations of FC-1.
15) For control air piping, provide two (2) flexible connectors Type FC-2 90 to each other
in the compressor discharge piping to the receiver. When the receiver is remote from
the compressor, isolate the piping between the compressor and receiver with Type C
isolators having 3/8” deflection. The receiver shall be isolated with Type D isolators
having 3/8” deflection.
4. Inspection: Upon completion of installation of all vibration isolation devices, the local
representative shall inspect the complete project and certify in writing to the Contractor that
all systems are installed properly, or require connection. The Contractor shall submit a report
to the Architect, including the representative’s report, certifying correctness of the installation
or detailing corrective work to be done.
TABLE A
Non-Critical Critical
Equipment HP MTNG ISOL DEFL BASE ISOL DEFL BASE
AC Units (Dx)
Flr
Clg
D
A
.30
.75
--
--
A
F
.75
.75
J*
--
Condensate
Pumps
Flr
D
.30
J
D
.30
J
Fan Coil
Units
Flr
Clg
D
-
.30
-
--
--
A
C
.75
.75
--
--
Unit/Cab.
Heater
Clg
- - --
--
E
.30
--
DEFL GUIDE
RPM DEFL
<400 3.5”
*Use on vertically arranged units.
**Substitute Type B isolator for roof installation.
***Substitute Type B-2 base for Class 2&3 fan.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 54
<600 2.5”
>600 1.5”
2.17 AIRFLOW/TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT DEVICES
A. Provide airflow/temperature measurement devices where indicated on the plans. Fan inlet
measurement devices shall not be substituted for duct or plenum measurement devices indicated
on the plans.
B. The measurement device shall consist of one or more sensor probe assemblies and a single,
remotely mounted, microprocessor-based transmitter. Each sensor probe assembly shall contain
one or more independently wired sensor housings. The airflow and temperature readings calculated
for each sensor housing shall be equally weighted and averaged by the transmitter prior to output.
Pitot tubes and arrays are not acceptable. Vortex shedding flow meters are not acceptable.
C. All Sensor Probe Assemblies:
1. Each sensor housing shall be manufactured of a UL listed engineered thermoplastic.
2. Each sensor housing shall utilize two hermetically sealed, bead-in-glass thermistor probes to
determine airflow rate and ambient temperature. Devices that use “chip” or diode case type
thermistors are unacceptable. Devices that do not have two (2) thermistors in each sensor
housing are not acceptable.
3. Each sensor housing shall be calibrated at a minimum of 16 airflow rates and have an
accuracy of +2% of reading over the entire operating airflow range. Each sensor housing
shall be calibrated to standards that are traceable to the National Institute of Standards and
Technology (NIST).
a. Devices whose accuracy is the combined accuracy of the transmitter and sensor probes
must demonstrate that the total accuracy meets the performance requirements of this
specification throughout the measurement range.
4. The operating temperature range for the sensor probe assembly shall be -20°F to 160°F.
The operating humidity range for the sensor probe assembly shall be 0-99% RH (non-
condensing).
5. Each temperature sensor shall be calibrated at a minimum of three (3) temperatures and
have an accuracy of +0.15°F over the entire operating temperature range. Each temperature
sensor shall be calibrated to standards that are traceable to the National Institute of
Standards and Technology (NIST).
6. Each sensor probe assembly shall have an integral UL listed, plenum rated cable and
terminal plug for connection to the remotely mounted transmitter. All terminal plug
interconnecting pins shall be gold plated.
7. Each sensor assembly shall not require matching to the transmitter in the field.
Notes:
1. “ISOL” and “BASE” column indicates letter type as appears in the specs.
2. “MTNG” refers to method of support of equipment from the structure.
3. “SEE GUIDE” indicates isolator deflection selection to be taken from
RPM/DEFLECTION Guide at bottom of table.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 55
8. A single manufacturer shall provide both the airflow/temperature measuring probe(s) and
transmitter at a given measurement location.
D. Duct and Plenum Sensor Probe Assemblies:
1. Sensor housings shall be mounted in an extruded, gold anodized, 6063 aluminum tube probe
assembly. Thermistor probes shall be mounted in sensor housings using a waterproof
marine grade epoxy resin. All wires within the aluminum tube shall be Kynar coated.
2. The number of sensor housing provided for each location shall be as follows:
Area (sq. ft.) Sensors
< 2 4
2 to < 4 6
4 to < 8 8
8 to < 16 12
> = 16 16
3. Probe assembly mounting brackets shall be constructed of 304 stainless steel. Probe
assemblies shall be mounted using one of the following options:
a. Insertion mounted through the side or top of the duct.
b. Internally mounted inside the duct or plenum.
c. Standoff mounted inside the plenum.
4. The operating airflow range shall be 0 to 5,000 FPM unless otherwise indicated on the plans.
E. Fan Inlet Sensor Probe Assemblies:
1. Sensor housing shall be mounted on 304 stainless steel blocks.
2. Mounting rods shall be field adjustable to fit the fan inlet and constructed of nickel plated
steel.
3. Mounting feet shall be constructed of 304 stainless steel.
4. The operating airflow range shall be 0 to 10,000 FPM unless otherwise indicated on the plans.
F. Transmitters:
1. The transmitter shall have a 16 character alpha-numeric display capable of displaying airflow,
temperature, system status, configuration settings and diagnostics. Configuration settings
and diagnostics shall be accessed through a pushbutton interface on the main circuit board.
Airflow shall be field configurable to be displayed as a velocity or a volumetric rate.
2. The transmitter shall be capable of independently monitoring and averaging up to 16
individual airflow and temperature readings. The transmitter shall be capable of displaying
the airflow and temperature readings of individual sensors on the LCD display.
3. The transmitter shall have a power switch and operate on 24 VAC (isolation not required).
The transmitter shall use a switching power supply fused and protected from transients and
power surges.
4. All interconnecting pins, headers and connections on the main circuit board, option cards and
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 56
cable receptacles shall be gold plated.
5. The operating temperature range for the transmitter shall be -20°F to 120°F. The transmitter
shall be protected from weather and water.
6. The transmitter shall be capable of communicating with the host controls using one of the
following interface options:
a. Linear analog output signal: Final selectable, fuse protected and isolated, 0–10VDC and
4-20mA (4 wire).
b. RS-485: Field selectable BAC-net-MS/TP, ModBus-RTU and Johnson Controls N2 Bus.
c. 10 Base-T Ethernet: Field selectable BACnet Ethernet, BACnet-IP, ModBus-TCP and
TCP/IP.
d. LonWorks Free Topology.
7. The transmitter shall have an infrared interface capable of downloading individual sensor
airflow and temperature data or uploading transmitter configuration data to a hand held PDA
(Palm or Microsoft Pocket PC operating systems).
G. The measuring device shall be UL listed as an entire assembly.
H. The manufacturer’s authorized representative shall review and approve placement and operating
airflow rates for each measurement location indicated on the plans. A written report shall be
submitted to the consulting mechanical engineer if any measurement locations do not meet the
manufacturer’s placement requirements.
I. Airflow measurement devices shall be as manufactured by Ebtron, Model GTx116-P and
GTx116-F or approved equal.
2.18 CEILING EXHAUST FAN (ULTRA-QUIET)
A. Fan shall be Broan, Panasonic, Greenheck, Fantech, or equal.
B. Fan shall have corrosion resistant galvanized steel housing with four-point mounting capability. It
shall be ducted to a roof or wall cap using 6” round ductwork.
C. Blower assembly shall be removable, have a centrifugal-type blower wheel and a permanently
lubricated motor designed for continuous operation.
D. Non-metallic damper/duct connector shall be included.
E. Air delivery shall be no less than scheduled CFM and sound level no greater than 0.7 Sones. All
air and sound ratings shall be certified by HVI.
F. Fan shall be ENERGY STAR® qualified and have an energy efficient permanent split capacitor motor.
G. Fan shall be U.L. Listed for use over bathtubs and showers when connected to a GFCI protected
branch circuit (ceiling mount only).
H. Fan shall be U.L. Listed for use in insulated ceilings (Type I.C.).
2.19 ROOFTOP SUPPORT SYSTEMS
A. General:
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 57
1. Section Includes: The work covered by this specification consists of furnishing all labor,
equipment, materials and accessories, and performing all operations required for the correct
installation of rooftop pipe supports, walkways, crossovers, stairs and platforms.
2. References:
a. ASTM A653 G90 SS Gr. 33 - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by
the Hot Dipped Process.
b. ASTM B633 - Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel.
c. ASTM A 123/A 123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on
Iron and Steel Products.
d. ASTM A 153/A 153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip Galvanized) on
Iron and Steel Hardware.
e. ASTM D 1929 - Standard Test Method for Determining Ignition Temperature of Plastics.
f. MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports -- Materials, Design and Manufacture;
Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry.
g. MSS SP-69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports -- Selection and Application; Manufacturers
Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry.
3. Quality Assurance:
a. Pipe supports, walkway and crossover systems shall be manufactured under a quality
control program assuring quality product delivered to the jobsite. Support systems that
are damaged shall not be installed.
b. Manufacturer Qualifications: must be a company specializing in manufacturing roof top
pipe support systems and rooftop walkway systems with a minimum of 20 years of
documented experience.
c. Workmanship: All supports to be installed by a qualified contractor and installed in
accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
d. All work shall comply with all applicable federal, state, and local codes and laws having
jurisdiction.
e. All work shall conform to accepted industry and trade standards for pipe Support
installations.
4. Submittals:
a. Submit under provisions of section 01300.
b. Drawings: Will show dimensions of product.
c. Layout: Will show overview of layout, spacing and details of installation.
d. Alternate to specified product must be submitted 7 days before bid date for approval.
5. Warranty: Warranty: PHP Systems/Design guarantees to repair or replace at our option any
products we find in our sole discretion to be structurally defective in material or workmanship
for a period of five (5) years from date of delivery to purchaser. Such warranty specifically
excludes repair of non-structural rust damage to products. Our obligation with respect to
material found by us to be defective shall be limited to replacement or repair and in no event
shall we be liable for transportation to or from our factory, installation, adjustments or any
expenses or damages arising in connection with such material. PHP Systems/Design i.e.
Portable Pipe Hangers accepts no liability for products not designed and laid out by PHP or
for any altercation or modification to the system not authorized by PHP. No warranty
expressed or implied shall cover defects caused by outside contractors/installers of the PHP
System.
B. Products:
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with these specifications, support systems shall be
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 58
PHP Systems design as supplied by PHP Systems/Design 5534 Harvey Wilson DR,
Houston, TX 77020 Tel: 713-672-5088 email: info@phpsd.com website:
www.phpsd.com.
2. Materials:
a. Bases are high density polypropylene with UV inhibitors and anti-oxidants conforming to
following:
1) Color: Black color as molded.
2) Moisture Content: negligible.
3) Shrinking/Swelling due to moisture: Negligible.
4) Resistant to oil, gasoline, antifreeze, battery acid and sulfuric acid.
5) Do not use bases that are made of pressed rubber, steel, stainless steel, recycled
tires or carbonated plastics
a) Base Dimensions:
(1) 18-inches wide by 18-inches long by 3-inches tall (18x18).
(2) 12-inches wide by 12-inches long by 3-inches tall (12x12).
(3) 10-inches wide by 16-inches long by 3-inches tall (PP10).
(4) 8-inches wide by 10-inches long by 2.5-inches tall (SS8).
(5) 18-inches round by 3-inches tall (18 round).
b. Steel frame: Steel, 12ga 1-5/8” or 1-7/8” strut galvanized per ASTM A123 or 14ga 13/16”
strut galvanized per ASTM A653 for PP10 and SS8.
c. Hanger Type:
1) Conforms to MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69.
2) Material: Carbon steel (Standard); 304 SS available.
3) Clevis Hanger: Used for all insulated and uninsulated lines.
4) Roller Hanger: Used for uninsulated lines.
5) Finish: HDG.
d. Walkway Surface:
1) Interlocking Planking:
a) Thickness: 18 gauge.
b) Section width: 12 inches (305 mm) standard, or 6 inches (152 mm).
c) Planking height: 2.5 inches.
d) Flange options: MM/MF.
e) Surface: Slip resistant.
f) Finish: HDG.
2) Bar Grating: Type WB-4:
a) 1" x 3/16" Bearing Bars, 1-3/16" on Center, Regular Cross Bars 4".
b) Width: 24 inches (standard), or 36 inches – as required.
c) Surface: Serrated.
d) Finish: HDG.
e. Handrail: 12 gauge, 1-5/8” strut, galvanized.
f. Attaching hardware: HDG threaded rod, nuts and attaching hardware per ASTM A153.
3. Type of Rooftop Supports:
a. PSE-Custom/PS - model is designed to support hydronic, refrigerant, steam or gas pipes
at most any specified height above the roof surface. The frame supports the pipe from
above using hanger.
1) Support Spacing subject to local codes and authorities but will not exceed 10 feet.
2) Bracing required when using base with swivel, when pipe exceeds 24 inches above
roof, or when thermal expansion of pipe is great.
b. PSL - model is designed to support multiple hydronic, refrigerant, steam or gas pipes at
most any specified height above the roof surface. The frame supports the pipe from
below using the cross bar.
1) Support Spacing subject to local codes and authorities but will not exceed 10 feet.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 59
2) Bracing required when using base with swivel, when pipe exceeds 24 inches above
roof, or when thermal expansion of pipe is great.
c. PP10 w/Roller - is designed to support gas pipe up to 3 ½” OD with a standard height of
up to 12” above the roof surface.
d. PP10 w/Strut - is designed to support (electrical) conduit lines, condensation drain lines
or small refrigeration lines up to 3 ½” OD with a standard height of up to 12” above the
roof surface.
e. SS8 w/ Roller - model is designed to support gas pipe up to 2 ½” OD and not exceeding
10” in height above the roof surface.
f. SS8 w/ Strut - model is designed to support electrical conduit, condensate drain lines or small
refrigeration lines up to 2 ½” OD and not exceeding 10” in height above the roof surface.
g. PHP Duct Support (Goal Post/Enclosed) - model is designed to support any size of
square or round duct at most any specified height above the roof surface.
1) Support Spacing subject to local codes and authorities but will not exceed 10 feet.
2) Bracing required when using base with swivel, when duct exceeds 24 inches above roof.
h. Elevated Walkway/Crossover/Stair/Access Platform – used to enhance safety and flow of
rooftop traffic. All walkway systems are installed directly on the roof without penetrating
the roof surface. Systems allow technicians and service professionals to gain safe and
convenient access to varying roof levels and equipment otherwise encumbered by
rooftop pipes, ducts, and other types of rooftop components.
i. PHP Equipment Platform - is designed to support various types of rooftop equipment.
j. Seismic and High wind applications are available for all categories listed above
C. Execution:
1. Installation:
a. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations.
b. If gravel top roof, gravel must be removed around and under support base.
c. Always consult roofing manufacturer for roof membrane compression capacities. If
necessary, a compatible sheet of roofing material (rubber pad) may be installed under
rooftop support to disperse concentrated loads and add further membrane protection.
d. Pipe spacing subject to local authorities and codes but will not exceed 10 feet.
2.20 ULTRA HIGH EFFICIENCY OUTDOOR ENERGY RECOVERY UNIT (ERU)
A. Products:
1. Manufacturers:
a. The following manufacturers are approved for use provided they are PHIUS certified and
met all requirements herewithin.
1) Ventacity VS 3000 RTE or Swegon Gold Rx
2) Tempeff, Price Mechanical or BKM may be considered if they can provide testing
documentation in accordance with PHIUS by HVI, AHRI, or PHI.
2. General Description:
a. Configuration: Unit shall be an energy recovery unit equipped with supply and return
fans for roof mounting on a curb. Unit shall be a horizontal configuration for ductwork.
Unit shall be equipped with CLASS A louvers and internal electric heating coil with
modulating SCR control. Unit shall be provide performance data that is in accordance
with the scheduled data. The discharge air temperature control method will consist of a
continuously variable bypass
3. Unit Construction:
a. Fabricate unit with galvanized steel panels secured with mechanical fasteners. All
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 60
access doors shall be sealed with permanently applied bulb-type gasket.
b. Panels and access doors shall be constructed as a 2-inch nominal thick; with injected
polyurethane foam insulation. R value shall be 6.5 per inch of wall thickness. The outer
panel shall be constructed of painted 24 gauge G90 galvanized steel. The inner liner
shall be constructed of 24 gauge G90 galvanized steel. Module to module assembly shall
be accomplished with self-adhering foam gaskets. Manufacturer shall supply test data
demonstrating less than L/240 deflection for an unsupported under 30” W.C pressure.
Units that cannot demonstrate this deflection are unacceptable.
c. Galvanized heat exchanger frames and dampers rods, axles and blades.
d. Access Doors shall be flush mounted to cabinetry, with minimum of two hinged access
door, latch and full size handle assembly. Control section shall include locking latch.
e. Inlet louvers shall be provided on the outside air / exhaust discharge openings.
4. Supply and Exhaust Fans:
a. Provide direct-drive backward inclined curved fans with ECM motors.
5. Bearings and Drives:
a. Bearings: Basic load rating computed in accordance with AFBMA - ANSI Standards, L-50 life
at 500,000 hours, heavy duty pillow block type, self-aligning, grease-lubricated ball bearings.
b. Shafts shall be solid, hot rolled steel, ground and polished, keyed to shaft, and
protectively coated with lubricating oil. Hollow shafts are not acceptable.
6. Electrical:
a. The air handler(s) shall bear an ETL listing label for the entire assembly. Units with only
components bearing third party safety listing are unacceptable.
b. All controls shall be located on the side of the unit for ease of servicing. Alternate
manufacturers who supply units with controls on roof must supply a permanently installed
ladder to access controls, and appropriate safety rails on roof of unit, meeting all
applicable OSHA standards.
c. Wiring Termination: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities,
sizes, and materials indicated. All wires shall be number tagged and cross-referenced to
the wiring diagram for ease of troubleshooting.
d. Controls shall be mounted must include Self Diagnostics with fault error and PLC error
code. On board fault detection and diagnostics that senses and alerts when the damper
is not operating correctly.
e. Damper hand-off-auto (HOA) switches will be factory installed.
f. Unit shall be provided with a 208v/3ph/60hz single point power connection.
7. Unit shall be provided with factory microprocessor controls with interface communication
protocol for the owner to get alarming. Cooling and heating operation will be wired to control
these components, also.
8. Particulate Filters:
a. Filter section with filter racks and guides with hinged and latching access doors on either,
or both sides, for side loading and removal of filters
b. Filter media shall be UL 900 listed, Class I or Class II.
c. Angle arrangement with 2” MERV 10 and 4” MERV 13 panel filters for the intake and
minimum of MERV 8 in the return air streams. All kitchen return air will be provided with a
cleanable MERV 3 filter at the wall register.
9. Energy Recovery:
a. Performance Criteria: Unit shall meet the PHIUS minimum requirements. The unit shall
be 90% efficient (sensible +-5%) at equal airflow in winter and up to 80% sensible in
summer. It shall also provide up to 70% latent recovery. Unit shall include a thermally
controlled summer bypass. The unit fan power shall be limited to 0.76 watt/ cfm or less.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 61
Unit shall accomplish this recovery without a defrost cycle that will reduce the
effectiveness of the device. Devices employing defrost cycles that bypass the energy
recovery device, or reduce the effectiveness are not acceptable. Energy recovery device
shall not require frost protection in applications down to -40 degrees.
b. Heat exchanger cores shall be polymer counter flow.
10. External Shut-off Dampers:
a. External Damper Leakage: Leakage rate shall be less than two tenths of one percent
leakage at 2 inches static pressure differential. Leakage rate tested in accordance with
AMCA Standard 500.
b. External Shut-off dampers shall be located on outer face of heat exchangers to retain
energy when unit is shut down. Dampers located on warm (inner) side of heat
exchangers are not acceptable.
11. Electric Heating Coil:
a. Unit shall be provided with SCR controlled open-coil electric heater. Staged heaters are
not acceptable.
b. Electric heater elements shall be high grade nickel-chrome alloy, insulated by floating
ceramic bushings.
c. Electric heater shall be equipped with fail-safe, automatic reset and manual reset disc-
type thermal cut-outs, magnetic contactors, 24VAC transformer, and airflow proving
sensor.
d. Electric heater shall be factory-wired to main ventilator disconnect preserving single-point wiring.
12. Controls:
a. The unit shall be equipped with an onboard microprocessor control with BACnet capability.
b. There shall be spare contacts which will be field wired by the ATC contractor to a VRF
accessory DIDO board that will be located in an main electrical room on the lowest level
of the building (TBD).
c. Alarming shall include fan failure, filter monitoring and low discharge temperature alarm.
All alarms will be displayed on the VRF central control panel touch screen.
B. Execution:
1. Installation:
a. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s Installation & Maintenance instructions.
b. Startup shall be provided by a certified factory technician.
2. Environmental Requirements:
a. Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean,
filters are in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation.
2.21 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS (DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL)
A. General:
1. Provide complete direct digital (DDC) system of automatic temperature control system as
manufactured by:
a. CTI-Distech
b. Connecticut Controls
c. CCI- Control Consultants Inc
d. Trane
e. JCI-Facilities Explorer
2. The new DDC system must be 100% open protocol and Niagara based with BACnet
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 62
capability.
3. All systems shall be provided directly by the manufacturers listed above. DEALERS OR
REPRESENTATIVES ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE. The manufacturer must provide full support
throughout the guarantee period.
4. Provide the services of the control manufacturer’s representative to be on site during the
entire time that the startup, testing and balancing procedures, detailed in PART 3 of this
specification, takes place. The representative shall be part of manufacturer’s service
organization and shall be skilled in the adjustment and calibration of all control devices as
well as being capable of modifying and checking system software.
5. Certify maintenance of local office within 100-mile radius of job site, staffed with factory-
trained engineers capable of providing instructions to Owner’s personnel and performing
routing and emergency maintenance on ALL system components. Upon the Architect’s
request, submit a list of personnel staffing field office and their professional disciplines.
6. Provide DDC system supplier’s warranty of performance of the entire system, including
pneumatic components, as required by Contract Documents. Performance and component
requirements are established by control sequences and diagrams on the Contract Drawings
and by this paragraph.
7. DDC components shall be capable of proportional-integral-derivative (PID) control.
Pneumatic components shall be fully proportioning unless otherwise noted.
8. DDC systems shall perform all sequences of operation which may be listed on control
Drawings or attached to this Specification. Refer to the section VRF BAS control section .
The controls supplier shall provide ALL devices necessary to completely perform sequences
of operation whether such devices are explicitly shown on the Contract Drawings specified, or
not shown or specified.
B. Submittals:
1. This paragraph supplements provisions of “Submittals” paragraph of this Section 230000.
2. Materials and equipment for which Shop Drawings and Product Data submitted are required
shall include, but shall not be limited to:
a. Each control system.
b. Tie into equipment manufacturer’s DDC controller/microprocessor and communication
integration to a DIDO board provided with the VRF control system.
c. Control components including:
1) Temperature, humidity, current and static pressure sensors.
2) Direct digital field control panels.
3) Pressure reducing valves.
4) Electric wiring.
5) Transducers.
6) Solenoids and other electrical components.
d. Software.
e. Point list.
f. Detailed network diagram showing DDCFP’s and communication links.
3. Submit the following for approval:
a. Control Drawings with detailed piping and wiring diagrams, including bills of materials and
written description of operation for each system.
b. Panel faceplate layouts showing gauges, lights, indicators and switches with instrument
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 63
ranges and nameplate inspections for local and central panels.
c. Valve and damper schedules showing sizes, configurations, capacities, pressure drops
and locations of equipment.
d. Data sheets for control system components.
e. Complete software information including names of software packages provided, control
sequences performed including flow chart logic diagrams, complete information on user
programmability (commands, language details, programming sequences, etc.) and
complete description of operating system.
f. Tabulated results of calculations for compressed air consumption.
g. Floor plans showing sizes and locations of compressed air mains and risers and
locations and capacities of pressure reducing valves.
h. Detailed Drawings of CRT with keyboard and printer.
4. Provide initial design and as-built construction Drawings to Owner’s operating personnel.
5. Provide narrative descriptions of sequences of operations. Descriptions shall not merely
duplicate specified sequences of operations.
C. Provide services of control supplier’s Field Engineer to supervise work specified in other
paragraphs of this section.
1. Provision of auxiliary contacts on magnetic starters with buttons and switches in required
configurations.
2. Installation of automatic dampers.
3. Provision of blank-off plates (safing) required to install dampers smaller than duct size.
4. Assembly of multiple section dampers with interconnecting linkages and extension of shafts
through duct for external mounting of damper motors.
5. Provision of sheetmetal baffle plates to eliminate stratification and provide air volumes
specified. Locate by experimentation; affix permanently when stratification is eliminated.
6. Provision of access doors or other approved means of access through ducts for service to
control equipment.
D. Guarantee control system free from defects in material and workmanship and guarantee
performance of systems as required by Contract Documents for one (1) year of normal use and
service beginning on date Owner begins to receive beneficial use of system.
E. Programmed Maintenance, Startup and Software Updates:
1. Submit manufacturer’s agreement to provide necessary programmed maintenance and to
maintain systems for one (1) year from date of Final Acceptance within Contract sum.
2. Programmed maintenance agreement shall identify maintenance work to be performed and
shall quote cost of work for two (2) years subsequent to guarantee period.
3. Start system and perform necessary testing and debugging. Perform acceptance test in
presence of Owner’s Representative and Engineer. Provide 15 days’ notice before
acceptance test. Notice shall certify that the system is complete and operates as required by
the Contract Documents. When the system performance is deemed satisfactory, system
parts will be accepted for beneficial use and warranty shall begin. Note additional
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 64
requirements in PART 3 of this specification.
4. Update software free of charge during warranty as manufacturer’s software is improved.
5. Provide 40 hours of on-site instruction in operating the DDC system. Furnish three (3) copies
of operating manuals for the complete system.
F. Integration with Third-Party Manufacturer’s Equipment:
1. General: The Facility Management System (FMS) shall be capable of inter-operating with
multiple building systems supplied by different manufacturers. The FMS shall be able to
receive, react to and in some cases, return information from multiple building systems.
a. Point inputs and outputs from the third-party controllers shall have real-time inter-
operability with FMS software features such as: Control Software, Energy Management,
Custom Process Programming, Alarm Management, Historical Data and Trend Analysis,
Totalization and Dial-up and Local Area Network Communications, as mentioned earlier
in this specification.
2. Networking/Communications:
a. The FMS shall support any combination of third-party controllers (if more than one (1)
third-party manufacturer is being integrated) on a single network.
b. A minimum of 100 third-party controllers shall be supported on a single network.
c. Integration shall be by RS-232 or RS-485 technologies.
3. Diagnostic/Verification: The installer/operator shall have the ability to verify and diagnose
communication messages and point information between third-party controllers and the
Facility Management System.
4. Point Inputs and Outputs: The FMS shall be able to monitor and control the following third-
party controller point inputs and outputs.
G. DDC System Architecture:
1. The specified DDC system shall consist of an information sharing network of stand-alone
direct digital control panels to monitor and control the specified mechanical equipment per the
control sequence and input/output summary. Information sharing network shall be defined as
the ability of each Direct Digital Control Field Panel (DDCFP) to exchange information on the
network with other DDCFP without the need of front end devices such as a central computer,
gateways or any other network managing device. The stand-alone capability shall be defined
as the ability of each DDC panel to independently monitor and control connected mechanical
equipment through its own internal microprocessor.
2. The DDCFP network shall operate on a true token pass, peer to peer communication basis.
The internal microprocessor which resides within each DDCFP shall provide for full exchange
of system information between each DDCFP on the network communication trunk. Systems
which rely on a central processor, or similar device, to exchange system information shall not
be acceptable. Failure of any one of the network DDCFP panels shall not affect the
operation of other DDC panels residing on the same network. All DDC panel/point failures
shall be annunciated at specified printers or terminals.
3. It is recognized that some systems may use stand-alone terminal unit controllers on the network,
between the DDCFP and the equipment to be controlled. Such controllers may control an
individual VAV box, heat pump or fan coil. It is not the intent of this specification that terminal
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 65
unit controllers communicate directly with each other without going through the DDCFP.
4. Network transmission shall occur at minimum rate of 9600 band. This includes transmission
on data bus from DDCFP to DDCFP and from DDCRP to host computer. Full
communications shall be sustained as long as there are at least two operational DDCFP’s on
any segment of the bus. All transmissions shall incorporate data integrity and validity check
routings by virtue of either Manchester encoding, double transmission or parity bit
techniques. The DDC system shall clearly state the DDC submittal that data integrity and
validity routines are incorporated in the system and the technique used and incorporated.
H. Direct Digital Control Field Panels (DDCFP):
1. General: Standalone DDC panels shall be microprocessor based, multi-tasking, multi-user,
real-time digital control processors. Each standalone DDC panel shall consist of modular
hardware with plug-in enclosed processors, communication controllers, power supplies and
input/output modules. A sufficient number of controllers shall be supplied to fully meet the
requirements of this Specification and the attached point list.
2. Memory: Each DDC panel shall have sufficient memory (minimum 4 megabytes) to support
its own operating system and databases including:
a. Control processes.
b. Energy management applications.
c. Alarm management.
d. Historical/Trend data for all points.
e. Maintenance support applications.
f. Custom processes.
g. Operator I/O.
h. Dial-up communications.
i. Manual override monitoring.
3. Point Types: Each DDC panel shall support the following types of point inputs and outputs:
a. Digital inputs for status/alarm contacts.
b. Digital outputs for on/off equipment control.
c. Analog inputs for temperature, pressure, humidity, flow and position measurements.
d. Analog outputs for valve and damper position control and capacity control of primary equipment.
e. Pulse inputs for pulsed contact monitoring.
4. Expandability: The system shall be modular in nature, and shall permit easy expansion
through the addition of software applications, workstation hardware, field controllers, sensors
and actuators.
5. Serial Communication Ports: Standalone DDC panels shall provide at least two (2) RS-232C
serial data communication ports for simultaneous operation of multiple operator I/O devices
such as industry standard printer, laptop workstations, PC workstations and panel-mounted
or portable DDC panel operator’s terminals. Standalone DDC panels shall allow temporary
use of portable devices without interrupting the normal operation of permanently connected
modems, printers or network terminals.
6. Hardware Override Switches: As indicated in the point schedule, the operator shall have the
ability to manually override automatic or centrally executed commands at the DDC panel via
local, point discrete, onboard hand/off/auto operator override switches for binary control
points and gradual switches for analog control type points. These override switches shall be
operable whether the panel is powered or not.
7. Hardware Override Monitoring: DDC panels shall monitor the status or position of all
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 66
overrides, and include this information in logs and summaries to inform the operator that
automatic control has been inhibited. DDC panels shall also collect override activity
information for daily and monthly reports.
8. Local Status Indicator Lamps: The DDC panel shall provide local status indication for each
binary input and output for constant, up-to-date verification of all point conditions without the
need for an operator I/O device.
9. Integrated On-Line Diagnostics: Each DDC panel shall continuously perform self-
diagnostics, communication diagnosis and diagnosis of subsidiary equipment. The DDC
panel shall provide both local and remote annunciation of any detected component failures,
or repeated failure to establish communication. Indication of the diagnostic results shall be
provided at each DDC panel, and shall not require the connection of an operator I/O device.
10. Surge and Transient Protection: Isolation shall be provided at all network terminations, as
well as all field point terminations to suppress induced voltage transients consistent with IEEE
Standard 587-1980.
11. Powerfail Restart: In the event of the loss of normal power, there shall be an orderly
shutdown of all standalone DDC panels to prevent the loss of database or operating system
software. Non-Volatile memory shall be incorporated for all critical controller configuration
data, and battery backup shall be provided to support the real time clock and all volatile
memory for a minimum of 72 hours.
a. Upon restoration of normal power, the DDC panel shall automatically resume full
operation without manual intervention.
b. Should DDC panel memory be lost for any reason, the panel will automatically receive a
download via the local area network, phone lines or connected computer. In addition, the
user shall have the capability of reloading the DDC panel via the local area network, via
the local RS-232C port, or via telephone line dial-in.
I. System Software Features:
1. General:
a. All necessary software to form a complete operating system as described in this
specification shall be provided.
b. The software programs specified in this Section shall be provided as an integral part of
the DDC panel and shall not be dependent upon any higher level computer for execution.
2. Control Software Description:
a. Pre-Tested Control Algorithms: The DDC panels shall have the ability to perform the
following pre-tested control algorithms:
1) Two position control.
2) Proportional control.
3) Proportional plus integral control.
4) Proportional, integral plus derivative control.
5) Automatic control loop tuning.
b. Equipment Cycling Protection: Control software shall include a provision for limiting the
number of times each piece of equipment may be cycled within any one-hour period.
c. Heavy Equipment Delays: The system shall provide protection against excessive
demand situations during startup period by automatically introducing time delays between
successive start commands to heavy electrical loads.
d. Powerfail Motor Restart: Upon the resumption of normal power, the DDC panel shall
analyze the status of all controlled equipment, compare it with normal occupancy
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 67
scheduling and turn equipment on or off as necessary to resume normal operation.
3. Energy Management Applications:
a. DDC panels shall have the ability to perform any or all of the following energy
management routines:
1) Time of day scheduling.
2) Calendar based scheduling.
3) Holiday scheduling.
4) Temporary schedule overrides.
5) Optimal start.
6) Optimal stop.
7) Night setback control.
8) Enthalpy switch over (economizer).
9) Peak demand limiting.
10) Temperature compensated load rolling.
11) Fan speed/CFM control.
12) Heating/cooling interlock.
13) Cold deck reset.
14) Hot deck reset.
15) Hot water reset.
16) Chilled water reset.
17) Condenser water reset.
18) Chiller sequencing.
b. All programs shall be executed automatically without the need for operator intervention,
and shall be flexible enough to allow operator customization. Programs shall be applied
to building equipment as described in the “Execution” portion of this specification.
4. Custom Process Programming Capability: DDC panels shall be able to execute custom, job-
specific processes defined by the operator, to automatically perform calculations and special
control routines.
a. Process Inputs and Variables: It shall be possible to use any of the following in a custom
process:
1) Any system-measured point data or status.
2) Any calculated data.
3) Any results from other processes.
4) User-defined constants.
5) Arithmetic functions (square roots, exponential, etc.).
6) Boolean logic operators (and, or exclusive or, etc.).
7) On-delay/Off-delay/One-shot timers.
b. Process Triggers: Custom processes may be triggered based on any combination of the
following:
1) Time interval.
2) Time of day.
3) Date.
4) Other processes.
5) Time programming.
6) Events (e.g., point alarms).
c. Dynamic Data Access: A single process shall be able to incorporate measured or
calculated data from any and all other DDC panels on the local area network.
1) In addition, a single process shall be able to issue commands to points in any and all
other DDC panels on the local area network.
d. Advisory/Message Generation: Processes shall be able to generate operator messages
and advisories to operate I/O devices. A process shall be able to directly send a
message to specified device, buffer the information in a follow-up file or cause the
execution of a dial-up connection to a remote device such as a printer.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 68
e. Custom Process Documentation: The custom control programming feature shall be self-
documenting. All interrelationships defined by this feature shall be documented via
graphical flowcharts and English language descriptions.
5. Alarm Management: Alarm management shall be provided to monitor, buffer and direct alarm
reports to operator devices and memory files. Each DDC panel shall perform distributed,
independent alarm analysis and filtering to minimize operator interruptions due to non-critical
alarms, minimize network traffic and prevent alarms from being lost. At no time shall the DDC
panel’s ability to report alarms be affected by either operator activity at a PC workstation or local
I/O device, or communications with other panels on the network.
a. Point Change Report Description: All alarm or point change reports shall include the
point’s English language description and the time and date of occurrence.
b. Prioritization: The user shall be able to define the specific system reaction for each point.
Alarms shall be prioritized to minimize nuisance reporting and to speed operator
response to critical alarms. A minimum of three (3) priority levels shall be provided.
Each DDC panel shall automatically inhibit the reporting of selected alarms during system
shutdown and startup. Users shall have the ability to manually inhibit alarm reporting for
each point.
1) The user shall also be able to define under which conditions point changes need to
be acknowledged by an operator, and/or sent to follow-up files for retrieval and
analysis at a later date.
c. Report Routing: Alarm reports, messages and files will be directed to a user-defined list
of operator devices or PC disk files for archiving alarm information. Alarms shall also be
automatically directed to a default device in the event a primary device is found to be off-
line.
d. Alarm Messages: In addition to the point’s descriptor and the time and date, the user
shall be able to print, display or store a 65-character alarm message to more fully
describe the alarm condition or direct operator response.
e. Auto-Dial Alarm Management: In dial-up applications, only critical alarms shall initiate a
call to a remote operator device. In all other cases, call activity shall be minimized by
time-stamping and saving reports until an operator scheduled time, a manual request or
until the buffer space is full. The alarm buffer must store a minimum of 50 alarms.
f. Transaction Logging: Operator commands and system events shall be automatically
logged to disk in Personal Computer Industry Standard Database Format. Operator
commands initiated from direct connected workstations, dial-up workstations and local
DDC panel network terminal devices shall all be logged to this transaction file. This data
shall be available at the Operator workstation. A utility shall be provided to allow the user
to search the transaction file using standard database query techniques, including
searching by dates, operator name, data point name, etc. In addition, this transaction file
shall be accessible with standard third-party database and spreadsheet packages.
6. Historical Data and Trend Analysis: A variety of historical data collection utilities shall be
provided to automatically sample, store and display system data in all of the following ways:
a. Continuous Point Histories: Standalone DDC panels shall store point history files for all
analog and binary inputs and outputs.
1) The point history routine shall continuously and automatically sample the value of all
analog inputs at half hour intervals. Samples for all points shall be stored for the past
24 hours to allow the user to immediately analyze equipment performance and all
problem-related events for the past day. Point history files for binary input or output
points and analog output points shall include a continuous record of the last ten (10)
status changes or commands for each point.
b. Control Loop Performance Trends: Standalone DDC panels shall also provide high resolution
sampling capability in one-second increments for verification of control loop performance.
c. Extended Sample Period Trends: Measured and calculated analog and binary data shall
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 69
also be assignable to user-definable trends for the purpose of collecting operator-
specified performance data over extended periods of time. Sample intervals of 1 minute
to 2 hours shall be provided. Each standalone DDC panel shall have a dedicated buffer
for trend data and shall be capable of storing a minimum of 5000 data samples.
d. Data Storage and Archiving: Trend data shall be stored at the Standalone DDC panels
and uploaded to hard disk storage when archival is desired. Uploads shall occur based
upon either user-defined interval, manual command or when the trend buffers become
full. All trend data shall be available in disk file format compatible with third-party
personal computer applications.
7. Runtime Totalization: Standalone DDC panels shall automatically accumulate and store
runtime hours for binary input and output points as specified in the “EXECUTION” portion of
this specification.
a. The totalization routine shall have a sampling resolution of one minute or less.
b. The user shall have the ability to de-frame a warning limit for runtime totalization.
Unique, user-specified messages shall be generated when the limit is reached.
8. Analog/Pulse Totalization: Standalone DDC panels shall automatically sample, calculate and
store consumption totals on a daily, weekly or monthly basis for user-selected analog and
binary pulse input-type points.
a. Totalization shall provide calculation and storage of accumulations of up to 99,999.9 units
(e.g. KWH, gallons, KBTU, tons, etc.).
b. The totalization routine shall have a sampling resolution of one minute or less.
c. The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit. Unique, user-specified
messages shall be generated when the limit is reached.
9. Event Totalization: Standalone DDC panels shall have the ability to count events such as the
number of times a pump or fan system is cycled on and off. Event totalization shall be
performed on a daily, weekly, or monthly basis.
a. The event totalization feature shall be able to store the records associated with a
minimum of 9,999,999 events before reset.
b. The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit. Unique, user-specified
messages shall be generated when the limit is reached.
10. Provide at least DDCFPs to serve the project (to serve the following systems).
No. of DDCPFs System
11. Locate DDCFPs, slave panels (if provided), relay panels, pneumatic central panels and other
temperature control system enclosures in the following areas only:
a. Furnish and install a Hays compatible 38900 baud auto answer modem onto the network.
Having dialed into the network through the modem, an operator shall have full access,
providing they have a proper password, to the entire network of DDCFPs as if physically
connected to the actual network. In no way shall it be necessary for the operator to have
access to each individual DDCFP for information about the entire facility.
J. DDC Sensors and Point Hardware:
1. General: When providing instruments with 4-20 mA transmitters and conversation to voltage
is required at DDCFP, Controls Contractor shall provide 250 ohm, 1% precision resistor.
2. Alarms:
a. Alarm contacts shall be wired normally closed (NC). When in alarm condition or if wire to
contact is open (wire cut), DDCFP shall sense condition and generate alarm.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 70
b. Common alarms shall be wired relay coils in parallel with common alarm pilot light or to
alarm terminals on manufacturer’s control panel. Contractors shall input to DDCFP. Line
printer shall indicate normal or alarm.
c. Chiller alarm shall be taken from common alarm contacts in each chiller control panel
wired in series back to DDCFP as one alarm point.
d. Provide two (2) binary inputs from each smoke control FOP (Firefighter’s Override Panel)
switch as specified under smoke control sequences.
1) Do not generate interlock sequences and printouts without Architect’s approval. All
control wiring between the FOP and DDC panel, motor starters and controlled
devices shall be performed under the work of this section. This includes wiring the
indicator lights at the FOP.
3. DDC Sensors and Point Hardware:
a. Temperature Sensors and Transmitters: Temperature sensors shall conform to the following
minimum standards. Additional Specifications are given for specific applications below:
1) Sensors shall be accurate to + 0.25 F over minimum operating ranges.
2) Sensor, associated circuitry and readout shall have minimum resolution of 0.25 F.
3) Sensors shall withstand ambient temperatures of -30 F to 240 F, but performance
requirements must be met only for ranges selected.
b. Provide thermistor (1,000 ohms or greater) or resistance temperature detector (RTD)
sensors, for the following applications and minimum operating ranges.
1) Wall-Mount Space Sensor - 40F to 100 F.
2) Duct-Mount Sensor - 20F to 120 F.
c. Provide thermistor (1,000 ohms or greater) or resistance temperature detector (RTD)
sensors, for outside air temperature measurement. Sensor shall be mounted in 24-hour
shaded location, in proximity to a light colored wall, in an aspirated enclosure insulated
with foam from thermal transfer with adjacent structure. Sensors shall operate within the
following minimum range: 20F to 120 F.
d. Provide averaging resistance temperature detector (RTD) sensor only, for mixed air
measurement. Sensor shall provide a minimum duct coverage 1 foot per 2 feet of duct.
Sensor shall not come in direct contact with water or steam coils. The sensor shall
operate within the following range: 30F to 120 F.
e. Provide wall-mount sensor for range specified above. When sensors are mounted in
private office spaces they shall have a local setpoint adjustment. The setpoint range can
be limited from DDCFP or front-end computer. All other sensors shall have blank
faceplates. Sensors shall have features as listed:
1) Private Offices:
a) Setpoint adjustment.
b) Thermometer.
c) After hours occupancy switch (momentary).
d) Plug in jack for terminal communication.
2) Common Areas:
a) Setpoint adjustment.
b) Thermometer.
c) After hours occupancy switch (momentary).
d) Plug in jack for terminal communication.
4. Flow Instruments: All flow sensors shall conform to the following minimum standards:
a. Sensor shall be accurate to a total of 3% over operating range.
b. Sensor shall be sized for 110% of maximum flow and shall not exceed manufacturer’s
flow rating.
c. Sensor, associated circuitry and readout shall have a minimum range ability of 10:1 over
assigned flow range.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 71
d. Sensor and transmitter shall operate over a temperature range of 32 F to 210 F.
e. Maximum pressure drop across sensor shall be equipped to 10 feet same size pipe (inlet
or outlet pipe size).
f. Sensor shall be factory calibrated for the specific application according to the range, fluid
density and specific gravity.
5. Humidity Sensors and Transmitters: Humidity accuracy shall be +5% at full scale. Sensors
shall contain integral single point calibration potentiometer.
a. Sensors shall be mounted so field calibration may be done without disrupting sensor
operation. For duct-mounted transmitters, coordinate access panel for field
calibration/verification with sheetmetal.
b. Sensors shall be Vaisala, General Eastern, or Staefa.
c. Provide hand-held field calibration tool to Owner compatible with calibration plug on
humidity sensors. Calibration tool shall have the ability to read the humidity of our air
stream, humidity of mounted sensors and differential between calibration tool and
mounted sensor.
d. Sensors shall be manufactured by Vaisala.
6. Pressure Sensors and Transmitters: All pressure instruments shall conform to the following
minimum standards. Additional Specifications are given for specific applications below:
a. Sensors shall be accurate to +1.0% of full scale (RSS method) and temperature effect
shall contribute error less than +0.04% over the full scale of measurement.
b. Sensors shall withstand up to 150% of rated pressure, but performance requirements
must be met only for ranges specified.
c. Sensor shall have separate zero and span adjustments for future field calibration.
Adjustments shall be non-interactive. Sensors shall be manufactured and calibrated
through system acceptance by Setra of Modus.
d. Provide sensors of the specific type for the following applications and operating ranges.
System pressure Gap pressure 125% system
Duct static Differential 0-5” WC
Building static Differential -0.215 to + 0.25 w.g
System differ.
supply/return diffuser
Differential 125% max. rated
pump head
Filter Differential 0-2” WC
7. Flow Switches (Air): Provide differential static pressure switch with integral manual reset for
low and high duct static pressure alarming.
a. Field selectable setpoint (0.1” – 7” WC) adjustments and differential (0.1” – 0.5” WC).
b. Switch shall withstand maximum differential pressure of 10” WC.
c. Static pressure switch for fan filter airflow status shall conform to requirements above.
Static pressure shall be calibrated for accurate status indication at minimum VAV
discharge to eliminate nuisance alarms.
8. Equipment Status:
a. Airflow for constant volume systems shall be by differential pressure switch or current
transducers. Only current transducers shall be used with VAV systems. If more than one
(1) fan, pump or other piece of equipment is started from one start/stop, each shall have
differential pressure switch or current transducers for status.
9. Current Transducers/Sensors:
a. For equipment status, provide analog current sensing sensors. Sensors shall be capable
of producing analog current value proportional to equipment current load.
b. Sensors shall be accurate to +3% of full scale current.
c. Sensors shall be capable of reading 125% of full load amps (FLA).
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 72
K. DDC Software:
1. Provide software required for efficient system operation as required by Contract Documents.
Software shall be modular in design for flexibility in expansion and revision.
2. Software shall comprise computer-vendor supplied and supported, real-time disk operating
system. Real-time operating system executive shall control timing and sequencing of
programs. Submit copies of software on disk to Owner and maintain backup copy.
L. Electrical Wiring: Wiring and connections required for temperature control system shall be done
under this Section, unless shown otherwise on Drawings, and shall comply with applicable
requirements of “Electrical” Section. Necessary normal and emergency power wiring to control
devices shall be done under this Section. Electrical circuits for all controls shall be dedicated only
to the control system. Wiring from and including the dedicated circuit breakers to the point of use
shall be a part of this work of this Section.
M. Control Dampers:
1. Automatic dampers shall be multiple opposed blade.
2. Provide one (1) linkage connection point per 8 sq. ft. of section area, equally spaced.
Sections shall not exceed 48”x48”. Provide shaft linkage (1/2” minimum bar with crank-down
arms attached to blades) on dampers 12 feet or wider. Dampers 12 feet or wider and more
than 4 feet high shall have one (1) line shaft for each 4 feet of height, or any increment
thereof; where size of damper requires more than one (1) line shaft, spacing shall be equal.
3. Damper frames shall be 13 gauge galvanized sheetmetal with flanges for duct-mounting.
4. Damper blades shall not exceed 6” wide. Blades shall be fabricated from two (2) sheets of
corrugated 22 gauge galvanized sheet steel, spot welded. Blades shall be suitable for high
velocity performance.
5. Damper bearings shall be nylon. Bushings that turn in bearings shall be oil-impregnated,
sintered metal.
6. Provide replaceable butyl rubber seals along top, bottom and sides of frame and long each
blade edge. Seals shall effect tight closing and low leakage. 48” x 48” damper section shall
have leakage less than 7 cfm/sf at 4” W.G. differential pressure. Submit leakage and flow
characteristic charts for approval. Dampers shall be Honeywell, Inc. #D643 Series, Johnson
Controls, Inc. #D-1300; Ruskin CD-50, or Vent Products 5900.
N. Electronic Damper Actuator:
1. Electronic direct-coupled actuation shall be provided unless the damper shaft is not
accessible in which case the appropriate linkage shall be provided.
2. The actuator shall be direct-coupled over the shaft, enabling it to be mounted directly to the
damper shaft without the need for connecting linkage. The fastening clamp assembly shall
be of a “V” bolt design with associated “V” shaped toothed cradle attaching to the shaft for
maximum strength and eliminating slippage. Spring return actuators shall have “V” clamp
assembly of sufficient size to be directly mounted to an integral jack shaft of up to 1.05 inches
when the damper is constructed in this manner. Single bolt or set screw type fasteners are
not acceptable.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 73
3. The actuator shall have electronic overload or digital rotation sensing circuitry to prevent
damage to the actuator throughout the entire rotation of the actuator. Mechanical end
switches or magnetic clutch to deactivate the actuator at the end of the rotation are not
acceptable.
4. For power failure/safety applications, an internal mechanical spring return mechanism shall
be built into the actuator housing. Non-mechanical forms of fail safe operation are not
acceptable.
5. All spring return actuators shall be capable of both, clockwise or counterclockwise spring
return operation by simply changing the mounting orientation.
6. Proportional actuators shall accept a 0 to 10 VDC or 0 to 20 mA control input and provide a 2
to 10 VDC or 40 to 20mA operating range. An actuator capable of accepting a pulse width
modulating control signal and providing full proportional operation of the damper shall be
acceptable. All actuators shall provide a 2 to 10 VDC position feedback signal.
7. All 24 VAC/VDC actuators shall operate on Class 2 wiring and shall not require more than 10
VA for AC or more than 8 watts for DC applications. Actuators operating on a 120 VAC
power shall not require more than 10 VA. Actuators operating on 230 VAC power shall not
require more than 11 VA.
8. All non-spring return actuators shall have an external manual gear release to allow manual
positioning of the damper when the actuator is not powered. Spring return actuators with
more than 60 in. lb. torque capacity shall have a manual crank for this purpose.
9. All modulating actuators shall have an external, built-in switch to allow the reversing of
direction of rotation.
10. Actuators shall be provided with a conduit fitting and a minimum 3 foot electrical cable and
shall be pre-wired to eliminate the necessity of opening the actuator housing to make
electrical connections.
11. Actuators shall be Underwriters Laboratories Standard 873 listed and Canadian Standards
Association Class 4813 02 certified as meeting correct safety requirements and recognized
industry standards.
12. Actuators shall be designed for a minimum of 60,000 full stroke cycles at the actuators rated
torque and shall have a 2-year manufacturer’s warranty, starting from the date of installation.
Manufacturer shall be ISO9001 certified.
13. Actuators shall be by Belimo.
O. Smoke Detection and Dampers in Air Handling Units:
1. Install duct smoke detectors furnished under Division 16 where shown on Drawings. Wire to
fan shutdown. Wiring to fire alarm system shall be part of work of Division 16.
a. Provide normally open smoke dampers in return and supply air ducts to close
automatically upon fan shutdown due to fire or smoke detection or upon manual
shutdown.
P. Low Temperature Thermostat: Provide low temperature thermostats as shown on Drawings.
Thermostat shall register alarm condition and shut down fan when temperature along any one
foot of element length falls below setpoint. Do not provide averaging element. Provide one foot
of element for every square foot of AHU coil face area. Wire to shut down fan as specified in
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 74
control sequences.
1. Thermostats in public and multi-occupancy areas shall have metal cover with tamperproof
screws and satin chrome finish, with concealed adjustment, without thermometer.
2. Thermostats for private areas and single occupancy areas shall have open adjustment for
use with key, exposed dial and accurate red-reading thermometer.
3. Transmitters shall have closed adjustments.
4. Heating/cooling thermostats shall be dead-band.
Q. Point List: Submit complete point list of devices or elements to be controlled or senses by DCC
system. Include sufficient detail to enable Architect to determine that DDC system can perform
control sequence of operations listed on HVAC Drawings. Point count must contain at least:
1. List of every component to be sensed or controlled, keyed to terminology used in HVAC
Control Drawings; that is, Valve V-1, AHU-1, etc.
2. List of hardware associated with each point; that is, solenoids, contactors, transducers, etc.
3. List of analog inputs to be sensed at each point; that is, temperature, relative humidity, etc.
4. Alarms associated with each point.
5. Control functions associated with each point; that is, start/stop, setpoint control, etc.
2.22 VRF BAS CENTRAL CONTROLLER AND PULSE METERING
A. Sensors and Transmitters – General Requirements:
1. Installation, testing, and calibration of all sensors, transmitters, and other input devices shall
be provided to meet the system requirements. Exact OEM equivalents of specified sensors
and transmitters shall be acceptable if clearly identified in submittals.
B. Pulse Metering System for Multi Unit heat recovery VRF systems
1. A pulse meter and required power and control wiring shall be provided on each outdoor unit
or as required per the metering requirements of the VRF manufacturer selected. The VRF
manufacturer shall provide a wiring diagram with the submittal for use by the contractors to
install the metering device.
2. The metering device shall be a 1 pulse per KWh, and bandwidth greater than or equal to 50
milliseconds (msec) for Lennox and 40 to 49 msec for Daikin.
3. The pulse output interval shall be 100 milliseconds or more.
4. Include a normally opened contact relay or opto-isolator.
5. Pulse meters shall be MeasurLogic for Lennox or Square-D PowerLogic series by Schneider
electric or SATEC EM-133 with parameters configuration for the Daikin VRF System.
C. Temperature Sensors
1. General Requirements:
a. Sensors and transmitters shall be provided, as outlined in the input/output summary and
sequence of operations.
b. The temperature sensor shall be of the resistance type, and shall be either two-wire 1000
ohm nickel RTD, or two-wire 1000 ohm platinum RTD. Thermistor sensors of 10,000 or
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 75
2,250 ohms resistance may be substituted based on the application.
c. The following point types (and the accuracy of each) are required, and their associated
accuracy values include errors associated with the sensor, lead wire, and A to D
conversion:
Point Type Accuracy
Room Temp + .5 deg. F.
All Others + .75 deg. F.
2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Johnson Controls, Minco.
D. Power Monitoring Devices
1. Current Measurement (Amps)
a. Current measurement shall be by a combination current transformer and a current
transducer. The current transformer shall be sized to reduce the full amperage of the
monitored circuit to a maximum 5 Amp signal, which will be converted to a 4-20 mA DDC
compatible signal for use by the Facility Management System.
b. Current Transformer – A split core current transformer shall be provided to monitor motor
amps.
1) Operating frequency – 50 - 400 Hz.
2) Insulation – 0.6 Kv class 10Kv BIL.
3) UL recognized.
4) Five amp secondary.
5) Select current range as appropriate for application.
6) Acceptable manufacturers: Setra
c. Current Transducer – A current to voltage or current to mA transducer shall be provided.
The current transducer shall include:
1) 6X input over amp rating for AC inrushes of up to 120 amps.
2) Manufactured to UL 1244.
3) Accuracy: +.5%, Ripple +1%.
4) Minimum load resistance 30kOhm.
5) Input 0-20 Amps.
6) Output 4-20 mA.
7) Transducer shall be powered by a 24VDC regulated power supply (24 VDC +5%).
8) Acceptable manufacturers: Setra
E. Status and Safety Switches
1. General Requirements
a. Switches shall be provided to monitor equipment status, safety conditions, and generate
alarms at the BMS when a failure or abnormal condition occurs. Safety switches shall be
provided with two sets of contacts and shall be interlock wired to shut down respective
equipment.
2. Current Sensing Switches
a. The current sensing switch shall be self-powered with solid-state circuitry and a dry
contact output. It shall consist of a current transformer, a solid state current sensing
circuit, adjustable trip point, solid state switch, SPDT relay, and an LED indicating the on
or off status. A conductor of the load shall be passed through the window of the device. It
shall accept over-current up to twice its trip point range.
b. Current sensing switches shall be used for run status for fans, pumps, and other
miscellaneous motor loads.
c. Current sensing switches shall be calibrated to show a positive run status only when the
motor is operating under load. A motor running with a broken belt or coupling shall
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 76
indicate a negative run status.
d. Acceptable manufacturers: Johnson Controls or approved equal.
3. Low Temperature Limit Switches
a. The low temperature limit switch shall be of the manual reset type with Double
Pole/Single Throw snap acting contacts rated for 16 amps at 120VAC.
b. The sensing element shall be a minimum of 15 feet in length and shall react to the
coldest 18-inch section. Element shall be mounted horizontally across duct in accordance
with manufacturers recommended installation procedures.
c. For large duct areas where the sensing element does not provide full coverage of the air
stream, additional switches shall be provided as required to provide full protection of the
air stream.
d. The low temperature limit switch shall be equal to Johnson Controls A70.
F. Control Relays
1. Control Pilot Relays
a. Control pilot relays shall be of a modular plug-in design with retaining springs or clips.
b. Mounting Bases shall be snap-mount.
c. DPDT, 3PDT, or 4PDT relays shall be provided, as appropriate for application.
d. Contacts shall be rated for 10 amps at 120VAC.
e. Relays shall have an integral indicator light and check button.
f. Acceptable manufacturers: Johnson Controls, Lectro
G. Direct-Digital Control System for HVAC/Building Management System:
1. General:
a. Related Documents:
1) All work of this Division shall be coordinated and provided by the single Building
Management System (BMS) Contractor.
2) The work of this Division shall be scheduled, coordinated, and interfaced with the
associated work of other trades. Reference the applicable sections for details.
3) The work of this Division shall be as required by the Specifications, Point Schedules
and Drawings.
4) If the BMS Contractor believes there are conflicts or missing information in the project
documents, the Contractor shall promptly request clarification and instruction from
the design team.
b. BMS Description:
1) Any and all components of the BMS that are connected via field bus or IP network,
including the network controllers, field controllers, application specific controllers,
server and user interface software, system and controller programming tools and
software applications shall be designed, engineered, and tested to work together as a
complete building management system, and shall be manufactured by the same
BMS manufacturer. Systems that use or require network controllers, field controllers,
Application-specific controllers, server and user interface software, programming
tools and software from more than one BMS manufacturer shall not be accepted.
2) All points of user interface shall be on standard computing devices that do not require
the purchase of any special software from the BMS manufacturer for use as a
building operations terminal. The primary point of interface on these devices will be a
standard Web Browser.
3) The BMS work shall consist of the provision of all labor, materials, tools, equipment,
software, software licenses, software configurations and database entries, interfaces,
wiring, tubing, installation, labeling, engineering, calibration, documentation, samples,
submittals, testing, commissioning, training services, permits and licenses,
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 77
transportation, shipping, handling, administration, supervision, management,
insurance, temporary protection, cleaning, cutting and patching, warranties, services,
and items, even though these may not be specifically mentioned in these Division
documents which are required for the complete, fully functional and commissioned
BMS.
4) The BMS as provided shall incorporate, at minimum, the following integrated
features, functions and services:
a) Operator information, alarm management and control functions.
b) Information management including monitoring, transmission, archiving, retrieval,
and reporting functions.
c. Quality Assurance:
1) General:
a) The Building Management System Contractor shall be the primary manufacturer-
owned branch office that is regularly engaged in the engineering, programming,
installation and service of total integrated Building Management Systems.
b) The BMS Contractor shall be a recognized national manufacturer, installer and
service provider of BMS.
c) The Building Management System (BMS) installer shall be a BMS manufacturer-
owned branch office, or an independent controls contractor who is factory trained
and authorized by the BMS manufacturer to sell, service and support the Building
Management System specified herein.
d) Independent controls contractors who are authorized by the BMS manufacturer
must provide a letter written and signed by a company officer of the specific BMS
manufacturer. This document must be dated within the 30 days prior to bid
submittal and must state that they are currently a “direct authorized
representative” in good standing for the BMS manufacturer for the building
management system products described and listed in this specification, that they
have “direct purchasing access” to all of the BMS manufacturer’s controllers,
servers, software and components and technical support, and that they will
continue to be an Authorized representative with this access for the duration of
the installation and warranty phases of project.
e) The BMS Contractor shall have a branch facility within a 100-mile radius of the
job site supplying complete maintenance and support services on a 24 hour, 7-
day-a-week basis. The BMS Contractor shall have, at this facility, a trained,
directly employed and full time technical staff, spare parts inventory, and all
necessary test and diagnostic equipment.
f) As evidence and assurance of the contractor’s ability to support the Owner's
system with service and parts, the contractor must have been in the BMS
business for at least the last ten (10) years and have successfully completed total
projects of at least 10 times the value of this contract in each of the preceding
five years.
2) Workplace Safety and Hazardous Materials:
a) Provide a safety program in compliance with the Contract Documents.
b) The BMS Contractor shall have a corporately certified comprehensive Safety
Certification Manual and a designated Safety Supervisor for the Project.
c) The Contractor and its employees and sub trades shall comply with federal, state
and local safety regulations.
d) The Contractor shall ensure that all subcontractors and employees have written
safety programs in place that covers their scope of work, and that their
employees receive the training required by the OSHA rules that have jurisdiction
for at least each topic listed in the Safety Certification Manual.
e) Hazards created by the Contractor or its subcontractors shall be eliminated
before any further work proceeds.
f) Hazards observed but not created by the Contractor or its subcontractors shall
be reported to either the General Contractor or the Owner within the same day.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 78
The Contractor shall be required to avoid the hazard area until the hazard has
been eliminated.
g) The Contractor shall sign and date a safety certification form prior to any work
being performed, stating that the Contractors’ company is in full compliance with
the Project safety requirements.
h) The Contractor’s safety program shall include written policy and arrangements
for the handling, storage and management of all hazardous materials to be used
in the work in compliance with the requirements of the AHJ at the Project site.
i) The Contractor’s employees and subcontractor’s staff shall have received
training as applicable in the use of hazardous materials and shall govern their
actions accordingly.
d. Warranty:
1) Standard Material and Labor Warranty:
a) Provide a one-year labor and material warranty on the BMS.
b) If within twelve (12) months from the date of acceptance of product, upon written
notice from the owner, it is found to be defective in operation, workmanship or
materials, it shall be replaced, repaired or adjusted at the option of the BMS
Contractor at the cost of the BMS Contractor.
c) Maintain an adequate supply of materials within 100 miles of the Project site
such that replacement of key parts and labor support, including programming.
Warranty work shall be done during BMS Contractor’s normal business hours.
2. Products:
a. General Description:
1) The Building Management System (BMS) shall use an open architecture and fully
support a multi-vendor environment. To accomplish this effectively, the BMS shall
support open communication protocol standards and integrate a wide variety of third-
party devices and applications. The system shall be designed for use on the Internet,
or intranets using off the shelf, industry standard technology compatible with other
owner provided networks.
2) The Building Management System shall consist of the following:
a) Network Engine(s)
b) Input/Output Module(s)
c) Local Display Device(s)
d) Portable Operator's Terminal(s)
e) Distributed User Interface(s)
f) Network processing, data storage and communications equipment
g) Other components required for a complete and working BMS
3) The system shall be modular in nature, and shall permit expansion of both capacity
and functionality through the addition of sensors, actuators, controllers and operator
devices, while re-using existing controls equipment.
4) System architectural design shall eliminate dependence upon any single device for
alarm reporting and control execution.
a) The failure of any single component or network connection shall not interrupt the
execution of control strategies at other operational devices.
b) The System shall maintain all settings and overrides through a system reboot
5) System architectural design shall eliminate dependence upon any single device for
alarm reporting and control execution.
6) Acceptable Manufacturers
a) Johnson Controls, Metasys
b) Honeywell, Enterprise Building Integrator (EBI)
c) Siemens Building Systems, APOGEE
b. BMS Architecture:
1) Automation Network
a) The automation network shall be based on a PC industry standard of Ethernet
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 79
TCP/IP. Where used, LAN controller cards shall be standard “off the shelf”
products available through normal PC vendor channels.
b) The BMS shall network multiple user interface clients, application and data
servers, automation engines, system controllers and application-specific
controllers including but not limited to:
(1) Network Control Engines
c) All BMS devices on the automation network shall be capable of operating at a
minimum communication speed of 100 Mbps, with full peer-to-peer network
communication.
d) Network Security – To protect the BMS from unauthorized users and computer
hackers the Automation Network shall support HTTPS with TLS 1.2 between
components, including the Application and Data Server(s), Network Engines,
Mobile User Interface and Site Management Portal. Self-signed certificates are
installed on supported products, with the option of configuring trusted certificates.
Computing devices supplied by the BMS vendor will automatically shut down
unused ports to deter unauthorized access.
(1) The automation network will be compatible with other enterprise-wide
networks. Where indicated, the automation network shall be connected to the
enterprise network and share resources with it by way of standard
networking devices and practices.
2) Control Network:
a) Network Engines shall provide supervisory control over the control network and
shall selectively support the following communication protocols:
(1) BACnet Standard MS/TP Bus Protocol ASHRAE SSPC-135
(2) The NAE shall be BACnet Testing Labs (BTL) certified and carry the BTL Label.
(3) The NAE shall be tested and certified as a BACnet Building Controller (B-
BC).
b) Control networks shall provide either “Peer-to-Peer”, Master-Slave, or
Supervised Token Passing communications, and shall operate at a minimum
communication speed of 9600 baud.
c) Control network shall support digital controllers as indicated in plans and
specifications.
d) Default control network communication protocol for this project shall be BACnet
Standard MS/TP Bus Protocol ASHRAE SSPC-135.
3) Integration
a) Hardwired
(1) Analog and digital signal values shall be passed from one system to another
via hardwired connections.
(2) There will be one separate physical point on each system for each point to
be integrated between the systems.
b) Direct Protocol (Integrator Panel)
(1) The BMS system shall include appropriate hardware equipment and software
to allow bi-directional data communications between the BMS system and
3rd party manufacturers’ control panels. The BMS shall have the ability to
receive, react to, and return information from multiple building systems,
including but not limited to the chillers, boilers, variable frequency drives,
power monitoring system, and medical gas.
(2) All data required by the application shall be mapped into the Automation
Engine’s database, and shall be transparent to the operator.
(3) Point inputs and outputs from the third-party controllers shall have real-time
interoperability with BMS software features such as: Control Software, Energy
Management, Custom Process Programming, Alarm Management, Historical Data
and Trend Analysis, Totalization, and Local Area Network Communications.
c) BACnet Protocol Integration - BACnet
(1) The neutral protocol used between systems will be BACnet IP and comply
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 80
with the ASHRAE BACnet standard 135.
(2) A complete Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) shall be
provided for all BACnet system devices.
(3) The ability to command, share point object data, change of state (COS) data
and schedules between the host and BACnet systems shall be provided.
c. User Interface
1) Mobile Access Portal Gateway
a) General: The Mobile Access Portal (MAP) Gateway shall provide a
complementary extension to the DDC system user interface requirements
previously described in these specifications. The MAP Gateway shall provide an
HTML5 browser interface between mobile devices and DDC controllers without
the requirement for operational engines or servers. A task specific mobile
application shall not be required to use the MAP Gateway.
(1) The MAP Gateway shall be a hardware/software device which consists of a
combination Wi-Fi Access Point hotspot and user interface web server, with
BACnet MS/TP RS-485 connectivity, and optional Ethernet IP connectivity.
(2) The MAP Gateway can be used tether free using its built in Wi-Fi___33
Access Point or it can be connected to an existing building network through
the MAP Gateway Ethernet IP port. This feature may also be used to provide
remote connectivity for accessing building controls through the site's IT
infrastructure.
(3) When not connected via the Ethernet IP port, the MAP Gateway shall provide
a secure, isolated connection to controllers on the BACnet MS/TP field bus
with no opportunities to "jump off", or bridge over, to the site's IT
infrastructure.
(4) The MAP Gateway shall serve up HTML5 web pages to allow authorized
users to view and/or override controller inputs, outputs, setpoints, schedules,
trends, and to view and acknowledge alarms via a browser interface.
(5) The MAP Gateway shall not require the user to purchase or install any
software or applications on the user's smart phone, tablet, PC, or smart device.
(6) MAP Functionality: The MAP Gateway shall be capable of serving pre-
configured Web Pages to an HTML5 enabled browser. Authorized persons
can interact with space and control application set points, alarms, schedules,
and trends using a PC, iMac, notebook, smart phone, tablet, or mobile device
with Wi-Fi___33 connectivity.
b) RS-485 connectivity and connections.
(1) The MAP Gateway shall include an RS-485 Port configured as BACnet
MS/TP Master. Communications with devices and field controllers shall be
possible via the following modes; all of these connections will provide access
to all controllers on the MS/TP field controller bus:
(a) Connecting to a Smart Equipment Controller through the Sensor
Actuator (SA) bus RJ12 jack
(b) Connecting to a field controller through the field controller Sensor
Actuator (SA) bus RJ12 jack
(c) Connecting to the SA bus of the field controller from a network room
sensor via the RJ12 jack on the network room sensor
(d) Connecting directly to the field controller bus, using an RJ12 to Terminal
Block adaptor.
(2) The MAP Gateway power may be supplied via the SAB (sensor/actuator
bus), the FCB (field controller bus), or a micro USB port.
c) Installation and status indicators:
(1) The MAP Gateway shall be designed to work as a portable device or it may
be permanently mounted on site.
(2) Portable: The MAP Gateway shall include a preconfigured, flexible coiled
RJ-12 Cable to connect in the field directly to controllers or through wall
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 81
mounted room sensors with an RJ-12 port. The MAP Gateway shall include
a protective Rubber Bumper Guard and a Lanyard
(3) Stationary: The MAP Gateway shall include a Stationary Mounting Cradle to
install the device in a panel. RJ-12 Cable, and an auto-switching 90-230
VAC Power Supply.
(4) Status Indication: The MAP Gateway shall provide LED lights to indicate
overall operating condition and status, communications for the MS/TP bus
connection, communications via the Ethernet connection, and Wi-Fi___33
connection and signal strength.
d) MAP Gateway web page configuration and linking
(1) The MAP Gateway shall provide automatic BACnet MS/TP device detection
and connection, and automatic web page configuration and point linking.
d. Provide Johnson Controls MAP Gateway or approved equal.
3. Network Control Engines:
a. Network Control Engines
1) The Network Control Engine (NCE) shall be a fully user-programmable, supervisory
controller. The NCE shall monitor the network of distributed application-specific
controllers, provide global strategy and direction, and communicate on a peer-to-peer
basis with other Network Automation Engines.
2) The Network Control Engine (NCE) shall be a fully user-programmable, digital
controller that includes a minimum of 33 I/O points.
3) Automation Network – The NCE shall reside on the automation network and shall
support a subnet of 32 Field controllers.
4) User Interface – Each NCE shall have the ability to deliver a web based User
Interface (UI) as previously described. All computers connected physically or virtually
to the automation network shall have access to the web based UI.
a) The web based UI software shall be embedded in the NCE. Systems that
require a local copy of the system database on the user’s personal computer are
not acceptable.
b) The NCE shall support a minimum of two (2) concurrent users.
c) The NCE shall have the capability of generating web based UI graphics. The
graphics capability shall be embedded in the NCE.
d) The web based UI shall support the following functions using a standard version
of Microsoft Internet Explorer:
(1) Configuration
(2) Commissioning
(3) Data Archiving
(4) Monitoring
(5) Commanding
(6) System Diagnostics
e) Systems that require workstation software or modified web browsers are not
acceptable.
f) The NCE shall allow temporary use of portable devices without interrupting the
normal operation of permanently connected modems.
g) User Authentication – The NCE shall support local users, Active Directory users,
Microsoft Office 365 users and Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service
(RADIUS).
h) Password Security – Access to the embedded UI shall require a password of 8 to
50 characters including a minimum of one lower case letter, one upper case
letter, one number, and one special character. An alarm shall be generated after
three unsuccessful attempts within 15 minutes and the user shall be denied
access until permission is renewed by a system administrator.
i) Network Security – Communication between the NCE and other system
networked devices including additional Network Engines, Application and Data
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 82
Servers, Open Data Servers (BACnet listed OWS), and UI clients shall be
encrypted and support HTTPS with Transport Level Security (TLS) Version 1.2.
Self-signed certificates are to be provided with the option of configuring trusted
certificates.
j) The NCE shall employ a finite state programming to eliminate unnecessary
conflicts between control functions at crossover points in their operational
sequences. Suppliers using non-state based DDC shall provide separate control
strategy diagrams for all controlled functions in their submittals.
k) The NCE shall be factory programmed with a continuous adaptive tuning
algorithm that senses changes in the physical environment and continually
adjusts loop tuning parameters appropriately. Controllers that require manual
tuning of loops or perform automatic tuning on command only, shall not be
acceptable.
l) The NCE shall be assembled in a plenum-rated plastic housing with flammability
rated to UL94-5VB.
m) The NCE shall support the following number and types of inputs and outputs:
n) Ten Universal Inputs - shall be configured to monitor any of the following:
(1) Analog Input, Voltage Mode
(2) Analog Input, Current Mode
(3) Analog Input, Resistive Mode
(4) Binary Input, Dry Contact Maintained Mode
(5) Binary Input, Pulse Counter Mode
o) Eight Binary Inputs - shall be configured to monitor either of the following:
(1) Dry Contact Maintained Mode
(2) Pulse Counter Mode
p) Four Analog Outputs - shall be configured to output either of the following
(1) Analog Output, Voltage Mode
(2) Analog Output, Current Mode
q) Seven Binary Outputs - shall output the following:
(1) 24 VAC Triac
r) Four Configurable Outputs - shall be configured to output either of the following:
(1) Analog Output, Voltage Mode
(2) Binary Output, 24 VAC Triac Mode
s) The NCE shall have the ability to monitor and control a network of sensors and
actuators over a Sensor-Actuator Bus (SA Bus).
(1) The SA Bus shall be a Master-Slave/Token-Passing (MS/TP) Bus supporting
BACnet Standard protocol SSPC-135.
(2) The SA Bus shall support a minimum of 10 devices.
(3) The SA Bus shall operate at a maximum distance of 1,200 Ft. between the
NCE and the furthest connected device.
t) The NCE shall have the capability to execute complex control sequences
involving direct wired I/O points as well as input and output devices
communicating over the Field Trunk or the SA Bus.
5) The NCE shall support a Local Controller Display either as an integral part of the
NCE or as a remote device communicating over the SA Bus.
a) The Display shall use a BACnet Standard SSPC-135 Master-Slave/Token-
Passing protocol.
b) The Display shall allow the user to view monitored points without logging into the
system.
c) The Display shall allow the user to view and change setpoints, modes of
operation, and parameters.
d) The Display shall provide password protection with user adjustable password timeout.
e) The Display shall be menu driven with separate paths for:
(1) Input/Output
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 83
(2) Parameter/Setpoint
(3) Overrides
f) The Display shall use easy-to-read English text messages.
g) The Display shall allow the user to select the points to be shown and in what
order.
h) The Display shall support a back lit Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) with adjustable
contrast and brightens and automatic backlight brightening during user
interaction.
i) The display shall be a minimum of 4 lines and a minimum of 20 characters per
line
j) The Display shall have a keypad with no more than 6 keys.
k) The Display shall be panel mountable.
6) The NCE shall be microprocessor-based with a minimum word size of 32 bits. The
NAE shall be a multi-tasking, multi-user, and real-time digital control processor.
Standard operating systems shall be employed. NCE size and capability shall be
sufficient to fully meet the requirements of this Specification.
7) The NCE shall employ an industrial single board computer.
8) Each NCE shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating system,
databases, and control programs, and to provide supervisory control for all control
level devices.
9) The NCE shall include an integrated, hardware-based, real-time clock.
10) The NCE shall employ nonvolatile Flash memory to store all programs and data. The
NCE shall employ a data protection battery to save data and power the real time
clock when primary power is interrupted.
11) The NCE shall provide removable, color coded, screw terminal blocks for 24 VAC
power, communication bus and I/O point field wiring.
12) The NCE shall include troubleshooting LED indicators to identify the following
conditions:
a) Power
b) Fault
c) SA Bus
d) FC Bus
e) Modem TX
f) Modem RX
g) Battery Fault
h) Ethernet
i) 10 LNK
j) 100 LNK
k) Run
l) Peer Com
m) Communications Ports – The NCE shall provide the following ports for operation
of operator Input/Output (I/O) devices, such as industry-standard computers,
modems, and portable operator’s terminals.
(1) USB port
(2) RS-232 serial data communication port
(3) RS-485 port
(4) RJ-45 Ethernet port
(5) RJ-12 jack
n) Diagnostics – The NCE shall continuously perform self-diagnostics,
communication diagnosis, and diagnosis of all panel components. The Network
Control Engine shall provide both local and remote annunciation of any detected
component failures, low battery conditions, or repeated failures to establish
communication.
o) Power Failure – In the event of the loss of normal power, The NCE shall continue
to operate for a user adjustable period of up to 10 minutes after which there shall
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 84
be an orderly shutdown of all programs to prevent the loss of database or
operating system software.
(1) During a loss of normal power, the control sequences shall go to the normal
system shutdown conditions. All critical configuration data shall be saved
into Flash memory.
(2) Upon restoration of normal power and after a minimum off-time delay, the
controller shall automatically resume full operation without manual
intervention through a normal soft-start sequence.
p) Certification – The NCE shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL).File
E107041, CCN PAZX, UL 916, Energy Management Equipment. FCC Compliant
to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class A
q) Field Controller Bus – The NCE shall support the following selectable
communication protocols on the optional Field Controller Bus:
(1) The NCE shall support BACnet Standard MS/TP Bus Protocol ASHRAE
SSPC-135 on the controller network.
(a) The NCE shall be BACnet Testing Labs (BTL) certified and carry the BTL
Label.
(b) The NAE shall be tested and certified as a BACnet Building Controller
(B-BC).
(c) A BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement shall be
provided for the NCE.
(d) The Conformance Statements shall be submitted 10 days prior to
bidding.
(e) The NCE shall support a minimum of 32 control devices.
(2) The NCE shall support LonWorks enabled devices using the Free Topology
Transceiver FTT10 on the Field Controller Bus (LonWorks Network).
(a) All LonWorks controls devices shall be LonMark certified.
(b) The NCE shall support a minimum of 32 LonWorks enabled control
devices.
r) The NCE shall support the N2 devices on the Field Controller Bus (Johnson
Controls N2 Bus).
s) Provide Johnson Controls NCE25 or approved equal as shown on plans
4. Field Devices
a. Network Sensors
1) The Network Sensors (NS) shall have the ability to monitor the following variables as
required by the systems sequence of operations:
a) Zone Temperature
b) Zone Humidity
c) Zone Setpoint
d) Discharge Air Temperature
e) Zone CO2
f) The NS shall transmit the information back to the controller on the Sensor-
Actuator Bus (SA Bus) using BACnet Standard protocol SSPC-135.
2) The NS shall be BACnet Testing Labs (BTL) certified and carry the BTL Label.
a) The NS shall be tested and certified as a BACnet Smart Sensors (B-SS).
b) A BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement shall be provided for
the NS.
c) The Conformance Statement shall be submitted 10 days prior to bidding.
3) Provide Johnson Controls NS series or approved equal where indicated on plans
5. System Tools:
a. Provide tablet for access into BAS
6. Performance/Execution
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 85
a. Installation Practices:
1) BMS Wiring:
a) All conduit, wiring, accessories and wiring connections required for the
installation of the Building Management System, as herein specified, shall be
provided by the BMS Contractor unless specifically shown on the Electrical
Drawings under Division 24 Electrical. All wiring shall comply with the
requirements of applicable portions of Division 24 and all local and national
electric codes, unless specified otherwise in this section.
b) All BMS wiring materials and installation methods shall comply with BMS
manufacturer recommendations.
c) The sizing, type and provision of cable, conduit, cable trays, and raceways shall
be the design responsibility of the BMS Contractor. If complications arise,
however, due to the incorrect selection of cable, cable trays, raceways and/or
conduit by the BMS Contractor, the Contractor shall be responsible for all costs
incurred in replacing the selected components.
d) Class 2 Wiring:
(1) All Class 2 (24VAC or less) wiring shall be installed in conduit unless
otherwise specified.
(2) Conduit is not required for Class 2 wiring in concealed accessible locations.
Class 2 wiring not installed in conduit shall be supported every 5’ from the
building structure utilizing metal hangers designed for this application. Wiring
shall be installed parallel to the building structural lines. All wiring shall be
installed in accordance with local code requirements.
(a) Class 2 signal wiring and 24VAC power can be run in the same conduit.
Power wiring 120VAC and greater cannot share the same conduit with
Class 2 signal wiring.
(b) Provide for complete grounding of all applicable signal and
communications cables, panels and equipment so as to ensure system
integrity of operation. Ground cabling and conduit at the panel
terminations. Avoid grounding loops.
(3) BMS Line Voltage Power Source
(a) 120-volt AC circuits used for the Building Management System shall be
taken from panel boards and circuit breakers provided by Division 24.
(b) Circuits used for the BMS shall be dedicated to the BMS and shall not be
used for any other purposes.
(c) DDC terminal unit controllers may use AC power from motor power
circuits.
2) BMS Raceway:
a) All wiring shall be installed in conduit or raceway except as noted elsewhere in
this specification. Minimum control wiring conduit size 1/2”.
b) Where it is not possible to conceal raceways in finished locations, surface
raceway (Wiremold) may be used as approved by the Architect.
c) All conduits and raceways shall be installed level, plumb, at right angles to the
building lines and shall follow the contours of the surface to which they are
attached.
d) Flexible Metal Conduit shall be used for vibration isolation and shall be limited to
3 feet in length when terminating to vibrating equipment. Flexible Metal Conduit
may be used within partition walls. Flexible Metal Conduit shall be UL listed.
3) BMS Identification Standards:
a) Node Identification. All nodes shall be identified by a permanent label fastened
to the enclosure. Labels shall be suitable for the node location.
b) Cable types specified in Item A shall be color coded for easy identification and
troubleshooting.
4) BMS Panel Installation:
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 86
a) The BMS panels and cabinets shall be located as indicated at an elevation of not
less than 2 feet from the bottom edge of the panel to the finished floor. Each
cabinet shall be anchored per the manufacturer’s recommendations.
b) The BMS contractor shall be responsible for coordinating panel locations with
other trades and electrical and mechanical contractors.
5) Input Devices
a) All Input devices shall be installed per the manufacturer recommendation
b) Locate components of the BMS in accessible local control panels wherever
possible.
6) HVAC Input Devices – General:
a) All Input devices shall be installed per the manufacturer recommendation
b) Locate components of the BMS in accessible local control panels wherever
possible.
b. Training
1) The BMS contractor shall provide the following training services:
a) One day of on-site orientation by a system technician who is fully knowledgeable
of the specific installation details of the project. This orientation shall, at a
minimum, consist of a review of the project as-built drawings, the BMS software
layout and naming conventions, and a walk through of the facility to identify panel
and device locations.
c. Commissioning Requirements:
1) Fully commission all aspects of the Building Management System work.
d. Performance Verification:
1) The installing contractor shall perform a complete Performance Validation (PV) of the
Building management system three times throughout the project:
a) At project turnover to customer
H. Sequence of Operation for HVAC Controls:
1. Points List:
a. VRF System
1) The Building Management System shall control and monitor the following indoor unit
operations:
a) Unit Enable Mode
b) System mode
c) Zone Temperature Setpoint
d) Supply Fan Speed
e) Remote Control Lockout
f) Filter Status Reset
g) Supply Fan Status
h) System Status
i) Zone Temperature
j) Remote Zone Temperature
k) Supply Fan Status
l) Filter Status
m) Expansion Valve Position
n) Liquid Pipe Temperature
o) Gas Pipe Temperature
p) Return Air Temperature
q) Discharge Air Temperature
r) Coil Differential Temperature
s) Requested Compressor Speed
t) Unit Alarm Status
u) Alarm Code
2) The Building Management System shall monitor the following outdoor unit
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 87
operations:
a) System Mode
b) System Status
c) Heat Exchanger State
d) Inverter State
e) Fan Controller State
f) Inverter Hours
g) Compressor Hours
h) Inverter Compressor Frequency
i) Total Frequency
j) Fan Output
k) Expansion Valve Position
l) Discharge Pressure
m) Suction Pressure
n) Outdoor Air Temperature
o) Inverter Compressor Primary Current
p) Inverter Compressor Secondary Current
q) Compressor 2 Current
r) Inverter Compressor Top Temperature
s) Compressor 2 Top Temperature
t) Protection Code
u) Defrost Status
v) Emergency Run Status
w) Alarm Code
x) Inverter Status
y) Fan Status
3) Alarms
a) Ductless Split Room High Temp Alarm
b) Ductless Split High Condensate/Condensate Pump Failure
2.23 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS
A. Refer to Drawing M301.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 COMMISSIONING OF EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
A. The Architect will check the completed installation either sequentially as different parts are
completed, or when the entire installation is complete, at the sole option of the Architect.
B. Prior to the Architect’s checking a part of the installation or the entire installation, this Contractor
shall submit a letter signed by an Officer of this Contracting Company or an Officer of the General
Contractor stating that:
1. He is an Officer of the Company.
2. He has personally inspected the installation to be checked.
3. The date of his inspection.
4. The installation is complete and tested and ready to be inspected by the Architect, and that
all required test reports have been submitted.
C. This Contractor shall arrange that an Officer of this Contracting Company or of the General
Contractor, as well as the Clerk of the Works, in addition to other test witnesses that may be
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 88
specified, shall witness the below listed tests. At the conclusion of each such test this Contractor
shall submit a letter signed by the Officer stating that:
1. He is an Officer of the Company.
2. He has personally witnessed the tests (giving the name of the tests).
3. The date of testing.
4. The results of testing, as compared to specified performance.
5. List the name, title and company affiliated to all those witnessing the tests.
Tests Requiring Letters:
Electrical: Emergency Generator
Fire Alarm
Emergency Lighting and Power Distribution
Fire Department Control Center
HVAC: VRF Operating and Controls (refer to
applicable spec sections additional
requirements)
3.2 SPECIAL RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Coordination: Cooperate and coordinate with work of other Sections in executing work of this
Section.
1. Perform work such that progress of entire project including work of other Sections shall not
be interfered with or delayed.
2. Provide information as requested on items furnished under this Section which shall be
installed under other Sections.
3. Obtain detailed installation information from manufacturers of equipment provided under this
Section.
4. Obtain final roughing dimensions or other information as needed for complete installation of
items furnished under other Sections or by Owner.
5. Keep fully informed as to shape, size and position of openings required for material or
equipment to be provided under this and other Sections. Give full information so that
openings required by work of this Section may be coordinated with other work and other
openings and may be provided for in advance. In case of failure to provide sufficient
information in proper time, provide cutting and patching or have same done, at own expense
and to full satisfaction of Architect.
6. Provide information as requested as to sizes, number and locations of concrete
housekeeping pads necessary for floor-mounted vibrating and rotating equipment provided
under this Section.
7. Notify Architect of location and extent of existing piping, ductwork and equipment that
interferes with new construction. In coordination with and with approval of Architect, relocate
piping, ductwork and equipment to permit new work to be provided as required by Contract
Documents. Remove non-functioning and abandoned piping, ductwork and equipment as
directed by Architect. Dispose of or store items as requested by Architect.
B. Installation Only Items:
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 89
1. Where this Contractor is required to install items which it does not purchase, it shall
coordinate their delivery and be responsible for this unloading from delivery vehicles and for
their safe handling and field storage up to the time of installation. This trade shall be
responsible for:
a. Any necessary field assembly and internal connections, as well as mounting in place of
the items, including the purchase and installation of all dunnage supporting members and
fastenings necessary to adapt them to architectural and structural conditions.
b. Their connection to building systems including the purchase and installation of all
terminating fittings necessary to adapt and connect them to the building system.
2. This Contractor shall carefully examine such items upon delivery. Claims that any of these
items have been received in such condition that their installation will require procedures
beyond the reasonable scope of work of this Contractor will be considered only if presented
in writing within one (1) week of their date of delivery. Unless such claims have been
submitted this Contractor shall be fully responsible for the complete reconditioning or
replacement of the damaged items.
C. Maintenance of equipment and Systems: Maintain HVAC equipment and systems until Final
Acceptance. Ensure adequate protection of equipment and material during delivery, storage,
installation and shutdown delays pending final test of systems and equipment because of
seasonal conditions. Do not use boilers before providing water treatment where required; this
includes use of boilers for temporary heat or for testing.
D. Use of Premises: Use of premises shall be restricted as directed by Architect and as required
below:
1. Remove and dispose of dirt and debris, and keep premises reasonably clean. Upon
completion of work, remove equipment and unused material. Put building and premises in
neat and clean condition and do cleaning and washing required to provide acceptable
appearance and operation of equipment, to satisfaction of Architect and as specified under
CLEANING paragraph.
2. It shall be this trade’s responsibility to store his material in a manner that will maintain an orderly
clean appearance. If stored on-site in open or unprotected areas, all equipment and material
shall be kept off the ground by means of pallets or racks, and covered with tarpaulins.
3. Do not interfere with functions of existing sewers and gas mains. Extreme care shall be
observed to prevent debris from entering ductwork. Confer with Architect as to disruption of
heating services or other utilities due to testing or connection of new work to existing.
Interruption of heating services shall be performed at time of day or night deemed by
Architect to provide minimum interference with normal operation. Obtain Architect’s approval
of the method proposed for minimizing service interruption.
E. Superintendence: Keep superintendent or foreman on the site during progress of work.
Instructions given to such representative by Architect shall be binding on Contract. Do not
change representative without prior notification to Architect.
F. Inspections by Architect: Undertaking of periodic inspections by Architect or designated Agent
shall not be construed as supervision of actual construction, nor make either responsible for
providing safe place for performance of work of various trades or suppliers, or for visitors or
occupants or make either responsible for omission of safety devices called for by codes,
ordinances or Specifications of manufacturer of equipment supplied.
G. Surveys and Measurements:
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 90
1. Base measurements, both horizontal and vertical, on reference points established by
Contractor and be responsible for correct laying out of work.
2. In event of discrepancy between actual measurements and those indicated, notify Architect in
writing and do not proceed with work until written instructions have been issued by Architect.
H. Fireproofing:
1. Clips, hangers, clamps, supports and other attachments to surfaces to be fireproofed shall be
installed, insofar as possible prior to start of spray fiber work.
2. Ducts, piping and other items, which would interfere with proper application of fireproofing,
shall be installed after completion of spray fiber work.
3. Patching and repairing of spray fireproofing due to cutting or damaging to fireproofing during
course of work specified under this Section shall be performed by installer of fireproofing and
paid for by trade responsible for damage and shall not constitute grounds for an extra to
Owner.
I. Temporary Heat:
1. Special reference is made to TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS – SECTION
01500.
2. Coordinate work under this Section with progress of construction so that permanent heating
system will be ready to provide temporary heating if permitted by Architect as soon as
building is closed in.
3. Provide and direct labor required for attendance, operation and final restoration of permanent
heating system if used for temporary heating purposes. Continuous direct attendance shall
be provided whenever permanent system is in operation, prior to acceptance of permanent
heating system by Owner.
J. Gypsum Drywall Enclosures:
1. Coordinate and supervise construction of drywall and related work affecting work of this Section.
2. Work shall include but not be limited to the following:
a. Supply and return air duct enclosures on rooftop air handling units.
b. Supply air plenums located above labs and computer rooms.
c. Return air shafts.
3. Ensure tightness of plenums and chases used as part of air distribution system. System will
not be accepted until proved tight, without leakage. Notify Architect in writing after system
test for leakage, if construction and finish of plenums and ducts are not satisfactory.
K. Airbound Coils: If, after plant is in operation, any coils or other apparatus are stratified or air
bound (by vacuum or pressure), they shall be re-piped with new approved and necessary fittings,
air vents or vacuum breakers at no extra cost. If connections are concealed in furring, floors or
ceilings this trade shall bear all expenses of tearing up and refinishing construction and finish,
leaving same in as good condition as before it was disturbed.
3.3 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
A. Work shall be neat and rectilinear. Ductwork and piping shall run concealed except in
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 91
mechanical rooms and areas where no hung ceiling exists. Install material and equipment as
required by manufacturers. Installation shall operate safely and without leakage, undue wear,
noise, vibration, corrosion or water hammer. Work shall be properly and effectively protected,
and pipe and duct openings shall be temporarily closed to prevent obstruction and damage
before completion.
1. Except as specified otherwise, material and equipment shall be new. Provide supplies,
appliances and connections necessary for complete and operational installation. Provide
components required or recommended by OSHA and applicable NFPA documents.
2. References to manufacturers and to catalog designation are intended to establish standards
of quality for materials and performance but imply no further limitation of competitive bidding.
3. Finish of materials, components and equipment shall be as approved by Architect and shall
be resistant to corrosion and weather as necessary.
4. Owner will not be responsible for material and equipment before testing and acceptance.
3.4 CONTINUITY OF SERVICES
A. Do not interrupt existing service without Owner’s approval.
B. Schedule interruptions in advance, according to Owner’s instructions. Submit, in writing, with
request for interruption, methods proposed to minimize length of interruption.
C. Interruptions shall be scheduled at such times of day and work so that they have minimal impact
on Owner’s operations.
3.5 TAGS
A. Upon completion of work, attach engraved laminated tags to all valves (listed in the valve
directory called for in the “Bulletins, Manuals and Instructions” paragraph of these Specifications)
and all pieces of HVAC equipment (including but not limited to pumps, fans, air handlers, coils
and all other equipment listed in the HVAC Schedules). Valve tags shall have black characters
on white face, consecutively numbered and prefixed by letter “V”. Equipment tags shall have
black characters on white face with labels corresponding to drawing schedule numbers.
B. Embossed or engraved aluminum or brass tags may be substituted if desired. Tags shall be at
least 1/8” thick.
C. Valve tags shall be at least 1” in diameter with numerals at least 3/8” high and attached by “S”
hooks or chains. Equipment tags shall be at least 2” diameter securely attached to apparatus.
D. Provide manufacturers equipment nameplates, catalog numbers and rating identification securely
attached to electrical and mechanical equipment with screws or rivets. Adhesives or cements will
not be permitted.
3.6 PIPE AND DUCT IDENTIFICATION
A. Ductwork shall be stenciled at each junction or branch takeoff, at least once in each room, and at
intervals not longer than 20 feet. Stencil shall clearly identify duct service (“S” for supply; “R” for
return’ “X” for exhaust), area served by branch, and arrow indicating direction of flow.
B. Provide color-coded pipe identification markers on piping installed under this Section. Pipe
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 92
markers shall be snap-on laminated plastic protected by clear acrylic coating. Pipe markers shall
be applied after architectural painting where such is required.
C. Provide arrow marker with each pipe content marker to indicate direction of flow. If flow can be in
either direction, use double-headed arrow marker.
D. Mains shall be labeled at points of entrance and exit from mechanical room, adjacent to each
valve, on each riser, at each tee fitting, at points of entrance and exit from building, at least once
in each room and at intervals no longer than 20 feet.
E. Size of legend letters on markers and length of color field shall be per the latest edition of ANSI
A13.1.
F. Markers shall be “Setmark” by Seton Name Plate Corp., or approved equal.
G. Following color-coding shall be used with names in black letters on background and while letters
on green background:
Service Legend Background Color
Condensate CON Yellow
REF REF Yellow
H. Color banding shall meet latest edition of ANSI A13.1 and OSHA.
3.7 ACCESS AND ACCESS PANELS
A. Provide proper access to materials and equipment that require inspection, replacement, repair or
service and coordinate their delivery with the installing Trade. If proper access cannot be
provided, confer with Architect as to best method of approach for minimizing effect of reduced
access which may result.
B. Coordinate and prepare a location, size and function schedule of access panels required to fully
service equipment and deliver to a representative of the installing Trade. Furnish and install
distinctively colored buttons (color as selected by Architect) in finished ceiling to identify all
access panels.
C. Furnish access panels for installation under other Sections where fire dampers, volume dampers,
controls, shut-off valves, control valves, check valves or other items installed under this Section
require access and are concealed in floor, wall, furred space or above ceiling. Access panels
shall be by Milcor, Knapp, Nystrom or Inland Steel; coordinate selection with other Sections
supplying similar access panels.
D. Ceilings consisting of lay-in or removable splined tiles do not require access panels and dampers,
splitters or test hole openings above ceiling shall have location marked with thumb tack on
finished ceiling panel. Location shall be noted on record Drawings.
E. Access panels shall have same fire-rating classification as surface penetrated.
F. Panels shall be at least 12” x 12”; access panels at equipment (BC Controller and others) shall be
18” x 18”.
3.8 PENETRATIONS AND SLEEVES
A. General:
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 93
1. Provide pipe and duct sleeves and packing materials as specified and as shown on Drawings
at penetrations of foundations, walls, slabs (except on-grade), partitions and floors. Sleeves
shall meet NFPA-101 requirements and materials requirements of PART 2 or this Section.
2. Coordinate work carefully with architectural and structural work. Set sleeves in forms before
concrete is poured. Provide core drilling as necessary if walls are poured, or otherwise
constructed, without sleeves and a wall penetration is required. Provide core drilling as
required for penetrations of existing construction. Do not penetrate structural members
without Architect’s approval.
3. Sleeves for insulated pipe and duct in non-fire rated construction shall accommodate
continuous insulation without compression. Sleeves and/or penetrations in fire-rated
construction shall be packed with fire-rated material which shall maintain the fire rating of the
wall. Seal ends of penetrations to provide continuous vapor barrier where insulation is
interrupted. See “PART 2” of these Specifications for requirements for packing materials.
4. Sleeves through floor shall be water-tight and shall extend 2” above floor surface.
B. Pipe Sleeves:
1. Annular space between pipe and sleeve shall be at least 1/4".
2. Sleeves are not required for slabs-on-grade unless specified otherwise.
3. Sleeves and packing materials, through rated fire walls and smoke partitions shall maintain
fire rating of construction penetrated.
4. Do not support piping risers on sleeves.
C. Duct Sleeves and Prepared Openings:
1. Provide duct sleeves for round ducts 15” and smaller; provide prepared, framed openings for
round ducts larger than 15” and for square, rectangular and flat oval ducts, except as
specified otherwise. Sleeves shall met SMACNA requirements.
2. Provide sleeves for ducts through 1, 2, or 3-hour fire-rated construction and smoke partitions,
regardless of size and shape of ducts. Sleeves shall maintain fire rating of construction
penetrated. Sleeve and seal materials, construction and clearances shall meet requirements
of SMACNA Fire Damper and Heat Stop Guide for Air Handling Systems.
3. Prepared openings shall be framed to provide 1” clearance between framing and duct or duct
insulation.
D. Installation Testing, Listings and Approvals:
1. Installation shall meet material manufacturer’s recommendations exactly, particularly as
regarding safety, ventilation, removal of foreign materials and other details of installation.
Dam openings as recommended. Remove flammable materials used for damming and
forming seals in fire-rated construction.
2. Sleeve penetration methods shall be water and gas-tight and shall meet requirements of
ASTM E-119 Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
3. Fire-stop penetration seal methods and materials shall be FM-approved and UL-listed as applicable.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 94
4. Inspect foamed sealants to ensure manufacturer’s optimum cell structure and color ranges.
3.9 ANCHORS AND INSERTS
A. Inserts shall be iron or steel of type to receive machine bolt head or nut after installation. Inserts
shall permit adjustment of bolt in one (1) horizontal direction and shall develop strength of bolt
when installed in properly cured concrete.
B. Provide anchors as necessary for attachment of equipment supports and hangers.
3.10 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT
A. Avoid interference with structure and with work of other trades, preserving adequate headroom and
clearing doors and passageways to satisfaction of Architect and in accordance with code requirements.
Installation shall permit clearance for access to equipment for repair, servicing and replacement.
B. Install equipment so as to properly distribute equipment loads on building structural members
provided for equipment support under other Sections. Roof-mounted equipment shall be installed
and supported on structural steel provided under other Sections.
C. Provide suspended platforms, strap hangers, brackets, shelves, stands or legs as necessary for
floor, wall or ceiling mounting of equipment provided under this Section (e.g. heating and
ventilating units, fans, ducts and piping) as indicated on Drawings and in Specifications.
D. Provide steel supports and hardware for proper installation of hangers, anchors, guides, etc.
E. Provide cuts, weight and other pertinent data required for proper coordination of equipment
support provisions and installation.
F. Structural steel and hardware shall conform to Standard Specifications of ASTM; use of steel and
hardware shall conform to requirements of Section 5 of Code of Practice of American Institute of
Steel Construction.
G. Verify site conditions and dimensions of equipment to ensure access for proper installation of
equipment without disassembly which will void warrantee. Report in writing to Architect, prior to
purchase or shipment of equipment involved, on conditions which may prevent proper installation.
3.11 PAINTING
A. Equipment installed under this Section shall have shop coat of non-lead gray paint. Hangers and
supports shall have one (1) coat of non-lead red primer. Machinery such as pumps, fans, etc.,
shall be stenciled with equipment name. Stencil shall be at least 6” high for large equipment, 2”
high for small equipment. Finish painting, including painting of various piping and duct systems,
shall be done under other Sections.
B. Note requirements for Architect’s approval invoked under paragraph 3.03 MATERIALS AND
WORKMANSHIP regarding finish of material and equipment which are visible or subject to
corrosive or atmospheric conditions.
3.12 CLEANING
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 95
A. Ductwork:
1. New ductwork shall be shipped from the shop to the job site with the ends of the ducts sealed
tight with heavy duty plastic to prevent dirt, water or other elements from entering the ducts
while in transport to the job site.
2. At the end of each working day all open ends of ducts that have been hung in place shall be
re-covered with the plastic material to prevent the entry of foreign objects, dirt or debris into
the ducts.
3. All ducts shall be cleaned of dirt and any other foreign matter if it should accumulate on or in
the ducts prior to start-up and testing of the new HVAC systems. If the ducts do need to be
blown clean, cheesecloth shall be placed over the outlet air openings, and the rooftop unit(s)
serving the ducts shall be provided with temporary filters.
B. Equipment: After completion of project, clean the exterior surface of equipment included in this
section, including concrete residue.
3.13 STARTUP, TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
A. General:
1. References:
a. AABC – National Standards for Total System Balance.
b. ADC – Test Code for Grilles, Registers, and Diffusers.
c. ASHRAE 111 – Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Building
Heating, Ventilating, Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Systems.
d. NEBB – Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental
Systems.
e. SMACNA – HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing.
2. Qualifications:
a. Agency: Company specializing in the testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems specified
in this section with minimum three years documented experience certified by AABC. Any of
the following agencies shall be considered acceptable to perform the work of this section:
1) J.F. Coffey and Associates, Inc.
2) Air Solutions & Balancing LLC
3) American Test and Balance, Inc.
4) Milarmer Associates, Inc.
b. Perform work under supervision of AABC Certified Test and Balance Engineer or NEBB
Certified Testing, Balancing and Adjusting Supervisor.
c. Familiar with residential air balancing and Passive House requirements.
B. Examination:
1. Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure the
following conditions:
a. Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition.
b. Control systems are installed complete and operable.
c. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment.
d. Ductwork systems:
1) Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to
final filters. Include the MERV 3 filter media in the kitchen area exhaust grille.
2) Duct systems are clean of debris.
3) Fans are rotating correctly.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 96
4) Dampers are in place and open.
5) Air coil fins are cleaned and combed.
6) Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place.
7) Air inlets and outlets are installed and connected.
8) Duct system leakage is minimized.
2. Submit field reports. Report defects and deficiencies noted during performance of services
which prevent system balance.
3. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions.
C. Preparation:
1. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. Make
instruments available to Owner to facilitate spot checks during testing.
2. Provide additional balancing devices as required.
D. Installation Tolerances:
1. HVAC Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 10 percent of design for supply and return
systems and plus or minus 10 percent of design for exhaust systems. Overall for Passive
House the building should be neutral pressue.
2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.
E. Adjusting:
1. Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions.
2. Permanently mark settings of balancing devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and
lock memory stops.
3. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such
disruption has been rectified.
4. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing
doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings.
F. Sequencing:
1. All systems providing both heating and cooling shall be balanced in both modes of operation.
2. For all systems provide initial balancing to tolerances indicated in this section. After initial
balancing readjust systems as directed by engineer and owner as necessary to achieve
uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts and noises.
G. Air System Procedure:
1. Adjust equipment and distribution systems to provide required or design air quantities.
2. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area
of duct.
3. Measure and record air quantities at air inlets and outlets.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 97
4. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extent that adjustments do not
create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Adjust air volume by adjusting duct internal
devices such as dampers and splatters. Do not utilized opposed blade dampers at air inlets
and outlets.
5. Vary total system air quantities by adjusting sheave position or replacing fixed sheaves with
larger or smaller diameter sheaves at each fan. Provide replacement fixed ratio sheaves and
belts after final balancing selected to achieve design airflows. Vary branch air quantities by
damper regulation.
6. Measure and record static air pressure conditions at air supply and exhaust units, including
filter and coil pressure drops, and total pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50
percent loading of filters.
7. Adjust settings and minimum setpoints for motorized and backdraft dampers to design
conditions.
8. Measure and record temperature conditions across dampers to check leakage.
9. Where modulating dampers are provided, take measurements and balance at extreme
conditions.
10. Measure and record building static pressure and adjust supply, return, and exhaust air
systems to provide required relationship between each to maintain approximately 0.05 inches
(12.5 Pa) positive static pressure near the building entries.
11. Measure and record inlet and outlet temperatures at each air supply unit at full cooling and
heating capacity.
12. Prepare system pressure profiles: On schematic fan system diagrams, show STATIC
pressure readings taken at following points.
a. Fan discharge
b. Fan discharge plenum or main duct in fan room
c. Fan inlet plenum
d. Inlet and outlet plenum space on each side of each heating coil, cooling coil and filter
e. Return air/outside air mixing plenum
f. Duct or plenum immediately behind outside air louver
g. Return/exhaust fan inlet
h. Return/exhaust fan outlet
i. Each main branch duct takeoff at each floor
j. Within 3 feet of last supply air outlet connection in most remote duct.
H. Schedules:
1. Equipment requiring Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing including but not limited to:
a. Air Cooled Refrigerant Condensers – VRF
b. Fan Coil Units - VRF
c. Air Conditioning Units
d. Fans
e. Air Inlets and Outlets
I. Report Forms:
1. Forms shall include the following:
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 98
a. Title Page:
1) Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency
2) Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency
3) Telephone number of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency
4) Project name
5) Project location
6) Project Architect
7) Project Engineer
8) Project Contractor
9) Project altitude
10) Report date
b. All equipment shall include:
1) Manufacturer
2) Model/Size
3) Identification/Number
4) Serial Number
c. Summary Comments:
1) Design versus final performance
2) Notable characteristics of system
3) Description of systems operation sequence
4) Summary of outdoor and exhaust flows to indicated amount of building pressurization
5) Nomenclature used throughout report
6) Test conditions
d. Instrument List:
1) Instrument
2) Manufacturer
3) Model number
4) Serial number
5) Range
6) Calibration date
e. Electric Duct Heater:
1) Location
2) Number of stages
3) Wattage, phase, voltage, amperage
4) Test voltage (each phase)
5) Test amperage (each phase)
6) Air flow, specified and actual
7) Temperature rise, specified and actual
f. Energy Recovery Units:
1) Location
2) Arrangement/Class/Discharge
3) Air flow, specified and actual
4) Return air flow, specified and actual
5) Outside air flow, specified and actual
6) Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual
7) Inlet pressure
8) Discharge pressure
9) Sheave Make/Size/Bore
10) Number of Belts/Make/Size
11) Fan RPM
g. Return Air/Outside Air Data:
1) Identification/location
2) Design air flow
3) Actual air flow
4) Design return air flow
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 99
5) Actual return air flow
6) Design outside air flow
7) Actual outside air flow
8) Return air temperature
9) Outside air temperature
10) Required mixed air temperature
11) Actual mixed air temperature
12) Design outside/return air ratio
13) Actual outside/return air ratio
h. Exhaust/Supply Fan Data:
1) Location
2) Air flow, specified and actual
3) External static pressure, specified and actual
4) Inlet pressure
5) Discharge pressure
6) Fan RPM
i. Duct Traverse:
1) System zone/branch
2) Duct size
3) Area
4) Design velocity
5) Design air flow
6) Test velocity
7) Test air flow
8) Duct static pressure
9) Air temperature
10) Air correction factor
j. Duct Leak Test:
1) Description of ductwork under test
2) Duct design operating pressure
3) Duct design test static pressure
4) Duct capacity, air flow
5) Maximum allowable leakage duct capacity times leak factor
6) Test apparatus
a) Blower
b) Orifice, tube size
c) Orifice size
d) Calibrated
7) Test static pressure
8) Test orifice differential pressure
9) Leakage
3.14 VRF SYSTEM PROJECT SUPERVISION
A. General:
1. VRF Manufacturer shall provide on-site Project Supervision as outlined in this specification
section, providing: onsite technical review of installed VRF systems, review of activities
related to the installation of the VRF system, VRF system components and associated
controls.
2. All Project Supervision field activities shall be completed by an employee of the VRF
manufacturer whose primary job responsibilities are to provide direct technical support of
their product; sales staff or in-house support staff are not permitted to complete this scope of
work.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 100
3. A factory certified representative may assist the VRF manufacturer’s personnel in the
completion of certain elements of work contained within this specification. Activities
completed by a Factory Certified Representative shall be supervised onsite by the VRF
manufacturer. Certified representatives shall not be used in lieu of the manufacturer’s
personnel.
4. The installing contractor shall assist the VRF manufacturer, in their completion of the system
review and have available onsite a technician with appropriate diagnostic tools, materials and
equipment, as required, for the duration of the inspection process. The technician assisting
the VRF manufacturer shall be fully licensed and insured to complete necessary duties as
directed by the VRF manufacturer.
5. The installing contractor shall have been certified by the manufacturer to install VRF systems,
having attended and successfully completed a minimum 3- day VRF Service & Installation
course at an approved training facility. A copy of this certificate shall be presented to the
VRF manufacturer prior to the commencement of installation activity.
6. VRF manufacturer shall provide [4] onsite visits during the course of the project’s completion.
Additional site visits, if requested, shall require approval by the owner’s representative and
will be billed accordingly.
7. Onsite visits shall be conducted at installation milestones noted below. The installing
contractor is responsible to coordinate each visit at the appropriate milestone, giving the VRF
manufacturer a minimum 2-week notice prior to each visit.
a. Project milestones
1) Project Kick Off meeting
2) Site Visit at 25% project completion
3) Site Visit at 50% project completion
4) Final Inspection prior to Commissioning of the VRF System
B. Project Close Out Documents:
1. Documents completed during the project Supervision process shall be compiled and
presented to the owner’s representative at the completion of field activities.
2. Close out documentation shall include
a. Project Supervision report outlining activities completed under this scope of work
b. As-built VRF design file depicting Model numbers and BTU capacity ratings of equipment
installed, refrigerant pipe size & connection lengths between each system component,
calculated refrigerant charge.
c. Issue report.
3.15 VRF SYSTEM OWNER TRAINING AND TECHNICAL SUPPORT
A. The VRF manufacturer shall provide the owner’s representative a minimum 16-hour VRF
Operation and Maintenance training class covering systems installed under this scope of work.
B. Training program is to be provided at the time of Owner occupancy.
C. Owner shall provide a suitable location, onsite, to conduct the VRF Operation and Maintenance
class.
D. Training material shall be provided to participants in electronic format.
E. Contact your region’s [MANUFACTURER] VRF installation and service manager for information
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
HVAC 230000 - 101
and pricing related to services required under this projects scope of work.
END OF SECTION 230000
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - i
SECTION 26 00 00
ELECTRICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND REFERENCES ........................................................................... 1
1.2 DEFINITIONS ...................................................................................................................................... 1
1.3 SCOPE ................................................................................................................................................ 2
1.4 RELATED WORK UNDER OTHER SECTIONS ................................................................................. 3
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS ..................................................................................................... 4
1.6 SUBMITTALS ...................................................................................................................................... 4
1.7 SURVEYS AND MEASUREMENTS ................................................................................................... 8
1.8 COORDINATION ................................................................................................................................ 8
1.9 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION ........................................................................ 8
1.10 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION DRAWINGS ................................................... 9
1.11 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................... 10
1.12 TYPICAL DETAILS ........................................................................................................................... 10
1.13 SLEEVES, INSERTS ........................................................................................................................ 10
1.14 CORING, DRILLING ......................................................................................................................... 10
1.15 FIRESTOPPING, SMOKEPROOFING AND WATERPROOFING ................................................... 10
1.16 COMMISSIONING OF SYSTEMS .................................................................................................... 10
1.17 ACCESSIBILITY ................................................................................................................................ 11
1.18 SUPPLEMENTARY SUPPORTING STEEL ..................................................................................... 11
1.19 TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................... 11
1.20 PORTABLE AND DETACHABLE PARTS ........................................................................................ 11
1.21 RECORD DRAWINGS, PROJECT CLOSEOUT .............................................................................. 12
1.22 GUARANTEE/WARRANTY .............................................................................................................. 12
1.23 OPERATING, INSTRUCTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS .................................................... 13
1.24 SERVICE CHARACTERISTICS........................................................................................................ 13
1.25 QUALITY ASSURANCE .................................................................................................................... 14
1.26 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING ......................................................................................... 15
1.27 TEMPORARY POWER AND LIGHTING .......................................................................................... 15
1.28 STAGING AND SCAFFOLDING ....................................................................................................... 16
1.29 EXTRA MATERIALS ......................................................................................................................... 16
1.30 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS.............................................................................................................. 16
PART 2 – PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................................... 16
2.1 GENERAL ......................................................................................................................................... 16
2.2 ARC-FLASH HAZARD WARNING .................................................................................................... 17
2.3 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS ............................................................................................................ 17
2.4 WIRING MATERIALS ........................................................................................................................ 18
2.5 OUTLET, JUNCTION, PULL BOXES AND WIRING TROUGHS FOR ALL SYSTEMS ................... 19
2.6 WIRING DEVICES ............................................................................................................................ 20
2.7 GROUNDING REQUIREMENTS ...................................................................................................... 22
2.8 PHASING AND COLOR CODING .................................................................................................... 23
2.9 ENCLOSURES FOR INDIVIDUALLY MOUNTED OVERCURRENT AND SWITCHING DEVICES 23
2.10 METER CENTERS ............................................................................................................................ 23
2.11 PANELBOARDS ............................................................................................................................... 24
2.12 LOAD CENTERS .............................................................................................................................. 26
2.13 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS ............................................................................................ 26
2.14 CARTRIDGE FUSES ........................................................................................................................ 27
2.15 MOTOR CONTROLS ........................................................................................................................ 28
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - ii
2.16 LIGHTING FIXTURES ....................................................................................................................... 29
2.17 LOW VOLTAGE LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES........................................................................... 32
2.18 TELEPHONE/DATA EMPTY RACEWAYS AND OUTLETS SYSTEM............................................. 34
2.19 COMPUTER EMPTY RACEWAYS AND OUTLETS SYSTEM ........................................................ 35
2.20 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM ..................................................................................................................... 35
2.21 ACCESS PANELS ............................................................................................................................ 43
2.22 EMERGENCY RESPONDER RADIO COVERAGE SYSTEM ......................................................... 44
2.23 RESIDENTIAL TELECOMMUNICATIONS FITOUT ......................................................................... 46
2.24 ELEVATOR WORK ........................................................................................................................... 48
2.25 VIDEO INTERCOM SYSTEM ........................................................................................................... 49
PART 3 EXECUTION .................................................................................................................................. 53
3.1 BASIC REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................................................. 53
3.2 TESTING REQUIREMENTS & INSTRUCTIONS ............................................................................. 54
3.3 BRANCH CIRCUITRY ....................................................................................................................... 59
3.4 REQUIREMENTS GOVERNING ELECTRICAL WORK IN DAMP OR WET LOCATIONS ............. 60
3.5 REQUIREMENTS GOVERNING ELECTRIC WORK IN AIR HANDLING SPACES ........................ 60
3.6 UNDERGROUND CONDUIT BANKS ............................................................................................... 61
3.7 IDENTIFICATION AND TAGGING ................................................................................................... 62
3.8 LIMITING NOISE PRODUCED BY ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ................................................. 64
3.9 SUPPORTS AND FASTENINGS ...................................................................................................... 64
3.10 SPLICING AND TERMINATING WIRES AND CABLES .................................................................. 65
3.11 PULLING WIRES INTO CONDUITS AND RACEWAYS .................................................................. 66
3.12 REQUIREMENTS FOR THE INSTALLATION OF JUNCTION BOXES, OUTLET BOXES AND
PULL BOXES .................................................................................................................................... 66
3.13 LOCATING AND ROUTING OF CIRCUITRY ................................................................................... 68
3.14 INSTALLING CIRCUITRY ................................................................................................................. 69
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 1
SECTION 26 00 00
ELECTRICAL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND REFERENCES
A. Include “General Requirements” and applicable parts of Division 1 as part of this section.
B. Examine all other sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work under this
Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this section. Where paragraphs of
this section conflict with similar paragraphs of Division 1, requirements of this section shall
prevail.
C. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this section.
Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract.
D. The Subcontractor shall be responsible for filing all documents, payment of all fees, and securing
of all inspections and approvals necessary for the work of this section.
E. The Electrical Subcontractor shall carry in the Bid Price all Utility Company and Municipal back
charges for all materials furnished and work performed by them in conjunction with this Contract
and pay same to the respective agency upon demand. The Electrical Subcontractor shall not be
entitled to additional compensation after the submittal of his bid price should he fail, for any
reason, to obtain the total back charge costs to be incurred by the Local Utility Companies or
Municipal Agencies.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. As used in this section, “provide” means “furnish and install”, and “POS” means “Provided Under
Other Sections”.
B. As used in the Contract Drawings and Specifications for Electrical work, certain non-technical
words shall be understood to have specific meanings as follows, regardless of indications to the
contrary in the General Conditions of other documents governing the Electrical work.
1. “Furnish” means: Purchase and deliver to the project site complete with every necessary
appurtenance and support, all as part of the Electrical work. Purchasing shall include
payment of all sales taxes and other surcharges as may be required to assure that purchased
item(s) are free of all liens, claims, or encumbrances.
2. “Install” means: Unload at the delivery point at the site and perform every operation
necessary to establish secure mounting and correct operation at the proper location in the
project, all as part of the Electrical work.
3. “Provide” means: “Furnish” and “Install”.
4. “New” means: Manufactured within the past two (2) years and never before used.
C. Except where modified by a specific notation to the contrary, it shall be understood that the
indication and/or description of any electrical item in the Contract Drawings or Specifications for
Electrical work carries with it the instruction to furnish, install and connect the item as part of the
Electrical work, regardless of whether or not this instruction is explicitly stated.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 2
D. It shall be understood that the Specifications and Drawings for Electrical work are complimentary
and are to be taken together for a complete interpretation of the Electrical work except that
indications on the Contract Drawings, which refer to an individual element of work, take
precedence over the Specifications where they conflict.
1.3 SCOPE
A. Perform work and provide material and equipment as shown on Drawings and as specified or
indicated in this Section of the Specifications. Completely coordinate work of this Section with
work of other trades and provide a complete and fully functional installation.
1. Primary electric service duct bank.
2. Secondary electric service including underground conduit bank and secondary service
entrance feeders, from the utility company pad mounted transformer, building grounding
electrode and main service disconnect.
3. Interior secondary distribution systems including main switchboard, dry type indoor
transformers, all distribution panelboards, motor controls, motor control centers, magnetic
starters, overcurrent and switching devices, panelboards, raceways, cables, wiring, junction
and pull boxes, wireways, and all other components required for complete electrical
distribution system.
4. All lighting systems (indoor and outdoor, normal, night, emergency and exit) including all
fixtures, lamps, mounting accessories, switches, controls, outlets, wiring, raceways, and all
other components and fittings required for a complete lighting system.
5. Telephone system wiring and outlets.
6. Grounding and bonding of all electrical systems and equipment.
7. Fire alarm system complete with all devices and wiring including municipal connections.
8. Wiring devices (switches and receptacles) complete with associated wallplates.
9. Power wiring to HVAC, plumbing and fire protection equipment.
10. Video intercom entry system complete with all devices and wiring.
11. Data raceway system wiring and outlets.
12. Testing of all electrical systems.
13. Access panels (furnish only).
14. Coordination between electrical and other trades.
15. Power wiring for elevators and associated equipment.
16. Lighting control and dimming system.
17. Cable/Media and TV systems.
18. All other systems hereinafter specified or indicated on the Contract Drawings, complete,
leaving ready an electrical system in perfect operating condition.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 3
19. All required staging and scaffolding of any height.
20. All penetrations through walls, floors, and ceilings shall be sealed and made airtight to
comply with the architectural requirements and the Passive House PHIUS certification
guidelines.
B. Drawings and Specifications form complimentary requirements; provide work specified and not
shown, and work shown and not specified as though explicitly required by both. Although work is
not specifically shown or specified, provide supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances, devices and materials obviously necessary for a sound, secure and complete
installation.
C. Give notices, file plans, obtain permits and licenses, pay fees and back charges, and obtain
necessary approvals from Authorities that have jurisdiction as required to perform work in
accordance with all legal requirements and with Specifications, Drawings, Addenda and Change
Orders, all of which are part of Contract Documents.
1.4 RELATED WORK UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
A. The following items are not included in this section and will be performed under the designated
sections.
1. Temporary Facilities.
2. Earthwork: Excavation and backfill.
3. Concrete:
a. Equipment foundations.
b. Housekeeping pads.
c. Concrete encasement for conduit banks.
d. Light pole bases.
e. Rebar for items “a, b, c & d” above.
4. Masonry: All openings in masonry walls.
5. Waterproofing, Dampproofing and Caulking.
6. Roofing and Flashing.
7. Painting: All painting except as specified herein.
8. Finish Carpentry and Millwork.
9. Steel Doors and Frames.
10. Finish Hardware.
11. Elevators and Lifts.
12. Fire Protection.
13. Plumbing.
14. HVAC.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 4
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with all applicable Federal and State laws, and all Local Codes, By-laws and Ordinances.
B. Where provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the
latter shall govern. Where the contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or
regulations, the contract provisions shall govern unless the Architect rules otherwise.
C. Request inspections from Authorities having jurisdiction, obtain all permits and pay for all fees
and inspection certificates as applicable and/or required. All permits and certificates shall be
turned over to the Owners at the completion of the work. Copies of permits shall be given to the
resident engineer prior to the start of work.
D. Unless otherwise specified or indicated, materials and workmanship and equipment performance
shall conform with the latest edition of the following standards, codes, Specifications,
requirements and regulations:
1. State Building Code.
2. State Electrical Code.
3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
4. Local Town Regulations and By-Laws.
5. Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. (UL).
6. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA).
7. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
E. All Electrical work shall meet or exceed any other state and local codes and/or Authorities having
jurisdiction including all other standards indicated herein.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. This paragraph shall supplement Division 1.
B. Definitions:
1. Shop Drawings: Information prepared by the Contractor to illustrate portions of the work in
more detail than shown in the Contract Documents.
2. Coordination Drawings: Detailed, large-scale layout Shop Drawings showing HVAC,
Electrical, Plumbing and Fire Protection work superimposed to identify conflicts and ensure
inter-coordination of Mechanical, Electrical, Architectural, Structural and other work.
3. Manufacturer’s Product Data: Information prepared by the manufacturer which depicts
standard equipment.
C. Submittals, Procedures and Format:
1. Review submittal packages for compliance with Contract Documents and then submit to
Architect for review. Submit transparency and two (2) blue or black-line reproductions of
each Shop Drawing larger than 8-1/2” x 11”. Submit eight (8) sets of each smaller shop
drawing. After review, transparency original of each large Shop Drawing and six (6) sets of
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 5
each small shop drawing will be returned with reviewer’s marks. Electronically submitted
shop drawings are acceptable.
2. Each Shop Drawing shall indicate in title block, and each Product Data package shall indicate
on cover sheet, the following information:
a. Title.
b. Name and location of project.
c. Names of Architect, Engineer, Contractor and Subcontractor(s).
d. Names of Manufacturer, Supplier, Vendor, etc.
e. Date of submittal.
f. Whether original submittal or resubmitted.
3. Shop Drawings and/or Manufacturer’s Product Data shall contain detailed dimensional
Drawings, accurate and complete description of materials of construction, manufacturer’s
published performance characteristics and capacity ratings (performance data alone is not
acceptable), electrical requirements and wiring diagrams. Drawings shall clearly indicate
location (terminal block or wire number), voltage and function for all field terminations, and
other information necessary to demonstrate compliance with all requirements of Contract
Documents.
D. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. The Architect’s Mechanical/Electrical design for each project is based on the single
manufacturer listed in the schedule or shown on the Contract Drawings. In Division 26 of
these Specifications certain “Alternate Manufacturers” are listed as being acceptable. These
are acceptable only if, as a minimum, they:
a. Meet all performance criteria listed in the schedules and outlined in the Specifications.
b. Have identical operating characteristics to those called for in the Specifications.
c. Fit within the available space it was designed for, including space for maintenance and
component removal, with no modifications to either the space or the product. Clearances
to walls, ceilings and other equipment will be at least equal to those shown on the
Contract Documents. The fact that a manufacturer’s name appears as acceptable shall
not be taken to mean the Architect has determined that the manufacturer’s products will
fit within the available space. This determination is solely the responsibility of the
Contractor.
d. For equipment mounted in areas where structural matters are a consideration, the
products must have a weight no greater than the product listed in the schedules or
Specifications.
e. Products must adhere to all architectural considerations including, but not limited to,
being the same size and of the same physical appearance as scheduled or specified
products.
E. Substitutions: Substitution of products by manufacturers other than those listed shall only be done
in accordance with subparagraph “F” “Substitutions and Deviations”.
F. Substitutions and Deviations:
1. Deviations from the Contract Documents and the substitution of materials or equipment
relative to the “Acceptable Manufacturers” referred to above shall be requested individually in
writing whether deviations result from field conditions, standard shop practice, or other cause.
Submit letter with transmittal of Shop Drawings which flags the substitution or deviation to the
attention of the Architect. The letter shall describe changes in the system shown and
physical characteristics (connections to adjacent materials, electrical services, service access
requirements, and other characteristics), and differences in operating characteristics or
cycles.
2. Without letters flagging the substitution or deviation to the Architect, it is possible that the
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 6
Architect may not notice such substitution or deviation or may not realize its ramifications.
Therefore, if such letters are not submitted to the Architect, the Contractor shall hold the
Architect and his consultants harmless for any and all adverse consequences resulting from
the deviations being implemented. Adverse consequences shall include, but not be limited
to, excessive noise, excessive maintenance, shortened longevity, spatial coordination
problems, and inadequate performance versus scheduled design. This shall apply
regardless of whether the Architect has reviewed or approved Shop Drawings containing the
deviation, and will be strictly enforced.
3. Do not request substitute materials or equipment unless identical material or equipment has
been operated successfully for at least three (3) consecutive years. Such materials and
equipment shall be a regular cataloged item shown in the current catalog of the
manufacturer. When deviation or substitution is permitted, coordinate fully with related
changes to Architectural, Structural, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Mechanical, and other work.
Ensure that related changes necessary for coordination of substituted items are made within
the Contract Price. Assume full responsibility for safety, operation and performance of the
altered system. Any extra costs incurred to the project based on the use of alternate
manufacturers shall be borne by the Contractor who has requested the substitution.
4. Substitutions of equipment, systems, etc. requiring approval of local Authorities must comply
with such regulations and be filed by the Contractor (should filing be necessary).
5. Consideration will not be given to claims that the substituted item meets the performance
requirements with lesser construction. Performance, as delineated in schedules and in the
Specifications, shall be interpreted as minimum performance.
6. Approval of proposed deviations or substitutions, if any, will be made at discretion of
Architect.
7. If equipment is proposed for substitution that is not tested and rated according to industry-
wide standards, the Architect shall have the right to have performance tests completed, at the
Contractor’s expense, to confirm the manufacturer’s performance claims.
G. Submittal Notations: Submittals will be returned from the Architect marked as illustrated below:
NO EXCEPTION TAKEN
NOT ACCEPTED
ACCEPTED AS NOTED
REVISE AND RESUBMIT
1. Checking is only for general conformance with the design concept of the project and general
compliance with the information given in the Contract Documents. Any action shown is
subject to the requirements of the Contract Drawings and Specifications. Contractor is
responsible for dimensions which shall be confirmed and correlated at the job site; fabrication
process and techniques of construction; coordination of his work with that of all other trades;
and the satisfactory performance of his work.
H. Schedule: Incorporate the Shop Drawing review period into the construction schedule so that
work is not delayed. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for delays caused by not
incorporating the following Shop Drawing review time requirements into his project schedule.
Allow at least ten (10) working days, exclusive of transmittal time, for review each time Shop
Drawing is submitted or resubmitted with the exception that fifteen (15) working days, exclusive of
transmittal time, are required for the following:
1. Motor control wiring diagram submittals.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 7
2. Short circuit and coordination studies.
3. Coordination Drawings, if required by this Specification.
4. If more than five (5) Shop Drawings of this trade are received in one (1) calendar week.
I. List of Proposed Equipment and Materials: Within four (4) weeks after Award of Contract and
before ordering materials or equipment, submit a complete list of proposed materials and
equipment and indicate manufacturer’s names and addresses. No consideration will be given to
partial lists submitted out of sequence.
J. Responsibility:
1. The intent of submittal review is to check for capacity, rating, and certain construction
features. Contractor shall ensure that work meets requirements of the Contract Documents
regarding information that pertains to fabrication processes or means, methods, techniques,
sequences and procedures of construction; and for coordination of work of this and other
Sections. Work shall comply with submittals marked “REVIEWED” to extent that they agree
with the Contract Documents. Submittal review shall not diminish responsibility under this
Contract for dimensional coordination, quantities, installation, wiring, supports and access for
service, nor the shop drawing errors or deviations from requirements of the Contract
Documents. The Architect’s noting of some errors while overlooking others will not excuse
the Contractor for proceeding in error. Contract Document requirements are not limited,
waived, nor superseded in any way by review.
2. Inform Subcontractors, Manufacturers, Suppliers, etc. of scope and limited nature of review
process and enforce compliance with the Contract Documents.
K. Material and equipment requiring Shop Drawing and/or Manufacturer’s Data Submittals shall
include but not be limited to:
1. Light fixtures.
2. Switchboard and motor controls.
3. Panelboards.
4. Overcurrent and switching devices.
5. Wiring devices and wall plates.
6. Video intercom entry system with wiring diagram.
7. Fire alarm system with wiring diagram and schedule.
8. Telephone system with wiring diagram.
9. Wiring and cables.
10. Conduit.
11. Boxes and fittings.
12. Safety switches.
13. Lighting control system.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 8
1.7 SURVEYS AND MEASUREMENTS
A. Base all required measurements, both horizontal and vertical, on reference points established by
the General Contractor and be responsible for the correct laying out of the Electrical work. In the
event of a discrepancy between actual measurements and those indicated, notify the General
Contractor in writing. Do not proceed with the work required until written instructions have been
issued by the General Contractor.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, and Electrical Drawings are diagrammatic. They indicate
general arrangements of Mechanical and Electrical systems and other work. They do not show
all offsets required for coordination nor do they show the exact routings and locations needed to
coordinate with Structural and other trades and to meet Architectural requirements.
B. Work shall be performed in cooperation with other trades on the project and so scheduled as to
allow speedy and efficient completion of the work.
C. Furnish to other trades advance information on locations and sizes of all frames, boxes, sleeves
and openings needed for their work. Furnish information and Shop Drawings necessary to allow
trades affected by the work to install their work properly and without delay.
D. In all spaces, prior to installation of visible material and equipment, including access panels,
review Architectural Drawings for exact locations and where not definitely indicated, request
information from Architect. Where the Electrical work shall interfere with the work of other trades,
assist in coordinating the space conditions to make satisfactory adjustments before installation.
Without extra cost to the Owners, make reasonable modifications to the work as required by
normal Structural interferences. Pay the General Contractor for additional openings, or relocating
and/or enlarging existing openings through concrete floors, walls, beams and roof required for
any work which was not properly coordinated. Maintain maximum headroom at all locations. All
piping, duct, conduit, and associated components to be as tight to underside of structure as
possible.
E. If any Electrical work has been installed before coordination with other trades so as to cause
interference with the work of such trades, all necessary adjustments and corrections shall be
made by the trades involved without extra cost to the Owners.
F. Where conflicts or potential conflicts exist and engineering guidance is desired, submit sketch of
proposed resolution to Architect for review and approval.
G. Protect all materials and work of other trades from damage which may be caused by the
Electrical work, and repair all damages without extra cost to the Owners.
1.9 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION
A. The HVAC Subcontractor shall furnish and install various electrical items relating to the heating
and ventilating equipment and control apparatus. The Electrical Subcontractor shall be required
to connect power wiring to this equipment unless noted otherwise.
B. The HVAC and Electrical Subcontractors shall coordinate their respective portions of the work, as
well as the electrical characteristics of the heating, ventilating and air conditioning equipment.
C. All power wiring and local disconnect switches will be provided by the Electrical Subcontractor for
the line voltage power. All control and interlocking wiring shall be the responsibility of the HVAC
Subcontractor.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 9
D. 120V and above power wiring sources extended and connected to HVAC control panels,
transformers and switches shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Subcontractor. All low
voltage thermostat, and any switch wiring shall be the responsibility of the HVAC Subcontractor.
E. Temperature control and equipment wiring shall be installed by the Heating and Ventilating
Subcontractor.
F. Pipe heat tracing shall be furnished and installed by the Plumbing Subcontractor. Power
connections shall be by the Electrical Subcontractor.
G. The Electrical Subcontractor will provide all magnetic starters except those furnished as an
integral part of packaged equipment.
1.10 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Coordination Drawings:
1. The Sheetmetal Subcontractor shall prepare a complete set of electronic type background
Drawings at a scale not less than 1/8” equals 1’-0”, showing structure and other information
as needed for coordination. He shall show sheetmetal layout thereon. These will be the
Coordination Drawings.
2. The main paths of egress and for equipment removal, from main Mechanical and Electrical
rooms must be clearly shown on the Coordination Drawings.
3. Each of the below specialty trades shall add its work to these background Drawings with
appropriate elevations and grid dimensions. Specialty trade information is required for fan
rooms and mechanical rooms, horizontal exits from duct shafts, crossovers, and for spaces in
and above ceilings where congestion of work may occur such as corridors, and even entire
floors. Drawings shall indicate horizontal and vertical dimensions, to avoid interference with
structural framing, ceilings, partitions, and other services.
a. Specialty Trades:
1) Plumbing System.
2) HVAC Piping and Associated Control System.
3) Electrical.
4) Sheet Metal Work.
5) Sprinkler System.
4. Each specialty trade shall sign and date each Coordination Drawing. Return Drawings to the
Sheetmetal Subcontractor, who shall route them sequentially to all specialty trades.
5. Where conflicts occur with placement of materials of various trades, the Sheetmetal
Subcontractor will be responsible to coordinate the available space to accommodate all
trades. Any resulting adjustments shall be initialed and dated by the specialty trade. The
Sheetmetal Subcontractor shall then final date and sign each Coordination Drawing. If he
cannot resolve conflicts, the decision of the General Contractor shall be final, subject to the
approval of the Architect.
6. A Subcontractor who fails to promptly review and incorporate his work on the Contract
Drawings shall assume full responsibility of any installation conflicts affecting his work and of
any schedule ramifications.
7. The Sheetmetal Subcontractor shall make copies of all coordination Drawings. Fabrication
shall not start until such copies of completed Drawings are received by the Architect/Engineer
and have been reviewed.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 10
8. Review of Coordination Drawings shall not diminish responsibility under this Contract for final
coordination of installation and maintenance clearances of all systems and equipment with
Architectural, Structural, Mechanical, and Electrical Contractors.
1.11 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The arrangement of all Electrical work shown on the Contract Drawings is diagrammatic only and
indicates the minimum requirements of the work. Conditions at the building including actual
measurements shall determine the details of the installation. All work shall be laid out and
installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and patching.
B. Review the Architectural Drawings and Specifications before ordering any material and
equipment. Any discrepancies shall be brought to the attention of the Architect for his
determination prior to proceeding with the work.
1.12 TYPICAL DETAILS
A. Typical details where shown on the Contract Drawings shall apply to each and every item of the
project where such items are applicable. They are not repeated in full on the Contract Drawings,
which in many cases are diagrammatic only, but with the intention that such details shall be
incorporated in full. Any alternate method proposed for use by the Contractor shall have the prior
approval of the Architect.
1.13 SLEEVES, INSERTS
A. Furnish and install all sleeves, inserts, anchor bolts and similar items to be set into masonry or
concrete, as required for Mechanical and Electrical work. Internal diameter of sleeve ball shall be
1/2" larger than the outside diameter of the pipe or insulation covered line passing through it.
1.14 CORING, DRILLING
A. Core, cut and/or drill all small holes 4.5” diameter or less in walls, floors and ceiling required for
the installation of sleeves, supports, and conduit for the Electrical work.
1.15 FIRESTOPPING, SMOKEPROOFING AND WATERPROOFING
A. All penetrations made through fire rated assemblies (structures or partitions) shall be completely
and properly fire sealed with the appropriate firestop systems installed in accordance with the
Manufacturer’s recommendations. The firestop material UL listed fire rating shall match or
exceed the fire rated assemblies. Verify with Architect if project is utilizing a specified product. If
not, provide product manufactured by Hilti, Nelson or STI.
B. Provide waterproofing of all materials which penetrate a floor, exterior wall, slab or roof. All
sleeves shall extend a minimum of 3 inches above floor or roof. All penetrations thru building
foundation walls shall utilize Link-Seal products or approved equal.
1.16 COMMISSIONING OF SYSTEMS
A. Provide the services of a factory authorized technician to instruct and direct the Owner in the
operation and maintenance of indicated systems and/or equipment. The Electrical Subcontractor
shall be available throughout the entire Commissioning Phase to operate the systems/equipment.
Systems and/or equipment that shall be commissioned include the following:
1. Panelboards.
2. Circuit breaker.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 11
3. Disconnect switches.
4. Toggle switches.
5. Occupancy/Vacancy sensors.
6. Video Intercom Entry System
7. Lighting Control systems.
8. Fire Alarm systems.
9. Diesel generators.
10. Motor controls.
B. Upon completion of all tests, the Electrical Subcontractor shall repair and/or replace any defective
equipment. Once replaced and/or repaired, all Commissioning shall be performed.
C. Refer to Section 26 00 00 paragraph 3.2 for additional requirements.
1.17 ACCESSIBILITY
A. Install all work such that parts requiring periodic inspection, operation, maintenance and repair
are readily accessible.
B. Furnish all access panels appropriate to particular conditions, to be installed by trades having
responsibility for the construction of actual walls, floors or ceilings at required locations.
1.18 SUPPLEMENTARY SUPPORTING STEEL
A. Provide all supplementary (non-structural) steelwork required for mounting or supporting
equipment and materials.
B. Steelwork shall be firmly connected to building construction as required. Locations and methods
of attachment shall be approved by the Architect.
C. Steelwork shall be of sufficient strength to allow only minimum deflection in conformity with
manufacturer’s published requirements.
D. All supplementary steelwork shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner parallel to floor,
wall and ceiling construction: all turns shall be made at forty-five and ninety degrees, and/or as
dictated by construction and installation conditions.
E. All manufactured steel parts and fittings shall be galvanized.
1.19 TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Provide all tools and equipment required for the fabrication and installation of the Mechanical and
Electrical equipment at the site.
1.20 PORTABLE AND DETACHABLE PARTS
A. Contractors shall retain in their possession all portable and/or detachable parts and portions of
materials, devices, equipment, etc. necessary for the proper operation and maintenance of the
Mechanical and Electrical systems until final completion of the work, at which time they shall be
handed over to the Owners.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 12
1.21 RECORD DRAWINGS, PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A. As work progresses and for the duration of Contract, maintain a complete and separate set of
prints of Contract Drawings at job site at all times. Record work completed and all changes from
original Contract Drawings clearly and accurately including work installed as a modification or
addition to the original design. Work shall be updated on a weekly basis and shall be made
available for review by Architect. Failure to perform this work shall be reason for withholding
requisition payments. In addition, take photographs of all concealed equipment in gypsum board
ceilings, shafts, and other concealed, inaccessible work. At completion of work, make copies of
photographs with written explanation on back. These shall become part of Record Documents.
B. At completion of work prepare a complete set of Record Drawings utilizing AutoCAD produced
drawings showing all systems as actually installed, including all fire alarm and electrical circuitry.
Submit three (3) sets of prints to Architect for comments as to compliance with this section.
C. The Architect will not certify the accuracy of the Record Drawings. This is the sole responsibility
of the Electrical Contractor.
D. This trade shall submit the Record Drawings for approval by the Fire and Building Departments in
a form acceptable to the departments, when required by the jurisdiction.
E. Record Drawings shall show record condition of details, sections, riser diagrams, control changes
and corrections to schedules. Schedules shall show actual manufacturer, make and model
numbers of final equipment installation.
1.22 GUARANTEE/WARRANTY
A. Guarantee and 24 Hour Service:
1. Guarantee Work of this Section in writing for not less than one (1) year following the date of
acceptance by the Owner. If the equipment is used for temporary power etc, prior to
acceptance by the Owner, the bid price shall include an extended period of warranty covering
the one (1) year of occupancy, starting from the date of acceptance by the Owner. The
guarantee shall repair or replace defective materials, equipment, workmanship and
installation that develop within this period, promptly and to the Architect’s satisfaction and
correct damage caused in making necessary repairs and replacements under guarantee
within Contract Price.
2. In addition to guarantee requirements of Division 1 and of Subparagraph A above, obtain
written equipment and material warranties offered in manufacturer’s published data without
exclusion or limitation, in Owner’s name.
3. Upon receipt of notice from the Owner of failure of any part of the systems or equipment
during the warranty period, the affected part or parts shall be replaced by this Contractor
without any reimbursement.
4. Replace material and equipment that require excessive service during guarantee period as
defined and as directed by Architect.
5. Provide 24 hour service beginning on the date the project is accepted by the Owner, whether
or not fully occupied, and lasting until the termination of the guarantee period. Service shall
be at no cost to the Owner. Service can be provided by this Contractor or a separate service
organization. Choice of service organization shall be subject to Architect and Owner
approval. Submit name and a phone number that will be answered on a 24 hour basis each
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 13
day of the week, for the duration of the service.
6. Submit copies of equipment and material warranties to Architect before final payment.
7. At end of guarantee period, transfer manufacturer’s equipment and material warranties still in
force to Owner.
8. This paragraph shall not be interpreted to limit Owner’s rights under applicable codes and
laws and under this Contract.
9. PART 2 paragraphs of this Specification may specify warranty requirements that exceed
those of this paragraph. Those paragraphs shall govern.
10. Use of systems provided under this Section for temporary services and facilities shall not
constitute Final Acceptance of Work by Owner, and shall not initiate the guarantee period.
11. Provide manufacturer’s engineering and technical staff at site to analyze and rectify problems
that develop during guarantee period immediately. If problems cannot be rectified
immediately to Owner’s satisfaction, advise the Architect in writing, describe efforts to rectify
situation, and provide analysis of cause of problem. The Architect and/or Engineer will direct
course of action.
1.23 OPERATING, INSTRUCTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Refer to Section 01700 – CONTRACT CLOSEOUT for submittal procedures pertaining to
operating and maintenance manuals.
B. Each copy of the approved operating and maintenance manual shall contain copies of approved
Shop Drawings, equipment literature, cuts, bulletins, details, equipment and engineering data
sheets and typewritten instructions relative to the care and maintenance for the operation of the
equipment, all properly indexed. Each manual shall have the following minimum contents:
1. Table of Contents.
2. Introduction:
a. Explanation of manual and its purpose and use.
b. Description of the electrical systems.
c. Safety precautions necessary for equipment.
d. Illustrations, schematics and diagrams.
e. Installation drawing.
3. Maintenance:
a. Maintenance and lubricating instructions.
b. Replacement charts.
c. Trouble-shooting charts for equipment components.
d. Testing instructions for each typical component.
e. Two (2) typed sets of instructions for ordering spare parts. Each set shall include name,
price, telephone number and address of where they may be obtained.
4. Manufacturer’s Literature:
a. The equipment for which Shop Drawings have been submitted and approved.
1.24 SERVICE CHARACTERISTICS
A. Primary Utility Voltage: 13.8 kv
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 14
B. Secondary Building Voltage – Low Level: 120/208.
C. All equipment and wiring shall be suitable for the applied voltage.
1.25 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The requirements of the State Building Code and Local regulations establish the minimum
acceptable quality of workmanship and materials, and all work shall conform thereto unless more
stringent requirements are indicated or specified herein.
B. All work shall comply with the latest editions of the codes as referenced herein.
C. Follow manufacturer’s directions for articles furnished, in addition to directions shown on
Drawings or specified herein.
D. Protect all work, materials, and equipment from damage during process of work. Replace all
damaged or defective work, materials and equipment without additional cost to the Owner.
E. All equipment and materials for permanent installation shall be the products of recognized
manufacturers and shall be new.
F. Equipment and materials shall:
1. Where normally subject to Underwriters Laboratory Inc. listing or labeling services, be so
listed and labeled.
2. Be without blemish or defect.
3. Not be used for temporary light and power purposes.
4. Be in accordance with the latest applicable NEMA standards.
5. Buy products which will meet with the acceptance of all Authorities having jurisdiction over
the work. Where such acceptance is contingent upon having the products examined, tested
and certified by Underwriters or other recognized testing laboratory, the product shall be so
examined, tested and certified.
G. Except for conduit, conduit fittings, outlet boxes, wire and cable, all items of equipment or material
of one generic type shall be the product of one manufacturer throughout.
H. For items which are to be installed but not purchased as part of the Electrical work, the Electrical
work shall include:
1. The coordination of their delivery.
2. Their unloading from delivery trucks driven into any point on the property line at grade level.
3. Their safe handling and field storage until the time of permanent placement in the project.
4. The correction of any damage, defacement or corrosion to which they may have been
subjected. Replacement, if necessary, shall be coordinated with the Contractor who
originally purchased the item.
5. Field erection and internal wiring as necessary for their proper operation.
6. Mounting in place, including the purchase and installation of all dunnage, supporting
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 15
members, and fastenings, necessary to adapt them to architectural and structural conditions.
I. Items which are to be installed but not purchased as part of the electric work shall be carefully
examined upon delivery to the project. Claims that any of these items have been received in
such condition that their installation will require procedures beyond the reasonable scope of the
electric work will be considered only if presented in writing within one (1) week of the date of
delivery to the project of the items in question. The electric work includes all procedures,
regardless of how extensive, necessary to put into satisfactory operation, all items for which no
claims have been submitted as outlined above.
1.26 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. All materials for the work of this section shall be delivered, stored and handled so as to preclude
damage of any nature. Manufactured materials shall be delivered and stored in their original
containers, plainly marked with the products’ and manufacturer’s name. Materials in broken
containers or in packages showing watermarks or other evidence of damage, shall not be used
and shall be removed from the site.
1.27 TEMPORARY POWER AND LIGHTING
A. The Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish and install feeders of sufficient size from the Utility
Company’s power lines for the electric light and power requirements for the building while under
construction and until the permanent feeders and related equipment have been installed and are
in operation. Temporary lighting shall be based on a minimum of one watt per square foot
covering each and every square foot of floor area in the building. Sufficient wiring, lamps, and
outlets shall be installed to insure proper lighting in all rooms, space, stairwells, and corridors.
Minimum sized lamp used shall be 100 watt. Where higher lighting intensities are required by
Federal or State Standards of Laws or otherwise specified, the above specified wattage shall be
increased to provide these increased intensities.
B. All necessary transformers, meters, cables, panelboards, switches, temporary lamp replacements
and accessories required for the temporary light and power installation shall be provided by the
Electrical Subcontractor.
C. The Electrical Subcontractor shall provide and maintain on each floor of the building, a feeder or
feeders of sufficient capacity for the requirements of the entire floor and he shall provide a
sufficient number of outlets, located at convenient points so that extension cords of not over 50
feet in length will reach all work requiring temporary light or power.
D. The Electrical Subcontractor shall install and maintain the wiring and accessories for the offices of
the General Contractor and the Clerk of the Works as specified in the contract form.
E. All temporary Electrical work shall meet the requirements of the National Electrical Code Article
590 Temporary Wiring, the Local Utility Company, and all Federal Standards and Laws.
F. All temporary wiring and accessories thereto installed by the Electrical Subcontractor shall be
removed after their purposes have been served.
G. The General Contractor will pay for the cost of electric energy consumed by himself and by all of
his Subcontractors, unless otherwise indicated.
H. All lamps installed in permanent lighting fixtures and used for lighting during construction shall be
replaced by the Electrical Subcontractor just prior to date of Use and Occupancy or Final
Acceptance.
I. Provide all temporary lighting and power required above during the normal working hours of the
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 16
project or a total of ten (10) hours per normal working day; Saturdays, Sundays and legal
holidays are excluded. The ten hours per day shall include manning the temporary power and
lighting 1/2 hour before and 1/2 hour after a normal eight (8) hour working day. In addition to the
above, provide and maintain, to the satisfaction of the local Authorities having jurisdiction, all
temporary lighting and power that may be required for safety purposes. The Electrical
Subcontractor will be compensated by the General Contractor for any additional standby time,
materials or equipment required by the General Contractor or other Subcontractors beyond the
normal working hours, as defined above.
1.28 STAGING AND SCAFFOLDING
A. Provide staging and scaffolding for all the work of this section complying with Division 1
requirements.
1.29 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials as indicated below that match products installed, are packaged with
protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels clearly describing contents.
1. 10% of each total lamps installed.
2. 10% of each total circuit breakers installed.
3. 10% of each total fuses installed.
4. Ten (10) toggle switches and duplex receptacles.
5. 10% of total audio/visual appliances installed.
6. 10% of each total pull stations and smoke detectors installed.
1.30 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS
A. Equipment and work shall meet the restraint requirements for the designated Seismic Design
category. This shall include all installation and connections of material and equipment to the
building structure. Refer to Structural Drawings for Seismic Design category and ASCE7 for
electrical requirements.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Product Specifications are written in such a manner so as to specify what materials may be used
in a particular location or application and therefore do not indicate what is not acceptable or
suitable for a particular location or application. As an example: Non-metallic sheathed cable is
not specified; therefore it is not acceptable.
B. For purpose of establishing a standard of quality and not for purposes of limiting completion, the
basis of this Specification is upon specified models and types of equipment and materials, as
manufactured by specified manufacturers.
C. In all cases, standard cataloged materials and systems have been selected. Materials such as
lighting fixtures specially manufactured for this particular project, and not part of a manufacturer’s
standard product line, will not be acceptable. In the case of systems, the system components
shall be from a single source regularly engaged in supplying such systems. A proposed system
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 17
made up of a collection of various manufacturers products will be unacceptable.
D. Where Specifications list manufacturers names and/or “as approved” or “equal approved by
Designer”, other manufacturers equipment will be considered if equipment meets Specification
requirements and has all features of the specified items as are considered essential by the
Architect.
E. All materials shall be new and shall be UL listed.
2.2 ARC-FLASH HAZARD WARNING
A. In accordance with NFPA 110.16, all electrical equipment shall be provided with factory or field
marking which will warn personnel of potential electric arc flash hazards.
2.3 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
A. Raceways – General:
1. No raceway shall be used smaller than 3/4" diameter. No conduit shall have more than three
(3) 90° bends in any one run, and where necessary, pull boxes shall be provided.
2. Rigid metal conduit (RMC) conforming to, and installed in accordance with, Article 344 of
NFPA 70 shall be heavy wall zinc coated steel conforming to American Standard
Specifications C80-1 and may be used for service work, exterior work, slab work, and below
grade level slab, wet locations, and in mechanical rooms and where raceway may be
subjected to mechanical damage, i.e., loading docks, workshops, etc.
3. Intermediate metal conduit (IMC) conforming to, and installed in accordance with Article 342
of NFPA 70 shall be zinc coated steel and may be used in all areas similar to RMC.
4. Thin wall conduit (EMT), conforming to, and installed in accordance with, Article 358 of NFPA
70 shall be zinc coated steel, conforming to industry standards, may be used in masonry
block walls, stud partitions, above furred ceilings where exposed but not subject to
mechanical damage, and shall be used for fire alarm work.
5. Flexible metal conduit (FMC) conforming to, and installed in accordance with Article 348 of
NFPA 70 shall be used for connections to recessed light fixtures, vibrating equipment and
motors. All FMC shall be secured and supported in accordance with Article 348 of NFPA 70.
6. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit (LFMC) conforming to, and installed in accordance with
Article 350 of NFPA 70 shall be used for connections to light fixtures, vibrating equipment and
motors. All LFMC shall be secured and supported in accordance with Article 350 of NFPA
70. If used on roof applications, all LFMC shall be supported by sleepers approved by the
Architect prior to installation.
7. Rigid non-metallic conduit may be used at the Contractor’s option for underground electric
and telephone services outside the foundation wall and shall be polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
schedule 40 or 80, 90° C. If option of rigid non-metallic conduit is exercised, underground
runs outside the foundation wall shall be concrete encased at Contractor’s expense.
Schedule 40/80 conduit shall be installed in conformance with Article 352 of NFPA 70. Use
of type EB or A PVC conduit is not allowed.
8. PVC Schedule 40 may also be used for below grade slab circuits within building confines.
Below slab rigid non-metallic conduits do not require concrete encasement. Rigid non-
metallic conduits shall not be used in slabs. Rigid steel elbows or stubs shall be used for
penetrations from below slab or through exterior walls into building. PVC shall not be
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 18
installed within building. Raceways and fittings shall be produced by same manufacturer. All
PVC conduit shall comply with ANSI/UL 651.
9. PVC coated rigid metal conduit shall be used where indicated and conform to the following:
a. Prior to application of the PVC coatings, all conduits shall conform to Federal
Specification WW -C-581 E, ANSI Standard C80.1, UL Standard #6 and shall be hot dip
galvanized.
b. The PVC exterior coating shall have a nominal thickness of 40 mils and shall be applied
using a fluidized bed process.
c. Interior conduit, interior fitting surfaces and all threads shall all be protected by a two- part
2 mil urethane coating.
d. Interior and exterior coatings on conduit shall have sufficient flexibility to permit field
bending without damage.
10. Where indicated on the project drawings provide color coded EMT as follows:
a. Red – Fire and Emergency Systems.
b. Blue – Video, Network and Data Communication.
c. Green – Hospital and Healthcare.
11. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Wheatland Tube Company
b. Allied Tube
c. Western Tube & Conduit
d. Carlon
e. Perma-Cote Supreme
f. Cantex
12. Fittings:
a. Provide insulated bushings on all raceways that house conductors #4 AWG or larger at
all threaded fittings no matter what the size of the conductor.
b. Manufacturer’s standard fittings shall be used for raceway supports.
c. Expansion Fittings: Expansion fittings shall be used where structural and concrete
expansion joints occur and shall include a ground strap.
d. Couplings for rigid metal conduit and IMC shall be threaded type. Provide insulated
bushings.
e. All fittings for EMT conduit shall be steel. No die-cast fittings are allowed. Set screw and
compression connectors are allowed.
f. Threadless fittings for EMT shall be watertight compression type. All fittings shall be
concrete tight.
g. Cable supports in vertical raceways shall be of the split wedge type. Armored cable
supports for vertical runs to be of wire mesh basket design.
h. Wall entrance seals shall be equal to O.Z. Gedney type “WSK” or Link-Seal.
i. Couplings, elbows and other fittings used with rigid nonmetallic raceways shall be of the
solvent cemented type to secure a waterproof installation.
j. Acceptable manufacturers:
1) O.Z. Gedney
2) Crouse Hinds
3) American Fittings
4) Hubbell
5) Thomas & Betts
2.4 WIRING MATERIALS
A. Building Wire and Cable shall be copper with 600V insulation, THWN for branch circuitry and
XHHW for feeders.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 19
B. Conductors shall be of soft drawn 98% minimum conductivity properly refined copper, solid
construction where No. 10 AWG and smaller, stranded construction where No. 8 AWG and
larger.
C. Exterior of wires shall bear repetitive markings along their entire length indicating conductor size,
insulation type and voltage rating.
D. Exterior of wires shall be color coded, so as to indicate a clear differentiation between each phase
and between each phase and neutral. In all cases, grounded neutral wires and cables shall be
identified by the colors “white” or “gray”. In sizes and insulation types where factory applied
colors are not available, wires and cables shall be color coded by the application of colored
plastic tapes in overlapping turns at all terminal points, and in all boxes in which splices are
made. Colored tape shall be applied for a distance of 6 inches along the wires and cables, or
along their entire extensions beyond raceway ends, whichever is less.
E. Final connections to motors shall be made with 18” of neoprene sheathed flexible conduit.
F. Minimum branch circuit conductor size shall be No. 12 AWG installed in conduit. Motor control
circuit wiring shall be minimum No. 14 AWG installed in conduit.
G. Fire alarm and security system wiring shall be per manufacturer’s recommendations.
H. Other wires and cables required for the various systems described elsewhere in this section of
the Specifications shall be as specified herein, as shown on the Contract Drawings, or as
recommended by the manufacturer of the specific equipment for which they are used, all installed
in conduit.
I. Metal clad sheathed cable NFPA 70, type MC may be used for branch circuitry where shown and
where run concealed and not subject to physical damage. All type MC cable used shall contain a
full size insulated ground conductor. All conductors shall be copper. All type MC cable insulation
used shall have voltage rating of 600 volts, shall have a temperature rating of 75° C, and shall be
thermoplastic material. Armor material shall be steel and armor design shall be interlocked metal
tape. Fire alarm rated MC cable may be used for fire alarm work where concealed and
acceptable to the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction.
J. Within dwelling units only, type NM-B (nonmetallic-sheathed cable) may be used for both
exposed and concealed work in normally dry locations at temperatures not to exceed 90 deg. C
(with ampacity limited to that for 60 deg. C conductors) as specified in the 2008 National
Electrical Code. NM-B cable may be run in air voids of masonry block or tile walls where such
walls are not wet or damp locations. Voltage rating for NM-B cable is 600 volts. Type NM-B
cable shall meet or exceed UL Standard 83, UL Standard 719, Federal Specification A-A-59544,
and requirements of the National Electrical Code. Type NM-B cable shall be manufactured as 2,
3, or 4 conductor cable, with a ground wire. Copper conductors are annealed (soft) copper.
K. Wiring materials shall be manufactured by Southwire, Prysmian, General Cable, or equal.
2.5 OUTLET, JUNCTION, PULL BOXES AND WIRING TROUGHS FOR ALL SYSTEMS
A. Outlets:
1. Each outlet in wiring or raceway systems shall be provided with an outlet box to suit
conditions encountered. Boxes installed in normally wet locations shall be of cast-metal type
having hubs. Concealed boxes shall be cadmium plated or zinc coated sheet metal type.
Old work boxes with Madison clamps are not allowed in new construction.
2. Each box shall have sufficient volume to accommodate number of conductors in accordance
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 20
with requirements of NFPA 70. Boxes shall not be less than 1-1/2” deep unless shallower
boxes are required by structural conditions and are specifically approved by Architect.
Ceiling and bracket outlet boxes shall not be less than 4” octagonal except that smaller boxes
may be used where required by particular fixture to be installed. Flush or recessed fixtures
shall be provided with separate junction boxes when required by fixture terminal temperature
requirements. Switch and receptacle boxes shall be 4” square or of comparable volume.
3. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Appleton
b. Crouse Hinds
c. Steel City
d. RACO
B. Pull and Junction Boxes: Where necessary to terminate, tap off, or redirect multiple raceway runs
or to facilitate conductor installation, furnish and install appropriately designed boxes. Boxes
shall be fabricated from code gauge steel assembled with corrosion resistant machine screws.
Box size shall be as required by Code. Where intermediate cable supports are necessary
because of box dimensions, provide insulated removable core brackets to support conductors.
Junction boxes are to be equipped with barriers to separate circuits. Where splices are to be
made, boxes shall be large enough to provide ample work space. All conductors in boxes are to
be clearly tagged to indicate characteristics. Boxes shall be supported independently of
raceways. Junction boxes in moist or wet areas shall be galvanized type. Boxes larger than 4
inches square shall have hinged covers. Boxes larger than 12 inches in one dimension will be
allowed to have screw fastened covers, if a hinged cover would not be capable of being opened a
full 90 degrees due to installation location.
2.6 WIRING DEVICES
A. Provide wiring device type plates for all wall-mounted devices. All wall plates shall be smooth
high impact nylon for all areas, color as directed by the Architect. Provide galvanized steel for all
Utility, Electric and Mechanical Rooms.
B. Wiring devices standard for the project (i.e., with no specific type indicated) shall conform to the
following:
1. Visible part colors of wiring devices shall be as directed by the Architect for all areas. Provide
brown devices for all Utility, Electrical and Mechanical rooms.
2. Exclude compact or “despard” type devices.
C. Wiring device switches shall be toggle type, A.C. quiet design, specification grade, 20 amps on
120 volt circuits. Switches shall be mounted 48” to center line above finished floor unless noted
otherwise.
1. Single pole switch shall be equal to Hubbell No. 1221.
2. Double pole switch shall be equal to Hubbell No. 1222.
3. Three-way switch shall be equal to Hubbell No. 1223.
4. Four-way switch shall be equal to Hubbell No. 1224.
5. Single pole pilot light switch shall be equal to Hubbell No. HBL 1221PL.
6. Equivalent 277 volt 20 amp switches shall be used where required.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 21
D. Standard duplex convenience receptacles shall be 125 volt, 20 amps, three wire (two circuit wires
plus ground), “U-bar” ground NEMA slot configuration 5-20R specification grade. Receptacles
shall be mounted 18” to center line above finished floor unless noted otherwise.
1. Equal to Hubbell No. 5362.
2. Where indicated on plans provide receptacles with ground fault current interrupters, UL Class
A; 20A, 125V to be equal to Hubbell No. GF5362. All GFI receptacles shall be self-testing
type in compliance with UL 943.
E. Non-standard convenience receptacles and special purpose power supply receptacles shall be as
listed on plans.
F. Devices and device plates for flush wall devices which are not integrally equipped with same,
shall be as directed by the Architect.
G. For unfinished spaces, plates for surface-mounted wall devices which are not integrally equipped
with same, shall be galvanized sheet steel, formed raised type which does not overlap box.
Where for switches, such plates shall have toggle guards.
H. Where more than one wiring device is indicated in the same location, the devices shall be
mounted in gang under a common wall plate.
I. Mount duplex convenience and power receptacles vertically with grounding posts at top of device
unless otherwise indicated. Locate grounding post to left when horizontal mounting is indicated.
J. Wiring devices and associated hardware shall be manufactured by Leviton, Hubbell or Pass and
Seymour.
K. Floor Outlets (Poke-Thru Type):
1. Thru-floor assembly of floor outlets for power and communications shall be UL listed and
have a two-hour fire rating. Core drilling shall be by Electrical Subcontractor.
2. Complete assembly shall consist of a flange assembly, slide holder assembly, and insert
assembly.
3. Length of extension raceway shall be sufficient to penetrate bottom of slab. Coordinate
ordering of raceway with type of slab.
4. Thru-floor assemblies shall be as manufactured by Raceway Components, Inc., or equal.
L. Dimmer Controls:
1. All devices shall be UL listed specifically for the required loads (i.e., incandescent,
fluorescent, magnetic low voltage, electronic low voltage). Manufacturer shall provide file
card upon request. Universal dimmers are not acceptable.
2. All dimmers and switches shall incorporate an air gap switch. The air gap switch shall be
capable of meeting all applicable requirements of UL 20 for air gas switches in incandescent
dimmers.
3. All dimmers and switches shall provide power failure memory. Should power be interrupted
and subsequently returned, the lights will come back on to the same levels set prior to the
power interruption. Restoration to some other default level is not acceptable.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 22
4. Dimmers and switches shall meet ANSI/IEEE Std. C62.41-1980, tested to withstand voltage
surges of up to 6000V and current surges of up to 200A without damage.
5. Dimmers and switches shall meet the UL 20 limited short circuit test requirement for snap
switches.
6. Dimmer shall provide a smooth and continuous Square Law dimming curve.
7. Dimmers shall be voltage regulated so that + 10% variation in line voltage shall cause not
more than +5% variation in load voltage when dimmer is operating at 40V (5% light output).
8. Dimmers shall be 2000 watt equal to Lutron Nova Series. Single pole dimmers shall be “slide
to off” type. Three-way dimmers shall be “preset” type used with appropriate 3 or 4-way
linear slide switches.
2.7 GROUNDING REQUIREMENTS
A. Ground all systems and equipment in accordance with best industry practice, the requirements of
NFPA 70, Article 250 and the following:
1. The ground bus of the main switchboard shall be connected to the main grounding electrode
specified below by means of insulated conductors run in conduit.
a. Metal underground water pipes.
b. Metal frame of building.
c. Concrete encased electrode.
d. Rod and pipe electrodes.
e. Ground ring.
2. Provide grounding bonds between all metallic conduits of the light and power system which
enter and leave cable chambers or other non-metallic cable pulling and splicing boxes.
Accomplish this by equipping the conduits with bushings of the grounding type individually
cross connected.
3. Bond metallic conduits containing grounding electrode conductors and main bonding
conductors to the ground bus service enclosure and/or grounding electrode at both ends of
each run utilizing grounding bushings and jumpers.
4. Provide grounding bonds for all metallic conduits of the light and power system which
terminate in pits below equipment for which a ground bus is specified. Accomplish this by
equipping the conduits with bushings of the grounding type connected individually to the
ground bus.
5. Provide supplementary ground bonding where metallic conduits terminate at metal clad
equipment (or at the metal pull box of equipment) for which a ground bus is specified.
Accomplish this be equipping the conduits with bushings of the grounding type connected
individually by means of jumpers to the ground bus. Exclude the jumpers where directed.
This exclusion will be required where an isolated ground for electronic equipment is to be
maintained.
6. Each grounding type bushing shall have the maximum ground wire accommodation available
in standard manufacture for the particular conduit size. Connection to bushing shall be with
wire of this maximum size.
7. Bonding conductors on the load side of the service device and equipment grounding
conductors shall be sized in relation to the fuses or trip size of the overcurrent device
supplying the circuit.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 23
8. The central equipment for the fire protective alarm system and telephone system shall have
its grounding terminal connected to the grounding electrode by means of a No. 6 green
coded insulated conductor, run in 3/4" conduit. Utilize a ground clamp of a type specifically
manufactured for the purpose.
2.8 PHASING AND COLOR CODING
A. The insulation or covering of each wire or cable shall be color coded so as to provide for circuit
identification as specified below:
120/208 V Circuits Phase Circuits
Black A
Red B
Blue C
White Neutral
Green Equipment Ground
B. Color coding shall be achieved by one of the following methods:
1. The insulation or covering shall be coded during manufacture by use of one of the following
methods:
a. Colored compounds.
b. Colored coatings.
2. In sizes and insulation types where factory applied colors are not available, wires and cables
shall be color coded by the application of colored plastic tapes in overlapping turns at all
terminal points, and in all boxes in which splices are made.
C. The same colored cable shall be connected to the same phase throughout the project.
D. In general, building load centers and panelboards shall be phased “A”, “B”, “C”, left to right. The
neutral, although it may be in different locations for different equipment, shall be identified.
2.9 ENCLOSURES FOR INDIVIDUALLY MOUNTED OVERCURRENT AND SWITCHING DEVICES
A. Construction shall be NEMA Class I, where installed indoors.
B. Construction shall be NEMA Class IIIR, where installed outdoors, in mechanical rooms, in
locations defined as damp or wet by NFPA 70 or where indicated as weatherproof.
C. Operating handles shall be front or side type to accommodate hand access space and flush or
surface mounting requirements.
D. Each shall be equipped with padlock for locking operating handle in the open position.
2.10 METER CENTERS
A. General: Provide all components tested and U.L. listed for use as an integral part of the multi-
metering system. Manufacture according to latest NEMA standards. Provide meter centers as
herein specified and shown on the associated Electrical Drawings
B. Ratings: The meter center assembly shall be rated to withstand mechanical forces exerted
during short circuit conditions when connected directly to a power source having available fault
current of 42,000 amperes symmetrical at rated voltage.
C. Construction:
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 24
1. The entire assembly shall be front accessible and shall include main lugs or a main
disconnect device as shown on plans.
2. Tenant disconnects shall be wired for “hot” or “cold” sequence as required by local utility
company and shall be molded case circuit breakers.
3. The meter sockets shall be ring or ringless type as required by local utility company and shall
be rated 150 amperes. A manual bypass shall be provided if required by local utility
company. The meter sockets and associated branch protective device positions shall be
completely pre-wired and shipped ready for installation of the meters and tenant main
breakers. Meter sockets shall include covers with sealing provisions.
D. Bus:
1. All bus bars shall be tin-plated aluminum. Main horizontal bus bars shall be mounted with all
three phases arranged in the same vertical plane. Bus sizing shall be based on U.L.
standard temperature rise criteria for multiple metering equipment.
2. Provide a full capacity neutral bus.
3. All hardware used for bus bar connections shall be high-tensile strength, zinc plated. Provide
Belleville type spring washers for all joints.
E. Wiring and Terminations:
1. Mechanical-type terminals shall be provided for all line terminations suitable for copper or
aluminum cable and rated at 75° C.
2. Lube shall be provided in the incoming section for connection of the main grounding
conductor.
F. Main Protective Devices:
1. Main protective devices shall be molded case circuit breakers with inverse time and
instantaneous tripping characteristics.
2. Circuit breakers shall have a minimum symmetrical interrupting capacity as indicated on
drawings.
3. Circuit breakers shall be U.L. listed for series applications.
G. Enclosures:
1. Meter center enclosure shall be NEMA 1 for surface mounting.
2. Boxes and trim shall be bonderized and finished with ANSI G1 light grey enamel.
H. Approved Manufacturers: Meter centers shall be manufactured by Square D, Siemens, Eaton, or
General Electric.
2.11 PANELBOARDS
A. Panelboards shall consist of factory completed dead front assemblies of back pans, main busses,
overcurrent and switching units, sheet metal cabinets and trims. They shall be so designed that
switching and overcurrent devices can be replaced without disturbing adjacent units and without
removing the main bus connectors, so that circuits may be changed without machine drilling or
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 25
tapping.
B. Where indicated as power or distribution panels, they shall be as manufactured by Square D,
Siemens, Eaton, or General Electric.
C. Bus bars for their mains shall be of copper having current capacities as indicated and sized for
such capacities in accordance with Underwriter Laboratory standards. Provide double size
neutral bus bars and lugs for all 120/208 volt panelboards where fed from “K” rated transformers.
Bus bar taps for panels with single pole branches shall be arranged for sequence phasing of the
branch circuit devices. Bussing shall be braced throughout to conform to industry standard
practice governing short circuit stresses in panelboards. Phase bussing shall be full height
without reduction.
D. A ground bus shall be provided for each panel. Each ground bus shall be of the same material as
the phase and neutral buses.
E. Cabinets shall be fabricated from industry standard gauge galvanized sheet steel with corners
lapped and riveted, or fastened by approved methods.
F. The inside and outside of the trims shall be factory painted with one (1) rust proofing primer coat
and one (1) finish coat. The finish paint shall be of a type to which field applied paint will bond.
All trims shall be hinged.
G. Cabinets and trims shall be suitable for the required mounting. Trims shall be fastened to
cabinets and shall be of a type that is self-supporting on cabinets. Trims for flush panels shall
overlap cabinets by at least 3/4" all around. Where two section panels are required, cabinets
shall be of equal height including those cases where there is one main for both sections.
H. Cabinets and trims for lighting and appliance panels shall accommodate and conform to the
following limited dimensions:
1. Minimum wiring gutter width on each side: 5-3/4”.
2. Maximum overall width: 24”.
3. Maximum overall depth: 6”.
I. Where wires or cables are used within panelboards to make up internal connections (factory
installed or otherwise) such wire or cable shall have copper conductors only.
J. Any cabinet for a power or distribution panel shall (regardless of the actual devices required to be
in it) have a width, depth and bussing adequate for a 3-pole branch device equal in rating to the
panel mains. In no case shall the cabinet be wider than 42” or deeper than 18”.
K. Hinged doors covering all switching device handles shall be included in all panel trims.
L. Doors in panelboard trims shall conform to the following:
1. In making switching device handles accessible, doors shall not uncover any live parts.
2. Doors shall have flush type paracentric cylinder locks and catches. Two (2) keys shall be
supplied for each lock and each key shall open all panelboards. Locks and keys shall
conform to a “standard keying policy” as directed.
M. Where “spaces only” for overcurrent protection and switching devices are called for in a panel, its
main bus, and backpan, as well as its cabinet and trim, shall be extended to accommodate these
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 26
spaces and shall include all necessary hardware including bus connectors to add future devices.
N. Panelboards shall comply with the following industry standards:
1. UL Standards:
a. Panelboards – UL67.
b. Cabinet & Boxes – UL50.
2. NEMA Standard – PB1.
O. Panelboards shall be labeled with UL short-circuit rating adequate for the available short-circuit
and based on the lowest panel mounted circuit breaker available UL listed interrupting current
rating, but in no case less than 65 ka for 480 volt and 22 ka for 240 volt panelboards.
P. Provide “lock on” clips for the toggle handles of certain branches serving the Fire Alarm System,
security, etc.
Q. Panelboards shall be manufactured by Eaton, Siemens, Square D, or General Electric.
2.12 LOAD CENTERS
A. Provide “load center” type panels for dwelling unit branch circuit wiring. Load center panels shall
consist of factory completed dead front assemblies of back pans, main buses, overcurrent
switching units, sheet metal cabinets and flush style trims with door. They shall be designed so
that switching and overcurrent devices can be replaced without disturbing adjacent units and
without removing the main bus connectors, and so that circuits may be charged without machine
drilling or tapping.
B. Bus bars for their mains shall be of aluminum having current capacities as indicated and sized for
such capacities in accordance with Underwriter Laboratory standards. Unless otherwise noted,
full size neutral bars shall be included. Phase bussing shall be full height without reduction and
shall have this for single pole branches arranged for sequence phasing of the branch circuit
devices.
C. A ground bus with terminal space for each branch circuit shall be provided for each load center.
Each ground bus shall be of the same material as the phase and neutral buses.
D. Load centers shall be provided with surface or flush trims as indicated. Flush trims shall overlap
cabinets by at least 1/2" on all sides.
E. Cabinets and trims for load centers shall accommodate and conform to the following limiting
dimensions:
1. Maximum overall width – 14-1/2”.
2. Maximum overall depth – 3-3/4”.
F. Hinged locking doors covering all switching device handles shall be included in all panel trims.
G. Branch circuit breakers load centers shall be plug-on type.
H. Load centers shall be manufactured by Siemens, Eaton, Square D, or General Electric.
2.13 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Molded case type circuit breakers shall consist of manually operated quick-make quick-break
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 27
mechanically trip free operating mechanisms for simultaneous operation of all poles, with
contacts, arc interrupters and trip elements for each pole, all enclosed in molded phenolic plastic
cases.
1. Their tripping units shall be of the “thermal magnetic” type having bimetallic elements for time
delay overload protection and magnetic elements for short-circuit protection.
2. They shall be manually operable by means of toggle type operating handles having “tripped”
position midway between the “on-off” positions.
3. They shall each be contained in an individual case enclosing only the number of poles
required for the particular breaker.
4. All panels and individually mounted circuit breakers shall have short circuit ratings exceeding
the available short-circuit of the values indicated in the “Power System Studies” in this section
by a factor of 1.2 with a minimum as follows:
a. 240V class panels/breakers: 10 kAIC where shown fed by a 150 kVA or less transformer
1) 10 kAIC where shown
2) 22 kAIC where shown fed by a 300 kVA or less transformer.
b. 480V Class Panels/Breakers shall be 65 kAIC.
5. They shall be of the “bolted-in” type.
a. Where necessary, to accommodate other requirements, their frame sizes shall be
increased to conform to such requirements, frame sizes being indicated only as a
reference to the minimum acceptable interrupting ratings noted above.
b. Where single pole in trip sizes 20 amps or less, they shall be rated for switching duty.
c. They shall be equipped with 5 milliamp sensitivity ground fault interrupting features where
so indicated.
d. All circuit breakers connected to lighting branch circuits shall be high magnetic type
breakers.
6. They shall be manufactured by Square D, Siemens, Eaton, or General Electric.
2.14 CARTRIDGE FUSES
A. Cartridge fuses shall be as follows:
1. Provide a complete set of fuses for each item of fusible type equipment. Fusible equipment
furnished by other contractors will be complete with fuses.
2. Secondary system fuses, rated at 600 volts or less, shall be UL listed and constructed in
conformance with the applicable standards set forth by NEMA and ANSI. All fuses of a
particular class shall be of same manufacturer.
3. Regardless of actual fault current, they shall, at full recovery voltage, be capable of safely
interrupting fault currents of 200,000 amperes RMS symmetrical or 340,000 amperes RMS
asymmetrical, deliverable at the line side of the fuse.
4. Circuits 0-600 amperes shall be protected by the equal of Bussman “Low Peak” current
limiting fuses, LPN-RK (250 volts), LPS-RK (600 volts), UL class RK-1.
5. Fuses shall be suitable for application to fuse gaps which reject other types of fusing.
6. Supply 10% spare fuses of each size and type 60 amps and less. Supply three (3) spare
fuses for each size and type over 60 amps.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 28
B. Cartridge fuses shall be manufactured by Bussman, Gould or EFCO.
2.15 MOTOR CONTROLS
A. Motor Controls – Manual and Magnetic:
1. Individually-mounted magnetic starters shall be across-the-line type with thermal overload on
each phase, single-speed, two-speed, or reduced voltage start as indicated. Check exact
type of two-speed or part-winding motors to be furnished by other contractors, and provide
proper starter.
2. Starters shall be of the replaceable contact double break type, of size and type required for
particular motor horsepower and voltage. Minimum size starter to be size 1.
a. Starters shall have OL reset button, green pilot light to indicate “ON”, and “HAND-OFF-
AUTO” switch in cover. Pilot lights shall be push-to-test type.
b. Starters to have 120 volt control transformers with fused output being provided for those
units operating on 277/480 volt system.
c. Provide proper rating of thermal overloads. Replace any overloads found to be of an
incorrect rating. Provide a spare set of three (3) thermal overloads for each starter.
d. Provide four (4) sets of auxiliary contacts of convertible type N.O. to N.C. for each starter.
e. Motor starters installed in dry locations shall have NEMA I enclosures. Those in wet
locations shall have NEMA IV enclosures.
f. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) Siemens
2) Eaton
3) Square D
4) General Electric
3. Manual motor starters shall have pilot lights and shall be furnished with thermal overloads on
each phase.
B. Motors: Each motor shall have disconnect switch and starter provided under this section.
Starters which are a part of “factory assembled” control panel will be provided under section
supplying equipment to be controlled but connected under this section.
C. Disconnect Switches:
1. Disconnect (safety) switches shall conform to industrial standards of NEMA, be UL listed and
shall be heavy-duty type, quick-make, quick-break type with interlocking cover mechanism
and provisions for padlocking switch handle in “OFF” position. Three (3) pole toggle switches
are not acceptable as substitute for disconnect switches.
2. Disconnect switches shall be of fused or un-fused type as indicated with number of
disconnecting poles indicated. The grounded conductor shall not be switched. Switches
shall be for use with current limiting fuses with rejection type fuse clips and those shall be
horsepower rated.
3. Enclosures shall be of proper NEMA type for the intended location and shall be phosphate
coated or equivalent code gauge galvanized sheet steel with gray baked enamel finish.
4. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Eaton
b. Siemens
c. Square D
d. General Electric
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 29
D. Combination Starter: Provide combination starters where indicated on the plans.
E. Motor Control Circuitry:
1. Except as noted below, select materials exactly as specified for feeders. Utilize No. 12
A.W.G. THWN conductors throughout minimum.
2. Motor control circuit wires may be run in the same conduit as the wires of motor power
circuits; however, exclude motor control wires from enclosures (other than motor starter
enclosures) which contain power circuit overcurrent protection and switching devices; also
from pull boxes and junction boxes containing the wires of main and sub main feeders.
Utilize auxiliary pull boxes to separate motor control wires from motor power circuit wires
before the power circuit wires enter the items from which motor control wires are excluded.
3. Prior to installing any motor control circuitry for a particular motor, notify the Architect of any
deviations between the control circuitry requirements of the trade supplying the motor and the
indicated electric work.
2.16 LIGHTING FIXTURES
A. All lighting fixtures shall be in accordance with identifications on the Contract Drawings and the
following:
1. Finishes shall be as selected by the Architect or as indicated on the plans.
2. Any additional appurtenances required for installation and operation, where same are not
covered by the identification used on the Contract Drawings, shall be included.
3. Recessed fixtures shall be coordinated with ceiling construction.
4. Exact location of all fixtures shall be confirmed with Architect prior to rough-in.
5. Recessed fixtures throughout shall have their components, wiring and external connections
coordinated for use in ceilings utilized as air handling plenums.
6. Fixtures for use outdoors or in areas designated as damp locations, shall be suitably
gasketed and UL listed for such applications.
7. All fixtures shall be UL approved with labels attesting thereto.
8. The Contractor shall obtain all information relative to the exact type of hung ceilings and
suspension systems to be installed before ordering any recessed fixtures. This Contractor
shall furnish the proper type fixtures applicable to the ceiling framing system. If, other than
the type of fixtures specified are required for installation, due to the type of ceiling
construction, this Contractor shall furnish and install the proper type fixtures and mounting
appurtenances required at no extra charge.
9. The Contractor shall coordinate the exact locations of all lighting fixtures with the ceiling
pattern during the construction period and before installation of the fixtures. Interferences
between lighting fixtures, and other equipment, shall be brought to the attention of the
General Contractor.
10. Include the aiming and/or adjustments of all lighting fixtures requiring same in accordance
with instructions issued by the Architect in the field.
11. All lamp sockets in lighting fixtures shall be suitable for the indicated lamps and shall be set
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 30
so that the lamps are positioned in optically correct relation to all lighting fixture components.
12. Lighting fixtures shall be supported from building structure only, not from hung or suspended
ceiling, by means of chains, threaded rods or #14 gauge tie wire.
13. All fixtures shall include seismic clips and shall be supported to comply with seismic
regulations.
14. Lamps shall be manufactured by Eaton, Phillips. OSRAM, or Sylvania.
B. Florescent and HID Fixtures:
1. All ballasts or transformers for discharge type lamps shall be for 60 cycles operation.
2. All ballasts or transformers for discharge or fluorescent type lamps shall be high power factor
type.
3. Ballasts for T5 and T8 fluorescent lamps shall be electronic high frequency electronic type
(20 KHZ or greater) type “P”, class “A” sound-rated, instant start and parallel wired such that
if one lamp burns out the remaining lamps stay lit. Electronic ballasts shall comply with UL
935, ANSI C82.1, CBM certified and meet FCC standards for EMI/RFI (FCC 47 CFR Part 18
non-consumer) with a total harmonic distribution of less than 10%. Ballasts shall carry a
manufacturer’s warranty of five (5) years and be manufactured by Osram Sylvania,
Magnetek, Advance, or approved equal.
4. Remote ballasts shall be standard core and coil type “P”, sound rating “A”.
5. All ballasts or transformers for discharge type lamps intended for use outdoors shall be of the
low temperature type having the lowest temperature rating available in standard manufacture.
6. Ballasts and transformers shall be of the “low energy full light output” type where available.
Each shall not exceed industry minimum rated input wattage by more than 8%.
7. All lamps shall be included. Except where specifically noted otherwise all fluorescent lamps
shall be as follows:
a. Fluorescent lamps of the proper wattage and voltage rating shall be provided in each
fixture as indicated on the fixture schedule. All fluorescent lamps shall be manufactured
to appropriate Specifications given in ANSI C78. Unless noted otherwise, fluorescent
lamps shall be T8 3500K and have a minimum CRI of 82.
b. Unless otherwise noted, all compact fluorescent lamps shall be 3500K and have a
minimum CRI of 82. The Contractor shall verify that the proper lamp type for the
specified ballast type is furnished with the compact fluorescent fixture.
1) Compact fluorescent ballasts shall be UL listed, Class P, Type 1 and CBM Certified.
2) Where 4-pin electronic ballast compatible compact fluorescent lamps are specified,
electronic ballasts shall include circuitry capable of sensing when lamp is
approaching end of life and shut show the lamp circuit. This end of life sensing must
be impervious to low/high line voltage conditions and result in no false tripping or
overheating of lamp bases.
C. LED Lamps and Luminaires:
1. Solid State Lighting/Light Emitting Diode (LED) Lamps and Luminaries:
a. Luminaire manufacturer shall have a minimum of five (5) years’ experience in the
manufacture and design of LED products and systems and no less than one hundred
(100) North American installations.
b. Unless otherwise specified, all LED luminaires and power/data supplies shall be provided
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 31
by a single manufacturer to ensure compatibility.
c. All components, peripheral devices and control software are to be provided by and shall
be the responsibility of a single entity. All components shall perform successfully as a
complete system.
d. Include all components necessary for a complete installation. Provide all power supplies,
synchronizers, data cables, and data terminators for a complete working system.
e. All LED sources used in the LED luminaire shall be of proven quality from established
and reputable LED manufacturers and shall have been fabricated after 2007.
2. Replacement and Spares:
a. Manufacturer will keep record of original bin for each LED module and have replacement
modules from the same bin available for three (3) years after date of installation.
b. Manufacturer will keep an inventory of replacement parts (source assembly, power and
control components).
c. Manufacturer’s LED system will not become obsolete for ten (10) years.
d. Manufacturer will provide exact replacement parts, or provide upgraded parts that are
designed to fit into the original luminaire and provide equivalent distribution and lumen
output to the original, without any negative consequences.
e. Manufacturer has in place a written recycling and re-use program, and will accept
returned product and/or components for recycling or re-use.
f. Manufacturer will properly dispose of non-recyclable components that are deemed
harmful to the environment.
g. System shall carry a full warranty for five (5) years. Manufacturer shall be responsible for
cost of labor not to exceed $50 per individual part, and cost of shipping, to replace any
component of the system that fails within two (2) years of installation.
3. Products and Components – Performance:
a. LED luminaires and components shall be UL listed or UL classified.
b. LED luminaires and components shall be CE certified.
c. LED luminaires and components shall be PSE marked.
d. All LED luminaires shall be subjected to the following JEDEC Reliability Tests for Lead-
free Semiconductors: HTOL, RTOL, LTOL, PTMCL, TMSK, Mechanical Shock, Variable
Vibration Frequency, SHR, Autoclave.
e. To ensure luminaire quality, luminaire shall have been tested under accelerated life test
conditions including an operating temperature span of 360 degrees F, and cyclic loading
up to 60G.
f. All products included in system shall use Mil-Std 810F, Random Vibration 7.698g as a
minimum standard. In installations subject to vibration, luminaire shall be installed with
vibration isolation hardware to sufficiently dampen vibrations.
g. All LED components shall be mercury and lead-free.
h. All manufacturing processes and materials shall conform to the requirements of the
European Union’s Restriction on the Use of Hazardous Substances in Electrical and
Electronics Equipment (RoHS) Directive, 2002/95/EC.
i. LEDs shall comply with ANSI/NEMA/ANSLG C78.377-2008 – Specifications for the
Chromaticity of Solid State Lighting Products. Color shall remain stable throughout the
life of the lamp. Color shall match approved sample.
j. LEDs shall comply with IESNA LM-80 – Standards for Lumen Maintenance of LED
Lighting Products.
k. White LEDs shall have a rated source life of 50,000 hours under normal operation
conditions. RGB LEDs shall have a rated source life of 100,000 hours. LED “rated
source life” is defined as the time when a minimum of 70% of initial lumen output
remains.
l. Luminaire assembly shall include a method of dissipating heating so as to not degrade
life of source, electronic equipment, or lenses. LED luminaire housing shall be designed
to transfer head from the LED board to the outside environment. Luminaire housing shall
have no negative impact on life of components.
m. Manufacturer shall supply in writing a range of permissible operating temperatures in
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 32
which system will perform optimally.
n. High power LED luminaires shall be thermally protected using one or more of the
following thermal management techniques: metal core board, gap pad, and/or internal
monitoring firmware.
o. LEDs shall be adequately protected from moisture or dust in interior applications.
p. For wet and damp use, LED-based luminaires itself shall be sealed, rated, and tested for
appropriate environmental conditions, not accomplished by using an additional housing
or enclosure. Such protection shall have no negative impact on rated life of source or
components, or if so, such reductions shall be explicitly brought to the attention of the
Designer.
q. All hardwired connections to LED luminaires shall be reverse polarity protected and
provide high voltage protection in the event connections are reversed or shorted during
the installation process.
r. The LED luminaire shall be operated at constant and carefully regulated current levels.
LEDs shall not be overdriven beyond their specified nominal voltage and current.
s. RGB LED luminaries shall utilize an equal combination of high brightness red, blue and
green LEDs, unless otherwise noted, to provide up to 16.78 million additive RGB colors
and shall be capable of at least 8-bit control.
t. Manufacturer shall be able to provide supporting documentation of the product meeting
third party regulatory compliance.
u. Manufacturer shall ensure that products undergo and successfully meet appropriate
design and manufacturability testing including Design FMEA, Process FMEA,
Environmental Engineering Considerations and Laboratory Tests, IEC standards and
UL/CE testing.
v. All LED luminaires (100% of each lot) shall undergo a minimum twenty-four (24) hour
burn-in during manufacturing, prior to shipping.
w. Manufacturer shall provide Luminaire Efficacy (Im/W), total luminous flux (lumens),
luminous intensity (candelas) chromaticity coordinates, CCT and CRI optical
performance, polar diagrams, and relevant luminance and illuminance photometric data.
Provide data in IES file format in accordance with IES LM-79-2008, based on test results
from an independent Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory.
x. Power/Data supply shall have the following:
1) Supply outputs shall have current limiting protection.
2) Supply shall provide miswiring protection.
3) Supply shall have power factor correction.
4) Supply shall provide connections that are conduit-ready or clamp-style connections in
the case of low-voltage wiring.
5) Supply shall come with a housing that meets a minimum IP20 rating for dry location
installation unless located in a damp or wet location.
6) Supply shall be UL listed for Class 1 or Class 2 wiring.
2.17 LOW VOLTAGE LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
A. Scope: The Electrical Subcontractor, as part of the work of this section, shall furnish and install
low voltage lighting control devices as indicated on the project documents and described herein.
B. Low voltage lighting control devices shall include but are not limited to the following devices:
1. Dual technology (infrared and ultrasonic) occupancy/vacancy sensors, both ceiling mounted
and/or wall mounted.
2. Dual technology (infrared and ultrasonic) occupancy/vacancy wall switches, both single
button and dual button types.
3. Digital room controllers, self-configuring, digitally addressable one, two or three relay plenum
rated controllers for ON/OFF or dimming controls.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 33
4. Digital dimming wall switch compatible with digital room controllers.
5. Emergency lighting control unit (ELCU) shall allow a standard lighting control device to
control emergency lighting in conjunction with Normal Lighting in any areas with a building.
C. Submittals:
1. Submit shop drawings and relevant product information as listed below:
a. Composite wiring and/or schematic diagram of each control circuit as proposed to be
installed.
b. Catalog sheets, specifications and installation instructions for each device.
D. Quality Assurance: The low voltage lighting control device manufacturer shall have a minimum of
ten (10) years of experience in the manufacture of lighting control devices.
E. Warranty: Provide a five (5) year manufacturer’s warranty on all low voltage lighting control
devices.
F. Manufacturers:
1. This specification is based on products as manufactured by WattStopper.
2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to the compliance with the requirements of the contract
documents, acceptable manufacturers are listed below:
a. WattStopper
b. Sensor Switch
c. Cooper Wiring Devices
G. Equipment:
1. Dual technology (infrared and ultrasonic) occupancy/vacancy sensor.
a. Wall or ceiling mounted as indicated on project documents. Features shall include:
1) Sensitivity: 0 – 100% in 10% increments.
2) Time Relay: 1 – 30 months.
3) Test Mode.
4) Walk-through Mode.
5) Auto or Manual On (occupancy or vacancy mode).
a) Provide WattStopper LMD series sensor as indicated on the project documents.
2. Dual Technology (infrared and ultrasonic) occupancy/vacancy wall switch with 1 or 2 buttons.
a. Wall switch with 1 or 2 pushbuttons as indicated on project documents. Features shall
include:
1) Sensitivity: 0 – 100% in 10% increments.
2) Time Delay: 1 – 30 minutes.
3) Test Mode.
4) Walk-through Mode.
5) Auto or Manual On (occupancy or vacancy mode).
b. Provide WattStopper LMD series as indicated on the project drawings.
3. Digital Room Controllers (ON/OFF or dimming control).
a. Digital room controllers shall be provided to match room lighting control requirements as
indicated on the project drawings.
b. ON/OFF room controllers shall have the following features:
1) One, two or three relay configuration.
2) Integral switching power supply.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 34
c. ON/OFF/Dimming room controllers shall have the following features:
1) One, two or three relay configuration.
2) Integral power supply
3) One (1) dimming output per relay.
a) 0 – 10 dimming per relay for control of compatible ballasts and LED drivers.
b) Each dimming output channel shall be independently configurable.
d. Provide WattStopper LMRC series digital room controllers as indicated on project
documents.
4. Digital Dimming Wall Switch:
a. Low voltage digital dimming wall switch shall be compatible with the digital room
controller. Features shall include:
1) Dimming switch includes bi-level LED’s to indicate load levels.
2) Full functioning dimming control in multi-way applications such as 3-way, 4-way, etc.
3) LED status indicator.
b. Provide WattStopper LMDM series digital dimming wall switch as indicated on the project
documents.
5. Digital Wall Switches (ON/OFF).
a. Low voltage digital wall switch with momentary pushbuttons in 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 & 8 button
configurations. Wall switches shall be compatible with the digital room controller and
have the following features:
1) Removable buttons for field replacement.
2) LED’s on each button to confirm status.
3) Switches may be used for multi-way control applications such as 3-way, 4-way, etc.
b. Provide WattStopper LMSW series as indicated on the project documents.
6. Emergency Lighting Control Unit (ELCU):
a. Emergency lighting control unit, a UL 924 listed device that monitors a switched circuit
providing Normal lighting to an area. Upon Normal power failure, the emergency lighting
circuit will close, forcing the emergency lighting “ON” until Normal power is restored.
Features shall include:
1) 120/277 volts, 50/60 Hz, 200 amp ballast rating.
2) Push to test button.
3) Auxiliary contacts for remote test or fire alarm interface.
b. Provide WattStopper ELCU-100, ELCU-200 as indicated on project documents.
H. Installation:
1. The Electrical Subcontractor shall install all devices and wiring in a professional workmanlike
manner per the manufacturer’s installation instructions.
2. The Electrical Subcontractor shall test all devices before start-up to ensure proper and
correct installation.
I. The Electrical Subcontractor shall calibrate all sensor time delays and sensitivity settings to
ensure proper detection of occupants and energy savings.
1. Adjust sensor settings so that controlled area remains illuminated while occupied.
2.18 TELEPHONE/DATA EMPTY RACEWAYS AND OUTLETS SYSTEM
A. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install, complete in every respect, a telephone empty
raceway system, all interior raceways, pull boxes, plywood backboards, outlets, outlet cover
plate, fittings, and all other appurtenances required, leaving the entire installation ready for
installation of telephones, equipment and cables.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 35
B. In general, the telephone system raceways, outlets and terminal backboard locations shall be as
shown on the Contract Drawings.
C. All work and the entire installation of same shall be coordinated with the Architectural/
Engineering Coordination Office of the Telephone Company and the Electrical Contractor before
the start of the construction and shall be in full conformance with their requirements and
recommendations.
D. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish a nylon pull cord in each raceway to facilitate the pulling of
cables in the future.
E. All outlet cover plates shall be furnished by the Electrical Contractor. All telephone outlet cover
plates shall be blank cover plates of the same finish and by the manufacturer furnishing all other
devices and switch plates installed throughout the buildings.
F. Telephone terminal locations are existing and shall be expanded as required as designed on the
Contract Drawings. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install 3/4 inch thick sheet of
plywood backboard for the mounting of equipment and cable terminators by the Telephone
Company. The backboards shall be painted with two (2) coats of fire-retardant paint by the
Electrical Contractor. Exact dimensions of the backboards shall be as indicated on the Contract
Drawings and as required by the Telephone Company.
G. Conduit from telephone outlets indicated on the Contract Drawings shall be installed into the
nearest partition, extend a minimum of 6 inches into nearest accessible ceiling space and left
ready to be used by the Telephone Company for the installation of their cables.
2.19 COMPUTER EMPTY RACEWAYS AND OUTLETS SYSTEM
A. The Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish and install computer outlets including conduit, outlet
box, outlet cover plate, fittings, and all other appurtenances required, leaving the entire
installation ready for installation of equipment under a separate Contract.
B. In general, computer outlets and empty conduit locations shall be as shown on the Contract
Drawings.
C. The Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish a nylon pull cord in each conduit to facilitate the pulling
of cables in the future.
D. All wall plates shall be furnished by the Electrical Contractor. All computer outlet cover plates
shall be provided with a blank cover plate and be of the same finish and by the manufacturer
furnishing all other device and switch plates installed throughout the renovation.
E. Conduit from computer outlets indicated on the Contract Drawings shall be installed into the
nearest partition, extended a minimum of 6 inches into nearest accessible ceiling space and left
ready to use for the installation of cables under a separate Contract.
2.20 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
A. Scope:
1. Provide complete networked analog/addressable fire detection, evacuation alarm and control
network in compliance with all specifications, drawings and applicable code requirements.
2. System shall be a networked microprocessor based fire alarm system which will integrate
peripheral devices onto system via digital data communications.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 36
3. Each initiating device shall have full analog detection capabilities; identify its' exact location,
and shall operate as described elsewhere in these specifications.
4. Work in this section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with related contract
documents.
5. Provide automatic and manual, closed circuit, multiplex fire alarm communications according
to contract documents, wired, connected and left in first class operating condition.
6. Final connections, testing, and adjusting of system shall be done under direct supervision of
system supplier.
a. System design and installation shall conform to following standards:
1) Equipment shall be UL listed for its intended purpose, including UL 864 (UOJZ,
UOXX, UOQY and UUKL), 1480 and 1971.
b. NFPA standards 70, 72, 90A, 92A, and 101.
c. Current State Building, Electrical and Life Safety Codes.
d. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
e. Requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction, including permitting and acceptance
procedures.
7. Shop Drawings shall include:
a. Complete point-to-point riser diagram showing all equipment and size, type and number
of conductors and devices.
b. Large scale drawings of control panels, annunciators, transponders, showing module
placement and spare capacity allowances.
c. Complete, itemized bill of materials with quantities, descriptions.
d. Original catalog data sheets to assure compliance with these specifications. This
equipment shall be subject to approval, and no equipment shall be ordered without prior
approval.
e. Calculations to support size of standby batteries, notification appliance circuits (NAC) and
audio amplifiers submitted. Circuit calculations shall demonstrate proper current draw,
voltage drop, wire size considerations and spare capacity allowances. Calculations shall
be based on UL nameplate RMS voltage ratings. NAC calculations shall demonstrate 25
percent spare capacity.
f. Copy of Original Equipment Manufacturer’s Warranty Statement.
g. Complete description of system Sequence of Operation.
h. Details of any special installation procedures.
i. Complete floor plans showing network nodes and all device locations and corresponding
addresses. Point identification lists shall be included to ensure proper coordination of
alarm messages and shall include each device type address number and corresponding
CCO text message.
j. Confirmation that equipment supplier will provide on-site project management and
supervision during system installation, and perform system testing and instruction.
k. Operation and maintenance manuals.
8. Conform to UL and NFPA standards for testing of completed installation by UL approved
testing company.
9. O & M Manuals shall include the following:
a. All information submitted in final reviewed shop drawings.
b. As-built documentation which incorporates all modifications to completed system,
whether made as field change or by change order.
c. Include copy of final test report, Record of Completion, as-built documentation and Fire
Alarm Support Contracts as described herein.
B. Sequence of Operation:
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 37
1. Operation of manual station or activation of any automatic alarm initiating device (system
smoke, system heat detector, waterflow) shall initiate system-wide, response according to
established response procedures and as follows:
a. Initiate transmission of alarm to Municipal Fire Station via on board dialer/DACT and
Master Box. Include the cost for monitoring at a UL listed central station for a period of
one year.
b. Sound approved temporal code 3 horn signal over all audio circuits throughout entire
building.
c. Upon any alarm condition, visual signals shall activate throughout the building. Visual
notification shall be synchronized in accordance with applicable code requirements and
latest NFPA 72 guidelines.
d. Flash an alarm LED and sound an audible signal at each FACP and the Fire Command
Location. Upon Acknowledgment, the alarm LED shall light steadily and the audible shall
silence. Subsequent alarms shall re-initiate this sequence.
e. Visually indicate alarm initiating device type and location via LCD display at all Fire
Command Centers.
f. Operate prioritized outputs to release magnetically held smoke doors and magnetically
locked doors throughout building.
g. Activate exterior W/P beacon.
h. Store system events in event history file.
i. Provide control signal to Lighting Control System to bring all lighting to full brightness.
2. Operation of any tamper switch or activation of other device designated to initiate system
Supervisory condition shall cause the following to occur:
a. Flash Supervisory LED and sound audible tone at FACP and each network panel. Upon
Acknowledgment, LED shall light steadily and audible shall silence. Subsequent
Supervisory conditions shall re-initiate this sequence.
b. Visually indicate device type and location via LCD display located at FACP and remote
annunciators.
c. Visually annunciate type of initiating device and its zone, floor or area as required on
system annunciators. In addition, Supervisory LED and audible tone will sound. Upon
Acknowledgment, LED shall light steadily and audible shall silence. Subsequent
Supervisory conditions shall re-initiate this sequence.
d. Record event in event history log. Restorations shall likewise be recorded.
3. In event of System Trouble condition such as device removed, loss of AC Power or wiring
fault, system Trouble condition shall occur as follows:
a. Flash Trouble LED and sound audible tone at FACP and each network panel. Upon
Acknowledgment, LED shall light steadily and the audible shall silence. Subsequent
Trouble conditions shall re-initiate this sequence.
b. Initiate reporting of event to designated staff members via email notification as required
and described herein.
c. Visually indicate device type and location via LCD display located at FACP and network
annunciator panel.
d. Visually annunciate type of initiating device and its zone, floor or area as required on all
system annunciators. In addition, Trouble LED and audible tone shall sound. Upon
Acknowledgment, LED shall light steadily and audible shall silence. Subsequent Trouble
conditions shall re-initiate this sequence.
e. Record event in event history log. Restorations shall likewise be recorded.
C. General Requirements:
1. Fire alarm system shall be designed and UL and FM approved for Fire, Audio Evacuation and
Security applications. System operational characteristics shall be stored in non-volatile
EEPROM memory, shall be field programmable and capable of being edited with no factory
involvement.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 38
2. System shall support analog sensing techniques to monitor individual devices which enables
user to set sensitivity parameters. Inputs shall be subject to multi-level alarm verification.
System shall be capable of reporting status and sensitivity of each device and vectoring this
information to printer. System shall automatically identify any detector which becomes dirty
(maintenance alert), prior to false alarming.
3. System shall be supported by standby batteries. In event of loss of primary power, batteries
shall support 24 hours of full supervisory operation followed by 5 minutes of alarm.
4. System shall be capable of nine levels of alarm prioritization, and allow control by event, and
may include cross zoning, stepping, and/or logic statement inputs.
5. Equipment shall be new and unused. Components and systems shall be designed for
uninterrupted duty. Equipment, materials and accessories covered by these requirements
shall be provided by single manufacturer, or if provided by different manufacturers,
recognized as compatible by both manufacturers.
6. Control equipment shall have transient protection devices to comply with UL 864
requirements.
a. Isolated Loop Circuit Protector (ILCP): Provide isolated loop circuit protection device on
all fire alarm circuits which extend beyond building by either aerial, underground or other
methods (walkways, bridges or other above ground connectors).
b. ILCP shall be located as close as practical to point at which circuits leave or enter
building. Grounding conductor shall be No. 12 AWG wire having maximum length of 28
feet and connected to unified ground per NEC.
7. Circuiting Guidelines. Each initiating device and indicating circuit shall be electronically
supervised and individually addressable. Wiring shall match existing conventions as follows:
a. Individual Zone Addressable Modules shall be used to supervise and monitor waterflow,
tamper, and status conditions from any related systems or devices.
b. Zone Addressable Control Modules and/or programmable relays shall provide auxiliary
control functions.
c. Addressable loop wiring shall support all devices shown and allow for minimum of 25
percent spare capacity, and be wired in Class A, Style 7 fashion, with circuit isolation by
floor and every 18 devices.
d. Entire system shall allow minimum of 25 percent spare capacity. This shall apply to all
aspects of system including CPU, cabinets, power supplies, amplifiers and batteries.
e. Conventional Visual Appliance Circuits shall operate devices shown plus 25 percent
spare capacity, and be wired in a Class A, Style Z fashion.
D. Fire Alarm Control Panel:
1. Provide a Fire Alarm Control System. System shall consist of the required Fire Alarm control
and remote nodes, each sized to support a minimum of 1000 analog points, expandable to
2500 points. Panels shall be provided with programmable soft switches and associated LED's
for panel silence, alarm silence, system reset and drill. Provide lamp test button. Provide
individual LED's for power-on, common alarm, supervisory, fault. Adjacent to the fire control
panel, provide passive graphic map depicting architectural layout of building with stairwells,
elevators, major corridors and egress points shown.
2. Provide each panel with integral power supplies, amplifiers, addressable loop interface cards
and standby batteries sized to serve building and/or space as shown. Panel shall have
following functions:
a. Monitor all initiating devices, report event to fire alarm network, annunciate alarmed
device and its' location, capture elevators, conduct smoke control functions, and initiate
audio/visual evacuation signaling and control sequences as described herein.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 39
b. Conduct municipal and off-site notification from main network panel as described herein.
c. Initiating devices shall respond with their condition. Control relays shall be individually
addressable by system to respond automatically in event of an alarm of related sensors.
Manual override of control sequences and status feedback points shall be individually
addressable.
3. Operator Controls: The control panel shall include an operator interface module consisting of
180 character backlit LCD display to display system wide alarm, trouble and supervisory
conditions. Provide full system control from Fire Command Center, as well as control
switches for status message scrolling, event acknowledgment, System Reset, and Alarm
Silence. Display shall have LED's to indicate Power On, Fire Alarm, Supervisory, Trouble and
Alarm Silenced status.
4. Addressable Loop Interface: Provide addressable loop interface card for each floor in each
building. Each interface card shall be integral to network panel and support digital
communications. Each circuit shall support a total circuit capacity of up to 250
analog/addressable detectors and wiring of twisted unshielded pair with distances of up to
12,500 feet.
5. Auxiliary Control / Annunciation: Provide required auxiliary switch and LED modules for
discreet LED annunciation, zone disconnect, HVAC override, or related monitoring and
control functions integral to each FACP. As a minimum, provide a minimum of 64 Auxiliary
Override and Audio Control switches with status LED's and 8 HOA switches with
corresponding status inputs and LED indicators for auxiliary functions, or as required. These
are intended for use by Fire Department during events, or by authorized personnel during
testing periods. Keypad entered commands for these functions shall not be acceptable
6. Field Power Supplies: Provide Field power supplies with 24VDC operating and NAC Circuits
for Visual signals, 6 amps minimum. Each power supply module shall have 4 dedicated
Class A NAC outputs rated at 3 amps each and charging circuit that will support up to 12AH
batteries. Provide necessary interface to synchronize all power supplies together and
provide each power supply with independent monitor module for trouble supervision. Field
Power Supplies shall be located on Floor/Section which they serve.
7. Provide hard copy printout of system program to be maintained on site.
E. Remote LCD Annunciator.
1. Each annunciator shall contain a supervised; back lit, liquid crystal with a minimum of 8 lines
with 21 characters per line. Where required, the annunciator shall include additional zonal
annunciation and manual control without additional enclosures. The annunciator shall
support full ability to serve as the operating interface to the system and shall include the
following features; Matched appearance with other system displays
F. Intelligent System Devices:
1. Provide intelligent analog addressable devices where shown and required. Analog devices
shall utilize dual multi-color red/ green LED indicator which shall flash green to denote normal
active communication and light red steadily to denote alarm condition. Devices shall be
interchangeable with twist-lock bases that support discreet address-setting rotary decade
switches. Each base shall support remote LED output, fault isolation circuitry, auxiliary relay
contact, or sounder base with integral Piezo horn were such functions are required. Provide
wire guards or other physical protection devices as shown on contract documents.
2. Provide analog/addressable combination photoelectric smoke and carbon monoxide (CO)
detectors at the locations shown on the Contract Drawings. The combination smoke and CO
detector shall provide two independent signals (smoke & CO) to the control panel for
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 40
programming system responses. When mounted in a sounder base, the detector shall be
capable of initiating a temporal 3-3-3 when smoke is detected or temporal 4-4-4-4 when CO
is detected. Detectors that transmit a common signal to the control panel for both smoke and
CO alarms shall not be considered as equals. The detector shall be listed under standards
UL-268 and UL-2075.Each smoke detector shall be individually programmable to operate at
any one of five (5) sensitivity settings. The detector shall also store pre-alarm and alternate
pre-alarm sensitivity settings. Pre alarm sensitivity values shall be configurable in 5%
increments of the alarm and alternate alarm sensitivity settings respectively. The detector
shall be able to differentiate between a long term drift above the pre alarm threshold and fast
rise above the threshold. The detector shall monitor the sensitivity of the smoke sensor. If
the sensitivity shifts outside the UL limits, a trouble signal shall be sent to the panel. It shall
be possible to automatically change the sensitivity of individual intelligent addressable smoke
detectors for day and night (alternate) periods. Each detector shall utilize an environmental
compensation algorithm that shall automatically adjust for background environmental
conditions such as dust, temperature, and pressure. The detector shall provide a
maintenance alert signal when 80% (dirty) of the available compensation range has been
used. The detector shall provide a dirty fault signal when 100% or greater compensation has
been used. The smoke chamber shall be UL listed for field replacement. The electro-
chemical CO sensor shall generate a CO alarm in compliance with UL-2034 requirements.
The sensor shall have a nominal six-year life. When the sensor approaches the end of its
useful life, it shall transmit a maintenance condition to the control panel, indicating the CO
sensor board replacement is required. Only when the sensor is no longer operational shall a
trouble condition be sent to the control panel. Sensors that transmit a common trouble
indication for both sensor end-of-life and other causes of detector trouble shall not be
considered as equal. Performing a “sensitivity” check from the panel shall report the
approximate number months of CO sensor life remaining. Placing the CO detector in test
mode shall facilitate the use of direct injection of small quantities of CO to check detector
functionality. The CO sensor board shall be UL listed as field replaceable. Replacement of
the CO sensor shall not require any field calibration.
3. Photoelectric Smoke Detector: Provide analog addressable photoelectric smoke detectors
with adjustable sensitivity range from 0.2 to 3.7 percent obscuration where shown and
required. Detectors shall provide complete analog features including alarm verification,
environmental compensation, and multi-stage operation, were required.
4. Analog Heat Detectors: Provide Analog Heat Detectors. Analog heat detectors shall be field
selectable for fixed temperature rating of 135 or 190 degrees, rate of rise operation of 15
degrees/minute, and will also include a low temperature warning (Supervisory condition)
when ambient temperature reaches 40 degrees F. Where otherwise required, provide
conventional fixed temperature, weatherproof or explosion proof heat detectors in lieu of
analog heat detectors. Conventional device shall be individually addressable via intelligent
addressable module which shall be installed in heated, ventilated location.
5. Analog Duct Smoke Detector: Provide analog photoelectric duct-mounted smoke detectors
mounted in air ducts where shown and required. Duct detectors shall be programmed for
alarm event sequencing or required by AHJ. Each detector shall be supplied with duct-mount
housing, remote indicator/test station and sampling tubes sized according to duct width.
Provide necessary auxiliary relay outputs via addressable relay control modules with each
detector in order to ensure required HVAC control, override and status reporting functions.
6. Intelligent Manual Pull Stations: Provide intelligent addressable manual stations where
shown. Station shall be double action with screw terminals, toggle switch, and integral
addressable electronics w status LED. Station shall be constructed of red Lexan with white
raised letters and key reset switch. Station shall be keyed alike to FACP. Where ambient
conditions preclude use of addressable devices, conventional weatherproof pull stations shall
be used. Each conventional device shall be individually addressable via intelligent
addressable module which shall be installed in heated, ventilated location.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 41
7. Monitor Module: Provide Zone Addressable input Modules to enable monitoring and
supervision of related systems and devices via SLC addressable loop.
8. Relay Module: Provide Addressable Relay to provide supervised control of auxiliary circuits
(AHU's, door holders, etc.) via SLC addressable loop. Relay shall provide supervised output
rated for 3 amps @ 30VDC or .5 amps at 120VAC. Where current exceeds limitations,
provide isolation relay (PAM-1 or equal) rated for required load.
9. Isolation Modules: Where additional circuit isolation is required beyond isolation of the
addressable loop interface, provide field-mounted Isolator Modules every 20 devices to
protect circuit integrity in event of a wiring fault and ensure Style 6 wiring conventions.
10. Drill Switch: Provide a two position keyed Drill switch with addressable monitor module
located as shown on contract drawings. Switch shall be fully programmable to initiate a drill of
programmed areas with-out transmitting Municipal Signal. Restoration of key switch to
“normal” shall return FACP and associated control equipment to normal with no other user
interface to system.
G. Notification Appliances:
1. Provide flush mounted combination Audio/Visual signaling appliances. Stand-alone devices
may be used to augment combination units when necessary. Provide surface mount back
boxes and alternate outdoor-rated appliances where ambient conditions dictate. Provide wire
guards or other physical protection devices as shown on contract documents.
2. Provide synchronized xenon strobes in compliance with NFPA 72, and rated per UL 1971
testing criteria. Strobes shall have effective intensity field selectable by installer in the range
of 15CD to 115 CD.
3. Provide audible detector mounting bases suitable for mounting on a 1-gang, 3½ or 4 inch
octagon box and 4 inch square box at the locations shown on the Contract Drawings. The
bases shall utilize a twist-lock design and provide screw terminals for all field wiring
connections. Removal of the respective detector shall not affect communications with other
detectors. The audible base shall support all detector types and shall be capable of single or
group operation. The audible base shall emit a temporal 3-3-3 fire alarm tone when smoke or
heat has been detected. The audible base shall emit a temporal 4-4-4-4 CO alarm tone when
CO has been detected. The outputs shall be configurable for low or high output by moving a
reversible jumper. The system shall be UL2017 listed for dual signaling for this purpose. The
audible bases shall provide a UL-268 reverberant room sound output of 90.8 dBA at 10ft (3m)
for temporal 3-3-3 fire alarm and 84.1 dBA at 10 ft.(3m) for temporal 4-4-4-4 CO alarm.
H. System Accessories:
1. Municipal Connection: Provide one (1) telephone dialer/digital Communicator unit for off-site
transmission of supervisory signals. Provide the cost for monitoring at a UL listed central
station for a period of one year.
2. Sprinkler System Devices: Coordinate following to ensure that required installation and wiring
of waterflow and tamper switches is accomplished in manner that will result in complete
operable and tested sprinkler system. Each device shall be monitored as separate and
distinct point.
a. Waterflow shall activate alarm sequence.
b. Tamper switches shall activate supervisory condition.
3. Terminal Cabinets: Provide fire alarm terminal cabinets where necessary. Cabinets shall
have removable hinged cover with key lock and red finish and are intended to house
analog/addressable modules and facilitate filed wiring junctions.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 42
4. Remote Alarm Indicators: Provide remote LED indicators for sensors located behind locked
doors. Provide permanent label on each indicator identifying device type and actual location.
5. Exterior Strobe: Provide a flashing weatherproof strobe with minimum 150,000 candlepower
output where shown. Strobe shall be properly installed on a weatherproof back box.
6. Auxiliary Power Supplies: Provide distributed network power supplies as required. Power
supplies shall communicate directly to main Fire Alarm System via SLC communications to
support network-based synchronization, and supervision of each panel for ground fault, loss
of AC power and Battery Failure. Each notification circuit served shall be individually
supervised via on-board circuitry.
7. Door Holders: Install flush, surface or floor-mounted 24VDC magnetic door holders where
shown and required. Door holders will not be required to operate under standby power,
following 30 second delay upon loss of primary AC power.
8. Key Repository: Provide Knox Box or approved equal key repository where shown and in
accordance with local requirements.
I. Installation:
1. Installation shall be supervised and tested by system supplier. Work shall be performed by
skilled technicians under direction of experienced engineers, all of whom are properly trained
and qualified.
J. Wiring:
1. Wiring for system shall be in accordance with Articles 760, 725, and 800 of National Electrical
Code and local electrical codes. Cable shall be installed in conduit in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions, with outgoing and return loops physically separated in
accordance with applicable codes.
2. Provide complete wiring and conduit between all equipment. Devices shall be mounted upon
and splices made in UL listed boxes. Wiring splices and transposing or changing of colors will
not be permitted.
3. Junction boxes shall be painted red and labeled as 'Fire Alarm System' with decal or
approved markings.
4. Fire Alarm control systems and equipment shall be connected to separate dedicated branch
circuits, sized as required for proper service. Circuits shall be labeled 'FIRE ALARM'.
K. Final Tests, Records and Warranty:
1. Perform complete final test indicating proper functioning of system in accordance with all
applicable codes and standards. Furnish copies of completed test report, as-built
documentation and Record of Completion in accordance with NFPA 72 guideline to Owner
and Architect for record purposes.
2. System test shall be conducted by UL certified testing company in accordance with UL
guidelines and NFPA standards. Each and every device shall be tested in accordance with
Manufacturer's recommendations.
3. Provide final test report and Record of Completion indicating proper functioning of the system
and conformance to specifications. Test and Certificate of Completion shall be performed by
factory-trained qualified technicians employed by Testing Contractor. Each and every device
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 43
shall be tested, and standalone operation of remote panels shall be verified.
4. Final testing, certification and documentation shall be performed by same company that shall
hold and execute Test and Inspection Contract.
5. In addition to pre-acceptance test, provide for complete and final Fire Department
Acceptance Testing in accordance with requirements of Authority Having Jurisdiction and
applicable codes.
6. Provide a 3 year warranty from date of final acceptance on all equipment. Labor on
installation shall be guaranteed for a period of 1 year. Provide warranty documentation in the
submittal.
7. Guarantee all raceways and wiring to be free from inherent mechanical or electrical defects
for one year from the date of final acceptance of system.
L. Annual Testing and Support Contracts:
1. Include as part of base bid cost of Test and Inspection contract which will be in effect for 1
Year.
2. Contract shall allow for quarterly tests according to UL, NFPA and local requirements. In
addition to required testing and inspections, contract shall include cleaning and sensitivity test
of each system detector following first year.
3. Upon expiration of warranty period and initial test and inspection contract, contract shall be
renewable upon its expiration at discretion of Building Owner.
M. Training:
1. Provide services of manufacturer's representative-for an unlimited period, during normal
business hours, to instruct owner's designated personnel and fire department response
teams on operation of system.
N. Spare Equipment:
1. Provide system spare devices as follows:
a. Manual stations - quantity of 4.
b. System smoke detectors with bases - quantity of 8.
c. System heat detectors with bases- quantity of 4.
d. Speaker Strobe Units - quantity of 4.
e. Strobe only units - quantity of 2.
f. Duct smoke detector head and housing - quantity of 2.
g. Addressable contact monitor modules - quantity of 4.
h. Addressable relay modules - quantity of 4.
2.21 ACCESS PANELS
A. Provide access panels for access to concealed junction boxes and to other concealed parts of
system that require accessibility for operation and maintenance. In general, electrical work shall
be laid out so access panels are not required.
B. Access panels shall be located in a workmanlike manner in closets, storage rooms, and/or other
non-public areas, positioned so that junction can be easily reached and size shall be sufficient for
purpose (minimum size 12” x 16”). When access panels are required in corridors, lobbies, or
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 44
other habitable areas, they shall be located as directed.
C. Access panels shall be prime-painted and equipped with screwdriver operated cam locks.
D. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Inland Steel Products Company – Milcor
2. Miami Carey
3. Walsh-Hannon-Gladwin, Inc. – Way Locator
4. Specific Types:
a. Acoustical Tile Ceiling “Milcor Type AT”
b. Plastered Surfaces “Milcor Type K”
c. Masonry Construction “Milcor Type M”
d. Drywall Construction “Milcor Type DW”
E. Furnish access panel Shop Drawings.
2.22 EMERGENCY RESPONDER RADIO COVERAGE SYSTEM
A. Scope of Work:
1. Retain a qualified and experienced design build vendor to design, furnish, install, connect and
test the Emergency Responder Radio Coverage system that is acceptable to the local
Emergency Responders (e.g. fire/emergency medical, law enforcement that will respond to
the building users), Authorities Having Jurisdiction; and in compliance with 780 CMR Chapter
9 requirements, NFPA 72 requirements, and local Emergency Responders requirements.
2. Provide full fire survivability of the Emergency Responders distribution system cabling and
primary equipment in accordance with NFPA 72.
3. The system shall include all necessary hardware, equipment, cabling, antennas, power
supplies, mounting methods, sleeves, software, peripheral devices and all accessories
required for a complete and operating Emergency Responder Radio Coverage for all
buildings and structures in the project scope.
4. Provide a dedicated 120 volt 20 amp branch circuit from the normal/emergency panelboard to
the equipment.
5. Provide fire alarm system supervisory monitoring of primary Emergency Responders Radio
equipment status for loss of AC power, signal loss, low battery indication and battery charger.
B. Manufacturer’s Representative and Design Build Vendor Qualifications:
1. The Electrical Subcontractor shall provide, at the appropriate time or as directed by Architect,
the on-site services of a competent factory trained Engineer of the manufacturer of the
Emergency Responder radio coverage equipment to inspect, test, adjust and place in proper
operating condition any and all items of the same manufacturer. No additional compensation
will be allowed for such services. A written report shall be issued by the particular
manufacturer with his findings for the Architect’s record.
2. All final connections, testing and adjusting of the system shall be done under the direct
supervision of the system supplier. After completion of the installation, a trained technician
employed by the system supplier shall demonstrate the system to the satisfaction of the
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 45
Owner’s representative and shall make all additional adjustments to the system operation by
the Owner’s representative as a result of this demonstration.
3. The design build vendor shall be the primary equipment amplifier manufacturer’s certified
dealer and factory trained service representative, that has the resources to support a project
of this scale, qualified and experienced with the local Emergency Responder Radio system
requirements and able to offer full Maintenance Service Agreement to maintain such a
system.
C. Performance Requirements for Emergency Responder Radio System:
1. The intent is to provide an Emergency Responder Radio Coverage system in compliance
with local Emergency Responders requirements, 780 CMR Chapter 9 requirements and
NFPA 72.
2. The following information herein shall be considered as minimal performance requirements to
be superseded with the latest standards, regulations, and performance requirements from the
Emergency Responders serving the property. Consult with the relevant local Emergency
Responders and Authority Having Jurisdiction, to determine all requirements including any
specific transmit/receive radio frequencies and protocols, prior to bid.
3. Signal Strength:
a. The Emergency Radio Coverage system shall be an integral component of the life safety
equipment of a building or structure. The primary function shall be to provide reliable
local Emergency Responders communications at the required signal strength within the
specified areas.
b. The system shall be required to provide coverage at the specified level by the Authority
Having Jurisdiction, with a minimum of within 95% of a building’s floor area and also 95%
of the stairwells. This Section is responsible to provide signal strength in a 100% of the
building’s floor area and stairwells if unable to determine specific local requirements prior
to bid.
c. The system must provide a signal strength per the requirements of the Emergency
Responders, with a minimum of the following:
1) A minimum signal strength of -95 dBm available in at least 95% if the area of each
floor when transmitted from the Emergency Responders.
2) A minimum signal strength of -95 dBm received at the Emergency Responders
system from at least 95% of the area of each floor of the building.
4. Permissible Emergency Responder Radio Coverage System:
a. Systems shall be provided with an FCC Certificated Amplifier(s) as needed, with specific
bi-directional frequency band ranges and FCC Class Type to match with Emergency
Responders radio equipment.
b. The distribution system may utilize a radiating cable system or an internal multiple
antenna system. Fire survivability of the distribution system cabling shall be in
compliance with NFPA 72.
c. The downlink pass band of the system shall have a center frequency(s) required by the
Emergency Responders.
d. The uplink pass band of the system shall have a center frequency(s) required by the
Emergency Responders.
e. The system as installed must comply with all applicable sections of FCC Rules Part 22,
Part 90 and Part 101.
5. Backup Power:
a. The system shall be capable of operating on an independent battery backup with time
duration required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction, with a minimum of at least 24
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 46
hours.
b. The battery system shall automatically charge in the presence of external power input.
6. Cabinet:
a. The primary equipment including the bi-directional amplifier(s) shall be installed in a
NEMA 4 painted steel cabinet. The color shall be “Fire Engine Red” and bear the
lettering as follows: “EMERGENCY RESPONDER RADIO COVERAGE SYSTEM” in
bright yellow, unless indicated otherwise by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Submit all
nomenclature and designations to the local Fire Department for approval.
b. The maintenance vendor and telephone number shall be marked on the cabinet. The
cabinet shall have a locking mechanism to keep the unit secure.
7. Primary Power:
a. Connection to primary power shall be with metallic conduit (hard-wired).
b. Each bi-directional amplifier shall be powered by a dedicated 20A-1P circuit.
8. System Monitoring:
a. Each amplifier unit shall have a monitoring system that monitors amplifier operation and
primary power. A failure shall activate an audible device and white strobe light. The
audible signal may be silenced but the strobe light shall remain illuminated until the fault
has been corrected.
b. The strobe light shall be located in a common area. A sign shall be located at the strobe
light with the name and telephone number of the equipment maintenance contractor.
c. Provide fire alarm system monitor modules to monitor equipment failure as a supervisory
condition on the fire alarm system.
9. Antenna Distribution Network:
a. Provide a complete list of transit and receive frequencies along with an Intermodulation
(IM) Study and other design documentation for the permit application.
b. The IM Study content shall be in accordance with the requirements by the Authority
Having Jurisdiction with the minimum of the following calculations: IM=Q*F,
IM=F1+F2=F3, IM=F1+F2-F3, IM=Q1*F1+Q2*F2, and IM=Q1*F1-Q2*F2 for all
frequencies uplink and downlink. These calculations shall be done to the 5th order or
higher if required.
D. Wiring and Raceways:
1. Wiring: All system wiring and raceways shall meet the requirements of the Code and as
recommended by the Emergency Responder Radio Coverage system manufacturer.
2.23 RESIDENTIAL TELECOMMUNICATIONS FITOUT
A. Scope of Work:
1. Provide all materials, components, installation, coordination with related Trades and all work
otherwise required to provide complete, fully operational Residential Telecommunications Fit-
out, including but not limited to:
a. Grounding and bonding of all communications systems and equipment.
b. Horizontal structured cabling systems for Voice, Data, Broadband.
c. Area outlets complete with modular connectors and associated wall plates.
d. Testing of all communication systems.
e. Coordination between all other Trades.
f. All other systems hereinafter specified or indicated on the Contract Drawings, complete,
leaving ready a communication system in perfect operating condition.
g. Tenant structured media panels.
h. Connectors and couplings.
i. Terminations.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 47
j. Record drawings and documentation.
k. Operation and maintenance instructions and manuals for the Section’s work.
l. Nameplates, labels and tags.
m. Testing, certification and documentation.
n. Coordination with Manufacturers, other Trades, Telecommunications Service Providers
and the Owner.
2. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, and services not specifically mentioned or shown,
which may be necessary to complete or perfect all parts of the installation. Ensure that they
are in compliance with requirements stated or reasonably interred by the contract documents.
3. Provide a complete UL Category 5E (EIA/TIA Category 5E) Voice/Data Cabling system as
specified herein.
4. Provide connectivity from the area outlets to their respective residential structured media
panel.
5. Area outlet installation for voice, data and broadband applications; including faceplates, blank
inserts, jack modules and port labeling.
6. Termination of Enhanced Category 5E cabling for both voice and data applications.
7. Conduit and raceways to route structured cabling from area outlet to respective residential
structured medial panel.
8. Labeling of all system components.
9. Firestopping.
B. Residential Media Panel: Each dwelling unit shall have a dedicated residential media panel equal
to Leviton #47605-21E (PANEL), 47605-21S (DOOR), 47606-BNP (INTERIOR)/47606-AHT.
C. Area Outlets:
1. Work area cables shall each be terminated at their designated work area location in the
modular connector types described in the subsections below. These modular connectors
shall snap into a faceplate.
2. The Area Outlet shall be:
a. A minimum 4” square x 2-1/2” depth recessed outlet box with a single gang trim, unless
the quantity of ports requires a double gang trim type.
b. Additional accommodations for specific locations as necessary.
c. A blank filler will be installed when extra ports are not used.
d. A dust cap shall be provided on all modular jacks with the circuit number on the identifier
strip.
e. The same orientation and positioning of jacks and connectors shall be utilized throughout
the installation. Prior to installation, the Telecommunications Contractor shall submit the
proposed configuration for each outlet assembly for review by the Owner.
f. The modular jack shall incorporate printed label strip on the dust cap module for
identifying the outlet. Printed labels shall be permanent and compliant with
ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A standard specifications. Hand printed labels shall not be accepted.
g. The faceplates shall match the style as appropriate to fit the modular jack used and shall
be:
1) Interchangeable type inserts with space to accommodate at least six (6) modular
jacks spaces per single gang trim.
2) Constructed or high impact, ABS plastic UL 94V-0 construction (except where noted
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 48
otherwise).
3) Match the faceplate color used for in the building or be available as single-gang or
dual-gang.
4) Provide easy access for adds, moves, and changes by front removal of jack modules.
5) Possess recessed designation windows to facilitate labeling and identification.
6) Include a clear plastic cover to protect labels in the designation window.
7) Have mounting screws located under recessed designation windows.
8) Comply with ANSI/TIA-EIA-606-A labeling standard.
9) Allow for the UTP modules to be inverted in place for termination purposes.
h. Voice and Data Jacks:
1) Voice and data jacks shall be 8-position module Category 5e (or higher) performance
as defined by the references in this document including ANSI/TIA/EI-568-B.2. All pair
combinations must be considered, with the worst case measurement being the basis
for compliance. Modular jack performance shall be third party verified by a nationally
recognized independent testing laboratory.
2) Dust covers shall be provided on each jack.
3) Voice and data modular shall be 45 degree angled exit style, regress from face of
cover plate.
i. F Connector Jacks:
1) Each F connector jack shall be module self-terminating 75 ohm F type coupler
suitable for residential broadband High Definition CATV/Satellite applications (2GHz).
2) F connector modules shall be 45 degree angled exit style, regress from face of cover
plate.
D. Horizontal Structured Cables:
1. Voice and Data:
a. Each voice jack and each data jack shall be wired back to the residential structured
media panel in star topology method with dedicated horizontal structure cabling for each
jack.
b. All horizontal data cables and horizontal voice cables serving the work area outlets within
the same residential dwelling shall terminate in the respective residential structured
media panel.
c. All horizontal data cables and horizontal voice cables shall be ANSI/TIA/EIA – 568-B.1
100 ohm enhanced Category 5e unshielded twisted pair (UTP) cable type CM’ third party
verified by a nationally recognized independent testing laboratory. Provide type CMP
plenum rated construction cable where cables are located in plenum air spaces.
d. The UTP cabling systems shall have TIA/EIA T568B pin/pair termination assignment. All
four pairs of associated Category 5 enhanced cable shall be terminated on every voice
and data modular 8-position jack. Splitting of pairs shall not be permitted in the horizontal
cable plant.
e. All conductors provided shall be properly and consistently terminated at both ends
throughout the entire systems.
2. Broadband Coaxial:
a. All horizontal broadband coaxial cable serving the work area outlets within the same
residential dwelling shall terminate in the respective residential structured media panel.
b. All horizontal broadband coaxial shall be ANSI/TIA/EIA – 570-B (Grade 2 or better) 75
ohm coaxial copper clad, quad shield type cable; third party verified by a nationally
recognized independent testing laboratory.
c. Each broadband coaxial cable shall be terminated on a modular F connector jack.
d. All conductors provided shall be properly and consistently terminated at both ends
throughout the entire systems.
2.24 ELEVATOR WORK
A. Furnish and install all power wiring as required by the Elevator Manufacturer. Consult Elevator
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 49
Manufacturer and obtain final accepted Elevator Shop Drawings prior to installing feeders,
disconnect switches, elevator pit light/receptacles, telephone conduits with two (2) CAT 5e
cables, 120 volt control power circuits for the machine room and control wiring for selective
operation of elevators when the building power system is derived from the generators. The
elevator machine safety switch shall contain a normally closed, dry auxiliary contact that opens
when the safety switch opens. The Electrical Subcontractor shall provide a pair of wires between
the auxiliary-contact in the safety switch to the respective elevator controller.
2.25 VIDEO INTERCOM SYSTEM
A. General:
1. Section Includes: Multi-tenant color-video entry security system.
2. Related Sections: Section 16050 – Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.
3. References:
a. American National Standards Institute (ANSI/TIA/EIA) 568 – Commercial Building
Telecommunications Cabling Standard.
b. International Organization for Standards (ISO) 9001:2008 – Quality Management
Systems – Requirements.
4. System Description:
a. The system shall be hard wired and constructed with a 2-line communication system and
a 2-line video system. The system is designed with video trunk lines from the video bus
control unit and communication trunk lines that use a distribution point from a bus control
unit. System shall be ADA compliant. System shall allow for CCTV integration. Systems
with audio only components shall be configurable.
b. Functional Components:
1) Entrance stations.
2) Tenant stations.
3) Interior tenant stations (sub-stations).
4) Manager’s station.
5) Concierge stations.
6) Tenant entry door stations.
7) Tenant suite security system.
8) CCTV system.
9) Access control system.
c. System Requirement: Unless noted otherwise on drawings provide system size as
follows.
1) Entrance stations.
2) Tenant stations (master).
3) Interior tenant stations (sub-stations).
4) Manager’s station.
5) Concierge stations.
6) Tenant entry door stations: Refer to drawing schedule for units requiring suite entry
door stations.
7) Tenant suite security system. Refer to drawing schedule for units requiring suite
security.
8) CCTV system Inputs.
d. Operation:
1) Calling Tenant Station from Entry Station and Communicating.
2) Calling Tenant Station from Sub-master Tenant Station and Communicating.
3) Calling Tenant Station from Manager/Concierge Station and Communicating.
4) Activating Door Release from Entry, Tenant Station and Manager/Concierge
Stations.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 50
5. Submittals:
a. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
b. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1) Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2) Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3) Installation methods.
c. Shop Drawings: Submit the following:
1) Wiring Diagrams: Indicate wiring for each item of equipment and inter-connections
between items of equipment.
2) Include manufacturer’s names, model numbers, ratings, power requirements,
equipment layout, device arrangement, complete wiring point-to-point diagrams, and
conduit layouts.
d. Installation and Operation Manuals:
1) Submit manufacturer’s installation and operation manual, including operation
instructions and component wiring diagrams.
2) Provide detailed information required for Owner to properly operate equipment.
e. Warranty: Submit manufacturer’s standard warranty.
f. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips
representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.
g. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6
inches (150 mm) square representing actual product, color, and patterns.
6. Quality Assurance:
a. Manufacturer Qualifications: ISO 9001:2008 certified company.
b. Installer Qualifications: Factory trained and experienced with system installations of
scope and size required for the Project.
c. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and
application workmanship.
1) Finish areas designated by Architect.
2) Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship, color, and sheen are
approved by Architect.
3) Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work.
7. Delivery, Storage, and Handling:
a. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers and
packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer.
b. Storage: Store materials in clean, dry area indoors in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions.
c. Handling: Protect materials during handling and installation to prevent damage.
8. Project Conditions: Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and
ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install
products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
B. Products:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Acceptable Manufacturer: Aiphone Corp.; as distributed by SIGNET Electronic Systems
Inc. 106 Longwater Drive, Norwell, Massachusetts.
b. Substitutions: Not permitted.
c. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section
01600.
2. Multi-Tenant Entry Security System:
a. Multi-Tenant Color Video Entry Security System: Aiphone “GT Series” as manufactured
by Aiphone Corporation.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 51
b. Entrance Stations:
1) Provide 170 degree Pan Tilt & Zoom video camera, built-in access code keypads for
keyless entry, CCTV system integration and concierge visitor screening.
2) Entrance Panel: “All-in-one” Model GT-DM (Guidance-enabled type).
a) Audio & Video.
b) Access Control.
c) Directory Scroll.
d) LCD may be set to Energy Saver mode.
e) Motion Sensor auto activates LCD when in Energy Saver mode.
f) Voice Annunciation.
3) Entrance Panel: Model GT. Provide modular units with the following functional
modules, corresponding panels, hardware and fittings.
a) Type: Audio/video + direct select type.
b) Type: Custom with the following functions:
(1) Audio Access Control.
(2) Video Access Control.
(3) Voice Annunciation.
(4) Digital Display Keypad.
(5) Name Panels.
(6) Address Panel.
3. Tenant Station:
a. Station Panel: Model GT-2C.
1) Record visitor images automatically.
2) Communicate internally between stations.
3) May be used with Tenant Door Stations to replace peephole identification.
4) Pan Tilt & Zoom camera control.
5) Video identification.
6) Talk with visitors.
7) Unlock doors.
8) Instant communication with concierge stations.
9) Provide Suite Security:
a) Dual zone alarm inputs for security devices, such as window and door contacts
or personal wireless pendants.
b) Auto-alert to concierge station when alarm is triggered.
c) Disarm and arm suite security from tenant station panel.
d) Loud siren to alert tenants and scare away potential threats.
10) Decorative Panel Cover: Stainless steel.
11) Decorative Panel Cover: Silver.
12) Decorative Panel Cover: Black.
13) Provide handset.
14) Provide sub-master(s) as scheduled. Model GT-2H.
4. Concierge/Manager’s Station:
a. Provide visitor screening.
b. Provide tenants with ability to easily call Concierge/Manager’s Station from units for
emergency assistance.
c. Station Panel: Model GT-MK.
d. Mount: Wall mount.
e. Mount: Desk mount.
5. Tenant Door Station (Handicapped Accessible Tenant):
a. Provide visitor screening with 170 degree camera.
b. Station Panel: Model JK-DA.
6. Bus Controller Components and Mounting Hardware:
a. Bus Control Unit: Model GT-BC.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 52
b. Video Bus Control Unit: Model GT-VBC.
c. Expanded Bus Control Unit: Model GT-BCX.
d. Expanded Video Bus Control Unit: Model GT-VBX.
e. 4-Way Video Junction Unit: Model GT-4Z.
f. Power Supply: Model PS-2420UL.
g. External Signal relay: Model GT-RY.
h. Frames and back boxes for surface and flush mount as required.
C. Execution:
1. Examination:
a. Examine areas to receive integrated security and communication system.
b. Notify Architect of conditions that would adversely affect installation or subsequent use.
c. Do not begin installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected.
2. Preparation: Verify the following compliance before starting installation.
a. All units, except for the entrance station and tenant door station, are designed for indoor
use only. Do not use outdoors.
b. The unit turns inoperative during power failure.
c. In areas where broadcasting station antennas are close by, intercom system may be
affected by radio frequency interference.
d. Keep the intercom wires at least 1 foot (30 cm) away from strong electrical wiring (AC
100-240 V) including, in particular, wiring for inverter electrical appliances. Noise and
malfunction could result.
e. Keep the unit more than 3.3 feet (1 m) away from radio or TV set.
f. If a strong light shines on the main unit screen, the picture will turn white or only
silhouettes will be visible.
g. Other manufacturer's devices (such as sensor, detectors, door releases) used with this
system, comply with the manufacturer’s installation requirements.
h. The LCD panel is manufactured with very high precision techniques, inevitably will have a
very small portion of its picture elements always lit or not lit at all. This is not considered
a unit malfunction. Please be aware of this in advance.
i. The sensor of an entrance station (Integrated type) may activate due to moving shadows
or moving tree branches, etc. and cause a message to display.
3. Installation:
a. Install integrated security and communication system in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions at locations indicated on the Drawings.
b. Mount equipment plumb, level, square, and secure. For video entrance stations and
video door stations, comply with manufacturer’s design requirements to provide optimum
picture quality of station monitoring.
4. Set-up and Adjusting: Adjust integrated security and communication system for proper
operation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
5. Demonstration and Training:
a. Demonstration:
1) Demonstrate that integrated security and communication system functions properly.
2) Perform demonstration at final system inspection by qualified representative of
manufacturer.
b. Instruction and Training:
1) Provide two 4 hour instruction and training of Owner’s personnel as required for
operation of integrated security and communication system.
2) Provide hands-on demonstration of operation of system components and complete
system, including user-level program changes and functions.
3) Provide instruction and training by qualified representative of manufacturer.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 53
6. Protection: Protect installed integrated security and communication system from damage
during construction.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 BASIC REQUIREMENTS
A. Adhere to best industry practice and the following:
1. All work shall be concealed.
2. Route circuitry runs embedded in concrete to coordinate with structural requirements.
3. Equip each raceway intended for the future installation of wire or cable with a nylon pulling
cord 3/16” in diameter and clearly identify both ends of the raceway.
4. Provide all outlet boxes, junction boxes, and pull boxes for proper wire pulling and device
installation. Include those omitted from the Contract Drawings due to symbolic methods of
notation.
5. Utilize lugs of the limited type to make connections at both ends of cables installed on the line
side of main service overcurrent and switching devices. Provide cable limiters for each end
of each service entrance cable.
6. Beyond the termination of raceways, fireproof the following:
a. All wires and cables within pad-mounted transformer enclosure.
b. All service feeder cables ahead of main service overcurrent protection devices, and
elsewhere where not in raceways.
c. Fireproofing of wires and cables shall be by means of a half-lapped layer of arc proof or
by means of sleeving of a type specifically manufactured for the purpose. Ends of tape
or sleeving shall be severed with twine. Fireproofing shall be extended up into raceways.
After conductors have been finally shaped into their permanent configuration, fireproofing
tape or sleeving shall be coated with silicate of soda (water glass). Fireproofing shall be
applied in an overall manner to raceway groupings of conductors.
7. Provide all sleeves through fireproof and waterproof slabs, walls, etc., required for electric
work.
a. Provide waterproof sealing for the sleeves through waterproof slabs, walls, etc.
b. Provide fireproof sealing for the sleeves through fireproof walls, slabs, etc.
c. Provide fireproof sealing for the openings in fireproof walls, slabs, etc., resulting from
removal of existing electrical sleeves, conduits, poke-thru’s etc.
8. No splicing of wires will be permitted in Fire Alarm System.
9. Bundle wiring passing through pull boxes and panelboards in a neat and orderly manner.
10. Turn branch circuits and auxiliary system wiring out of wiring gutters at 90 degrees to circuit
breakers and terminal lugs.
11. In electric rooms with equipment rated 800 amps or more and over 6 feet wide that contains
overcurrent devices, the Electrical Contractor shall provide a powered Exit sign at 18” AFF at
each door.
12. All building mounted photovoltaic equipment shall be installed, tested and maintained in
accordance with NFPA 1 Section 11.12.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 54
13. All panelboards shall be labeled in accordance with NFPA 70 Article 408.
3.2 TESTING REQUIREMENTS & INSTRUCTIONS
A. The Electrical Subcontractor shall provide supervision, labor, materials, tools, test instruments
and all other equipment or services and expenses required to test, adjust, set, calibrate, and
operationally check work and components of the electrical systems and circuitry throughout
Division 26 work.
B. The Electrical Subcontractor shall pay for all tests specified in Division 26, including expenses
incident to retests occasioned by defects and failures of equipment to meet Specifications, at no
additional cost to the Owner. Any defects or deficiencies discovered in any of the Electrical work
shall be corrected.
1. The Electrical Subcontractor shall:
a. Replace wiring and equipment found defective (defined as failing to meet specified
requirements) at no additional cost to the Owner.
b. Submit three (3) copies of test results to the Engineer.
2. Do not void equipment warranties or guarantees by testing and checkout work. Checks and
tests shall be supplemental to and compatible with the Manufacturer’s installation
instructions. Where deviations are apparent, obtain the Manufacturer’s approved review of
procedures prior to testing. Where any repairs, modifications, adjustments, tests or checks
are to be made, the Contractor shall contact the Engineer to determine if the work should be
performed by or with the Manufacturer’s Representative.
3. Tests are to:
a. Provide initial equipment/system acceptance.
b. Provide recorded data for future routine maintenance and trouble-shooting.
c. Provide assurance that each system component is installed satisfactorily and can be
expected to perform, and continue to perform its specified function with reasonable
reliability throughout the life of the facility.
1) At any stage of construction and when observed, any electrical equipment or system
determined to be damaged, or faulty, is to be reported to the Engineer. Corrective
action by the Contractor requires prior Engineer approval, retesting, and inspection.
2) Prior to testing and start-up, equipment and wiring shall be properly and permanently
identified with nameplates, and other identification as specified in Section 3.7. Check
and tighten terminals and connection points, remove shipping blocks and thoroughly
clean equipment, repair damaged or scratched finishes, inspect for broken and
missing parts and review and collect Manufacturer’s Drawings and instructions for
delivery to the Engineer. Make routine checks and tests as the job progresses to
ensure that wiring and equipment is properly installed.
3) Testing and checkout work is to be performed with fully qualified personnel skilled in
the particular tests being conducted. Personnel are to have at least five (5) years of
experience with tests of same type and size as specified.
4) Inspections and tests shall be in accordance with the following applicable codes and
standards as amended to date, unless otherwise specified.
a) National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association – NEMA.
b) American Society for Testing and Materials _ ASTM.
c) Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers – IEEE.
d) National Electrical Testing Association – NETA.
e) American National Standards Institute – ANSI.
f) C2: National Electrical Safety Code.
g) Z244-1: American National Standard for Personnel Protection.
h) Insulated Cable Engineers Association – ICEA.
i) Association of Edison Illuminating Companies – AEIC.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 55
j) Occupational Safety and Health Administration – OSHA.
k) OSHA Part 1910; Subpart S, 1910.308.
l) OSHA Part 1926; Subpart V, 1926.950 through 1926.960.
m) National Fire Protection Association – NFPA.
n) 70B: Electrical Equipment Maintenance.
o) 70E: Electrical Safety Requirements for Employer Workplaces.
p) 70: National Electrical Code.
q) 78: Lightning Protection Code.
r) 101: Life Safety Code.
s) Inspections and tests shall utilize the following references:
t) Contract Drawings and Specifications.
u) Contractor’s Short Circuit and Construction Study, in accordance with Section 26
00 00D.
v) Manufacturer’s printed test procedures for respective equipment.
4. Test Equipment:
a. Test equipment used by the Contractor is to be inspected and calibrated.
b. Perform calibration and setting checks with calibrated test instruments of at least twice
that of the accuracy of the equipment, device, relay or meter under test. Dated
calibration labels shall be visible on test equipment. Calibrations over six (6) months old
are not acceptable on field test instruments. Inspect test instruments for proper operation
prior to proceeding with the tests. Record serial and model numbers of the instruments
used on the test forms.
5. Test Procedures:
a. The Electrical Subcontractor is responsible for the preparation of the procedures and
schedules for the work specified herein. This work is to be coordinated and compatible
with both the work and schedule of the other crafts. Sequence the tests and checks so
that the equipment can be energized immediately after the completion of the application
tests.
b. Submit proposed testing and checkout forms. The procedures shall provide specific
instructions for the checking and testing of each electrical component of each system.
Schedule tests and inspections as the job progresses. Test procedures submitted shall
include job safety rules.
c. After each electrical system installation is complete, perform the tests to determine that
the entire system is in proper working order and in accordance with applicable codes,
Manufacturer’s instructions, Drawings, and Specifications. Tests are in addition to shop
tests of individual items at the Manufacturer’s plant. Perform insulation and ground
resistance tests before operating tests.
d. Perform insulation tests on electrical equipment, apparatus, cables, motors, generators,
transformers, circuit breakers and switches, switchgear, motor control centers, and
similar electrical equipment, at the following items and conditions:
e. Prior to energization and/or placing into service.
f. When damage to the insulation is suspected or known to exist.
g. After repairs or modifications to the equipment affecting the insulation.
h. Where lightning or other surge conditions are known to have existed on the circuit.
i. Make openings in circuits for test instruments and place and connect instruments,
equipment, and devices, required for the tests. Upon completion of tests, remove
instruments and instrument connections and restore circuits to permanent condition.
j. List each circuit and measured resistance as test data. Maintain record of insulation
resistance values. Identify conductor, or equipment, date that value was taken and
resistance value. Arrange information in tabular form and submit to Engineer.
k. Report inspections, tests, and calibrations in writing on Engineer approved reports/forms.
The recorded data form shall have the signatures of the persons conducting the tests,
authorized witnesses and the Engineer. The forms shall serve as the test and inspection
checklist.
l. When the electrical tests and inspections specified or required within Division 26 are
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 56
completed and results reported, reviewed, and approved by the Engineer, the Contractor
may consider that portion of the electrical equipment system or installation electrically
complete. The Contractor will then affix appropriate, approved, and dated completion or
calibration labels to the tested equipment and notify the Engineer of electrical completion.
If the Engineer finds completed work unacceptable, he will notify the Contractor in writing of
the unfinished or deficient work, with the reason for his rejection, to be corrected by the
Contractor. The Contractor will notify the Engineer in writing when exceptions have been
corrected. The Contractor will prepare a “Notification or Substantial Electrical Completion”
for approval by the Engineer following Engineer’s acceptance of electrical completion. If
later in-service operation or further testing identified problems attributable to the Contractor,
these will be corrected by the Contractor, at no additional cost to the Authority.
C. Specific Tests: Perform the following specified tests. De-energize and isolate equipment and
cable prior to performing the tests.
D. Motors:
1. Before energizing any machine, visually inspect for serviceability. Check Manufacturer’s
instruction manual for correct lubrication and ventilation. Align motor with driven equipment.
Check nameplate for electrical power requirements.
2. Test run motors uncoupled or unloaded, before placing into operation. Check the motor for
rotation, speed, current and temperature rise under normal load and record the results.
Maintain the proper color codes for phase identifications. This may require swaps at the
motor for proper rotation. Use motor phase rotation meter prior to lead connection at motor in
order to minimize later swaps.
E. Grounding Systems:
1. Test main building loops and major equipment grounds to remote earth, directly referenced to
an extremely low resistance (approximately 1 ohm) reference ground benchmark. Perform a
visual inspection of the systems, raceway and equipment grounds to determine the adequacy
and integrity of the grounding. Ground testing results shall be recorded, witnesses, and
submitted to the Engineer.
2. Perform ground tests using a low resistance, null-balance type ground testing ohmmeter, with
test lead resistance compensated for. Use the type of test instrument which compensates for
potential and current rod resistances.
3. Test each ground rod and measure ground resistance. If resistance is not 25 ohms or less,
drive additional rods to obtain a resistance of 25 ohms or less. Submit tabulation of results to
Engineer. Include identification of electrode, date of reading and ground resistance valve in
the test reports.
4. Test each building and major equipment grounding system for continuity of connections and
for resistance. Ground resistance of conduits, equipment cases, and supporting frames, shall
not exceed 5 ohms to ground. Submit all readings to the Engineer.
5. Where ground test results identify the need for additional grounding conductors or rods that
are not indicated or specified, design changes will be initiated to obtain the acceptable
values. The Contractor is responsible for the proper installation of the grounding indicated
and specified.
6. Wire and Cable: (All conductors originating from main switchboard and distribution panels).
a. Before energizing any cable or wire, megger the insulation resistance of every external
circuit wire to each other and to ground. Tests shall be conducted at voltages of 500
volts or lower. Continuity test each wire and cable to verify the field-applied tag per
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 57
conductor. Continuity test each wire and cable to verify the field-applied tag per
conductor. Minimum insulation resistance valves shall not be less than two (2)
megohms.
b. Take insulation resistance measurements for motor feeders. With motors disconnected,
measure insulation resistance from load side of contactors or circuit breakers.
c. Check cables and wires for the proper identification numbering and/or color coding.
d. Inspect cables for physical damage and proper connection in accordance with single line
diagram.
F. Power Distribution System:
1. Main Switchboard:
a. Inspect for physical, electrical and mechanical condition.
b. Compare equipment nameplate information with latest single-line diagram and report
discrepancies in writing to Engineer within 24 hours.
c. Check for proper anchorage, required area clearance, physical damage, and proper
alignment.
d. Inspect all doors, panels and sections for paint, dents, scratches, fit and missing
hardware.
e. Verify that fuse and/or circuit breaker sizes and types correspond to Drawings. Report
deviations to Engineer in writing within 24 hours.
f. Inspect all bus connections for high resistance. Use low resistance ohmmeter, or check
tightness of bolted bus joints by calibrated torque wrench method. Refer to
manufacturer’s instructions for proper torque levels.
g. Clean entire switchgear using manufacturer’s approved methods and materials prior to
energizing system and a second time just prior to turning over system to Owner.
h. Inspect insulators for evidence of physical damage or contaminated surfaces.
i. Verify proper barrier and shutter installation and operation.
j. Verify appropriate contact lubricant on moving current carrying parts.
k. Exercise all active components.
l. Inspect all indicating devices for proper operation.
m. Perform ground resistance tests.
n. Perform insulation resistance tests on each bus section, phase-to-phase and phase-to-
ground for one (1) minute. Test voltage shall be 1000 volts minimum, and insulation
resistance shall be 100 megohms minimum.
o. Perform an over-potential test on each bus station, each phase-to-ground, for five (5)
minutes at manufacturer’s recommended potential. Test results are evaluated on a go,
no-go basis by slowly raising the test voltage to the required value. The final test voltage
shall be applied for five (5) minutes for DC test potentials, and one (1) minute for AC test
potentials.
2. Circuit Breakers – Molded Case:
a. Circuit breaker shall be checked for proper mounting, conductor size and feeder
designation.
b. Operate circuit breaker to ensure smooth operation.
c. Inspect case for cracks or other defects.
d. Check tightness of connections with calibrated torque wrench. Refer to manufacturer’s
instruction for proper torque levels.
e. Perform a contract resistance test or measure millivolt drop at rated current.
f. Perform an insulation resistance test at 1000 volts DC for one (1) minute from pole-to-
pole and from each pole-to-ground with breaker closed and across open contract in each
phase – 500V DC if circuit breaker is solid state.
g. Adjustable trip breakers shall have minimum pickup current determined by primary
current injection where applicable.
h. Perform long time delay time-current characteristic tests by passing 300% rated current
through each pole separately. Determine trip time.
i. Determine short time pickup and delay by primary current injection if applicable to the
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 58
particular breaker.
j. Determine ground fault pickup and time delay by primary current injection if applicable to
the particular breaker.
k. Determine instantaneous pickup currently by primary injection using run-up or pulse
method. Clearing times shall be within four (4) cycles.
l. Verify trip unit reset characteristics.
m. Perform adjustments for final settings in accordance with breaker setting sheet if
applicable to the particular breaker.
n. Compare contract resistance or millivolt drop valves to adjacent poles and similar
breakers. Investigate deviations of more than 50%. Investigate any value exceeding
Manufacturer’s recommendations.
o. Insulation resistance shall not be less than 100 megohms.
p. Trip characteristics of adjustable trip breakers shall fall within Manufacturer’s published
time-current characteristic tolerance band.
q. All circuit breakers mounted in switchboards and distribution boards shall be time-current
tested by primary current injection where possible, and also any remotely mounted
breakers of frame size 400 ampere and larger.
r. Adjust settings and calibrate all circuit breakers as recommended in the short circuit
analysis and coordination study.
3. Motor Control:
a. Inspect for physical damage, proper anchorage and grounding.
b. Compare equipment nameplate data with design plans or starter schedule.
4. Motor Running Protection:
a. Compare overload heater rating with motor full-load current rating to verify proper sizing
b. If motor running protection is provided by fuses, verify proper rating considering motor
characteristics.
c. Check tightness of bolted connections.
d. Measure insulation resistance of each bus section phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground
for one (1) minute.
e. Measure insulation resistance of each starter section phase-to-phase and phase-to-
ground with the starter contacts closed and the protective device open.
f. Measure insulation resistance of each control circuit with respect to ground.
g. Test motor overload units by injecting primary current through overload unit and
monitoring trip time at 300% of motor full-load current.
h. Perform operational tests by initiating control devices to affect proper operation.
i. Bolt torque levels shall be in accordance with Manufacturer’s recommendations.
j. Perform insulation resistance test, 1000 VDC minimum test voltage and 100 megohms
minimum insulation resistance.
k. Control wiring insulation test voltage shall be 1000 VDC. Manufacturer shall be
consulted for test voltage where solid-state control devices are utilized.
l. Perform overload tests at 300% of motor full-load current. Trip times shall be in
accordance with Manufacturer’s tolerances. Investigate values in excess of 120
seconds.
5. Panelboards:
a. Inspect for physical damage and proper grounding.
b. Compare nameplate information with schedules and report any discrepancies.
c. Inspect all panelboards for cleanliness, workmanship, etc.
6. Low Voltage Systems: Include, but not limited to the following: Video intercom entry system,
communication/telephone - sound systems.
a. Visually inspect all components for physical damage, dents, scratches and missing
hardware.
b. Check all wiring for proper identification numbering and/or color coding.
c. Thoroughly clean all components.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 59
d. Inspect all wiring for tightness of connections.
e. Operate and perform each of the system components and functions to verify system
operation per plans and specs.
7. The following systems shall adhere to the general requirements of this section in addition to
complying with the specific test requirements outlined in the respective sections listed:
a. Fire Alarm System.
b. Lighting Control and Dimming System.
8. Operating Instructions: Furnish operating instructions to Owner’s designated representative
with respect to operations, functions and maintenance procedures for equipment and
systems installed. Cost of such instruction up to a full five (5) days of Electrical
Subcontractor’s time shall be included in contract. Cost of providing a Manufacturer’s
Representative at site for instructional purposes shall also be included.
3.3 BRANCH CIRCUITRY
A. For all lighting and appliance branch circuitry, raceway sizes shall conform to industry standard
maximum permissible occupancy requirements except where these are exceeded by other
requirements specified elsewhere.
B. Circuits shall be balanced on phases at their supply as evenly as possible.
C. Feeder connections shall be in the phase rotation which establishes proper operation for all
equipment supplied.
D. Reduced size conductors indicated for any feeders shall be taken as their grounding conductors.
E. Feeders consisting of multiple cables and raceways shall be arranged such that each raceway of
the feeder contains one (1) cable for each leg and one (1) neutral cable, if any.
F. For circuitry indicated as being protected at 20 Amps or less, abide by the following:
1. All 20 amp, 120/208 volt, 3-phase, 4-wire combined branch circuit homeruns shall be
provided with a #8 AWG neutral conductor.
2. Minimum conductor size shall be No. 12 AWG copper.
3. Conductors operating at 120 volts extending in excess of 100 ft. or at 277 volts extending in
excess of 200 ft., or the last outlet or fixture tap shall be No. 10 AWG copper throughout.
4. Lighting fixtures and receptacles shall not be connected to the same circuit.
5. Circuits shall be balanced on phases at their supply point as evenly as possible.
G. Type MC Cable Installation:
1. Where cable is permitted under the products section, the installation of same shall be done in
accordance with code and the following:
a. Cable shall be supported in accordance with code. Tie wire is not an acceptable means
of support. Cable supports such as Caddy WMX-6, MX-3, and clamps such as Caddy
449 shall be used. Where cables are supported by the structure and only need securing
in place, then ty-raps will be acceptable. Ty-raps are not acceptable as a means of
support. All fittings, hangers, and clamps for support and termination of cables shall be
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 60
of type specifically designed for use with cable, i.e., romex connectors not acceptable.
b. Armor of cable shall be removed with rotary cutter device equal to roto-split by Seatek
Co.; not with a hacksaw.
c. Use split “Insuliner” sleeves at terminations.
3.4 REQUIREMENTS GOVERNING ELECTRICAL WORK IN DAMP OR WET LOCATIONS
A. Outlets and outlet size boxes shall be of galvanized cast ferrous metal only.
B. The finish of threaded steel conduit shall be galvanized only.
C. Wires for pulling into raceways for lighting and appliance branch circuitry shall be limited to
“THWN”.
D. Wires for pulling into raceways for feeders shall be limited to “THWN”.
E. Plates for toggle switches and receptacles shall have gasketed snap shut covers suitable for wet
locations while in use.
F. Final connections of flexible conduit shall be neoprene sheathed.
G. Apply one (1) layer of half looped plastic electric insulating tape over wire nuts used for joining the
conductors of wires.
H. Enclosures, junction boxes, pull boxes, cabinets, cabinet trims, wiring troughs and the like, shall
be fabricated of galvanized sheet metal, shall conform to the following:
1. They shall be constructed with continuously welded joints and seams.
2. Their edges and weld spots shall be factory treated with cold galvanizing compound.
3. Their connection to circuitry shall be by means of watertight hub connectors with sealing
rings.
I. Enclosures for individually mounted switching and overcurrent devices shall be NEMA Class IV
weatherproof construction.
J. The covers, doors and plates and trims used in conjunction with all enclosures, pull boxes, outlet
boxes, junction boxes, cabinets and the like shall be equipped with gaskets.
K. Panels shall be equipped with doors without exception.
L. The following shall be interpreted as damp or wet locations within building confines:
1. Spaces where any designations indicating weatherproof (WP) or vapor proof appear on the
Contract Drawings.
2. Below waterproofing in slabs applied directly on grade.
3. Spaces defined as wet or damp locations by Article 100 of the National Electric Code.
3.5 REQUIREMENTS GOVERNING ELECTRIC WORK IN AIR HANDLING SPACES
A. Within air handling plenums:
1. Abide by the requirements specified for electric work in damp locations within building
confines.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 61
2. All cabling and electrical equipment installed within plenums shall be listed for plenum use.
3. Exclude the installation of type NM or NMC cable.
B. In spaces within suspended ceilings used for air handling purposes, abide by the requirements
specified for normal electric work conditions except:
1. Lighting fixtures recessed into the ceilings shall be certified as being suitable for this purpose.
3.6 UNDERGROUND CONDUIT BANKS
A. The Electrical work required in conjunction with underground conduit banks shall include
providing all conduits.
B. Conduits for underground banks shall be:
1. Trade diameter size as indicated but in no case less than one inch.
2. Polyvinyl chloride Schedule 40 (approved for encased burial) duct, rigid steel conduit for
vertical elbows and straight sections used to penetrate equipment pads, building foundation
walls and concrete slabs.
C. All conduits indicated as being incorporated into conduit banks unless specifically noted as rigid
steel conduits shall be encased in a concrete envelope which accommodates the indicated
configuration of conduits and which encompasses dimensions as follows:
1. Outside surfaces of conduits to outside surface of envelope where reinforcement of
encasement is required – 6” minimum.
2. Outside surfaces of conduits to outside surface of envelope where no reinforcement of
encasement is required – 3” minimum.
3. Spacing between centerlines of conduits assigned to different categories of use primary
feeders, secondary feeders, communications and signaling – 10-1/2” minimum.
4. Spacing between centerlines of conduits assigned to the same category of use – 7-1/2”
minimum.
D. Reinforcement of the concrete encasement for conduit banks where required shall consist of No.
4 longitudinal reinforcing bars located 3” from the outside surface of the envelope and spaced 6”
on centers all around. No. 8 wire reinforcing hoops set 8” apart shall be used to tie the
longitudinal bars together.
E. Install conduit in such a manner as to provide a minimum cover of 30 inches after final grading
except the cover may be reduced to a minimum of 18 inches to:
1. Tie into existing work.
2. Pass over other underground utilities.
3. Pass over underground obstructions.
4. Assist in the avoidance of low points.
F. Increase the minimum cover where required by field conditions.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 62
G. Lay conduit to avoid low points during run. Pitch at a minimum of 3 inches per 100 feet away
from building.
H. Provide reinforcement for the concrete encasement of a conduit bank where:
1. It passes under or over underground utilities.
2. It passes under or over underground obstructions.
3. Its cover is reduced to less than 30 inches.
4. It runs through foundation walls and other building construction.
I. Concrete encasement reinforcing shall extend in each case 5 feet beyond the points at which the
determining conditions terminate.
J. Bends in conduit shall have minimum radii as follows:
1. For primary feeder 15’-0” except where specifically indicated otherwise or where turning up at
termination point.
2. For primary feeder turning up at termination point – 4’-0”.
K. Install conduit so that adjacent joints are staggered at least 6 inches from one another.
L. Offsets to accommodate field conditions shall be accomplished with two (2) bends of not more
than ten (10) degrees each.
M. Plug both ends of all conduit stubs.
N. Seal the end of each conduit run terminating inside a building utilizing a water and gas-tight
sealant manufactured specifically for the purpose.
O. After conduit has been installed with concrete encasement completed, clear each conduit of all
obstructions and foreign matter by pulling a flexible mandrel (12” minimum length and a diameter
1/4" less than that of the conduit) and brush through it. In the event that obstructions are
encountered in any conduit which will not permit the mandrel to pass, remove and replace the
blocked section. Include in the electric work all excavation, backfilling, repair of concrete
encasement and restoration of surface at grade involved in the conduit replacement.
P. Provide a nylon cord for the pulling of cable in each conduit in which no cable is to be installed as
part of the electric work.
Q. The Electrical Subcontractor shall provide all insulated racks as required for proper support of all
cables and wires.
R. Provide magnetic warning tape above each full length of duct bank 12 inches below grade.
3.7 IDENTIFICATION AND TAGGING
A. Identify individually:
1. Each transformer.
2. Each panelboard.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 63
3. Each switch and circuit breaker.
4. Each feeder, wire or cable or all systems.
5. Each switchboard.
6. Each end of nylon pullwire in empty conduit.
B. Each wire or cable in a feeder shall be identified at its terminal points of connection and in each
pullbox, junction box and panel gutter through which it passes.
C. The nomenclature used to identify panelboards or load center shall designate the numbers
assigned to them.
D. The nomenclature used to identify switches or circuit breakers shall:
1. Where they disconnect mains or services designate this fact.
2. Where they control feeders, designate the feeder number and the name of the load supplied.
3. Where they control lighting and appliance branch circuitry, designate the name of the space
and the load supplied.
E. The nomenclature used to identify feeder wires and cables shall designate the feeder number.
F. Identification for panelboards or load centers shall be by means of engraved Lamacoid
nameplates showing 1/4" high white lettering on a black background fastened to the outside face
of the front.
G. Identification for switches or circuit breakers shall be by means of the following:
1. Where individually enclosed – engraved Lamacoid nameplates showing 1/8” high white
lettering on a black background fastened on the outside front face of the enclosure.
2. Where in panelboards or load centers without doors – same as for individually enclosed.
3. Where in panelboards or load centers with doors – typewritten directories mounted behind
transparent plastic covers, in metal frames fastened on the inside face of the doors.
H. Identification for wires and cables shall be by means of wrap around “brady” type labels.
I. Device plates for local toggle switches, toggle switch type motor starters, pilot lights and the like,
whose function is not readily apparent shall be engraved with 1/8” high letters suitably describing
the equipment controlled or indicated.
J. Phase identification letters shall be stamped into the metal of the bus bars of each phase of the
main busses of each switchboard and each panelboard. The letters shall be visible from at least
one (1) “normal posture” location without having to demount any current carrying or supporting
elements.
K. Equip the front face of all switchboard pull boxes junction boxes and the like containing cables,
busing or devices operating in excess of 600 volts with enameled sheetmetal “red on white” signs
reading “DANGER-HIGH VOLTAGE.”
L. Equip all electric closets and the like with enameled sheet metal “red on white” signs reading
“Electrical Equipment Room – No Storage Permitted”. Signs shall be mounted at clearly visible
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 64
locations within the rooms.
M. Provide a sign at the service entrance equipment room indicating the type and location of all on-
site emergency or standby power sources.
N. Identify each outlet box, junction box, and cabinet used in conjunction with empty raceway for
wires of a future system by means of indelible markings on the inside denoting the system.
O. Prior to installing identifying tags and nameplates, submit their nomenclature for approval.
Conform to all revisions issued by the Architect.
3.8 LIMITING NOISE PRODUCED BY ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
A. Perform the following work in accordance with field instructions issued by the Architect to assure
that minimal noise is produced by electrical installations due to equipment furnished as part of the
Electrical work.
B. Check and tighten the fastenings of sheet metal plates, covers, doors and trims used in the
enclosures of electrical equipment.
C. Remove and replace any individual device containing one or more magnetic flux path metallic
cores (e.g., discharge lamp ballast, transformer, reactor, dimmer, solenoid) which is found to
have a noise output exceeding that of other identical devices installed at the project.
3.9 SUPPORTS AND FASTENINGS
A. Support work in accordance with best industry standards, Local Electric Code and the following:
1. Include supporting frames or racks for equipment, intended for vertical surface mounting,
which is required in a freestanding position.
2. Supporting frames or racks shall be of standard angle, standard channel or specialty support
system steel members. They shall be rigidly bolted or welded together and adequately
braces to form a substantial structure. Racks shall be of ample size to assure a workmanlike
arrangement of all equipment mounted on them.
3. No work intended for exposed installation shall be mounted directly on any building surface.
In such locations, flat bar members or spaces shall be used to create a minimum of ¼” air
space between the building surfaces and the work. Provide ¾” thick exterior grade plywood
painted with two (2) coats of fire-retardant gray paint for mounting of panelboards.
4. Nothing (including outlet, pull and junction boxes and fittings) shall depend on electric
conduits, raceways or cables for support.
5. Nothing shall rest on, or depend for support on, suspended ceiling media.
6. Support less than 2” trade size, vertically run, conduits at intervals no greater than 8’.
Support such conduits, 2-1/2” trade size or larger, at intervals no greater than they story
height, or 15’, whichever is smaller.
7. Where they are not embedded in concrete, support less than 1” trade size, horizontally run,
conduits at intervals no greater than 7’. Support such conduits, 1” trade size or larger, at
intervals no greater than 10’.
8. Support all lighting fixtures directly from structural slab, intermediate decking or framing
member as directed by the Architect. No light fixtures shall be supported directly from the
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 65
roof deck.
9. Where fixtures and ceilings are such as to require fixture support from ceiling openings
frames, include in the electric work the members necessary to tie back the ceiling opening
frames to ceiling suspension members or slabs so as to provide actual support for the fixtures
noted above.
10. Support all runs of conduit and/or circuitry directly from structural slabs, intermediate decking
or framing members.
11. Fasten electric work to building structure in accordance with the best industry practice.
12. Floor mounted equipment shall not be held in place solely by its own dead weight. Include
floor anchor fastenings in all cases.
13. For items which are shown as being ceiling mounted at locations where fastenings to the
building construction element above is not possible, provide suitably auxiliary channel or
angle iron bridging tying to building structural elements.
14. As a minimum procedure, where weight applied to the attachment points is 100 lbs. or less,
fasten to concrete and solid masonry with bolts and expansion shields.
15. As a minimum procedure, where weight applied to building attachment points exceed 100
lbs., but is 300 lbs. or less, conform to the following:
a. At field poured concrete slabs, utilize inserts with 20’ minimum length slip-through steel
rods, set transverse to reinforcing steel.
3.10 SPLICING AND TERMINATING WIRES AND CABLES
A. Maintain all splices and joints in removable cover boxes or cabinets where they may be easily
inspected.
B. Locate each completed conductor splice or joint in the outlet box, junction box, or pull box
containing it, so that it is accessible from the removal cover side of the box.
C. Join solid conductors No. 8 AWG and smaller by securely twisting them together and soldering,
or by using insulated coiled steel spring “wire nut” type connectors. Exclude “wire nuts”
employing non-expandable springs. Terminate conductors No. 8 AWG and smaller by means of
a neat and fast holding application of the conductors directly to the binding screws or terminals of
the equipment or devices to be connected.
D. Join, tap and terminate standard conductors No. 6 AWG and larger by means of solder sleeves,
taps, and lugs with applied solder or by means of bolted saddle type or pressure indent type
connectors, taps and lugs. Exclude connectors and lugs of the types which apply set screws
directly to conductors. Where equipment or devices are equipped with set screw type terminals
which are impossible to change, replace the factory supplied set screws with a type having a ball
bearing tip. Apply pressure indent type connectors, taps and lugs utilizing tools manufactured
specifically for the purpose and having features preventing their release until the full pressure has
been exerted on the lug or connector.
E. Except where wire nuts are used, build up insulation over conductor joints to a value, equal both
in thickness and dielectric strength, to that of the factory applied conductor insulation. Insulation
of conductor taps and joints shall be by means of half-lapped layers of rubber tape, with an outer
layer of friction tape; by means of half-lapped layers of approved plastic electric insulating tape; or
by a means of split insulating casings manufactured specifically to insulate the particular
connector and conductor, and fastened with stainless steel or non-metallic snaps or clips.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 66
F. Exclude splicing procedures for neutral conductors in lighting and appliance branch circuitry
which utilize device terminals as the splicing points.
G. Exclude joints or terminations utilizing solder in any conductors used for grounding or bonding
purposes.
H. Exclude all but solder or pressure indent type joints in conductors used for signaling or
communication purposes.
I. Lugs for conductors used to make phase leg connections on the line side of the main service
overcurrent and switching device shall be of the limiter type.
3.11 PULLING WIRES INTO CONDUITS AND RACEWAYS
A. Delay pulling wires or cables in until the project has progressed to a point when general
construction procedures are not liable to injure wires and cables, and when moisture is excluded
from raceways.
B. Utilize nylon snakes or metallic fish tapes with ball type heads to set up for pulling. In raceways
2” trade size and larger, utilize a pulling assembly ahead of wires consisting of a suitable brush
followed by a 3-1/2” diameter ball mandrel.
C. Leave sufficient slack on all runs of wire and cable to permit the secure connection of devices and
equipment.
D. Include circular wedge-type cable supports for wires and cables at the top of any vertical raceway
longer than 20 feet. Also include additional supports spaced at intervals which are no greater
than 10’. Supports shall be located in accessible pull boxes. Supports shall be of a non-
deteriorating insulating material manufactured specifically for the purpose.
E. Pulling lubricants shall be used. They shall be products m anufactured specifically for the
purpose.
F. Slack on wires and cables located in cabinets and pull boxes shall be formed and set in place in
groupings corresponding to their occupancy of raceways. They shall also be arranged, with
insulators and supports provided where necessary, such that cable shims or other such
temporary expedients do not have to be left permanently in place to prevent the wires and cables
from shifting when covers or trims are removed.
3.12 REQUIREMENTS FOR THE INSTALLATION OF JUNCTION BOXES, OUTLET BOXES AND
PULL BOXES
A. Flush wall-mounted outlet boxes shall not be set back to back but shall be offset at least 12”
horizontally regardless of any indication on the Contract Drawings.
B. Locate all boxes so that their removable covers are accessible without necessitating the removal
of parts of permanent building structure, including piping, ductwork, and other permanent
mechanical elements.
C. In conjunction with concealed circuitry, abide by one of the following instructions (as may be
applicable to the conditions) in order to assure the aforementioned accessibility. (Not required for
circuitry concealed by removable suspended ceiling tiles.)
1. For a small (outlet size) box on circuitry concealed in a partition or wall, locate box or fitting
so that its removable cover side, (or the face of any applied raised cover) penetrates through
to within 1/8” of the exposed surface of the building materials concealing the circuitry and
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 67
apply a blank or device plate to suit the functional requirements.
2. For a large box on circuitry concealed in a partition, suspended ceiling, or wall, locate box
totally hidden but with its removable cover directly behind an architectural access door or
panel (included for the purpose, separate from the electric work) in the building construction
which conceals the circuitry.
3. For a small (outlet size) box on circuitry concealed above and intended as an outlet for a
surface mounted lighting fixture or other such electrical item, locate box so that its removable
cover side penetrates through to the exposed surface of the building materials concealing the
circuitry. Arrange the mounting of the lighting fixture or other item so that it completely covers
the opening in the building construction caused by the box.
4. For a small (outlet size) box on circuitry concealed in a suspended ceiling, and intended as
an outlet for a non-demountable type of recessed lighting fixtures or other such electrical
items, locate box totally hidden but with its removable cover not more than 1’ away from the
building construction opening occupied by the demountable items.
D. Apply junction and pull boxes in accordance with the following:
1. Include all pull boxes in long straight runs of raceway to assure that cables are not damaged
when they are pulled in.
2. Include junction and pull boxes to assure a neat and workmanlike installation of raceways.
3. Include junction and pull boxes to fulfill requirements pertaining to the limitations to the
number of bends permitted in raceway between cable access points, the accessibility of
cable joints and splices, and the application of cable supports.
4. Include all required junction and pull boxes regardless of indications on the Contract
Drawings (which, due to symbolic methods of notation, may omit to show some of them).
E. Apply outlet boxes in accordance with the following:
1. Unless noted below or otherwise specifically indicated, include a separate outlet box for each
individual wiring device, lighting fixture and signal or communication system outlet
component. Outlet boxes supplied attached to lighting fixtures shall not be used as
replacements for the boxes specified herein.
2. A continuous row of fixtures of the end-to-end channel type, designed for “through wiring”,
and wired in accordance with the specification hereinafter pertaining to circuitry through a
series of lighting fixtures, may be supplied through a single outlet box.
3. A series of separate fixtures, designed for “through wiring”, spaced not more than 4’ apart,
and inter-connected with conduit or raceway and circuitry which is in accordance with the
Specifications hereinafter pertaining to circuitry through a series of lighting fixtures, may be
supplied through a single outlet box.
4. Connection to recessed ceiling fixtures supplied with pigtails may be arranged so that more
than one (1), but not more than four (4) such fixtures are connected into a single outlet box.
When adopting this procedure:
a. Utilize an outlet box no smaller than 5” square by 2-1/2” deep.
b. Allow no fixture to be supplied from an outlet box in another room.
5. Multiple local switches indicated at a single location shall be gang-mounted in a single outlet
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 68
box.
6. Include all required outlet boxes regardless of indications on the Contract Drawings (which
due to symbolic methods of notation, may omit to show some of them).
F. Install junction boxes, pull boxes and outlet boxes in conjunction with concealed circuitry.
1. Exclude surface-mounted outlet boxes in conjunction with concealed circuitry.
2. Exclude unused circuitry openings in junction and pull boxes. In larger boxes each such
opening shall be closed with a galvanized sheet steel plate fastened with a continuous weld
all around. In small outlet type boxes, utilize plugs as specified for such boxes.
3. Close up all unused circuitry openings in outlet boxes. Unused openings in cast boxes shall
be closed with approved cast metal threaded plugs. Unused openings in sheet metal boxes
shall be closed with sheet metal knock-out plugs.
4. Outlet boxes for switches shall be located at the strike side of doors. Indicate door swings
are subject to field change. Outlet boxes shall be located on the basis of final door swing
arrangements.
5. Boxes and plaster covers for duplex receptacles shall be arranged for vertical mounting of the
receptacle.
6. Equip outlet boxes used for devices which are connected to wires of systems supplied by
more than one set of voltage characteristics with barriers to separate the different systems.
G. Barriers in junction and pull boxes of outlet size shall be of the same metal as the box.
1. Barriers in junction and pull boxes which are larger than outlet size shall be of the polyester
resin fiberglass of adequate thickness for mechanical strength, but in no case less than 1/4"
thick. Each barrier shall be mounted, without fastenings, between angle iron guides so that
they may be readily removed.
3.13 LOCATING AND ROUTING OF CIRCUITRY
A. In general, all circuitry shall be run concealed except that it shall be run exposed where the
following conditions occur:
1. Horizontally at the ceiling of permanently unfinished spaces which are not assigned to
mechanical or electrical equipment.
2. Horizontally and vertically in mechanical equipment spaces.
3. Horizontally and vertically in electric equipment rooms.
B. Concealed circuitry shall be so located that building construction materials can be applied over its
thickest elements without being subject to spalling or cracking.
C. All circuitry and raceways shall not be run within slabs. If field conditions requires raceways to be
embedded in field-poured structural building construction concrete fill or slab shall conform to the
following:
1. All proposed embedded raceways shall be indicated on plan and elevation and submitted to
the Architect and Structural Engineer for review and written approval prior to installation. Any
costs associated with the review and approval shall be borne by the Electrical Subcontractor.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 69
2. They shall be run “single layer” with their outside surface no closer than 1” to any surface of
the structural concrete.
3. They shall not be located in any configuration which places the outside surface of one closer
than 3” to outside surface of another, except at tees, crosses or other single level wide angle
junction points.
4. Where crossovers or close grouping are unavoidable, circuitry shall be carefully field
coordinated so as not to cause structural weakness.
5. Where turned up or down into a wall or partition they shall, before entering same, be routed
parallel for a long enough distance to assure that no relocation of the wall or partition will be
necessary to conceal the required bend.
6. They shall be routed in such a manner as to coordinate with the structural requirements of
the building.
7. They shall be routed in accordance with field instructions issued by the Architect where such
instructions differ from Specifications set forth herein.
D. Circuitry run exposed shall be routed parallel to building walls and column lines.
E. Exposed circuitry located overhead shall be run in a completely accessible manner on the
underside of all piping and ductwork.
F. Circuitry run in suspended ceilings shall be routed parallel to building walls, column lines, etc.
G. Circuitry shall be routed so as to prevent electric conductors from being subject to high ambient
temperature. Minimum clearances from heated lines or surfaces shall be maintained as follows:
1. Crossing where uninsulated: 3”.
2. Crossing where insulated: 1”
3. Running parallel where uninsulated: 36”.
4. Running parallel where insulated: 6”.
H. Circuitry shall not be run in elevator shafts, hoistways, and the like. Where outlets for trail cables,
pit lights, run be level lights, and the like, are involved, only the “final connection” outlet boxes
themselves shall be located within or open into, the confines of the shaft.
I. Circuitry for miscellaneous systems indicated without notation as to location and routing shall be
run as per the requirements and notations governing the adjacent light and power circuitry.
3.14 INSTALLING CIRCUITRY
A. The outside surface of circuitry, which is to be embedded in cinder concrete, shall be coated with
asphaltum paint.
B. In runs of conduit or raceway including flexible limit the number of bends between cable access
points to a total which does not exceed the maximum specified for the particular system. Where
no such maximum is specified, limit the number to four (4) right angle bends or the equivalent
thereof.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 16, 2019
ELECTRICAL 260000 - 70
C. In each conduit or raceway assigned for the future pulling in of wires, include a nylon drag cord.
In raceways 2” trade size and larger, the cord shall be pulled in utilizing a suitable brush, followed
by an 85% diameter ball mandrel ahead of the cord in the pulling assembly. In the event that
obstructions are encountered, which will not permit the drag cord to be installed, the blocked
section of raceway shall be replaced and any cutting and patching of the structure involved in
such replacement shall be included as part of the electric work.
D. Circuitry shall be arranged such that conductors of one feeder or circuitry carrying “going” current
are not separated from conductors of the same feeder or circuitry carrying “return” current by any
ferrous or other metal. Where not within raceways, all “going” and “return” current conductors of
one feeder or circuit shall be laced together so as to minimize induction heating of adjacent metal
components.
E. Sleeves used where circuitry is to penetrate waterproof slabs, decks and walls, shall be of a type
selected to suit the water condition encountered in the field.
END OF SECTION 26 00 00
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
SECTION 281500 – ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes commercial door hardware for the following:
1. Swinging doors.
2. Sliding Doors
3. Other doors to the extent indicated.
B. Door hardware includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following:
1. Mechanical door hardware.
2. Electromechanical door hardware.
3. Stand alone electronic access control door hardware.
4. Digital electronic cylinders.
5. Integrated Wiegand access control door hardware.
6. Wireless access control door hardware.
7. IP-enabled integrated access control door hardware.
8. Power transfer devices and wiring harnesses.
9. Monitoring and signaling equipment.
10. Access control cards and credentials.
11. Stand alone access control application software.
12. Electrified and access control door hardware power supplies, back-ups and surge
protection.
C. Related Sections:
1. Division 01 Section "Sustainable Design Requirements" for additional LEED
documentation and requirements.
2. Division 08 Section “Door Hardware Schedule”.
3. Division 08 Section “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames”.
4. Division 08 Section “Flush Wood Doors”.
5. Division 08 Section “Door Hardware”.
6. Division 26 Sections for connections to electrical power system and for low-voltage wiring
work.
7. Division 28 Sections "Access Control" for access control devices installed at door
openings and provided as part of a security access system.
8. Division 28 Section "Intrusion Detection" for detection devices installed at door openings
and provided as part of an intrusion detection system.
9. Division 28 Section "Fire Detection and Alarm" for connections to building fire alarm
system.
D. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having
Jurisdiction.
1. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities.
ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - 1
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
2. ICC/IBC - International Building Code.
3. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
4. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.
5. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.
6. NFPA 105 - Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies.
7. State Building Codes, Local Amendments.
E. Standards: All hardware specified herein shall comply with the following industry standards:
1. ANSI/BHMA Certified Product Standards – A156 Series.
2. UL10C – Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
F. Products installed, but not provided under this Section include the following. Coordination to
remain a requirement of this Section.
1. Security or High Security keyed cylinders, including provisions for temporary construction
keying, provided for mechanical override at access control locking hardware to be
furnished under Division 08 Section "Door Hardware". Permanent cores and keys to be
installed by Owner.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets including installation details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operational descriptions and
finishes.
B. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication
and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door
Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness,
hand, function, and finish of door hardware.
1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and
Format for the Hardware Schedule."
2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating
complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Organize door
hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3.
Submittals that do not follow the same format and order as the Door Hardware Sets will
be rejected and subject to resubmission.
3. Content: Include the following information:
a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item.
b. Manufacturer of each item.
c. Fastenings and other pertinent information.
d. Location of door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans
and in door and frame schedule.
e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.
f. Mounting locations for door hardware.
g. Door and frame sizes and materials.
h. System Operational Descriptions: Complete system operational narratives for
access controlled openings defining the owner's prescribed requirements for the
ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - 2
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
opening functionality. Narratives include, but are not limited to, the following
situations: normal secured/unsecured state of door; authorized access; authorized
egress; unauthorized access; unauthorized egress; fire alarm and loss of power
conditions, and interfaces with other building control systems.
4. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date,
particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of
other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data,
Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information
essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule.
C. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified access control hardware indicating the following:
1. Wiring Diagrams: Upon receipt of approved schedules, submit detailed system wiring
diagrams for power, signaling, monitoring, communication, and control of the access
control system electrified hardware. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and
field-installed wiring. Include the following:
a. Elevation diagram of each unique access controlled opening showing location and
interconnection of major system components with respect to their placement in the
respective door openings.
b. Complete (risers, point-to-point) access control system block wiring diagrams.
2. Electrical Coordination: Coordinate with related Division 26 Electrical Sections the
voltages and wiring details required at electrically controlled and operated hardware
openings.
3. Proof of Certification: Provide copy of manufacturer(s) official certification or accreditation
document indicating proof of status as a qualified and authorized provider of the primary
integrated access control components.
D. Keying Schedule: Reference Division 08 Section "Door Hardware".
E. Product Test Reports: Indicating compliance with cycle testing requirements, based on
evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified
independent testing agency.
F. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturers operating and maintenance
manuals for each item comprising the complete standard door and access control hardware
installation in quantity as required in Division 01, Closeout Submittals. The manual to include
the name, address, and telephone number of the supplier/integrator providing the installation
and the nearest service representatives for each item of equipment included in the system. The
final copies delivered after completion of the installation test to include "as built" modifications
made during installation, checkout, and acceptance.
1. As-Built Drawings: During system installation, the Contractor to maintain a separate hard
copy set of drawings, elevation diagrams, and wiring diagrams of the access control
system to be used for record drawings. This set to be kept up to date by the Contractor
with all changes and additions to the access control system accurately recorded.
G. Warranties and Maintenance: Special warranties and maintenance agreements specified in this
Section.
ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - 3
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Engage qualified manufacturers with a minimum[5] years of
documented experience in producing hardware and equipment similar to that indicated for this
Project and that have a proven record of successful in-service performance.
B. Integrator Qualifications (Access Control Door Hardware): Systems Integrators, verifiably
factory trained and certified by the primary product manufacturers, with a minimum[3] years
documented experience installing complete access control systems hardware similar in
material, design, and scope to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in
construction with a proven record of successful in-service performance. Qualifications include,
but are not necessarily limited, to the following:
1. References: Provide a list of references for similar projects including contact name,
phone number, name and type of project.
2. Professional Staffing: Firms to have a dedicated access control systems integration
department with full time, experienced professionals on staff experienced in providing on
site consulting services for both electrified door hardware and integrated access control
systems installations.
3. Factory Training: Installation and service technicians are to be competent factory trained
and certified personnel capable of maintaining the system.
4. Service Center: Firms to have a service center capable of providing training, in-stock
parts, and emergency maintenance and repairs at the Project site with 24-hour/7-days a
week maximum response time.
C. Supplier Qualifications: Supplier, verifiably authorized and in good standing with the primary
product manufacturers, with a minimum[3] years experience supplying integrated access control
systems similar in material, design, and scope to that indicated for this Project and whose work
has resulted in construction with a proven record of successful in-service performance.
D. Integrated Wiegand Output, Wireless, and IP-Enabled access control products are required to
be supplied and installed only through designated ASSA ABLOY "Authorized Channel Partner"
(ACP) and “Certified Integrator” (CI) accounts.
E. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of Door Hardware specified in this Section
from a single source, qualified supplier unless otherwise indicated.
1. Electrified modifications or enhancements made to a source manufacturer's product line
by a secondary or third party source will not be accepted.
2. Provide integrated access control door hardware from the same manufacturer as
standard mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with NFPA 70, NFPA 80, NFPA 101 and ANSI A117.1
requirements and guidelines as directed in the model building code including, but not limited to,
the following:
1. NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code", including electrical components, devices, and
accessories listed and labeled as defined in Article 100 by a testing agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
2. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with Americans with
Disabilities Act (ADA), "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG),"
ANSI A117.1 as follows:
ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - 4
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
a. Handles, Pulls, Latches, Locks, and other Operating Devices: Shape that is easy
to grasp with one hand and does not require tight grasping, tight pinching, or
twisting of the wrist.
b. Door Closers: Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements
indicated:
1) Interior Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door.
2) Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having
jurisdiction.
3. NFPA 101: Comply with the following for means of egress doors:
a. Latches, Locks, and Exit Devices: Not more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks
shall not require the use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.
4. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Provide door hardware for assemblies complying with
NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to
NFPA 252 (neutral pressure at 40" above sill) or UL-10C.
a. Test Pressure: Positive pressure labeling.
5. The installed access control system shall conform to all local jurisdiction requirements.
G. Keying Conference: Reference Section 087100 “Door Hardware.”
H. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct coordination conference in compliance with requirements in
Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier(s),
Installer(s), Systems Integrator(s), and Contractor(s) to review proper methods and procedures
for receiving, handling, and installing door and access control hardware to manufacturer's
recommendations and according to specifications.
1. Prior to installation of door hardware, arrange for manufacturers' representatives to hold
a project specific training meeting to instruct the installing contractors' personnel on the
proper installation and adjustment of their respective products. Product training to be
attended by installers of door hardware (including electromechanical hardware) for
aluminum, hollow metal and wood doors. Training will include the use of installation
manuals, hardware schedules, templates and physical product samples as required.
2. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in, power supply connections, and other
preparatory work performed by other trades.
3. Review sequence of operation narratives for each unique access controlled opening.
4. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials.
5. Review the required inspecting, testing, commissioning, and demonstration procedures.
I. At completion of installation, provide written documentation that components were applied to
manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and according to approved schedules.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up and shelving for door hardware
delivered to Project site. Do not store electronic access control hardware, software or
accessories at Project site without prior authorization.
ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - 5
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1. Access control firmware and software: Where approved and directed, inventory upon
receipt and store electronic access control equipment in a secure, temperature and
humidity controlled environment in original manufacturer's sealed containers.
B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware
Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.
C. Deliver, as applicable, permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access control credentials, software
and related accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight package service.
Instructions for delivery to the Owner shall be established at the "Keying Conference".
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Integrated Access Control Door Hardware and Electrical Coordination: Coordinate the layout
and installation of scheduled integrated access control door hardware, and related access
control equipment, with required connections to source power junction boxes, power supplies,
detection and monitoring hardware and fire alarm system.
1. Access Control System Interface: The integrated access control hardware to interface
and be connected to the access control system described under Division 28 "Access
Control Systems". Coordinate the installation and configuration of the electrified door
hardware and access control systems firmware and software with the hardware specified
in this Section.
B. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other
work specified to be factory prepared for installing standard and electrified door hardware.
Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating
and installing hardware to comply with indicated requirements.
C. Door and Frame Preparation: Related Division 08 Sections (Steel, Aluminum and Wood) doors
and corresponding frames are to be prepared, reinforced and pre-wired (if applicable) to receive
the installation of the specified electrified, monitoring, signaling and access control system
hardware without additional in-field modifications.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements. Special warranties specified
in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of
the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties
made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Warranty Period: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer(s), agreeing to repair or replace
components of standard and electrified door hardware that fails in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period after final acceptance by the Owner. Failures include, but are
not limited to, the following:
1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage.
2. Faulty operation of the hardware.
3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.
4. Electrical component defects and failures within the systems operation.
ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - 6
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
C. Standard Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise
indicated.
D. Special Warranty Periods:
1. Two years for electromechanical and integrated access control door hardware.
2. Five years for motorized electric latch retraction exit devices.
3. Ten years for mortise locks and latches.
1.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and
maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and
removal and replacement of standard and access control door hardware.
B. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, and running concurrent with the
specified warranty period, provide continuous (6) months full maintenance including repair and
replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required
for proper door opening operation. Provide parts and supplies as used in the manufacture and
installation of original products.
1.8 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Access Control Site Management System: Furnish and install at the indicated locations the
specified integrated access control door hardware for a completely operational access control
and security site management system. System includes, but is not necessarily limited, to the
following:
1. Electrified integrated access control locks and exit hardware, special tools, operating
manuals, and required cabling and accessories as detailed below and listed in the
Access Control Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3.
a. Provide manufacturer approved integrated access control locks and exit hardware
that are functionally compatible with the specified access control equipment
interfaces.
2. Owner to provide the following:
a. Owner will be responsible for ensuring that each computer hardware component
includes the required interfaces, expansion boards, and peripherals that will be
necessary to allow the system to operate as described within this specification and
as indicated on the drawings.
b. Power Sourcing, Network Switches and Wireless Access Points: Quantity as
required to accommodate installed access control (and video surveillance)
devices.
c. Network Control Processor Connections:
1) LAN/Ethernet communication ports (jacks) and network interface cards as
needed, CAT5e (CAT6) cabling from network router/switch to network
control processor, outlet and cover plates and/or patch cables required for
network connection within each designated IT/Telecom room.
ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - 7
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
2) Required static IP addresses.
3. Power Supplies, including battery, uninterrupted backup power supply (UPS) and
separately fused surge protection, required for the integrated access control door
hardware.
4. Installation, final configuration and commissioning of integrated access control door
hardware, power supplies and related accessories.
5. Provide manufacturer required power controllers, interface boards, and programming that
may be required for approved electric latch retraction exit devices supplied under Division
08 Section "Door Hardware."
6. Electrical contractor, Division 26, to provide the following:
a. Source power wiring (120VAC) as required for the integrated access control door
hardware and power supplies. This includes quad outlets as required on a
dedicated circuit in the designated IT/Telecom room(s) and the related conduit,
stub-in, junction boxes and connectors required for the source power delivery and
connections.
b. Provide required conduit, stub-in, junction and back boxes for the integrated
access control door hardware at each access controlled opening per plan drawings
and specs. Supply and install conduit between the aforementioned devices and
between the electrical junction boxes, power supplies and access control
equipment located on or above the door opening.
1) At electrified hardware power transfers provide conduit on the secured side
of the opening from the power transfer, thru-wire hinge, or serviceable panel
location on the frame jamb to the related power supplies and access control
equipment.
c. Electrical Contractor to provide all 120VAC cabling connections and terminations
from the electrical junction boxes to these electrical devices.
7. Access Control System Integrator to provide the following:
a. Low voltage wiring (12/24VDC) and communication required for electrified and
integrated access control door hardware, remote card readers, keypads, or display
terminals, monitoring and signaling switches, and power supplies. Work includes
related connectors, final terminations, and hook-ups required for a complete and
functional access controlled opening in accordance with applicable codes and
specified system operational narratives.
8. Final connections to fire alarm system, if required, by electrical and fire alarm system
contractors.
9. Provide permits, submittals and approvals required by the authority having jurisdiction,
prior to commencing with work.
ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - 8
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE
A. General: Provide integrated access control door hardware and accessories for each designated
opening to comply with requirements in this Section and with the Access Control Hardware Sets
listed at the end of Part 3.
1. Access Control Hardware Sets: Requirements for quantity, item, model, design, grade,
finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of integrated door and access
control hardware are indicated in the Access Control Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3.
B. Designations: Requirements for quantity, item, size, finish or color, grade, function, and other
distinctive qualities of each type of mechanical and electrified door hardware are indicated in the
Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware
designations, as follows:
a. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed
for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum
requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware
Schedule.
C. System Design: The electrified door hardware specified to include standardized components
regularly manufactured and utilized within the source manufacturer’s product lines.
1. Electronic integrated locking hardware to be non-proprietary in design and
implementations, providing for an open protocol platform across multiple access control
systems manufacturers and software applications. The installed integrated product is to
be part of a single, cohesive access control system.
D. Substitutions: Requests for substitution and product approval for inclusive mechanical and
electrified access control door hardware, in compliance with specifications, must be submitted in
writing and in accordance with the procedures and time frames outlined in Division 01
"Substitution Procedures". Approval of requests is at the discretion of the architect, owner, and
their designated consultants.
E. The electrified access control door hardware contained in this Section represents a complete
engineered system. If alternate products are submitted, it is the responsibility of the Supplier to
provide an acceptable complete and working system layout, including re-engineering of
elevation and wiring diagrams, as applicable. Complete systems to include at a minimum the
required power supplies, power transfers, and electrified and integrated locking hardware and
accessories.
2.1 ELECTROMECHANICAL LOCKING DEVICES
A. Electromechanical Mortise Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): Subject to same compliance
standards and requirements as mechanical mortise locksets, electrified locksets to be of type
and design as specified below.
1. Electrified Lock Options: Where indicated in the Hardware Sets, provide electrified
options including: outside door lock/unlock trim control, latchbolt and lock/unlock status
ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - 9
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
monitoring, deadbolt monitoring, and request-to-exit signaling. Support end-of-line
resistors contained within the lock case. Unless otherwise indicated, provide electrified
locksets standard as fail secure.
2. Energy Efficient Design: Provide lock bodies which have a holding current draw of 15mA
maximum, and can operate on either 12 or 24 volts. Locks are to be field configurable for
fail safe or fail secure operation.
3. High Security Monitoring: Provide lock bodies which have built-in request to exit
monitoring and are provided with accompanying door position switches. Provide a
resistor configuration which is compatible with the access control system.
4. Manufacturers:
a. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) – 8800FL Series.
B. Electromechanical Multi-Point Locks: Vertical rod locking devices designed for openings
requiring multiple latching points within one locking mechanism. Rods are retracted by dual
mounted outside lever trim controls available in a variety of ANSI/BHMA operational functions.
Option for single top latching only eliminates the need for bottom strikes. Electromechanical
options include solenoid activated trim and inside and outside lever monitoring.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) MP9800 Series.
b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 7073/7074 Series.
2.2 ELECTRIC STRIKES
A. Standard Electric Strikes: Heavy duty, cylindrical and mortise lock electric strikes conforming to
ANSI/BHMA A156.31, Grade 1, UL listed for both Burglary Resistance and for use on fire rated
door assemblies. Stainless steel construction with dual interlocking plunger design tested to
exceed 3000 lbs. of static strength and 350 ft-lbs. of dynamic strength. Strikes tested for a
minimum 1 million operating cycles. Provide strikes with 12 or 24 VDC capability and supplied
standard as fail-secure unless otherwise specified. Provide latchbolt and latchbolt strike
monitoring indicating both the position of the latchbolt and locked condition of the strike where
specified.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Folger Adam EDC (FO).
b. HES (HS).
B. Provide electric strikes with in-line power controller and surge suppressor by the same
manufacturer as the strike with the combined products having a five year warranty.
2.3 ELECTROMECHANICAL CONVENTIONAL EXIT DEVICES
A. Electrified Conventional Push Rail Devices (Heavy Duty): Subject to same compliance
standards and requirements as mechanical exit devices, electrified devices to be of type and
design as specified below.
ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - 10
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
1. Manufacturers:
a. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) - 7000 Series.
B. Electrified Options: As indicated in hardware sets, provide electrified exit device options
including: electric latch retraction , electric dogging, outside door trim control, exit alarm,
delayed egress, latchbolt monitoring, lock/unlock status monitoring, touchbar monitoring and
request-to-exit signaling. Unless otherwise indicated, provide electrified exit devices standard as
fail secure.
2.4 SURFACE MOUNTED CLOSER HOLDERS
A. Electromagnetic Door Holders: Certified ANSI A156.15 electromagnetic door holder/releases
with a minimum 20 to 40 pounds holding power and single coil construction able to
accommodate.12VDC, 24VAC, 24VDC and 120VAC. Coils to be independently wound,
employing an integral fuse and armatures to include a positive release button.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Rixson (RF) - 980/990 Series.
2.5 ELECTRONIC ACCESSORIES
A. Networked Contactless Smart Card Readers: Contactless smart cards reader to securely read
access control data from 13.56 MHz contactless smart cards. The contactless smart card
reader is designed for use in access control applications by providing:
1. Secure access control data exchange between the smart card and the reader utilizing
key diversification and mutual authentication routines.
2. Contactless smart card reader to be designed for low current operation to enable
migration from most legacy proximity applications without the need to replace existing
access control panels and/or power supplies. Operating voltage: 5-16 VDC. Current
requirements: 55 mA Avg, 116 mA Peak at 12 VDC.
3. Universal compatibility with most access control systems and backwards compatibility
with legacy 125 KHz proximity access control formats.
4. Product construction suitable for both indoor and outdoor applications.
5. Customizable behavior for indicator lights and audible tones.
6. Manufacturers (13.56 MHz iClass):
a. HID Global (HG) - R10 Series.
B. Door Position Switches: Door position magnetic reed contact switches specifically designed for
use in commercial door applications. On recessed models the contact and magnetic housing
snap-lock into a 1" diameter hole. Surface mounted models include wide gap distance design
complete with armored flex cabling. Provide SPDT, N/O switches with optional Rare Earth
Magnet installation on steel doors with flush top channels.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) 3287.
ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - 11
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
C. Wiegand Test Unit: Test unit verifies proper Wiegand output integrated card reader lock
installation in the field by testing for proper wiring, card reader data integrity, and lock
functionality including lock/unlock, door position, and request-to-exit status. 12 or 24VDC
voltage adjustable operating as Fail Safe or Fail Secure.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) – WT2 Wiegand Test Unit.
b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) – WT2 Wiegand Test Unit.
D. Switching Power Supplies: Provide UL listed or recognized filtered and regulated power
supplies. Provide single, dual, or multi-voltage units as shown in the hardware sets. Units must
be expandable up to eight Class 2 power limited outputs. Units must include the capability to
incorporate a battery backup option with integral battery charging capability in addition to
operating the DC load in event of line voltage failure. Provide the least number of units, at the
appropriate amperage level, sufficient to exceed the required total draw for the specified
electrified hardware and access control equipment.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Securitron (SU) - AQ Series.
2.6 CABLES AND WIRING
A. Comply with Division 27 Section "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security."
B. Data Line Supervision: System to include alarm initiation capability in response to opening,
closing, shorting, or grounding of data transmission lines.
C. Install appropriate number of conductor pairs, in the wire gage (AWG) recommended by
manufacturer, corresponding to the electronic locking functions specified, amperage drawn and
distances covered between the power supplies, power transfer devices, electrified hardware
and access control equipment.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally
prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to
manufacturers recognized installation standards for application intended.
2.8 ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE FINISHES
A. Standard: Designations used in the Hardware Sets and elsewhere indicate hardware finishes
complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.18, including coordination with traditional U.S. finishes
indicated by certain manufacturers for their products.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - 12
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
C. Where specified, finishes on locksets, latchsets, exit devices and push/pull trim to incorporate
an FDA recognized antimicrobial coating (MicroShield™) listed for use on equipment as a
suppressant to the growth and spread of a broad range of bacteria, algae, fungus, mold and
mildew.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine scheduled openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and
other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in for electrical source power to verify actual locations of wiring connections
before electrified and integrated access control door hardware installation.
C. Notify architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the door schedule, door types,
drawings and scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or conflicts have
been resolved in writing.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Doors and frames at scheduled access controlled openings to be properly prepared to receive
specified electrified and access control hardware and connections without additional in-field
modifications.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install each item of mechanical and electromechanical hardware and access control equipment
to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and according to specifications.
1. Installers are to be trained and certified by the manufacturer on the proper installation
and adjustment of fire, life safety, and security products including: hanging devices;
locking devices; closing devices; and seals.
B. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable
publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations:
1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural
Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for
Wood Flush Doors."
3. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI A117.1
"Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities."
4. Provide blocking in drywall partitions where wall stops or other wall mounted hardware is
located.
C. Retrofitting: Install door hardware to comply with manufacturer's published templates and
written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into
ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - 13
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage,
and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9
Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on
substrates involved.
D. Storage: Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed.
Control the handling and installation of hardware items so that the completion of the work will
not be delayed by hardware losses before and after installation.
E. Boxed Power Supplies: Verify locations with Architect.
1. Configuration: Provide the least number of power supplies required to adequately serve
doors with access control equipment.
F. Final connect the system control switches (integrated reader locking hardware, remote readers,
keypads, etc.), and monitoring and signaling equipment to the related Controller devices at each
opening to properly operate the electrified door and access control hardware according to
system operational narratives.
G. Stand Alone System Application Software: Install, and test stand alone system application
software for the complete and proper operation of systems involved.
H. Networked System Application Software: Reference Division 28 Section "Access Control
Systems".
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field Inspection: Perform a final inspection of the installed door hardware and access control
sys tem and state in report whether installed work complies with or deviates from requirements,
including whether each component representing the opening assembly is properly installed,
adjusted, operating and performing to system operational narratives.
B. Commissioning and Testing Schedule: Reference Division 28 Section "Access Control System."
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to
ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to
operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating
and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect all hardware stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. Protect exposed
hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. Install any and all hardware at the
latest possible time frame.
B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.
ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - 14
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
C. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper finish. and provide final protection and
maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of
owner occupancy.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain mechanical and
electromechanical door hardware.
3.8 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A. The hardware sets represent the design intent and direction of the owner and architect. They
are a guideline only and should not be considered a detailed hardware schedule.
Discrepancies, conflicting hardware and missing items should be brought to the attention of the
architect with corrections made prior to the bidding process. Omitted items not included in a
hardware set should be scheduled with the appropriate additional hardware required for proper
application and functionality.
B. Refer to Section 080671, Door Hardware Schedule, for hardware sets.
END OF SECTION 281500
ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - 15
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Progress Set
Project No. 17031.01 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 August 2019
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - 16
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
DEMOLITION, CLEARING, AND GRUBBING 312000 - 1
SECTION 312000 - DEMOLITION, CLEARING, AND GRUBBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
Part 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
A. Attention is directed to the requirements of the printed form of Contract and to General Re-
quirements of which this section is hereby made a part.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Contractor, Subcontractors, and/or suppliers providing goods or services referenced in or
related to this Section shall also be bound by the Documents identified in Division 01 Section
“Summary”, Paragraph 1.1A, entitled “Related Documents.”
1.3 DESCRIPTION
A. Work by General Contractor
Demolition, clearing and grubbing required for this work includes, but is not necessarily lim-
ited to removal and disposal, removal and delivery to the Owner, or removal and reuse of
the following:
1. Bituminous pavement, curbing
2. Utilities
3. Trees, shrubs, vegetation
5. Other items as noted on the drawings required to complete the work.
6. Debris and rubble within the project limits
7. Removal of all above- and below- grade site improvements
8. Protection of trees and items to remain
9. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil.
10. Clearing and preparation of site.
B. Related Work Described Elsewhere
Temporary Sediment and Erosion Control ............................................... Division 01
Excavation, Backfill, Earthwork, and Grading .......................................... Division 31
Storm Drainage Utilities ............................................................................ Division 33
C. Definitions
1. The term "demolition, clearing and grubbing," as used herein, includes the removal of all
existing objects (except for those objects designated to remain) down to the existing
ground level, including their underground root systems, plus such other work as is de-
scribed in this Section of these Specifications.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
DEMOLITION, CLEARING, AND GRUBBING 312000 - 2
2. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of or-
ganic matter and soil organisms.
3. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project
site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil; but in disturbed areas such
as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.
4. Topsoil: Top layer of the soil profile consisting of existing native surface topsoil or existing
in-place surface soil and is the zone where plant roots grow. Its appearance is generally
friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying sub-
soil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 inches
(50 mm) in diameter; and free of subsoil and weeds, roots, toxic materials, or other nonsoil
materials.
5. Plant-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees, groups of trees, shrubs, or other
vegetation to be protected during construction, and indicated on Drawings.
6. Tree-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected
during construction, and indicated on Drawings. If no protection fencing is shown on plans,
provide an area of protection 1.5 times the diameter of the drip line.
7. Vegetation: Trees, shrubs, groundcovers, grass, and other plants.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications
Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during demolition operations
and who shall be thoroughly familiar with the procedures involved and who shall direct and
coordinate the operation and ensure coordination with the applicable utility agencies.
B. Codes and Standards
In addition to complying with all pertinent code and regulations, comply with the require-
ments of those insurance carriers providing coverage for this work.
C. Pre-demolition Conference
Conduct conference at project site. Follow Conference requirements as outlined in Front
End Documents. Meeting to review demolition and tree protection strategies.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Record Drawings: Identifying and accurately showing locations of capped utilities and other
subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions.
1.6 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Dust and Mud Control
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
DEMOLITION, CLEARING, AND GRUBBING 312000 - 3
Use all means necessary to prevent the spread of dust and mud during performance of the
work of the Section; thoroughly moisten and clean all surfaces as required to prevent mud
and dust from being a nuisance to the site residents and the neighbors. Add calcium chlo-
ride as necessary.
B. Protection of Existing Utilities
Follow the procedures outlined below in PART 3.
C. Clearing and Grubbing
Clear designated areas of the site ONLY of tree and shrub vegetation, including removal
of stumps and removing debris, and chipping of tree limbs as required to accommodate
new construction shown on drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 OTHER MATERIALS
All materials, not specifically described, but required for proper completion of the work of this Sec-
tion, shall be as selected by the Contractor, subject to approval of the Landscape Architect
2.02 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP
Except for stripped topsoil and other materials indicated to be stockpiled or otherwise remain
Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed
from Project site.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Notification
Notify the Landscape Architect at least two full working days prior to commencing the work
of this Section.
B. Site Inspection
Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the entire site and all objects designated
to be removed and to be preserved.
C. General
Perform demolition work in accordance with applicable rules, regulations, codes and ordi-
nances of local, State and Federal Authorities, and in accordance with the requirements of
Public Utility Corporations having jurisdiction over the work. Obtain and pay for all neces-
sary permits, licenses and certificates and give all notices as required during the perfor-
mance of the demolition work.
D. Existing Monuments and Survey Control Points
Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during con-
struction.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
DEMOLITION, CLEARING, AND GRUBBING 312000 - 4
E. Protection and Repair
Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction. Protect ex-
isting site features and structures as shown on plans. Any perimeter damaged or re-
moved during construction must be replaced in kind. Restore damaged improvements to
their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.
F. Clarification
1. The drawings do not purport to show all objects existing on the site.
2. Before commencing the work of this Section, verify with the Landscape Architect all
objects to be removed and all objects to be preserved.
G. Scheduling
1. Schedule all work in a careful manner with all necessary consideration for the Own-
er. Before commencing any work, submit a schedule for review to the Landscape
Architect showing the commencement, the order and the completion dates for the
various parts of this work.
2. Avoid interference with use of, and passage to and from, adjacent buildings and fa-
cilities.
3. Prior to any work performed on the site, the Contractor shall notify Dig Safe at the
following number, 1-800-322- 4844. . Notification of Dig Safe is a requirement prior
to construction.
H. Disconnection of Utilities
1. Before starting site operations, disconnect or arrange for disconnection of all utility
services designated to be removed or that require temporary discontinuance for the
duration of the work, as shown in the drawings, performing all such work in accordance
with the requirements of the utility company or agency involved.
2. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before proceeding with site
clearing.
3. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap utilities indicated to be removed or
abandoned in place.
I. Protection of Utilities
Preserve, in operating condition, all active utilities traversing the site and not designated to
be disconnected.
Perform demolition work in accordance with applicable rules, regulations, codes and ordi-
nances of local, State and Federal Authorities, and in accordance with the requirements of
Public Utility Corporations having jurisdiction over the work. Obtain and pay for all neces-
sary permits, licenses and certificates and give all notices as required during the perfor-
mance of the demolition work.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
DEMOLITION, CLEARING, AND GRUBBING 312000 - 5
Interrupting Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner
or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to
provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
J. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent
occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations.
1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities
without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by
Owner or authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Provide temporary signage as necessary to guide traffic.
K. Soil Stripping, Handling, and Stockpiling: Perform only when the topsoil is dry or slightly
moist.
3.02 DEMOLITION
All items designated to be salvaged shall be carefully removed from the site so as not to damage
them. Damaged items shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at no extra charge to the
Owner. The contractor shall take possession of all demolished materials not scheduled for reuse
and completely remove from site and legally dispose of same. Play equipment not to be sal-
vaged from West Street school, shall be left in place.
3.03 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to permit installation of new
construction.
1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated.
2. Grind down stumps and remove roots, obstructions, and debris to a depth of 18 inches
(450 mm) below exposed subgrade.
3. Use only hand methods for grubbing within protection zones.
4. Chip removed tree branches follow procedures as outlined in the Division 01 Temporary
Tree and Plant Protection specification.
B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material
unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated.
1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches (200 mm),
and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.
3.04 TOPSOIL STRIPPING
A. Strip and stockpile existing topsoil for possible reuse on site.
B. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.
1. Strip topsoil to depth of 6 inches (150 mm) in a manner to prevent intermingling with
underlying subsoil or other waste materials.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
DEMOLITION, CLEARING, AND GRUBBING 312000 - 6
2. Remove subsoil and nonsoil materials from topsoil, including clay lumps, gravel, and
other objects more than 2 inches (50 mm) in diameter; trash, debris, weeds, roots, and
other waste materials.
3. Stockpile topsoil away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade
and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust and
erosion by water.
4. Do not stockpile topsoil within protection zones.
3.05 SITE IMPROVEMENTS
A. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and necessary to
facilitate new construction.
B. Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated.
1. Unless existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw-cut along line
of existing pavement to remain before removing adjacent existing pavement. Saw-cut
faces vertically.
2. Paint cut ends of steel reinforcement in concrete to remain with two coats of antirust
coating, following coating manufacturer's written instructions. Keep paint off surfaces
that will remain exposed.
3.06 REMOVAL OF DEBRIS
Remove all debris from the site and leave the site in a neat and orderly condition to the approval
of the Landscape Architect.
3.07 SALVAGE OF ITEMS FOR RE-USE
Any items that are designated for salvage and delivery to Owner or for salvage and re-use shall
be carefully removed as to not damage, scratch or otherwise marr the object in any way, and then
shall then be stored by the Contractor until such time as the Contractor is ready for installation of
the item. Installation of salvaged items shall include footings or any other necessary installation
procedures required for the complete, safe use of the item installed.
3.08 WASTE MANAGEMENT
A. Separate and dispose of waste in accordance with the Project’s Waste Management Plan.
3.09 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and
waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's
property.
B. Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other non-recyclable
materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport them to
recycling facilities. Do not interfere with other Project work.
END OF SECTION
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
EXCAVATION, EARTHWORK, FILLING AND GRADING 315001 - 1
SECTION 315001 - EXCAVATION, EARTHWORK, FILLING AND GRADING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
Attention is called to the requirements of the printed Form of Contract and to Division 1 - General
Requirements, of which this section is hereby made a part.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
The Contractor, Subcontractors, and/or suppliers providing goods or services referenced in or re-
lated to this Section shall also be bound by the Documents identified in Division 01 Section
“Summary”, Paragraph 1.1A, entitled “Related Documents.”
1.4 ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED
A. If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in
this Section, provide such item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard es-
tablished for the balance of the Work specified, in accordance with the Landscape Archi-
tect's interpretation.
1.5 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT
A. In case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Docu-
ment not clarified by addendum, the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be pro-
vided, in accordance with the Architect's interpretation (See Article 1 of the General and
Supplementary Conditions).
1.6 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. The Contractor shall become thoroughly familiar with the site, consult records and draw-
ings of adjacent structures and of existing utilities and their connections, and note all condi-
tions which may influence the work of this Section.
B. By submitting a bid, the Contractor affirms that he has carefully examined the site and all
conditions affecting work under this Section. No claim for additional costs will be allowed
because of lack of full knowledge of existing conditions.
C. The Contractor may, at his own expense, conduct additional subsurface testing as required
for his own information.
1.7 INFORMATION NOT GUARANTEED
A. Information on the Drawings and in the Specifications relating to subsurface conditions,
natural phenomena, and existing utilities and structures is from the best sources presently
available. Such information is furnished only for the information and convenience of the
Contractor, and the accuracy or completeness of this information is not guaranteed.
B. Plans, surveys, measurements, and dimensions under which the work is to be performed
are believed to be correct, but the Contractor shall have examined them for himself during
the bidding period, as no additional compensation will be made for errors and inaccuracies
may be found therein.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
EXCAVATION, EARTHWORK, FILLING AND GRADING 315001 - 2
1.8 SUMMARY
A. SECTION INCLUDES: Excavating, filling and grading required for this work includes, but
is not necessarily limited to the following:
1. Clearing and preparation of site. (see Division 1 Site Demolition, Clearing and Grubbing
Spec)
2. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil. (see Division 1 Site Demolition, Clearing and Grubbing
Spec)
3. Protection of work areas, environmental controls.
4. Excavation:
a. General excavation to lines and grades indicated.
b. Excavation and backfill of utility trenches.
c. Excavation and backfilling of trenches under structures.
d. Excavating and backfilling trenches for buried utilities and structures.
e. Excavation and backfill of rock and boulders in areas of construction.
5. General exterior rough grading, cutting and filling required.
6. Filling and backfilling as required for walls.
7. Base and subbase course materials under pavements, slabs and site footings, in-
cluding compaction.
8. Excavation and disposal of excess or unsuitable material. Excavation shall include
removal and satisfactory disposal of all unclassified material encountered throughout
the site.
9. Removal, hauling and stockpiling of suitable excavated materials for subsequent use
in the work.
10. All rehandling, hauling and placing of stockpiled materials for use in refilling, filling,
backfilling, grading and other such operations.
11. Pumping and dewatering of excavation as may be required.
1.9 RELATED WORK DESCRIBED ELSEWHERE
A:
General Building Commissioning Requirements……….…………………………Division 01
Demolition, Clearing and Grubbing……………………………………….……..…Division 31
Asphalt Paving………………………….……….…………………………….……..Division 32
Concrete Paving……………………………………………………………………...Division 32
B. For SubSoil, Rough Grading and Backfill Materials refer to Division 31, Excavation, Earth-
work Filling and Grading;
For Topsoil properties for Groundcovers Shrubs and Trees, refer to Division 32 Planting.
For Toposil properties for Lawn areas, Refer to Division 32 Seeding and Sodding.
1.10 DEFINITIONS
A. Backfill: Soil materials used to fill an excavation.
1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to
support sides of pipe.
2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.
3. Utility Trench Backfill - is the area bounded by the proposed finished subgrade and the
cover material over the respective pipe or conduit. This material shall conform with
applicable requirements for embankment, structural backfill or utility company
requirements depending on the area or zone into which the utility is installed.
B. Base Course: Layer placed between the subbase course and asphalt paving.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
EXCAVATION, EARTHWORK, FILLING AND GRADING 315001 - 3
C. Bedding Course: Layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.
D. Borrow: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.
E. Embankment - shall be defined as any area on the site filled to raise grades to proposed
subgrade elevations. Embankments are placed in layers to a predetermined elevation and
cross-section.
F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations.
1. Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations as directed by Landscape
Architect. Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to
Contract provisions for changes in the Work.
2. Bulk Excavation: Excavations more than 10 feet (3 m) in width and pits more than 30
feet (9 m) in either length or width.
3. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated
dimensions without direction by Landscape Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well
as remedial work directed by Landscape Architect, shall be without additional
compensation.
G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.
H. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, and conglomerate deposits and
boulders of rock material 3/4 cu. yd. (0.57 cu. m) or more in volume that when tested by an
independent geotechnical testing agency, according to ASTM D 1586, exceeds a standard
penetration resistance of 100 blows/2 inches (97 blows/50 mm).
I. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical
and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or
below the ground surface.
J. Subbase Course: Layer placed between the subgrade and base course for asphalt paving, or
layer placed between the subgrade and a concrete pavement or walk.
K. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or
backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, structural soil or landscape soil materials.
Subgrade - shall be that portion of the soil or rock which remains after stripping of topsoil,
excavation, and prior to filling, or placement of roadway subbase. In proposed building area,
subgrade shall be soil or rock which remains after stripping of top soil and subsoil.
L. Subsoil - loose silt and fine sand layer located directly below the topsoil
M. Topsoil - The upper layer of the soil profile which is supporting the growth of vegetation as
evidenced by the existence therein of numerous roots and other organic matter.
N. Utilities include on-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground
services within buildings.
O. Unsuitable Material - material which is classified as "unsuitable" shall be material having at least
one of the following properties:
1. Material with a maximum unit dry weight per cubic foot less than 90 lb. as determined by
ASTM D 1557.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
EXCAVATION, EARTHWORK, FILLING AND GRADING 315001 - 4
2. Material containing visible organic matter, topsoil, organic silt, peat, construction debris, roots
and stumps.
3. Material which has a Liquid Limit greater than 50.
4. Material designated in the field by the Engineer.
P. Rock and Boulder Excavation—shall be defined as the removal of sound and solid mass, layer, or
ledge, or ledge of mineral matter as follows:
1. Rock excavation shall mean the removal of bedrock (ledge) which, in the opinion of the
landscape architect, requires for its removal, drilling, blasting, wedging, sledging or barring and
boulders which, in the opinion of the Landscape Architect, require blasting for removal. Rock
excavation shall be made to the widths and depths as described for pay lines or as directed by
the Architect in the field.
2. Boulder excavation shall mean the removal of rock fragments exceeding 2 cubic yards in
volume which can be removed without resorting to blasting.
1.11 REFERENCED REPORTS AND DOCUMENTATION
A. Existing Ground Survey: A survey for design purposes has been prepared by Others on
behalf of the Owner. Verify accuracy of survey, report any discrepancies and undertake
any additional surveying at no cost to the Owner. Include all costs for variations in material
volume and handling associated within the stated survey accuracy and tolerance.
B. Existing Underground Utility Diagram: A diagram for design purposes has been prepared
for the Owner. The data is made available only for information and not for construction.
Verify accuracy of the diagram, report any discrepancies and undertake any additional
utility locating at no cost to the Owner.
1.12 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit a 5 lb. sample of each type of fill (off-site and on-site) to testing laboratory in an air
tight container at least seven (7) days prior to use. Submit the name of each material sup-
plier and specific type and source of each material. Any change in source throughout the
project requires written approval by the architect or engineer.
B. Product Data: For the following:
1. Separation fabric.
2. Name of material supplier and specific type and source of each material.
C. Samples: For the following:
1. 5 lb samples, sealed in airtight containers, of each proposed fill material from on-site
or borrow (off-site) sources.
D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test
results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated:
E. Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on-site or borrow soil material proposed for
fill and backfill.
F. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 1557 for each on-site or borrow soil
material proposed for fill and backfill.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
EXCAVATION, EARTHWORK, FILLING AND GRADING 315001 - 5
G. Field Quality Control Tests & Survey: Submit within 14 days of completing Earthwork.
1.13 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Surveyor Qualifications: An independent licensed surveyor, acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction and experienced in ground surveys.
B. Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according
to ASTM E 329 to conduct soil materials and rock-definition testing, as documented according
to ASTM D 3740 and ASTM E 548.
C. Mockup: Construct a mockup of rough grading to a bermed landform nominated by the
Landscape Architect. Establish grading standards for “crisp” & “sharp” ridges/toes and planar
grading of slopes to the satisfaction of the Landscape Architect. If approved, mockup may be
incorporated into the works.
D. Field Observation: Give not less than 14 working days notice so that field observations may be
made of the following:
1. Mockup.
2. Grading operations.
E. Pre-excavation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." The Landscape Architect may conduct a presentation
illustrating the intent of the grading. Ensure that key layout and grading personnel are in
attendance.
F. The Owner reserves the right to retain an independent testing laboratory to perform on-site
observation and testing during the following phases of the construction operations. The
services of the testing laboratory may include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. Observation during excavation and replacement of existing fill under paved or slab areas.
2. Observation of compaction of paved and slab area subgrades.
3. Observation during placement and compaction of fills.
4. Laboratory testing and analysis of fill and bedding materials specified, as required.
5. Observation of subgrade preparation for paved or slab areas.
6. Observe construction and perform water content, gradation, and compaction tests at a
frequency and at locations determined by the testing agency. The results of these tests will be
submitted to the Architect, copy to the Contractor, on a timely basis so that the Contractor can
take such action as is required to remedy indicated deficiencies.
7. Observation of fills following interruptions by rains or other inclement weather.
G. The testing agency's presence does not include supervision or direction of the actual work by
the Contractor, his employees or agents. Neither the presence of the testing agency, nor any
observations and testing performed by him shall excuse the Contractor from defects discovered
in his work.
H. Compaction Control
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
EXCAVATION, EARTHWORK, FILLING AND GRADING 315001 - 6
1. Wherever a percentage of compaction for backfill is indicated or specified, it shall be the
in-place dry density divided by the maximum dry density and multiplied by 100.
2. The maximum dry density shall be the density at optimum moisture as determined by
ASTM Standard Methods of Test for Moisture - Density Relations of Soil Using 10-lb.
Rammer and 18-inch Drop, Designation D1557-78. (Method C).
3. The in-place dry density shall be determined in accordance with ASTM Standard Method
of Test for Density of Soil in Place by the Sand Cone Method, Designation D1556-82 or
ASTM Standard Method of Test for Density of Soil in Place by Nuclear Methods,
Designation D2922-81.
1.14 COORDINATION
A. Prior to start of Earthwork, the Contractor shall arrange an on-site meeting with the Architect
for the purpose of establishing Contractor’s schedule of operations and scheduling inspection
procedures and requirements.
B. As construction proceeds, the Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the Landscape Ar-
chitect prior to start of earthwork operations requiring inspection and/ or testing.
C. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining test samples of soil materials proposed to be
used and transporting them to the site sufficiently in advance of time planned for use of these ma-
terials for testing of materials to be completed. Use of these proposed materials by the Contrac-
tor prior to testing and approval or rejection, shall be at the Contractor’s risk.
1.15 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Dust Control
1. Use all means necessary to control dust on and near the work and on and near all
off-site borrow areas, if such dust is caused by the Contractor's operations during
performance of the work or if resulting from the condition in which the Contractor
leaves the site.
2. Thoroughly moisten all surfaces as required to prevent dust being a nuisance to the
public, neighbors and concurrent performance or other work on the site.
B. Protection of Existing Structure and Utilities
1. The work shall be executed in such manner as to prevent any damage to adjacent
property and any other property and existing improvements such as, but not limited
to : streets, curbs, paving, trees, utility lines and structures, monuments, bench
marks and other public and private property, and to protect existing structures and
foundations from damage caused by settlement, lateral earth movement, undermin-
ing, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations.
2. In case of any damage or injury caused in the performance of the work, the Contrac-
tor shall, at his own expense, make good such damage or injury to the satisfaction
of, and without cost to the Owner. Existing roads, sidewalks, and curbs damaged
during the project work shall be repaired or replaced to their original condition at the
completion of operations. The Contractor shall replace, at his cost, existing bench
marks, monuments, and other reference points which are disturbed or destroyed.
3 Buried structures, utility lines, etc., including those which project less than 18 inches
above grade, which are subject to damage from construction equipment shall be
clearly marked to indicate the hazard. Markers shall indicate limits of danger areas,
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
EXCAVATION, EARTHWORK, FILLING AND GRADING 315001 - 7
by means which will be clearly visible to operators of trucks and other construction
equipment, and shall be maintained at all times until completion of project.
1.16 DRAINAGE AND DEWATERING
A. The Contractor shall provide, at his own expense, adequate pumping and drainage facili-
ties to keep excavated areas sufficiently dry from groundwater and/or surface runoff so as
not to adversely affect construction procedures or cause excessive disturbance of underly-
ing natural ground or footing and slab subgrades.
B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water
accumulation.
C. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to
accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage
ditches.
D. The Contractor shall grade and pitch the site as necessary to direct surface runoff away
from open excavations and subgrade surfaces. Positive drainage (minimum 1.0% slope)
shall be maintained at all times.
E. Water from trenches and excavations shall be routed through the temporary sediment ba-
sins in such a manner as will not cause injury to public health nor to public or private prop-
erty, not to the surface of roads, walks, and streets, not cause any interference with the
use of the same by the public. Methods of disposal of pumped effluent shall not cause
erosion or siltation.
F. Under no circumstances shall the Contractor allow water to flood adjacent areas or proper-
ties.
G. Under no circumstances shall the Contractor place fills, pour concrete, or install piping and
appurtenances in excavations containing free water.
H. There shall be sufficient pumping equipment, in good working order, available at all times
to remove water.
I. Where, in the opinion of the Architect, pumping of excavations is not effective in maintain-
ing a dry, firm subgrade, other acceptable dewatering methods shall be employed.
J. Install a dewatering system to keep subgrades dry and convey ground water away from
excavations. Maintain until dewatering is no longer required.
1.17 FROST PROTECTION
Frozen, excessively moist or material containing snow shall not be placed as fill or backfill.
Special care should be taken when placing fill material when the temperature is below
32oF.
1.18 SHORING AND SHEETING
A. Provide shoring, sheeting and/or bracing at excavations, as required, to prevent collapse of
earth at site of excavations.
B. Comply with federal, state and local regulations and provisions of the Occupational Safety
and Heath Act (OSHA).
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
EXCAVATION, EARTHWORK, FILLING AND GRADING 315001 - 8
C. Remove sheeting and shoring and the like, as backfilling operations progress, taking all
necessary precautions to prevent collapse of excavation sides.
1.19 DISTURBANCE OF EXCAVATED OR FILLED AREAS DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. The contractor shall take all necessary steps to avoid disturbance of subgrade, underlying
natural soils and compacted fill during excavation and filling operations. Methods of con-
struction shall be revised as necessary to avoid disturbance described above, including re-
stricting construction access and types of vehicles or equipment, dewatering, or other ac-
ceptable control measures. Disturbance shall be construed to include deterioration of soils
due to the contractor's operations, such as moving equipment, hauling, etc. The contractor
shall cooperate with the engineer to modify operations as necessary to minimize disturb-
ance and protect bearing soils.
B. All excavated or filled areas that are disturbed during construction, including all loose or
saturated soils, fill that cannot be compacted within 48 hours due to saturation and other
areas that will not meet compaction requirements as specified herein shall be removed and
replaced with compacted Granular Fill Sand-Gravel, or Crushed Stone at the Contractor's
expense.
1.20 EXPLOSIVES
A. Explosives: Do not use explosives.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 FILL MATERIAL, GENERAL
A. Approval Required
All fill material shall be subject to the approval of the Architect.
2.02 COMMON FILL MATERIAL, ORDINARY BORROW
A. Common fill / ordinary borrow material shall be well graded, natural inorganic soil, ap-
proved by the Engineer and meeting the following requirements:
1. It shall be free of organic or other weak or compressible materials, of frozen materi-
als, and of stones larger than six inches maximum dimensions.
2. It shall be of such nature and character that it can be compacted to the specified
densities.
3. It shall be free from highly plastic clays, from all materials subject to decay, decom-
position, or dissolution and from cinders or other material which will corrode piping
or other metal.
4. It shall have a maximum dry density of not less than 100 lbs. per cubic foot.
B. Re-use of excavated on site common fill is dependent upon meeting compaction criteria and
geotechnical requirements and classifications below.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
EXCAVATION, EARTHWORK, FILLING AND GRADING 315001 - 9
2.03 GRANULAR FILL:
FOR USE AT DEPTHS GREATER THAN 12” BENEATH FOOTINGS AND FLOOR SLABS AS
MISCELLANEOUS FILL
Granular Fill shall be free from ice and snow, roots, sod, rubbish and other deleterious
or organic matter. Granular Fill shall conform to the following gradation requirements:
Sieve Size Percent Finer by Weight
4” 100
No. 10 30 - 90
No. 40 10 - 70
No. 200 0 - 15
Granular Fill shall not be over compacted against retaining walls. This should not be compacted
more than 92% max density (as determined by ASTM 1557)
2.04 GRAVEL BASE COURSE:
Gravel Base Course shall consist of durable gravel and shall be free from ice and snow, roots,
sod, rubbish and other deleterious or organic matter. Gravel Base Course shall conform to the
following gradation requirements:
Sieve Size Percent Finer by Weight
4 inch 100
1/2 inch 50 - 80
No. 4 40 - 75
No. 10 30 - 60
No. 40 10 – 35
No. 100 5 – 20
No. 200 0 - 10
2.05 SAND + GRAVEL BASE COURSE:
Sand-Gravel shall consist of durable sand and gravel and shall be free from ice and snow, roots,
sod, rubbish and other deleterious or organic matter. Sand-Gravel shall conform to the following
gradation requirements:
Sieve Size Percent Finer by Weight
4 inch 100
1/2 inch 50 - 85
No. 4 40 - 75
No. 40 10 - 35
No. 200 0 – 6
2.06 CRUSHED STONE:
FOR USE WITH INFILTRATION BASINS OR OTHER DRAINAGE STRUCTURES
Crushed Stone shall consist of durable crushed rock or durable crushed gravel stone and shall be
free from ice and snow, clay, loam and other deleterious or organic matter. Crushed Stone shall
be washed, and conform to the following gradation requirements:
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
EXCAVATION, EARTHWORK, FILLING AND GRADING 315001 - 10
Gradation ASTM D422
Sieve Size Percent Finer by Weight
1 inch 100
3/4 inch 90 - 100
1/2 inch 10 - 50
3/8 0 - 20
# 4 0 - 5
Note: Gradation requirements similar to those presented in Mass DOT, Highway
Division Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges 1995 (supplemented in
2010).
2.07 Separation Fabric: Woven geotextile, specifically manufactured for use as a separation
geotextile; made from polyolefins, polyesters, or polyamides; and with the following minimum
properties determined according to ASTM D 4759 and referenced standard test methods:
1. Grab Tensile Strength: 200 lbf (890 N); ASTM D 4632.
2. Tear Strength: 75 lbf (333 N); ASTM D 4533.
3. Puncture Resistance: 90 lbf (400 N); ASTM D 4833.
4. Water Flow Rate: 4 gpm per sq. ft. (2.7 L/s per sq. m); ASTM D 4491.
5. Apparent Opening Size: No. 30 (0.6 mm); ASTM D 4751.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Existing Utilities: Locate and mark existing utilities, underground structures, and above-
ground obstructions before excavation. Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied
by Owner or others unless permitted in writing by Owner’s Representative.
3.02 GENERAL
A. Prior Familiarization
Prior to all work of this Section, become thoroughly familiar with the site, the site condi-
tions, and all portions of the work falling within this Section.
B. The Contractor shall establish the baseline shown on the drawings and accurately lay out
all improvements related thereto. All work and control points shall be preserved by a sys-
tem of offsets and/or ties in order to prevent destruction. Elevations shall be established
from the project benchmark shown on the Contract Plans.
C. Backfilling Prior to Approvals
1. Do not allow or cause any of the work performed or installed to be covered up or
enclosed by work of Section prior to all required inspections, tests and approvals.
2. Should any of the work be so enclosed or covered up before it has been approved,
uncover all such work at no additional cost to the Owner.
3. After the uncovered work has been completely tested, inspected and approved,
make all repairs and replacements necessary to restore the work to the condition in
which it was found at the time of uncovering, all at no additional cost to the Owner.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
EXCAVATION, EARTHWORK, FILLING AND GRADING 315001 - 11
D. Stripping of Topsoil
Any topsoil within "Limits of Work" and where excavation or filling will occur shall be
stripped, cleaned of all rocks and debris and stockpiled on site for use in finish grading.
See Division 31 Site Demolition and Clearing.
3.03 PREPARATION
A. Protect utilities, structures, foundations, sidewalks, pavements, other facilities, lawns and plants
from damage caused by operations or as a result of operations.
1. Utilities: After locating and marking, verify the status of utilities. Protect or temporarily
divert existing utilities to remain active. Rectify immediately any obstruction or damage to
utilities to remain active and provide and pay for temporary utilities whilst repairs are
carried out to the satisfaction of the utility owner.
2. Property: Do not interfere with or damage property that is to remain on or adjacent to the
site, including adjoining property to the site, and trees. Rectify immediately any
interference or damage to such property.
3. Trees: If the trees are damaged or placed under unnecessary and avoidable stress by
the Contractor, the Owners Representative shall deduct damages from the Contractor’s
progress claim.
4. Irrigation: Install a temporary diversion main, control cable and valves to isolate contract
area and to maintain service to areas outside of the contract area.
C. Protect subgrades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide
protective insulating materials as necessary.
D. Provide temporary erosion-control and slope stability measures to prevent erosion,
displacement of soils, discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent
properties and completed work. Be responsible for any additional measures in areas that rely on
the establishment of plant roots to stabilize soils and slopes.
3.04 LAYOUT, FINISH ELEVATIONS, AND LINES
A. Contractor shall be responsible for setting and establishing finish elevations and lines, to the re-
quired tolerances. Carefully preserve all data and all monuments set and, if displaced or lost,
immediately replace to the approval of the Architect, at no additional cost to the Owner.
B. Lines and Elevations: The visual appearance and acceptable tolerances of the design is critically
dependent upon the layout of the works. Include all costs and provide all instruments necessary
to lay out the works accurately. Establish lines and elevation markers by survey instrumentation
for finish grades and locations.
C. Include all costs and provide all calculations necessary to verify the subgrade, substrate and/or
structural set-down elevations from the finish grades to earthwork grades. If any discrepancy is
found notify the Owner's Representative in writing prior to commencement of rough grading.
D. Provide additional grade stakes and string lines as required to achieve grades and to enable field
observations by the Landscape Architect. Re-instate markers/stakes as required throughout the
works. The Landscape Architect may direct the layout of the more important landform elements
and/or shall review the works when laid out and retains the right to adjust the layout within 2
days.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
EXCAVATION, EARTHWORK, FILLING AND GRADING 315001 - 12
3.05 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS
A. Stockpile borrow materials and satisfactory excavated soil materials. Stockpile soil materials
without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to
prevent windblown dust.
1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of
remaining trees.
3.06 EXCAVATING GENERALLY
A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavation to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of
surface and subsurface conditions encountered, including rock, soil materials, and obstruc-
tions.
1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materi-
als and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.
2. Barricade open excavations and post with warning tape.
B. Excavate site as shown on the drawings and cross-sections. All suitable material must be
stored on site and utilized as backfill or in embankments. Surplus or unsuitable material
shall be removed and disposed of off the site.
C. Depressions Resulting from Removal of Obstructions
Where depressions result from, or have resulted from, the removal of surface or subsurface
obstructions, open the depression to equipment working width and remove all debris and soft
material as directed by the Architect.
D. Sheeting, shoring, bracing, pumping, bailing, and other incidental work necessary to make
and maintain excavations and keep them free from water at all times during placing of con-
crete, utility lines, and fill/backfill materials, shall be performed or supplied as required. Fill
and backfill shall be placed in dry or dewatered areas only.
E. Sheeting shall be installed, where required, to maintain safe and workable conditions in
excavations and where adjacent tree protection zones prohibit sloped trench walls without
damaging of the tree. Sheeting, including necessary wales and struts, shall be selected
and designed by the Contractor. Use of sheeting shall equal or exceed minimum required
for safety and/or conformance to law and/or OSHA Standards.
F. Structures, pipes, pavement, earth, and other property liable to damage from excavation
operations shall be braced, underpinned, and supported as required to prevent damage
and movement.
G. As excavation approaches underground utilities and structures, excavation shall be done
by hand tools. Such manual excavation is incidental to normal excavation and no special
payment will be made.
H. As excavation shall include satisfactory disposal of excavated material not employed as
backfill or fill material.
I. Excavation for pipe and other items shall be carried far enough below underside of item to
accommodate bedding material.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
EXCAVATION, EARTHWORK, FILLING AND GRADING 315001 - 13
J. Excavations which extend below indicated or specified levels (over-excavation), shall be
filled to those levels with compacted Granular Fill.
K. If bearing surface of subgrade which is to receive fill, concrete footing, structure, or other
construction becomes softened, disturbed, or unstable, unsuitable material shall be re-
moved down to a firm bearing surface and replaced with suitable material at no additional
cost to the Owner. Subgrade shall then be protected from further disturbance until con-
struction item is placed.
L. Excavations shall not be wider than required to set, place, and remove forms for concrete,
install piping, or perform other necessary work. Width of trench at 12 inches above top of
pipe or conduit shall be less than the outside diameter of the pipe or the conduit plus 3
feet. Sides of trench shall be sloped in accordance with OSHA standards. In materials
where sloping walls are not stable, or tree damage may occur, trench walls shall be sup-
ported by sheeting or trench box.
1. Should it be necessary to lower the utilities below the grade indicated on the Draw-
ings because of existing pipes or structures, the excavation below normal grade
shall be made to such widths and depths as the Engineer may direct.
M. Below-ground Demolition
1. Underground construction, pipe, and similar items indicated on the Drawings as to
be demolished or removed, shall be demolished and/or removed. Other items, not
indicated on the Drawings, which impede construction of new work indicated, shall
be abandoned, demolished and/or removed only with the approval of the Architect.
2. Pipe which is to be abandoned in place shall be suitably and permanently plugged at
end. Plug shall be stiff concrete, with a thickness, measured parallel to pipe axis of
1 pipe diameter, for pipe less than 18 inches in diameter. Both inner and outer faces
of plug for pipe equal to or greater than 18 inches in diameter shall be formed. Pipe
less than 4 inches in diameter need not be plugged. Abandoned pipes within pro-
posed building (if exist) shall be removed or if left in place, they shall be properly
grouted.
3.07 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES
A. Excavate to required elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch (25
mm). Extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete
formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.
1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation.
Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms
to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.
2. Pile Foundations: Stop excavations from 6 to 12 inches (150 to 300 mm) above bottom
of pile cap before piles are placed. After piles have been driven, remove loose and
displaced material. Excavate to final grade, leaving solid base to receive concrete pile
caps.
3. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Utility
Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or
minus 1 inch (25 mm). Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended for bearing
surface.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
EXCAVATION, EARTHWORK, FILLING AND GRADING 315001 - 14
4. Barricade open excavations and post with warning tape.
3.08 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES
A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.
1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below
frost line.
B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide a working clearance on each side of pipe or
conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches (300 mm) higher
than top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Clearance: unless otherwise shown 12 inches (300 mm) on each side of pipe or conduit.
C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate trenches 4 inches (100 mm) deeper than bottom of pipe elevation
to allow for bedding course. Hand excavate for bell of pipe.
D. Excavate trenches 6 inches (150 mm) deeper than elevation required in rock or other
unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course.
E. Barricade open excavations and post with warning tape.
1. Reinstating: If non-cohesive backfill is exposed adjacent to existing utilities ensure it is
reinstated to that before the works. Prevent cross connections between subdrains and
existing utilities with non-cohesive backfilled trenches.
3.09 UNATHORIZED EXCAVATION
A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of
concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean
concrete fill may be used when approved by Landscape Architect.
1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by
Landscape Architect.
3.10 SUBGRADE PREPARATION AND COMPACTION
A. Subgrade preparation for retaining wall footings shall be conducted in such a way as to mini-
mize disturbance of the subgrade.
B. If the natural soil subgrade is dry, densify the exposed bearing subgrade with four passes of
a minimum 250 pound vibratory plate compactor. Protect footing subgrades from frost at all
times. Fill should not be placed over frozen soil.
C. In proposed fill areas, after the removal of topsoil and subsoil and prior to any fill placement
proofroll/ compact the exposed subgrade with a minimum of 4 passes of a vibratory drum
roller having a minimum weight of 5,000 pounds (static weight). If soft and unstable material
is observed, it should be overexcavated and replaced with Granular Fill, compacted as speci-
fied herein at no additional cost to the Owner.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
EXCAVATION, EARTHWORK, FILLING AND GRADING 315001 - 15
D. Where test pit excavations extended below the future proposed footing subgrade level, they
should be re-excavated and backfilled with properly compacted Granular Fill or Sand-Gravel
Fill prior to foundation construction or fill placement.
E. Notify Landscape Architect when excavations have reached required subgrade.
F. If Landscape Architect determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation
and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed.
1. Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract
provisions for changes in the Work.
G. Proof roll subgrade with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas
of excess yielding. Do not proof roll wet or saturated subgrades.
H. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water,
or construction activities, as directed by Landscape Architect.
3.11 BACKFILL GENERALLY
A. Excavation below finished grades shall be backfilled. Temporary planking, timbering,
forms, debris, and refuse shall be removed before backfill is placed.
B. Backfilling shall be done in any area only after the Owner or Architect or Engineer have in-
spected and approved subgrade, foundations, or other work in excavations. Notice that
the work is ready for inspection shall be given promptly, and sufficient time shall be allowed
for making necessary examinations.
C. In order to prevent lateral movement, care shall be exercised in placing backfill adjacent to
utility lines and other structures. Backfill on opposite sides of such items shall be kept at
approximately the same elevation as backfilling progresses to prevent unbalanced earth
pressure. During backfilling, the difference in elevation of backfill on opposite sides of the
structure shall not exceed 12 inches.
1. Shoring shall be employed as necessary to protect such items.
D. Except as otherwise noted, tolerance of top surface of completed backfill shall be + 6 inches
from true grade indicated, and variations from indicated tolerance shall approximately com-
pensate within each 100-foot area.
E. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:
1. Letting new concrete walls reach 28 day compressive strength.
2. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofing,
waterproofing, and perimeter insulation.
3. Surveying locations of underground utilities for record documents.
4. Inspecting and testing underground utilities.
5. Removing concrete formwork.
6. Removing trash and debris.
7. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting.
8. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
EXCAVATION, EARTHWORK, FILLING AND GRADING 315001 - 16
3.12 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL
A. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding
course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings,
and bodies of conduits.
B. Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches (450 mm) of bottom of footings;
fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings.
C. Provide 4-inch- (100-mm-) thick, concrete-base slab support for piping or conduit less than 30
inches (750 mm) below surface of roadways. After installing and testing, completely encase
piping or conduit in a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) of concrete before backfilling or placing
roadway subbase.
D. Place and compact initial backfill of subbase material, free of particles larger than 1 inch (25
mm), to a height of 12 inches (300 mm) over the utility pipe or conduit.
1. Carefully compact material under pipe haunches and bring backfill evenly up on both
sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement
of utility system.
2. Compact non-cohesive backfill material by water only if bottom of trench has positive
drainage or subdrainage and compacting in lifts. Do not use water to compact cohesive
backfills.
E. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.
F. Fill voids with approved backfill materials while shoring and bracing, and as sheeting is
removed.
G. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil material to final subgrade.
3.13 BEDDING
A. Minimum width of bedding material shall be at least as wide as the item to be installed on
it. Where width of bed is less than full width of trench, Sand-Gravel shall be placed adja-
cent to bedding material to fill full width of the trench, and shall be compacted with bedding
material.
1. Width of bedding for pipe shall extend full width of trench excavation.
B. Where bed is damaged during excavation or while placing pipe, or otherwise, it shall be re-
paired to specified grade, contour, and compaction before weight of pipe is placed on it.
C. Bedding material and embedment material for utilities will be furnished, placed, and com-
pacted under the appropriate utility specification section. Bedding material to be Crushed
Stone.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
EXCAVATION, EARTHWORK, FILLING AND GRADING 315001 - 17
3.14 FILL
A. Preparation: Remove vegetation, topsoil, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and
deleterious materials from ground surface before placing fills. (See requirements in Demolition
Clearing and Grubbing Division 31)
B. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill
material will bond with existing material.
C. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:
1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material that is suitable as a subsoil.
2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material.
3. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill. (see part 2 requirements)
4. Under structural slabs, use engineered fill.
5. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.
6. Under grass and planted areas on slopes steeper than 1 in 3, use satisfactory soil
material that is stable at the proposed grade. Construct filled landforms and berms by
overfilling and cutting back to ensure even compaction. Ensure soil material in each layer
is homogenous to avoid perched lenses of groundwater forming.
D. Fill shall be placed below base course and subbase course materials as required per Part 2 of
this specification section. Fill DOES NOT replace those required materials.
3.15 COMPACTION
A. Degree of compaction shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D 1557, Method C.
B. Place backfill and fill materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and
uniformly along the full length of each structure.
C. Except as otherwise noted, fill and backfill materials shall be placed in successive horizon-
tal lifts which do not exceed specified thickness.
D. Subgrade and backfill of indicated areas or structures shall be compacted as specified in
the following table:
Fill Area % of Maximum Dry Density
Beneath slabs 95
Pavement base course 95
Beneath pavement base course 92
Backfill for foundation wall 95
Beneath landscape areas 80-85
E. Compaction requirements shall apply to material directly below the indicated support item
(base course or footing), and to all material above the undisturbed earth beneath fill, and en-
closed by the following planes:
1. Horizontal plane at the elevation of the bottom of the supported item (base course,
footing, or structure), within a perimeter line located 2 feet beyond the exterior face
or edge of item.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
EXCAVATION, EARTHWORK, FILLING AND GRADING 315001 - 18
2. Flat planes extending from the perimeter line downward and outward at a 45 degree
angle with the horizontal, to where the planes intersect undisturbed earth. Where
zones of higher and lower percentages of compaction overlap, that of the higher
percentage shall apply.
F. Compaction of backfill shall be to a density not less than that required of the surrounding
area fill.
G. Equipment and methods employed to achieve specified compaction shall be subject to the
approval of the Engineer and equipment shall be replaced and methods revised as di-
rected until specified compaction is obtained.
H. Compaction of each lift shall be completed before placing of the next lift is started.
I. Grading tolerance
Rough Grade Finish Grade
Pavement areas plus/minus 0.05 ft. Pavement areas plus/minus 0.01 ft.
Landscape areas plus/minus 0.10 ft. Landscape areas plus/minus 0.05 ft.
J. Backfill adjacent to wall, conduit, pipe and similar items, and in other areas where wheeled
equipment can not safely be employed, shall be placed in 4 inch thick layers, to the
specificed compaction using mechanical tampers.
3.16 COMPACTION METHODS
The Compaction alternative given below are stated to provide minimum compaction standards
only and in no way relieves the Contractor of his/her obligation to achieve the specified degree of
compaction by whatever additional effort that is necessary.
Compaction Method Maximum Loose Lift Thickness Minimum # passes
Against Less Against Less
Maximum Walls Critical Walls Critical
Stone Size* and Pavement Areas & Pavement Areas
Hand-operated vibratory plate or
light roller in confined areas 3" 6" 8" 4 4
Hand-operated vibratory drum
rollers weighing at least 1,000#
in confined areas 3" 10" 12" 4 4
Light vibratory drum roller
minimum minimum 3" 12" 18" 4 4
weight dynamic
at drum force
5000# 10,000#
Medium vibratory drum roller
minimum minimum 3" 12" 24" 6 6
weight dynamic
at drum force
10,000# 20,000#
*And no more than two-thirds (2/3) loose lift thickness.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
EXCAVATION, EARTHWORK, FILLING AND GRADING 315001 - 19
3.17 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES
A. After the subgrade has been completed per all Division 31 requirements and reviewed by the
Landscape Architect or Field Engineer and approved, roll the surface to a smooth and uniform
texture free from lumps, rock pockets, soft spots, and spongy areas.
B. Under pavements and walks, place subbase course on separation fabric according to fabric
manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Place the base course and subbase in strict accordance with the project specifications.
D. Place base course material over subbase.
E. The base shall be constructed of two courses of gravel. The first course shall not be less than
½ the thickness of the base required when thoroughly compacted. The second course shall
complete the thickness of the base required. Compaction shall be done with a vibrator
compactor.
1. When thickness of compacted subbase or base course exceeds 6 inches (150 mm),
place materials in equal layers, with no layer more than 6 inches (150 mm) thick or less
than 3 inches (75 mm) thick when compacted.
2. When thickness of compacted subbase or base course is 6 inches (150 mm) or less,
place materials in a single layer.
F. Compact subbase and base courses at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines,
cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according
to ASTM D 1557.
G. Shape subbase and base to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades.
H. Under cast-in-place concrete and asphalt pavements:
a. when thickness of compacted subbase or base course is 6 inches (150 mm) or
less, place materials in a single layer.
b. When thickness of compacted subbase or base course exceeds 6 inches (150
mm), place materials in equal layers, with no layer more than 6 inches (150 mm)
thick or less than 3 inches (75 mm) thick when compacted.
I. Under Unitized paving pavements:
a. When thickness of compacted subbase or base course is less than 3” (75mm),
place materials in equal layers, with each layer no greater than 3 inches (75mm)
thick. Compact each layer to 95% proctor.
b. When thickness of compacted subbase or base course exceeds 3”, place
materials in equal layers, with each layer no greater than 3 inches (75mm) thick.
Compact each layer to 95% proctor, prior to placing additional layers.
J. Pavement Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of subbase and base course to prevent
lateral movement. Construct shoulders, at least 12 inches (300 mm) wide, of satisfactory soil
materials and compact simultaneously with each subbase and base layer to not less than 95
percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557.
K. All joints at existing paving shall be sawed vertical butt joints which shall receive a light coating
of asphalt emulsion a short time before new paving commences. Interface between new and
existing pavement shall result in a smooth continuous surface.
L. Compact the base course to a minimum degree of compaction of 95 percent at optimum
moisture content.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
EXCAVATION, EARTHWORK, FILLING AND GRADING 315001 - 20
M. Roll the base course until entire surface is firm, dense, and free from rock pockets and mud
pads; do not slurry the base course.
N. Water the base course after compaction.
3.18 GRADING
A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes.
Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations
indicated.
1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades.
2. Grade with constant slope between points where elevations are given.
3. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface
tolerances.
4. Slope grades to direct water away from buildings to drains or subdrains and to prevent
ponding.
3.19 TOLERANCES
A. Comply with tolerances for lawn, grass and planting areas as follows:
1. Elevation: 1 inch (25 mm).
2. Surface smoothness: Gap below 10-foot- (3-m-) long straightedge not to exceed 1 inch
(25 mm) in any direction.
3. Slope: unless otherwise noted on the Drawings not less than 1% fall.
B. Comply with tolerances for pavement and building areas as follows:
1. Elevation: 1/2 inch (13 mm).
2. Surface smoothness: Gap below 10-foot- (3-m-) long straightedge not to exceed 1/2 inch
(13 mm) in any direction.
3. Slope: unless otherwise noted on the Drawings not less than 1% fall.
3.20 ADUSTING EXISTING UTILITY FEATURES
A. Adjust existing utility surface features to suit finish grade. Extend or reduce risers, boxes,
chambers, basins and rings and reset castings, frames, grout beds, access doors, lids, covers
and the like.
3.21 MOISTURE CONTROL
A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill layer before
compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.
1. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost
or ice.
2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air-dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that ex-
ceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry
unit weight.
B. Variation of moisture content in fill and backfill material shall be limited to Optimum Mois-
ture (-1% to +3%). Moisture content shall be as uniformly distributed as practicable within
each lift, and shall be adjusted as necessary to obtain the specified compaction.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
EXCAVATION, EARTHWORK, FILLING AND GRADING 315001 - 21
C. Material which does not contain sufficient moisture to be compacted to the specified densi-
ties shall be moisture conditioned by sprinkling, disking, windrowing, or other method ap-
proved by the Architect.
1. Material conditioned by sprinkling shall have water added before compaction. Uni-
formly apply water to surface of subgrade or layer of soil material to obtain sufficient
moisture content. The Contractor shall maintain sufficient hoses and/or water dis-
tributing equipment at the site for this purpose.
D. Material containing excess moisture shall be dried to required Optimum Moisture Content
before it is placed and compacted. Excessively moist soils shall be removed and replaced
or shall be scarified by use of plow, discs, or other approved methods, and air-dried to
meet the above requirements.
E. Materials which are within the moisture requirements specified above, but which display
pronounced elasticity or deformation under the action of earthmoving and compaction
equipment, shall be reduced to Optimum Moisture Content, or below, to secure stability.
F. In the event of sudden downpours or other inclement weather, exposed subgrades and fills
which, in the opinion of the Architect become inundated or excessively moistened, shall
have excess water removed and soil dried as specified above.
F. Backfill stock piles shall be protected from adverse weather conditions.
3.22 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing shall be coordinated with the Owner paid for by the owner.
B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing agency to
perform field quality-control testing.
C. Inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earthwork
only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements.
D. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed
to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing
subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when
approved by Landscape Architect.
E. Test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922,
and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Perform tests at the following locations and frequencies:
1. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill
layer, at least one test for every 2000 sq. ft. (186 sq. m) or less of paved area or building
slab, but in no case fewer than three tests.
2. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least one test for each 100
feet (30 m) or less of wall length, but no fewer than two tests.
3. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least one test for
each 150 feet (46 m) or less of trench length, but no fewer than two tests.
4. Filled Landforms: At subgrade slopes along the shear plane and at each compacted fill
and backfill layer, at least one test for every 2000 sq. ft. (186 sq. m), but in no case fewer
than three tests.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
EXCAVATION, EARTHWORK, FILLING AND GRADING 315001 - 22
F. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of
compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth
required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.
G. Compliance Survey: Conduct a survey of completed Earthwork to show grading compliance.
H. Review by Owner Representative: The Landscape Architect shall review the rough grading
shaping and retains the right to direct adjustments the grading within 2 days of review.
Adjustments that only involve cut to fill without exporting or importing additional material shall be
executed without cost to the Owner.
3.23 PROTECTION
A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep
free of trash and debris.
B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed
surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent
construction operations or weather conditions.
1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Landscape Architect;
reshape and recompact.
C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing,
backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.
1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work,
and eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible.
3.24 DISPOSAL
A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil,
trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property.
3.25 CLEANING UP
Upon completion of the work of this Section, immediately remove all debris and excess earth
materials from the site.
END OF SECTION
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
ASPHALT PAVING 321216 - 1
SECTION 321216 - ASPHALT PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
Attention is directed to the requirements of the printed form of Contract and to Division 1, General
Requirements, of which this section is hereby made a part.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Contractor, Subcontractors, and/or suppliers providing goods or services referenced in or
related to this Section shall also be bound by the Documents identified in Division 01 Section
“Summary”, Paragraph 1.1A, entitled “Related Documents.”
1.3 DESCRIPTION
A. Work by General Contractor
Hot Mix Asphalt pavement, and curbing required for this work is indicated on the drawings
and includes, but is not necessarily limited to:
1. Asphalt Paving
2. Tack Coat
B. Related Work Described Elsewhere
Excavating, Filling & Grading…………………………………………………………........Division 31
Cast in Place Concrete …………………………………..……………….………………...Division 32
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications of Workmen
1. Provide at least one person who shall be thoroughly trained and experienced in the
skills required, be completely familiar with the design and application of the work de-
scribed in this Section, be present at all times during progress of the work of this Sec-
tion, and direct all work performed under this Section.
2. For actual finishing of Hot Mix Asphalt surfaces and operation of the required equip-
ment, use only personnel thoroughly trained and experienced in the skills required.
B. Codes and Reference Standards
1. In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and regulations, comply with refer-
enced portions of Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges, Massachusetts
Department of Transportation (MDOT).
2. Refer to the latest accessibility standards provided by both the State of Massachu-
setts Architectural Access Board and the United States Department of Justice 2010 ADA
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
ASPHALT PAVING 321216 - 2
Standards for Accessible Design, Titles II and III Facilities Americans With Disabilities
Act.
3. The words “Bituminous Concrete” and “Hot Mix Asphalt” shall be used interchangea-
ble and refer to the same product.
C. Referenced Reports and Documentation
1. Existing Ground Survey: A survey for design purposes has been prepared by BDG for
the Owner. The data is made available only for information and not for construction.
Verify accuracy of survey, report any discrepancies and undertake any additional
surveying at no cost to the Owner. Include all costs for variations in material volume
and handling associated within the stated survey accuracy and tolerance.
2. Existing Underground Utility Diagram: A diagram for design purposes has been
prepared for the Owner. The data is made available only for information and not for
construction. Verify accuracy of the diagram, report any discrepancies and undertake
any additional utility locating at no cost to the Owner.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Hot Mix Asphalt job mix: Submission of the job-mix formula for the hot mix asphalt surface
course shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, and it shall be submitted to the Land-
scape Architect for approval 10 days prior to the pavement construction.
B. Shop drawings of the Precast Concrete Curb Segments
1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Protection
Use all means necessary to protect Hot Mix Asphalt pavement materials before, during and
after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades.
B. Replacements
In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the
approval of the Landscape Architect at no additional cost to the Owner.
C. Dust Control
1. Use all means necessary to prevent the spread of dust during performance of the
work of this Section.
2. Thoroughly moisten all surfaces as required to prevent dust being a nuisance to the
public, neighbors and concurrent performance of other work on the job site.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
Asphalt paving is recommended to be constructed with the following layers from top to bottom:
A. Hot Mix Asphalt Top Course: Depth 2” Thick
B. Hot Mix Asphalt Binder: Depth 2” Thick
C. Compacted Gravel Base Course: Depth 15”
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
ASPHALT PAVING 321216 - 3
.
Complete job mix formula, listing quantities and pertinent ingredient properties, shall be submitted to and
approved by the Architect at least two weeks before work is scheduled to begin.
2.01 HOT MIX ASPHALT TOP COURSE
Top or wearing course paving shall have maximum aggregate size passing 1/2 in. sieve, and
bitumen content = 6 1/2% + 1/2% by weight.
2.02 HOT MIX ASPHALT BINDER COURSE
Binder or bottom course paving shall have a maximum aggregate size passing 1 in. sieve, and
bitumen content = 5 1/2% + 1/2% by weight.
2.03 COMPACTED CLEAN GRANULAR FILL
Unless otherwise specified in Division 31 section, “Excavation, Earthwork, Filling, and Grading”,
The gravel base course material shall consist of bankrun gravel conforming to the requirements of
Section 405, Subsection M1.03, Type B, of the State Specification.
2.04 TACK COAT
Bituminous tack coat material shall conform to AASHTO M82.
2.05 TRAFFIC PAINT
Parking space pavement striping conform to Section M7.01.10 and M7.01.07 of the MDOT Specifi-
cations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 Traffic Control:
Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities.
3.02 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Inspection
1. Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades
and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may
properly commence.
2. Verify that Hot Mix Asphalt pavement be installed in strict accordance with the original
design, all pertinent codes and regulation, and all pertinent portions of the referenced
standards.
3. Flag in the field centerline alignments prior to clearing. Notify Landscape Architect for
review. Adjust alignments until the satisfaction of Landscape Architect.
B. Discrepancies
1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Landscape Architect.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
ASPHALT PAVING 321216 - 4
2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies
have been fully resolved.
3.02 EQUIPMENT
A. Compacting Equipment
All equipment for compacting shall be steel-tired power rollers having a minimum weight of
10 tons, except that hand held vibrator compactors may be used in areas not accessible to
rollers where specifically approved in advance by the Owner.
B. Paving Equipment
All equipment for paving shall be spreading, self-propelled asphalt paving machine capable
of maintaining line, grade and minimum surface course thickness specified, with laser grad-
ing sensors for tolerance accuracy.
3.03 PLACEMENT OF BASE COURSE AND SUBBASES
A. Preparation
1. After subgrade has been completed, as described in Division 31 of these Specifica-
tions, and has been approved by the Landscape Architect or Field Engineer, roll the
surface to a smooth and uniform texture free from lumps, rock pockets, soft spots, and
spongy areas.
B. Placement
1. Place the base course and subbase in strict accordance with the Standard Specifica-
tions set forth in the geotechnical report.
4. The base shall be constructed of two courses of gravel. The first course shall be not
less than 1/2 the thickness of the base required when thoroughly compacted. The sec-
ond course shall complete the thickness of base required. Compaction shall be done
with a vibrator compactor.
5. All joints at existing paving shall be sawed vertical butt joints which shall receive a
light coating of asphalt emulsion a short time before new paving commences. Interface
between new and existing pavement shall result in a smooth continuous surface.
C. Compaction
1. Compact the base course to a minimum degree of compaction of 95 percent at opti-
mum moisture content.
2. Roll the base course until entire surface is firm, dense, and free from rock pockets and
mud pads; do not slurry the base course.
3. Water the base course after compaction.
3.04 PLACEMENT OF HOT MIX ASPHALT SURFACING
A. Preparation
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
ASPHALT PAVING 321216 - 5
Hot Mix Asphalt mixtures shall be laid only when surface is free of foreign matter and when
the weather is not foggy or rainy, and further these operations shall be carried on only when
the atmospheric temperature is not less than 40 degrees F in the shade.
B. Placement
Hot Mix Asphalt surfaces shall be placed in two courses with minimum thicknesses shown
on the drawings. The two course placement of the new Hot Mix Asphalt surfaces shall be as
follows:
1. The binder course shall confirm to State Specifications for Binder Course Hot Mix As-
phalt in accordance with job-mix formula, and it shall be constructed in a minimum
thickness shown on the drawings after compaction. The bottom course shall be paral-
lel to the proposed grade of the finished Hot Mix Asphalt surface.
2. The wearing course shall conform to State Specifications for Top Course Bituminous
Concrete in accordance with the job-mix formula, and it shall be constructed to a min-
imum thickness shown on the drawings after compaction. The finished surface shall
conform to proposed grades.
3. All joints at old pavement shall be sawed vertical butt joints which shall receive a light
coating of asphalt emulsion a short time before paving commences, as directed by the
Landscape Architect.
4. Existing areas shall not be disturbed by utility construction.
5. Construction methods shall conform to the Massachusetts Department of Transporta-
tion (MDOT) standards for Hot Mix Asphalt.
6. Submission of the job-mix formula for the Hot Mix Asphalt surface course shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor, and it shall be submitted to the Landscape Architect
for approval 10 days prior to the pavement construction.
7. Establishment of grades, grade control, and conformance to finished pavement sur-
face grade tolerances required shall be the responsibility of the Contractor in accord-
ance with the Drawings and Specifications. See below for finish tolerances.
8. Roll the surface until a smooth and dense texture is obtained, free draining, and free
from any and all birdbaths.
9. Where walls, curbing, or other suitable permanent supports are NOT present, the
Contractor shall secure proper alignment and adequate compaction of the binder and
surface courses as shown on the Contract Drawings and finish all edges with a neat
tamped edge.
10. Alternatively contractor may saw cut edges straight and clean.
11. All edging, cobblestones, curbing, granite, or other abutting materials shall be
“masked” utilizing cardboard tape, craft paper, or plastic to prevent the possible over-
sprays of asphalt during the work process.
12. No vehicular traffic of any kind shall be allowed to pass over the newly finished sur-
face until it has had time to set. Twelve (12) hours will be considered sufficient time for
the pavement to set in most cases, but this period may be extended by the Engineer
as required by weather or other reasons.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
ASPHALT PAVING 321216 - 6
13. Contractor to remove all overspills of subbase, and paving materials from adjacent
lawn and planting areas.
14. Prior to placing topsoil, contractor to provide landscape architect 14 days notice for in-
spection of subgrade and review of paving edge.
3.05 TRAFFIC STRIPING
A. Traffic paint materials, equipment, methods of placement, and precautions to be observed
as to weather, condition of surface, etc., shall conform to MDOT Specifications for traffic
striping first class road work. Striping shall not begin until all asphalt surfaces have cured for
a minimum of 14 days.
B. Striping patterns shall conform to the layout shown on the Drawings. Transverse striping of
handicap pathways shall be on 4 in. x 12 in. stripe to space ratio.
C. Strip width shall be the standard 4 inches except wheelchair symbols which shall be as de-
tailed in the 1978 Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices. The wheelchair symbols shall
be painted in spaces shown on the drawings.
3.06 FINISH TOLERANCES
A. Hot Mix Asphalt Surface
Plus or minus 0.01 feet at any point from line grade shown on the Drawings.
3.07 REMEDIAL MEASURES
A. Upon direction of the Landscape Architect, cut out, and/or rework all surfaces and sub-
grade areas which do not meet the requirements of this Section; perform all remedial
measures at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.08 SPECIAL CONDITIONS
A. Work shall be properly coordinated with the work of other trades. Other trades shall be con-
sulted in advance so that proper provisions may be made for installation of their work and so
that the work of this section may be properly finished and connected to the work of other
trades.
3.09 GUARANTEE
Contractor shall guarantee all workmanship for a period of one year from the date of final ac-
ceptance.
3.10 CLEAN-UP
A. Clean-up residual materials associated with installation. Remove masking of adjacent mate-
rials carefully to prevent spilling on abutting areas.
END OF SECTION
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE PAVING 321300 - 1
SECTION 321300 - CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT PROVISIONS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE
The General Provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1, apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
The Contractor, Subcontractors, and/or suppliers providing goods or services referenced in or
related to this Section shall also be bound by the Documents identified in Division 01 Section
“Summary”, Paragraph 1.1A, entitled “Related Documents.”
1.3 DESCRIPTION
A. Work Included
Cast-in-place concrete required for this Work is indicated on the Drawings and includes, but
is not necessarily limited to:
1. Concrete Paving
2. Cast in Place Concrete Walks
3. Concrete footings for stairs, slabs, posts, and utility structures.
4. ADA Detectable Warning Strips
B. Related Work Described Elsewhere
Excavation Earthwork Filling and Grading……………………..………….…………Division 31
Asphalt Paving…….…………………………...…………………..……….…………..Division 32
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications for Workmen
1. Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during execution of this
portion of the Work, shall be thoroughly trained and experienced in placing the types
of concrete specified, and shall direct all Work under this Section.
2. For finishing of exposed surfaces of the concrete, use only thoroughly trained and ex-
perienced journeymen concrete finishers.
B. Codes and Standards
1. In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and regulations, comply with all perti-
nent recommendations of "Structural Concrete for Builders", publication ACI 301-66 of
the American Concrete Institute.
2. Refer to the latest accessibility standards provided by both the State of Massachu-
setts Architectural Access Board and the United States Department of Justice 2010
ADA Standards for Accessible Design, Titles II and III Facilities Americans With Disa-
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE PAVING 321300 - 2
bilities Act. and Access Board Proposed Guidelines for Public Streets and Sidewalks
2011 proposed changes
3. Where provisions of pertinent codes and standards conflict with these Specifications,
the more stringent provisions shall govern.
C. Referenced Reports and Documentation
1. Existing Ground Survey: A survey for design purposes has been prepared for the
Owner. The data is made available only for information and not for construction.
Verify accuracy of survey, report any discrepancies and undertake any additional
surveying at no cost to the Owner. Include all costs for variations in material volume
and handling associated within the stated survey accuracy and tolerance.
2. Existing Underground Utility Diagram: A diagram for design purposes has been
prepared for the Owner. The data is made available only for information and not for
construction. Verify accuracy of the diagram, report any discrepancies and undertake
any additional utility locating at no cost to the Owner.
D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project Site.
1. Review methods and procedures related to decorative concrete paving, including but
not limited to, the following:
2. Concrete mixture design.
3. Quality control of concrete materials and decorative concrete paving construction
practices.
4. Snow removal procedures and application of urea instead of salt based deicing
materials.
5. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with decorative concrete
paving to attend, including the following:
a. Contractor's superintendent.
b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures.
c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer.
d. Concrete paving Installer.
e. Manufacturer's representative of decorative concrete paving system.
1.6 DEFINITIONS
A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blend-
ed hydraulic cement, expansive hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granu-
lated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume.
B. Expansion Joints: Joints used to prevent damage from differential movements. Used at regu-
lar intervals in pavement to relieve compressive stresses that may develop in very hot weather.
Appropriate Use when:
1. Pavement is divided into long panels (60 feet or more) without contraction joints
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE PAVING 321300 - 3
2. Pavement is constructed when ambient temperatures are below 40 degrees F.
3. The Pavement is constructed with aggregates that have high expansion characteristics
C. Isolation Joints: Joints reduce stresses that develop where differential movement between
the pavement and structure may take place. These are full depth, full width joints often found
at bridge abutments, intersections, and in-pavement structures, such as drainage inlets, man-
holes, footings, and lighting structures. They are also placed adjacent to existing pavements,
especially when it is not possible or desirable to match joint locations in older pavement.
D. Control Joints: Joints used to control the natural cracking caused by shrinkage and reductions
in temperature.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Materials List
Within 15 days after award of Contract and before any concrete is poured on the job site,
submit to the Landscape Architect the name and address of transit-mix concrete sup plier.
B. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated.
C. Design Mixes: For each concrete pavement mix. Include alternate mix designs when char-
acteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances war-
rant adjustments.
D. Samples: 10-lb (4.5-kg) sample of exposed aggregate.
E. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test re-
sults for compliance of the following with requirements indicated, based on comprehensive
testing of current materials:
F. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following materials
complies with requirements:
1. Cementitious materials and aggregates.
2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories.
3. Fiber reinforcement.
4. Admixtures.
5. Curing compounds.
6. Applied finish materials.
7. Joint fillers.
G. Transit-Mix Deliver Slip
1. Keep a record at the job site showing time and place of each pour of concrete, to-
gether with transit-mix delivery slip certifying contents of the pour.
2. Make a record available to the Landscape Architect for his inspection upon request.
3. Upon completion of this portion of the Work, deliver the record and the delivery slips
to the Landscape Architect.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE PAVING 321300 - 4
1.8 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Protection
Use all means necessary to protect cast-in-place concrete materials before, during and after
installation, and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. Contractor to
make every effort to conduct concrete pours in early morning hours to allow sufficient time
for hardening. Scratches and graffiti will not be approved or accepted.
B. Replacements
In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the
approval of the Landscape Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed pavement work similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in
construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete products complying with
ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment.
1. Manufacturer must be certified according to the National Ready-Mix Concrete
Association's Plant Certification Program.
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing
indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from
the same manufacturer's plant and each aggregate from one source.
E. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," ACI 302.1
“Guide for floor & slab construction” unless modified by the requirements of the Contract
Documents.
F. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material
evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes. Coordinate independent agency with owner.
G. Mockups: Cast mockups of full-size sections of concrete pavement to demonstrate typical
joints, surface finish, texture, color, and standard of workmanship for each pavement type.
1. Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Landscape Architect.
2. For colored concrete, allow time for review after 28 curing period,
3. For sandblasted finishes, split mock up areas into three 2' x 4' areas with specified
sandblasting in middle zone and with a heavier and lighter version of specified
sandblasting in other two zones.
4. Notify Landscape Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will
be constructed.
5. Obtain Landscape Architect's approval of mockups before starting construction.
6. Maintain approved mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a
standard for judging the completed pavement.
7. Demolish and remove approved mockups from the site when directed by Landscape
Architect.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE PAVING 321300 - 5
8. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
H. Before submitting design mixes, review concrete pavement mix design and examine procedures
for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Coordinate representatives of each entity directly
concerned with concrete pavement, including but not limited to the following:
1. Contractor's superintendent.
2. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixes.
3. Ready-mix concrete producer.
4. Admixture manufacturer.
5. Concrete subcontractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE
A. General
All concrete, unless otherwise specifically permitted by the Landscape Architect, shall be
transit-mixed in accordance with ASTM C-94. Concrete for flatwork shall be Class D. Con-
crete for wall and footings shall be Class A. Color is subject to approval by the Landscape
Architect.
B. Quality
1. All concrete shall have the following minimum compressive strengths at 28 days and
shall be proportioned within the following limits:
EXTERIOR SLABS
LOCATION OF CONCRETE & SITE WORK
Min. psi @ 28 days 3500
Max. size of aggregate 3/4 inch
Min. sacks of cement/CY 5.50
Max. slump in inches 3” Max
Air Entrainment 6% +/- 1.5%
2. Concrete that is subject to freezing temperatures while wet shall have a water-cement
ratio not exceeding six gallons per sack and shall contain entrained air.
C. Cement
All cement shall be Portland cement conforming to ASTM C-150, Type I, and shall be the
product of one manufacturer. The temperature of cement delivered to the plant shall not ex-
ceed 150 deg. F. Color shall match existing concrete.
D. Aggregates
1. All aggregates shall conform to ASTM C-33-71, except as modified herein.
2. When used as a fine aggregate for cement concrete, sand shall be composed essen-
tially of clean, hard, strong, durable, and impermeable particles resistant to wear and
frost, inert to cement and water, reasonably free from structurally weak grains, organic
matter, loam, clay, silt, salts, mica, or other fine materials that my affect bonding of the
cement paste. Sand shall be taken from a natural deposit and shall be relatively
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE PAVING 321300 - 6
spherical in shape and shall have gritty surfaces. The sieve analysis of the sand shall
show it to be well graded and conforming to the following table.
Size of Percent by Weight Percent Passing
Sieve Minimum Maximum
3/8" 100 ---
#4 95 100
#16 55 80
#50 10 25
#100 2 8
#200 0 2
3. Coarse aggregate for cement concrete shall consist of crushed rock or screened
gravel and shall be composed essentially of clean, hard, strong, and impermeable
particles, resistant to wear and frost, and free from deleterious amounts of organic
matter, loam, clay, salts, mica, and soft, thin, elongated, laminated or disintegrated
stone, and it shall be inert to water and cement.
Where finishing of the concrete is to be done by hammering or any other method that
breaks the surface of the concrete, only crushed rock shall be used for coarse aggre-
gate.
When tested by U.S. Standard laboratory sieves, coarse aggregate for cement con-
crete shall be blended from stone sizes to meet the gradation requirements for each
designation listed of variation for general application and are minimum and maximum
in each case. To insure uniformity of material used on any one job or project, the
range of variation may be reduced to 1/2 of the master range upon determination of
the character and source of the materials that the Contractor proposes to furnish.
Designation No. C-1 No. C-2 No. C-3
Nominal Size 1 1/2" 3/4" 3/8"
Sieve Size | Min. Max. | Min. Max. | Min. Max.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 1/2 inch | 90 100 | -- -- | -- --
3/4 inch | 35 60 | 90 100 | -- --
1/2 inch | -- -- | -- -- | 90 100
3/8 inch | 10 25 | 20 50 | 30 70
No. 4 | 0 5 | 0 10 | 0 15
No. 8 | -- -- | 0 5 | 0 5
E. Water
All water shall be clean and free from deleterious matter.
2.02 CONCRETE MIXES
Cement concrete shall be composed of specified proportions by weight of cement, aggregates,
water and additives to form a homogeneous composition. Cement concrete shall be specified ac-
cording to the classification defined in the following table. The classes of concrete to be used shall
be designated on the plans or in the Specifications for the particular work.
A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M), for each type and
strength of normal-weight concrete, and as determined by either laboratory trial mixtures or field
experience.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE PAVING 321300 - 7
1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed
concrete design mixtures for the trial batch method.
B. Typical Proportion mixtures to provide normal-weight concrete with the following properties:
1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4000psi (concrete walks);
2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.50
3. Slump Limit: [4 inches (100 mm)], plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
C. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in normal-weight
concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows:
1. Air Content: [2-1/2] percent plus or minus 1.5 percent for 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) nominal
maximum aggregate size.
2. Air Content: [6] percent plus or minus 1.5 percent for 1-inch (25-mm) nominal maximum
aggregate size.
3. Air Content: [6] percent plus or minus 1.5 percent for 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal
maximum aggregate size.
D. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to [0.15] percent by weight of
cement.
CLASSIFICATION OF CONCRETE MIXES
Min. Min. 28 Days Coarse Maximum
Class Cement Compressive Aggregate Aggregate % Air
Concrete Strength* Designation Size
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
A 560#/CY 3000 psi C-1 1 1/2" 4.5
B 500#/CY 2500 psi C-1 1 1/2" 4.5
C 440#/CY 2000 psi C-1 1 1/2" 4.5
D 620#/CY 3000 psi C-2 3/4" 5.0
DE 680#/CY 3500 psi C-2 3/4" 6.0
E 720#/CY 3000 psi C-3 3/8" 7.0
F 610#/CY 3500 psi C-1 1 1/2" 6.0
* As evaluated under ASTM C94-74.
All mixes above used for the Work will conform to one or more of the above mixes. Prior to actual
mixing, the Contractor shall submit design mixes for each mix to the Landscape Architect for ap-
proval, as mentioned on the Plans or in the Special Provisions.
2.03 ADMIXTURES
All concrete exposed to the weather shall be air-entrained. Admixtures other than those required
for air entrainment shall be approved by the Engineer.
Chemical Admixtures: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admix-
tures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious
material.
A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
B. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A
C. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D
D. Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type E.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE PAVING 321300 - 8
2.04 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled
content not less than [25] percent.
B. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, fabricated from as-drawn
steel wire into flat sheets.
C. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420); deformed.
D. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184/A 184M; with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420),
deformed bars; assembled with clips.
E. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M, as drawn.
F. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420) plain-steel bars. Cut bars
true to length with ends square and free of burrs.
G. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and
fastening reinforcing bars, welded wire reinforcement, and dowels in place. Manufacture
bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic,
or precast concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete specified, and as
follows:
1. Equip wire bar supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will
not support chair legs.
2.05 EXPANSION AND ISOLATION JOINTS
1. Isolation joints should be constructed with preformed joint filler material to prevent infiltration
of incompressible filler—such incompressible items that would affect the compressibility of the
joint include common materials such as sand, dirt, or other debris.
a. Joints should never be less than ½ inch wide, with ½ to 1 inch being the recommend-
ed width.
b. Joint filler should extend the full length of the slab and be cut to 3/8 of an inch below
the slab after concrete has cured.
c. Concrete should not extend over, under, through, around, or between filler sections.
2. Expansion and isolation joints shall be 3/8" x 4" preformed ethylene vinyl acetate or closed
cell polyethylene foam material. Hold joint filler material down a sufficient distance to allow for
the installation of retainer and sealant. Refer to details on drawings and the sealant manufac-
turer's standard instructions.
a. Expansion Joints to be used at regular intervals of 50 feet, unless a closer interval is
indicated on plans or details.
2.06 JOINT SEALANT
At all construction and expansion joints, joint sealant shall be gray in color as:
A. "790 Building Sealant" by Dow Corning;
B. "Rubber Caulk 230 Sealant" by Products Research Chemical Corp.;
B. "Perma-Joint", two component polyditremzene sealant by Tremco, or approved equal.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE PAVING 321300 - 9
2.07 SEALANT RETAINER
Sealant retainer shall be closed cell polythele foam cord by the following manufacturers:
A. Progress Unlimited Inc., New York City, NY;
B. Dow Chemical Co., Midland, MI;
C. Products Research Corp., Glouster City, NJ, or approved equal.
2.08 CONCRETE CURE + SEALER
A. V-Seal 102 Penetrating Sealer for exterior applications is a High-tech specially formulated
concrete sealer and curing agent that contains an enhanced penetrating, inorganic, potassium
siliconate modified material which forms a molecular bond with concrete. Substrates sealed with
V-SEAL® 102 become stronger, moisture repellent and resistant to stains from oil, gas, grease,
salts and other damaging fluids. While blocking liquids, V-SEAL®102 allows entrapped water
vapors to escape at an optimum rate which facilitates a more productive curing cycle and fortifies
the substrate against repeated freeze/thaw cycles. V-SEAL® 102 will wear out only when the
substrate itself wears away to the lowest penetration of the sealer.
B. V-SEAL® 102 meets ASTM 309 and 1315 for curing concrete.
C. V-SEAL® 102 contains film forming polymers for enhanced salt and freeze/thaw protection.
D. Apply with low-pressure spray.
E. Flat Finish
F. Color: Milky/opaque but dries clear
G. Spread Rate 200-300 sq ft / gallon
H. Drying time 3-5 hours
2.09 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Joint Fillers: [ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork] in preformed strips.
B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene
butadiene.
c. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881/C 881M, two-component epoxy resin capable of humid
curing and bonding to damp surfaces; of class suitable for application temperature, of grade
complying with requirements, and of the following types:
1. [Types IV and V, load bearing], for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened
concrete.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE PAVING 321300 - 10
2.10 OTHER MATERIALS
All other materials not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation of
cast-in-place concrete shall be as selected by the Contractor, subject to the approval of the Land-
scape Architect.
2.11 ADA Detectable Warning Strips
2’ x 3’ ADA Detectable Warning Strips meeting MAAB’s requirements for truncated domes.
Color: Dark Grey Color
Basis of Design, ADA Sign Depot or approved equal
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01 Traffic Control:
Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities.
3.02 Equipment:
Equipment and tools necessary for performing all parts of the work shall be satisfactory as to de-
sign, capacity and mechanical condition for the purposes intended, and any equipment which is
not maintained in full working order, or which as used by the Contractor is proven inadequate to
obtain the results prescribed, shall be repaired, improved, replaced, or supplemented to obtain
the progress and workmanship contemplated by the Contract.
3.03 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Inspection
1. Prior to all Work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades
and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may
properly commence.
2. Verify that all items to be embedded in concrete are in place.
3. Thoroughly wet the forms (except in freezing weather) or oil them; remove all standing
water.
4. Thoroughly clean all transporting and handling equipment.
a. Examine exposed subgrades and subbase surfaces for compliance for dimen-
sional, grading, and elevation tolerances.
b. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface below [decorative concrete paving] to iden-
tify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding.
c. Completely proof-roll subbase in one direction [and repeat in perpendicular di-
rection]. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph (5 km/h).
d. Proof-roll with a pneumatic-tired and loaded, 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck
weighing not less than 15 tons (13.6 tonnes).
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE PAVING 321300 - 11
5. Correct subbase with soft spots and areas of pumping or rutting exceeding depth of [1/2 inch
(13 mm)] according to materials and methods outline in specification Excavation Filling and
Grading Division 31.
6. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Forms
1. Side forms and transverse forms for sidewalks shall be smooth, free from warp, of suffi-
cient strength to resist springing out of shape, of a depth to conform to the thickness of
the proposed walk, and of a type satisfactory to the Landscape Architect.
a. All mortar or dirt shall be completely removed from forms that have been
previously used. The forms shall be well staked and thoroughly braced and set to
the established lines with their upper edge conforming to the grade of the finished
walk which shall have a sufficient pitch to the edge of the walk to provide for
surface drainage, as shown on the drawings, 2% cross-slope typical.
b. All forms shall be oiled before placing concrete.
C. Notification
Notify the Landscape Architect at least 48 hours before placing the concrete.
3.03 CONCRETE MIXING
1. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete
according to ASTM C 94/C 94M[ and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M]. Furnish batch
certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work.
a. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce
mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is
above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
2. Project-Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according
to ASTM C 94/C 94M. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch machine
mixer.
a. For concrete batches of 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) or smaller, continue mixing at least
1-1/2 minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before
any part of batch is released.
b. For concrete batches larger than 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m), increase mixing time by 15
seconds for each additional 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m).
c. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating
Project identification name and number, date, mixture type, mixing time, quantity,
and amount of water added.
3.04 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Method
1. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing
concrete.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE PAVING 321300 - 12
2. Protect adjacent construction from discoloration and spillage during application of col-
or hardeners, release agents, stains, curing compounds, and sealers.
3. Convey concrete from mixer to place of final deposit by methods that will prevent
separation and loss of materials.
4. For chuting, pumping, and pneumatically conveying concrete, use only equipment of
such size and design as to ensure a practically continuous flow of concrete at the de-
livery end without loss or separation of materials.
5. Deposit concrete as nearly as possible in its final position to avoid segregation due to
rehandling and flowing.
a. Place concrete as dry as possible consistent with good workmanship, never
exceeding the maximum specified slump.
6. Do not use retempered concrete or concrete that has been contaminated by foreign
materials.
B. Rate of Placement
1. Place concrete at such a rate that concrete is at all times plastic and flows readily be-
tween bare bars.
2. When placing is started, carry it on as a continuous operation until placement of the
panel or section is complete.
3. Do not pour an area at one time that cannot be finished without checking; this is par-
ticularly important during hot or dry weather.
4. Do not, in any case, pour a slab greater than 18 feet without construction joints.
5. Exterior pavement slabs shall be placed in alternating sections not exceeding 18 feet
in length.
C. Compaction
1. Thoroughly consolidate all concrete by suitable means during placement, working it
around all embedded fixtures and into corners of forms.
2. During placement, thoroughly compact the concrete by hand tamping and by mechan-
ical vibration.
D. Steel Reinforcement
1. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and
supporting reinforcement.
2. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing
materials.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE PAVING 321300 - 13
3. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position
during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement.
4. Install welded wire reinforcement in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces
at least one full mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to
prevent continuous laps in either direction.
5. Install fabricated bar mats in lengths as long as practicable. Handle units to keep them
flat and free of distortions. Straighten bends, kinks, and other irregularities, or replace
units as required before placement. Set mats for a minimum 2-inch (50-mm) overlap to
adjacent mats.
3.04 JOINTS
A. General: Form construction, isolation, expansion, and contraction joints and tool edges true
to line,
with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
B. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline unless otherwise indicated.
C. When joining adjacent paving, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints
unless
otherwise indicated.
D. Lay out: Coordinate lay out of joints to maintain intent of jointing pattern as instructed by the
Landscape Architect.
E. TYPES OF JOINTS SPECIFICALLY
1. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of paving
and at locations where paving operations are stopped for more than one-half hour unless
paving terminates at isolation joints.
d. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do
not continue reinforcement through sides of pavement strips, unless otherwise
indicated.
e. Provide tie bars at sides of pavement strips where indicated.
f. Location: Make and locate construction joints so as to not impair the strength of
the structure.
g. Approval: Obtain Landscape Architect’s approval of location of all control joints and
construction joints in the Work prior to the start of concrete placement.
2. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete
into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-
fourth of the concrete thickness, as follows:
a. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and
finishing each edge of joint with groover tool to the following radius. Repeat
grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover
marks on concrete surfaces.
i. Radius: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE PAVING 321300 - 14
ii. Radius: 3/8 inch (10 mm).
b. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof
abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) wide joints into
concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface
and before developing random contraction cracks.
3. Expansion Joints:
a. Typical placement: Locate expansion joints at intervals of 40 feet (12.192 m),
unless otherwise indicated
.
4. Isolation Joints : Isolation joints shall be placed against buildings, around street
light footings, or as directed by the Landscape Architect. They shall be a preformed foam
material with joint sealant identical to the approved expansion joints.
a. Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch
basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed objects, and where
indicated.
1. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint.
2. Terminate joint filler less than 1/2 inch (12 mm) or more than 1
inch (25 mm) below finished surface if joint sealant is indicated.
3. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint
sealant is not indicated.
4. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one
length is required, lace or clip joint-filler sections together.
5. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with
metal, plastic, or other temporary preformed cap. Remove
protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of
joint.
4. Butt Joints: Use [bonding agent] [epoxy bonding adhesive] at joint locations where
fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.
5. Keyed Joints: Provide preformed keyway-section forms or bulkhead forms with
keys unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into con-
crete.
6. Dowelled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indi-
cated. Lubricate or coat with asphalt one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete
bonding to one side of joint.
a. Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate
or asphalt-coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side
of joint.
b. Edging: Tool edges of pavement, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete after
initial floating with an edging tool to the following radius. Repeat tooling of edges
after applying surface finishes. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE PAVING 321300 - 15
i. Radius: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
ii. Radius: 3/8 inch (10 mm).
3.05 LEVELING AND FINISHING
A. General
1. Tamp slabs with a jitterbug to depress the rock and then pushfloat with a bullfloat as
necessary.
2. Take care that the wet slab meets the screeds accurately and does not rise above or
lower below them.
3. Carefully provide slab depressions as required for the finishes indicated on the Draw-
ings.
B. Finishing
1. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations.
2. No finishing operation shall be performed while free water is present. Finishing opera-
tions shall be delayed until all bled water and water sheen has left the surface and the
concrete has started to stiffen.
3. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has
disappeared and concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float
surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to
power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots.
Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture.
4. Any honeycombed areas occurring either along the front or back of curb shall be pointed
with mortar with Portland Cement mortar according to the State of Massachusetts
specifications.
5. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, make all slabs even and uniform in ap-
pearance, and where no slope is required, level within plus or minus 1/8" in 10'.
6. Score lines shall be as shown on the plans. Depth of scoring shall be 1/4 inch deep.
7. After edging and jointing operations, the surface shall be floated with a wood float.
Immediately following floating, the surface shall be steel troweled.
8. Edging: After initial floating, tool edges of paving, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete
with an edging tool to a [1/4-inch (6-mm)] radius. Repeat tooling of edges after
applying surface finishes. Eliminate edging tool marks on concrete surfaces.
C. Exterior Finishes
Where "broom finish" is indicated on the Drawings and where no other exterior slab finish is
indicated on the Drawings, finish the exposed concrete surface by lightly combing with a
medium stiff broom after troweling is complete.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE PAVING 321300 - 16
3.06 CURING
A. During the entire period the concrete is being placed, cured and hardened, the Contractor
shall provide protection to the concrete from damage by underground water, rain, frost, or
sun in a manner satisfactory to the Landscape Architect. An approved curing method
providing full saturation and protection of the concrete against drying shall be performed for
a minimum period of three days.
B. In cold weather (below 50 deg. F), concrete placing shall be done only within properly built
enclosures capable of retaining heat or without such structures if the temperature is above
50 deg. F. The temperature within these enclosures must reach 65 deg. F before placement
of concrete may begin. Only those openings required for the proper placing of concrete will
be allowed in the enclosure. After the conclusion of concrete placement, the minimum tem-
perature within the enclosure shall be 50 deg. F for a five day period and 65 deg. F for a
three day period. The method of heating shall in no way cause a reduction in the available
water content of the concrete.
a. In hot and dry weather and as directed, all new concrete shall be kept shaded from the
sun, shielded from the wind, kept wet with water, or protected by other approved methods
to retain moisture in the concrete throughout the curing period. Manual wetting down of a
particular area shall cause the area to be continually wet and not allow periods of drying to
occur. Plastic roll material or impregnated paper may be utilized during the installation of
the concrete, and must be thoroughly wetted at least once each day. These materials are
to be placed as soon as possible upon the completion of finishing of concrete in such a
fashion that the surface will not be damaged or disturbed.
b. All curing methods employed shall be practical for the curing situation involved, and all
methods shall be subject to the approval of the Landscape Architect. No curing
compounds of any kind shall be permitted, unless approved by the Landscape Architect.
3.07 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
1. Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, steel reinforcement,
and items to be embedded or cast-in.
2. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and steel reinforcement before placing
concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces.
3. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed.
Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required
finish elevation and alignment.
4. Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and
placing concrete.
5. Do not add water to concrete during delivery or at Project site. Do not add water to fresh
concrete after testing.
6. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do
not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE PAVING 321300 - 17
7. Consolidate concrete according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M)by mechanical vibrating
equipment supplemented by hand spading, rodding, or tamping.
8. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an
internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies [, reinforcement,] or side
forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand spreading and consolidation.
Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating [reinforcement] [dowels] [and] joint
devices.
9. Screed paving surface with a straightedge and strike off.
10. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open-textured and
uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface.
Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or
spreading surface treatments.
3.08 COLD WEATHER REQUIREMENTS
A. Cold-Weather Placement: Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength
that could be caused by frost, freezing, or low temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 and the
following:
1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C),
uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture
temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C)
at point of placement.
2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow.
3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or
chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in design mixtures.
3.09 HOT WEATHER REQUIREMENTS
A. Placement
1. Do not use concrete with a placing temperature that will cause difficulty from loss of
slump, flash set or cold joints.
2. Maintain a concrete temperature during placement of less than 90 deg. F.
3. Use all means necessary to avoid drying the concrete prior to finishing operations.
Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32
deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control
temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated in total amount of mixing
water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.
4. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed
ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.
5. Fog-spray forms[, steel reinforcement,] and subgrade just before placing concrete.
Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
B. Protection
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE PAVING 321300 - 18
1. Provide and use all required raincovers, sunshades, fog sprays, and other devices to
protect the concrete.
2. When rain appears imminent, all paving operations shall stop, and all available per-
sonnel shall begin placing forms against the sides of the pavement and covering the
surface of the unhardened concrete with the protective covering.
3. The Contractor shall have on hand at the paving site sufficient burlap, plastic, or paper
to cover at least 6,000 square feet of freshly laid pavement as a protection against
sudden thundershowers or heavy downpours of rain.
4. Any part of the pavement damaged by pedestrian traffic or other causes occurring pri-
or to its final acceptance shall be repaired or replaced by and at the expense of the
Contractor, in a manner satisfactory to the Landscape Architect. The Contractor shall
protect the pavement against both public traffic and the traffic caused by his own em-
ployees and agents. The pavement shall be so protected until the beam test shows a
strength of at least 550 pounds per square inch or a minimum of 7 days.
3.10 SEALER
A. Clear Acrylic Sealer: Apply uniformly in two coats in continuous operations according to
manufacturer's written instructions. Allow first coat to dry before applying second coat, at 90
degrees to the direction of the first coat using same application methods and rates.
1. Begin sealing dry surface no sooner than [14] days after concrete placement.
2. Avoid installation within rain or freezing conditions within 5 hours. Apply by low pressure
spray with medium saturation, being careful not to over apply.
3. Clean surface of dirt, debris, mildew, oil, grease and other contaminants. If concrete is
heavily troweled (smooth/tight) it may require acid etch to increase porosity.
4. Avoid vehicle traffic and foot traffic for a minimum of 8 hours.
5. Thoroughly mix slip-resistance-enhancing additive into sealer before applying sealer
according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stir sealer occasionally during
application to maintain even distribution of additive.
6. Use soap and water to clean up after applying. Avoid contact with glass, plastic, windows,
and lenses.
3.11 PAVING TOLERANCES
A. Comply with tolerances in ACI 117 and as follows:
a. Elevation: 3/4 inch (19 mm).
b. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch (10 mm), minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).
c. Surface: Gap below 10-foot- (3-m-) long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/2
inch (13 mm).
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE PAVING 321300 - 19
d. Lateral Alignment and Spacing of Dowels: 1 inch (25 mm).
e. Vertical Alignment of Dowels: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
f. Alignment of Dowel-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Paving Edge: 1/4 inch
per 12 inches (6 mm per 300 mm) of dowel.
g. Joint Spacing: 3 inches (75 mm).
h. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch (6 mm), no minus.
i. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch (3 mm), no minus.
3.20 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspection agency to sample
materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement according to
requirements specified in this Article.
B. Testing Services: Testing shall be performed according to the following requirements:
1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: Representative samples of fresh concrete shall be obtained
according to ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94.
2. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each compressive-strength test, but
not less than one test for each day's pour of each type of concrete. Additional tests will be
required when concrete consistency changes.
3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each compressive-strength test, but
not less than one test for each day's pour of each type of air-entrained concrete.
4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4.4
deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each set of
compressive-strength specimens.
5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; one set of four standard cylinders for
each compressive-strength test, unless otherwise indicated. Cylinders shall be molded and
stored for laboratory-cured test specimens unless field-cured test specimens are required.
6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour of each concrete
class exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m), plus one set for each
additional 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m). One specimen shall be tested at 7 days and two specimens at
28 days; one specimen shall be retained in reserve for later testing if required.
7. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for a given
class of concrete, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or
from each batch if fewer than five are used.
8. When total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m), Landscape
Architect may waive compressive-strength testing if adequate evidence of satisfactory strength
is provided.
9. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured
cylinders, current operations shall be evaluated and corrective procedures shall be provided for
protecting and curing in-place concrete.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE PAVING 321300 - 20
10. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three
consecutive compressive-strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength
and no individual compressive-strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by
more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa).
C. Test results shall be reported in writing to Landscape Architect, concrete manufacturer, and
Contractor within 24 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain
Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing
agency, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in pavement, design compressive
strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength,
and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.
D. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be
permitted by Landscape Architect but will not be used as the sole basis for approval or rejection.
E. Additional Tests: Testing agency shall make additional tests of the concrete when test
results indicate slump, air entrainment, concrete strengths, or other requirements have not been
met, as directed by Landscape Architect. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine
adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as
directed.
3.12 DEFECTIVE WORK
A. Inspection
1. Immediately after forms have been removed, inspect all concrete surfaces and patch
all pour joints, voids, rock pockets, and other imperfections before the concrete is
thoroughly dry.
2. Do not patch until concrete has been inspected by the Landscape Architect.
B. Patching
1. Minor Defective Areas
a. Chip away to a depth of about one inch, leaving edges perpendicular to the sur-
face. Wet the area to be patched and a space of at least 6" wide around it to
prevent water being absorbed out of the mortar.
b. Coat the area to be patched with a cement wash consisting of neat cement and
a solution of one part "Konset", or equal approved by the Landscape Architect,
to four parts water; apply patching mortar immediately.
c. Patching mortar shall consist of one part cement to three parts water to a con-
sistency as dry as is possible within the requirements of handling and placing;
thoroughly compact the mortar by ramming it into place.
d. Screed off so as to leave the patch slightly higher than surrounding surfaces;
leave undisturbed for a period of 1-2 hours to permit initial shrinkage, and then
perform final finishing.
e. Finish the patch to match adjacent surfaces and keep wet for at least seven
days; provide and install all required protective coverings.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE PAVING 321300 - 21
2. Major Defective Areas
If the defects are serious or affect the strength of the structure or if patching does not
satisfactorily restore the quality and appearance of the surface, the Architect may re-
quire the concrete to be removed and replaced, completely in accordance with the
provisions of this Section, at no additional cost to the Owner.
a. Remove and replace concrete paving that is broken or damaged or does not comply
with requirements in this Section. Remove work in complete sections from joint to
joint unless otherwise approved by Architect.
b. Protect concrete paving from damage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least 14 days
after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as clean as
possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.
c. Maintain concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material.
Sweep paving not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Comple-
tion inspections.
3.13 COMPENSATION
Measurement -- All work relating to paving and surfacing as described in this Section and on the
Contract Drawings shall be measured complete-in-place. In addition to the paving and surfacing
items, related work including excavation, grading, gravel base course and compaction shall be paid
for in this Section.
3.14 WASTE MANAGEMENT
A. Separate and dispose of waste in accordance with the Project’s Waste Management Plan.
3.15 CLEANING
Clean all adjacent surfaces of Concrete materials prior to drying. Protect Accessible Warning strips
from spillage, tracking, or migration of cementitious materials onto the face of accessible strips.
Remove all spills and cementitious materials from adjacent lawn and planting areas. Schedule
review with Landscape Architect 14 days prior to placing topsoil to inspect subgrade.
3.16 DEICING MATERIALS
Coordinate with the Owner and Landscape Architect Deicing Materials to be used within the first
year of concrete’s installation in order to minimize the amount of freeze thaw cycles the newly
formed concrete undergoes.
END OF SECTION
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
SITE IMPROVEMENTS 322000 - 1
SECTION 322000 - SITE IMPROVEMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
Attention is called to the requirements of the printed Form of Contract and to Division 1 - General
Requirements, of which this section is hereby made a part.
1.02 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and perform all operations necessary for completion
of the work of this section as shown on the Drawings, as herein specified and as evidently
required to properly complete the following items:
1. Benches
2. Covered Bike Shelter
3. Tree Grates
4. Wood Framed Shelter
5. Playground Equipment
6. Poured-in-Place Surfacing
7. Wood Fiber Surfacing
1.03 RELATED WORK DESCRIBED ELSEWHERE
Cast-in-place Concrete …………...……….....Division 32
1.04 Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchor bolts to be cast in concrete
footings, and/or installed in paving.
1.05 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) for Metals
1. ASTM A-666 Stainless Steel Strip
2. ASTM A-269 Stainless Steel Tubing
3. ASTM A-967 Standard for Chemical Passivation for Stainless Steel
4. ANSI/NAAMM- MBG-531-09 Metal Bar Grating Manual
5. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
or Zinc-Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
6. ASTM B117 - Practice for Operating Salt-Spray (Fog) Apparatus.
7. ASTM D523 - Test Method for Specular Gloss
8. ASTM D714 - Test Method for Evaluating Degree of Blistering in Paint.
9. ASTM D822 - Practice for Conducting Tests on Paint and Related Coatings and Materials
using Filtered Open-Flame Carbon-Arc Light and Water Exposure Apparatus.
10. ASTM D1654 - Test Method for Evaluation of Painted or Coated Specimens Subjected
to Corrosive Environments.
11. ASTM D2244 - Test Method for Calculation of Color Differences from Instrumentally
Measured Color Coordinates.
12. ASTM D2794 - Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings to the Effects of Rapid
Deformation (Impact).
13. ASTM D3359 - Test Method for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test.
14. ASTM F2408 – Ornamental Fences Employing Galvanized Steel Tubular Pickets.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
SITE IMPROVEMENTS 322000 - 2
15. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) – latest
edition
M181 – Standard Specification for Chain Link Fence
16. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) – latest edition
A 153 – Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware
A 641 – Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications for Workmen
1. Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during execution of this
portion of the Work, shall be thoroughly trained and experienced in placing the types
of Work described in this section.
B. Codes and Standards
1. In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and regulations, comply with all perti-
nent recommendations of "Structural Concrete for Builders", publication ACI 301-66 of
the American Concrete Institute.
2. Refer to the latest accessibility standards provided by both the State of Massachu-
setts Architectural Access Board and the United States Department of Justice 2010
ADA Standards for Accessible Design, Titles II and III Facilities Americans With Disa-
bilities Act. and Access Board Proposed Guidelines for Public Streets and Sidewalks
2011 proposed changes
3. Massachusetts and IBC Building Code for Loading Requirements for, Fencing, and
Railings
4. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of Rail through one source from a single manu-
facturer.
C. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to
practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated.
D. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
a. American Welding Society (AWS) D1.1 Structural Welding Code
b. AWS D1.6 “Structural Welding Code—Stainless Steel.”
E. Manufacturer Qualification: A company specializing in the manufacture of metal bar gratings
with not less than 10 years of documented experience.
F. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency with the experience and
capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
SITE IMPROVEMENTS 322000 - 3
1.07 SUBMITTALS
Forty-five days prior to installation and before any site furnishings are delivered to the job site,
submit samples, specification cuts or shop and erection drawings for all items in this section—
indicating materials size and weight of steel, number, location and type of connection, and hard-
ware. Provide product literature/specifications, storage and handling requirements and recom-
mendations and installation methods for the items listed above.
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components
and profiles, and finishes. Include manufacturer's written instructions for maintaining and
cleaning sign surfaces.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual units or sections of
units showing the full range of colors available for the following:
1. Metals
a. Samples to be submitted for full color and texture range for approval by landscape
architect.
C. Maintenance Data: For site furnishings to include in maintenance manuals.
1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE OF MATERIALS
A. Architectural Coatings
All architectural coatings shall comply with the National Volatile Compound Emission Standards
for Architectural Coatings, (EPA 40 CFR Part 59, as published in the Friday, September 11,
1998 Federal Register). Architectural coatings are defined as: “a coating recommended for field
application to stationary structures and their appurtenances, to portable buildings, to pavements,
or to curbs.”
1.09 DELIVERY AND HANDLING
A. Protect elements during shipping and storage.
B. Deliver fabricated units and component parts to project site identified per shop drawings.
Protect surfaces from damage during shipping and installation. No damaged work shall be
acceptable.
C. Store and protect all materials in a dry, well-ventilated, weather tight place. Protect from
damage by other trades.
D. Protect finishes against soiling, staining or damage from scratches and abrasion. Maintain
protection during construction until Substantial Completion Inspection
E. Precast Concrete Benches packaging and shipping: Precast concrete to be palletized and
shrink wrapped, delivered in original unopened packaging with legible manufacture
identification, including size piece number, quantities, manufacturer date and inspector intitals.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
SITE IMPROVEMENTS 322000 - 4
1.10 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate delivery time so site improvement materials can be installed within 24 hours of
receipt at the Project Site
1.11 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule installation so benches are mounted only on completed work. Do not support
temporarily by any means that does not satisfy structural performance requirements.
PART 2 - ITEMS
2.1 BENCHES
Benches shall be Model MC26 - McConnell bench with back 6 ft as manufactured by Keystone
Ridge Designs, Inc., 670 Mercer Road, Butler, PA 16001, or approved equal. Color to be black.
2.2 COVERED BIKE SHELTER
The covered bike storage shelter shall be the 16’ X 24’ “SENTINEL” BICYCLE SHELTER with a
32-bike capacity as manufactured by DUO-GARD Industries, Inc. and as detailed on the Sheet
L.9. Shelter shall be installed according to manufacturers requirements.
2.3 TREE GRATES
Tree grates shall be 60” square PALM TREE GRATE, model 6024, as manufactured by Iron-
smith, Palm Desert, CA. 1-800-338-4766, or approved equal. Finish to be black powdercoat.
2.4 WOOD FRAMED SHELTER
Wood framed shelter shall be a custom-built, 15’ x 27’ wood structure of similar size, material and
form as that detailed on Sheet L.9. Contractor shall provide shop drawings and all structural
drawings for permit approval.
2.5 PLAYGROUND EQUIPMENT
The playground equipment installed as part of this project shall be as shown on Sheet L.11. the
ROBINIA 2-Swing Set and ORBITS Stepping Pods shall be as manufactured by Kompan Inc.
ROLLER SLIDE shall be as manufactured by Cascade Designs, Inc.
2.6 POURED-IN-PLACE SURFACING
A. The poured in place surfacing consists of two layers, a rubberized top wearing layer and
a rubberized impact layer. These shall be installed over crushed stone, asphalt or concrete as per
manufactures recommendation.
1. Products:
a. Poured-in-Place by Playbound
b. PolyStar-Tumble Turf Safety Surfacing by USSA
c. Poured in Place Rubber: Aliphatic by GameTime
B. Final colors to be selected by owner.
2.7 WOOD FIBER SURFACING
A. The wood play surfacing shall include 12” depth, after compaction of woodcarpet material, fil-
ter fabric, and stone base.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
SITE IMPROVEMENTS 322000 - 5
1. Products:
A. Woodcarpet System by Zeager Brothers Inc.
B. Engineered Wood Fiber by GameTime
C. Bulk Fibar Engineered Wood Fiber by Fibar Playground Surfaces
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
a. Pre-measure: Field Measure up as-executed features of the works critical to the correct off-site
fabrication of items. Take Field measurements prior to preparation of final shop drawings and
fabrication to ensure proper fitting of the work.
b. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
correct and level finished grade, mounting surfaces, installation tolerances, and other conditions
affecting performance.
c. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General
The work related to each of the site improvement items shall be fabricated, constructed
and finished in every respect in a good, workmanlike and substantial manner, to the full in-
tent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. All parts necessary for the proper
and complete execution of the work, whether the same may have been specifically men-
tioned or not, or indicated on the drawings, shall be done or furnished in a manner corre-
sponding with the rest of the work as if the same were specifically herein described.
B. The workmanship shall be first-class in every respect and neat in appearance. All work
shall meet the requirements of applicable federal, state and local codes and other authori-
ties having jurisdiction over the work.
C. All excavation and backfill operations shall conform to the details shown on the drawings
and the applicable provisions specified under Excavating, Filling and Grading, Section
315001.
D. Special Conditions
Work shall be properly coordinated with the work of other trades. Other trades shall be
consulted in advance so that proper provisions may be made for installation of their work
and so that the work of this Section may be properly finished and connected to the work of
other trades.
E. Install Site Elements level, plumb, and the height indicated, with surfaces free from distor-
tion or other defects in appearance.
A. Clean-up - Site shall be left free of all debris and in a clean, orderly manner.
1. Grating Attachment: Use approved attachment system and fasteners to secure grat-
ing to supporting members as shown on plans.
3.9 CLEANING
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
SITE IMPROVEMENTS 322000 - 6
A. Immediately upon completion of installation, clean all railing surfaces using a NON-abrasive
stainless steel cleaner. Do not use abrasive agents or harsh chemicals. Provide adequate
protection for all surfaces of completed installations to prevent damage during remainder of
construction activities.
B. After completing site furnishing installation, inspect components. Remove spots, dirt, and
debris. Repair damaged finishes to match original finish or replace component.
C. Clean aluminum and steel by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap and rinsing with
clean water.
D. The contractor shall clean the jobsite of excess materials; post-hole excavations shall be
scattered uniformly away from posts.
3.10 WASTE MANAGEMENT
Separate and dispose of waste in accordance with the Project’s Waste Management Plan.
END OF SECTION
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
SEEDING 329200 - 1
SECTION 329200 - SEEDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SEEDING SCOPE
This Section includes:
1. Seeding
2. Topsoil Preparation for loam and seed areas
1.2 DEFINITIONS
Top Soil: Upper horizon of soil containing organic content.
Subgrade: Lower level of soil rough graded and scarified prior to placing topsoil on site.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Soil Tests- provide soil tests by 3rd party lab such as UMass for all topsoil proposed on site.
Testing to include PH, soil textural analysis, and nutrient analysis.
Follow UMass’s recommendations for amendments and retest until soil meets performance
requirements for organic content and nutrient levels.
B. Warrantee—Statement of Contractor’s 1 year warrantee of plants starting the day of substan-
tial completion. Plants to be replaced that are underperforming. Warrantee extends 1 year
after replacement.
C. Proposed Seed List- Confirm Seed list to be used prior to ordering. Include information about
source, size, and quantity.
1.4 INSPECTIONS
A. Schedule a site visit with Landscape architect 14 days in advance to review subgrade
prior to placing top soil.
1.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect all plants during transport and prior to installation. Presoak root balls and con-
tainers prior to planting.
B. Remove all over spills of paving materials, subbases into planting areas. Scarify sub-
grade prior to placing topsoil.
1.6 SCHEDULING
A. Seeding shall normally be done between August 15th to October 10 and/or April 1st to
June 15th.
1.7 WARRENTY PERIOD
During the warranty period, the Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining each tree
in a healthy and vigorous growing condition. The Contractor shall water the tree as out-
lined The Contractor's tree watering plan shall describe the source of the water and the
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
SEEDING 329200 - 2
equipment to be used in watering, and shall provide for each tree to receive at least 10
gallons of water every two weeks, from May 1st to August 30th. The Contradictor shall
also weed, prune, mulch, fertilize the trees, and take other steps necessary to ensure the
long-term health of the trees, including without limitation, tightening and repairing
guywires, resetting tilted or downed trees, and adding soil and/or mulch to any treewell
that has settled.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOILS
The Contractor shall supply loam which shall be prepared by the Contractor so as to be
free from subgrade, stumps, roots, stones over one (1) inch diameter and other extraneous
materials. Materials removed shall be disposed of by the Contractor. Soil shall not be
used for planting while in a frozen or muddy condition. Topsoil to meet the following per-
formance requirements for loam and seeded areas.
TOPSOIL FOR LAWN AREAS
Texture by particle size distribution analysis USDA course loamy sand
Organic content - dry %mass 4-5%
pH CaCl2 5-6.5
EC dS/m < 2
Ca / Mg ratio 3 to 6
CEC cation exch. Capacity meq% 5 to 20
P phosphorus ppm 3 to 18
K potassium ppm 25 to 110
S sulphur ppm < 200
Cu copper ppm 0.4 to 6
Zn zinc ppm 0.3 to 10
Mn manganese ppm 3 to 15
Fe iron ppm 3 to 20
B boron ppm 0.3 to 1
Odour no strong odour
Contaminants & Toxins ppm EPA PRG
levels
Micro organisms other than parasitic nematodes present
Mycorrhiza fungi present
Fungal diseases absent
Weed viable reproductive parts absent
2.2 AMENDMENTS
A. Provide fertilizer, compost, limestone or other materials as recommended by the soil testing lab
for amending topsoil to met performance requirements. Any amendments to adjust organic con-
tent, must wait for 2 to 3 weeks prior to retesting. Only fertilize as required by the testing agency.
2.3 WATER
Contractor shall make, at his expense, whatever arrangements may be necessary to ensure an
adequate supply of water to meet the needs of this contract. He/she shall also furnish all neces-
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
SEEDING 329200 - 3
sary hose, equipment, attachments, and accessories for the adequate irrigation of lawns and
planted areas as may be required to complete the work as specified.
2.4 SEED BLEND
Percent by Percent of Percent
Weight Seed Purity Germination
25% Kentucky Bluegrass 85% 80%
50% Creeping Red Fescue 98% 90%
10% Annual Ryegrass 98% 90%
5% Clover, Ladino
10% Red Top
.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION
Keep adjacent paving and construction clean and work area in an orderly condition.
Pavements shall be kept clear at all times, broom cleaned to prevent tracking dirt into build-
ings. Regrade any lawn areas with rutting or disturbance from heavy equipment. Scarify sub-
grade and reseed.
3.2 DISPOSAL
Disposal: Remove surplus and waste material, including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash,
and debris, and legally dispose or recycle them off site.
3.3 FINAL INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE
At the end of the guarantee period, the Landscape Architect will inspect all guaranteed work
for final acceptance upon written request of the Contractor. The request shall be received at
least 10 calendar days before the anticipated date for final inspection.
Upon completion and re-inspection of all repairs or renewals necessary in the judgment of the
Landscape Architect at that time, he shall certify in writing to the Contractor as to the final ac-
ceptance of the Project.
END OF SECTION
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
PLANTING 329300 - 1
SECTION 329300 – PLANTINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 PLANTING SCOPE
This Section includes:
1. Planting trees, shrubs, ground cover.
2. Organic Mulch.
3. Topsoil Preparation for Planting Beds
1.2 DEFINITIONS
Top Soil: Upper horizon of soil containing organic content.
Subgrade: Lower level of soil rough graded and scarified prior to placing topsoil on site.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Soil Tests- provide soil tests by 3rd party lab such as UMass for all topsoil proposed on site.
Testing to include PH, soil textural analysis, and nutrient analysis.
Follow UMass’s recommendations for amendments and retest until soil meets performance
requirements for organic content and nutrient levels.
B. Warrantee—Statement of Contractor’s 1 year warrantee of plants starting the day of substan-
tial completion. Plants to be replaced that are underperforming. Warrantee extends 1 year
after replacement.
C. Proposed Plant List- Confirm order list and source of plants to be installed on project in con-
formance with drawings.
1.4 INSPECTIONS
A. Schedule a site visit with Landscape architect 14 days in advance to review subgrade
prior to placing top soil.
B. If any of the plant material on site is unsatisfactory to the landscape architect, replace at
no additional cost to the owner.
1.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect all plants during transport and prior to installation. Presoak root balls and con-
tainers prior to planting.
B. Remove all over spills of paving materials, subbases into planting areas. Scarify sub-
grade prior to placing topsoil.
1.6 SCHEDULING
A. Plant during the following periods, and coordinate with digging periods at nursery and
develivery to minimize plants’ time out of the ground:
Spring Planting: April to May.
Fall Planting: September to October.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
PLANTING 329300 - 2
B. Plant Trees and shrubs after finish grades are established and before planting lawns.
C. Minimize the compacting of future planting areas by heavy equipment. Rework any are-
as of subgrade compacted due to construction activities.
1.7 REPLACEMENTS
A. In the event of damage or rejection, immediately make all repairs and replacements nec-
essary to the approval of the Landscape Architect, at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.8 WARRENTY PERIOD
During the warranty period, the Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining each tree
in a healthy and vigorous growing condition. The Contractor shall water the tree as out-
lined The Contractor's tree watering plan shall describe the source of the water and the
equipment to be used in watering, and shall provide for each tree to receive at least 10
gallons of water every two weeks, from May 1st to August 30th. The Contradictor shall
also weed, prune, mulch, fertilize the trees, and take other steps necessary to ensure the
long-term health of the trees, including without limitation, tightening and repairing
guywires, resetting tilted or downed trees, and adding soil and/or mulch to any treewell
that has settled.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOILS
The Contractor shall supply loam which shall be prepared by the Contractor so as to be free from
subgrade, stumps, roots, stones over one (1) inch diameter and other extraneous materials. Ma-
terials removed shall be disposed of by the Contractor. Soil shall not be used for planting while in
a frozen or muddy condition.
2.2 AMENDMENTS
A. Provide fertilizer, compost, limestone or other materials as recommended by the soil test-
ing lab for amending topsoil to met performance requirements. Any amendments to adjust organ-
ic content, must wait for 2 to 3 weeks prior to retesting. Only fertilize as required by the testing
agency.
2.3 WATER
Contractor shall make, at his expense, whatever arrangements may be necessary to ensure an
adequate supply of water to meet the needs of this contract. He shall also furnish all necessary
hose, equipment, attachments, and accessories for the adequate irrigation of lawns and planted
areas as may be required to complete the work as specified. Failures in the irrigation system shall
not relieve the Contractor from watering.
2.4 ORGANIC MULCHES
Free from deleterious materials and suitable as a top dressing of trees and shrubs, consisting of
one of the following:
a. Type: Fine Shredded hardwood
b. Size Range: ½ to 1 inch diameter.
c. Color: No artificial dyes permitted,dark brown color.
d. The mulch must be partially decomposed.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
PLANTING 329300 - 3
2.5 TEMPORARY TREE WATERING SYSTEM
Temporary Tree Watering Systems: If there is no permanent irrigation system, provide tempo-
rary watering bags that allows the slow-release of water until new roots have established.
2.6 EDGING IN PLANTING BEDS
Edging to be spade cut edging between planting areas and edges of planting areas. Align-
ment of edging to be clean and smooth.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION
1. Keep adjacent paving and construction clean and work area in an orderly condition.
Pavements shall be kept clear at all times, broom cleaned to prevent tracking dirt into
buildings.
2. Protect plants from damage due to landscape operations, operations by Others. Main-
tain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace
damaged plants.
3. After Substantial Completion and before Final Acceptance remove nursery tags, nurse-
ry stakes, tie tape, labels, wire, burlap, temporary tree watering bags, and other debris
from plant material, planting areas, and Project site.
4. After completion of all planting operations, dispose of all debris and excess material to
the satisfaction of the Landscape Architect. All pavements shall be broomed and hosed
clean.
3.2 DISPOSAL
Disposal: Remove surplus and waste material, including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash,
and debris, and legally dispose or recycle them off site.
3.3 FINAL INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE
At the end of the guarantee period, the Landscape Architect will inspect all guaranteed work
for final acceptance upon written request of the Contractor. The request shall be received at
least 10 calendar days before the anticipated date for final inspection.
Upon completion and re-inspection of all repairs or renewals necessary in the judgment of the
Landscape Architect at that time, he shall certify in writing to the Contractor as to the final ac-
ceptance of the Project.
END OF SECTION
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
WATER DISTRIBUTION SERVICE 332000 - 1
SECTION 332000 - WATER DISTRIBUTION SERVICE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT PROVISIONS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE
The General Provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1, apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Contractor, Subcontractors, and/or suppliers providing goods or services referenced in
or related to this Section shall also be bound by the Documents identified in Division 01 Section
“Summary”, Paragraph 1.1A, entitled “Related Documents.”
1.4 ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED
If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in this
Section, provide such item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard established
for the balance of the Work specified, in accordance with the Architect's interpretation.
1.5 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT
In case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Document not
clarified by addendum, the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided, in accord-
ance with the Architect's interpretation.
1.6 DESCRIPTION
A. Work under this Section of the Specifications shall consist of providing all labor, materials
and equipment necessary and required to install all of the water distribution and service fa-
cilities in accordance with Contract Documents. This work shall include but not be limited
to:
1. Installation of water distribution system consisting of excavation, piping, valves and
boxes, hydrants, pipe fittings, thrustblocks, manhole, vaults and all necessary and
required accessory items and operations including sheeting, bracing, pumping and
coordination with interior plumbing and electrical contractors.
2. Connection of building water service lines to the water distribution system.
3. Testing and disinfection.
4. Installation of water lines within the Public R.O.W. and/or Easements, including con-
nections to existing water supply facilities.
5. Work performed under the Water Distribution System Scope of Services shall be
limited to work outside of, and up to a point of ten (10) feet outside of the building(s)
foundation wall as shown on the Drawings. Work inside the building(s) foundation
wall as shown on the Drawings. Work inside the building and connection to new wa-
ter service piping installed under this section shall be included under the scope of
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
WATER DISTRIBUTION SERVICE 332000 - 2
services described in the various sections of PLUMBING and FIRE PROTECTION
of these Specifications.
6. The Contractor shall pay for all costs and fees related to connecting water system to
existing services and shall file all applications, details, and drawings, required by the
local authority having jurisdiction.
B. Related Work Described Elsewhere
Site Demotion Clearing and Grubbing. ..................................................... Division 31
Excavation, Backfill, Earthwork, and Grading .......................................... Division 31
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Local Municipality Requirements
1. The Contractor shall notify the local Water Department sufficiently in advance of
connecting new or relocated water services to existing water main. All work and ma-
terials shall be subject to approval of the Water Department.
2. The Contractor shall be responsible for making all arrangements with the municipal
and State personnel and paying all fees associated with the water system installa-
tion and testing.
3. All water distribution materials and installation shall conform to the requirements of
the local DPW Waterworks Standards. Should discrepancies exist between the lo-
cal Standards and this Specification, the local Standards shall prevail. For materials
or methods of installation not included in the local Standards, but specified herein,
the Contractor shall submit this material or methodology to the local DPW for ap-
proval prior to purchase and/or execution.
B. Inspection and Testing
1. Pipe and fittings shall be inspected and tested at the foundry as required by the
standard specifications to which the material is manufactured. The Contractor shall
furnish to the Architect in duplicate sworn certificates of such tests.
2. The Owner reserves the right to have any or all pipe, fittings and special castings in-
spected and/or tested by an independent testing agency at either the manufacturer's
plant or elsewhere. Such inspection and tests shall be at the Owner's expense.
3. Ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be subjected to a careful inspection and a hammer
test just before being installed.
1.8 SUBMITTALS
A. Materials List
After the award of the Contract and before any water system materials are delivered to the
job site, submit to the Architect, a complete list of materials proposed to be furnished and
installed.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
WATER DISTRIBUTION SERVICE 332000 - 3
1. Show manufacturer's name and catalog number for each item, furnish complete cat-
alog cuts and technical data, and furnish the manufacturers' recommendations as to
method of installation.
2. Upon approval of the Architect, the manufacturers' recommendations shall become
the basis for acceptance or rejection of actual methods of installation used in the
work.
3. Do not permit any water system component to be brought onto the job site until it
has been approved by the Architect.
B. Record Drawings
1. During the course of installation, carefully shown in red line on a print of the utility
plan all changes made to the water system during installation.
2. Upon completion of the water system installation, these marked plans shall be sup-
plied to the Architect.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE
A. DUCTILE IRON WATER PIPE
. Ductile iron pipe shall be furnished and installed in sizes as shown on the drawings and in
accordance with the latest ANSI Standards' Designations A21.50 (AWWA C150) for "Duc-
tile Iron Pipe Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds of Sand-Lines Molds for Water or Other
Liquids." Unless otherwise indicated or specified, ductile iron pipe shall be cement lined,
and at least thickness Class 52.
1. DI pipe shall be push-on joint type except as otherwise indicated or specified.
2. CI or DI fittings shall conform to ASA/AWWA A21.10/C100 or ANSI/ AWWA
A21.10/C110 respectfully, and shall be of a pressure classification at least equal to
that of the pipe with which they are used.
3. Gaskets shall conform to ANSI/AWWA A21.11/C11.
4. Inside of pipe and fittings shall be given a cement lining 1/8 inch minimum thickness
on pipe 12 inches and smaller in accordance with ANSI/AWWA A21.4/C104. The
outside of the pipe and fittings shall be coated with a standard bituminous coating
conforming to ANSI/AWWA A21.6/C106.
5. Pipe for use with sleeve-type couplings shall be as specified above except that the
ends shall be plain (without bells or beads). The ends shall be cast or machined at
right angles to the axis.
6. Sleeve-type couplings shall be cast iron and shall be Dresser style.
a. To ensure correct fitting of pipe and couplings, sleeve-type couplings and accesso-
ries shall be furnished by the supplier of the pipe and shall be of a pressure rating at
least equal to that of the pipeline in which they are to be installed.
b. Couplings shall be provided with epoxy coated steel bolts.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
WATER DISTRIBUTION SERVICE 332000 - 4
c. Outer surfaces of couplings including bolts and nuts shall be coated with an ap-
proved tar coating upon installation.
B. PVC WATER PIPE
Water Main Piping shall be PVC Water Pipe conforming AWWA C900 specification, with
gaskets meeting ASTM F477 and joints in compliance with ASTM D3139, conforming to
AWWA C900-07 and FM 1612; Pressure Class 165 psi (DR 25), for sizes 4" - 12" in di-
ameter. Basis of Design Blue Brute TM, c900 Water Pipe or approved equivalent.
2.02 VALVES AND VALVE BOXES
A. Gate valve shall be iron body, New York Style (Metropolitan Patter) conforming to AWWA
C500. Gate Valve shall have mechanical joint ends, interior epoxy coated, 2 in. square
operating nut. Valve shall open to right (clockwise). Gate valve shall be designed to be
bottle-tight for a minimum working pressure of 200 lb. per sq. in.
B. Each valve shall be provided with a valve box. Box shall be 2 pieces slip-style cast iron
and shall be an adjustable telescoping, heavy pattern type.
1. Box shall be designed and constructed to prevent the direct transmission of traffic
loads to the piping or valve.
2. Upper section of box shall have a flange with sufficient bearing area to prevent un-
due settlement. Lower section of box shall be designed to enclose the valve operat-
ing nut and stuffing box, and rest on the backfill.
3. Boxes shall be adjustable by 6 in. vertically without reduction of the lap between
sections to less than 4 in.
4. Inside diameter of box shall be at least 5 1/4 inch and length of box shall be as re-
quired to suit finish ground elevation.
5. Box cover shall be close fitting and substantially dirt-tight. Top of cover shall be
flush with top of box rim. Cover shall have a word "WATER" cast into top.
6. Box shall be equal to that as manufactured by the Tyler Corporation.
C. For valves installed with depth of cover substantially greater than that specified, exten-
sions, including centering spacers, shall be added to the operation nut assembly to raise
the operating nut to a depth below grade equal to that with the normal required depth of
cover.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Inspection
1. Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades
and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may
properly commence.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
WATER DISTRIBUTION SERVICE 332000 - 5
2. Verify that water utilities may be installed in strict accordance with all pertinent codes
and regulations, the original design, the referenced standards, and the manufactur-
er's recommendations.
B. Discrepancies
1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect.
2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies
are fully resolved.
3.02 PIPE INSTALLATION
A. Piping shall be installed as indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with the refer-
enced local Water Department Standards. Where exact locating dimensions of piping are
not indicated on the Drawings, the Architect's approval shall be obtained for proposed loca-
tions before installation.
B. Ductile iron pipe fittings shall be installed in accordance with the local Water Department
Standards.
1. Bottom of trench excavation shall be kept dry and free of water during pipe installa-
tion. Adequate measures including dewatering as required shall be taken to prevent
flotation of pipe in the trench.
2. Each pipe length shall be installed to form a close joint with the next adjoining length
and bring inverts to the required grade.
3. Each pipe length shall have a firm bearing along its entire length. No pipe or fitting
shall be permanently supported on saddles, blocking, or stones.
4. Where indicated, new system shall be connected to existing Municipal Water Distri-
bution System in accordance with the local Water Department Requirements.
C. Pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned before installation, and shall be maintained free from for-
eign matter during installation.
1. Where necessary, tight-fitting temporary wood bulkheads shall be employed to close
ends of pipeline at end of each day's work.
2. Entire length of pipe shall be thoroughly flushed clean following completion of back-
fill.
D. In any pipe showing a distinct crack and in which it is believed there is no incipient fracture
beyond the limits of the visible crack, the cracked portions, if so approved, may be cut off
by and at the expense of the Contractor before the pipe is laid so that the pipe used will be
perfectly sound. The cut shall be made in the sound barrel at a point at least 12 in. from
the visible limits of the crack.
1. Except as otherwise approved, all cutting shall be done with a machine suitable for
cutting ductile iron pipe. Hydraulic squeeze cutters are not acceptable for cutting
ductile iron pipe. Travel type cutters and guillotine or rotary type abrasive saws
may be used. All cut ends shall be examined for possible cracks caused by cutting.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
WATER DISTRIBUTION SERVICE 332000 - 6
2. The Contractor's attention is directed to the fact that damage to the lining of pipe or
fittings will render them unfit for use; he shall use the utmost care in handling and in-
stalling lined and coated pipe and fittings to prevent damage. Protective guards
shall not be removed until the pipe is to be installed.
E. Concrete Thrust Blocks
1. Changes in direction, both vertical and horizontal shall be braced with concrete
thrust blocks.
2. Where pipe is being capped for future connection, cap shall be braced with concrete
thrust block.
3. Concrete shall meet requirements of Section 03300, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.
4. Thrust block sizing and installation shall be in accordance with local Water Depart-
ment Standards.
3.03 ASSEMBLING SLEEVE-TYPE COUPLINGS
A. Prior to the installation of sleeve-type couplings, the pipe ends shall be cleaned thoroughly
for a distance of 8 in. Soapy water may be used as a gasket lubricant. A follower and
gasket, in that order, shall be slipped over each pipe to a distance of about 6 in. from the
end, and the middle ring shall be placed on the already laid pipe and until it is properly cen-
tered over the joint. The other pipe end shall be inserted into the middle ring and brought to
proper position in relation to the pipe already laid. The gaskets and followers shall then be
pressed evenly and firmly into the middle ring flares.
B. After the bolts have been inserted and all nuts have been made up fingertight, diametrically
opposite nuts shall be progressively and uniformly tightened all around the joint, preferable
by use of a torque wrench of the appropriate size and torque for the bolts.
C. The correct torque as indicated by a torque wrench shall not exceed the sleeve manufac-
turers recommendations.
D. An approved tar coating shall be applied on the entire outer surface of such couplings, in-
cluding bolts, following installation.
3.04 TESTING
A. All portions of the water distribution system installed shall be hydrostatically tested for
leakage.
B. General Test Requirements
1. Piping shall be adequately restrained against movement before testing. Pressure
line shall have thrust blocks installed and the concrete shall have attained full design
strength before test pressure is applied to the line.
2. Piping system shall be flushed clean, and sediment, scale, dirt, and debris removed
before piping is tested.
3. Adequate provision shall be made for carrying off flushing without causing erosion or
other damage.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
WATER DISTRIBUTION SERVICE 332000 - 7
4. Piping shall be tested before joints are concealed or made inaccessible.
5. Tests shall be made in the presence of an inspector of the authority having jurisdic-
tion and in accordance with the local Water Department Standards.
C. Notice of tests shall be made in writing to the Architect and the local Water Department,
and received by them at least five days before the date of test.
D. Hydrostatic and Leakage Tests
1. Testing shall be in accordance with AWWA Standard C600, Section 4, and at test
pressure indicated in the local Water Department Standards.
2. Pressure pipe shall be given combined hydrostatic and leakage tests in sections of
acceptable length as the Architect shall direct.
3. Furnish and install suitable temporary testing plugs or caps; all necessary pressure
pumps, pipe connections, meters, gages, and other necessary equipment; and all
labor required.
4. Unless it has already been done, the section of pipe to be tested shall be filled with
water of approved quality, and all air shall be expelled from the pipe. If hydrants or
blowoffs are not available at high points for releasing air, make necessary excava-
tions, do backfilling and make taps at such points. Plug holes after completion of the
test.
5. The section under test shall be maintained full of water for a period of 24 hours prior
to the combined pressure and leakage test being applied.
6. The meter and gage shall be installed and shall be kept in use during the test so that
water entering water main under test will be measured and the pressure in the water
main indicated.
7. The pressure test shall be made at 1.5 times the normal working water pressure
(based on the elevation of the lowest point of the section under test), but not less
than 150 PSI. If the Contractor cannot achieve the specified pressure and maintain
it for the specified time, with no additional pumping, the section shall be considered
as having failed to pass the test.
8. Following a successful pressure test, or concurrently with test, make a leakage test
by metering the flow of water into the pipe while maintaining in the water main and
pressure equal to the specified test pressure. If the average leakage during the pe-
riod exceeds specified the rate of gallons per hour, the section shall be considered
as having failed the leakage test.
9. If the section shall fail to pass the pressure test, the leakage test, or both, locate,
uncover, and repair or replace defective pipes, fittings, or joints, without extension of
time for completion of work. Additional tests and repairs shall be made until the sec-
tion passes the specified tests.
10. All joints within vaults shall have no visible leakage. Joints from which water contin-
ues to run or squirt in an active manner will not be accepted.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
WATER DISTRIBUTION SERVICE 332000 - 8
11. Upon successful completion of the tests, plugs or caps installed for the testing shall
be removed.
12. If, in the judgment of the Architect, it is impractical to follow the foregoing procedure
exactly for any reasons, modifications in the procedure shall be submitted for ap-
proval and be made as approved and accepted, but in any event the Contractor
shall be responsible for tightness of the line within the above leakage and pressure
requirements.
E. Before submitting system for final approval of the authorities having jurisdiction, submit to
the Architect a written statement that work has been completed in accordance with the
Contract Documents and signed by the Contractor's Superintendent.
F. Promptly following satisfactory completion of leakage testing, a report fully describing test
procedure and listing test results shall be submitted to the Architect and to governmental
agencies having jurisdiction. The report shall be signed by the Contractor's superintendent.
3.05 DISINFECTION
A. The Contractor shall disinfect the lines carrying potable water. The work shall be per-
formed in accordance with the requirements of the local Water Department Standards.
Test results shall be sent to the Architect and the aforementioned DPW.
B. The Contractor shall furnish all equipment and materials necessary to do the work of disin-
fection, and shall perform the work in accordance with procedure outlined in the latest edi-
tion of ANSI/AWWA C651 except as otherwise specified herein.
C. The dosage shall be such so as to produce a chlorine concentration of no less than 25
(mg/1) ppm after a contact period of not less than 24 hours.
D. After treatment, the pipeline shall be flushed with clean water until the residual chlorine
content does not exceed 1.0 (mg/1) ppm.
E. After flushing samples shall be collected as per local Water Department standards.
F. During the disinfection period, care shall be exercised to prevent contamination of water in
existing mains.
G. The Contractor shall dispose of the water used in disinfecting and flushing in an acceptable
manner.
H. Any temporary connections required for disinfection shall be installed and subsequently
properly abandoned at the Contractor's expense.
END OF SECTION
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
SANITARY SEWER 333000 - 1
SECTION 333000 - SANITARY SEWER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT PROVISIONS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE
The General Provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1, apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Contractor, Subcontractors, and/or suppliers providing goods or services referenced in or
related to this Section shall also be bound by the Documents identified in Division 01 Section
“Summary”, Paragraph 1.1A, entitled “Related Documents.”
1.3 ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED
If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in this
Section, provide such item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard established
for the balance of the Work specified, in accordance with the Architect's interpretation.
1.4 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT
In case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Document not
clarified by addendum, the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided, in accord-
ance with the Architect's interpretation.
1.5 DESCRIPTION
A. Work under this Section of the Specifications shall consist of providing all labor, materials
and equipment necessary and required to install exterior sanitary sewer system beginning
at a point 10 feet outside of building foundation wall, in accordance with the Contract Doc-
uments. This work shall include but not be limited to:
1. Installation of sanitary sewers consisting of pipe and all necessary and required ac-
cessory items and operations including connections to existing facilities.
2. Pay costs and fees related to connecting sanitary sewerage system to existing ser-
vices. File applications, details, and drawings required by the local authority having
jurisdiction.
3. Alteration, reconstruction and/or relocation of existing sanitary sewer facilities as re-
quired.
4. Connection of building sanitary sewer service lines to the site sanitary sewer sys-
tem.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
SANITARY SEWER 333000 - 2
5. Installation of sanitary sewer facilities with the Public R.O.W. and/or easements, in-
cluding connections to existing sanitary sewer facilities.
B. Related Work Described Elsewhere
Site Demotion Clearing and Grubbing……………………………………………Division 31
Excavation, Backfill, Earthwork, and Grading……………………………………Division 31
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards
1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO):
Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges
2. American Society for Testing and Materials:
Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe, Using Rubber Gaskets C433
Underground Installation of Flexible Thermoplastic Sewer Pipe D3231
Type PSM Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings D3034
Joints for Drain and Sewer and Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals
D3212
3. Commonwealth of Massachusetts Department of Transportation (MDOT):
Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges
4. Local Municipal Requirements
a. The Contractor shall notify the local DPW prior to installation. All work and
materials shall be subject to the approval of the local DPW.
b. The abutting property owners shall be notified prior to installation of the sewer
service.
B. Permits
The Contractor shall pay for all permits and licenses as required.
C. Inspection
1. All sanitary sewer System installation shall be inspected and approved by the
local DPW. The Contractor shall be responsible for making all arrangements
with the DPW and paying all fees associated with the Sanitary Sewerage Sys-
tem installation.
2. The Contractor shall have the new pipe system televised and supply a certi-
fied video tape to the local DPW. Arrangements shall be made with the Town
prior to performing the TV inspection, so the DPW personnel can witness the
taping process.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
SANITARY SEWER 333000 - 3
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions
for sanitary sewage system materials and products.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for sanitary sewage systems, and maintenance da-
ta.
C. Record Drawings: Submit record drawings at Project Closeout.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
The materials to be used in the construction shall be those indicated on the Drawings and speci-
fied herein.
A. Identification
1. Provide underground-type plastic line markers, manufacturer's standard permanent,
bright-colored, continuous-printed plastic tape, intended for direct-burial service.
2. Size: Min. 6 in wide x 4 mils thick
3. Provide green tape with black printing reading "CAUTION SEWER LINE BURIED
BELOW".
4. During backfilling/top-soiling of sanitary sewage systems, install continuous under-
ground-type plastic line marker, located directly over buried line at 6 in. to 8 in. be-
low finished grade.
B. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe
1. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) nonpressure pipe for gravity sewers shall conform to
ASTM D 3034, SDR35 minimum wall thickness.
2. Pipe shall be bell-and-spigot in standard lengths of 12'-6".
3. Bell end shall be an integral wall section with solid cross section rubber ring, factory
assembled.
4. Spigot end shall be beveled to ensure proper insertion. Spigot end shall be imprint-
ed with an "assemble stripe", to which the bell end of the mated pipe will extend up-
on proper jointing of the two pipes.
5. Rubber rings shall conform to ASTM D3212.
6. Pipe ends shall permit checking of the rings with a feeler gage to ensure their proper
location in the coupling grooves.
7. PVC fittings shall be bell-and-spigot type, compatible with the pipe.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
SANITARY SEWER 333000 - 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
The Contractor shall install all sanitary sewer structures and pipe in the locations as shown on the
Drawings and/or as approved by the Owner's Field Representative and in accordance with the lo-
cal DPW Standards.
A. Piping - PVC
1. Inspect piping before installation to detect apparent defects.
2. Mark defective materials with white paint and promptly remove from site.
3. PVC pipe installation shall conform to ASTM D2321.
4. Bottom of trench excavation shall be kept dry and free of water during pipe installa-
tion. Adequate measures shall be taken to prevent flotation of pipe in the trench.
5. Pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned before installation, and shall be maintained free
from foreign matter during installation.
6. Each pipe length shall be installed to form a close joint with the next adjoining length
and bring inverts of the required grade.
7. Piping shall be properly graded, free from pockets.
8. No pipe or fitting shall be permanently support on saddles, blocking or stones.
9. Where necessary, tight-fitting temporary wood bulkheads shall be employed to close
ends of pipeline at end of each day's work.
10. Cleaning
a. Clear interior of piping of dirt and other superfluous material as work pro-
gresses.
b. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each joint as it is completed.
c. In large, accessible piping, use brushes and brooms for clearing.
d. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted conduit at end of day or whenever work
stops.
e. Flush lines between manholes if required to remove collected debris.
B. Connections to existing facilities
1. The Contractor shall make all required connections of the proposed sanitary sewer
into existing sanitary sewer facilities, where and as shown on the Drawings.
2. Take care while making tap connections to prevent concrete or debris from entering
existing piping or structure.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
SANITARY SEWER 333000 - 5
3. Remove debris, concrete or other extraneous material which may accumulate.
3.02 TESTING
A. The entire sewer system, including piping and manholes shall be tested for leakage. Piping
shall also be tested by the use of either water or low-pressure air. Piping shall also be
tested using closed circuit TV. All testing shall conform to the requirements of the local
Department of Public Works.
B. General Test Requirements
1. Piping shall be adequately restrained against movement before testing.
2. Piping system shall be flushed clean, and sediment, scale, dirt, and debris removed
before piping is tested.
3. Adequate provisions shall be made for carrying off flushing water without causing
erosion or other damage.
4. Manholes and piping shall be tested before joints are concealed or made inaccessi-
ble.
5. Tests shall be made in the presence of an inspector of the authority of having juris-
diction.
C. Notice of tests shall be made in writing to the Architect and the local plumbing inspector,
and received by them not less than five days before the date of test.
D. Pipe deflection testing for PVC piping.
1. Six months following completion of the backfill over the PVC pipe installation, the
pipeline shall be tested for deflection using a "go/no go" deflection mandrel. The
"go/no-go" gage shall be passed through all sections of the pipeline.
2. Pipe deflections shall be measured and converted to percent deflection. Deflections
shall be recorded, with a copy of results submitted to the Architect. Test results
shall be mailed or delivered to the Architect not later than the day following the day
on which test was made.
3. Sections of pipe with deflection greater than 7.5% shall be replaced.
END OF SECTION
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES 334100 - 1
SECTION 334100 - STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT PROVISIONS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE
The General Provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1, apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Contractor, Subcontractors, and/or suppliers providing goods or services referenced in or
related to this Section shall also be bound by the Documents identified in Division 01 Section
“Summary”, Paragraph 1.1A, entitled “Related Documents.”
1.3 ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED
If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in this
Section, provide such item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard established
for the balance of the Work specified, in accordance with the Architect's interpretation.
1.4 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT
In case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Document not
clarified by addendum, the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided, in accord-
ance with the Architect's interpretation.
1.5 DESCRIPTION
A. The storm drainage system required for this work is indicated on the drawings and in-
cludes, but is not necessarily limited to:
- storm drainage pipe and subdrains
- drain inlets and interconnecting lateral lines
- required fittings and bends
- testing
B. Related Work Described Elsewhere
Site Demotion Clearing and Grubbing………………………….………...…....Division 31
Excavation, Backfill, Earthwork, and Grading ............................................... Division 31
Cast in Place Concrete Paving ………….…………………………….………..Division 32
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications of Installers
Use adequate number of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in
the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and
the methods needed for proper performance of the work in this Section.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES 334100 - 2
B. Standards
1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO):
Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges
2. American Concrete Institute (ACI): Building Code Requirements for Reinforced
Concrete - 318
3. American Concrete Pipe Association (ACPA): Concrete Pipe Design Manual
4. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement A615
Concrete Masonry Units for Construction of Catch Basins and Manholes C139
Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units C140
Compression Joints for Vitrified Clay Pipe and Fittings C425
Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe, Using Rubber Gaskets C443
Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole C478
Vitrified Clay Pipe, Extra Strength, Standard Strength, and Perforated C700
Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sections for Culverts, Storm Drains, and Sewers
C789
Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil Aggregate Mixtures Using 10-lb. (4.54
kg) Rammer and 18 in. 457 mm) Drop D1157
5. Commonwealth of Massachusetts Department of Transporation (MDOT): Standard
Specifications for Highways and Bridges
6. National Clay Pipe Institute (NCPI): Clay Pipe Engineering Manual
C. Codes-The work shall be completed in accordance with standards of the City of North-
ampton and the Massachusetts Department of Transportation.
D. Permits-The Contractor shall pay for all permits and licenses as required.
E. Inspection-All drainage system installations shall be inspected and approved by Owner.
The Contractor shall be responsible for making all arrangements with inspectors from the local
municipality and paying all fees associated with the drainage system installation.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Materials List
After award of Contract and before any storm drainage system materials are delivered to
the job site, manufacturer's product data shall be submitted.
1. Show manufacturer's name and catalog number for each item, furnish complete cat-
alog cuts and technical data, and furnish the manufacturer's recommendations as to
method of installation.
2. Do not permit any storm drainage component to be brought onto the job until it has
been approved by the Architect.
B. Record Drawings
1. During the course of installation, carefully show, in red line, on a print of the grading
plan, all changes made to the storm drainage system during installation.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES 334100 - 3
2. Upon completion of the storm drainage system installation, these marked plans shall
be supplied to the Architect.
1.8 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Protection
Protect existing utilities as specified in these Specifications. Use all means necessary to
protect storm drain system materials before, during and after installation and to protect in-
stalled work and materials of all other trades.
B. Replacements
In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the
approval of the Architect, at no additional cost to the Owner.
C. Delivery and Storage
Deliver all materials to the job site in their original containers, with all labels legible at time
of use. Store in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, as approved by
the Architect.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 CASTINGS
A. Catalog listings on the plans indicated are from the Neenah Foundry Company catalogs.
Subsections may be submitted for the approval of the Project Engineer, provided they are
equivalent to those indicated and conform to State Specifications. The catch basin frame
and grate shall be Model R-5901A or approved equal.
B. The manhole frames and covers shall conform to MDOT Specifications
2.02 HDPE DRAINAGE PIPE
This pipe shall conform to MDOT Standard Specifications Section M5.03.01. The pipe shall be
constructed of high-density polyethylene. The pipe shall be seamless with corrugations on the
exterior and shall have a smooth interior waterway. Corrugated plastic pipe shall not be used for
flared ends or in other applications where the pipe will be exposed to vandalism and ultraviolet
radiation. Cost of pipe shall include connections to flared ends of other material.
2.03 Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe and Perforated Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe
PVC pipe and fittings for drainage and subdrainage applications shall meet ASTM D 1785 Stand-
ard Specifications for PVC plastic pipe, Type I Schedule 80. Joints shall be made in acordance
with ASTM D 2855 Recommended Practice for Making Solvent-cemented Joints with PVC Pipe
and Fittings.
2.04 MANHOLES
A. Precast reinforced concrete manholes shall consist of precast reinforced riser sections, a
concentric or eccentric to and a base section conforming with the typical manhole details.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES 334100 - 4
Precast manhole section shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM Standard Speci-
fication for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections, designation C 478. The mini-
mum compressive strength of the concrete for 4-foot diameter and for 5-foot diameter
manholes for all sections shall be 4,000psi. The circumferential steel reinforcement for ris-
er pipe, cone sections and base walls for the various sized manholes shall be as required
by ASTM Standard Specification for welded Steel Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement, Des-
ignation A 185 and shall be as follows:
For 5-foot diameter manholes:
An area of 0.12 square inch per vertical foot reinforcement for the 4-foot diameter portion
and an area of 0.17 square inch per vertical foot reinforcement for the 5-foot diameter por-
tion of the manhole in both ell and spigot.
B. Reinforcing in the bottom bases shall be of the same design as that required for the vari-
ous sized manholes. Reinforcing shall extend into the tongue and groove of each manhole
section.
C. Manhole steps shall be aluminum drop-front type as manufactured by Alcoa Aluminum
Company (or approved equal). All steps shall be cast into walls of the precast sections so
as to form a continuous ladder with a distance of twelve (12") inches between steps.
D. Each section of the precast manhole shall have two holes for the purpose of handling and
laying. These holes shall be tapered and shall be plugged with mortar after installation.
E. Monolithically pressure cast base sections shall be as shown on the drawings or as or-
dered by the Owner's Representative. Holes for pipes shall be case in the base section so
that there is a clear distance of four (4) inches minimum between the inside bottom of the
base section and the pipe invert.
F. The joint for the pipe at the base section shall consist of a cast iron compression flange to-
gether with cast iron inserts (imbedded in the wall of the base section) and an "O" Ring (or
approved equal) to provide a water tight seal and to allow a flexible joint capable of deflect-
ing a maximum of 9 degrees from center line of pipe.
2.05 CLASS OF CONCRETE
Class A Concrete shall be used for all reinforced and plain concrete not otherwise specified or
noted on the drawings.
Class A concrete shall develop a minimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi, at 28 days with
aggregates proportioned to produce a dense and watertight concrete.
Class B concrete may be used wherever low-strength concrete can be allowed, including con-
crete fill under foundations and elsewhere as specified or indicated on the drawings.
Class B concrete shall develop a minimum compressive strength of 2,500 psi, at 28 days.
2.06 PORTLAND CEMENT
Cement shall be single brand of approved American made Portland Cement conforming to cur-
rent specifications of ASTM Standard Specification for Portland Cement, Designation C 150,
Type II or, where required. Type III high early-strength cement. When used in the work, cement
shall be free from lumps and partially or wholly set cement.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES 334100 - 5
2.07 ADMIXTURES
The use of admixtures to improve workability, facilitate hardening of waterproofing, will not be
permitted.
2.08 WATER
Clean, fresh water shall be used for mixing concrete.
2.09 FINE AGGREGATE
Concrete sand shall be clean, sound, sharp, screened, and well graded with no grain larger than
will pass a 3/8 inch sieve. Not more than 30 percent by weight shall pass a No. 50 sieve.
2.10 COARSE AGGREGATE
Coarse aggregate shall be washed screened gravel or crushed stone, hard, tough, durable, and
having not more than 5 percent by weight of deleterious substances and soft fragments. Aggre-
gate shall be well graded from the largest which shall pass a 1 1/2 inch mesh to the smallest
which shall pass a 3/8 inch mesh and not over 5 percent passing a 1/4 inch mesh.
2.11 SAMPLES OF AGGREGATE
If required, the Contractor shall submit clearly labeled samples of sand and coarse aggregate to
the Contracting Officer as directed. No aggregates shall be delivered or used before the samples
have been approved and aggregates as delivered shall in all respects be equal to the approved
samples.
2.12 ADJUSTING AND REMODELING OF DRAINAGE STRUCTURES
Existing manhole and catch basin structures to be adjusted or remodeled shall be adjusted and
remodeled in conformance to MDOT Specifications Section 210.
2.13 DRAIN INLET
Area drain shall be a drain basin with PVC body, cast iron grate and water-tight pipe adaptors,
and shall be H-10 rated for pedestrians, and similar load-bearing applications. Water-tight pipe
adaptor shall be gasketed and allow for fitting of specified corrugated polyethylene ADS N-12
drain pipe. The area drain shall be 12” drain basin with standard 12” dia. cast iron perforated
grate by Nyloplast/ADS, Inc., local representative: ADS, Inc., 58 Wyoming Street, Ludlow, MA,
01056, tel. 800-733-3555 or 413-589-0515.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Inspection
1. Prior to all work of this section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades
and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may
properly commence.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES 334100 - 6
2. Verify that storm drainage system may be installed in strict accordance with all perti-
nent codes and regulations, the original design, the referenced standards, and the
manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Discrepancies
1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect.
2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies
have been fully resolved.
3.02 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
Make all necessary measurements in the field to ensure precise fit of items in accordance with
the original design.
3.03 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING
Perform all trenching and backfilling necessary for this portion of the work, strictly conforming to
the requirements for trenching described in Section 312000 of these Specifications.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF PIPING
A. General
Piping shall be installed as indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with the local and
state DPW Standards.
Concrete pipe installation shall conform to Class B, Bedding Condition as specified in the
ACPA Manual.
PVC pipe installation shall conform to NCPA Manual for Figure 8, Class C Bedding Condi-
tion.
B. Approvals
No pipe shall be laid without prior notification of the Architect. Each pipe shall be subject to
inspection by the Architect immediately before it is laid, and defective pipe will be rejected.
Pipe lines shall be laid to the grades and alignment indicated on the drawings. Proper fa-
cilities shall be provided for lowering sections of pipe into trenches.
C. Controls
The grade and alignment of all pipe laid in trenches shall be controlled by batterboards, la-
ser equipment, or parallel offset lines with accurate horizontal and vertical control checkout
points spaced not greater than 25 feet. Grades and lines between points shall be set and
checked with grade and alignment squares. Layout of controls shall be established by a
Registered Professional Engineer or Land Surveyor. Alignment tolerances shall be 1 in
1,000 vertical and 1 in 500 horizontal. Pipe shall be inspected for alignment, and approval
shall be obtained from the Architect before backfilling work commences.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES 334100 - 7
D. Procedure
1. Before being laid, each pipe length shall be inspected and tested to verify that it is
not cracked, permanently dented or deformed. Pipe of the required size shall be laid
to conform to the lines and grades indicated on the drawings or given by the Con-
tracting Officer.
2. Pipe shall be laid with the groove or bell end upstream. Bell shall rest over a shal-
low excavation in pipe bedding to prevent pipe weight from bearing on bell.
3. Each pipe shall be so laid as form a close joint with the next adjoining pipe and bring
the inverts continuously to required grade. Each pipe shall be supported with com-
pacted crushed stone, graded in size from 1/4 inch to 3/4 inch, to obtain a substan-
tially unyielding bed.
4. Unless recommended by the ASTM standards and by the manufacturers of the vari-
ous kinds and types of pipe, the Contractor shall not joint pairs of pipe before laying
them.
5. No pipe or fitting shall be permanently supported on saddles, blocking, or stones.
6. Where a concrete cradle is used, the pipe shall be laid on concrete saddles so con-
structed as to provide lateral support for the pipe while the cradle is being placed.
7. Pipe shall not be backfilled until joints have been fully inspected, and approved.
8. Entire length of pipe shall be thoroughly flushed clean following completion of back-
fill.
9. Lifting holes in concrete pipe shall be at top of pipe as installed. Holes shall be
sealed with precast concrete plugs. Before plugs are installed, entire contact sur-
face between plug and pipe shall be coated with asphalt mastic. Plug shall be driv-
en home before mastic has set up.
3.05 PIPING
Pipe joints shall be made with rubber gaskets, Portland cement mortar, nonshrink grout, or as-
phalt mastic compound.
A. Rubber gasketed joint: Pipe gasket shall be installed using lubricants, cements, adhe-
sives, and other accessories and methods recommended by the gasket manufacturer.
Pipe and gasket surfaces shall be kept clean until pipe has been properly drawn up and
the joint closed. Gaskets and other jointing material shall be placed on the pipe immedi-
ately before joint is made up. Jointing materials shall be inspected and defects repaired
before joint is completed.
B. Portland cement mortared joint: Mortar joint shall be caulked with jute or oakum, and re-
mainder of joint depth filled with cement mortar. Jute or oakum may be omitted if joint
space is completely filled with mortar, and a continuous bead is left around full circumfer-
ence on both inside and outside surfaces of pipe. Pipe surfaces to be in contact with
mortar shall be thoroughly cleaned and well wetted before joint is made. On inside of
pipe, joint shall be left smooth and flush with pipe wall, completely free from obstructions
to flow. Joints shall be protected from sun and wind for a minimum of three days.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES 334100 - 8
1. Placing of mortar in joints shall lag at least five pipe sections behind pipe installa-
tion. Final four joints shall be made up after last pipe section is its final position.
2. Mortar in bell and spigot pipe shall be bevelled off on outside of pipe at a 45 de-
gree angle to barrel. Mortar shall be extended from barrel of one pipe to outer-
most edge of bell of next pipe.
C. Nonshrink grout joint: Joints shall be as specified for Portland cement mortar above, ex-
cept using nonshrink grout.
D. Asphalt mastic joint: Asphalt mastic joint shall be caulked with jute or oakum, and re-
mainder of joint depth filled with asphalt mastic. Jute or oakum may be omitted if joint
space is completely filled with mastic, and a continuous mastic bead is left around full cir-
cumference on both inside and outside surfaces of pipe. Surfaces of pipe to be in con-
tact with asphalt mastic shall be thoroughly clean and dry when mastic is placed in the
joint. Inside of pipe joints shall be left smooth an flush with pipe wall, completely free
from obstruction to flow.
1. Placing of mastic joints shall lag at least five pipe sections behind pipe installa-
tion. Final four joints shall be made up after last pipe section is in final position.
2. Mortar in bell and spigot pipe joints shall be bevelled off on outside of pipe at a
45 degree angle to barrel. Mastic shall extend from barrel of one pipe to outer-
most edge of bell of next pipe.
3.06 CERTIFICATES
Affidavits shall be furnished from the manufacturer of pipe and appurtenances furnished and in-
stalled under this Section, certifying that such materials delivered to the project conform to the re-
quirements of these Specifications.
3.07 TESTING
A. Tests for outside stormwater drainage piping shall be paid for by this Contractor as re-
quested by the Engineer and approved before acceptance. All tests shall be performed af-
ter installation is completed including all backfilling, compaction and cleaning.
B. Leakage
The storm sewers and appurtenant structures shall be made as nearly watertight as practi-
cable and leakage measurements shall be made as directed by the Engineer.
The leakage into the storm sewers, including manholes, constructed under this contract
shall not exceed an average of five hundred (500) gallons per inch diameter in twenty-four
(24) hours per mile of sewer.
Where practicable, the leakage tests shall be made at a time when a head of water can be
maintained at least one (1) foot above the top of the pipe of the highest section of work be-
ing tested.
The Contractor shall construct such weirs of other means of measurement as may be re-
quired and shall do all necessary pumping to enable the tests to be properly made.
Davis Square Architects VILLAGE HILL – NORTH COMMONS 90% Construction Documents
Project No. 17031.00 Lot 13A, Village Hill, Northampton, MA 01060 September 1, 2019
STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES 334100 - 9
Portions of sewers which fail to meet tests shall be repaired and retested as necessary un-
til test requirements are complied with.
END OF SECTION